Outback 2017 Manual Single PDF

Black plate (1,1)
Foreword
Congratulations on choosing a SUBARU vehicle. This Owners
Manual has all the information necessary to keep your SUBARU in
excellent condition and to properly maintain the emission control
system for minimizing emission pollutants. We urge you to read
this manual carefully so that you may understand your vehicle and
its operation. For information not found in this Owners Manual,
such as details concerning repairs or adjustments, please contact
the SUBARU dealer from whom you purchased your SUBARU or
the nearest SUBARU dealer.
The information, specifications and illustrations found in this
manual are those in effect at the time of printing. FUJI HEAVY
INDUSTRIES LTD. reserves the right to change specifications and
designs at any time without prior notice and without incurring any
obligation to make the same or similar changes on vehicles
previously sold. This Owners Manual applies to all models and
covers all equipment, including factory installed options. Some
explanations, therefore may be for equipment not installed in your
vehicle.
Please leave this manual in the vehicle at the time of resale. The
next owner will need the information found herein.
FUJI HEAVY INDUSTRIES LTD., TOKYO, JAPAN
is a registered trademark of FUJI HEAVY INDUSTRIES LTD.

C Copyright 2016 FUJI HEAVY INDUSTRIES LTD.
*
Model "A2530BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 25
Black plate (2,1)
This manual describes the following vehicle types.
1)
2)
Legacy
Outback
Black plate (3,1)
1
Warranties
& Warranties for U.S.A.
SUBARU vehicles distributed by Subaru
of America, Inc. and sold at retail by an
authorized SUBARU dealer in the United
States come with the following warranties:
. SUBARU Limited Warranties
. Federal Emission Control Systems
Warranties
. California Emissions Control Systems Warranties
All warranty information, including applicability, details of coverage and exclusions,
is in the Warranty and Maintenance
Booklet. Read these warranties carefully.
& Warranties for Canada

SUBARU vehicles distributed by Subaru
Canada, Inc. and sold at retail by an
authorized SUBARU dealer in Canada
come with the following warranties:
. SUBARU Limited Warranty
. Emission Control System Warranty
All warranty information, including applicability, details of coverage and exclusions,
is in the Warranty and Service Booklet.
Read these warranties carefully.
& Warranties except for U.S.A.

and Canada
All warranty information, including details
of coverage and exclusions, is in the
Warranty and Maintenance Booklet.
Read these warranties carefully.
How to use this Owners

Manual
& Using your Owners Manual
Before you operate your vehicle, carefully
read this manual. To protect yourself and
extend the service life of your vehicle,
follow the instructions in this manual.
Failure to observe these instructions may
result in serious injury and damage to your
vehicle.
This manual is composed of fourteen
chapters. Each chapter begins with a brief
table of contents, so you can usually tell at
a glance if that chapter contains the
information you want.
Chapter 1: Seat, seatbelt and SRS
airbags
This chapter informs you how to use the
seat and seatbelt and contains precautions for the SRS airbags.
Chapter 2: Keys and doors
This chapter informs you how to operate
the keys, locks and windows.
Chapter 3: Instruments and controls
This chapter informs you about the operation of instrument panel indicators and
how to use the instruments and other
switches.
CONTINUED
Black plate (4,1)
2
Chapter 4: Climate control
the climate control.
Chapter 5: Audio
your audio system.
Chapter 6: Interior equipment
interior equipment.
Chapter 7: Starting and operating
This chapter informs you how to start and
operate your SUBARU.
Chapter 8: Driving tips
This chapter informs you how to drive your
SUBARU in various conditions and explains some safety tips on driving.
Chapter 9: In case of emergency
This chapter informs you what to do if you
have a problem, such as a flat tire or
engine overheating.
Chapter 10: Appearance care
This chapter informs you how to keep your
SUBARU looking good.
Chapter 11: Maintenance and service
This chapter informs you when you need
to take your SUBARU to the dealer for
scheduled maintenance and informs you
how to keep your SUBARU running
properly.
Chapter 12: Specifications

This chapter informs you about the dimensions and capacities of your SUBARU.
Chapter 13: Consumer information and
Reporting safety defects
This chapter informs you about Tire
information, Uniform tire quality grading
standards and Reporting safety defects.
Chapter 14: Index
This is an alphabetical listing of all thats in
this manual. You can use it to quickly find
something you want to read.
For models with EyeSight system:
For details about the EyeSight system,
refer to the Owners Manual supplement
for the EyeSight system.
& Safety warnings
WARNING
A WARNING indicates a situation in
which serious injury or death could
result if the warning is ignored.
CAUTION
A CAUTION indicates a situation in
which injury or damage to your
vehicle, or both, could result if the
caution is ignored.
NOTE
A NOTE gives information or suggestions how to make better use of your
vehicle.
You will find a number of WARNINGs,

CAUTIONs and NOTEs in this manual.
These safety warnings alert you to potential hazards that could result in injury to
you or others.
Please read these safety warnings as well
as all other portions of this manual carefully in order to gain a better understanding of how to use your SUBARU vehicle
safely.
Black plate (5,1)
3
& Safety symbol
& Abbreviation list

You may find several abbreviations in this
manual. The meanings of the abbreviations are shown in the following list.
Abbreviation
You will find a circle with a slash through it

in this manual. This symbol means Do
not, Do not do this, or Do not let this
happen, depending upon the context.
Meaning
Abbreviation
Meaning
LATCH
Lower anchors and tethers for

children
LCA
Lane Change Assist
LED
Light emitting diode
A/C
Air conditioner
LSD
Limited slip differential
ALR/ELR
Automatic locking retractor/

Emergency locking retractor
MIL
Malfunction indicator light
ABS
Anti-lock brake system
MMT
Methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl
AKI
Anti knock index
MT
Manual transmission
ALR
Automatic locking retractor
OBD
On-board diagnostics
AWD
All-wheel drive
RAB
Reverse Automatic Braking
BSD
Blind Spot Detection
RON
Research octane number
CVT
Continuously variable transmission
RCTA
Rear Cross Traffic Alert
DRL
Daytime running light
SRF
Steering responsive fog lights

system
EBD
Electronic brake force distribution
SRS
Supplemental restraint system
ELR
Emergency locking retractor
TIN
Tire identification number
GAW
Gross axle weight
GAWR
Gross axle weight rating
TPMS
Tire pressure monitoring system
GPS
Global positioning system
GVW
Gross vehicle weight
GVWR
Gross vehicle weight rating
HID
High intensity discharge
INT
Intermittent
Black plate (6,1)
4
Vehicle symbols
There are some of the symbols you may
see on your vehicle.
For warning and indicator lights, refer to
Warning and indicator lights F25.
Mark
Name
WARNING
CAUTION
Read these instructions carefully
Wear eye protection
Battery fluid contains sulfuric
acid
Keep children away
Keep flames away
Prevent explosions
Safety precautions when

driving
& Seatbelt and SRS airbag
WARNING
. All persons in the vehicle should
fasten their seatbelts BEFORE
the vehicle starts to move. Otherwise, the possibility of serious
injury becomes greater in the
event of a sudden stop or accident.
. To obtain maximum protection in
the event of an accident, the
driver and all passengers must
always wear seatbelts when in
the vehicle. The SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) airbag
does not do away with the need
to fasten seatbelts. In combination with the seatbelts, it offers
the best combined protection in
case of a serious accident.
Not wearing a seatbelt increases
the chance of severe injury or
death in a crash even when the
vehicle has the SRS airbag.
. The SRS airbags deploy with

considerable speed and force.
Occupants who are out of proper
position when the SRS airbag
deploys could suffer very serious
injuries. Because the SRS airbag
needs enough space for deployment, the driver should always
sit upright and well back in the
seat as far from the steering
wheel as practical while still
maintaining full vehicle control
and the front passenger should
move the seat as far back as
possible and sit upright and well
back in the seat.
For instructions and precautions, carefully
read the following sections.
. For the seatbelt system, refer to Seatbelts F1-16.
. For the SRS airbag system, refer to
*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint
System airbag) F1-41.
Black plate (7,1)
5
& Child safety
WARNING
. Never hold a child on your lap or
in your arms while the vehicle is
moving. The passenger cannot
protect the child from injury in a
collision, because the child will
be caught between the passenger and objects inside the vehicle.
. While riding in the vehicle, infants and small children should
always be placed in the REAR
seat in an infant or child restraint
system which is appropriate for
the childs age, height and
weight. If a child is too big for a
child restraint system, the child
should sit in the REAR seat and
be restrained using the seatbelts.
According to accident statistics,
children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seating
positions than in the front seating positions. Never allow a child
to stand up or kneel on the seat.
. Put children in the REAR seat
properly restrained at all times in
a child restraint device or in a
seatbelt. The SRS airbag deploys
with considerable speed and

force and can injure or even kill
children, especially if they are
not restrained or improperly restrained. Because children are
lighter and weaker than adults,
their risk of being injured from
deployment is greater.
NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD
FACING CHILD SAFETY SEAT IN
THE FRONT SEAT. DOING SO
RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR
DEATH TO THE CHILD BY PLACING THE CHILDS HEAD TOO
CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.
Always turn the child safety locks
to the LOCK position whenever
a child rides in the rear seat.
Serious injury could result if a
child accidentally opened the
door and fell out. Refer to Child
safety locks F2-34.
Always lock the passengers windows using the lock switch when
children are riding in the vehicle.
Failure to follow this procedure
could result in injury to a child
operating the power window. Refer to Windows F2-34.
Never leave unattended children,
adults or animals in the vehicle.
They could accidentally injure

themselves or others through
inadvertent operation of the vehicle. Also, on hot or sunny days,
the temperature in a closed vehicle could quickly become high
enough to cause severe or possibly fatal injuries.
. Help prevent children, adults or
animals from locking themselves
in the trunk. On hot or sunny
days, the temperature in the
trunk could quickly become high
enough to cause death or serious
heat-related injuries including
brain damage to anyone locked
inside, particularly for small children.
. When leaving the vehicle, close
all windows and lock all doors.
Also make certain that the trunk
is closed.
For instructions and precautions, carefully
read the following sections.
. For the seatbelt system, refer to Seatbelts F1-16.
. For the child restraint system, refer to
Child restraint systems F1-27.
. For the SRS airbag system, refer to
CONTINUED
Black plate (8,1)
6
System airbag) F1-41.
& Engine exhaust gas (carbon

monoxide)
WARNING
. Never inhale engine exhaust gas.
Engine exhaust gas contains
carbon monoxide, a colorless
and odorless gas which is dangerous, or even lethal, if inhaled.
. Always properly maintain the engine exhaust system to prevent
engine exhaust gas from entering the vehicle.
. Never run the engine in a closed
space, such as a garage, except
for the brief time needed to drive
the vehicle in or out of it.
. Avoid remaining in a parked
vehicle for a long time while the
engine is running. If that is
unavoidable, then use the ventilation fan to force fresh air into
the vehicle.
. Always keep the front ventilator
inlet grille free from snow, leaves
or other obstructions to ensure
that the ventilation system always works properly.
. If at any time you suspect that

exhaust fumes are entering the
vehicle, have the problem
checked and corrected as soon
as possible. If you must drive
under these conditions, drive
only with all windows fully open.
. Keep the trunk lid or rear gate
closed while driving to prevent
exhaust gas from entering the
vehicle.
& Drinking and driving

WARNING
Drinking and then driving is very
dangerous. Alcohol in the bloodstream delays your reaction and
impairs your perception, judgment
and attentiveness. If you drive after
drinking even if you drink just a
little it will increase the risk of
being involved in a serious or fatal
accident, injuring or killing yourself,
your passengers and others. In
addition, if you are injured in the
accident, alcohol may increase the
severity of that injury.
Please dont drink and drive.

Drunken driving is one of the most
frequent causes of accidents. Since alcohol affects all people differently, you may
have consumed too much alcohol to drive
safely even if the level of alcohol in your
blood is below the legal limit. The safest
thing you can do is never drink and drive.
However if you have no choice but to
drive, stop drinking and sober up completely before getting behind the wheel.
& Drugs and driving

WARNING
There are some drugs (over the
counter and prescription) that can
delay your reaction time and impair
your perception, judgment and attentiveness. If you drive after taking
them, it may increase your, your
passengers and other persons risk
of being involved in a serious or
fatal accident.
If you are taking any drugs, check with
your doctor or pharmacist or read the
literature that accompanies the medication
to determine if the drug you are taking can
impair your driving ability. Do not drive
Black plate (9,1)
7
after taking any medications that can
make you drowsy or otherwise affect your
ability to safely operate a motor vehicle. If
you have a medical condition that requires
you to take drugs, please consult with
your doctor.
Never drive if you are under the influence
of any illicit mind-altering drugs. For your
own health and well-being, we urge you
not to take illegal drugs in the first place
and to seek treatment if you are addicted
to those drugs.
& Driving when tired or sleepy

WARNING
When you are tired or sleepy, your
reaction will be delayed and your
perception, judgment and attentiveness will be impaired. If you drive
when tired or sleepy, your, your
passengers and other persons
chances of being involved in a
serious accident may increase.
Please do not continue to drive but
instead find a safe place to rest if you
are tired or sleepy. On long trips, you
should make periodic rest stops to refresh
yourself before continuing on your journey.
When possible, you should share the
driving with others.
& Car phone/cell phone and

driving
CAUTION
Do not use a car phone/cell phone
while driving; it may distract your
attention from driving and can lead
to an accident. If you use a car
phone/cell phone, pull off the road
and park in a safe place before
using your phone. In some States/
Provinces, only hands-free phones
may legally be used while driving.
& Modification of your vehicle

CAUTION
Your vehicle should not be modified
other than with genuine SUBARU
parts and accessories. Other types
of modifications could affect its
performance, safety or durability,
and may even violate governmental
regulations. In addition, damage or
performance problems resulting
from modification may not be covered under warranties.
& Driving with pets

Unrestrained pets can interfere with your
driving and distract your attention from
driving. In a collision or sudden stop,
unrestrained pets or cages can be thrown
around inside the vehicle and hurt you or
your passengers. Besides, the pets can
be hurt under these situations. It is also for
their own safety that pets should be
properly restrained in your vehicle. Restrain a pet with a special traveling
harness which can be secured to the rear
seat with a seatbelt or use a pet carrier
which can be secured to the rear seat by
routing a seatbelt through the carriers
handle. Never restrain pets or pet carriers
CONTINUED
Black plate (10,1)
8
in the front passengers seat. For further
information, consult your veterinarian,
local animal protection society or pet
shop.
& Tire pressures

WARNING
Driving at high speeds with excessively low tire pressures can cause
the tires to deform severely and to
rapidly become hot. A sharp increase in temperature could cause
tread separation, and destruction of
the tires. The resulting loss of
vehicle control could lead to an
accident.
Check and, if necessary, adjust the
pressure of each tire (including the spare)
at least once a month and before any long
journey.
Check the tire pressure when the tires are
cold. Use a pressure gauge to adjust the
tire pressures to the values shown on the
tire placard. For detailed information, refer
to Tires and wheels F11-25.
& Attaching accessories

WARNING
. Do not attach any accessories,
labels or stickers (other than
properly placed inspection stickers) to the windshield. Such
items may obstruct your view.
. If it is necessary to attach an
accessory (such as an electronic
toll collection (ETC) device or
security pass) to the windshield,
consult your SUBARU dealer for
details on the proper location.
General information
& California proposition 65
warning
WARNING
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals
known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or
other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids in vehicles and
certain components of product wear
contain or emit chemicals known to
the State of California to cause
cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm.
& California Perchlorate Advisory

Certain vehicle components such as airbag modules, seatbelt pretensioners and
keyless entry transmitter batteries may
contain perchlorate material. Special
handling may apply for service or vehicle
end of life disposal. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/
hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
Black plate (11,1)
9
& Noise from under the vehicle
NOTE
pedal; and,
. How fast the vehicle was traveling.
You may hear a noise from under the

vehicle approximately 5 to 10 hours
after the engine is turned off. However,
this does not indicate a malfunction.
This noise is caused by the operation
of the fuel evaporation leakage checking system and the operation is normal.
The noise will stop after approximately
15 minutes.
These data can help provide a better

understanding of the circumstances in
which crashes and injuries occur. NOTE:
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle
only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs;
no data are recorded by the EDR under
normal driving conditions and no personal
data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash
location) are recorded. However, other
parties, such as law enforcement, could
combine the EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.
& Event data recorder

This vehicle is equipped with an event
data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of
an EDR is to record, in certain crash or
near crash-like situations, such as an air
bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle,
data that will assist in understanding how
a vehicles systems performed. The EDR
is designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for
a short period of time, typically 30 seconds
or less. The EDR in this vehicle is
designed to record such data as:
. How various systems in your vehicle
were operating;
. Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened;
. How far (if at all) the driver was
depressing the accelerator and/or brake
To read data recorded by an EDR, special

equipment is required, and access to the
vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition
to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,
such as law enforcement, that have the
special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or
the EDR.
Black plate (2,1)
Left Page
Model "ALL_MODEL_MEMO" EDITED: 2007/ 6/ 22
Black plate (1,1)
Table of contents
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
Keys and doors
Instruments and controls
Climate control
Audio
Interior equipment
Starting and operating
Driving tips
In case of emergency
Appearance care
10
Maintenance and service
11
Specifications
12
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
13
Index
14
Model "A2530BE-B" Edited: 2016/ 7/ 25
Black plate (14,1)
12
Illustrated index
& Exterior
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
10)
11)
12)
13)
Engine hood (page 11-7)

Headlight (page 3-47)
Bulb replacement (page 11-40)
Front wiper (page 3-59)
Moonroof (page 2-48)
Roof rail with integrated crossbars and
rope hook (page 8-15)
Door locks (page 2-6)
Outside mirrors (page 3-81)
Tire pressure (page 11-27)
Flat tires (page 9-5)
Fog light (page 3-56)
Tie-down hooks (page 9-14)
Towing hook (Outback) (page 9-14)
Black plate (15,1)
13
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
Rear window defogger (page 3-61)

Fuel filler lid and cap (page 7-4)
Child safety locks (page 2-34)
Towing hook (page 9-14)
Trunk lid (page 2-38)
Rear wiper (page 3-60)
Rear gate (page 2-41)
Bulb replacement (page 11-44)
Tie-down holes (page 9-14)
CONTINUED
Black plate (16,1)
14
& Interior
1)
! Passenger compartment area
2)
3)
4)
5)
Lower anchorages for child restraint

system (page 1-36)
Seatbelt (page 1-16)
Center console (page 6-6)
Front seat (page 1-2)
Rear seat (page 1-11)
Black plate (17,1)
15
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
Select lever (page 7-26)

Climate control (page 4-1)
Audio (page 5-1)/Navigation system (Refer to the Owners Manual supplement for
the navigation system)
Glove box (page 6-6)
Accessory power outlet (page 6-10)
Cup holder (page 6-8)
Electronic parking brake switch
(page 7-43)
X-mode switch (page 7-39)
Hill Holder switch (page 7-46)
CVT models
CONTINUED
Black plate (18,1)
16
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
Shift lever (page 7-23)

Audio (page 5-1)/Navigation system (Refer to the Owners Manual supplement for
Glove box (page 6-6)
Accessory power outlet (page 6-10)
Cup holder (page 6-8)
Electronic parking brake switch
(page 7-43)
Hill Holder switch (page 7-46)
MT models
Black plate (19,1)
17
1)
Buttons for SUBARU STARLINK
NOTE
For detai ls about the SUBARU
STARLINK (U.S.-spec. models only, if
equipped), refer to the Owners Manual
supplement for the SUBARU
STARLINK.
CONTINUED
Black plate (20,1)
18
& Instrument panel
1)
2)
3)
4)
14)
Power windows (page 2-34)

Remote control mirror switch (page 3-82)
Combination meter (page 3-8)
Audio (page 5-1/Navigation system (Refer to the Owners Manual supplement for
Hazard warning flasher switch (page 3-8)
Seat heater switch (page 1-9)
Memory switch for power rear gate
(page 2-45)
Illumination brightness control dial
(page 3-55)
Power rear gate switch (page 2-42)/
Trunk lid opener switch (page 2-39)
BSD/RCTA OFF switch (page 7-60)
Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF switch
(page 7-37)
Steering responsive fog light off switch
(page 3-56)
Hood lock release knob (page 11-7)
A:
B:
Models without EyeSight system

Models with EyeSight system
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
10)
11)
12)
13)
NOTE
For details about the EyeSight system,
refer to the Owners Manual supplement for the EyeSight system.
Black plate (21,1)
19
& Steering wheel
1)
2)
Audio control switches (page 5-63)

Talk switch for voice command system
(page 5-81)
3) Cruise control (page 7-50)
4) Shift paddle (page 7-29)
5) Tilt/telescopic lock lever (page 3-82)
6) Hands-free phone switches (page 5-73)
7) Multi information display control switches
(page 3-36)
8) SRS airbag (page 1-41)
9) Horn (page 3-83)
10) Heated steering wheel switch
(page 3-83)
CONTINUED
Black plate (22,1)
20
& Light control and wiper control levers/switches
1)
2)
3)
4)
Windshield wiper (page 3-57)

Mist (page 3-59)
Windshield washer (page 3-59)
Rear window wiper and washer switch
(page 3-60)
5) Wiper intermittent time control switch
(page 3-59)
6) Wiper control lever (page 3-59)
7) Light control switch (page 3-46)
8) Front fog light switch (page 3-56)
9) Headlight ON/OFF/AUTO (page 3-47)
10) Headlight flasher High/Low beam
change (page 3-49)
11) Turn signal lever (page 3-54)
Black plate (23,1)
21
& Combination meter
! U.S. spec. models (type A)
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
Tachometer (page 3-10)

ECO gauge (page 3-12)
Speedometer (page 3-9)
Temperature gauge (page 3-12)
Select lever/gear position indicator
(page 3-31)
Trip meter and odometer (page 3-9)
Fuel gauge (page 3-11)
CONTINUED
Black plate (24,1)
22
! U.S. spec. models (type B)
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)

(page 3-31)
Black plate (25,1)
23
! Except U.S. spec. models (type A)
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)

(page 3-31)
CONTINUED
Black plate (26,1)
24
! Except U.S. spec. models (type B)
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)

(page 3-31)
Black plate (27,1)
25
& Warning and indicator lights
Mark
Name
Seatbelt warning light
Page
3-13
Front passengers
seatbelt warning light
3-13
SRS airbag system

warning light
3-15
CHECK ENGINE warning light/Malfunction indicator light
3-16
Charge warning light
3-16
Oil pressure warning

light
Engine low oil level
warning indicator
AT OIL TEMP warning
light (CVT models)
/
ABS warning light
Brake system warning

light
3-16
3-17
3-17
3-19
Mark
/
Name
Page
Mark
Name
Page
Electronic parking
brake indicator light
3-21
High beam indicator

light
3-31
Hill Holder indicator

light
3-22
High beam assist indicator (green)
3-31
Door open indicator
3-23
High beam assist

warning indicator
(yellow)
3-31
Low fuel warning light
3-22
Automatic headlight
beam leveler warning
light (if equipped)
3-32
All-Wheel Drive warning light (CVT models)
3-23
Front fog light indicator

light (if equipped)
3-32
Power steering warning

light
3-23
Cruise control indicator
3-31
Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light/Vehicle Dynamics Control

operation indicator light
3-24
Cruise control set indicator
3-32
Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indicator light
3-25
X-mode indicator (if

equipped)
3-32
Access key warning indicator (if equipped)
3-25
Hill descent control indicator (if equipped)
3-32
Security indicator light
3-30
Headlight indicator light
3-32
Low tire pressure

warning light (U.S.
spec. models)
3-17
3-19
Turn signal indicator
lights
3-31
CONTINUED
Black plate (28,1)
26
Mark
Name
Page
Front passengers frontal airbag ON indicator

light
3-15
Front passengers frontal airbag OFF indicator

light
3-15
Windshield washer fluid

warning indicator
3-23
Steering responsive fog

lights OFF indicator (if
equipped)
3-32
BSD/RCTA warning indicator (if equipped)
3-32
BSD/RCTA OFF indicator (if equipped)
3-32
Icy road surface warning indicator
3-32
RAB warning indicator

(if equipped)
3-33
RAB OFF indicator (if

equipped)
3-33
Sonar audible alarm

OFF indicator (if
equipped)
3-33
Black plate (29,1)
27
Function settings
A SUBARU dealer can change the settings of the functions shown in the following table to meet your personal requirements. Contact
the nearest SUBARU dealer for details. Furthermore, some useful function settings are available using the multi information display.
For details, refer to Menu screens F3-41.
Item
Function
Possible settings
Default setting
Alarm system
Alarm system
Operation/Non-operation
Operation
2-29
Monitoring start delay time

(after closing doors)
0 seconds/30 seconds
30 seconds
2-30
Impact sensor operation (only Operation/Non-operation

models with shock sensors
(dealer option))
Non-operation
2-33
Map light/Dome light/Cargo

area light illumination
OFF
2-29
ON/OFF
ON
2-18, 2-47, 3-45
Level 1 to 7
Level 5
2-18, 3-25, 3-45
ON/OFF
Keyless access with pushbutton start system *1
Audible signal
*2
Audible signal volume
*3
Hazard warning flasher
ON
2-18, 3-45
Door unlock selection (drivers Drivers door only/All doors

door unlock)
Drivers door only
2-18, 3-45
Door unlock selection (rear

gate unlock)
Rear gate only, All doors
Rear gate only
ON/OFF
ON
Remote keyless entry system Audible signal
*2
*3
2-25, 2-27,
2-47, 3-45
Level 1 to 7
Level 5
2-25, 2-27, 3-45
ON/OFF
ON
2-25, 2-27, 3-45
Key lock-in prevention
Operation
2-9
Audible signal volume

Key lock-in prevention
ON/OFF
Page
CONTINUED
Black plate (30,1)
28
Item
Function
Possible settings
Default setting
Page
Defogger and deicer system
Rear window defogger, outside mirror defogger and

windshield wiper deicer
Operation for 15 minutes/

Continuous operation
Operation for 15 minutes
3-61, 3-45
Map light/Dome light/Cargo

area light
Operation of map light/dome OFF/Short/Normal/Long

light/cargo area light OFF delay timer
Long
6-4, 3-45
Battery drainage prevention

function
Battery drainage prevention

function
Operation
2-8
Auto on/off headlights
Sensitivity of the operation of

the auto on/off headlights
Min/Low/Mid/Max
Mid
3-47, 3-46
Windshield wiper
Automatic headlight turn on

function that is linked with
wiper operation
Operation
3-47, 3-46
Auto dimmer cancel
Sensitivity of the operation of

the auto dimmer cancel
OFF/Min/Low/Mid/Hi/Max
Mid
3-55
Welcome lighting function

(when approaching)
OFF/30 seconds/60 seconds/ 30 seconds

90 seconds

(when exiting)
OFF/30 seconds/60 seconds/ 30 seconds

90 seconds
High beam assist function
High beam assist function*1
3-46, 3-48
Operation
3-49
Reverse gear interlocked rear Reverse gear interlocked rear Operation/Non-operation

wiper
wiper operation
U.S.-spec. models: Non-operation

Other models: Operation
3-60
One-touch lane changer
Operation
3-55
Operation of the one-touch

lane changer
*1: If equipped
*2: This setting also works as the ON/OFF setting of the power rear gate buzzer for starting operation. However, you cannot change the warning buzzer
setting for a detecting jam, etc.
*3: The audible signal volume cannot be set under level 5 for the warning chime.
Black plate (1,1)
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

Front seats...........................................................
1-2
Manual seat (if equipped) ....................................

Power seat (if equipped) ......................................
Head restraint adjustment....................................
1-4
1-5
1-8
Seat heater (if equipped) ....................................
1-9
Front seat heater (if equipped) ............................

Rear seat heater (if equipped) .............................
1-10
1-10
Rear seats...........................................................
1-11
Reclining the seatback (Outback)........................

Folding down the rear seatback ..........................
Head restraint adjustment...................................
Armrest .............................................................
1-11
1-12
1-14
1-15
Seatbelts .............................................................
1-16
Seatbelt safety tips.............................................

Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) ...................
Automatic Locking Retractor/Emergency Locking
Retractor (ALR/ELR) .........................................
Seatbelt warning light and chime ........................
Fastening the seatbelt ........................................
Seatbelt maintenance .........................................
1-16
1-17
Front seatbelt pretensioners .............................
1-24
System monitors ................................................

System servicing................................................
1-26
1-26
1-17
1-17
1-17
1-24
Precautions against vehicle modification ............
1-27
Child restraint systems .....................................
1-27
Where to place a child restraint system ..............

Choosing a child restraint system ......................
Installing child restraint systems with ALR/ELR
seatbelt ...........................................................
Installing a booster seat.....................................
Installation of child restraint systems by use of
lower and tether anchorages (LATCH) ..............
Top tether anchorages .......................................
1-28
1-30

System airbag)................................................
General precautions regarding SRS airbag
system ............................................................
Components ......................................................
SUBARU advanced frontal airbag system, SRS
seat cushion airbag, SRS side airbag and SRS
curtain airbag ..................................................
System operation...............................................
SRS airbag system monitors..............................
SRS airbag system servicing .............................
Precautions against vehicle modification ............
1-30
1-34
1-36
1-39
1-41
1-42
1-48
1-51
1-56
1-68
1-69
1-70
Black plate (34,1)
1-2
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Front seats
Front seats
WARNING
. Never adjust the seat while driving to avoid loss of vehicle control and personal injury.
. Before adjusting the seat, make
sure the hands and feet of rear
seat passengers or cargo are
clear of the adjusting mechanism.
. After adjusting the seat, push it
slightly to make sure it is securely locked. If the seat is not
securely locked, it may move or
the seatbelt may not operate
properly.
. Do not put objects under the front
seats. They may interfere with
front seat locking and cause an
accident.
. Seatbelts provide maximum restraint when the occupant sits
well back and upright in the seat.
To reduce the risk of sliding
under the seatbelt in a collision,
the front seatbacks should be
always used in the upright position while the vehicle is running.
If the front seatbacks are not
used in the upright position in a

collision, the risk of sliding under
the lap belt and of the lap belt
sliding up over the abdomen will
increase, and both can result in
serious internal injury or death.
Occupants who are not in the
proper position when the SRS
airbag deploys could suffer very
serious injuries. Because the
SRS airbag needs enough space
for deployment, the driver should
always sit upright and well back
in the seat as far from the steering wheel as practical while still
back in the seat.
WARNING
Put children in the rear seat properly
restrained at all times. The SRS
airbag deploys with considerable
speed and force and can injure or
even kill children, especially if they
are not restrained or improperly
restrained. Because children are
lighter and weaker than adults, their
risk of being injured from deployment is greater. Consequently, we
strongly recommend that ALL children (including those in child seats
and those that have outgrown child
restraint devices) sit in the REAR
seat properly restrained at all times
in a child restraint device or in a
seatbelt, whichever is appropriate
Black plate (35,1)
for the childs age, height and

weight.
Secure ALL types of child restraint
devices (including forward facing
child seats) in the REAR seats at
all times.
NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FACING CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONT
SEAT. DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS
INJURY OR DEATH TO THE CHILD
BY PLACING THE CHILDS HEAD
TOO CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.
restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating positions. For instructions and precautions concerning child restraint systems, refer to Child restraint systems F1-27.
1-3
1
WARNING
To prevent the passenger from sliding under the seatbelt in the event of
a collision, always put the seatback
in the upright position while the
vehicle is in motion. Also, do not
place objects such as cushions
between the passenger and the
seatback. If you do so, the risk of
sliding under the lap belt and of the
lap belt sliding up over the abdomen
will increase, and both can result in
WARNING
Do not let rear passengers rest their
feet between the front seatback and
seat cushion. Doing so may lead to
improper operation of the following
systems and could result in serious
injury.
. Occupant detection system
. SRS side airbag
. SRS seat cushion airbag
. Front seat heater (if equipped)
. Power seat (if equipped)
CONTINUED
Black plate (36,1)
1-4
& Manual seat (if equipped)
! Reclining the seatback
! Forward and backward adjustment
1. Sit in the seat to adjust.

2. Pull the lever upward, slide the seat to
the desired position, and then release the
lever.
3. Try to move the seat back and forth to
make sure that it is securely locked into
place.
1. Pull up the reclining lever, adjust the

seatback to the desired position, and then
release the lever.
2. Make sure the seatback is securely
locked into place.
The seatback placed in a reclined position
can spring back upward with force when
pulling up the lever. While operating the
lever to return the seatback, hold the
seatback lightly so that it may be raised
back gradually.
! Seat cushion height adjustment

(drivers seat)
1)
2)
Push the lever down to lower the seat.

Pull the lever up to raise the seat.
You can adjust the height of the seat by

moving the seat cushion adjustment lever
up or down.
Black plate (37,1)
& Power seat (if equipped)

! Drivers seat
2)
3)
4)
5)
backward. During forward/backward adjustment of the seat, you cannot adjust

the seat cushion angle or seat cushion
height.
Seat cushion angle control switch
To adjust the seat cushion angle, pull up
or push down the front end of the control
switch.
Seat height control switch
To adjust the seat height, pull up or push
down the rear end of the control switch.
Seatback angle (reclining) control
switch
To adjust the angle of the seatback,
move the control switch.
Lumbar support control switch
To increase lower back support, push the
front side of the switch. To decrease
lower back support, push the rear side of
the switch.
! Front passengers seat (if

equipped)
1)
2)
1)
1-5
Seat position forward/backward control switch

To adjust the seat forward or backward,
move the control switch forward or
backward.
Seatback angle (reclining) control
switch
To adjust the angle of the seatback,
move the control switch.
Seat position forward/backward control switch

To adjust the seat forward or backward,
move the control switch forward or
CONTINUED
Black plate (38,1)
1-6
! Memory function (drivers seat if

equipped)
WARNING
. To avoid loss of vehicle control or
personal injury, never perform
the following operations while
driving.
Adjusting the seat
Retrieving the seat position
. Before adjusting the seat, make
sure that cargo or the hands and
feet of rear seat passengers are
clear of the adjusting mechanism.
. Perform the seat position retrieval before driving. Be sure to
confirm that the select lever is
in the P position, and the
parking brake is applied, when
adjusting the seat position. Do
not drive until the retrieval of the
seat position is complete.
. When retrieving a registered seat
position, make sure the hands,
feet and possessions of rear seat
passengers are clear of the seat
adjusting mechanism.
. When any unusual conditions or
malfunctions occur during the
retrieval of the seat position, stop

the retrieval of the seat position
by performing any of the following procedures.
Operate any of the power seat
switches
Press the SET button
Press button 1 or 2
Some of your desired seat positions can
be registered. Register the seat position
with button 1 or 2 or each of the access
keys and retrieve the seat position.
The following seat positions can be
registered.
. Forward/backward position of the seat
. Angle of seatback
. Angle of seat cushion
. Height of seat
! Registration of seat position with
button 1 or 2
1. Adjust the seat position under the
following conditions.
. The parking brake is applied.
. The select lever is in the P position.
2. While pressing the SET button, press

and hold the desired button 1 or 2.
A chirp sounds once, and the seat position
is registered.
! Registration of seat position with
each access key
1. Adjust the seat position under the
. The parking brake is applied.
. The ignition switch is in the LOCK/
OFF position.
Black plate (39,1)
1-7
seat position can be retrieved even if

the ignition switch is in the LOCK or
OFF position.
! Retrieval of the seat position
registered with access key
1. Hold the registered access key.
2. While holding the access key and

pressing the SET button, press the
button of the access key.
A chirp sounds once, and the seat position
is registered.
! Retrieval of seat position registered with button 1 or 2
WARNING
Be sure to press the correct button
to retrieve your registered seat
position. If the seat position is not
optimum for you, it may adversely
affect your driving and may reduce
the effectiveness of the seatbelt.
That could result in an accident
involving serious injury or death.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON

position.
2. While the select lever is in the P
position and the parking brake is applied,
press button 1 or 2.
A chirp sounds and the seat moves to the
registered position. When the seat moves
to the registered position, a chirp will
sound.
NOTE
. If a new position is registered for the
same button, the previously registered
seat position is deleted.
. If the vehicle battery is removed, the
registered seat position is not deleted.
. When the button 1 or 2 is
pressed within 45 seconds after the
drivers door is opened, the registered
2. Unlock the drivers door by pressing

the button or gripping the door handle.
3. Open the drivers door.
A chirp sounds and the seat moves to the
registered position. When the seat moves
to the registered position, a chirp will
sound.
CONTINUED
Black plate (40,1)
1-8
NOTE
. If the registered seat position cannot
be retrieved after performing the previous procedures, try the following
procedures.
(1) Press the SET button on the
drivers door.
(2) Press the button on the
access key or touch the door lock
sensor to lock the doors.
(3) Perform the prior procedures
again.
. If the keyless access function is
disabled, the seat position cannot be
retrieved by gripping the drivers door
handle. However, the seat position can
still be retrieved by pressing the
button on the access key. For information about how to enable/disable the
keyless access function, refer to Disabling keyless access function F2-18.
. If a new position is registered for the
same access key, the previously registered seat position is deleted.
! Clearing the registered seat
position with access key
1. Close the drivers door.
2. While holding the access key and
pressing the SET button, press the
button on the access key.
A chirp will sound, and the registered seat

position will be cleared.
! Head restraint height adjustment
& Head restraint adjustment

WARNING
. Never drive the vehicle with the
head restraints removed because
they are designed to reduce the
risk of serious neck injury in the
event that the vehicle is struck
from the rear. Also, never install
the head restraints the opposite
way around. Doing so will prevent the head restraints from
functioning as intended. Therefore, when you remove the head
restraints, you must reinstall all
head restraints correctly to protect vehicle occupants.
. All occupants, including the driver, should not operate a vehicle
or sit in a vehicles seat until the
head restraints are placed in their
proper positions in order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the
event of a crash.
Both the drivers seat and front passengers seat are equipped with head restraints. Both head restraints are adjustable in the following ways.
1)
2)
Head restraint
Release button
To raise:
Pull the head restraint up.
To lower:
Push the head restraint down while
pressing the release button on the top of
the seatback.
To remove:
While pressing the release button, pull out
the head restraint.
To install:
Install the head restraint into the holes that
are located on the top of the seatback until
the head restraint locks. Press and hold
the release button to lower the head
restraint.
Black plate (41,1)
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Seat heater
ing a suitable driving posture, adjust the

head restraint to a position where the back
of your head is as close to the head
restraint as possible.
Each head restraint should be adjusted so

that the center of the head restraint is
closest to the top of the occupants ears.
! Head restraint angle adjustment
To tilt:
Tilt the head restraint by hand to the
preferred position. A click will be audible
when the head restraint is locked.
To return:
Tilt the head restraint once as far forward
as it can go. The head restraint will
automatically return to the fully upright
position. Then, adjust the head restraint
again to the preferred angle.
1-9
Seat heater (if equipped)

The seat heater operates when the ignition switch is in the ON position.
CAUTION
. People with delicate skin may
suffer slight burns even at low
temperatures if they use the seat
heater for a long period of time.
When using the heater, always be
sure to warn the persons concerned.
. Do not put anything on the seat
which insulates against heat,
such as a blanket, cushion, or
similar items. This may cause the
seat heater to overheat.
. When the seat is warmed enough
or before you leave the vehicle,
be sure to turn off the seat heater.
NOTE
Use of the seat heater for a long period
of time while the engine is not running
can cause battery discharge.
The angle of the head restraint can be
adjusted in several steps. While maintain CONTINUED
Black plate (42,1)
1-10
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Seat heater
& Front seat heater (if

equipped)
indicators illuminate. When HIGH mode is

selected, all 3 LOW, MID and HIGH mode
indicators illuminate. When the OFF mode
is selected, all the indicators turn off.
Selecting HIGH mode will cause the seat
to heat up quicker.
& Rear seat heater (if equipped)
When LOW mode is selected, the LOW

mode indicator on the rear seat heater
switch illuminates. When HIGH mode is
selected, both the LOW and HIGH mode
indicators illuminate. When the OFF mode
is selected, all the indicators turn off.
Selecting HIGH mode will cause the seat
to heat up quicker.
NOTE
Only the front seat heater switches
retain the previous switch position
even if the vehicle has restarted. The
rear seat switch will reset.
Front seat heater switch

1) HIGH mode indicator
2) MID mode indicator
3) LOW mode indicator
A) Drivers side
B) Front passengers side
Press the front seat heater switch. Each

time you press the switch, the mode will
change as follows.
When LOW mode

mode indicator on
switch illuminates.
selected, both the
is selected, the LOW

the front seat heater
When MID mode is
LOW and MID mode
Rear seat heater switch

1) HIGH mode indicator
2) LOW mode indicator
A) Drivers side
B) Front passengers side
Press the rear seat heater switch. Each

time you press the switch, the mode will
change as follows.
Black plate (43,1)
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Rear seats
1-11
& Reclining the seatback

(Outback)
Rear seats
WARNING
WARNING
Seatbelts provide maximum restraint when the occupant sits well
back and upright in the seat. Do not
put cushions or any other materials
between occupants and seatbacks
or seat cushions. If you do so, the
risk of sliding under the lap belt and
of the lap belt sliding up over the
abdomen will increase, and both can
result in serious internal injury or
death.
Never stack luggage or other cargo

higher than the top of the seatback
because it could tumble forward and
injure passengers in the event of a
sudden stop or accident.
WARNING
To prevent the passenger from sliding under the seatbelt in the event of
a collision, always put the seatback
in the upright position while the
vehicle is in motion.
CAUTION
If the vehicle is equipped with a
cargo area cover, observe the following precautions.
. Be careful not to pinch your hand
between the headrest and the
CONTINUED
Black plate (44,1)
1-12
cargo area cover when you recline the rear seat.

. Move the front cover of the cargo
area cover backward so that the
cover is not damaged by the
reclined seatback. Refer to Cargo area cover (Outback if
equipped) F6-15.
Adjust the seatback to the desired position

while pulling the lever.
After adjusting the seatback, release the
lever and make sure the seatback is
securely locked into place.
& Folding down the rear seatback

WARNING
. When you fold down the seatback, check that there are no
passengers or objects on the
rear seat. Not doing so creates
a risk of injury or property damage if the seatback suddenly
folds down.
. Never allow passengers to ride
on the folded rear seatback or in
the cargo area or trunk. Doing so
may result in serious injury or
death.
. Secure all objects and especially
long items properly to prevent
them from being thrown around
inside the vehicle and causing
serious injury during a sudden
stop, a sudden steering maneuver or a rapid acceleration.
. When you return the seatback to
its original position, shake the
seatback slightly to confirm that
it is securely fixed in place. If the
seatback is not securely fixed in
place, the seatback may suddenly fold down in the event of
sudden braking, or objects may
move out from the cargo area,

which could cause serious injury
or death.
. After returning the rear seat to its
original position, be certain to
place all of the seatbelts and the
tab attached to the seat cushion
above the seat cushion. Also,
make certain that the shoulder
belts are fully visible.
CAUTION
The rear seatback may fold down
quickly due to the internal spring.
Hold the seatback while pulling the
release lever to slow it down.
! Legacy
To fold down the seatback, perform the
following procedure.
1. Open the trunk lid. Refer to Opening
the trunk lid (Legacy) F2-25, Opening
the trunk lid (Legacy) F2-27 or To open
the trunk lid from inside F2-39.
Black plate (45,1)
! Outback
1-13
the seatback down.

. Push the release button
. Pull the release lever
To return the seatback to its original
position, raise the seatback until it locks
into place. Make sure that it is securely
locked.
1)
Release lever
2. Pull the release lever on the side that

you want to fold down.
3. Fold the seatback down.
Release button
To return the seatback to its original

position, raise the seatback until it locks
into place and make sure that it is securely
locked.
Release lever on both sides of the cargo

area
Unlock the seatback by performing either

of the following procedures and then fold
CONTINUED
Black plate (46,1)
1-14
& Head restraint adjustment
! Rear window side seating position
Both the rear window side seats and the

rear center seat are equipped with head
restraints.
that the center of the head restraint is

closest to the top of the occupants ears.
When the seats are not occupied, lower
the head restraints to improve rearward
visibility.
WARNING
. Never drive the vehicle with the
head restraints removed because
they are designed to reduce the
risk of serious neck injury in the
event that the vehicle is struck
from the rear. Therefore, when
you remove the head restraints,
you must reinstall all head restraints to protect vehicle occupants.
. All occupants, including the driver, should not operate a vehicle
or sit in a vehicles seat until the
head restraints are placed in their
proper positions in order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the
event of a crash.
1)
2)
Head restraint
Release button
To raise:
To lower:
the seatback.
To remove:
the head restraint.
To install:
the head restraint locks.
NOTE
For Legacy, it is not possible to remove
or install the head restraint without
folding down the rear seatback. Fold
down the rear seatback and then
remove or install the head restraint.
The head restraint should be adjusted so
Black plate (47,1)
extended position. When the rear center

seating position is not occupied, lower the
head restraint to improve rearward visibility.
! Rear center seating position
CAUTION
The head restraint is not intended to
be used in the retracted position.
Before sitting on the seat, raise the
head restraint to the extended position.
& Armrest
1)
2)
A)
B)
When not used (retracted position)

When used (extended position)
1-15
Head restraint
Release button
To raise:
To lower:
the seatback.
To remove:
the head restraint.
To install:
the head restraint locks.
To lower the armrest, pull on the armrests

top edge.
WARNING
To avoid serious injury, passengers
must never be allowed to sit on the
center armrest while the vehicle is in
motion.
When the rear-center seating position is

occupied, raise the head restraint to the
Black plate (48,1)
1-16
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Seatbelts
Seatbelts
& Seatbelt safety tips
WARNING
. All persons in the vehicle should
fasten their seatbelts BEFORE
the vehicle starts to move. Otherwise, the possibility of serious
injury becomes greater in the
event of a sudden stop or accident.
. All belts should fit snugly in order
to provide full restraint. Loose
fitting belts are not as effective in
preventing or reducing injury.
. Each seatbelt is designed to
support only one person. Never
use a single belt for two or more
persons even children. Otherwise, in an accident, serious
injury or death could result.
. Replace all seatbelt assemblies
including retractors and attaching hardware worn by occupants
of a vehicle that has been in a
serious accident. The entire assembly should be replaced even
if damage is not obvious.
. Put children in the rear seat

properly restrained at all times.
The SRS airbag deploys with
considerable speed and force
and can injure or even kill children, especially if they are not
restrained or improperly restrained. Because children are
deployment is greater. Consequently, we strongly recommend
that ALL children (including
those in child seats and those
that have outgrown child restraint devices) sit in the REAR
seat properly restrained at all
times in a child restraint device
or in a seatbelt, whichever is
appropriate for the childs height
and weight.
Secure ALL types of child restraint devices (including forward facing child seats) in the
REAR seats at all times.
NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD
FACING CHILD SEAT IN THE
FRONT SEAT. DOING SO RISKS
SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO
THE CHILD BY PLACING THE
CHILDS HEAD TOO CLOSE TO
THE SRS AIRBAG.

restrained in the rear seating
positions than in the front seating positions. For instructions
and precautions concerning the
child restraint system, refer to
Child restraint systems F1-27.
Your vehicle is equipped with a crash
sensing and diagnostic module, which will
record the use of the seatbelt by the front
passenger when any of the SRS frontal,
side and curtain airbags deploys.
! Infants or small children
Use a child restraint system that is
suitable for your vehicle. Refer to Child
restraint systems F1-27.
! Children
If a child is too big for a child restraint
system, the child should sit in the rear seat
and be restrained using the seatbelts.
According to accident statistics, children
are safer when properly restrained in the
rear seating positions than in the front
seating positions. Never allow a child to
stand up or kneel on the seat.
If the shoulder portion of the belt crosses
the face or neck, move the child closer to
the belt buckle to help provide a good
Black plate (49,1)
shoulder belt fit. Care must be taken to

securely place the lap belt as low as
possible on the hips and not on the childs
waist. If the shoulder portion of the belt
cannot be properly positioned, a child
restraint system should be used. Never
place the shoulder belt under the childs
arm or behind the childs back.
! Expectant mothers
& Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)
retracted fully, the ALR mode is canceled

and the ELR mode is restored.
The drivers seatbelt has an Emergency

Locking Retractor (ELR).
The emergency locking retractor allows
normal body movement but the retractor
locks automatically during a sudden stop,
impact or if you pull the belt very quickly
out of the retractor.
When securing a child restraint system on

the rear seats by using a seatbelt, the
seatbelt must be changed over to the
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode.
For instructions on how to install the child
restraint system using a seatbelt, refer to
Installing child restraint systems with
ALR/ELR seatbelt F1-30.
& Automatic Locking Retractor/

Emergency Locking Retractor (ALR/ELR)
Expectant mothers also need to use the

seatbelts. They should consult their doctor
for specific recommendations. The lap belt
should be worn securely and as low as
possible over the hips, not over the waist.
1-17
Each passengers seatbelt has an Automatic Locking Retractor/Emergency Locking Retractor (ALR/ELR). The Automatic
Locking Retractor/Emergency Locking
Retractor normally functions as an Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR). The ALR/
ELR has an additional locking mode,
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
mode, intended to secure a child restraint
system.
The ALR mode functions as follows.
When the seatbelt is once drawn out
completely and is then retracted even
slightly, the retractor locks the seatbelt in
that position and the seatbelt cannot be
extended. As the belt is rewinding, clicks
will be heard which indicate the retractor
functions as an ALR. When the seatbelt is
When the child restraint system is removed, make sure that the retractor is
restored to the Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) mode by allowing the seatbelt to retract fully.
& Seatbelt warning light

and chime
Refer to Seatbelt warning light and

chime F3-13.
& Fastening the seatbelt

WARNING
. Never use a belt that is twisted or
reversed. In an accident, this can
increase the risk or severity of
injury.
. Keep the lap belt as low as
CONTINUED
Black plate (50,1)
1-18
possible on your hips. In a collision, this spreads the force of the

lap belt over stronger hip bones
instead of across the weaker
abdomen.
. Seatbelts provide maximum restraint when the occupant sits
well back and upright in the seat.
To reduce the risk of sliding
under the seatbelt in a collision,
the front seatbacks should be
always used in the upright position while the vehicle is running.
If the front seatbacks are not
used in the upright position in a
collision, the risk of sliding under
sliding up over the abdomen will
increase, and both can result in
. Do not put cushions or any other
materials between occupants
and seatbacks or seat cushions.
If you do so, the risk of sliding
under the lap belt and of the lap
belt sliding up over the abdomen
will increase, and both can result
in serious internal injury or
death.
! Front seatbelts
1. Adjust the seat position:
Drivers seat: Adjust the seatback to the
upright position. Move the seat as far from
the steering wheel as practical while still
maintaining full vehicle control.
Front passengers seat: Adjust the seatback to the upright position. Move the seat
as far back as possible.
WARNING
Never place the shoulder belt under
the arm or behind the back. If an
accident occurs, this can increase
the risk or severity of injury.
CAUTION
2. Sit well back in the seat.

3. Pick up the tongue plate and pull the
belt out slowly. Do not let it get twisted.
. If the belt stops before reaching the
buckle, return the belt slightly and pull
it out more slowly.
. If the belt still cannot be unlocked,
let the belt retract slightly after giving it
a strong pull, then pull it out slowly
again.
Metallic parts of the seatbelt can

become very hot in a vehicle that
has been closed up in sunny weather; they could burn an occupant. Do
not touch such hot parts until they
cool.
Black plate (51,1)
! Adjusting the front seat shoulder

belt anchor height
1-19
WARNING
When wearing the seatbelts, make
sure the shoulder portion of the
webbing does not pass over your
neck. If it does, adjust the seatbelt
anchor to a lower position. Placing
the shoulder belt over the neck may
result in neck injury during sudden
braking or in a collision.
! Unfastening the seatbelt
4. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle

until you hear a click.
The shoulder belt anchor height should be
adjusted to the position best suited for the
driver/front passenger. Always adjust the
anchor height so that the shoulder belt
passes over the middle of the shoulder
without touching the neck.
To raise:
Slide the anchor up.
To lower:
Push the upper part of the anchor and
slide the anchor down.
5. To make the lap part tight, pull up on
the shoulder belt.
6. Place the lap belt as low as possible
on your hips, not on your waist.
Pull down the anchor to make sure that it

is locked in place.
1. Push the button on the buckle.

2. Have the seatbelt retracted slowly to
avoid the seatbelt being tangled or
twisted.
Before closing the door, make sure that
the belts are retracted properly to avoid
CONTINUED
Black plate (52,1)
1-20
catching the belt webbing in the door.

! Rear seatbelts (except rear center
seatbelt on Outback)
1. Sit well back in the seat.
2. Pick up the tongue plate and pull the
belt out slowly. Do not let it get twisted.
it out more slowly.
let the belt retract slightly after giving a
strong pull on it, then pull it out slowly
again.
1. Push the button on the buckle.

2. Have the seatbelt retracted slowly to
avoid the seatbelt being tangled or
twisted.
Before closing the door, make sure that
the belts are retracted properly to avoid
catching the belt webbing in the door.
! Rear center seatbelt on Outback

the shoulder belt.
5. Place the lap belt as low as possible
on your hips, not on your waist.
1)
2)
3)
4)
Center seatbelt tongue plate

Connector (tongue)
Connector (buckle)
Center seatbelt buckle

Black plate (53,1)
1-21
1
WARNING
Fastening the seatbelt with the webbing twisted can increase the risk or
severity of injury in an accident.
When fastening the belt after it is
pulled out from the retractor, especially when inserting the connectors tongue plate into the mating
buckle (on right-hand side), always
check that the webbing is not
twisted.
WARNING
Be sure to fasten both tongue plates
to the respective buckles. If the
seatbelt is used only as a shoulder
belt (with the connectors tongue
plate not fastened to the connectors buckle on the right-hand side),
it cannot properly restrain the wearer in position in an accident, possibly resulting in serious injury or
death.
Rear center seatbelt is stowed in the

recess of the ceiling.
1. Retrieve the connector (tongue) plate
from the slot in the recess by pulling the
connector (tongue) plate.
CONTINUED
Black plate (54,1)
1-22
clicks.
2. Pull out the seatbelt slowly from the

retractor.
3. After confirming that the webbing is not

twisted, insert the connector (tongue)
attached at the webbing end into the
buckle on the right-hand side until a click
is heard.
it out more slowly.
let the belt retract slightly after giving it
a strong pull, then pull it out slowly
again.
4. After fastening the seatbelt, make sure

that the mark on the connector
(tongue) and the mark on the buckle
face outwards.

the shoulder belt. And place the lap belt as
low as possible on your hips, not on your
waist.
5. Insert the center seatbelt tongue plate

into the center seatbelt buckle until it
Black plate (55,1)
1-23
1. Push the release button of the center

seatbelt buckle (on the left-hand side) to
unfasten the seatbelt.
2. Insert a tongue plate or other hard

pointed object into the slot in the connector (buckle) on the right-hand side and
push it in. The connector (tongue) plate
will then disconnect from the buckle.
3. Allow the retractor to roll up the belt.

You should hold the webbing end and
guide it back into the retractor while it is
rolling up. Neatly store the tongue plate in
the recess and then insert the connector
(tongue) plate into the slot.
CONTINUED
Black plate (56,1)
1-24
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Front seatbelt pretensioners
& Seatbelt maintenance

To clean the seatbelts, use a mild soap
and lukewarm water. Never bleach or dye
the belts because this could seriously
affect their strength.
Inspect the seatbelts and attachments
including the webbing and all hardware
periodically for cracks, cuts, gashes,
tears, damage, loose bolts or worn areas.
Replace the seatbelts even if only minor
damage is found.
CAUTION
Observe the following precautions.
Otherwise, the tongue plate can hit
against the trim, causing damage to
the trim.
. Do not allow the retractor to roll
up the seatbelt too quickly.
. Have the seatbelt fully rolled up
so that the tongue plates are
neatly stored.
Front seatbelt pretensioners

The drivers and front passengers seatbelts have a seatbelt pretensioner. The
seatbelt pretensioners are designed to be
activated in the event of an accident
involving moderate to severe frontal and
side collisions and rollover accidents.
CAUTION
. Keep the belts free of polishes,
oils, chemicals and particularly
battery acid.
. Never attempt to make modifications or changes that will prevent
the seatbelt from operating properly.
The following sensors serve as sensors

for the pretensioners.
. Front sub sensor
. Front door impact sensor
. Rollover sensor
If the sensor detects a certain predetermined amount of force during frontal or
side collisions or rollover accidents, the
front seatbelt is quickly drawn back in by
the retractor to take up the slack so that
Black plate (57,1)
the belt more effectively restrains the

driver.
When a seatbelt pretensioner is activated,
an operating noise will be heard and a
small amount of smoke will be released.
These occurrences are normal and not
harmful. This smoke does not indicate a
fire in the vehicle.
Once the seatbelt pretensioner has been
activated, the seatbelt retractor remains
locked. Consequently, the seatbelt cannot
be pulled out and retracted and therefore
must be replaced.
NOTE
. Seatbelt pretensioners are not designed to activate in minor impacts.
. In cases of rollover accidents, as the
SRS curtain airbags deploy, the seatbelt pretensioners are activated simultaneously.
. In cases of frontal collisions, the
following components will operate simultaneously.
Seatbelt pretensioner for driver
Seatbelt pretensioner for front
passenger
SRS frontal airbag for driver
SRS frontal airbag for front passenger*
SRS seat cushion airbag for
driver
SRS seat cushion airbag for front
passenger*
SRS curtain airbags (both sides)
(if an offset frontal collision occurs)
*: This does not operate if the occupant
detection system deactivates airbag operation. For details, refer to Front
passengers SRS frontal airbag F1-52.
. In cases of side collisions, the

following components will operate simultaneously.
SRS curtain airbag (impacted
side)
SRS side airbag (impacted side)
(when any of the center pillar impact sensors/front door impact sensors senses an impact force)
Seatbelt pretensioner for driver
(when the drivers side front door
impact sensor senses an impact
force)
Seatbelt pretensioner for front
passenger (when the front passengers side front door impact sensor
senses an impact force)
. Pretensioners are designed to function on a one-time-only basis. In the
event that a pretensioner is activated,
both the drivers and front passengers
seatbelt retractor assemblies should
be replaced only by an authorized
1-25
SUBARU dealer. When replacing seatbelt retractor assemblies, use only

genuine SUBARU parts.
. If either front seatbelt does not
retract or cannot be pulled out due to
a malfunction or activation of the
pretensioner, contact your SUBARU
dealer as soon as possible.
. If the front seatbelt retractor assembly or surrounding area has been
damaged, contact your SUBARU dealer
as soon as possible.
. When you sell your vehicle, we urge
you to explain to the buyer that it has
seatbelt pretensioners by alerting the
buyer to the contents of this section.
WARNING
. To obtain maximum protection,
the occupants should sit in an
upright position with their seatbelts properly fastened. Refer to
Seatbelts F1-16.
. Do not modify, remove or strike
the front seatbelt retractor assemblies or surrounding area.
This could result in accidental
activation of the seatbelt pretensioners or could make the system inoperative, possibly resulting in serious injury. Seatbelt
CONTINUED
Black plate (58,1)
1-26
pretensioners have no user-serviceable parts. For required servicing of front seatbelt retractors
equipped with seatbelt pretensioners, consult your SUBARU
dealer.
. When discarding front seatbelt
retractor assemblies or scrapping the entire vehicle due to
collision damage or for other
reasons, consult your SUBARU
dealer.
& System monitors

A diagnostic system continually monitors
the readiness of the seatbelt pretensioner
while the vehicle is being driven. The
seatbelt pretensioners share the control
module with the SRS airbag system.
Therefore, if any malfunction occurs in a
seatbelt pretensioner, the SRS airbag
system warning light will illuminate. For
details, refer to SRS airbag system
monitors F1-68.
& System servicing

WARNING
. When discarding a seatbelt retractor assembly or scrapping
the entire vehicle damaged by a
collision, consult your SUBARU
dealer.
. Tampering with or disconnecting
the systems wiring could result
in accidental activation of the
seatbelt pretensioner and/or
SRS airbag or could make the
system inoperative, which may
result in serious injury. Do not
use electrical test equipment on
any circuit related to the seatbelt
pretensioner and SRS airbag
systems. For required servicing
of the seatbelt pretensioner, consult your nearest SUBARU dealer.
CAUTION
The sensors and SRS airbag control
module are located in the following
locations.
. Front sub sensors: on both sides
of the radiator panel
. Front door impact sensors: on
both front doors
. SRS airbag control module (including the impact sensors and
rollover sensor): under the center console
If you need service or repair in those
areas or near the front seatbelt
retractors, have the work performed
by your authorized SUBARU dealer.
NOTE
If the front part of the vehicle is
damaged in an accident to the extent
that the seatbelt pretensioner does not
operate, contact your SUBARU dealer
Black plate (59,1)
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Child restraint systems
& Precautions against vehicle

modification
Child restraint systems
tether anchorages (LATCH) F1-36).

Children could be endangered in an
accident if their child restraints are not
properly secured in the vehicle. When
installing the child restraint system, carefully follow the manufacturers instructions.
Always consult your SUBARU dealer if

you want to install any accessory parts to
your vehicle.
CAUTION
Do not perform any of the following
modifications. Such modifications
can interfere with proper operation
of the seatbelt pretensioners.
. Attachment of any equipment
(bush bar, winches, snow plow,
skid plate, etc.) other than genuine SUBARU accessory parts to
the front end.
. Modification of the suspension
system or front end structure.
. Installation of a tire of different
size and construction from the
tires specified on the vehicle
placard attached to the door
pillar or specified for individual
vehicle models in this Owners
Manual.
1-27
According to accident statistics, children

are safer when properly restrained in the
rear seating positions than in the front
seating positions.
Infants and small children should always

be placed in an infant or child restraint
system in the rear seat while riding in the
vehicle.
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces

require that infants and small children be
restrained in an approved child restraint
system at all times while the vehicle is
moving.
You should use an infant or child restraint

system that meets Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards or Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Standards, is compatible with
your vehicle and is appropriate for the
childs age and size.
All child restraint systems are designed to
be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or
the lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt
(except those covered under the section in
this manual, entitled Installation of child
restraint systems by use of lower and
CONTINUED
Black plate (60,1)
1-28
WARNING
Never let a passenger hold a child
on his or her lap while the vehicle is
moving. The passenger cannot protect the child from injury in a collision, because the child will be
caught between the passenger and
objects inside the vehicle. Additionally, holding a child in your lap or
arms in the front seat exposes that
child to another serious danger.
Since the SRS airbag deploys with
considerable speed and force, the
child could be injured or even killed.
WARNING
Children should be properly restrained at all times. Never allow a
child to stand up, or to kneel on any
seat. Unrestrained children will be
thrown forward during sudden stop
or in an accident and can be injured
seriously.
Additionally, children standing up or
kneeling on or in front of the front
seat are exposed another serious
danger. Since the SRS airbag deploys with considerable speed and
force, the child could be injured or
even killed.
& Where to place a child restraint system

The following descriptions are SUBARUs
recommendations on where to place a
child restraint system in your vehicle.
A: Front passengers seat

You should not install a child restraint
system (including a booster seat) due to
the hazard to children posed by the
passengers airbag.
B: Rear seat, window-side seating
positions
Recommended positions for all types of
child restraint systems.
In these positions, the following equipment is provided for installing a child
restraint system.
Black plate (61,1)
. Automatic Locking Retractor/Emergency Locking Retractor (ALR/ELR) seatbelts

. Lower anchorages (bars)
. Upper anchorages (tether anchorages)
Some types of child restraints might not be
able to be secured firmly due to projection
of the seat cushion.
In this seating position, you should use
only a child restraint system that has a
bottom base that fits snugly against the
contours of the seat cushion and can be
securely retained using the seatbelt.
C: Rear seat, center seating position
The ALR/ELR seatbelt and an upper
anchorage (tether anchorage, if equipped)
are provided in this position.
Some types of child restraints might not be
able to be secured firmly due to projection
of the seat cushion.
In this seating position, you should use
only a child restraint system that has a
bottom base that fits snugly against the
contours of the seat cushion and can be
securely retained using the seatbelt.
When you install a child restraint system in
the rear seats center seating position,
raise the center head restraint.
Lower anchorages (bars) for window-side
seating positions may be used for a seat
in the center seating position if a child

restraint system manufacturers instructions permit and specify using anchors as
far apart as those in this vehicle.
If a child restraint system is not correctly
fixed in place (for example, if a child
restraint system can be moved more than
1 inch (2.5 cm) from side to side), you
should install the child restraint system in
a rear seat, window-side seating position.
WARNING
. Even with advanced airbags, children can be seriously injured by
the airbag. Put children in the
rear seat properly restrained at
all times. The SRS airbag deploys with considerable speed
and force and can injure or even
kill children, especially if they are
not restrained or improperly restrained. Because children are
deployment is greater.
For that reason, be sure to secure ALL types of child restraint
all times. You should choose a
restraint device which is appro-
1-29
priate for the childs age, height

and weight. According to accident statistics, children are safer
when properly restrained in the
rear seating positions than in the
front seating positions.
. Do not use lower anchorages
(bars) for a seat in the center
seating position unless a child
restraint system manufacturers
instructions permit and specify
using anchors spaced as far
apart as those in this vehicle.
. Do not connect two or more
lower hooks onto the same anchorage (bar).
CONTINUED
Black plate (62,1)
1-30
& Choosing a child restraint

system
& Installing child restraint systems with ALR/ELR seatbelt

WARNING
WARNING
SINCE YOUR VEHICLE IS
EQUIPPED WITH A PASSENGERS
SRS AIRBAG, DO NOT INSTALL A
R E A R W A R D FA C I N G C H I L D
SAFETY SEAT IN THE FRONT PASSENGERS SEAT. DOING SO RISKS
SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO
THE CHILD BY PLACING THE
CHILDS HEAD TOO CLOSE TO
THE SRS AIRBAG.
Choose a child restraint system that is

appropriate for the childs age and size
(weight and height) in order to provide the
child with proper protection. The child
restraint system should meet all applicable requirements of Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards for United States or
Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
for Canada. It can be identified by looking
for the label on the child restraint system
or the manufactures statement of compliance in the document attached to the
system. Also it is important for you to
make sure that the child restraint system
is compatible with the vehicle in which it
will be used.
. Child restraint systems and seatbelts can become hot in a vehicle

that has been closed up in sunny
weather; they could burn a small
child. Check the child restraint
system before you place a child
in it.
. Do not leave an unsecured child
restraint system in your vehicle.
Unsecured child restraint systems can be thrown around inside of the vehicle in a sudden
stop, turn or accident; they can
strike and injure vehicle occupants as well as result in serious
injuries or death to the child.
Black plate (63,1)
CAUTION
. When you install a child restraint
system, follow the manufacturers instructions supplied with
it. After installing the child restraint system, check to ensure
that it is held securely in position. If it is not held tight and
secure, the danger of your child
suffering personal injury in the
event of an accident may be
increased.
. When installing a child restraint
system in the rear center seating
position, adjust both seatbacks
at the same angle. Otherwise, the
child restraint system cannot be
securely restrained, causing
death or serious injuries in the
event of sudden stop, sudden
steering maneuver or an accident.
1-31
! Installing a rearward facing child

restraint
1. Place the child restraint system in the

rear seating position.
2. Run the lap and shoulder belt through
or around the child restraint system
following the instructions provided by its
manufacturer.
4. Take up the slack in the lap belt.

5. If using the seatbelt in the ALR mode
is recommended by the manufacturers
instructions supplied with the child restraint system, perform the following procedure.
(1) Pull out the seatbelt fully from the
retractor to change the retractor over from
the Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)
to the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
mode.
(2) Allow the belt to rewind into the
retractor. As the belt is rewinding, clicks
will be heard which indicate the retractor
functions as ALR.
CONTINUED
Black plate (64,1)
1-32
NOTE
When the child restraint system is no
longer in use, remove it and restore the
ELR function of the retractor. That
function is restored by retracting the
seatbelt fully.
! Installing forward facing child restraint
WARNING
6. Push and pull the child restraint
system forward and side to side to check
that it is firmly secured in the center of the
seat. Sometimes a child restraint can be
more firmly secured by pushing it down
into the seat cushion and then tightening
the seatbelt.
7. If the seatbelt has been set to the ALR
mode in step 5, pull at the shoulder portion
of the belt to confirm that it cannot be
pulled out (ALR properly functioning).
8. To remove the child restraint system,

press the release button on the seatbelt
buckle and allow the belt to retract
completely. The belt will return to the
ELR mode.
WARNING
PASSENGERS SEAT. DOING SO
RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH
TO THE CHILD BY PLACING THE
CHILDS HEAD TOO CLOSE TO THE
SRS AIRBAG.
Before installing a child restraint

system, be sure to confirm that the
seatback is securely locked into
place. Otherwise, in an accident,
serious injury or death could result.
1. Shake the seatback slightly to confirm
that it is securely locked into place.
2. If the child restraint system makes
contact with the head restraint of the rear
seating position where the child restraint
system is to be installed, raise the head
restraint to the extended position. If the
child restraint system still makes contact,
remove the head restraint. For details,
refer to Head restraint adjustment F114.
Black plate (65,1)
7. Take up the slack in the lap belt.

8. Pull out the seatbelt fully from the
retractor to change the retractor over from
the Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)
to the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
function. Then, allow the belt to rewind
into the retractor. As the belt is rewinding,
clicks will be heard which indicate the
retractor functions as ALR.
CAUTION
Store the head restraint that has
been removed in the trunk or cargo
area. Avoid placing the head restraint in the passenger compartment to prevent it from being thrown
around in the passenger compartment in a sudden stop or a sharp
turn.
3. For the Outback, adjust the seatback
to the upright position.
4. Place the child restraint system in the
rear seating position.
WARNING
When you intend to install a child
restraint system on the rear center
seating position, if the child restraint
system does not fit snugly against
the contours of the rear center seat
cushion, install the child restraint
system on the window-side seating
position to be safe. For details, refer
to Where to place a child restraint
system F1-28.
1-33

or around the child restraint system
manufacturer.
9. Before seating a child in the child

restraint system, try to move it back and
forth and left and right to verify that it is
firmly secured in the center of the seat.
Sometimes a child restraint can be more
firmly secured by pushing it down into the
seat cushion and then tightening the
seatbelt.
10. Pull at the shoulder portion of the belt
to confirm that it cannot be pulled out (ALR
CONTINUED
Black plate (66,1)
1-34
properly functioning).
For additional instructions, refer to Top

tether anchorages F1-39.
& Installing a booster seat

WARNING
Legacy

press the release button on the seatbelt
buckle and allow the belt to retract
completely. The belt will return to the
ELR mode.

in it.
NOTE
When the child restraint system is no
longer in use, remove it and restore the
ELR function of the retractor. That
function is restored by allowing the
seatbelt to retract fully.
Outback
11. If the child restraint system requires a

top tether, latch the hook onto the top
tether anchor and tighten the top tether.
Black plate (67,1)
CAUTION
When you install a child restraint
system, follow the manufacturers
instructions supplied with it. After
installing the child restraint system,
check to ensure that it is held
securely in position. If it is not held
tight and secure, the danger of your
child suffering personal injury in the
event of an accident may be increased.

manufacturer.
until you hear a click. Take care not to
twist the seatbelt.
Make sure the shoulder belt is positioned
across the center of childs shoulder and
that the lap belt is positioned as low as
possible on the childs hips.
4. To remove the booster seat, press the

release button on the seatbelt buckle and
allow the belt to retract.
1. Place the booster seat in the rear
seating position and sit the child on it. The
child should sit well back on the booster
seat.
or around the booster seat and the child
1-35
. Never place the shoulder belt

under the childs arm or behind
the childs back. If an accident
occurs, this can increase the risk
or severity of injury to the child.
. The seatbelt should fit snugly in
order to provide full restraint.
Loose fitting belts are not as
effective in preventing or reducing injury.
. Place the lap belt as low as
possible on the childs hips. A
high-positioned lap belt will increase the risk of sliding under
sliding up over the abdomen, and
both can result in serious internal injury or death.
. Make sure the shoulder belt is
positioned across the center of
childs shoulder. Placing the
shoulder belt over the neck may
result in neck injury during sudden braking or in a collision.
WARNING
. Never use a belt that is twisted or
reversed. In an accident, this can
increase the risk or severity of
injury to the child.
CONTINUED
Black plate (68,1)
1-36
& Installation of child restraint

systems by use of lower and
tether anchorages (LATCH)

WARNING
in it.
CAUTION
Your vehicle is equipped with four lower

anchorages (bars) and three upper anchorages (tether anchorages) for accommodating such child restraint systems.
Some types of child restraint systems can
be installed on the rear seat of your
vehicle without use of the seatbelts. Such
child restraint systems are secured to the
dedicated anchorages provided on the
vehicle body.
The lower and tether anchorages are
sometimes referred to as the LATCH
system (Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren).
The lower anchorages (bars) are used for
installing a child restraint system only on
Black plate (69,1)
1-37
ones) of the rear seat.
the rear seat window-side seating positions. For each window-side seating position, two lower anchorages are provided.
Each lower anchorage is located behind
the cover of seatback bottom.
You will find marks at the rear seat

cushion. These marks indicate the positions of the lower anchorages (bars).
Each lower anchorage is located behind
the cover of seatback bottom.
CAUTION
Outback
1) For left seat
2) For center seat
3) For right seat
Legacy
The tether anchorages (upper anchorages) are provided for all the seating
positions (center and both window-side

CONTINUED
Black plate (70,1)
1-38
facturer, connect the lower hooks onto the

lower anchorages located at marks on
the bottom of the rear seatback. When the
hooks are connected, make sure the
adjacent seatbelts are not caught.
Peel off the anchorage cover from the

selected side of the rear seatback to
expose the anchorages (bars) to be used
for installation of the child restraint system.
1. While following the instructions supplied by the child restraint system manu-
2. If your child restraint system is of a

flexible attachment type (which uses
tether belts to connect the child restraint
system properly to the lower anchorages),
while pushing the child restraint into the
seat cushion, pull both left and right lower
tether belts up to secure the child restraint
system firmly by taking up the slack in the
belt.
3. Connect the top tether hook to the
tether anchorage and firmly tighten the
tether. For information on how to set the
top tether, refer to Top tether anchorages
F1-39.
4. Before seating a child in the child

restraint system, try to move it back and
forth and left and right to verify that it is
firmly secured in the center of the seat.
follow the reverse procedures of installation.
If you have any question concerning this
type of child restraint system, ask your
SUBARU dealer.
Black plate (71,1)
& Top tether anchorages

Your vehicle is equipped with three top
tether anchorages so that a child restraint
system having a top tether can be
installed in the rear seat. When installing
a child restraint system using top tether,
proceed as follows, while observing the
instructions by the child restraint system
manufacturer.
! Tether anchorage location
1-39
! Outback
! Legacy
Since a top tether can provide additional

stability by offering another connection
between a child restraint system and the
vehicle, we recommend that you use a top
tether whenever one is required or available.
Three tether anchorages are installed on

the rear shelf behind the rear seat head
restraint. Open the cover flap to use each
anchorage.
1)
2)
3)
For left seat

For center seat
For right seat
Three tether anchorages, i.e., ones for the

right, center and left positions, are already
CONTINUED
Black plate (72,1)
1-40
installed on the back side of the rear

seatback.
! To hook the top tether
! Legacy
CAUTION
Always raise the head restraint
when mounting a child restraint
system with a top tether. Failure to
do so may prevent the top tether
from being fastened tightly.
1)
2)
When installing on the window-side

seating position
When installing on the rear center seating position
2. Open the cover flaps to use the

anchorages.
3. Pass the top tether between the head
restraint and seatback.
1. Raise the head restraint at the seating

position where the child restraint system is
to be installed with the seatbelt or lower
anchorages.
4. Fasten the top tether hook of the child

restraint system to the appropriate upper
Black plate (73,1)
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
*SRS airbag (Supplemental

Restraint System airbag)
anchorage.
5. Tighten the top tether securely.
! Outback
*SRS: This stands for Supplemental Restraint System. This name is used because the airbag system supplements the
vehicles seatbelts.
4. Attach the top tether hook to the

appropriate upper anchorage.
5. Tighten the top tether securely.
1)
2)
When installing on the window-side

seating position
When installing on the rear center seating position
1. Raise the head restraint at the seating

position where the child restraint system is
to be installed with the seatbelt or lower
anchorages.
2. Adjust the seatback to the upright
position.
3. Pass the top tether between the head
restraint and seatback.
1-41
Your vehicle is equipped with a supplemental restraint system in addition to a

lap/shoulder belt at each front seating
position and each rear window-side seating position. The supplemental restraint
system (SRS) consists of the following
airbags.
. Drivers and front passengers frontal
airbags
. Drivers and front passengers side
airbags
. Drivers and front passengers seat
cushion airbags
. Curtain airbags (for driver, front passenger, and window-side rear passengers)
These SRS airbags are designed only
to be a supplement to the primary
protection provided by the seatbelt.
The system also controls front seatbelt
pretensioners. For operation instructions
and precautions concerning the seatbelt
CONTINUED
Black plate (74,1)
1-42
pretensioner, refer to Front seatbelt pretensioners F1-24.
& General precautions regarding SRS airbag system

WARNING
. To obtain maximum protection in
the event of an accident, the
driver and all passengers must
always wear seatbelts when in
the vehicle. The SRS airbag is
designed only to be a supplement to the primary protection
provided by the seatbelt. It does
not eliminate the need to fasten
seatbelts. In combination with
the seatbelts, it offers the best
combined protection in case of a
serious accident.
Not wearing a seatbelt increases
the chance of severe injury or
death in a crash even when the
vehicle has the SRS airbag.
For instructions and precautions
concerning the seatbelt system,
refer to Seatbelts F1-16.
. The SRS side airbag and SRS
curtain airbag are designed only
to be a supplement to the primary
protection provided by the seat-
belt. They do not eliminate the

need to fasten seatbelts. It is also
important to wear your seatbelt
to help avoid injuries that can
result when an occupant is not
seated in a proper upright position.
WARNING
Occupants who are out of proper
position when the SRS airbag
deploys could suffer very serious
injuries. Because the SRS airbag
needs enough space for deployment, the driver should always
sit upright and well back in the
seat as far from the steering

wheel as practical while still
back in the seat.
WARNING
. Do not sit or lean unnecessarily
close to either front door. The
SRS side airbags are stored in
both front seat seatbacks next to
the door, and they provide protection by deploying rapidly (faster than the blink of an eye) in the
event of a side impact collision.
However, the force of SRS side
Black plate (75,1)
airbag deployment may cause

injuries if your head or other
parts of the body are too close
to the SRS side airbag.
. Since your vehicle is equipped
with SRS curtain airbags, do not
sit or lean unnecessarily close to
the front or rear door on either
side. Also, do not put your head,
arms or hands out of the window.
The SRS curtain airbags on both
sides of the cabin are stored in
the roof side (between the front
pillar and a point over the rear
seat), and they provide protection by deploying rapidly (faster
than the blink of an eye) in the
event of a side impact, a rollover
or also a frontal collision depending on circumstances. However,
the force of its deployment may
cause injuries if your head is too
close to it.
. Do not sit or lean unnecessarily
close to the SRS airbag. Because
the SRS airbag deploys with
considerable speed (faster than
the blink of an eye) and force to
protect in high speed collisions,
the force of an airbag can injure
an occupant whose body is too
close to SRS airbag.
It is also important to wear your

seatbelt to help avoid injuries
that can result when the SRS
airbag contacts an occupant not
in proper position such as one
thrown forward during pre-accident braking.
Even when properly positioned,
there remains a possibility that
an occupant may suffer minor
injury such as abrasions and
bruises to the face or arms
because of the SRS airbag deployment force.
1-43
front door or its internal trim. You

could be injured in the event of
SRS side airbag deployment.
. Do not place any objects over or
near the SRS airbag cover or
between you and the SRS airbag.
If the SRS airbag deploys, these
objects could interfere with its
proper operation and could be
propelled inside the vehicle,
causing injury.
WARNING
WARNING
. Do not rest your arm on either
Do not put any objects over the

steering wheel pad and dashboard.
If the SRS frontal airbag deploys,
these objects could interfere with its
CONTINUED
Black plate (76,1)
1-44
proper operation and could be propelled inside the vehicle, causing

injury.
other accessory in such a location could be propelled through

the cabin with great force by the
curtain airbag, or it could prevent
correct deployment of the curtain
airbag. In either case, the result
could be serious injuries.
WARNING
WARNING
Do not attach accessories to the
windshield, or fit an extra-wide mirror over the inside rear view mirror.
If the SRS airbag deploys, those
objects could become projectiles
that could seriously injure vehicle
occupants.
. Do not attach accessories to the

door trim or near either SRS side
airbags and do not place objects
near the SRS side airbags. In the
event of SRS side airbag deployment, they could be propelled
dangerously toward the vehicles
occupants and cause injuries.
. Do not attach a hands-free microphone or any other accessory to
a front pillar, a center pillar, a rear
pillar, the windshield, a side window, an assist grip, or any other
cabin surface that would be near
a deploying SRS curtain airbag.
A hands-free microphone or
WARNING
Do not place hangers or other hard
objects on the coat hooks. If such
items were hanging on the coat
hooks during deployment of the
SRS curtain airbags, they could
cause serious injuries by coming
off the coat hooks and being thrown
through the cabin or by preventing
deployment of the curtain airbags.
Black plate (77,1)
Before hanging clothing on the coat

hooks, make sure there are no sharp
objects in the pockets. Hang clothing directly on the coat hooks without using hangers.
WARNING
WARNING
Do not put any kind of cover or
clothes or other objects over either
front seatback/seat cushion and do
not attach labels or stickers to the
front seat surface on or near the
SRS side airbag/SRS seat cushion
airbag. They could prevent proper
deployment of the SRS side airbag/
SRS seat cushion airbag, reducing
protection available to the front
seats occupant.
Put children in the rear seat properly

restrained at all times. The SRS
airbag deploys with considerable
speed and force and can injure or
even kill children, especially if they
are not restrained or improperly
restrained. Because children are
lighter and weaker than adults, their
risk of being injured from deployment is greater.
Consequently, we strongly recommend that ALL children (including
those in child seats and those that
have outgrown child restraint devices) sit in the REAR seat properly
restrained at all times in a child
restraint device or in a seatbelt,
1-45
whichever is appropriate for the

childs age, height and weight.
Secure ALL types of child restraint
all times.
restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating positions.
For instructions and precautions
concerning the child restraint system, refer to Child restraint systems F1-27.
CONTINUED
Black plate (78,1)
1-46
WARNING
SEAT. DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS
INJURY OR DEATH TO THE CHILD
BY PLACING THE CHILDS HEAD
TOO CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.
WARNING
Never hold a child on your lap or in
your arms. The SRS airbag deploys
with considerable force and can
injure or even kill the child.
WARNING
Never allow a child to stand up or
kneel on the front passengers seat.
The SRS airbag deploys with considerable force and can injure or
even kill the child.
WARNING
. Never allow a child to do the
following.
Kneel on any passengers
Black plate (79,1)
seat facing the side window

Wrap his/her arms around the
front seat seatback
Put his/her head, arms or
other parts of the body out of
the window
In the event of an accident, the
force of SRS side airbag and/or
SRS curtain airbag deployment
could injure the child seriously
because his/her head, arms or
other parts of the body are too
close to the SRS side airbag and/
or SRS curtain airbag.
. Since your vehicle is also
equipped with a front passengers SRS frontal airbag, children
should be placed in the rear seat
anyway and should be properly
restrained at all times.
1-47
get fresh air promptly.

. A deploying SRS airbag releases
hot gas. Occupants could get
burned if they come into direct
contact with the hot gas.
NOTE
. When you sell your vehicle, we urge
you to explain to the buyer that it is
equipped with SRS airbags by alerting
the buyer to the applicable section in
this Owners Manual.
. If the SRS airbag deploys, fuel
supply will be cut off to reduce the risk
of fire caused by leaking fuel. For
details about restarting of the engine,
refer to If your vehicle is involved in
an accident F9-22.
CAUTION
. When the SRS airbag deploys,
some smoke will be released.
This smoke could cause breathing problems for people with a
history of asthma or other
breathing trouble. If you or your
passengers have breathing problems after SRS airbag deploys,
CONTINUED
Black plate (80,1)
1-48
& Components
The SRS airbags are stowed in the

following locations.
Drivers SRS frontal airbag: in the center
portion of the steering wheel
Front passengers SRS frontal airbag:
near the top of the dashboard under an
SRS AIRBAG mark
SRS side airbag: in the trim cover on the
door side of each front seat cushion that
bears an SRS AIRBAG mark
SRS curtain airbag: in the roof side
(between the front pillar and a point over
the rear seat)
An SRS AIRBAG mark is located at the
top of each center pillar.
SRS seat cushion airbag: in the center
console side of the front seat cushion that
bears an SRS AIRBAG label
1)
2)
3)
4)
SRS
SRS
SRS
SRS
frontal airbag
side airbag
curtain airbag
seat cushion airbag
Black plate (81,1)
1-49
1
1)
2)
3)
4)
Front sub sensor (right-hand side)

Front sub sensor (left-hand side)
Frontal airbag module (drivers side)
Front passengers frontal airbag ON and
OFF indicator
5)
6)
SRS airbag system warning light

Frontal airbag module (front passengers
side)
7)
Airbag control module (including impact

sensor and rollover sensor)
CONTINUED
Black plate (82,1)
1-50
Black plate (83,1)
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
10)
11)
12)
13)
14)
15)
16)
17)
18)
Curtain airbag sensor (rear wheel house

left-hand side)
Curtain airbag module (left-hand side)
Front door impact sensor (left-hand side)
Seat cushion airbag module (drivers
side)
Curtain airbag module (right-hand side)
Seat cushion airbag module (front passengers side)
Side airbag sensor (center pillar left-hand
side)
Seatbelt pretensioner (left-hand side)
Side airbag module (left-hand side)
Seatbelt buckle switch (left-hand side)
Seatbelt buckle switch (right-hand side)
Curtain airbag sensor (rear wheel house
right-hand side)
Side airbag module (right-hand side)
Seatbelt pretensioner (right-hand side)
Side airbag sensor (center pillar righthand side)
Front passengers occupant detection
system sensor and control module
Front door impact sensor (right-hand
side)
Front passengers seatbelt tension sensor
& SUBARU advanced frontal

airbag system, SRS seat
cushion airbag, SRS side
airbag and SRS curtain airbag
Your vehicle is equipped with a SUBARU
advanced frontal airbag system that complies with the new advanced frontal airbag
requirements in the amended Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (FMVSS)
No. 208.
The SUBARU advanced frontal airbag
system automatically determines the deployment force of the drivers SRS frontal
airbag at the time of deployment as well as
whether or not to activate the front
passengers SRS frontal airbag and, if
activated, the deployment force of the
SRS frontal airbag at the time of deployment.
Your vehicle has warning labels on the
drivers and front passengers sun visors
beginning with the phrase EVEN WITH
ADVANCED AIR BAGS and a tag
attached to the glove box lid beginning
with the phrase Even with Advanced Air
Bags. Make sure that you carefully read
the instructions on the warning labels and
tag.
Always wear your seatbelt. The SUBARU
advanced frontal airbag system is a
1-51
supplemental restraint system and must

be used in combination with a seatbelt. All
occupants should wear a seatbelt or be
seated in an appropriate child restraint
system.
Your vehicle is equipped with a SUBARU
SRS curtain airbag system that complies
with the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard (FMVSS) No. 226.
For the locations of the SRS airbags, refer
to Components F1-48.
In a moderate to severe frontal collision,
the following components deploy.
. SRS frontal airbag for driver
. SRS frontal airbag for front passenger
. SRS seat cushion airbags
. SRS curtain airbag*1
*1: When an offset frontal collision that is severe
enough to deploy the front airbag occurs.
These components supplement the seatbelts by reducing the impact to the

occupants head and chest.
In a moderate to severe side impact
collision, the SRS side airbag on the
impacted side of the vehicle deploys
between the occupant and the door panel
and supplements the seatbelt by reducing
the impact to the occupants chest and
CONTINUED
Black plate (84,1)
1-52
waist.
In a moderate to severe side impact
collision, the SRS curtain airbag on the
impacted side of the vehicle deploys
between the occupant and the side
window and supplements the seatbelt by
reducing the impact to the occupants
head.
NOTE
The SRS side airbag and seatbelt
pretensioner are not controlled by the
SUBARU advanced frontal airbag system.
! Drivers SRS frontal airbag
The drivers SRS frontal airbag uses a
dual stage inflator. The inflator operates in
different ways depending on the severity
of impact.
Have the system inspected by your
SUBARU dealer immediately if the SRS
airbag system warning light illuminates.
! Front passengers SRS frontal airbag
The front passengers SRS frontal airbag
uses a dual stage inflator. The inflator
operates in different ways depending on
the severity of impact.
The total load on the seat is monitored by
the passengers occupant detection sys-
tem sensor located under the seat.

The system has another sensor that
monitors the tension of the front passengers seatbelt. Using the total seat load
and seatbelt tension data from the sensors, the occupant detection system determines whether the front passengers
SRS frontal airbag should or should not be
inflated.
The occupant detection system may not
inflate the front passengers SRS frontal
airbag even when the drivers SRS frontal
airbag deploys. This is normal.
CAUTION
Failure to do so may prevent the
SUBARU advanced frontal airbag
system from functioning correctly
or cause the system to fail.
. Do not apply any strong impact
to the front passengers seat
such as by kicking.
. Do not let rear passengers rest
their feet between the front seatback and seat cushion.
. Do not spill liquid on the front
passengers seat. If liquid is
spilled, wipe it off immediately.
. Do not remove or disassemble
the front passengers seat.

. Do not install any accessory
(such as an audio amplifier) other
than a genuine SUBARU accessory under the front passengers
seat.
. Do not place anything (shoes,
umbrella, etc.) under the front
passengers seat.
. Do not use the front passengers
seat with the head restraint removed.
. Do not leave any articles on the
front passengers seat or the
seatbelt tongue and buckle engaged when you leave your vehicle.
. Do not place a magnet near the
seatbelt buckle and the seatbelt
retractor.
. Do not use front seats with their
backward-forward position and
seatback not being locked into
place securely. If any of them are
not locked securely, adjust them
again. For adjusting procedure,
refer to Manual seat F1-4
(models equipped with manual
seats only).
If the seatbelt buckle switch and/or front
Black plate (85,1)
passengers occupant detection system

have failed, the SRS airbag system
warning light will illuminate. Have the
system inspected by your SUBARU dealer immediately if the SRS airbag system
warning light illuminates.
If your vehicle has sustained impact, this
may affect the proper function of the
SUBARU advanced frontal airbag system.
Have your vehicle inspected at your
SUBARU dealer. Do not let anyone use
the front passengers seat while you are
driving the vehicle to your SUBARU dealer.
! Passengers frontal airbag ON and
OFF indicators
Refer to Front passengers frontal airbag
ON and OFF indicators F3-15.
! Occupant detection system
The occupant detection system sensor is
installed under the seat and monitors the
total load on the front passengers seat.
The system has another sensor that
monitors the tension of the front passengers seatbelt. Using the total seat load
and seatbelt tension data from the sensors, the occupant detection system determines whether the following airbags
should be deployed or not.
. Front passengers SRS frontal airbag
. Front passengers SRS seat cushion
1-53
front passengers seat:

. The seat is empty.
. The seat is equipped with an appropriate child restraint system and an infant
is restrained in it. (See WARNING that
follows.)
. The front passengers occupant detection system is malfunctioning.
airbag
WARNING
ON /
/
: Front passengers frontal airbag ON

indicator
: Front passengers frontal airbag OFF
indicator
If the front passengers frontal airbag ON

and OFF indicators do not work properly
even when the front passengers seat is
dry, do not allow anyone to sit on the front
passengers seat and have the occupant
detection system checked by your
SUBARU dealer.
! Conditions in which front passengers SRS frontal airbag is not
activated
will not be activated when any of the
following conditions are met regarding the

PASSENGERS SEAT EVEN IF THE
FRONT PASSENGERS SRS FRONTAL AIRBAG IS DEACTIVATED. Be
sure to install it in the REAR seat in
a correct manner. Also, it is strongly
recommended that any forward facing child seat or booster seat be
installed in the REAR seat, and that
even children who have outgrown a
child restraint system be also
seated in the REAR seat. This is
because children sitting in the front
passengers seat may be killed or
severely injured should the front
passengers SRS frontal airbag deploy. REAR seats are the safest
place for children.
CONTINUED
Black plate (86,1)
1-54
CAUTION
When the front passengers seat is
occupied by an infant in an appropriate child restraint system, observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may increase the
load on the front passengers seat,
activating the front passengers
SRS frontal airbag even though that
seat is occupied by an infant.
. Do not place any article on the
seat other than the infant in the
child restraint system.
. Do not place more than one
infant in the child restraint system.
. Do not install any accessory
such as a table or TV onto the
seatback.
. Do not store a heavy load in the
seatback pocket.
. Do not allow the rear seat occupant to place his/her hands or
legs on the front passengers
seatback, or allow him/her to pull
the seatback.
! If the front passengers frontal

airbag ON indicator illuminates
and the OFF indicator turns off
even when an infant or a small
child is in a child restraint system (including booster seat)
1. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK/
OFF position.
2. Remove the child restraint system
from the seat.
3. By referring to the child restraint
manufacturers recommendations as well
as the child restraint system installation
procedures in Child restraint systems
F1-27, correctly install the child restraint
system.
position and make sure that the front
passengers frontal airbag ON indicator
turns off and the OFF indicator illuminates.
If still the ON indicator remains illuminated
while the OFF indicator turns off, take the
following actions.
. Ensure that no article is placed on the
seat other than the child restraint system
and the child occupant.
. Ensure that there is no article left in the
seatback pocket.
. Ensure that the backward-forward position and seatback of front passengers
seat are locked into place securely by
moving the seat back and forth. (Models

equipped with manual seats only)
If the ON indicator still remains illuminated
while the OFF indicator turns off after
taking relevant corrective actions described above, relocate the child restraint
system to the rear seat and immediately
contact your SUBARU dealer for an
inspection.
NOTE
When a child who has outgrown a child
restraint system or a small adult is
seated in the front passengers seat,
the SUBARU advanced frontal airbag
system may or may not activate the
front passengers SRS frontal airbag
depending on the occupants seating
posture. Children should always wear a
seatbelt when sitting in the seat irrespective of whether the airbag is
deactivated or activated. If the front
passengers SRS frontal airbag is activated (the ON indicator remains illuminated while the OFF indicator turns off),
take the following actions.
. Ensure that no article is placed on
the seat other than the occupant.
. Ensure that there is no article left in
the seatback pocket.
If the ON indicator still remains illumi-
Black plate (87,1)
nated while the OFF indicator turns off

despite the fact that the actions noted
above have been taken, seat the child/
small adult in the rear seat and immediately contact your SUBARU dealer
for an inspection. Even if the system
has passed the dealer inspection, it is
recommended that on subsequent trips
the child/small adult always take the
rear seat.
Children who have outgrown a child
restraint system should always wear the
seatbelt irrespective of whether the airbag
is deactivated or activated.
! Conditions in which front passengers SRS frontal airbag is activated
will be activated for deployment upon
impact when any of the following conditions is met regarding the front passengers seat.
. When the seat is occupied by an adult.
. When a heavy article is placed on the
seat.
CAUTION
When the front passengers seat is
occupied by an adult, observe the
following precautions. Failure to do
so may lessen the load on the front
passengers seat, deactivating the

despite the fact that the seat is
occupied by an adult. This may
result in personal injury.
. Do not allow the rear seat occupant to lift the front passengers
seat cushion using his/her feet.
. Do not place any article under the
front passenger s seat, or
squeeze any article from behind
and under the seat. This may lift
the seat cushion.
. Do not squeeze any article between the front passengers seat
and side trim/pillar, door or center console box. This may lift the
seat cushion.
! If the passengers frontal airbag
OFF indicator illuminates and
the ON indicator turns off even
when the front passengers seat
is occupied by an adult
This can be caused by the adult incorrectly sitting in the front passengers seat.
OFF position.
2. Ask the front passenger to set the
seatback to the upright position, sit up
straight in the center of the seat cushion,
correctly fasten the seatbelt, position his/
1-55
her legs out forward, and adjust the seat to

the rearmost position.
position.
If the OFF indicator remains illuminated
while the ON indicator remains off, take
the following actions.
OFF position.
2. Ensure that there is no article, book,
shoe, or other object trapped under the
seat, at the rear of the seat, or on the side
of the seat.
3. Ensure that the backward-forward
position and seatback of front passengers
position and wait 6 seconds to allow the
system to complete self-checking. Following the system check, both indicators turn
off for 2 seconds. Now, the ON indicator
should illuminate while the OFF indicator
remains off.
If the OFF indicator still remains illuminated while the ON indicator remains off,
ask the occupant to move to the rear seat
and immediately contact your SUBARU
dealer for an inspection.
CONTINUED
Black plate (88,1)
1-56
! How to contact the vehicle manufacturer concerning modifications

for persons with disabilities that
may affect the advanced airbag
system
Changing or moving any parts of the front
seats, seatbelts, front bumper, front side
frame, instrument panel, combination meter, steering wheel, steering column, tire,
suspension or floor panel can affect the
operation of the SUBARU advanced airbag system. If you have any questions,
you may contact the following SUBARU
distributors:
<Continental U.S., Alaska and the District
of Columbia>
Subaru of America, Inc.
Customer Dealer Services Department
P.O. Box 6000
Cherry Hill, NJ 08034-6000
1-800-SUBARU3 (1-800-782-2783)
<Hawaii>
Subaru Hawaii
2850 Pukoloa Street, Suite 202,
Honolulu, HI 96819-4467
808-839-2273
<Guam>
Shens Corporation dba Prestige Automobile
491, East Marine Corps Drive, Route 1
Dededo, Guam 96921-6255
671-633-2698
<Puerto Rico>
Trebol Motors
P.O. Box 11204, San Juan, Puerto Rico
00910
787-793-2828
<Canada>
Subaru Canada, Inc.
Consumer Support Department
560 Suffork Court, Mississauga, Ontario
L5R 4J7
1-800-894-4212
& System operation

CAUTION
Do not touch the SRS airbag system
components with bare hands right
after deployment. Doing so can
cause burns because the components can be very hot as a result of
deployment.
The SRS airbags can function only when
the ignition switch is in the ON position.
When the SRS airbag(s) deploy(s), a
sudden, fairly loud inflation noise will be
heard and some smoke will be released.
These occurrences are a normal result of
the deployment. This smoke does not
indicate a fire in the vehicle.
There are currently no SUBARU distributors in any other U.S. territories. If you are
in such an area, please contact the
SUBARU distributor or dealer from which
you bought your vehicle.
Black plate (89,1)
! SUBARU advanced frontal airbag

operation
activation or deactivation condition of the

depending on the total load on the front
passengers seat monitored by the front
passengers occupant detection system
weight sensor. For this reason, only the
drivers SRS frontal airbag may deploy in
the event of a collision, but this does not
mean failure of the system.
If the front sub sensors inside both front
fenders and the impact sensors in the
airbag control module detect a predetermined amount of force during a frontal
collision, the control module sends signals
to the airbag module(s) (only drivers
module or both drivers and front passengers modules) instructing the module(s)
to inflate the SRS frontal airbag(s). The
drivers and front passengers SRS frontal
airbags use dual stage inflators. The two
inflators of each airbag are triggered either
sequentially or simultaneously, depending
on the severity of impact in the case of the
drivers SRS frontal airbag and depending
on the severity of impact and the total load
on the seat in the case of the front
passengers SRS frontal airbag.
1)
2)
Drivers side
Passengers side
The SUBARU advanced frontal airbag

system is designed to determine the
After deployment, the SRS airbag immediately starts to deflate so that the drivers
vision is not obstructed and the drivers
ability to maintain control of the vehicle is
1-57
not impaired. The time required from

detecting impact to the deflation of the
SRS airbag after deployment is shorter
than the blink of an eye.
The drivers and front passengers seatbelt pretensioners operate at the same
time in both of the following cases.
. When only the drivers SRS frontal
airbag deploys
. When drivers and front passengers
SRS frontal airbags deploy
The drivers SRS frontal airbag and front
passengers SRS frontal airbag are designed to deploy in the event of an
accident involving a moderate to severe
frontal collision. They are not designed to
deploy in most lesser frontal impacts
because the necessary protection can be
achieved by the seatbelt alone. Also, they
are not designed to deploy in most side or
rear impacts or in most rollover accidents
because deployment of these airbags
would not help the occupant in those
situations. The drivers and front passengers SRS frontal airbags are designed to
function on a one-time-only basis.
SRS airbag deployment depends on the
level of force experienced in the passenger compartment during a collision. That
level differs from one type of collision to
another, and it may have no bearing on
CONTINUED
Black plate (90,1)
1-58
the visible damage done to the vehicle

itself.
! Examples of accident in which
the drivers/drivers and front
passengers SRS frontal
airbag(s) will most likely deploy
! Examples of the types of accidents in which it is possible that

the drivers/drivers and front
passengers SRS frontal
airbag(s) will deploy
both drivers and front passengers SRS

frontal airbags may be activated when the
vehicle sustains a hard impact in the
undercarriage area from the road surface
(such as when the vehicle plunges into a
deep ditch, is severely impacted or
knocked hard against an obstacle on the
road such as a curb).
A head-on collision against a thick concrete wall at a vehicle speed of 12 to 19

mph (20 to 30 km/h) or higher activates
only the drivers SRS frontal airbag or both
drivers and front passengers SRS frontal
airbags. The airbag(s) will also be activated when the vehicle is exposed to a
frontal impact similar in fashion and
magnitude to the collision described
above.
Only the drivers SRS frontal airbag or
Black plate (91,1)
! Examples of the types of accidents in which deployment of the drivers/

drivers and front passengers SRS frontal airbag(s) is unlikely to occur
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
1-59
The vehicle strikes an object, such as a

telephone pole or sign pole.
The vehicle slides under the load bed of
a truck.
The vehicle sustains an oblique offset
frontal impact.
The vehicle sustains an offset frontal
collision.
The vehicle strikes an object that can
move or deform, such as a parked
vehicle.
There are many types of collisions which

might not necessarily require deployment
of drivers/drivers and front passengers
SRS frontal airbag(s). In the event of
accidents like those illustrated, the drivers/drivers and front passengers SRS
frontal airbag(s) may not deploy depending on the level of accident forces involved.
CONTINUED
Black plate (92,1)
1-60
! Examples of the types of accidents in which the drivers/drivers and front passengers SRS
frontal airbag(s) is not designed
to deploy in most cases
frontal airbags are designed not to deploy

in most cases if the vehicle is struck from
the side or from behind, or if it rolls onto its
side or roof, or if it is involved in a lowspeed frontal collision.
1)
2)
be activated on the second impact.
WARNING
If the vehicle is damaged in an
accident but the SRS frontal airbag
does not deploy, contact your
SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.
First impact
Second impact
In an accident where the vehicle is

impacted more than once, the drivers
and/or front passengers SRS frontal
airbag(s) will deploy only once on the first
impact.
The drivers and front passengers SRS
Example: In the case of a double collision,

first with another vehicle, then against a
concrete wall in immediate succession,
once either or both of the drivers and front
passengers SRS frontal airbags is/are
activated on the first impact, it/they will not
Black plate (93,1)
! SRS seat cushion airbag operation
WARNING
The SRS seat cushion airbag is
designed not to deploy when the
seatbelt for the corresponding seat
is not fastened. For safety, all persons in the vehicle should fasten
their seatbelts.
1-61
NOTE
When the front passengers SRS frontal airbag is deactivated by the occupant detection system, the front passengers SRS seat cushion airbag is
also deactivated.
! SRS side airbag and SRS curtain
airbag operation
The SRS seat cushion airbags are designed to deploy simultaneously when the
SRS frontal airbags deploy. For details
about the operating conditions, refer to
SUBARU advanced frontal airbag operation F1-57.
The front passengers SRS seat cushion
airbag is designed not to deploy in either
of the following conditions.
. The front passengers seatbelt is not
fastened (even when the front passengers frontal airbag ON indicator illuminates while the OFF indicator remains off).
. The front passengers frontal airbag
ON indicator is off while the OFF indicator
illuminates.
1)
2)
Drivers side
Passengers side
The following airbags deploy independently of each other because each has
its own impact sensor.
. Drivers SRS side airbag
. Front passengers SRS side airbag
. SRS curtain airbag (right-hand side)
. SRS curtain airbag (left-hand side)
Therefore, they may not both deploy in the
same accident. Also, the SRS side airbag
CONTINUED
Black plate (94,1)
1-62
deploys independently of the drivers and

front passengers SRS frontal airbags in
the steering wheel and instrument panel.
An impact sensor, which senses impact
force, is located in each of the following
locations.
. In the left and right front doors
. In the left and right center pillars
. In the left and right rear wheel houses
. In the airbag control module
. In the left and right front fenders (only
SRS curtain airbags are designed to
deploy when the front sub sensors sense
a severe impact.)
A rollover sensor is also located inside the
airbag control module.
If both of the following sensors together
sense an impact force above a predetermined level in a side collision, the control
module causes both the SRS side airbag
and curtain airbag on the impacted side
to inflate regardless of whether the rear
wheel house impact sensor on the same
side senses an impact.
. the impact sensor that is located in the
airbag control module
. one of the center pillar impact sensors
or front door impact sensors
If both of the following sensors together
sense an impact force above a predetermined level in a side collision, the control
module causes only the SRS curtain
airbag on the impacted side to inflate.
. the impact sensor that is located in the
airbag control module
. one of the rear wheel house impact
sensors
Even if a frontal collision occurs, both right
and left SRS curtain airbags will deploy
when the front sensor and the control unit
determine that the impact results from an
offset frontal collision.
The SRS curtain airbags are designed to
deploy under the following conditions.
. The drivers SRS frontal airbag deploys
or the drivers and passengers SRS
frontal airbags deploy in a frontal collision.
. The system determines that the collision is an offset frontal collision.
. The vehicle is in an extremely inclined
state such as during a rollover.
The SRS curtain airbags are basically not
designed to deploy in the following cases.
. In a frontal collision when the SRS
frontal airbags do not deploy or the system
determines that the collision is other than
an offset frontal collision
. In most lesser inclined states
If the rollover sensor detects rollover of the

vehicle, the control module inflates the
SRS curtain airbags. At this time, the
drivers and front passengers seatbelt
pretensioners also operate at the same
time.
After the deployment, the SRS side airbag
immediately starts to deflate. The time
required from detection of an impact to
deflation of an SRS side airbag after
deployment is shorter than the blink of
an eye.
The SRS curtain airbag remains inflated
for a while following deployment then
slowly deflates.
The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain
airbag deploy even when no one occupies
the seat on the side on which an impact is
applied.
airbag are designed as follows:
. to deploy in the event of an accident
involving a moderate to severe side
impact collision
. to function on a one-time-only basis.
airbag are not designed to deploy in the
following cases:
. in most lesser side impacts
Black plate (95,1)
. in most rear impacts (because the SRS

side airbag and SRS curtain airbag
deployment would not protect the occupant in those situations)
1-63
! Example of the type of accident

in which the SRS side airbag will
most likely deploy

airbag deployment depend on the level of
force experienced in the passenger compartment during a side impact collision.
That level differs from one type of collision
to another, and it may have no bearing on
the visible damage done to the vehicle
itself.
A severe side impact near the front seat or

the rear seat.
CONTINUED
Black plate (96,1)
1-64
! Examples of the types of accidents in which the SRS curtain airbag will most
likely deploy
1)
2)
3)
4)
The vehicle is involved in a severe side

impact near the front seat or the rear
seat.
The vehicle rolls onto its side or the roof.
The angle of vehicle tip-up is marginal or
the skidding vehicles tires hit a curbstone laterally.
An offset frontal collision that is severe
enough to deploy the front airbag.
Black plate (97,1)
! Examples of the types of accidents in which it is possible that the SRS

curtain airbag will deploy
1)
2)
3)
1-65
Hitting a curb, edge of pavement or hard

surface
Falling into or jumping over a deep hole
Landing hard or vehicle falling
It is possible that the SRS curtain airbags

will deploy if a serious impact occurs to
the underside of your vehicle. Some
examples are shown in the illustration.
CONTINUED
Black plate (98,1)
1-66
! Examples of the types of accidents in which the SRS side airbag is unlikely
to deploy
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
The vehicle is involved in an oblique

side-on impact.
The vehicle is involved in a side-on
impact in an area outside the vicinity of
the passenger compartment.
The vehicle strikes a telephone pole or
similar object.
impact from a motorcycle.
The vehicle rolls onto its side or the roof.

might not necessarily require SRS side
airbag deployment. In the event of accidents like those illustrated, the SRS side
airbag may not deploy depending on the
level of accident forces involved.
Black plate (99,1)
! Examples of the types of accidents in which the SRS curtain airbag is

unlikely to deploy
1)
2)
3)
4)
1-67
The vehicle is involved in an oblique

side-on impact.
impact in an area outside the vicinity of
the passenger compartment.
The vehicle strikes a telephone pole or
similar object.
impact from a motorcycle.

might not necessarily require SRS curtain
airbag deployment. In the event of accidents like those illustrated, the SRS
curtain airbag may not deploy depending
on the level of accident forces involved.
CONTINUED
Black plate (100,1)
1-68
! Examples of the types of accidents in which the SRS side

airbag and SRS curtain airbag is
not designed to deploy in most
cases
2)
3)
ary). (Only the SRS side airbag is

designed not to deploy in most cases)
The vehicle is struck from behind.
The vehicle pitches end over end.
In the event of accidents like those

illustrated, the SRS side airbag and SRS
curtain airbag are not designed to deploy
in most cases.
immediately followed by another from the

same direction, once the SRS side airbag
and SRS curtain airbag are activated on
the first impact, they will not be activated
on the second.
& SRS airbag system monitors
SRS airbag system warning light

1)
2)
A)
B)
First impact
Second impact
SRS curtain airbag
SRS side airbag
In an accident where the vehicle is struck

from the side more than once, the SRS
side airbag and SRS curtain airbag deploy
only once on the first impact.
1)
The vehicle is involved in frontal collision

with another vehicle (moving or station-
Example: In the case of a double side

impact collision, first with one vehicle and
A diagnostic system continually monitors

the readiness of the SRS airbag system
(including front seatbelt pretensioners)
while the vehicle is being driven. The
SRS airbag system warning light will show
normal system operation by illuminating
for approximately 6 seconds when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON
position.
The following components are monitored
Black plate (101,1)
by the indicator.
. Front sub sensor
Right-hand side
Left-hand side
. Airbag control module (including impact sensors and rollover sensors)
. Frontal airbag module
Drivers side
Front passengers side
. Center pillar impact sensor
Right-hand side
Left-hand side
. Front door impact sensor
Right-hand side
Left-hand side
. Side airbag module
Drivers side
. Rear wheel house impact sensor
Right-hand side
Left-hand side
. Curtain airbag module
Right-hand side
Left-hand side
. Seat cushion airbag module
Drivers side
. Seatbelt pretensioner
Drivers side
. Seatbelt buckle switch

Drivers side
. Front passengers occupant detection
system sensor and control module
. Front passengers seatbelt tension
sensor
. Front passengers frontal airbag ON
and OFF indicator
. All related wiring
WARNING
If the warning light exhibits any of
the following conditions, there may
be a malfunction in the seatbelt
pretensioners and/or SRS airbag
system.
. Flashing or flickering of the warning light
. No illumination of the warning
light when the ignition switch is
first turned to the ON position
. Continuous illumination of the
warning light
. Illumination of the warning light
while driving
Immediately take your vehicle to
your nearest SUBARU dealer to
have the system checked. Unless
checked and properly repaired, the
1-69
seatbelt pretensioners and/or SRS

airbags will operate improperly (e.g.
SRS airbags may inflate in a very
minor collision or not inflate in a
severe collision), which may increase the risk of injury.
& SRS airbag system servicing

WARNING
. When discarding an airbag module or scrapping the entire vehicle damaged by a collision, consult your SUBARU dealer.
. The SRS airbag has no userserviceable parts. Do not use
electrical test equipment on any
circuit related to the SRS airbag
system. For required servicing of
the SRS airbag, consult your
nearest SUBARU dealer. Tampering with or disconnecting the
systems wiring could result in
accidental inflation of the SRS
airbag or could make the system
inoperative, which may result in
serious injury.
CONTINUED
Black plate (102,1)
1-70
CAUTION
If you need service or repair in areas
indicated in the following list, have
the work performed by an authorized SUBARU dealer. The SRS airbag control module, impact sensors
and airbag modules are stored in
these areas.
. Under the center console
. Inside each front fender
. Steering wheel and column and
nearby areas
. Top of the dashboard on front
passengers side and nearby
areas
. Each front seat and nearby area
. Inside each center pillar
. Inside each front door
. In each roof side (from the front
pillar to a point over the rear seat)
. Between the rear seat cushion
and rear wheel house on each
side
. Under the rear center seat
In the event that the SRS airbag is
deployed, replacement of the system
should be performed only by an authorized SUBARU dealer. When the compo-
nents of the SRS airbag system are

replaced, use only genuine SUBARU
parts.
NOTE
In the following cases, contact your
. The front part of the vehicle was
involved in an accident in which only
the drivers SRS frontal airbag or both
drivers and front passengers SRS
frontal airbags did not deploy.
. The pad of the steering wheel, the
cover over the front passengers SRS
frontal airbag, or either roof side (from
the front pillar to a point over the rear
seat) is scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged.
. The center pillar, front door, rear
wheel house or rear sub frame, or an
area near these parts, was involved in
an accident in which the SRS side
airbag and SRS curtain airbag did not
deploy.
. The fabric or leather of either front
seatback and seat cushion is cut,
frayed, or otherwise damaged.
. The rear part of the vehicle was
involved in an accident.
& Precautions against vehicle

modification
WARNING
. To avoid accidental activation of
the system or rendering the system inoperative, which may result in serious injury, no modifications should be made to any
components or wiring of the SRS
airbag system.
This includes the following modifications.
Installation of custom steering
wheels
Attachment of additional trim
materials to the dashboard
Installation of custom seats
Replacement of seat fabric or
leather
Installation of additional fabric
or leather on the front seat
Attachment of a hands-free
microphone or any other accessory to a front pillar, a
center pillar, a rear pillar, the
windshield, a side window, an
assist grip, or any other cabin
surface that would be near a
Black plate (103,1)
deploying SRS curtain airbag

Installation of additional electrical/electronic equipment
such as a mobile two-way
radio on or near the SRS
airbag system components
and/or wiring
Modifications on or inside the
front door panels for the purpose of a speaker replacement or sound insulation
. The impact sensors, which detect
the pressure of an impact, are
located in the doors. Do not
modify any components of the
doors or door trims, such as the
addition of door speakers for
example. Any modifications to
the doors create a risk of the
airbag system becoming inoperative or unintended airbag deployment.
1-71
plow, skid/sump plate, etc.) other

than genuine SUBARU accessory parts.
. Modification of the suspension
system or front end structure.
. Installation of a tire of different
size and construction from the
tires specified on the vehicle
placard attached to the drivers
door pillar or specified for individual vehicle models in this Owners Manual.
(side steps or side sill protectors,
etc.) other than genuine SUBARU
accessory parts to the side body.
Always consult your SUBARU dealer if

you want to install any accessory parts on
your vehicle.
CAUTION
Do not perform any of the following
modifications. Such modifications
can interfere with proper operation
of the SRS airbag system.
(bush bar, bullbar, winches, snow
Black plate (2,1)
Left Page
Black plate (3,1)
Keys and doors

Keys .....................................................................
2-3
Key number plate ................................................
2-3
Immobilizer ..........................................................
2-4
Certification for immobilizer system.....................

Security indicator light ........................................
Key replacement .................................................
2-4
2-5
2-5
Door locks ...........................................................
2-6
Locking and unlocking from the outside ..............

Locking and unlocking from the inside ................
Battery drainage prevention function ...................
2-6
2-7
2-8
Power door locking switches .............................
2-9
Key lock-in prevention function ...........................
2-9
Keyless access with push-button start

system (if equipped) .......................................
Access key ........................................................
Safety precautions .............................................
Locking and unlocking with keyless access
entry function...................................................
Selecting audible signal operation ......................
Selecting hazard warning flasher operation.........
Warning chimes and warning indicator ...............
Disabling keyless access function ......................
When access key does not operate properly .......
Replacing battery of access key .........................
Replacing access key.........................................
Certification for keyless access with push-button
start system .....................................................
2-10
2-10
2-11
2-14
2-18
2-18
2-18
2-18
2-20
2-20
2-20
2-21
PIN Code Access (models with keyless

access with push-button start system) .......
2-22
Registering a PIN code ......................................

Unlocking ..........................................................
2-22
2-23
Remote keyless entry system...........................
2-24
Operating the access key...................................

Operating the transmitter ...................................
Replacing the battery .........................................
Replacing lost transmitters ................................
Certification for remote keyless entry system .....
2-25
2-26
2-27
2-27
2-27
Alarm system .....................................................
2-28
System alarm operation .....................................

Activating and deactivating the alarm system .....
If you have accidentally triggered the alarm
system ............................................................
Arming the system ............................................
Disarming the system ........................................
Valet mode ........................................................
Tripped sensor identification ..............................
Shock sensors (dealer option)............................
2-29
2-29
2-29
2-30
2-32
2-33
2-33
2-33
Child safety locks ..............................................

Windows.............................................................
2-34
2-34
Power window operation by driver .....................

Power window operation by passengers.............
Initialization of power window ............................
2-34
2-37
2-38
Trunk lid (Legacy) ..............................................
2-38
To open and close the trunk lid from outside......

To open the trunk lid from inside........................
Internal trunk lid release handle .........................
2-39
2-39
2-39
Black plate (4,1)
Keys and doors
Rear gate (Outback) ...........................................
2-41
Moonroof (if equipped)......................................
2-48
Manual rear gate (if equipped) ............................

Power rear gate (if equipped)..............................
2-41
2-42
Moonroof switches ............................................

Sun shade .........................................................
2-49
2-50
Black plate (107,1)
Keys and doors/Keys
Keys
NOTE
. Drivers door
. Glove box
. Trunk lid (Legacy)
For models with keyless access with

push-button start system, refer to
Keyless access with push-button start
system F2-10.
The valet key fits only the ignition switch

and door locks. You can keep the glove
box locked when you leave your vehicle
and valet key at a parking facility.
2-3
& Key number plate

The key number is stamped on the key
number plate attached to the key set.
Write down the key number and keep it in
another safe place, not in the vehicle. This
number is needed to make a replacement
key if you lose your key or lock it inside the
vehicle.
CAUTION
Do not attach a large key holder or
key case to either key. If it bangs
against your knees while you are
driving, it could turn the ignition
switch from the ON position to the
ACC or LOCK position, thereby
stopping the engine.
1)
2)
3)
4)
Master key
Submaster key
Valet key
Key number plate
Three types of keys are provided for your

vehicle:
Master key, submaster key and valet key.
The master key and submaster key fit all
locks on your vehicle.
. Ignition switch
Black plate (108,1)
2-4
Keys and doors/Immobilizer
Immobilizer
The immobilizer system is designed to
prevent an unauthorized person from
starting the engine. Only keys registered
with your vehicles immobilizer system can
be used to operate your vehicle. This
system, however, is not a 100% anti-theft
guaranty.
push-button start system:
If you press the push-button ignition
switch when carrying an unregistered
access key, the switch will not turn to the
ON position and the engine will not start.
If the engine does not start, perform the
procedure described in Starting engine
F9-19.
For models without keyless access
with push-button start system:
Even if an unregistered key fits into the
ignition switch and can be turned to the
START position, the engine will automatically stop after several seconds.
If the engine does not start, pull out the
key once before trying again. Refer to
Ignition switch (models without pushbutton start system) F3-4.
CAUTION
. Do not place the key under direct
sunlight or anywhere it may
become hot.
. Do not get the key wet. If the key
gets wet, wipe it dry with a cloth
immediately.
. Do not modify or remove the
system. If modified or removed,
the proper operation of the system cannot be guaranteed.
& Certification for immobilizer

system
. For models with keyless access
Refer to Certification for keyless access
with push-button start system F2-21.
. For models without keyless access
U.S.-spec. models
FCC ID: MOZRI-38BFH
CAUTION
NOTE
. To protect your vehicle from theft,
please pay close attention to the following security precautions:
Never leave your vehicle unattended with its keys inside.
Before leaving your vehicle,
close all windows and the moonroof, and lock the doors (all models)
and rear gate (Outback).
Do not leave spare keys or any
record of your key number in the
vehicle.
. The vehicle has a maintenance-free
type immobilizer system.
FCC WARNING
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void
the users authority to operate the
equipment.
This device complies with part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept
any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Black plate (109,1)
Keys and doors/Immobilizer
Canada-spec. models
Mexico-spec. models
2-5
& Key replacement

Your key number plate will be required if
you ever need a replacement key made.
Any new key must be registered for use
with your vehicles immobilizer system
before it can be used. The maximum
number of keys that can be registered
for use with one vehicle is as follows.
. Four (models without keyless access
with push-button start system)
. Seven (models with keyless access
& Security indicator light

Refer to Security indicator light F3-30.
One key that has already been registered

is required in order to register a new key.
If you lose a key, the lost keys ID code still
remains in the memory of the vehicles
immobilizer system. For security reasons,
the lost keys ID code should be erased
from the memory. To erase the lost keys
ID code, all keys that will be used are
required.
For details about new key registration and
erasing the lost keys ID code, contact
your SUBARU dealer.
Black plate (110,1)
2-6
Keys and doors/Door locks
Door locks
the ON position.
& Locking and unlocking from

the outside
NOTE
For details about the alarm system,

refer to Alarm system F2-28.
If you unlock the drivers door with a

key (including a mechanical key) and
open the door while the alarm system
is armed, the alarm system is triggered
and the vehicles horn sounds. In this
case, perform any of the following
operations:
Models with keyless access with
. Press any button on the access key
(except when the access key battery is
discharged).
. Turn the push-button ignition switch
to the ACC position.
. Carry the access key and perform
either of the following procedures.
Grip the front door handle
Press the rear gate opener button
NOTE
To lock the drivers door from the outside

with the key, turn the key toward the front.
The mechanical key is directional. If the

key cannot be inserted, change the
direction that the grooved side is
facing and insert it again.
To unlock the door, turn the key toward the

rear. Pull the outside door handle to open
an unlocked door.
Models without keyless access with

. Press any button on the remote
transmitter (except when the transmitter battery is discharged).
. Insert the key into the ignition
switch and turn the ignition switch to
Black plate (111,1)
2-7
& Locking and unlocking from

the inside
WARNING
Locking without the key

1) Rotate the lock lever forward.
2) Close the door.
To lock the door from the outside without

the key, rotate the lock lever forward and
then close the door.
Locking without the key

1) Press the front side of the power door
locking switch.
2) Close the door.
To lock the door from the outside using the

power door locking switch, press the front
side of the switch (LOCK side) and then
close the door. In this case, all closed
doors and the rear gate (Outback) are
locked at the same time.
Keep all doors locked when you

drive, especially when small children are in your vehicle.
Along with the proper use of seatbelts and child restraints, locking
the doors reduces the chance of
being thrown out of the vehicle in an
accident.
It also helps prevent passengers
from falling out by preventing a door
from being accidentally opened, and
intruders from unexpectedly opening doors and entering your vehicle.
Always make sure that all doors and the

rear gate are locked before leaving your
vehicle.
NOTE
Make sure that you do not leave the key
inside the vehicle before locking the
doors from the outside without the key.
CONTINUED
Black plate (112,1)
2-8
& Battery drainage prevention

function
If a door or the rear gate (Outback) is not
completely closed, the interior lights will
remain illuminated as a result. However,
several lights are automatically turned off
by the battery drainage prevention function to prevent the battery from going
dead. The following interior lights are
affected by this function.
1)
2)
Unlock
Lock
To lock the door from the inside, rotate the

lock lever forward. To unlock the door from
the inside, rotate the lock lever rearward.
The red mark on the lock lever appears
when the door is unlocked.
Pull the inside door handle to open an
unlocked door.
Always make sure that all doors and the
rear gate (Outback) are closed before
starting to drive.
Item
Switch
position
Automatically turning
off
Map lights
OFF*1
Approximately 20
minutes later
Dome light
DOOR
Approximately 20
minutes later
Ignition
switch light
Approximately 20
minutes later
Door step
lights
None*2
DOOR
Approximately 20
minutes later
Cargo area
light
*1: The map lights can be controlled by the

battery drainage prevention function only when
the map light switches are in the OFF position
and the door interlock switch is in the DOOR
position. For the switch positions, refer to Map
light F6-2.
*2: The door step lights are not affected by the
battery drainage prevention function, so the
lights do not turn off automatically. To turn off

the lights, it is necessary that each door is
completely closed.
The operational/non-operational setting of

this function can be changed by a
SUBARU dealer. Contact the nearest
SUBARU dealer if you would like to
change the setting.
NOTE
. The factory setting (default setting)
for this function is set as operational.
. When leaving the vehicle, please
make sure that all doors and the rear
gate (Outback) are completely closed.
. The battery drainage prevention
function does not operate under the
following condition.
While the push-button ignition
switch is in ACC or ON (models
with the push-button ignition
switch)
While the key is in the ignition
switch (models without the pushbutton ignition switch)
. Models with the push-button ignition
switch are also equipped with the
battery drainage prevention function
for the push-button ignition switch.
For details, refer to Battery drainage
prevention function F3-8.
Black plate (113,1)
Keys and doors/Power door locking switches
Power door locking switches
NOTE
Make sure that you do not leave the key
inside the vehicle before locking the
doors from the outside using the power
door locking switches.
& Key lock-in prevention function
1)
2)
Lock
Unlock
All doors and the rear gate (Outback) can

be locked and unlocked by the power door
locking switches located at the drivers
side and the front passengers side doors.
To lock the doors, press the front side of
the switch.
To unlock the doors, press the rear side of
the switch.
When you close the doors after you set
the door locks, the doors remain locked.
This function prevents the doors from

being locked under the following conditions.
. The key is still in the ignition switch
(models without keyless access with
push-button start system)
. The ignition switch is in the ON
position (models with keyless access with
2-9
! Behavior with key lock-in prevention function operational

With the drivers door open, the doors are
automatically kept unlocked even if the
front side of the power door locking switch
is pressed.
! Behavior with key lock-in prevention function non-operational
. If the lock lever is turned to the rear
(LOCK) position with the drivers door
open and the drivers door is then closed
with the lock lever in that position, the
drivers door is locked.
. If the spare key is used to lock the
drivers door from the outside of the
vehicle, the door is locked.
This functions operational/non-operational setting can be changed by a

SUBARU dealer. Contact a SUBARU
dealer for details.
NOTE
. The factory setting (default setting)
for this function is set as operational.
. When leaving the vehicle, make sure
you are holding the key before locking
the doors.
Black plate (114,1)
2-10
Keys and doors/Keyless access with pushbutton start system
Keyless access with pushbutton start system (if

equipped)
The keyless access with push-button start
system allows you to perform the following
functions when you are carrying the
access key.
. Locking and unlocking of the doors and
rear gate (Outback)
. Opening the trunk (Legacy)
. Starting and stopping the engine. For
detailed information, refer to Starting and
stopping engine (models with push-button
start system) F7-12.
. Arming and disarming the alarm system. For detailed information, refer to
Alarm system F2-28.
Locking and unlocking by the remote
keyless entry system can also be controlled with the buttons on the access key.
For detailed information, refer to Remote
keyless entry system F2-24.
& Access key
1)
2)
3)
Access key (main)

Access key (sub)
Key number plate
The vehicle has two access keys and a

key number plate. For details about the
key number plate, refer to Key number
plate F2-3.
vehicle and the access key (with the

mechanical key removed) at a parking
facility.
1)
2)
Release button
Mechanical key
While pressing the release button of the

access key, take out the mechanical key.
A mechanical key is attached to each

access key. The mechanical key is used
for the following operations.
. Locking and unlocking the drivers door
. Locking and unlocking the glove box
. Unlocking the trunk lid (Legacy)
You cannot unlock the glove box without
using the mechanical key. You can keep
the glove box locked when you leave your
Black plate (115,1)
& Safety precautions

! Regarding radio wave
WARNING
If you wear an implanted pacemaker
or an implanted defibrillator, stay at
least 8.7 in (22 cm) away from the
transmitting antennas installed on
the vehicle.
The radio waves from the transmitting antennas on the vehicle could
adversely affect the operation of
implanted pacemakers and implanted defibrillators.
If you wear electric medical equipment other than an implanted pacemaker or an implanted defibrillator,
before using the keyless access
with push-button start system, refer
to Radio waves used for the keyless access with push-button start
system F2-13, and contact the
electric medical equipment manufacturer for more information. The
radio waves from the transmitting
antennas on the vehicle could adversely affect the operation of the
electric medical equipment.
CAUTION
When you carry the access key on
an airplane, do not press the button
of the access key while in the
airplane. When any button of the
access key is pressed, radio waves
are sent and may affect the operation of the airplane. When you carry
the access key in a bag on an
airplane, take measures to prevent
the buttons of the access key from
being pressed.
NOTE
The status of the access key and
environmental conditions may interfere
with the communication between the
access key and the vehicle under the
. When operating near a source of
strong radio waves or other interference, such as a broadcast station or
power transmission lines
. When products that transmit radio
waves are used, such as an access key
or a remote transmitter key of another
vehicle
. When carrying the access key of
your vehicle together with an access
key or a remote transmitter of another
2-11
vehicle
. When the access key is placed near
wireless communication equipment
such as a cell phone, or near a metallic
object
. When metallic accessories are attached to the access key
. When carrying the access key with
electronic appliances such as a laptop
computer
. When the battery of the access key
is discharged
In such cases, it may not be possible to
lock or unlock the doors or start the
engine.
! Regarding malfunction
CAUTION
. Never leave or store the access
key inside the vehicle or within
6.6 ft (2 m) around the vehicle
(e.g., in the garage). The access
key may be locked inside the
vehicle, or the battery may discharge rapidly. Note that the
push-button ignition switch may
not turn on in some cases depending on the location of the
access key.
. The access key contains electro CONTINUED
Black plate (116,1)
2-12
nic components. Observe the

following precautions to prevent
malfunctions or battery discharge.
Although you can replace the
battery of the access key by
yourself, it is recommended
that the battery be replaced by
a SUBARU dealer to avoid the
risk of damage at the time of
replacement.
Do not get the access key wet.
If the access key gets wet,
wipe it off immediately and let
it dry completely.
Do not apply strong impacts
to the access key.
Keep the access key away
from magnetic sources.
Never leave the access key in
direct sunlight or anywhere
that may become hot, such
as on the dashboard. It may
damage the battery or cause
circuit malfunctions.
Do not wash the access key in
an ultrasonic washer.
Do not leave the access key in
humid or dusty locations, or
near personal computers or
home electric appliances.
NOTE
After the vehicle battery is discharged
or replaced, initialization of the steering
lock system may be required to start
the engine. In this case, perform the
following procedure to initialize the
steering lock.
1) Turn the push-button ignition
switch to the OFF position. For details, refer to Switching power status
F3-7.
2) Open and close the drivers door.
3) Wait for approximately 10 seconds.
When the steering is locked, the initialization is completed.
! Regarding access key
CAUTION
If the access key is dropped, the
integrated mechanical key inside
may become loose. Be careful not
to lose the mechanical key.
NOTE
. The access key is always communicating with the vehicle and is con-
tinuously using the battery. Although

the life of the battery varies depending
on the operating conditions, it is approximately 1 to 2 years. If the battery
becomes fully discharged, replace it
with a new one.
. If an access key is lost, it is
recommended that the access key be
reregistered. For reregistration of an
access key, contact a SUBARU dealer.
. Up to 7 access keys can be registered for one vehicle. For a spare
access key, contact a SUBARU dealer.
. Carefully store the key number plate
supplied with the access key. It is
necessary for vehicle repair and additional registration of access keys.
. Do not leave the access key in the
storage spaces inside the vehicle.
Vibrations may damage the key or turn
on the switch, possibly resulting in a
lockout.
! Regarding setting
NOTE
. The operational/non-operational
setting for the keyless access function
can be changed. For the setting procedure, refer to Disabling keyless access function F2-18. The setting can
also be changed by a SUBARU dealer.
For more details, contact a SUBARU
Black plate (117,1)
2-13
dealer.
. For detailed information about the
operation method for the push-button
ignition switch while the keyless access function is switched to the nonoperational mode, refer to Access key
if access key does not operate
properly F9-18.
! Radio waves used for the keyless

access with push-button start system
system uses radio waves of 134 kHz, in
addition to the radio waves used for the
remote keyless entry system. The radio
waves are periodically output from the
antennas installed on the vehicle as
shown in the following illustrations.
Legacy
1) Antenna
Outback
1) Antenna
CONTINUED
Black plate (118,1)
2-14
& Locking and unlocking with

keyless access entry function
! Operating ranges
Outback
1) Antenna
2) Operating range
Legacy
1) Antenna
2) Operating range
. The operating range of the door locking/unlocking function is approximately 16

to 32 in (40 to 80 cm) from the respective
door handle.
. For Legacy, the operating range of the
trunk opening function is approximately 16
to 32 in (40 to 80 cm) from the trunk
opener button.
. For Outback, the operating range of
the rear gate locking/unlocking function is
approximately 16 to 32 in (40 to 80 cm)
from the rear gate ornament.
1)
LED indicator
When the access key is within either of the

operating ranges of the front doors, the
LED indicator on the access key flashes.
When the keyless access functions are
disabled, the LED indicator does not flash
unless a button on the access key is
pressed.
! Operating range tips
Regarding malfunction:
The keyless access function may not
operate properly due to the following
reasons.
. The access key is placed too close to
the vehicle body (in this case, repeat the
operation from further away).
. The access key is placed near the
ground or in an elevated location from the
Black plate (119,1)
ground, even if it is in the indicated

operating range.
. The status of the access key and the
radio wave conditions around the vehicle
(in this case, perform the procedure
described in Locking and unlocking
F9-18.
Precautions:
. When the access key is within the
operating range, it is possible for anyone,
even someone who is not carrying the
access key, to operate the keyless access
function. Please note that the keyless
access function is only available for the
following items when the access key is
detected within operating range.
Door handle
Door lock sensor
Rear gate opener button (Outback)
Trunk opener button (Legacy)
Rear lock button (Outback)
. It is not possible to lock the doors and
rear gate using the keyless access function when the access key is inside the
vehicle. However, depending on the status
of the access key and the environmental
conditions, the access key may be locked
inside the vehicle. Before locking, make
sure that you have the access key.
. The operating ranges may be reduced,
or the keyless access function may not
operate in the following cases:

When the battery of the access key
is discharged
When the access key is in a
location with strong radio waves or
noise (e.g., near a radio tower, power
plant, broadcast station or an area
where wireless equipment is used)
While talking on a cell phone
In such a case, perform the procedure
described in Locking and unlocking
F9-18.
. When an access key is in the operating
range, if the door handle becomes wet
due to exposure to a significant amount of
water when the vehicle is washed or
during heavy rain, the doors may be
locked or unlocked.
! How to use keyless access functions
! Keyless access function tips
. Turn off the push-button ignition switch
before locking the doors (including rear
gate) using the keyless access function. It
is not possible to lock the doors (including
the rear gate) using the keyless access
function when the push-button ignition
switch is on the ACC or ON position.
For details about turning off the push-
2-15
button ignition switch, refer to Switching

power status F3-7.
. If the door handle is gripped with a
gloved hand, the door lock may not be
released.
. If the door lock sensor is touched three
times or more repeatedly, the system will
ignore the sensor operation.
. When performing the locking procedure too quickly, locking may not have
been completed. After locking the doors, it
is recommended to pull the REAR door
handles to confirm that the doors have
been locked.
. It is possible to lock the doors even
when one of the doors is open. After
performing the locking procedure, close
the opened door or rear gate to lock it.
. Within 3 seconds after locking the
doors and the rear gate by using the
keyless access function, it is not possible
to unlock doors and/or the rear gate by
using the keyless access function.
. When locking, be sure to carry the
access key to prevent locking the access
key in the vehicle.
CONTINUED
Black plate (120,1)
2-16
! Unlocking
Carry the access key, and grip the door

handle.
. When the drivers door handle is
gripped, only the drivers door will be
unlocked.
. When the front passengers door handle is gripped, all doors (for Outback,
including the rear gate) will be unlocked.
! Opening rear gate (Outback)
1)
Rear gate opener button
Carry the access key, and press the rear

gate opener button. Only the rear gate will
be unlocked and opened. Also, an electronic chirp will sound twice and the
hazard warning flashers will flash twice.
! Opening trunk (Legacy)
1)
Trunk opener button
Carry the access key, and press the trunk

opener button. The trunk will open.
An electronic chirp will sound twice and
the hazard warning flashers will flash
twice.
Also, an electronic chirp will sound twice

and the hazard warning flashers will flash
twice.
Black plate (121,1)
! Locking with the door lock

sensor
perform the unlocking operation once

first. You can then touch the door lock
sensor to lock the doors.
! Locking with the rear lock button
(Outback)
1)
Door lock sensor
Carry the access key, close all doors (for

Outback, including the rear gate) and
touch the door lock sensor on the door
handle. All doors including the rear gate
will be locked. Also, an electronic chirp will
sound once and the hazard warning
flashers will flash once.
NOTE
After touching the door lock sensor to
lock all of the doors (including the rear
gate), if you touch the door lock sensor
once more to attempt the lock operation without first unlocking the doors,
nothing will happen, even if the door
lock sensor is touched. In this case,
1)
Rear lock button
Carry the access key, close all doors

including the rear gate and press the rear
lock button. The rear gate and all doors
will be locked. Also, an electronic chirp will
sound once and the hazard warning
flashers will flash once.
! Power saving function
To protect the access key battery and the
vehicle battery, the keyless access function will be disabled as follows.
. When the keyless access function and
2-17
the remote keyless entry system have not

been used:
(1) 5 days after the push-button ignition switch has been turned off, communication between the antennas and
the access key will be stopped.
(2) 9 days after step (1), the sensors
(both lock sensor and unlock sensor)
on the front passengers door will be
disabled.
. When the access key has been left in
the operating range for 10 minutes or
longer while all doors are locked, the
keyless access function will be disabled.
! Recovery from power saving
mode
When one of the following operations is
performed, the keyless access function
will be recovered.
. Unlock by gripping the door handle
(only when the sensors on the front
passengers door are not disabled) or
pressing the rear gate opener button on
the rear gate (Outback)/trunk opener
button on the trunk lid (Legacy)
. Lock or unlock by the remote keyless
entry system
. Open a door and then close it
. Turn the push-button ignition switch to
the ON position
CONTINUED
Black plate (122,1)
2-18
! Door unlock selection function

The door unlock selection function makes
the following operations possible.
. Unlocking the drivers door without
unlocking any other doors (including the
rear gate) when gripping the drivers door
handle
. For Outback, opening the rear gate
without unlocking any doors when pressing the rear gate opener button
The operational/non-operational setting
for this function can be changed by
operating the multi information display.
For details, refer to Keyless Entry System F3-45. The setting can also be
changed by a SUBARU dealer. Consult
your SUBARU dealer for details.
Operational:
. Only the drivers door will be unlocked
when the drivers door handle is gripped.
. For Outback, the rear gate will open,
but the other doors will remain locked
when the rear gate opener button is
pressed.
Non-operational:
. All doors and the rear gate will be
unlocked when the drivers door handle is
gripped.
. For Outback, the rear gate will open
and all doors will be unlocked when the
rear gate opener button is pressed.

The factory setting (default setting) is set
as operational.
& Selecting audible signal operation

Using an electronic chirp, the system will
give you an audible signal when the doors
are locked or unlocked. If desired, you can
turn the audible signal off by operating the
multi information display. For details, refer
to Keyless Entry System F3-45.
Furthermore, the volume setting of the
audible signal can also be changed by a
SUBARU dealer. Consult your SUBARU
dealer for details.
& Warning chimes and warning

indicator
system is equipped with a warning chime
and the access key warning indicator in
order to minimize improper operations and
help protect your vehicle from theft.
For details, refer to Warning chimes and
warning indicator of the keyless access
with push-button start system F3-25.
& Disabling keyless access

function
When the vehicle is not going to be used
for a long time, or when you choose not to
use the keyless access function, the
keyless access function can be disabled.
& Selecting hazard warning

flasher operation
Using the hazard warning flasher, the
system will give you a visible signal when
the doors are locked or unlocked. If
desired, you can turn the hazard warning
flashers off by operating the multi information display. For details, refer to Keyless
Entry System F3-45. The setting can
Consult your SUBARU dealer for details.
Black plate (123,1)
WARNING
If you have an implanted pacemaker
or an implanted defibrillator, perform the procedure By operating
the drivers door F2-20 to disable
the keyless access function. If you
perform the procedure By operating the access key F2-19, the
operation of an implanted pacemaker or implanted defibrillator
may be affected by the radio waves
from the transmitter antenna.
When the keyless access functions are not going to be used
! Disabling functions
! By operating the access key
If you have registered a PIN code for PIN
Code Access, you can disable the keyless
access function by operating the access
key. For details about registering a PIN
code, refer to Registering a PIN code
F2-22.
1. Open the drivers door.
3. Press and hold the button and
button on the access key simultaneously for more than 5 seconds.
NOTE
. The locking and unlocking function
by the remote keyless entry system is
not disabled.
. The setting can also be changed at
SUBARU dealers. For more details,
contact a SUBARU dealer.
. To start the engine while the functions are disabled, perform the procedure described in Starting engine
F9-19.
. We recommend that you disable the
keyless access functions under the
When the vehicle is not going to
be used for an extended period of
time
2-19
A chirp sound will be heard, and the

function will be disabled.
2. Rotate the lock lever forward.
CONTINUED
Black plate (124,1)
2-20
! By operating the drivers door

1. Sit in the drivers seat, and close the
door.
7. Within 10 seconds after step 6 is

performed, close and open the drivers
door once.
performed, close the door.
A chirp sound will be heard, and the
functions will be disabled.
NOTE
2. Push the rear side (unlock side) of the

power door locking switch.
performed, open the drivers door.
performed, push the rear side (unlock
side) of the power door locking switch
twice while the door is open.
performed, close and open the drivers
door twice.
performed, push the rear side (unlock
side) of the power door locking switch
twice while the door is open.
drivers door: a chirp will not be

heard
When disabling by operating the
access key: a chirp will be heard
& When access key does not

operate properly
Refer to Access key if access key does
not operate properly F9-18.
In steps 4 and 6, press the power door

locking switch firmly. If the switch is
not pressed firmly, the functions may
not be disabled.
& Replacing battery of access

key
! Enabling functions
When the procedure to disable the functions is performed again, a chirp sound will
be heard, and the functions are enabled.
& Replacing access key
NOTE
Refer to Replacing battery of access key

F11-50.
Access keys can be replaced at SUBARU

dealers. For more details, contact a
SUBARU dealer.
. The keyless access function will be

enabled only if you perform the procedure in the same manner you disabled
the function (for example, when disabling by operating the drivers door,
the function will not be enabled even if
you operate the access key).
. Press the push-button ignition
switch if you do not know the procedure in which the keyless access
function was disabled.
When disabling by operating the
Black plate (125,1)
& Certification for keyless access with push-button start

system
. Canada-spec. models
2-21
. Mexico-spec. models
. U.S.-spec. models
FCC ID: HYQ14AHC
FCC ID: Y8PFJ142
FCC ID: Y8PSSPIMB02
CAUTION
FCC WARNING
equipment.
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that
may cause undesired operation.
IFT
RLVDE1413-2269
14AHC
DENSO
Black plate (126,1)
2-22
Keys and doors/PIN Code Access (models with keyless access with pushbutton start system)
& Registering a PIN code
PIN Code Access (models

with keyless access with
! Preparation
1)
1)
Trunk opener button (Legacy)
Rear lock button (Outback)
While all doors (for Outback, including the

rear gate) are locked, you can unlock the
doors (including rear gate) without a key
by performing the following procedure.
. Legacy: press the trunk opener button
. Outback: press the rear lock button
NOTE
PIN Code Access will be helpful if the
key is accidentally left in the vehicle. It
is recommended that a 5-digit security
code (PIN code) is registered.
1. Turn off the ignition switch.

2. Close all doors (including trunk/rear
gate).
3. Press and hold the button on the
access key. Then all doors (including rear
gate) will be locked.
4. Keep the button pressed, and
press the following button within 5 seconds after step 3.
. Legacy: the trunk opener button
. Outback: the rear lock button
5. Press and hold the above button for
more than 5 seconds. Then a chirp will
sound.
6. Press the button on the access key
while the chirp sounds.
Then the chirp will stop and the preparation is complete.
NOTE
If you do not press the button on
the access key, the chirp will sound for
30 seconds. In this case, the preparation for registering a PIN code does not
complete even if the chirp stops.
Black plate (127,1)
Keys and doors/PIN Code Access (models with keyless access with pushbutton start system)
! Registration
For example, to register 32468 as the
PIN code, perform the following procedure.
Legacy:
1. Press the trunk opener button three
times.
2. After a buzzer (ding) sounds once,
press the trunk opener button twice.
press the trunk opener button four times.
press the trunk opener button six times.
press the trunk opener button eight times.
6. Perform steps 1 to 5 again within
approximately 30 seconds after the buzzer starts sounding intermittently.
7. All doors will be unlocked and locked.
Then the PIN code will be registered.
Outback:
1. Press the rear lock button three times.
press the rear lock button twice.
press the rear lock button four times.
press the rear lock button six times.
press the rear lock button eight times.

6. Perform steps 1 to 5 again within
approximately 30 seconds after the buzzer starts sounding intermittently.
7. All doors (including rear gate) will be
unlocked and locked. Then the PIN code
will be registered.
NOTE
. Press the trunk opener button/rear
lock button ten times to enter 0.
. Change the PIN code frequently to
protect your vehicle from theft.
. If you have lent your vehicle to
another person, confirm that the PIN
code has not been changed or deleted.
If the PIN code has been changed or
deleted, reregister a new PIN code.
. If you make an error during the
registration procedure, press the
or button on the access key.
Then, start over from the procedure
described in Preparation.
. To protect your vehicle from theft,
you cannot register 00000 to 99999
or 12345 as a PIN code.
. Do not register your vehicle license
plate number or simple numbers such
as 11122 or 12121 as a PIN code.
Doing so will increase the risk of
vehicle theft.
. When you try to register 22222,
2-23
the registered PIN code will be deleted.

You cannot unlock the doors by PIN
Code Access until a new code is
registered.
. After registering a new PIN code,
make sure that you can unlock the
doors using the PIN code.
. The PIN code cannot be deleted
while the keyless access function is
disabled by operating the access key.
. Reregister the PIN code in the
following case.
when you forget the PIN code
when you want to change the PIN
code
& Unlocking
Perform steps 1 to 5 described in Registration.
NOTE
. You cannot unlock by PIN Code
Access in the following cases.
when the access key is within the
operating ranges
when the ignition switch is in the
ACC or ON position
. If you make an operation error
during the unlocking procedure, start
over with the unlocking procedure after
waiting for 5 seconds or longer.
. To protect your vehicle from theft, a
CONTINUED
Black plate (128,1)
2-24
Keys and doors/Remote keyless entry system
buzzer will sound if incorrect PIN codes

are entered five times continuously. If
this occurs, you cannot unlock the
doors by PIN Code Access for 5
minutes.
Remote keyless entry system

CAUTION
. Do not expose the remote transmitter to severe shocks, such as
those experienced as a result of
dropping or throwing.
. Do not take the remote transmitter apart except when replacing
the battery.
. Do not get the remote transmitter
wet. If it gets wet, wipe it dry with
a cloth immediately.
. When you carry the remote transmitter on an airplane, do not
press the button of the remote
transmitter while in the airplane.
When any button of the remote
transmitter is pressed, radio
waves are sent and may affect
the operation of the airplane.
When you carry the remote transmitter in a bag on an airplane,
take measures to prevent the
buttons of the remote transmitter
from being pressed.
key is used as the transmitter for the

remote keyless entry system. For models
without keyless access with push-button
start system, the transmitter for the
remote keyless entry system is located
inside the key head.
The remote keyless entry system has the
following functions.
. Locking and unlocking the doors (and
rear gate for Outback) without a key
. Opening the trunk lid (Legacy) without
key
. Sounding a panic alarm
. Arming and disarming the alarm system. For detailed information, refer to
Alarm system F2-28.
The operable distance of the remote
keyless entry system is approximately 30
feet (10 meters). However, this distance
will vary depending on environmental
conditions. The systems operable distance will be shorter in areas near a
facility or electronic equipment emitting
strong radio waves such as a power plant,
broadcast station, TV tower, or remote
controller of home electronic appliances.

push-button start system, the access
Black plate (129,1)
& Operating the access key

NOTE
The remote keyless entry system will
not be activated when the push-button
ignition switch is in any position other
than the OFF position.
Access key
1) Lock/arm button
2) Unlock/disarm button
3) Trunk lid opener/rear gate unlock button
4) PANIC button
! Locking the doors

Press the lock/arm button to lock all doors
and rear gate (Outback). When the doors
(including the rear gate) are locked, an
electronic chirp will sound once and the
hazard warning flashers will flash once.
If any of the doors (or the rear gate/trunk

lid) is not fully closed, the following will
occur to alert you that the doors (or the
rear gate/trunk lid) are not properly closed.
. an electronic chirp sounds five times.
. the hazard warning flashers flash five
times.
When you close the door, it will automatically lock and then the following will
occur.
. an electronic chirp sounds once.
. the hazard warning flashers flash once.
! Unlocking the doors
Press the unlock/disarm button to unlock
the drivers door. An electronic chirp will
sound twice and the hazard warning
flashers will flash twice. To unlock all
doors and the rear gate (Outback), briefly
press the unlock/disarm button a second
time within 5 seconds.
NOTE
If the interval between the first and
second presses of the unlock/disarm
button (for unlocking of all of the doors
and the rear gate) is extremely short,
the system may not respond.
2-25
! Opening the trunk lid (Legacy)

Press and hold the trunk lid opener button
to open the trunk lid. An electronic chirp
will sound twice and the hazard warning
flashers will flash twice.
! Unlocking the rear gate (Outback)
Press the rear gate unlock button to
unlock the rear gate. An electronic chirp
! Selecting audible signal operation
are locked or unlocked. If desired, you can
turn the audible signal off by operating the
Furthermore, the volume setting of the
audible signal can also be changed by a
dealer for details.
! Selecting hazard warning flasher
operation
CONTINUED
Black plate (130,1)
2-26

! Vehicle finder function
Use this function to find your vehicle
parked among many vehicles in a large
parking lot. Provided you are within 30 feet
(10 meters) of the vehicle, pressing the
lock/arm button three times in a 5-second
period will cause your vehicles horn to
sound once and its hazard warning
flashers to flash three times.
& Operating the transmitter

NOTE
The remote keyless entry system will
not be activated when the key is
inserted in the ignition switch.
NOTE
If the interval between presses is too
short when you press the lock/arm
button three times, the system may
not respond to the signals from the
remote transmitter.
! Sounding a panic alarm
To activate the alarm, press the PANIC
button once.
The horn will sound and the hazard
warning flashers will flash.
To deactivate the panic alarm, press any
button on the remote transmitter. If a
button on the remote transmitter is not
pressed, the alarm will be deactivated
after approximately 30 seconds.
Transmitter
1) Lock/arm button
2) Unlock/disarm button
3) Trunk lid opener/rear gate unlock button
4) PANIC button
! Locking the doors

Press the lock/arm button to lock all doors
and rear gate (Outback). When the doors
(including the rear gate) are locked, an
electronic chirp will sound once and the
hazard warning flashers will flash once.
lid) is not fully closed, the following will

occur to alert you that the doors (or the
rear gate/trunk lid) are not properly closed.
. an electronic chirp sounds five times.
. the hazard warning flashers flash five
times.
When you close the door, it will automatically lock and then the following will
occur.
. an electronic chirp sounds once.
. the hazard warning flashers flash once.
! Unlocking the doors
Press the unlock/disarm button to unlock
the drivers door. An electronic chirp will
sound twice and the hazard warning
flashers will flash twice. To unlock all
doors and the rear gate (Outback), briefly
press the unlock/disarm button a second
time within 5 seconds.
NOTE
If the interval between the first and
second presses of the unlock/disarm
button (for unlocking of all of the doors
and the rear gate) is extremely short,
the system may not respond.
Black plate (131,1)
! Opening the trunk lid (Legacy)

Press and hold the trunk lid opener button
to open the trunk lid. An electronic chirp
! Unlocking the rear gate (Outback)
Press the rear gate unlock button to
unlock the rear gate. An electronic chirp
are locked or unlocked.
If desired, the audible signal ON/OFF
setting and the audible signal volume
can be customized by a SUBARU dealer.
! Selecting hazard warning flasher
operation
! Vehicle finder function

Use this function to find your vehicle
parked among many vehicles in a large
parking lot. Provided you are within 30 feet
(10 meters) of the vehicle, pressing the
lock/arm button three times in a 5-second
period will cause your vehicles horn to
sound once and its hazard warning
flashers to flash three times.
NOTE
If the interval between presses is too
short when you press the lock/arm
button three times, the system may
not respond to the signals from the
remote transmitter.
! Sounding a panic alarm
To activate the alarm, press the PANIC
button once.
The horn will sound and the hazard
warning flashers will flash.
To deactivate the panic alarm, press any
button on the remote transmitter. If a
button on the remote transmitter is not
pressed, the alarm will be deactivated
after approximately 30 seconds.
& Replacing the battery

Refer to Replacing battery F11-50.
2-27
& Replacing lost transmitters

If you lose a transmitter or want to
purchase additional transmitters (up to
four can be programmed), you should reprogram all of your transmitters for security reasons. For details, contact your
SUBARU dealer and have the transmitters
programmed into the remote keyless entry
system.
& Certification for remote keyless entry system

. U.S.-spec. models
FCC ID: CWTWB1U811
FCC ID: CWTWD1U848
CAUTION
FCC CAUTION
equipment.
This device complies with Part 15 of the
CONTINUED
Black plate (132,1)
2-28
Keys and doors/Alarm system
. Mexico-spec. models
Alarm system
The alarm system helps to protect your
vehicle and valuables from theft. The horn
sounds and the hazard warning flashers
flash if someone attempts to break into
your vehicle.
COFETEL RLVSUTW13-2405
COFETEL RLVSUTW13-2402

The system can be armed or disarmed
with the keyless access function or access
key.
The system will not be activated when the
push-button ignition switch is in the ACC
or ON position.
The system can be armed and disarmed
with the remote transmitter.
The system will not be activated when the
key is inserted into the ignition switch.
Your vehicles alarm system has been set
for activation at the time of shipment from
the factory. You can set the system for
deactivation yourself or have it done by
your SUBARU dealer.
Black plate (133,1)
& System alarm operation

The alarm system will give the following
alarms when triggered.
. The vehicles horn will sound for 30
seconds.
. The hazard warning flashers will flash
for 30 seconds.
lid) remains open after the 30-second
period, the horn will continue to sound
for a maximum of 3 minutes. If the door (or
the rear gate/trunk lid) is closed while the
horn is sounding, the horn will stop
sounding with a delay of up to 30 seconds.
The alarm is triggered by:
. Opening any of the doors, rear gate or
the trunk lid
. Physical impact to the vehicle, such as
forced entry (only models with shock
sensors (dealer option))
NOTE
The alarm system can be set to trigger
the illumination of the following interior
lights.
. Map lights
. Dome light (illuminates only when
the dome light switch is in the DOOR
position)
. Cargo area light (Outback)
The notifications regarding the map

lights, dome light and cargo area light
(Outback) are deactivated as the factory setting. A SUBARU dealer can
activate the system. Contact your
SUBARU dealer for details.
2-29
If the system was previously deactivated:

The odometer screen displays ALON
and the horn sounds once, indicating that
the system is now activated.
NOTE
& Activating and deactivating

the alarm system
You may have the above setting

change done by your SUBARU dealer.
To change the setting of your vehicles

alarm system for activation or deactivation, do the following.
1. Disarm the alarm system. Refer to
Disarming the system F2-32.
2. Sit in the drivers seat and shut all
doors (and the rear gate (Outback)).
position.
4. Hold down the REAR (UNLOCK) side
of the drivers power door locking switch,
open the drivers door within the following
1 second, and wait 10 seconds without
releasing the switch. The setting will then
be changed as follows:
& If you have accidentally triggered the alarm system
If the system was previously activated:

The odometer screen displays ALOF
and the horn sounds twice, indicating that
the system is now deactivated.
! To stop the alarm

Perform any of the following operations.
. Press any button on the access key/
remote transmitter.
. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
position (models without keyless access
with push-button start system).
. Turn the push-button ignition switch to
the ACC position (models with keyless
access with push-button start system).
NOTE
Only registered keys will stop the
alarm. If the key is not registered, the
alarm will not stop.
CONTINUED
Black plate (134,1)
2-30
& Arming the system

NOTE
. The system can be armed even if the
engine hood, the windows and/or
moonroof are open. Always make sure
that they are fully closed before arming
the system.
. When arming the system, if any of
the doors or the rear gate/trunk lid is
not fully closed, an electronic chirp
sounds five times, the hazard warning
flashers flash five times to alert you
that the doors (or the rear gate/trunk
lid) are not properly closed. When you
close the door, doors will automatically
lock and the system will automatically
arm in 30 seconds.
. The 30-second standby time can be
eliminated if you prefer. Have it performed by your SUBARU dealer.
. For Legacy, if you open the trunk
using the access key/remote transmit button in the surveillance
ters
state (or the standby state), the system
will be temporarily placed in a standby
state. The system will go back to the
surveillance state in 30 seconds upon
locking the trunk.
. The system is in the standby state
for a 30-second period before arming
the system. The security indicator light
will flash at short intervals during this
period.
. If any of the following actions is
done during the standby period, the
system will not switch to the surveillance state.
Doors (including the rear gate/
trunk lid) are unlocked using the
access key/remote transmitter.
Doors (including the rear gate/
trunk lid) are unlocked using the
keyless access function (models
with keyless access with pushbutton start system).
Any door (including the rear gate/
trunk lid) is opened.
The ignition switch is turned to
the ON position (models without
keyless access with push-button
start system).
Push-button ignition switch is
turned to the ACC position (models with keyless access with pushbutton start system).
! To arm the system using the access
key/remote transmitter
position (models with keyless access with

push-button start system).
3. Open the doors and get out of the
vehicle.
4. Make sure that the engine hood is
locked.
5. Close all doors and the rear gate/trunk
lid.
Access key
1) Arm button: Press to arm the system
2) Disarm button: Press to disarm the
system
1. Close all windows and the moonroof (if

equipped).
2. Remove the key from the ignition
switch (models without keyless access
with push-button start system)/turn the
push-button ignition switch to the OFF
Black plate (135,1)
than 2 seconds). All doors (and the rear

gate (Outback)) will lock, an electronic
chirp will sound once, the hazard warning
flashers will flash once, and the security
indicator light will start flashing rapidly.
After rapid flashing for 30 seconds (standby time), the security indicator light will
then flash slowly (twice approximately
every 2 seconds), indicating that the
system has been armed for surveillance.
Transmitter
1) Arm button: Press to arm the system
2) Disarm button: Press to disarm the
system
6. Briefly press the arm button (for less
If any of the doors (rear gate or trunk lid) is

not fully closed, an electronic chirp sounds
five times, the hazard warning flashers
flash five times to alert you that the doors
(or the rear gate/trunk lid) are not properly
closed. When you close the door, the
system will automatically arm and doors
will automatically lock.
! To arm the system using power
door locking switch
equipped).
2. Remove the key from the ignition
function)/make sure the push-button ignition switch is turned off (models with
keyless access function).
vehicle.
4. Make sure that the engine hood (and
the trunk lid (Legacy)) are locked.
2-31
5. Close the doors (and the rear gate

(Outback)) but leave only the drivers door
or the front passengers door open.
6. Press the front side (LOCK side) of

the power door locking switch to set the
door locks.
7. Close the door. An electronic chirp will
sound once, the hazard warning flashers
will flash once and the security indicator
light will start flashing rapidly. After rapid
flashing for 30 seconds (standby time), the
security indicator light will then flash
slowly (twice approximately every 2 seconds), indicating that the system has been
armed for surveillance.
CONTINUED
Black plate (136,1)
2-32
! To arm the system using the keyless access function (if equipped)
system will automatically arm and doors

will automatically lock.

equipped)
2. Turn the push-button ignition switch to
the OFF position.
vehicle.
4. Make sure that the engine hood is
locked.
5. Close all doors and the rear gate/trunk
lid.
& Disarming the system
1)
Door lock sensor
6. Carry the access key and touch the

door lock sensor. All doors (for Outback,
including the rear gate) will lock, an
electronic chirp will sound once, the
hazard warning flashers will flash once,
and the security indicator light will start
flashing rapidly. After rapid flashing for 30
seconds (standby time), the security indicator light will then flash slowly (twice
approximately every 2 seconds), indicating that the system has been armed for
surveillance.
If any of the doors or the rear gate is not
fully closed, an electronic chirp sounds
five times, the hazard warning flashers
flash five times to alert you that the doors
(or the rear gate/trunk lid) are not properly
closed. When you close the door, the
Perform either of the following procedures.

. Briefly press the disarm button (for less
than 2 seconds) on the access key/remote
transmitter.
. Carry the access key and perform
either of the following procedures (models
with keyless access with push-button
start system).
Grip the front door handle.
Press the rear gate opener button.
The flashing of the security indicator light
will then change slowly (once approximately every 3 seconds from twice approximately every 2 seconds), indicating
that the alarm system has been disarmed.
! Emergency disarming
If you cannot disarm the system using the
transmitter (i.e. the transmitter is lost,
broken or the transmitter battery is too
weak), you can disarm the system without
using the transmitter.
The system can be disarmed if you turn
the ignition switch from the LOCK/OFF
to the ON position with a registered key/
access key.
Black plate (137,1)
NOTE
push-button start system, if the access key battery is discharged, perform
the procedure described in Switching
power status F9-18. In such a case,
replace the battery immediately. Refer
to Replacing battery of access key
F11-50.
& Valet mode

When you choose the valet mode, the
alarm system does not operate. In valet
mode, the access key/remote transmitter
is used only for locking and unlocking the
doors and rear gate (Outback) and panic
activation.
To enter the valet mode, change the
setting of your vehicles alarm system for
deactivation mode. Refer to Activating
and deactivating the alarm system F229. The security indicator light will continue to flash once every 3 seconds
indicating that the system is in the valet
mode.
To exit valet mode, change the setting of
your vehicles alarm system for activation
mode. Refer to Activating and deactivating the alarm system F2-29.
& Tripped sensor identification

The security indicator light flashes when
the alarm system has been triggered.
Also, the number of flashes indicates the
location of unauthorized intrusion or the
severity of impact on the vehicle.
When the ignition switch is turned to the
ON position, the indicator light will
illuminate for 1 second and then flash as
follows:
. When a door or rear gate (Outback)
was opened: 5 times
. When the trunk (Legacy) was opened:
4 times
. When a strong impact or multiple
impacts were sensed: twice (only models
with shock sensors (dealer option))
. When a light impact was sensed: once
(only models with shock sensors (dealer
option))
& Shock sensors (dealer option)

The shock sensors trigger the alarm
system when they sense impacts applied
to the vehicle and when any of their
electric wires is cut. The alarm system
causes the horn to sound and the hazard
warning flashers to flash for a short time
when the sensed impact is weak, but it
warns of a strong impact or multiple
2-33
impacts by sounding the horn and flashing

the hazard warning flashers, both lasting
approximately 30 seconds.
If you desire, your SUBARU dealer can
connect them and set them for activation
or deactivation.
NOTE
. The shock sensors are not always
able to sense impacts caused by breaking in, and cannot sense an impact that
does not cause vibration (such as
breaking the glass using a rescue
hammer).
. The shock sensors may sense vibration like those shown in the following examples and trigger the alarm
system. Select the settings of the alarm
system and shock sensors appropriately depending on where you usually
park your vehicle.
Examples:
Vibration from construction site
Vibration in multistory car park
Vibration from trains
. You can have the sensitivity of the
shock sensors adjusted to your preference by your SUBARU dealer.
Black plate (138,1)
2-34
Keys and doors/Child safety locks
Child safety locks

WARNING
Always turn the child safety locks to
the LOCK position when children
sit on the rear seat. Serious injury
could result if a child accidentally
opens the door and falls out.
Each rear door has a child safety lock.

When the child safety lock lever is in the
LOCK position, the door cannot be
opened from inside. The door can only
be opened from the outside.
& Power window operation by

driver
Windows
WARNING
To avoid serious personal injury
caused by entrapment, always conform to the following instructions
without exception.
. When operating the power windows, be extremely careful to
prevent anyones fingers, arms,
neck, head or other objects from
being caught in the window.
. Always lock the passengers windows using the lock switch when
children are riding in the vehicle.
. For safety reasons, always carry
the key with you when leaving
the vehicle and never allow an
unattended child to remain in the
vehicle. Failure to follow this
procedure could result in injury
to a child operating the power
window.
! Drivers side power window

switches
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
Lock switch
For drivers window
For front passengers window
For rear left passengers window
For rear right passengers window
All door windows can be controlled by the

power window switch cluster at the driver
side door.
The power windows operate only when

Black plate (139,1)
Keys and doors/Windows
! Operating the drivers/front passengers window
1)
2)
Automatically open/close*
Open/close
*: For some models, the automatic open/close

function (one-touch auto up/down function) is
not available for the front passengers window.
To open:
Press the switch down lightly and hold it.
The window will open as long as the
switch is held.
NOTE
If you continue to hold the AUTO
switch in the down position after the
window has been fully opened, the
circuit breaker may activate for a short
time and the window may not operate.
Allow several seconds for the system
to reset without touching the switch,
and the window will begin to operate
normally on its own.
This switch also has a one-touch auto
down function. To open the window fully,
press the switch down until it clicks and
then release it. To stop the window halfway, pull the switch up lightly.
To close:
Pull the switch up lightly and hold it. The
window will close as long as the switch is
held.
NOTE
2-35
until the window is fully closed.

To reset to normal operation, initialize
the power window to reactivate the
one-touch auto up/down function. Refer to Initialization of power window
F2-38.
This switch also has a one-touch auto up
function. To close the window fully, pull the
switch up until it clicks and then release it.
To stop the window halfway, press the
switch down lightly.
NOTE
If the vehicles battery is disconnected
due to situations such as battery or
fuse replacement, the one-touch auto
up/down function will be deactivated.
Initialize the power window to reactivate the one-touch auto up/down function. Refer to Initialization of power
window F2-38.
If you continue to hold the AUTO

switch in the up position after the
window has fully closed, the circuit
breaker may open and the system may
not operate. After several seconds, the
window will be able to be opened by
holding the switch down until it is fully
opened. The AUTO function will not
operate. The window can be raised by
pulling up on the switch several times
CONTINUED
Black plate (140,1)
2-36
! Anti-entrapment function
CAUTION
. Never attempt to test this function using fingers, hands or other
parts of your body.
. The anti-entrapment function
may not operate properly if some
object gets trapped just before
the window fully closes.
tial enough object trapped between the

window and the window frame, it automatically moves down slightly and stops.
! Operating the rear passengers
windows
! Locking the passengers windows
NOTE
. If a window detects an impact similar to that caused by trapping an object
(for example, when the vehicle encounters a deep pothole), the anti-entrapment function may operate.
. The window cannot be operated for
a few seconds after the anti-entrapment function operates.
. If the vehicles battery is disconnected due to situations such as
battery or fuse replacement, the antientrapment function will be deactivated. Initialize the power window to
reactivate the anti-entrapment function.
Refer to Initialization of power window F2-38.
While closing with the one-touch auto up
function, if the window senses a substan-
1)
2)
To open:
Press the appropriate switch down and
hold it until the window reaches the
desired position.
To close:
Pull the switch up and hold it until the
window reaches the desired position.
Lock
Unlock
To lock:
Press the lock switch. When the lock
switch is in the lock position, the passengers windows cannot be opened or
closed.
To unlock:
Press the lock switch again.
Black plate (141,1)
& Power window operation by

passengers
! Operating the front passengers

window
! Passengers side power window

switches
2-37
For some models, this switch also has a

one-touch auto up function. To close the
window fully, pull the switch up until it
clicks and then release it. To stop the
window halfway, press the switch down
lightly.
NOTE
1)
2)
Each passenger window can be controlled

by the power window switch located on
the door.
Automatically open/close (if equipped)

Open/close
To open:
Press the switch down lightly and hold it.
The window will open as long as the
switch is held.
For some models, this switch also has a
one-touch auto down function. To open
the window fully, press the switch down
until it clicks and then release it. To stop
the window halfway, pull the switch up
lightly.
If the vehicles battery is disconnected

due to situations such as battery or
fuse replacement, the one-touch auto
up/down function will be deactivated.
Initialize the power window to reactivate the one-touch auto up/down function. Refer to Initialization of power
window F2-38.
! Anti-entrapment function (models with one-touch auto up/down
function)
Refer to Anti-entrapment function F236.
To close:
Pull the switch up lightly and hold it. The
window will close as long as the switch is
held.
CONTINUED
Black plate (142,1)
2-38
Keys and doors/Trunk lid (Legacy)
! Operating the rear passengers

windows
& Initialization of power window

If the vehicles battery is disconnected due
to situations such as battery or fuse
replacement, the following functions are
deactivated.
. One-touch auto up/down function
. Anti-entrapment function (drivers window)
. Anti-entrapment function (front passengers window - if equipped)
To open:
Press the switch down and hold it until the
To close:
Pull the switch up and hold it until the
When the lock switch on the power
window switch cluster, located on the
drivers side door, is in the lock position,
the passengers windows cannot be operated with the passengers switches.
Initialize the power window in the following

procedure to reactivate such functions.
1. Close the drivers door.
position.
3. Open the drivers side window halfway
by pushing down the power window
switch.
4. Pull up the power window switch and
close the window completely. Continue
pulling up the switch for approximately 1
second after the window is closed completely.
Trunk lid (Legacy)

WARNING
. To prevent dangerous exhaust
gas from entering the vehicle,
always keep the trunk lid closed
while driving.
. Help prevent children, adults or
animals from locking themselves
in the trunk. On hot or sunny
days, the temperature in the
trunk could quickly become high
enough to cause death or serious
heat-related injuries including
brain damage to anyone locked
inside, particularly for small children.
. When leaving the vehicle, close
all windows and lock all doors.
Also make certain that the trunk
is closed.
If the front passengers window is

equipped with the auto-up/down function,
it is necessary to repeat the same
initialization procedure on that window
switch.
Black plate (143,1)
& To open and close the trunk

lid from outside
The trunk lid can be opened using the
keyless access function or remote keyless
entry system. For details, refer to the
following section.
. For models with keyless access with
push-button start system, refer to Opening trunk (Legacy) F2-16, Opening the
trunk lid (Legacy) F2-25 or Opening the
trunk lid (Legacy) F2-27.
. For models without keyless access
with push-button start system, refer to
Opening the trunk lid (Legacy) F2-25 or
Opening the trunk lid (Legacy) F2-27.
To close the trunk lid, lightly press the
trunk lid down until the latch engages.
& To open the trunk lid from

inside
2-39
& Internal trunk lid release

handle
The internal trunk lid release handle is a
device designed to open the trunk lid from
inside the trunk. In the event children or
adults become locked inside the trunk, the
handle allows them to open the lid. The
handle is located on the inside of the trunk
lid.
Press and hold the trunk lid opener switch

for more than 1 second.
NOTE
. Do not leave your valuables in the
trunk when you leave your vehicle.
. Even when the trunk lid cannot be
opened using the remote keyless entry
system, you can open the trunk lid by
using the key. Refer to Trunk lid
(Legacy) if the trunk lid cannot be
opened F9-19.
To open the trunk lid from inside the trunk,

pull the yellow handle as indicated by the
arrow on the handle. This operation
unlocks the trunk lid. Then, push up the
lid.
The handle is made of material that
remains luminescent for approximately
an hour in the dark trunk space after it is
exposed to ambient light even for a short
time.
CONTINUED
Black plate (144,1)
2-40
WARNING
Never allow any child to get in the
trunk and play with the release
handle. If the driver starts the vehicle without knowing that a child is
inside the trunk and the child opens
the lid using the release handle, the
child could fall out and be killed or
seriously injured.
! Inspection
Perform the following steps at least twice
a year to check the release handle for
correct operation.
1. Open the trunk lid.
CAUTION
. Do not close the lid while gripping the release handle. The
handle may be damaged.
. Do not use the handle as a hook
to fasten straps or ropes to
secure your cargo in the trunk.
Such use may result in damage
of the handle.
. Load the trunk so that cargo
cannot strike the release handle.
If the cargo hits the handle while
the vehicle is being driven, the
handle may be pulled and the
trunk lid may open. That may
cause cargo to fall out of the
trunk, which could create a traffic
safety hazard.
This places the latch in the locked position.
2. Use a flat-head screwdriver with a thin

blade. Slide the flat-head screwdriver
blade from the slit aperture of the lock
assembly fully to the end until you hear a
click.
3. Move the release handle, from outside

the vehicle, in the direction of the arrow to
check if the latch is released.
Black plate (145,1)
Keys and doors/Rear gate (Outback)
If the latch is not released, contact your

SUBARU dealer.
In that case, use the key to release the
latch, then close the trunk lid.
Also, if the movement of the release
handle feels restricted or not entirely
smooth during operation, or the handle
and/or handle base is cracked, contact
your SUBARU dealer.
Rear gate (Outback)

& Manual rear gate (if
equipped)
The rear gate can be locked and unlocked
using any of the following systems.
. Power door locking switch: Refer to
Power door locking switches F2-9.
. Keyless access with the push-button
start system (if equipped): Refer to Keyless access with push-button start system
F2-10.
. Remote keyless entry system: Refer to
Remote keyless entry system F2-24.
To open:
1. Unlock the rear gate.
2-41
2. Press and hold the rear gate opener

button. The rear gate will open slightly.
3. Hold the rear gate and lift it up slowly.
NOTE
If the rear gate cannot be opened due
to a discharged vehicle battery, a
malfunction in the door locking/unlocking system or other causes, you can
unlock it by manually operating the
rear gate lock release lever. For the
procedure, refer to Rear gate
(Outback) if the rear gate cannot be
opened F9-20.
To close:
Lower the rear gate slowly and push down

firmly until the latch engages.
The rear gate can be lowered easily if you
CONTINUED
Black plate (146,1)
2-42
pull it down holding the handle.
WARNING
. To prevent dangerous exhaust
gas from entering the vehicle,
always keep the rear gate closed
while driving.
. Do not attempt to shut the rear
gate while holding the recessed
grip. Also do not close the rear
gate by pulling the handle from
inside the cargo space. There is a
danger of your hand being
caught and injured.
CAUTION
. Do not jam a plastic bag in or
place cellophane tape on the rear
gate stays or scratch the stays
while loading or unloading cargo.
That could cause leakage of gas
from the stays, which may result
in their inability to hold the rear
gate open.
. Be careful not to hit your head or
face on the rear gate when opening or closing the rear gate and
when loading or unloading cargo.
& Power rear gate (if equipped)

WARNING
. When operating the power rear
gate, observe the following precautions. Ignoring the precautions may result in an injury
(e.g., anyones body is hit against
the rear gate or is caught in the
rear gate, etc.)
Make sure there are no people
around the rear gate.
Never let anyone get close to
the rear gate.
. When closing the rear gate, be
extremely careful to prevent anyones fingers, arms, neck, head
or other objects from being
caught in the rear gate. Otherwise, serious personal injury
may be caused by entrapment.
. After opening the rear gate on a
slope by using the power rear
gate feature, the rear gate may
close. Make sure that the rear
gate has stopped completely
after opening it.
. When leaving the vehicle, always
carry the key for safety and never
allow an unattended child to
remain in the vehicle. Failure to

follow this procedure could result in injury to a child operating
the power rear gate.
. The driver should be aware of
and pay careful attention to his/
her responsibilities.
. Use the power rear gate only
when the area around the rear
gate is clearly visible and when
you have checked that there is
no danger of people being
caught in the gate.
CAUTION
. When closing the rear gate after
opening it, make sure to use the
power rear gate. If you close the
rear gate manually with extra
force, the power rear gate may
be damaged.
. Do not install any accessories
other than genuine SUBARU
parts on the rear gate. If the
weight of rear gate increases
excessively, the rear gate stay
cannot support the rear gate
sufficiently when opening the
rear gate. Also, the power rear
gate may not function properly or
Black plate (147,1)
may malfunction.
. Do not touch the driving rod.
Doing so may result in injury or
damage.
The power rear gate operates only when
all of the following conditions are satisfied.
. The vehicle is stopped completely.
. The outside temperature is within a
range from 228F to 1408F (from 308C to
608C).
. The ignition switch is in the LOCK/
OFF or ACC position. Or, the ignition
switch is in the ON position and the
parking brake is applied (MT models)/the
select lever is in the P position (CVT
models).
We recommend using the power rear gate
function in most circumstances instead of
manual operation.
NOTE
. Do not press the power rear gate
button repeatedly while the power rear
gate is operating. Otherwise, the system may ignore the button operation in
order to avoid being damaged.
. It is not possible to stop the rear
gate temporarily while opening between the completely closed position
and approximately 2 in (5 cm) open. If
you press one of the power rear gate

buttons briefly during this range, the
rear gate will be closed.
. If the vehicle starts to move while
the power rear gate is operating, the
system sounds a buzzer and closes the
rear gate automatically. At this time, if
the system detects jamming, it will
deactivate the power rear gate and the
rear gate will not be closed. If this
occurs, close the rear gate manually.
For details, refer to Manual rear gate
F2-41.
. If you try to open the rear gate using
the power rear gate function immediately after closing the rear gate using
the power rear gate function, an electronic chirp will sound and the rear
gate will not open. Wait for a while
before trying to open the rear gate via
the power rear gate function.
. If either of the operating conditions
has not been satisfied while operating
the power rear gate, an electronic chirp
will sound and the power rear gate will
be deactivated. In this case, the rear
gate may stop opening or closing
suddenly.
2-43
! Operation
NOTE
. The rear gate will remain unlocked
even after closing it. Always lock the
rear gate when leaving the vehicle.
. If you cannot open/close the rear
gate by performing the operation described here, a short electronic chirp
will sound three times (beep, beep,
beep).
! By the power rear gate button
(other than the buttons on the
rear gate)
Power rear gate button on the instrument

panel
CONTINUED
Black plate (148,1)
2-44
electronic chirp and the hazard warning

flashers will operate as follows:
. When operating the power rear gate
button on the instrument panel/transmitter:
sounds and flashes twice.
. When operating the power rear gate
button on the access key: sounds and
flashes four times.
NOTE
Power rear gate button on the access key
Power rear gate button on the transmitter
To open the rear gate:

Press and hold the power rear gate button
when the rear gate is closed. The rear
gate will open automatically. Then an
While the rear gate is locked, you

cannot open the rear gate by operating
the power rear gate button on the
instrument panel. In such a case,
unlock the rear gate before operating
the power rear gate button.
To stop the rear gate midway:
Briefly press the power rear gate button
while the rear gate is being opened. Then
an electronic chirp will sound twice and
the hazard warning flashers will flash
twice.
If you press the power rear gate button
again, the rear gate will close.
You can open the rear gate by pressing
the power rear gate button briefly while the
rear gate is being closed.
twice and the hazard warning flashers will

flash twice. If you briefly press the power
rear gate button again, the rear gate will
open.
! By the buttons on the rear gate
NOTE
After performing the following procedures, an electronic chirp will sound
twice and the hazard warning flashers
will flash twice.
To close the rear gate:

Press and hold the power rear gate
button. Then an electronic chirp will sound
Black plate (149,1)

again, the rear gate will close. You can
open the rear gate by pressing the power
rear gate button briefly while the rear gate
is being closed.
2-45
! Memory function
To close the rear gate:

Briefly press either of the following buttons.
. rear gate opener button
. power rear gate button on the inside
edge of the rear gate
Power rear gate button on the inside edge
of the rear gate
To open the rear gate:

1. For models with keyless access with
push-button start system, carry the access key. For models without keyless
access with push-button start system,
unlock the rear gate.
2. Briefly press the rear gate opener
button when the rear gate is closed.
The rear gate will open automatically.
To stop the rear gate midway:
Briefly press either of the following buttons
while the rear gate is being opened.
. rear gate opener button
. power rear gate button on the inside
edge of the rear gate

again, the rear gate will open.
! Manual operation
Memory switch
NOTE
Using the power rear gate operation is
recommended. Manual operation will
require physical effort.
The power rear gate can be closed
manually. Refer to Manual rear gate
F2-41.
Memory switch status

1) ON status
2) OFF status
Your desired rear gate height can be

CONTINUED
Black plate (150,1)
2-46
registered.
Registration of the rear gate height:
To register the rear gate height, perform
the following procedures while the ignition
switch is in the LOCK/OFF position.
1. Open the rear gate by using the power
rear gate function.
2. With the rear gate at the desired
height, stop it by using the power rear
gate function.
3. Press the memory switch to select the
ON status.
the hazard warning flashers flash three

times. The electronic chirp and the flashing hazard warning flashers confirm the
selected rear gate height has been registered.
NOTE
NOTE
! Reverse function
. To change the registered height,

press the memory switch to select the
OFF status and perform the registering procedure again.
. It is possible to register the height
from approximately 2 in (5 cm) or more
from the completely closed position.
Retrieval of the rear gate height:
To open the rear gate and stop it at the
registered height, perform the following
procedure.
1. Press the memory switch to select the
ON status.
2. Press and hold any of the power rear
gate switches.
Power rear gate button on the inside edge

of the rear gate
4. With the rear gate at the desired

height, press and hold the power rear
gate button on the inside edge of the rear
gate until an electronic chirp is heard and
Even if any of the power rear gate

switches are pressed and held while the
memory switch is in the OFF status, you
can stop it at the registered height by
pressing the memory switch to select the
ON status before the rear gate reaches
the registered height.
The rear gate will open to the position

that is stored in the memory function
even if the rear gate is opened by the
reverse function.
WARNING
. Do not let parts of your body get
caught when operating the reverse function. If the reverse
function does not operate for
some reason, this may lead to
serious injury or accidents.
. The reverse function may not
operate if foreign objects are
caught in the rear gate just
before it closes completely. Be
careful not to catch your fingers
and other body parts.
. The reverse function may not
operate depending on the object
shape and the manner in which it
was caught. Be careful not to
catch your fingers and other
body parts.
Black plate (151,1)
! Rear gate drop prevention function

If, while fully opened via the power rear
gate function, the rear gate is lowered by
the weight of snow and such, an electronic
chirp will sound and the rear gate drop
prevention function will apply braking to
the rear gate so that it prevents a rapid
closure of the rear gate.
CAUTION
. If the reverse function is operated
3 times consecutively, automatic
opening and closing of the power
rear gate function will be canceled and the rear gate will stop
opening or closing suddenly.
However, the rear gate may open
or close depending on the rear
gate height when automatic operation is ceased. Be careful that
the rear gate does not hit anyones head or face, etc. and that
fingers and baggage, etc. are not
caught in it.
. Take care not to damage the
touch sensors. Otherwise, the
reverse function may cease to
operate.
If, while opening or closing using power
rear gate, the rear gate catches persons
or baggage or hits an obstacle, an
electronic chirp will sound 3 times and
the rear gate will operate as follows.
When opening the rear gate: The rear
gate will automatically close.
When closing the rear gate: The rear
gate will automatically open.
2-47
NOTE
1)
Touch sensor
Touch sensors are attached on the left

and right edges of the rear gate. If the
touch sensors detect fingers, baggage,
etc. while closing by the power rear gate
function, an electronic chirp will sounds 3
times and the rear gate will open automatically.
NOTE
When the rear gate is opened using the
reverse function, it will be opened fully
or to the height registered in the
memory function.
. If there is snow on the rear gate,

only use the power rear gate function
after removing the snow.
. If you close the rear gate manually
just after the rear gate is fully opened
using the power rear gate function, the
rear gate drop prevention function will
detect a rapid closure of the rear gate
and apply braking to the rear gate. In
this case, this is not a malfunction.
Using an electronic chirp, the power rear
gate will give you an audible signal before
starting its operation. If desired, the
audible signal can be turned off by a
dealer for details.
push-button start system, you can turn
the audible signal off by operating the
CONTINUED
Black plate (152,1)
2-48
Keys and doors/Moonroof

The ON/OFF setting of the audible signal
also works as the audible signal settings
for the remote keyless entry system and
the keyless access with push-button start
system. However, for the warning chime
such as that caused by Reverse function
F2-46 or Rear gate drop prevention
function F2-47, it cannot be set as nonoperational.
Moonroof (if equipped)

WARNING
Never let anyones hands, arms,
head or any objects protrude from
the moonroof. A person could be
seriously injured if the vehicle stops
suddenly or turns sharply or if the
vehicle is involved in an accident.
To avoid serious personal injury
caused by entrapment, you must
conform to the following instructions without exception.
. Before closing the moonroof,
make sure that no ones hands,
arms, head or other objects will
be accidentally caught in the
moonroof.
. Before leaving the vehicle, always remove the key from the
ignition switch for safety (models
without keyless access with
push-button start system) and
never allow an unattended child
to remain in the vehicle. Failure
to follow this procedure could
result in injury to a child operating the moonroof.
. Never try to check the anti-entrapment function by deliberately

placing part of your body in the
moonroof.
CAUTION
. Do not sit on the edge of the open
moonroof.
. Do not operate the moonroof if
falling snow or extremely cold
conditions have caused it to
freeze shut.
. The anti-entrapment function
does not operate when the moonroof is being tilted down. Be sure
to confirm that it is safe to do so
before tilting the moonroof down.
. If the moonroof does not close,
we recommend that you have the
system checked by a SUBARU
dealer.
The moonroof has both tilting and sliding
functions.
The moonroof operates only when the
ignition switch is in the ON position.
Black plate (153,1)
& Moonroof switches

! Tilting moonroof
NOTE
One-touch operation does not take
place when the moonroof is lowered.
Press the switch continuously to lower
the moonroof.
! Sliding moonroof
2-49
switch to close the moonroof.

To stop the moonroof at a selected midway position while opening or closing it,
momentarily press the front side or rear
side of the switch.
After washing the vehicle or after it rains,
wipe away water on the roof prior to
opening the moonroof to prevent drops
of water from falling into the passenger
compartment.
NOTE
For the sake of safety, it is recommended that you avoid driving with the
moonroof fully opened.
UP/DOWN switch
1) Tilting up
2) Laying down
The tilting up function will only operate

when the moonroof is fully closed. The
laying down function will only operate
when the moonroof is tilted.
Press the rear side of the UP/DOWN
switch to tilt up the moonroof.
Press the front side of the UP/DOWN
switch to lay down the moonroof.
Release the switch after the moonroof has
been tilted or has been laid down completely. Pressing the switch continuously
may cause damage to the moonroof.
OPEN/CLOSE switch
1) Open
2) Close
Press the rear side of the OPEN/CLOSE

switch to open the moonroof. The sun
shade will also be opened together with
the moonroof. For Outback, the moonroof
will stop at a position approximately 0.8 in
(2 cm) away from the fully opened position. Press the switch again to open the
moonroof completely.
Press the front side of the OPEN/CLOSE
! Anti-entrapment function
When the moonroof senses a substantial
enough object trapped between its glass
and the vehicles roof during closure, it
automatically moves back to the fully open
position and stops there. The anti-entrapment function may also be activated by a
strong shock on the moonroof even when
there is nothing trapped.
CAUTION
Never attempt to test this function
using fingers, hands or other parts
of your body.
CONTINUED
Black plate (154,1)
2-50
& Sun shade
The sun shade can be slid forward or

backward by hand while the moonroof is
closed.
If the moonroof is opened, the sun shade
also moves back.
Black plate (5,1)

Ignition switch (models without pushbutton start system).........................................
3-4
LOCK..................................................................
ACC....................................................................
ON......................................................................
START ................................................................
Key reminder chime ............................................
Ignition switch light .............................................
3-4
3-5
3-5
3-5
3-5
3-5
Push-button ignition switch (models with

push-button start system) ...............................
3-6
Safety precautions ..............................................

Operating range for push-button start system ......
Switching power status .......................................
When access key does not operate properly ........
3-6
3-6
3-7
3-8
Hazard warning flasher.......................................

Meters and gauges..............................................
3-8
3-8
Combination meter illumination ...........................

Canceling the function for meter/gauge needle
movement upon turning on the ignition
switch...............................................................
Speedometer.......................................................
Odometer............................................................
Double trip meter ...............................................
Tachometer ........................................................
Fuel gauge.........................................................
Temperature gauge ............................................
ECO gauge ........................................................
3-8
3-9
3-9
3-9
3-10
3-10
3-11
3-12
3-12
Warning and indicator lights .............................
3-13
Seatbelt warning light and chime ........................

SRS airbag system warning light ........................
3-13
3-15
Front passengers frontal airbag ON and OFF

indicators ........................................................
CHECK ENGINE warning light/Malfunction
indicator light ..................................................
Charge warning light..........................................
Oil pressure warning light ..................................
Engine low oil level warning indicator ................
AT OIL TEMP warning light (CVT models) ...........
Low tire pressure warning light (U.S. spec.
models) ...........................................................
ABS warning light..............................................
Brake system warning light................................
Electronic parking brake indicator light ..............
Hill Holder indicator light ...................................
Low fuel warning light .......................................
Door open indicator ...........................................
Windshield washer fluid warning indicator..........
All-Wheel Drive warning light (CVT models)........
Power steering warning light..............................
Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light/Vehicle
Dynamics Control operation indicator light .......
Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indicator light .....
Warning chimes and warning indicator of the
keyless access with push-button start system (if
equipped) ........................................................
Security indicator light.......................................
Select lever/gear position indicator.....................
Turn signal indicator lights.................................
High beam indicator light ...................................
High beam assist indicator (green) (if
equipped) ........................................................
3-15
3-16
3-16
3-16
3-17
3-17
3-17
3-19
3-19
3-21
3-22
3-22
3-23
3-23
3-23
3-23
3-24
3-25
3-25
3-30
3-31
3-31
3-31
3-31
Black plate (6,1)
High beam assist warning indicator (yellow) (if

equipped).........................................................
Cruise control indicator ......................................
Cruise control set indicator ................................
Automatic headlight beam leveler warning light
(models with HID headlights) ............................
Headlight indicator light .....................................
Front fog light indicator light (if equipped) ..........
X-mode indicator (if equipped) ............................
Hill descent control indicator (if equipped) ..........
Steering responsive fog lights OFF indicator
(models with EyeSight system) .........................
BSD/RCTA warning indicator (if equipped) ..........
BSD/RCTA OFF indicator (if equipped) ................
Icy road surface warning indicator ......................
RAB warning indicator (if equipped) ...................
RAB OFF indicator (if equipped) .........................
Sonar audible alarm OFF indicator (if
equipped).........................................................
3-31
3-31
3-32
3-32
3-32
3-32
3-32
3-32
3-32
3-32
3-32
3-32
3-33
3-33
3-33
Information display ............................................
3-33
Clock .................................................................
Climate control mode indicators .........................
Outside temperature indicator ............................
3-34
3-35
3-35
Multi information display ...................................
3-36
Basic operation ..................................................

Welcome screen and Good-bye screen ...............
Warning screen ..................................................
Basic screens ....................................................
Telltale screen ....................................................
Menu screens ....................................................
3-36
3-37
3-37
3-38
3-40
3-41
Light control switch...........................................
3-46
Headlights .........................................................
High/low beam change (dimmer) ........................
Headlight flasher ...............................................
Daytime running light system.............................
3-47
3-49
3-53
3-53
Headlight beam leveler (models with HID

headlights) ......................................................
Turn signal lever ................................................
3-54
3-54
One-touch lane changer .....................................
3-55
Illumination brightness control.........................
3-55
Auto dimmer cancel function .............................
3-55
Front fog light switch (if equipped) ..................
3-56
Steering responsive fog lights system (models

with EyeSight system) .....................................
3-56
Wiper and washer..............................................
3-57
Windshield wiper and washer switches ..............

Rear window wiper and washer switch
(Outback) ........................................................
3-59
3-60
Defogger and deicer ..........................................

Mirrors ................................................................
3-61
3-63
Inside mirror (without auto-dimming function) (if

equipped) ........................................................
Auto-dimming mirror/compass with HomeLink
(U.S.-spec. models without EyeSight system - if
equipped) ........................................................
Auto-dimming mirror with HomeLink (except
U.S.-spec. models - if equipped) .......................
Auto-dimming mirror/compass with HomeLink
(models with EyeSight system) ........................
Outside mirrors .................................................
3-63
3-63
3-69
3-74
3-81
Black plate (7,1)
Tilt/telescopic steering wheel............................

Horn ....................................................................
3-82
3-83
Heated Steering Wheel system (if

equipped) ........................................................
3-83
Black plate (160,1)
3-4
Instruments and controls/Ignition switch (models without pushbutton start system)
Ignition switch (models without push-button start system)

WARNING
. Never turn the ignition switch to
LOCK while the vehicle is
being driven or towed because
that will lock the steering wheel,
preventing steering control. And
when the engine is turned off, it
takes a much greater effort than
usual to steer.
. Before leaving the vehicle, always remove the key from the
ignition switch for safety and
never allow an unattended child
to remain in the vehicle. Failure
to follow this procedure could
result in injury to a child or
others. Children could operate
the power windows, the moonroof or other controls or even
make the vehicle move.
CAUTION
Do not attach a large key holder or
key case to either key. If it banged
against your knees or hands while

you are driving, it could turn the
ignition switch from the ON position to the ACC or LOCK position, thereby stopping the engine.
Also, if the key is attached to a
keyholder or to a large bunch of
other keys, centrifugal force may act
on it as the vehicle moves, resulting
in unwanted turning of the ignition
switch.
The ignition switch has four positions:
LOCK, ACC, ON and START.
long time with the ignition switch in the

ON or ACC position can cause the
battery to go dead.
. If the ignition switch will not move
from the LOCK position to the ACC
position, turn the steering wheel
slightly to the left and right as you turn
the ignition switch.
& LOCK
The key can only be inserted or removed
in this position. The ignition switch will lock
the steering wheel when you remove the
key.
If turning the key is difficult, turn the
steering wheel slightly to the right and left
as you turn the key.
NOTE
. Keep the ignition switch in the
LOCK position when the engine is
not running.
. Using electrical accessories for a
The key can be turned from ACC to

LOCK only when the key is pushed in
Black plate (161,1)
Instruments and controls/Ignition switch (models without pushbutton start system)
while turning it (all models) and the select

lever is in the P position (CVT models).
& ACC
NOTE
The engine may not start in the following cases:
3-5
contains an immobilizer transponder.

. The key is near or touching another
transmitter.
& Key reminder chime
In this position the electrical accessories

(radio, accessory power outlet, etc.) can
be used.
This is the normal operating position after

the engine is started.
The reminder chime sounds when the

drivers door opens and the key is in the
LOCK or ACC positions. The chime
stops when the ignition switch is turned to
the ON position or the key is removed
from the ignition switch.
& START
& Ignition switch light
& ON
CAUTION
Do not turn the ignition switch to the
START position while the engine
is running.
The engine is started in this position. The
starter cranks the engine to start it. When
the key is released (after the engine has
started), the key automatically returns to
the ON position.
If the engine does not start with your
registered key, pull out the key once (at
this time, the security indicator light will
blink), reinsert the key in the ignition
switch and then try to start the engine
again.
. The key grip is touching another key

or a metallic key holder.
For easy access to the ignition switch in

the dark, the ignition switch light illuminates when drivers door is opened or
when the drivers door is unlocked using
the remote keyless entry transmitter.
The light remains illuminated for approximately 30 seconds and gradually turns off
under the following conditions.
. When the drivers door is closed
. When the doors are unlocked using the
remote keyless entry transmitter
. The key is near another key that
The light gradually turns off under the

. When the ignition switch is turned to
the ON position
. When the doors are locked using the
remote keyless entry transmitter
Black plate (162,1)
3-6
Instruments and controls/Pushbutton ignition switch (models with pushbutton start system)
Push-button ignition switch

(models with push-button
start system)
Refer to Safety precautions F2-11.
& Operating range for pushbutton start system
Outback
1) Antenna
2) Operating range
NOTE
Legacy
1) Antenna
2) Operating range
On the floor
Inside the glove box
Inside the door trim pocket
On the rear seat
On the rear shelf (Legacy)
Inside the trunk (Legacy)
At the corner of the cargo area
(Outback)
. When operating the push-button
ignition switch or starting the engine,
if the access key battery is discharged,
perform the procedure described in
Access key if access key does not
operate properly F9-18. In such a
case, replace the battery immediately.
Refer to Replacing battery of access
key F11-50.
. If the access key is not detected

within the operating range of the antennas inside the vehicle, the pushbutton ignition switch and the engine
start cannot be operated.
. Even when the access key is outside
the vehicle, if it is placed too close to
the glass, it may be possible to switch
the power or to start the engine.
. Do not leave the access key in the
following places. It may become impossible to operate the push-button
ignition switch and the engine start.
On the instrument panel
Black plate (163,1)
Instruments and controls/Pushbutton ignition switch (models with pushbutton start system)
& Switching power status
Power
status
Indicator color
Operation
OFF
Turned off
Power is turned
off.
Orange
The following
systems can be
used:
audio and accessory power
outlet.
ACC
ON
1)
2)
Operation indicator
The power status is switched every time

the push-button ignition switch is pressed.
1. Carry the access key, and sit in the
drivers seat.
2. Shift the select lever into the P
position.
3. Press the push-button ignition switch
without depressing the brake pedal. Every
time the button is pressed, the power is
switched in the sequence of OFF,
ACC, ON and OFF. When the engine
is stopped and the push-button ignition
switch is in ACC or ON, the operation
indicator on the push-button ignition
switch illuminates in orange.
Orange
(while engine is
stopped)
Turned off
(while engine is
running)
All electrical
systems can be
used.
CAUTION
. To prevent the vehicle battery
from discharging, do not leave
the push-button ignition switch
in the ON or ACC position for
a long time.
. To avoid a malfunction, observe
the following precautions.
Do not spill drinks or other
liquids on the push-button
ignition switch.
Do not touch the push-button
ignition switch with a hand
that is soiled with oil or other
3-7
contaminants.
. If the push-button ignition switch
does not operate smoothly, stop
the operation. Contact a
SUBARU dealer immediately.
. If the push-button ignition switch
does not illuminate even when
the instrument panel illumination
is turned on, have the vehicle
inspected at a SUBARU dealer.
. If the vehicle was left in the hot
sun for a long time, the surface of
may get hot. Be careful not to
burn yourself.
NOTE
. When operating the push-button
ignition switch, firmly press it all the
way.
. If the push-button ignition switch is
pressed quickly, the power may not
turn on or off.
. If the indicator light on the pushbutton ignition switch flashes in green
when the push-button ignition switch is
pressed, steering is locked. When this
occurs, press the push-button ignition
switch while turning the steering wheel
left and right.
CONTINUED
Black plate (164,1)
3-8
Instruments and controls/Hazard warning flasher
! Battery drainage prevention function

When the push-button ignition switch is
left in the ACC or ON position for
approximately 1 hour, the push-button
ignition switch will be automatically
switched to OFF to prevent the battery
from going dead. This function is activated
when the select lever is in the P position.
Meters and gauges

NOTE
Liquid crystal displays are used in
some of the meters and gauges in the
combination meter. You will find their
indications hard to see if you wear
polarized glasses.

operate properly
& Combination meter illumination


ON position, the various parts of the
combination meter are illuminated in the
following sequence.
The hazard warning flasher is used to

warn other drivers when you have to park
your vehicle under emergency conditions.
The hazard warning flasher works with the
ignition switch in any position.
To turn on the hazard warning flasher,
press the hazard warning button on the
instrument panel. All the turn signal lights
and the turn signal indicator lights will
flash. To turn off the flasher, press the
button again.
1. Warning lights, indicator lights, meter

needles, gauge needles and liquid crystal
display illuminate.
2. The meter and gauge needles sweep
one time.
3. Dials and indicators in meters and
gauges light up.
4. Regular illumination (for driving) begins.
NOTE
When the hazard warning flasher is on,
the turn signals do not work.
Black plate (165,1)
Instruments and controls/Meters and gauges
NOTE
This sequence of operations may not
take place if you quickly turn the
ignition switch to start the engine. This
is not a malfunction.
3-9
& Odometer
& Canceling the function for

meter/gauge needle movement upon turning on the
ignition switch
It is possible to activate or deactivate the
movement of the meter needles and
gauge needles that takes place when the
position. For details, perform the procedures described in Gauge Initial Movement F3-44.
& Speedometer
The speedometer shows the vehicle
speed.
Trip reset switch

1)
2)
U.S. spec. models

Except U.S. spec. models
This meter displays the odometer when

The odometer shows the total distance
that the vehicle has been driven.
If you press the trip reset switch when the

ignition switch is in the LOCK/OFF or
ACC position, the odometer/trip meter
will light up. If you do not press the trip
reset switch within 10 seconds of illumination of the odometer/trip meter, the odometer/trip meter will turn off.
Also, if you open and close the drivers
door within 10 seconds of illumination of
the odometer/trip meter, the odometer/trip
meter will turn off.
CONTINUED
Black plate (166,1)
3-10
& Double trip meter

To set the trip meter to zero, select the A
trip or B trip meter by pressing the trip
reset switch and keep the switch pressed
for more than 2 seconds.
CAUTION
Trip reset switch
This meter displays the two trip meters

when the ignition switch is in the ON
position.
The trip meter shows the distance that the
vehicle has been driven since you last set
it to zero.
If you press the trip reset switch when the

ACC position, the odometer/trip meter
will light up. It is possible to switch
between the A trip meter and B trip meter
indications while the odometer/trip meter
is lit up. If you do not press the trip reset
switch within 10 seconds of illumination of
Also, if you open and close the drivers
door within 10 seconds of illumination of
The display can be switched as shown in
the following illustration by pressing the
trip reset switch.
To ensure safety, do not attempt to

change the function of the indicator
during driving, as an accident could
result.
NOTE
If the connection between the combination meter and battery is broken for any
reason such as vehicle maintenance or
fuse replacement, the data recorded on
the trip meter will be lost.
& Tachometer
The tachometer shows the engine speed
in thousands of revolutions per minute.
CAUTION
Do not operate the engine with the
pointer of the tachometer in the red
zone. In this range, fuel injection will
be cut by the engine control module
Black plate (167,1)
to protect the engine from overrevving. The engine will resume running normally after the engine speed
is reduced below the red zone.
NOTE
To protect the engine while the select
lever is in the P or N position (for
CVT models) or the shift lever is in the
neutral position (for MT models), the
engine is controlled so that the engine
speed may not become too high even if
the accelerator pedal is pressed hard.
& Fuel gauge
OFF or ACC position, the fuel gauge

shows E even if the fuel tank contains
fuel.
The gauge may move slightly due to fuel
level movement in the tank (e.g., during
braking, turning or acceleration).
If you press the trip reset switch while the
ACC position, the fuel gauges dial will
light up and the needle will indicate the
amount of fuel remaining in the tank.
If, while the fuel gauge needle is indicating
the amount of fuel remaining in the tank,
you (a) do not press the trip reset switch
for 10 seconds or (b) open and close the
drivers door, the fuel gauge needle will
drop to the E position and the dial and
needle will turn off.
3-11
NOTE
You will see the

sign in the fuel
gauge.
This indicates that the fuel filler door
(lid) is located on the right side of the
vehicle.
The fuel gauge shows the approximate

amount of fuel remaining in the tank.
When the ignition switch is in the LOCK/
CONTINUED
Black plate (168,1)
3-12
& Temperature gauge
CAUTION
If the pointer exceeds the normal
operating range, safely stop the
vehicle as soon as possible.
Refer to Engine overheating F913.
& ECO gauge
1)
Normal operating range
efficiency as shown in the following chart.

Displayed unit
Needle position
+ side
- side
MPG
Better
Poorer
l/100km
Poorer
Better
NOTE
. The ECO gauge shows only an
approximate indication.
. After resetting the trip meter, the
average rate of fuel consumption is not
shown until driving 0.6 mile (1 km).
Until that time, the ECO gauge does not
operate.
The temperature gauge shows engine

coolant temperature when the ignition
switch is in the ON position.
The coolant temperature will vary in
accordance with the outside temperature
and driving conditions.
We recommend that you drive moderately
until the pointer of the temperature gauge
reaches near the middle of the range.
Engine operation is optimum with the
engine coolant at this temperature range
and high revving operation when the
engine is not warmed up enough should
be avoided.
1)
2)
U.S. spec. models

The ECO gauge shows the difference

between the average rate of fuel consumption since the trip meter was last
reset and the current rate of fuel consumption.
The ECO gauge indicates the current fuel
Black plate (169,1)
Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights
Warning and indicator lights

Several of the warning and indicator lights
illuminate momentarily and then go out
when the ignition switch is initially turned
to the ON position. This permits checking the operation of the bulbs.
Apply the parking brake and turn the
ignition switch to the ON position. For
the system check, the following lights
illuminate and turn off after several seconds or after the engine has started:
: Seatbelt warning light
(The seatbelt warning light turns off
only when the driver fastens the
seatbelt.)
: Charge warning light

: Oil pressure warning light
: AT OIL TEMP warning light
(CVT models)
/
: ABS warning light
: Vehicle Dynamics Control warning

light/Vehicle Dynamics Control operation indicator light
: Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indicator light
/
: Brake system warning light
: Hill Holder indicator light
3-13
corresponding system.
Consult your authorized SUBARU dealer
for repair.
& Seatbelt warning light

and chime
Your vehicle is equipped with a seatbelt

warning device at the drivers and front
passengers seat, as required by current
safety standards.
With the ignition switch turned to the ON
position, this device reminds the driver
and front passenger to fasten their seatbelts by the warning lights in the locations
indicated in the following illustration and a
chime.
: All-Wheel Drive warning light (CVT

models)
: Front passengers seatbelt warning

light
(The seatbelt warning light turns off
only when the front seat passenger
fastens the seatbelt.)
: Low tire pressure warning light

(U.S. spec. models)
: SRS airbag system warning light
: Low fuel warning light
: Power steering warning light
ON /
: Front passengers frontal airbag

ON indicator light
: Hill descent control indicator (if

equipped)
: Front passengers frontal airbag

OFF indicator light
: Automatic headlight beam leveler

warning light (if equipped)
: CHECK ENGINE warning light/

Malfunction indicator light
If any lights fail to illuminate, it indicates a

burned-out bulb or a malfunction of the
Drivers warning light
CONTINUED
Black plate (170,1)
3-14
Front passengers warning light
! Operation
If the driver and/or front passenger have/
has not yet fastened the seatbelt(s) when
the ignition switch is turned to the ON
position, the seatbelt warning light(s) will
flash for 6 seconds, to warn that the
seatbelt(s) is/are unfastened. If the drivers seatbelt is not fastened, a chime will
also sound simultaneously.
NOTE
. If the drivers and/or front passengers seatbelt(s) are/is still not fastened
6 seconds later, the seatbelt warning
device operates as follows according
to the vehicle speed.
At speeds lower than approximately 9 mph (15 km/h)
The warning light(s) for unfastened

seatbelt(s) will alternate between
steady illumination and flashing at
15-second intervals. The chime will
not sound.
At speeds higher than approximately 9 mph (15 km/h)
The warning light(s) for unfastened
seatbelt(s) will alternate between
flashing and steady illumination at
15-second intervals and the chime
will sound while the warning light(s)
is/are flashing.
If there is no passenger on the front
passengers seat, the seatbelt warning
device for the front passengers seat will
be deactivated. The front passengers
occupant detection system monitors
whether or not there is a passenger on
the front passengers seat.
Observe the following precautions. Failure
to do so may prevent the device from
functioning correctly or cause the device
to fail.
. Do not install any accessory such as a
table or TV onto the seatback.
. Do not store a heavy load in the
seatback pocket.
. Do not allow the rear seat occupant to
place his/her hands or legs on the front
passengers seatback, or allow him/her to
pull the seatback.

. Do not use front seats with their backward-forward position and seatback not
being locked into place securely. If any of
them are not locked securely, adjust them
again. For adjusting procedure, refer to
Manual seat F1-4 (models equipped
with manual seats only).
If the seatbelt warning device for the front
passengers seat does not function correctly (e.g., it is activated even when the
front passengers seat is empty or it is
deactivated even when the front passenger has not fastened his/her seatbelt),
take the following actions.
. Ensure that no article is placed on the
seat other than a child restraint system
and its child occupant.
. Ensure that there is no article left in the
seatback pocket.
. Ensure that the backward-forward position and seatback of front passengers
If still the seatbelt warning device for front
passengers seat does not function correctly after taking relevant corrective actions described above, immediately contact your SUBARU dealer for an inspection.
Black plate (171,1)
& SRS airbag system

warning light
WARNING
If the warning light exhibits any of
the following conditions, there may
be a malfunction in the seatbelt
pretensioners and/or SRS airbag
system.
. Flashing or flickering of the warning light
. No illumination of the warning
light when the ignition switch is
first turned to the ON position
. Continuous illumination of the
warning light
. Illumination of the warning light
while driving
Immediately take your vehicle to
your nearest SUBARU dealer to
have the system checked. Unless
checked and properly repaired, the
seatbelt pretensioners and/or SRS
airbags will operate improperly (e.g.
SRS airbags may inflate in a very
minor collision or not inflate in a
severe collision), which may increase the risk of injury.
For details about the components mon-
itored by the warning light, refer to SRS

airbag system monitors F1-68.
& Front passengers frontal

airbag ON and OFF indicators
NOTE
For details about the operating conditions of SRS seat cushion airbag, refer
to SRS seat cushion airbag operation
F1-61.
3-15
The indicators are located as shown in the

illustration.
ON position, both the ON and OFF
indicators illuminate for 6 seconds during
which time the system is checked. Following the system check, both indicators turn
off for 2 seconds. After that, one of the
indicators illuminates depending on the
status of the front passengers SRS frontal
airbag determined by the SUBARU advanced frontal airbag system monitoring.
If the front passengers SRS frontal airbag
is activated, the passengers frontal airbag
ON indicator will illuminate while the OFF
indicator will remain off.
If the front passengers SRS frontal airbag
is deactivated, the passengers frontal
airbag ON indicator will remain off while
the OFF indicator will illuminate.
ON /
/
: Front passengers frontal airbag ON

indicator
: Front passengers frontal airbag OFF
indicator
With the ignition switch turned to the ON

position, if both the ON and OFF indicators remain illuminated or off simultaneously even after the system check
period, the system is malfunctioning.
Contact your SUBARU dealer immediately for an inspection.
The front passengers frontal airbag ON

and OFF indicators show you the status of
the front passengers SRS frontal airbag.
CONTINUED
Black plate (172,1)
3-16
& CHECK ENGINE
warning light/Malfunction indicator light

CAUTION
If the CHECK ENGINE warning light/

malfunction indicator light illuminates while you are driving, have
your vehicle checked/repaired by
your SUBARU dealer as soon as
possible. Continued vehicle operation without having the emission
control system checked and repaired as necessary could cause
serious damage, which may not be
covered by your vehicles warranty.
If this light illuminates steadily or blinks
while the engine is running, it may indicate
that there is a problem or potential
problem somewhere in the emission control system.
! If the light illuminates constantly
If the light illuminates constantly while
driving or does not turn off after the engine
starts, an emission control system malfunction has been detected.
You should have your vehicle checked by
an authorized SUBARU dealer immediately.
NOTE
This light also illuminates when the fuel
filler cap is not tightened until it clicks.
If you have recently refueled your vehicle,
the cause of the CHECK ENGINE warning
light/malfunction indicator light coming on
could be a loose or missing fuel filler cap.
Remove the cap and retighten it until it
clicks. Make sure nothing is interfering
with the sealing of the cap. Tightening the
cap will not make the CHECK ENGINE
warning light/malfunction indicator light
turn off immediately. It may take several
driving trips. If the light does not turn off,
take your vehicle to your authorized
! If the light is blinking
If the light is blinking while driving, an
engine misfire condition has been detected which may damage the emission
control system.
To prevent serious damage to the emission control system, you should conform
to the following instructions.
. Reduce vehicle speed.
. Avoid hard acceleration.
. Avoid steep uphill grades.
. Reduce the amount of cargo, if possible.
. Stop towing a trailer as soon as
possible.
The CHECK ENGINE warning light/malfunction indicator light may stop blinking
and illuminate steadily after several driving trips. You should have your vehicle
checked by an authorized SUBARU dealer immediately.
& Charge warning light

If this light illuminates when the engine is
running, it may indicate that the charging
system is not working properly.
If the light illuminates while driving or does
not turn off after the engine starts, stop the
engine at the first safe opportunity and
check the alternator belt. If the belt is
loose, broken or if the belt is in good
condition but the light remains illuminated,
contact your nearest SUBARU dealer
immediately.
& Oil pressure warning

light
CAUTION
oil pressure warning light on. This
may cause serious engine damage.
running, it may indicate that the engine oil
pressure is low and the lubricating system
Black plate (173,1)
is not working properly.

If the light illuminates while driving or does
not turn off after the engine starts, stop the
engine at the first safe opportunity and
check the engine oil level. If the oil level is
low, add oil immediately. If the engine oil is
at the proper level but the light remains
illuminated, contact your nearest
& Engine low oil level

warning indicator
This indicator appears when the engine oil

level decreases to the lower limit.
If the engine low oil level warning indicator
appears while driving, park the vehicle at a
safe and level location, and then check
the engine oil level. When the engine oil
level is not within the normal range, refill
with engine oil. Refer to Engine oil F1111.
If the warning indicator does not disappear
after refilling with engine oil or the warning
indicator appears even though the engine
oil level is within the normal range, have
the system checked by a SUBARU dealer.
NOTE
. After replacing or adding the engine
oil, if the engine oil level is within the
normal range when restarting the en-
gine on a level surface, the warning

indicator will be off.
. The warning indicator may appear
temporarily in the following conditions
because a low oil level may be detected
as a result of significant oil movement
in the engine.
when the vehicle is considerably
inclined on an uphill or steep slope
when the vehicle has continuously accelerated and decelerated
when the vehicle is continuously
turned
when the vehicle is driven on a
road that alternates continuously
between uphill and downhill
& AT OIL TEMP warning

light (CVT models)

running, it may indicate that the transmission fluid temperature is too hot.
If the light illuminates while driving, immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place
and let the engine idle until the warning
light turns off.
! Transmission control system warning
If the AT OIL TEMP warning light flashes
after the engine has started, it may
3-17
indicate that the transmission control

system is not working properly. Contact
your nearest SUBARU dealer for service
immediately.
& Low tire pressure
warning light (U.S. spec.

models)

ON position, the low tire pressure warning light will illuminate for approximately 2
seconds to check that the tire pressure
monitoring system (TPMS) is functioning
properly. If there is no problem and all tires
are properly inflated, the light will go out.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold
and inflated to the inflation pressure
recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of
a different size than the size indicated on
the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the
proper tire inflation pressure for those
tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle
has been equipped with a tire pressure
monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates
a low tire pressure telltale when one or
more of your tires is significantly under CONTINUED
Black plate (174,1)
3-18
inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire

pressure telltale illuminates, you should
stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper
pressure. Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and
can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life,
and may affect the vehicles handling and
stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a
substitute for proper tire maintenance,
and it is the drivers responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if
under-inflation has not reached the level
to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire
pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with
a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate
when the system is not operating properly.
The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale.
When the system detects a malfunction,
the telltale will flash for approximately one
minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue
upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long
as the malfunction exists. When the
malfunction indicator is illuminated, the
system may not be able to detect or signal
low tire pressure as intended. TPMS
malfunctions may occur for a variety of
reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on

the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from
functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing
one or more tires or wheels on your
vehicle to ensure that the replacement or
alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
to continue to function properly.
Should the warning light illuminate steadily after blinking for approximately one
minute, have the system inspected by
your nearest SUBARU dealer as soon as
possible.
WARNING
If this light does not illuminate
briefly after the ignition switch is
turned ON or the light illuminates
steadily after blinking for approximately one minute, you should have
your Tire Pressure Monitoring System checked at a SUBARU dealer as
soon as possible.
If this light illuminates while driving,
never brake suddenly. Instead, perform the following procedure. Otherwise an accident involving serious
vehicle damage and serious personal injury could occur.
1) Keep driving straight ahead while
gradually reducing speed.

2) Slowly pull off the road to a safe
place.
If this light still illuminates while
driving after adjusting the tire pressure, a tire may have significant
damage and a fast leak that causes
the tire to lose air rapidly. If you have
a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire
When a spare tire is mounted or a
wheel rim is replaced without the
original pressure sensor/transmitter
being transferred, the Low tire pressure warning light will illuminate
steadily after blinking for approximately one minute. This indicates
the TPMS is unable to monitor all
four road wheels. Contact your
SUBARU dealer as soon as possible
for tire and sensor replacement and/
or system resetting. If the light
illuminates steadily after blinking
for approximately one minute,
promptly contact a SUBARU dealer
to have the system inspected.
CAUTION
The tire pressure monitoring system
is NOT a substitute for manually
Black plate (175,1)
checking tire pressure. The tire

pressure should be checked periodically (at least monthly) using a
tire gauge. After any change to tire
pressure(s), the tire pressure monitoring system will not re-check tire
inflation pressures until the vehicle
is first driven more than 20 mph (32
km/h). After adjusting the tire pressures, increase the vehicle speed to
at least 20 mph (32 km/h) to start the
TPMS re-checking of the tire inflation pressures. If the tire pressures
are now above the severe low
pressure threshold, the low tire
pressure warning light should turn
off a few minutes later. Therefore, be
sure to install the specified size for
the front and rear tires.
& ABS warning light

CAUTION
. If any of the following conditions
occur, we recommend that you
have the ABS repaired at the first
available opportunity by your
SUBARU dealer.
The warning light does not
illuminate when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON

position.
The warning light illuminates
when the ignition switch is
turned to the ON position,
but it does not turn off even
after starting the vehicle.
The warning light illuminates
during driving.
. When the warning light is on (and
brake system warning light is
off), the ABS function shuts
down; however, the conventional
brake system continues to operate normally.
The ABS warning light illuminates together with the brake system warning light
if the EBD system malfunctions. For
further details of the EBD system malfunction warning, refer to Brake system
warning light F3-19.
NOTE
If the warning light behavior is as
described in the following conditions,
the ABS may be considered normal.
. The warning light illuminates right
after the engine is started but turns off
immediately, remaining off.
. The warning light remains illuminated after the engine has been started,
3-19
but it turns off while driving.

. The warning light illuminates during
driving, but it turns off immediately and
remains off.
When driving with an insufficient battery
voltage such as when the engine is jump
started, the ABS warning light may illuminate. This is due to the low battery voltage
and does not indicate a malfunction.
When the battery becomes fully charged,
the light will turn off.
& Brake system

warning light
WARNING
. Driving with the brake system
warning light on is dangerous.
This indicates your brake system
may not be working properly. If
the light remains illuminated,
have the brakes inspected by a
. If at all in doubt about whether
the brakes are operating properly, do not drive the vehicle.
Have your vehicle towed to the
nearest SUBARU dealer for repair.
. If the brake system warning light
illuminates, the electronic park CONTINUED
Black plate (176,1)
3-20
ing brake system may be malfunctioning. Immediately stop

your vehicle in a safe location,
use tire stops under the tires to
prevent the vehicle from moving
and contact your SUBARU dealer. For details, refer to Electronic parking brake F7-43.
NOTE
. Even if the brake system warning
light illuminates, if the warning light
behavior is as described in the following examples, the electronic parking
brake system is not malfunctioning.
The warning light turns off when
the electronic parking brake is applied or released.
The warning light turns off when
the ignition switch is turned to the
ON position again.
. The brake system warning light may
illuminate immediately after the engine
is started. However, it is not malfunctioning if the warning light turns off
after the electronic parking brake is
released.
. The brake system warning light may
illuminate after the electronic parking
brake is frequently applied and released. However, the electronic parking
brake system is not malfunctioning if

the light turns off after a short period of
time.
. When the engine is started while the
electronic parking brake is applied/
released, the system may judge an
abnormal situation and the warning
light may illuminate. If the warning light
illuminates, turn the ignition switch
once to the LOCK/OFF position
and then restart the engine. Then,
apply/release the electronic parking
brake. If the warning light turns off,
the system will be restored.
This light has the following functions.
! Brake fluid level warning
This light illuminates when the brake fluid
level has dropped to near the MIN level
of the brake fluid reservoir with the ignition
switch in the ON position and with the
parking brake fully released.
If the brake system warning light should
illuminate while driving (with the parking
brake fully released and with the ignition
switch positioned in ON), it could be an
indication of leaking of brake fluid or worn
brake pads. If this occurs, immediately
stop the vehicle at the nearest safe place
and check the brake fluid level. If the fluid
level is below the MIN mark in the
reservoir, do not drive the vehicle. Have
the vehicle towed to the nearest SUBARU

dealer for repair.
! Electronic Brake Force Distribution
(EBD) system warning
The brake system warning light also
illuminates if a malfunction occurs in the
EBD system. In that event, it illuminates
together with the ABS warning light.
The EBD system may be malfunctioning if
the brake system warning light and ABS
warning light illuminate simultaneously
during driving.
Even if the EBD system fails, the conventional braking system will still function.
However, the rear wheels will be more
prone to locking when the brakes are
applied harder than usual and the vehicles motion may therefore become somewhat harder to control.
If the brake system warning light and ABS
warning light illuminate simultaneously,
take the following steps.
1. Stop the vehicle in the nearest safe,
flat place.
2. Shut down the engine, apply the
parking brake and then restart it.
3. Release the parking brake. If both
warning lights turn off, the EBD system
may be malfunctioning. Drive carefully to
the nearest SUBARU dealer and have the
Black plate (177,1)
system inspected.
4. If both warning lights illuminate again
and remain illuminated after the engine
has been restarted, shut down the engine
again, apply the parking brake, and check
the brake fluid level.
5. If the brake fluid level is not below the
MIN mark, the EBD system may be
malfunctioning. Drive carefully to the
nearest SUBARU dealer and have the
system inspected.
6. If the brake fluid level is below the
MIN mark, DO NOT drive the vehicle.
Instead, have the vehicle towed to the
! Electronic parking brake system
warning
The brake system warning light illuminates when the electronic parking brake
system is malfunctioning. If the warning
light illuminates, promptly park in a safe
location as soon as possible and contact
your SUBARU dealer.
The brake system warning light remains
illuminated when the parking brake cannot
be released even if the parking brake
switch is pushed. For details, refer to
Electronic parking brake F7-43.
! Frequent operation warning

The brake system warning light illuminates and a chirp sound will be heard if
the parking brake switch is operated too
frequently. In this case, the operation of
the parking brake switch is restricted to
protect the electronic parking brake system.
& Electronic parking
brake indicator light
! Parking brake indicator

The light illuminates with the parking
brake applied while the ignition switch is
in the ON position. It turns off when the
parking brake is fully released.
warning
WARNING
. When you release the electronic
parking brake while the engine is
running, the electronic parking
brake indicator light will turn off.
However, if the light still illuminates, stop the vehicle in a safe
location immediately and have
the system inspected by a
SUBARU dealer.
3-21

. If the electronic parking brake
indicator light flashes, the electronic parking brake system may
be malfunctioning. Immediately
stop your vehicle in a safe location, use tire stops under the
tires to prevent the vehicle from
moving and contact your
SUBARU dealer. For details, refer
to Electronic parking brake
F7-43.
NOTE
. When the ignition switch is turned to
the LOCK/OFF position with the
electronic parking brake applied, the
electronic parking brake indicator light
remains illuminated for approximately
30 seconds and then turns off.
. When the electronic parking brake
switch is pulled to apply the electronic
parking brake while the ignition switch
is in the LOCK/OFF position, the
electronic parking brake indicator light
illuminates, remains illuminated for
CONTINUED
Black plate (178,1)
3-22
approximately 30 seconds and then

turns off.
. Even if the electronic parking brake
indicator light flashes, if the warning
light behavior is as described in the
following examples, the electronic
parking brake system is not malfunctioning.
The indicator light turns off when
the electronic parking brake is released.
. The electronic parking brake indicator light may flash immediately after the
engine is started. However, it is not
malfunctioning if the indicator light
turns off after the electronic parking
brake is released.
. The electronic parking brake indicator light may flash after the electronic
parking brake is frequently applied and
released. However, the electronic parking brake system is not malfunctioning
if the light turns off after a short period
of time.
The electronic parking brake indicator light
flashes when the electronic parking brake
system is malfunctioning. If the indicator
light flashes, promptly park in a safe
location as soon as possible and contact
your SUBARU dealer.
remains illuminated when the parking
brake cannot be released even if the

parking brake switch is pushed. For details, refer to Electronic parking brake
F7-43.
! Parking brake apply inhibit warning
flashes for 10 seconds and a chirp sound
will be heard if the parking brake switch is
operated when the parking brake cannot
be applied.
! Frequent operation warning
flashes for 10 seconds and a chirp sound
will be heard if the parking brake switch is
operated too frequently. In this case, the
operation of the parking brake switch is
restricted to protect the electronic parking
brake system.
NOTE
Wait until the indicator light turns off.
& Hill Holder indicator

light
the Hill Holder function, the electronic parking brake system may be
malfunctioning. Immediately stop
the vehicle in a safe location and
contact your SUBARU dealer.
The light illuminates when the Hill Holder
switch is pressed to activate the Hill
Holder function. For details about the Hill
Holder function, Hill Holder function F745.
& Low fuel warning

light
The low fuel warning light illuminates

when the tank is nearly empty approximately 2.6 US gal (10.0 liters, or 2.2 Imp
gal). It only operates when the ignition
NOTE
This light does not turn off unless the
tank is replenished up to an internal
fuel quantity of approximately 3.7 US
gal (14 liters, 3.1 Imp gal).
CAUTION
WARNING
If the Hill Holder indicator light does

not illuminate even when the Hill
Holder switch is pressed to activate
Promptly put fuel in the tank whenever the low fuel warning light
illuminates. Engine misfires as a
result of an empty tank could cause
Black plate (179,1)
damage to the engine.
& All-Wheel Drive warn-
ing light (CVT models)
& Door open indicator

When any of the doors, the rear gate
(Outback) or the trunk lid (Legacy) is not
fully closed, the door open indicator
appears. This function is effective even if
the ignition switch is in the LOCK/OFF
or ACC position (all models) or the key is
removed from the ignition switch (models
without keyless access with push-button
start system).
The open door is indicated by the corresponding part of the door open indicator.
Always make sure this indicator does not
appear before you start to drive.
& Windshield washer
fluid warning indicator
This indicator appears when the fluid level

in the windshield washer fluid tank decreases to the lower limit (approximately
0.6 US qt, 0.6 liter, 0.5 Imp qt).
WARNING
Continued driving with the AWD
warning light flashing can lead to
powertrain damage. If the AWD
warning light flashes, promptly park
in a safe location and then check
whether all four tires are the same
diameter and whether any of the
tires has a puncture or has lost air
pressure for some other reason.
NOTE
If the temporary spare tire is used, the
AWD warning light may flash. Use of
the temporary spare tire should therefore be restricted to the minimum time
necessary. Replace the temporary
spare tire with a conventional tire as
soon as possible.
This light flashes if the vehicle is driven
with tires of different diameters fitted on its
wheels or with the air pressure excessively low in any of its tires.
3-23
& Power steering warning light
While the engine is running, this warning

light illuminates when a malfunction has
been detected in the electric power steering system.
CAUTION
When the power steering warning
light is illuminated, there may be
more resistance when the steering
wheel is operated. Drive carefully to
the nearest SUBARU dealer and
have the vehicle inspected immediately.
NOTE
If the steering wheel is operated in the
following ways, the power steering
control system may temporarily limit
the power assist in order to prevent the
system components, such as the control computer and drive motor, from
overheating.
. The steering wheel is operated frequently and turned sharply while the
vehicle is maneuvered at extremely low
speeds, such as while frequently turning the steering wheel during parallel
parking.
CONTINUED
Black plate (180,1)
3-24
. The steering wheel remains in the

fully turned position for a long period
of time.
At this time, there will be more resistance when steering. However this is
not a malfunction. Normal steering
force will be restored after the steering
wheel is not operated for a while and
the power steering control system has
an opportunity to cool down. However,
if the power steering is operated in a
non-standard way which causes power
assist limitation to occur too frequently, that may result in a malfunction of the power steering control
system.
& Vehicle Dynamics
Control warning light/

Vehicle Dynamics Control operation indicator
light
! Vehicle Dynamics Control warning

light
CAUTION
The Vehicle Dynamics Control system provides its ABS control
through the electrical circuit of the
ABS. Accordingly, if the ABS is

inoperative, the Vehicle Dynamics
Control system becomes unable to
provide ABS control. As a result, the
Vehicle Dynamics Control system
becomes inoperative, causing the
warning light to illuminate. Although
both the Vehicle Dynamics Control
and ABS are inoperative in this
case, the ordinary functions of the
brake system are still available. You
will be safe while driving in this
condition, but drive carefully and
have your vehicle checked at a
NOTE
. If the electrical circuit of the Vehicle
Dynamics Control system itself malfunctions, the warning light only illuminates. At this time, the ABS (Anti-lock
Brake System) remains fully operational.
. The warning light illuminates when
the electronic control system of the
ABS/Vehicle Dynamics Control system
malfunctions.
The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is
probably inoperative under any of the
following conditions. Have your vehicle
checked at a SUBARU dealer immediately.

. The warning light does not illuminate
when the ignition switch is turned to the
ON position.
. The warning light illuminates while the
vehicle is running.
NOTE
If the warning light behavior is as
described in the following examples,
the Vehicle Dynamics Control system
may be considered normal.
. The warning light illuminates right
after the engine is started but turns off
immediately and remains off.
. The warning light illuminates after
the engine has started and turns off
while the vehicle is subsequently being
driven.
. The warning light illuminates during
driving, but turns off immediately and
remains off.
! Vehicle Dynamics Control operation indicator light
The indicator light flashes during activation of the skid suppression function and
during activation of the traction control
function.
Black plate (181,1)
NOTE
. The light may remain illuminated for
a short period of time after the engine
has been started, especially in cold
weather. This does not indicate the
existence of a problem. The light
should turn off as soon as the engine
has warmed up.
. The indicator light illuminates when
the engine has developed a problem
and the CHECK ENGINE warning light/
malfunction indicator light is on.
probably malfunctioning under the following condition. Have your vehicle checked
at a SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.
. The light does not turn off even after
the lapse of several minutes (the engine
has warmed up) after the engine has
started.
checked at a SUBARU dealer immediately.

. The light does not illuminate when the
position.
. The light does not turn off even after a
period of approximately 2 seconds after
the ignition switch has been turned to the
ON position.
& Warning chimes and warning

indicator of the keyless access with push-button start
system (if equipped)
& Vehicle Dynamics
Control OFF indicator

light
The light illuminates when the Vehicle

Dynamics Control OFF switch is pressed
to deactivate the Vehicle Dynamics Control system.
probably malfunctioning under any of the
following conditions. Have your vehicle
3-25
order to minimize improper operations and

help protect your vehicle from theft.
When the warning chime sounds and/or
the warning indicator appears, take the
appropriate action.
You cannot turn the warning chimes off.
However, the volume setting of the outside
warning chime can be changed by a
dealer for details.
WARNING
Never drive the vehicle if the indicator on the push-button ignition
switch is flashing in green when
starting the engine. This indicates
the status that the steering wheel is
not released and could result in an
accident involving serious injury or
death.
CAUTION
Access key warning indicator

system is equipped with a warning chime
and the access key warning indicator in
. When starting the engine again

after the operation indicator on
flashes in green, if the operation
indicator is still flashing in green,
there could be a steering lock
malfunction. Contact your
CONTINUED
Black plate (182,1)
3-26

. When the operation indicator on
flashes in orange, contact a
NOTE
! List of warnings
CAUTION
When any of the following warnings
occurs even if the access key warning indicator does not appear, take
the appropriate action.
. Even when the access key is within

the operating ranges inside the vehicle,
the access key warning for engine start
may be provided depending on the
status of the access key and the
environmental conditions.
. When the access key is taken out of
the vehicle through an open window,
the access key takeout warning or
passenger access key takeout warning
will not be provided.
Black plate (183,1)
Inside warning
chime
Ding,
ding ...
(intermittent)
indicator
Outside warning Operation
on push-button
chime
ignition switch
3-27
Status
Action
The drivers door is opened while the pushbutton ignition switch is ACC and the select
lever is in the P position.
Switch the push-button ignition switch to

OFF, or close the drivers door.
*When exiting the vehicle, be sure to switch
the push-button ignition switch to OFF.
The push-button ignition switch is switched

to OFF while the drivers door is open.
Close the drivers door.

Take out the access key from the vehicle,
and lock the doors.
*The doors cannot be locked while the
access key is inside the vehicle.
*A chirp sound will be heard, and all doors
will be unlocked.
Ding
Short beep
(2 seconds)
Lockout warning:
An attempt is made to lock all doors while
the access key is left inside the vehicle.
Short beep
(2 seconds)
Access key lock-in warning:

The door lock sensor is touched while the
push-button ignition switch is OFF and the
access key is inside the vehicle.
Take out the access key from the vehicle,

and lock the doors.
*If the access key is inside the vehicle, the
doors cannot be locked.
Beep, beep,
beep, beep,
beep
(5 times)
Door ajar warning:

The door lock sensor is touched while the
ignition switch is in the OFF position and
one of the doors including the rear gate is
opened.
Close the doors securely and lock them.

*If one of the doors including the rear gate is
opened, the doors cannot be locked.
Ding
Long beep (60

seconds max.)
Power warning:
The door lock sensor is touched while you
are carrying the access key, the push-button
ignition switch is in a position other than
OFF and the select lever is in the P
position.
Return the access key inside the vehicle, or

switch the push-button ignition switch to
OFF.
*If the push-button ignition switch is not
switched to OFF, the doors cannot be
locked.
Ding,
ding ...
(7 seconds)
Access key warning:

The vehicle is driven while the access key is Carry the access key, and drive the vehicle.
not inside the vehicle.
CONTINUED
Black plate (184,1)
3-28
Inside warning
chime
Ding
indicator
on push-button
chime
ignition switch
Status
Access key warning for engine start:

The push-button ignition switch is pressed
while the access key is not inside the
vehicle.
Action
Carry the access key, and press the pushbutton ignition switch.
Ding
Beep, beep,
beep (3 times)
Access key takeout warning:

The driver exits the vehicle with the access
Switch the push-button ignition switch to
key and closes the drivers door while the
OFF, and get out of the vehicle.
push-button ignition switch is in a position
other than OFF and the select lever is in
the P position.
Ding
Beep, beep,
beep (3 times)
Passenger access key takeout warning:

A fellow passenger exits the vehicle with the Return the access key to inside the vehicle,
access key and closes a door other than the or switch the push-button ignition switch to
drivers door while the push-button ignition OFF.
switch is in a position other than OFF.
Access key takeout without P position

warning:
The driver exits the vehicle with the access Shift the select lever to the P position,
switch the push-button ignition switch to
key and closes the drivers door while the
OFF and exit the vehicle.
push-button ignition switch is in a position
other than OFF and the select lever is in a
position other than the P position.
Select lever position warning:

.
. Case 1: The engine is turned off by
pressing the push-button ignition switch
while the select lever is in a position
other than the P position.
.
. Case 2: The drivers door is opened
while the push-button ignition switch is in
a position other than OFF and the
select lever is in a position other than the
P position.
Long beep
(continuous)
Long beep
(continuous)
Long beep
(continuous)
Case 1: Start the engine, shift the

select lever to the P position, switch the
push-button ignition switch to OFF and
exit the vehicle.
Case 2: Shift the select lever to the
P position, switch the push-button
ignition switch to OFF and exit the
vehicle.
Black plate (185,1)
Inside warning
chime
Ding
indicator
on push-button
chime
ignition switch
Status
The battery of the access key is low.
3-29
Action
Replace the battery of the access key.
Ding
While turning the steering wheel right and left

Flashes in green Steering lock warning:
depress the brake pedal and press
(15 seconds max.) The engine start procedure is performed, but lightly,
the push-button ignition switch.
the steering is still locked.
Ding
System malfunction warning:

Flashes in orange A malfunction is detected in the power
system or steering lock.
Contact a SUBARU dealer immediately and

have the vehicle inspected.
CONTINUED
Black plate (186,1)
3-30
& Security indicator light

This indicator light shows the status of the
alarm system. It also indicates operation
of the immobilizer system.
! Alarm system
It blinks to show the driver the operational
status of the alarm system. For detailed
information, refer to Alarm system F228.
! Immobilizer system
The security indicator light starts blinking
in the following conditions.
. Immediately after the push-button ignition switch is turned to the OFF position.
. Immediately after the drivers door is
opened or closed when all of the following
conditions are met.
The push-button ignition switch is in
the ON or ACC position.
The access key is outside the
vehicle.
The engine is not running.
In the event that an unauthorized
key is used (for example, the key is
unregistered or the ID code does not
match), the power is not switched to
ON and the security indicator light
continues blinking.
. Approximately 60 seconds after the
ignition switch is turned from the ON
position to the ACC or LOCK position.
. Immediately after the key is pulled out.
If the indicator light does not blink in the
above conditions, it may indicate that
immobilizer system may be malfunctioning. Contact your nearest SUBARU dealer
immediately.
In the event that an unauthorized key (for
example, an unauthorized duplicate) is
used, the security indicator light illuminates. For details about the immobilizer
system, refer to Immobilizer F2-4.
has been turned to the ON or

ACC position and the drivers
door has not been opened or closed
Models without keyless access
while the engine is running
for approximately 60 seconds
after the ignition switch is turned
from the ON position to the
ACC or LOCK position
when the ignition switch is in the
ON position.
. Even if a malfunction occurs, such
as the security indicator light flashes
irregularly, it will not affect the functionality of the immobilizer system.
NOTE
. The security indicator light remains
off in the following conditions. It means
that the matching of the ID code is
completed and the immobilizer system
is deactivated, and it does not indicate
a malfunction.
Black plate (187,1)
& Select lever/gear position indicator
! Gear position indicator setting (MT

models)
The gear position indicator light can be
activated or deactivated. For details about
the setting procedure, refer to Gear
Position Indicator Settings (MT models)
F3-44.
& Turn signal indicator

lights
1)
2)
3)
Upshift indicator
Downshift indicator
For CVT models, the select lever position

is displayed on the indicator.
For MT models, the current gear selection
is displayed on the indicator.
! Upshift/downshift indicator (CVT
models)
When the manual mode is selected, the
gear position indicator (which shows the
current gear selection) and the upshift/
downshift indicator light up. Refer to
Selection of manual mode F7-29.
These lights show the operation of the turn

signal or lane change signal.
If the indicator lights do not blink or blink
rapidly, the turn signal bulb may be burned
out. Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
Refer to Replacing bulbs F11-40.
& High beam indicator

light
This light shows that the headlights are in

the high beam mode.
This indicator light also illuminates when
operating the headlight flasher.
& High beam assist indicator (green) (if

equipped)
This indicator appears when the high

beam assist function is activated. For
details about the high beam assist func-
3-31
tion, refer to High beam assist function

F3-49.
& High beam assist
warning indicator
(yellow) (if equipped)
This warning indicator appears when the

high beam assist function malfunctions.
When this warning indicator appears,
have your vehicle inspected by your
SUBARU dealer.
& Cruise control indicator
This indicator appears when the cruise

control main button is pressed to activate
the cruise control function. For details,
refer to To set cruise control F7-50.
CAUTION
If the CHECK ENGINE warning light/
malfunction indicator light illuminates, the cruise control indicator
flashes at the same time. At this
time, do not drive at high speed and
have your vehicle inspected at a
CONTINUED
Black plate (188,1)
3-32
& Cruise control set in-
& Front fog light indicator
This indicator appears when vehicle

speed has been set to use the cruise
control function.
This indicator light illuminates while the

front fog lights are illuminated.
dicator
& Automatic headlight
beam leveler warning

light (models with HID
headlights)
This light illuminates when the automatic

headlight beam leveler does not operate
normally.
If this light illuminates while driving or does
not turn off approximately 3 seconds after
turning the ignition switch to the ON
position, have your vehicle inspected at
your SUBARU dealer.
& Headlight indicator

light
This indicator light illuminates under the

. when the light switch is turned to the
or position
. when the light switch is in the AUTO

position and the headlights illuminate
automatically
light (if equipped)
& X-mode indicator (if

equipped)
This indicator appears while the X-mode is

activated. It will disappear when the Xmode is deactivated.
& Hill descent control
indicator (if equipped)
This indicator appears while the hill

descent control function is in standby. It
will flash while the hill descent control
function is operating. It will disappear
when the hill descent control function is
not available.
& Steering responsive
fog lights OFF indicator

(models with EyeSight
system)
This indicator appears when the steering

responsive fog lights system is deactivated. This indicator disappears when the
system is activated.
For details about the steering responsive
fog lights system, refer to Steering

responsive fog lights system (models with
EyeSight system) F3-56.
& BSD/RCTA warning indicator (if equipped)
This warning indicator appears on the

multi information display when the BSD
(Blind Spot Detection) or RCTA (Rear
Cross Traffic Alert) is not functioning for
any reason. For further details, refer to
BSD/RCTA warning indicator F7-59. If
this indicator remains displayed, have
your vehicle inspected by your SUBARU
dealer as soon as possible.
& BSD/RCTA OFF indicator (if equipped)
This indicator appears on the multi information display when the BSD/RCTA
OFF switch is pressed to deactivate the
BSD (Blind Spot Detection) and RCTA
(Rear Cross Traffic Alert). For details, refer
to BSD/RCTA OFF switch F7-60.
& Icy road surface warning indicator
When the outside temperature is 378F

(38C) or less, the icy road surface warning
indicator will illuminate to inform the driver
that the road surface may be frozen.
Black plate (189,1)
Instruments and controls/Information display
NOTE
. The outside temperature indicator
shows the temperature in the area
around the sensor. Therefore, the temperature indication may differ from the
actual outside air temperature.
. The icy road surface warning indicator should be treated only as a guide.
Be sure to check the condition of the
road surface before driving.
. Once the icy road surface warning
indicator appears, it will not disappear
unless the outside temperature has
increased to 418F (58C) or higher.
& RAB warning
indicator (if equipped)
This indicator illuminates if the Reverse

Automatic Braking System malfunctions.
Refer to Reverse Automatic Braking
System F7-63.
& RAB OFF indicator (if

equipped)
& Sonar audible alarm

OFF indicator (if
equipped)
3-33
Information display
This indicator illuminates when the sonar

audible alarm is turned OFF. For the
setting procedure, refer to Sonar Audible
Alarm F3-45.
1)
2)
3)
Clock
Climate control mode indicators
Outside temperature indicator
With the ignition switch in the ON

position, the following items are shown
on the information display.
. Clock
. Climate control mode indicators
. Outside temperature indicator
This indicator illuminates when the Reverse Automatic Braking System is turned
OFF, or when the Reverse Automatic
Braking System is suspended temporarily.
Refer to Reverse Automatic Braking
System F7-63.
CONTINUED
Black plate (190,1)
3-34
& Clock
NOTE
Your SUBARU dealer can change the
settings of activating/deactivating the
automatic adjustment of the clock by
the GPS (Global Positioning System)
(for models with the genuine SUBARU
navigation system). While the automatic adjustment is activated, you
cannot adjust the time shown on the
clock manually. If you press the +
button or - button, the --- indication
will be displayed to inform you that you
cannot adjust it manually. Contact your
SUBARU dealer for details.
The clock shows the time while the

ignition switch is in the ACC or ON
position.
To adjust the time shown by the clock,
press the + button or the button. If
you press the + button, the indicated
time will change in one-minute increments. If you press the button, the
indicated time will change in one-minute
decrements. If you keep the button
pressed, the rate at which the indicated
time changes will speed up.
located near the clock display for approximately 5 seconds. The clock display will
then start to flash.
3. While the clock display is flashing,
press and hold the + button for approximately 2 seconds. The clock format will
then change.
4. The clock display will continue to flash
for approximately 3 seconds to inform you
that the clock display has been changed.
If you want to change the clock display
again, press and hold the + button for
approximately 2 seconds while the clock
display is flashing.
The clock can be set to 12-hour or 24-hour

clock displays. Perform the following
procedure to switch the display format.
1. Place the ignition switch in the
LOCK/OFF position.
2. Press and hold the button that is
Black plate (191,1)
& Climate control mode indicators
3-35
& Outside temperature indicator
Models with manual climate control system

1) Maximum air conditioner ON indicator
2) Air conditioner ON indicator
3) Airflow mode indicator
4) Air inlet selection ON indicator
Models with automatic climate control

system
1) Set temperature indicator (drivers side)
2) Set temperature indicator (front passengers side)
3) Maximum air conditioner ON indicator
4) Air conditioner ON indicator
5) FULL AUTO indicator
6) Airflow mode indicator
7) Fan speed indicator
1)
2)
U.S. spec. models

The outside temperature indicator shows

the outside temperature in a range from
22 to 1228F (30 to 508C).
The indicator can give a false reading
under any of the following conditions:
. When there is too much sun.
. During idling; while running at low
speeds in a traffic jam; when the engine
is restarted immediately following a shutdown.
. When the actual outside temperature
falls outside the specified indicator range.
Black plate (192,1)
3-36
Instruments and controls/Multi information display
Multi information display

5)
WARNING
6)
Always pay adequate attention to

safe driving when operating the
multi information display while the
vehicle is in motion. When operation
of the multi information display
interferes with your ability to concentrate on driving, stop the vehicle
before performing operations on the
screen. Also, do not concentrate on
the display while driving. Doing so
may cause you to look away from
the road and could result in an
accident.
Various information will be shown on the
multi information display. Also, a warning
message will appear on the display if a
malfunction, etc. is detected. In addition,
several settings for the displayed content
can be performed.
to Select lever/gear position indicator

F3-31.)
Telltale screen (refer to Telltale screen
F3-40.)
Odometer (refer to Odometer F3-9.)/
double trip meter (refer to Double trip
meter F3-10.)
Control switch
1) Up (select)
2) Set (enter)
3) Down (select)
Multi information display

1) ECO gauge (refer to ECO gauge F312.)
2) Basic screen/Warning screen (refer to
Basic screens F3-38 and Warning
screen F3-37.)
3) Cruise control information display
4) Select lever/gear position indicator (refer
& Basic operation

By operating or of the control
switch, the screens and selection items
can be switched. When the /SET
switch is pulled toward you, the item can
be selected and set.
If there are some useful messages, such
Black plate (193,1)
as vehicle information, warning information, etc., they will interrupt the current
screen, and appear on the display accompanied by a beep. If such a screen is
displayed, take proper action according to
the message shown on the screen.
The warning screen will return to the
original screen after a few seconds. While
the information reminder is shown on
the display, it may be possible to display
the warning screen again. To recall the
message marked with on the display,
pull the /SET switch on the steering
wheel toward you.
& Welcome screen and Goodbye screen

When the drivers door is opened and
closed after unlocking the door, the
welcome screen will appear on the multi
information display for approximately 20
seconds.
LOCK/OFF position, the multi information display gradually turns off (Good-bye
screen).
screen is displayed.
. Once the welcome screen appears,
it takes a certain period of time to
display it again.
. If the ignition switch is operated
after unlocking the drivers door, the
welcome screen will not appear even
when the drivers door is opened and
closed.
. The welcome screen will disappear
when you lock the drivers door by
using the remote keyless entry system
(all models) or the keyless access
function (if equipped) while the welcome screen is displayed.
. If any of the doors (including the
rear gate) is opened while the welcome
screen is displayed, the door ajar
warning will appear.
. The welcome screen can be set to
on or off. For details, refer to Welcome
Screen F3-44.
. The Good-bye screen can be set to
on or off. For details, refer to Goodbye Screen F3-44.
3-37
& Warning screen
Example of warning
If there is a warning message or a

maintenance notification, it will appear for
approximately 5 seconds. Take the appropriate actions based on the messages
indicated.
NOTE
. The basic screen will be shown
when the ignition switch is turned to
the ON position while the welcome
CONTINUED
Black plate (194,1)
3-38
& Basic screens
Average fuel consumption screen:
By operating the or switch on the

steering wheel, you can change the
screen that is always displayed.
Default screen:
Journey time alert screen
NOTE
The journey time alert screen will
appear 2 hours after the ignition switch
is turned on. When you see this screen,
it is recommended that you take a rest
from driving.
: Fuel consumption
: Driving range on remaining fuel
This screen displays the average rate of fuel
consumption since the trip meter was last
reset.
Black plate (195,1)

Current fuel consumption screen:
Driving information screen:
3-39
Digital speed screen:
: Fuel consumption
: Driving range on remaining fuel
This screen displays the rate of fuel consumption at the present moment.
: Journey time
: Journey distance
This screen displays the journey time (the
time that has elapsed since the ignition switch
was turned to the ON position) and journey
distance (the distance that has been driven
since the ignition switch was turned to the
ON position).
This screen displays the current vehicle

speed.
Multi Media Link screen (while not selecting
the destination) (models with genuine
SUBARU navigation system):
CONTINUED
Black plate (196,1)
3-40
Multi Media Link screen (while selecting the

destination) (models with genuine SUBARU
navigation system):
& Telltale screen
1)
Menu screen entering screen:
Telltale screen
When the corresponding situation occurs,

the following telltales will be displayed on
the telltale screen.
Mark
Name
Page
Door open indicator
3-23
3-31
Engine low oil level

warning indicator
3-17
BSD/RCTA warning indicator (if equipped)
3-32
BSD/RCTA OFF indicator (if equipped)
3-32
Steering responsive fog

lights OFF indicator (if
equipped)
3-32
High beam assist

warning indicator (yellow)
3-31
Windshield washer fluid 3-23,

3-59,
warning indicator
11-32
Hill descent control indicator (if equipped)
3-32
While this screen is selected, pull and hold the

/SET switch to enter the menu screen.
Black plate (197,1)
Mark
Name
Page
Icy road surface warning indicator
3-32
Access key warning indicator (if equipped)
3-25
RAB warning indicator

(if equipped)
3-33
RAB OFF indicator (if

equipped)
3-33
Sonar audible alarm

OFF indicator (if
equipped)
3-33
3-41
NOTE
If you enter the Go Back menu, the
system will return to the previous
screen.
& Menu screens

Pull and hold the /SET switch to enter
the menu screens when all of the following
conditions are satisfied.
. The vehicle has been completely
stopped.
. The menu screen entering screen is
selected.
By operating the or switch on the
steering wheel, you can select the menu.
Pull the /SET switch to enter the
selected menu.
CONTINUED
Black plate (198,1)
3-42
The menu list is as follows.

Second menu
First menu
Screen Settings
Third menu
Welcome Screen
Good-bye Screen
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
Gear Position Indicator Settings

(MT models)
Meter Ring Illumination
ON/OFF
.
.
Km, km/h, Liter

miles, MPH, Gallon
.
.
.
.
English
Spanish
French
Japanese
Languages
EyeSight (models with EyeSight

system)
ON (with sound)
ON (without sound)
OFF
Gauge Initial Movement
Units
Combination Meter Illumination (if

equipped)
Settings
.
.
.
ON/OFF
Warning Volume
Max/Mid/Min
Lead Vehicle Acquisition Sound
ON/OFF
Lead Vehicle Moving Monitor

Function
Vehicle Icon
ON/OFF
BSD/RCTA (if equipped)
Warning Volume
Max/Mid/Min
RAB (if equipped)
Warning Volume
Max/Mid/Min
ON/OFF
Sonar Audible Alarm
ON/OFF
Black plate (199,1)
Second menu
First menu
Vehicle Setting
Keyless Entry System
Third menu
Audible Signal*1
ON/OFF
Driver Door Unlock*1
Driver Door Only, All
Rear Gate Unlock*1

Interior Light
Auto Headlights
Welcome Lighting
Default Settings
OK To Reset?
Settings
ON/OFF
Hazard Warning Flasher
Defogger
3-43
*2
*2 *3
Rear Gate Only, All
15 minutes/Continuous
10 seconds 30 seconds, OFF
Light Sensitivity
Max/Mid/Low/Min
Wiper Link
ON/OFF
Approaching Time Set
Leaving Time Set
Yes/No
*1: The setting menu is available only for models with keyless access with push-button start system.
*2: The setting can only be changed for the keyless access entry function. For details, refer to Door unlock selection function F2-18.
*3: For Outback only
CONTINUED
Black plate (200,1)
3-44
! Screen Settings
After entering the Screen Settings menu,
select one of the following menus.
! Welcome Screen
The welcome screen can be activated or
deactivated. Select On (with Sound) to
activate the screen and sound. Select On
(without Sound) to activate the screen
and deactivate the sound. Select Off to
deactivate the screen.
! Good-bye Screen
The Good-bye screen can be activated or
deactivated. Select On to activate the
screen. Select Off to deactivate the
screen.
! Gauge Initial Movement
The movement of the meter needles and
gauge needles that occurs when the
position can be activated or deactivated.
Select On to activate. Select Off to
deactivate.
! Gear Position Indicator Settings
(MT models)
The gear position indicator light can be
activated or deactivated. Select On to
activate. Select Off to deactivate.
! Units
You can select the displayed units of the
distance, vehicle speed and volume.
Operate the or switch on the
steering wheel to display the preferred
units. Then pull the /SET switch to
select the displayed units.
After entering the EyeSight menu, select

one of the following menus.
! Warning Volume
The volume of the warning buzzer that
sounds when the EyeSight system is in
use can be set in 3 stages (Max, Mid
and Min).
! Languages
Operate the or switch on the
steering wheel to display the preferred
language. Then pull the /SET switch to
select the displayed language.
! Combination Meter Illumination (if
equipped)
After entering the Combination Meter
Illumination menu, select the following
menu.
! Lead Vehicle Acquisition Sound

When adaptive cruise control is used, the
buzzer that sounds under any of the
following conditions can be activated or
deactivated.
. A vehicle is detected in front
. Detection is not possible
! Meter Ring Illumination

The illumination of the combination meter
rings can be activated or deactivated.
Select On to activate the illumination.
Select Off to deactivate the illumination.
! EyeSight (models with EyeSight
system)
! Lead Vehicle Moving Monitor

Function
When the lead vehicle moving monitor
function is operated, the buzzer that
sounds if a vehicle in front has started
can be activated or deactivated. Select
On to activate the buzzer. Select Off to
deactivate the buzzer.
NOTE
For models with the EyeSight system,
refer to the Owners Manual supplement for the EyeSight system.
Select On to activate the buzzer. Select

Off to deactivate the buzzer.
! Vehicle Icon
The vehicle icon indication can be activated or deactivated. Select On to
Black plate (201,1)
! BSD/RCTA (if equipped)

After entering the BSD/RCTA menu,
select the Warning Volume menu. You
can set the volume of the warning buzzer
for RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert). You
can select Max, Mid or Min.
! RAB (if equipped)
After entering the RAB menu, select one
of the following menus.
NOTE
For models with RAB (Reverse Automatic Braking) system, refer to Reverse Automatic Braking System F763.
! Warning Volume
The volume of the warning buzzer that
sounds when the RAB (Reverse Automatic Braking) system is in operation can
be set in 3 stages (Max, Mid and Min).
! Sonar Audible Alarm
When the RAB (Reverse Automatic Braking) system is in operation, the buzzer that
sounds if an obstacle is detected in the
rear or if detection is not possible can be
activated or deactivated. Select On to
activate the buzzer. Select Off to deactivate the buzzer.
! Vehicle Setting
After entering the Vehicle Setting menu,
select one of the following menus.
! Keyless Entry System
After entering the Keyless Entry System
menu, select one of the following menus.
. Audible Signal (models with keyless access with push-button start
system):
The audible signal can be activated or
deactivated. Select On to activate. Select Off to deactivate.
. Hazard Warning Flasher (all models):
The hazard warning flasher operation can
be activated or deactivated. Select On to
. Driver Door Unlock (models with
keyless access with push-button start
system):
The door unlock selection function is
available for the keyless access entry
function. For details, refer to Door unlock
selection function F2-18. On this setting
menu, the door unlock selection function
for the drivers door can be customized.
Select Driver Door Only to set as
Operational. Select All to set as Nonoperational.
3-45
. Rear Gate Unlock (Outback with

system):
The door unlock selection function is
available for the keyless access entry
function. For details, refer to Door unlock
selection function F2-18. On this setting
menu, the door unlock selection function
for the rear gate can be customized.
Select Rear Gate Only to set as Operational. Select All to set as Non-operational.
! Defogger
The defogger and deicer system can be
set for the continuous operation mode or
automatic shut-off mode. Select Continuous to select the continuous operation
mode. Select 15 minutes to select the
automatic shut-off mode.
! Interior Light
The setting for the period of time in which
the interior lights remain on (OFF delay
timer) after closing the doors and/or the
rear gate can be set or customized. Select
the preferred seconds to customize the
operation period. Select Off to deactivate
the OFF delay timer.
CONTINUED
Black plate (202,1)
3-46
Instruments and controls/Light control switch
! Auto Headlights
. Light Sensitivity:
The operational sensitivity of the auto on/
off headlights can be set. You can select
Max, Mid, Low or Min.
. Wiper Link:
The automatic headlight turn on function
that is linked with the wiper operation can
be activated or deactivated. Select On to
! Welcome Lighting
After entering the Welcome Lighting
menu, select either of the following menus.
. Approaching Time Set:
the low beam headlights remain on when
approaching the vehicle can be set or
customized. Select the preferred seconds
to customize the operation period. Select
Off to deactivate the welcome lighting
function when approaching.
. Leaving Time Set:
the low beam headlights remain on when
exiting the vehicle can be set or customized. Select the preferred seconds to
customize the operation period. Select
Off to deactivate the welcome lighting
function when exiting.

! Default Settings
Select Yes to use the menu screen to
restore customized settings to the factory
default settings. Select No to return to
the previous screen without restoring to
the factory default settings.
Light control switch

CAUTION
. Use of any lights for a long period
of time while the engine is not
running can cause the battery to
discharge.
. Before leaving the vehicle, make
sure that the light control switch
is turned to the off position. If the
vehicle is left unattended for a
long time with the light control
switch set to a position other
than the off position, the battery
may be discharged.
The light control switch operates when the
push-button ignition switch is in the ACC
or ON position.
Regardless of the position of the light
control switch, the illuminated lights are
turned off when the push-button ignition
switch is turned off.
The light control switch operates when the
key is inserted in the ignition switch.
Black plate (203,1)
Regardless of the position of the light

control switch, the illuminated lights are
turned off when the key is removed from
& Headlights
NOTE
The light control switch can be operated (except auto on/off headlights),
even under the following conditions.
. when the push-button ignition
switch is turned off (models with keyless access with push-button start
system)
. when the key is not inserted into the
ignition switch (models without keyless access with push-button start
system)
If the drivers door is opened while the
headlights are illuminated under such
conditions, a chirp sound will inform
the driver that the lights are illuminated.
To turn on the headlights, turn the knob on

the end of the turn signal lever.
position:
The headlights are all off.
position:
Instrument panel illumination, headlights,
parking lights, front side marker lights, rear
side marker lights, tail lights and license
plate lights are on.
position:
Instrument panel illumination, parking

lights, front side marker lights, rear side
marker lights, tail lights and license plate
lights are on.
3-47
position: auto on/off headlights

When the ignition switch is in the ON
position, the instrument panel illumination,
headlights, parking lights, front side marker lights, rear side marker lights, tail lights
and license plate lights are automatically
on or off depending on the level of the
ambient light.
The light sensitivity of the auto on/off
headlights can be changed by operating
the multi information display. For details,
refer to Auto Headlights F3-46. Also, the
setting can be changed by a SUBARU
dealer. Consult your SUBARU dealer for
details.
Automatic headlight turn on function
that is linked with wiper operation:
While the light control switch is in the
AUTO position, the headlights will automatically turn on when the windshield
wipers operate several times. The headlights will automatically turn off when the
wipers stop.
The ON/OFF setting of this function can
be changed by operating the multi information display. For details, refer to
Auto Headlights F3-46. Also, the setting
can be changed by a SUBARU dealer.
CONTINUED
Black plate (204,1)
3-48
! Welcome lighting function

The welcome lighting function turns on the
low beam headlight for smooth approaching to or exiting from the vehicle at night or
in a dark place.
The function is activated while all of the
following conditions are met.
. The light control switch is in the
AUTO position
. It is dark enough to turn on the auto on/
off headlights
When approaching:
While the welcome lighting function is
activated, the low beam headlights will
automatically illuminate when unlocking
the doors (for Outback, including the rear
gate) by using the remote keyless entry
system.
The low beam headlights will remain
illuminated for 30 seconds*1 and then turn
off. However, if any of the following
operations is done, the low beam headlights will turn off.
. The doors are locked.
. The light control switch is turned to a
position other than AUTO.
. The ignition switch is turned to the ON
position.
When exiting:
While the welcome lighting function is
activated, the low beam headlights will
remain illuminated even when either of the
following operation is done.
. The push-button ignition switch is
turned to the OFF status (models with
system)
. The key is pulled out from the ignition
for details. Also, you can change the setting by

operating the multi information display. For
details, refer to Welcome Lighting F3-46.
For models with the genuine SUBARU navigation system, you can change the setting by
using the navigation system. For details, refer to
the Owners Manual supplement for the navigation system.
The low beam headlights will turn off

under any of the following conditions.
. 3 minutes have passed since the low
beam headlights were illuminated by the
welcome lighting function.
. 30 seconds have passed since the
door is opened and closed.*1
. The light control switch is turned to a
position other than AUTO.
. The locking procedure is performed
twice. When performing the unlocking
procedure after performing the locking
procedure, perform the locking procedure
twice again.
*1: The setting for the period of time in which
the low beam headlights remain on by the
welcome lighting function can be changed by a
SUBARU dealer. Contact your SUBARU dealer
Black plate (205,1)
! Sensor for the auto on/off headlights
The sensor is on the instrument panel as

shown in the illustration.
CAUTION
If any object is placed on or near the
sensor, the sensor may not detect
the level of the ambient light correctly and the auto on/off headlights
may not operate properly.
& High/low beam change

(dimmer)
To change from low beam to high beam,

push the turn signal lever forward. When
the headlights are on high beam, the high
beam indicator light on the combination meter is also on.
To switch back to low beam, pull the lever
back to the center position.
3-49
. Observe the following points in

order to operate the high beam assist
function properly.
Do not touch the camera or the
lens.
Do not apply any strong impact
to the camera or the inside mirror.
Do not disassemble the camera
or inside mirror.
Do not spill liquid on the inside
mirror and camera.
Do not place any objects over the
dashboard.
Do not carry excessive luggage.
Do not modify the vehicle.
When replacing the windshield
glass, use the genuine SUBARU
parts (or equivalent products).
! High beam assist function (if

equipped)
NOTE
. Do not overestimate the capacity of
the high beam assist function. The
driver always has the responsibility to
understand the surrounding situation,
to drive safely, and to change the
headlight mode manually if necessary.
CONTINUED
Black plate (206,1)
3-50
1)
Camera for high beam assist function
NOTE
Observe the following points in order
to operate the high beam assist function properly.
. Do not attach labels or stickers to

the windshield glass near the camera.
. Do not attach any accessories near
the inside mirror and camera.
This setting can be changed to OFF

(non-operation) at SUBARU dealers.
For more details, contact a SUBARU
dealer.
If it is necessary to attach a label,

sticker or accessory in the position
shown above, consult your SUBARU
dealer.
The high beam assist function automatically changes the headlight from high
beam to low beam (or vice versa). When
all of the following conditions are met, the
headlight will change to high beam.
. When the vehicle speed increases to
or above 20 mph (32 km/h).
. There is no preceding vehicle.
. The forward area of the vehicle is dark.
! How to use the high beam assist

function
The high beam assist function will be
activated when all the following conditions
are met.
. The light control switch is in the
AUTO position and the low beam headlights are on automatically.
. The turn signal lever is pushed forward.
When any of the following conditions is

met, the headlight will change to low
beam.
. When the vehicle speed decreases to
or below 10 mph (16 km/h).
. When the forward area of the vehicle is
bright.
. When there is a preceding or oncoming
vehicle.
NOTE
The factory setting (default setting) for
this function is set as operational.
When the high beam assist function is

activated, the high beam assist indicator
on the combination meter will illuminate.
Black plate (207,1)
Malfunction of the high beam assist

function:
High beam assist warning indicator (yellow)
When the high beam assist function

malfunctions, the high beam assist warning indicator on the combination meter will
appear. In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by your SUBARU dealer.
Temporary stop of high beam assist
function:
If the high beam assist function stops
temporarily due to poor visibility or abnormal temperature, the message appears
on the combination meter. When the
condition is canceled, the system will be
restored.
3-51
NOTE
Even when the operation conditions of
the high beam assist function are met,
there may be a case in which the high
beam assist indicator does not illuminate and an abnormal condition warning is given. In this case, turn the
ignition switch to the LOCK/OFF
position and then the ON position
again. Check if the high beam assist
indicator illuminates. If the indicator
does not illuminate, have the vehicle
inspected at a SUBARU dealer.
! How to temporarily lower the
sensitivity of the high beam
assist function
The sensitivity of the high beam assist
function can be lowered by using the
following operations.
position.
1)
Automatic dimming on/off button
2. Press and hold the automatic dimming

on/off button for 15 to 20 seconds.
When the sensitivity of the high beam
assist function is lowered, the LED indicator on the automatic dimming on/off
button will flash.
NOTE
. The sensitivity of the high beam
assist function cannot be lowered
while driving.
. You can resume the sensitivity of
the high beam assist function by using
either of the following operations.
Turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK/OFF position and then
start the engine.
CONTINUED
Black plate (208,1)
3-52
Press and hold the automatic

dimming on/off button for 15 to 20
seconds again.
! How to change the headlight
mode manually
Change to the low beam:
When you return the turn signal lever to
the center position, the high beam assist
function will turn off and the high beam
assist indicator will turn off.
Change to the high beam:
When you turn the light control switch to
the position, the headlight mode will
be changed to the high beam.
At this time, the high beam assist function
will turn off, the high beam assist indicator
will turn off and the high beam indicator
light will turn on.
NOTE
. After manually changing the headlight mode to the high beam, if you turn
on the high beam assist function,
return the light control switch to the
AUTO position.
. When manually changing the headlight mode to the high beam, if you turn
the light control switch to the

position, the parking lights, front side
marker lights, rear side marker lights,
tail lights and license plate lights will
turn on.
! Tips for the high beam assist
system
. The high beam assist function recognizes the condition surrounding the vehicle based on the brightness of illumination
ahead of your vehicle, etc. Therefore, the
headlight mode may switch in some
situations that do not match to the drivers
sense.
. A bicycle or cargo cycle may not be
detected.
. Under the following situations, the
brightness of ambient illumination may
not be detected correctly and the high
beam assist function may not work properly. As a result, the glare of the high beam
may disturb the driving of an oncoming
vehicle or vehicle ahead. Also, the low
beam mode may continue although there
are no oncoming vehicles and vehicles
ahead. In the such cases, change the
headlight mode manually.
In bad weather (fog, snow, sand
storm, heavy rain, etc.)
When the windshield glass is dirty
or fogged
When the windshield is cracked or
damaged
When the inside mirror or the
camera is deformed or dirty
If there are lights similar to the

headlights or the tail lights in the
surrounding area
When an oncoming vehicle or vehicle ahead is driven without its headlights and tail lights on
If the headlights of an oncoming
vehicle or the tail lights of a vehicle
ahead are dirty or discolored, or if the
light beams are not aimed correctly
When a rapid change of brightness
continues while driving
When driving on a road with many
ups and downs or uneven surfaces
When driving on a road with many
curves
When there are some objects that
reflect light strongly, such as a road
sign or a mirror in vehicle ahead
When the rear part of the vehicle
ahead, such as a container, reflects
light strongly
When the headlights of your vehicle
are damaged or dirty
When your vehicle is tilted, such as
in case the vehicle has a flat tire or is
being towed
. In the following conditions, the headlight mode will not be automatically changed from the high beam to the low beam.
When your vehicle passes an oncoming vehicle suddenly in a blind
Black plate (209,1)
curve
When another vehicle passes in
front of your vehicle
When an oncoming vehicle or vehicle ahead comes in and out of view
because of continuous curves, median
strips, roadside trees, etc.
. If the camera detects the light of the
front fog lights of an oncoming vehicle, the
headlight mode may change from the high
beam to the low beam automatically.
. The headlight mode may change from
the high beam to the low beam, or the low
beam mode may continue, when affected
by a street light, traffic signal, illumination
of an advertisement board, or a reflective
object such as a road sign and signboard.
. The timing of the change of headlight
mode may differ due to the following
factors.
the vehicle condition (e.g., number
of passengers or weight of loaded
cargo)
surrounding situation (e.g., movement and direction of an oncoming
vehicle or vehicle ahead)
detection limitations of the camera
angle
& Headlight flasher
3-53
& Daytime running light system

WARNING
The brightness of the illumination of
the high beam headlights is reduced
by the daytime running light system.
The light switch must always be
turned to the position when it
is dark outside.
CAUTION
Do not hold the lever in the flashing
position for more than just a few
seconds.
To flash the headlights, pull the lever
toward you and then release it. The high
beam will stay on for as long as you hold
the lever. The headlight flasher works
even though the lighting switch is in the
off position.
When the headlights are on high beam,
the high beam indicator light on the
combination meter also illuminates.
The high beam headlights will automatically illuminate at reduced brightness

when the engine has started, under the
. The parking brake is fully released.
. The light switch is in the off or

position.
. The light switch is in the AUTO
position and the headlights do not turn
on automatically.
. The select lever is in a position other
than the P position (CVT models).
NOTE
. When the light switch is in the
position, the front side marker lights,

tail lights and license plate lights are
illuminated.
. While the turn signal is flashing, the
high beam headlight on the side which
the turn signal is flashing turns off.
CONTINUED
Black plate (210,1)
3-54
Instruments and controls/Headlight beam leveler (models with HID headlights)
. While the hazard warning flasher is

on, the high beam headlights turn off.
Headlight beam leveler

(models with HID headlights)
Turn signal lever
The HID headlights generate more light

than conventional halogen headlights.
Therefore a driver of an oncoming vehicle
may experience too much glare when your
headlight beam height adjustment is high
due to the vehicle carrying heavy load.
The automatic headlight beam leveler
adjusts the headlight beam height automatically and optimally according to the
load being carried by the vehicle.
To activate the right turn signal, push the
turn signal lever up. To activate the left
turn signal, push the turn signal lever
down. When the turn is finished, the lever
will return automatically. If the lever does
not return after cornering, return the lever
to the neutral position by hand.
To signal a lane change, push the turn
signal lever up or down slightly and hold it
during the lane change. The turn signal
indicator lights will flash in the direction of
the turn or lane change. The lever will
return automatically to the neutral position
when you release it.
Black plate (211,1)
Instruments and controls/Illumination brightness control
& One-touch lane changer

To flash the turn signal and turn signal
indicator light three times, push the turn
signal lever up or down slightly and
immediately release it.
Illumination brightness control
The operational/non-operational setting of

the one-touch lane changers can be
changed by a SUBARU dealer. Contact
the nearest SUBARU dealer for details.
3-55
NOTE
. When the control dial is turned fully
upward, the illumination brightness
becomes the maximum and the automatic dimming function does not work
at all.
. The brightness setting is not canceled even when the ignition switch is
turned to the LOCK/OFF position.
& Auto dimmer cancel function
The illumination brightness of the instrument panel dims under the following
conditions.
or
. when the light switch is in the
position
. when the light switch is in the AUTO
position and the headlights illuminate
automatically
When the ambient light is bright, the

illumination brightness is set to the maximum regardless of the position of the
control dial. In this case, you cannot adjust
the illumination brightness by using the
control dial. When the ambient light is
dark, you can dim the illumination brightness as described above.
The operational/non-operational setting
and sensitivity of the auto dimmer cancel
function can be changed by your
SUBARU dealer. Contact your SUBARU
dealer for details.
You can adjust the illumination brightness

for better visibility.
To brighten, turn the control dial upward.
To darken, turn the control dial downward.
Black plate (212,1)
3-56
Instruments and controls/Front fog light switch
Front fog light switch

(if equipped)
Indicator light
1)
2)
Headlight switch
Fog light switch
To turn on the front fog lights:

Turn the fog light switch to the
position while the headlights are in either
of the following conditions.
. while the headlight switch is in the
position with the low beam mode selected
. while the headlight switch is in the
AUTO position and the low beam headlights turn on automatically
To turn off the front fog lights:
Turn the fog light switch back down to the
position.
The indicator light located on the combination meter will illuminate when the front
fog lights are on.
& Steering responsive fog

lights system (models with
EyeSight system)
The steering responsive fog lights system
automatically turns the front fog light on
and off based on the steering angle and
vehicle speed when entering a curve or
driving on curved roads. The system is
intended to help prevent accidents by
enabling better visibility of curves ahead
and early recognition of any disabled
vehicles or other obstacles.
will turn on if all of the following conditions

are met.
. The low beam headlights are on
. The fog light switch is in the
position
. The low beam mode is selected (the
turn signal lever is in the center position)
. The select lever is in the D position or
the manual mode is selected
. The steering response fog lights system has not been deactivated
. The operating conditions such as the
steering angle and vehicle speed are met
The front fog lights on both sides will turn
on as usual if all of the following conditions
are met.
. The low beam headlights are on
. The fog light switch is in the
position
. The low beam mode is selected (the
turn signal lever is in the center position)
The front fog light on the inside of a curve
Black plate (213,1)
Instruments and controls/Wiper and washer
! Steering responsive fog lights OFF

switch
! Steering responsive fog lights OFF

indicator
3-57
Wiper and washer

WARNING
In freezing weather, do not use the
windshield washer until the windshield is sufficiently warmed by the
defroster.
Otherwise the washer fluid can
freeze on the windshield, blocking
your view.
CAUTION
Steering responsive fog lights OFF switch
Press this switch to deactivate the steering responsive fog lights system. Press
the switch again to activate the system.
Steering responsive fog lights OFF indicator
This indicator appears when the steering

responsive fog lights system is deactivated. This indicator disappears when the
system is activated.
. Do not operate the washer continuously for more than 10 seconds, or when the washer fluid
tank is empty. This may cause
overheating of the washer motor.
Check the washer fluid level
frequently, such as at fuel stops.
. Do not operate the wipers when
the windshield or rear window is
dry. This may scratch the glass,
damage the blade rubbers and
might cause the wiper motor to
fail. Before operating the wiper
on a dry windshield or rear
window, always use the windshield washer.
CONTINUED
Black plate (214,1)
3-58
. In freezing weather, be sure that

the blade rubbers are not frozen
to the windshield or rear window
before switching on the wipers.
Attempting to operate the wiper
with the blade rubbers frozen to
the window glass could cause
not only the blade rubbers to be
damaged but also might cause
the wiper motor to fail. If the
blade rubbers are frozen to the
window glass, be sure to operate
the defroster, windshield wiper
deicer (if equipped) or rear window defogger before turning on
the wiper.
. If the wipers stop during operation because of ice or some other
obstruction on the window, this
might cause the wiper motor to
fail even if the wiper switch is
turned off. If this occurs,
promptly stop the vehicle in a
safe location, turn the ignition
switch to the LOCK/OFF position and clean the window
glass to allow proper wiper operation.
. Use clean water if windshield
washer fluid is unavailable. In
areas where water freezes in
winter, use SUBARU Windshield
Washer Fluid or the equivalent.

Refer to Windshield washer
fluid F11-32.
Also, when driving the vehicle
when there are freezing temperatures, use non-freezing type wiper blades.
. Do not clean the wiper blades
with gasoline or a solvent, such
as paint thinner or benzine. This
will cause deterioration of the
wiper blades.
NOTE
. The windshield wiper motor is protected against overloads by a circuit
breaker. If the motor operates continuously under an unusually heavy load,
the circuit breaker may trip to stop the
motor temporarily. If this happens, park
your vehicle in a safe location, turn off
the wiper switch, and wait for approximately 10 minutes. The circuit breaker
will reset itself, and the wipers will
again operate normally.
. Clean your blade rubbers and window glass periodically with a washer
solution to prevent streaking, and to
remove accumulations of road salt or
road film. Operate the windshield
washer for at least 1 second so that
washer solution will be sprinkled all

over the windshield or rear window.
. Grease, wax, insects or other material on the windshield or the blade
rubbers results in jerky wiper operation
and streaking on the glass. If you
cannot remove those streaks after
operating the washer or if the wiper
operation is jerky, clean the outer surface of the windshield or rear window
and the blade rubbers using a sponge
or soft cloth with a neutral detergent or
mild abrasive cleaner. After cleaning,
rinse the window glass and blade
rubbers with clean water. The glass is
clean if no beads form on the glass
when you rinse with water.
. If you cannot eliminate the streaking
even after following this procedure,
replace the wiper blades (or blade
rubbers) with new ones. For replacement instructions, refer to Replacement of wiper blades F11-33.
Black plate (215,1)
& Windshield wiper and washer

switches
The wiper operates only when the ignition
For a single wipe of the wipers, push the

lever up. The wipers operate until you
release the lever.
! Wiper intermittent time control
3-59
! Windshield washer
! Windshield wipers
: Mist (for a single wipe)

: Off
When the wiper switch is in the

position, turn the dial to adjust the operating interval of the wiper. The operating
interval can be adjusted in several steps
from the shortest interval to the longest.
To wash the windshield, pull the wiper

control lever toward you. The washer fluid
sprays until you release the lever. The
wipers operate while you pull the lever.
: Intermittent
: Low speed
: High speed
To turn the wipers on, push the wiper

control lever down.
To turn the wipers off, return the lever to
the position.
CONTINUED
Black plate (216,1)
3-60
& Rear window wiper and

washer switch (Outback)
Windshield washer fluid warning indicator
NOTE
The windshield washer fluid warning
indicator appears when the washer
fluid level in the tank has dropped to
the lower limit. If the warning indicator
appears, refill the tank with fluid. For
the tank refilling method, refer to
Windshield washer fluid F11-32.
(accompanied by wiper op: Washer

eration)
: Continuous
: Intermittent
: Off
Washer (accompanied by wiper op: eration)
! Rear wiper
To turn the rear wiper on, turn the knob
switch upward.
To turn the wiper off, return the knob
switch to the position.
With the switch turned to the
posi-
tion, the rear wiper will operate intermittently at intervals corresponding to the
vehicle speed. In this position, when you
move the select lever to the R position
(CVT models) or the shift lever to the
reverse position (MT models), the rear
wiper will switch to continuous operation.
When you move the select lever/shift lever
from the R (reverse) position to another
position, the rear wiper will return to
intermittent operation.
Reverse gear interlocked rear wiper:
Even if the rear wiper switch is in the off
position, if the front windshield wiper is
operating continuously, the rear wiper will
operate intermittently when you move the
select lever/shift lever to the R (reverse)
position.
The factory setting (default setting) of the
reverse gear interlocked rear wiper is as
follows.
. U.S.-spec. models: Non-operational
. Other models: Operational
This setting can be changed by a
dealer for details.
CAUTION
Do not attach anything that disturbs
the rear wiper operation on the rear
Black plate (217,1)
Instruments and controls/Defogger and deicer
gate. Doing so may damage the rear

wiper when it operates.
Defogger and deicer
3-61
vated only when the ignition switch is in

the ON position.
! Washer
To wash the rear window while the rear
wiper is operating, turn the knob switch
upward to the position. The washer
fluid sprays until you release the knob.
To wash the rear window when the rear

wiper is not in use, turn the knob switch
downward to the position. The washer
fluid sprays and the wiper operates until
you release the knob.
NOTE
Control switch (type A)

1) Models without outside mirror defogger
2) Models with outside mirror defogger
When the amount of washer fluid is

getting low, the rear washer fluid will
first be stopped. This means that the
amount of washer fluid is low, and it
should be added immediately.
1)
2)
3)
Rear window defogger

Outside mirror defogger (if equipped)
Windshield wiper deicer (if equipped)
The defogger and deicer system is acti CONTINUED
Black plate (218,1)
3-62
Instruments and controls/Defogger and deicer
shield wiper blade rubbers have been

deiced completely before that time, press
the control switch to turn them off. If
defrosting, defogging or deicing is not
complete, you have to press the control
switch to turn them on again.
It is possible to set the defogger and
deicer system for the continuous operation mode by operating the multi information display. For details, refer to Defogger F3-45.
Control switch (type B)
1) Models without outside mirror defogger
2) Models with outside mirror defogger
To activate the defogger and deicer

system, press the control switch. The rear
window defogger, outside mirror defogger
and windshield wiper deicer are activated
simultaneously. The indicator light on the
control switch illuminates while the defogger and deicer system is activated.
To turn them off, press the control switch
again. They also turn off when the ignition
switch is turned to the ACC or LOCK/
OFF position.
The defogger and deicer system will
automatically shut off after approximately
15 minutes. If the rear window and outside
mirrors have been cleared and the wind-
CAUTION
. To prevent the battery from being
discharged, do not operate the
defogger and deicer system continuously for any longer than
necessary.
. Do not use sharp instruments or
window cleaner containing abrasives to clean the inner surface
of the rear window. They may
damage the conductors printed
on the window.
snow, remove the snow so that the

windshield wiper deicer works effectively.
. While the defogger and deicer system is in the continuous operation
mode:
If the vehicle speed remains at 9
mph (15 km/h) or lower for 15
minutes, the windshield wiper deicer system automatically stops operating. However, the rear window
defogger system and outside mirror
defogger system maintain continuous operation in this condition.
If the vehicle battery voltage
drops below the permissible level,
continuous operation of the defogger system and deicer system is
canceled and the system stops
operating.
NOTE
. Turn on the defogger and deicer
system if the wipers are frozen to the
windshield.
. If the windshield is covered with
Black plate (219,1)
Instruments and controls/Mirrors
Mirrors
Always check that the inside and outside
mirrors are properly adjusted before you
start driving.
& Auto-dimming mirror/compass with HomeLink (U.S.spec. models without

EyeSight system - if
equipped)
& Inside mirror (without autodimming function) (if

equipped)
The mirror has a day and night position.

Pull the tab at the bottom of the mirror
toward you for the night position. Push it
away for the day position. The night
position reduces glare from headlights.
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
HomeLink button 1
HomeLink button 2
LED
HomeLink button 3
Sensor
Automatic dimming on/off button
Compass display button
Compass display
3-63
. By pressing the automatic dimming on/

off button, the automatic dimming function
is toggled on or off. When the automatic
dimming function is on, the LED indicator
will illuminate.
Even with the mirror in the automatic
dimming mode, the mirror surface turns
bright if the transmission is shifted into
reverse. This is to ensure good rearward
visibility during reversing.
. By pressing the compass display button, the compass display is toggled on or
off. When the compass is on, an illuminated compass reading will appear in the
upper right corner of the mirror.
When cleaning the mirror, use a paper
towel or similar material dampened with
glass cleaner. Do not spray glass cleaner
directly on the mirror as that may cause
the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror
housing and damage the mirror.
The auto-dimming mirror has an anti-glare

feature which automatically reduces glare
coming from headlights of vehicles behind
you. It also contains a built-in compass
and HomeLink wireless control system.
CONTINUED
Black plate (220,1)
3-64
! Photosensors
The mirror has a photosensor attached on

both the front and back sides. During
nighttime driving, these sensors detect
distracting glare from vehicle headlights
behind you and automatically dim the
mirror to eliminate glare and preserve
your vision. For this reason, use care not
to cover the sensors with stickers, or other
similar items. Periodically wipe the sensors clean using a piece of dry soft cotton
cloth or an applicator.
! Compass zone adjustment
Compass calibration zones
1. Refer to the Compass calibration

zones map shown above to verify that
the compass zone setting is correct for
your geographical location.
2. Press and hold the compass display
button for 3 seconds until the zone
selection comes up (a number will be
displayed in the mirror compass window).
3. Press the compass display button
repeatedly until the correct zone setting
for your location is displayed.
4. Releasing the button for 5 seconds will
exit the zone setting mode.
! Compass calibration
1. If a C is displayed in the compass
window, the compass needs to be calibrated.
2. Drive the vehicle in a circle at 5 mph (8
km/h) or less until the display reads a
direction.
3. You can also calibrate the compass by
driving your vehicle on your everyday
routine. The compass will be calibrated
once it has tracked a complete circle.
4. To recalibrate your compass, push and
hold the compass display button for 9
seconds until a C appears in the
compass window.
5. Calibrate the compass according to
step 2 or step 3.
! HomeLink Wireless Control System
The HomeLink Wireless Control System
can be used to activate remote control
devices such as gate operators, garage
door openers, door locks, home lighting
and security systems.
There are three HomeLink buttons on the
mirror, each of which can be programmed
for operation of one desired device. For
details on the device types which can be
operated by this system, consult the
HomeLink website at:
Black plate (221,1)
www.homelink.com or call 1-800-3553515.
3-65
WARNING
When programming the
HomeLink Wireless Control System, you may be operating a
garage door opener or other
device. Make sure that people
and objects are out of the way
of the garage door or other
device to prevent potential harm
or damage.
. Do not use the HomeLink Wireless Control System with a garage door opener that lacks the
safety stop and reverse feature
as required by applicable safety
standards. A garage door opener
which cannot detect an object,
signaling the door to stop and
reverse, does not meet these
safety standards. Using a garage
door opener without these features increases risk of serious
injury or death. For more information, consult the HomeLink
website at www.homelink.com or
call 1-800-355-3515.
.
. U.S.-spec. models
FCC ID: NZLPZLHL4
CAUTION
FCC WARNING
equipment.
operation.
HomeLink and the HomeLink house are

registered trademarks of Gentex Corporation.
CONTINUED
Black plate (222,1)
3-66
CAUTION
When programming the HomeLink
Wireless Control System to operate
a garage door opener or an entrance
gate, unplug the devices motor
from the outlet during programming
to prevent motor burnout.
NOTE
If any of the HomeLink buttons are
already programmed for other devices,
skip step 2 because it clears the
memory of all three buttons.
NOTE
Some gate operators and garage door
openers may require you to replace
this programming step 4 with procedures in Programming for entrance
gates and garage door openers in
Canada F3-67.
NOTE
. After programming your HomeLink
Wireless Control System for the desired devices, retain the hand-held
transmitters for further programming
or device testing in the event of a
problem.
. It is recommended that you insert a
new battery in the hand-held transmitter of a device to ensure correct
programming.
! Garage door opener programming in the U.S.A.
NOTE
Wireless Control System for a garage
door opener, it is suggested that you
park the vehicle outside the garage.
1. Unplug the motor of the garage door
opener from the outlet.
4. Simultaneously press and hold both

the hand-held transmitter button and the
desired HomeLink button. DO NOT release the buttons until step 5 has been
completed.
1)
2)
3)
HomeLink button 1
HomeLink button 2
HomeLink button 3
2. Press and hold the two outer

HomeLink buttons (button 1 and button
3) until the indicator light begins to flash
(after approximately 10 seconds). Then
release both buttons.
3. Hold the end of the garage door
openers hand-held transmitter between
1 and 3 inches (25 and 76 mm) away from
the HomeLink button you wish to program.
5. Hold down both buttons until the

HomeLink indicator light flashes, first
slowly then rapidly. When the indicator
light flashes rapidly, both buttons may be
released. (The rapidly flashing light indicates successful programming of the new
frequency signal.)
6. Press and hold the programmed button and check the HomeLink indicator
light. If the indicator light stays on continuously, your garage door should activate and the programming is completed.
If the indicator light flashes rapidly for 2
seconds and then stays on continuously,
your garage door opener may be protected by a rolling code feature. In this
case you need to perform the additional
steps that are described in Programming
Black plate (223,1)
rolling-code-protected garage door openers in the U.S.A. F3-67.

! Programming rolling-code-protected garage door openers in
the U.S.A.
If your garage door opener has a rolling
code feature, program the HomeLink
Wireless Control System for it by following
steps 1 through 5 in Garage door opener
programming in the U.S.A. F3-66. Then
continue with the following steps.
The exact location and color of the button

may vary by brand of garage door opener.
If it is difficult to locate the training button,
refer to your garage door openers instruction manual.
3-67
NOTE
Some garage door openers may require you to do the above press-holdrelease sequence a third time to complete the programming.
4. The garage door opener should now
recognize the HomeLink Wireless Control
System and your garage door opener
should activate when the HomeLink
button is pressed.
! Programming for entrance gates
and garage door openers in
Canada
NOTE
The assistance of a second person
may make the programming quicker
and easier.
1. Unplug the motor of the entrance gate

or garage door opener from the outlet.
1)
Training button
2. Press the training button on the

garage door opener motor head unit
(which activates the training light on the
unit). Proceed to step 3 within 30 seconds.
3. Inside the vehicle, firmly press, hold for
2 seconds and release the HomeLink
button that was programmed in the previous section. Press and release the
button a second time to complete the
programming procedure.
NOTE
1. Locate the training button on the

garage door opener motor head unit.
CONTINUED
Black plate (224,1)
3-68
6. When the indicator light flashes slowly

and then rapidly after several seconds,
7. Plug the motor of the entrance gate/
garage door opener to the outlet.
8. Test your entrance gate/garage door
opener by pressing the programmed
HomeLink button.
1)
2)
3)
HomeLink button 1
HomeLink button 2
HomeLink button 3

3) until the HomeLink indicator light
begins to flash (after approximately 10
seconds). Then release both buttons.
3. Hold the end of the entrance gates/
garage door openers hand-held transmitter between 1 and 3 inches (25 and 76
mm) away from the HomeLink button you
wish to program.
4. Press and hold the desired HomeLink
button.
5. Press and release (cycle) the handheld transmitter button every 2 seconds
until step 6 is complete.
! Operating the HomeLink Wireless Control System

Once programmed, the HomeLink Wireless Control System can be used to
remote-control the devices to which its
buttons are programmed. To activate a
device, simply press the appropriate button. The indicator light illuminates, indicating that the signal is being transmitted.
! Programming other devices
To program other devices such as door
locks, home lighting and security systems,
contact HomeLink at www.homelink.com
or call 1-800-355-3515.
! Reprogramming a single
HomeLink button
1. Press and hold the HomeLink button
you wish to reprogram. DO NOT release
the button until step 4 has been completed.
2. When the HomeLink indicator light
begins to flash slowly (after approximately

20 seconds), position the hand-held transmitter of the device between 1 to 3 inches
(25 to 76 mm) away from the HomeLink
button you wish to program.
3. Press and hold the hand-held transmitter button. The HomeLink indicator
light will flash, first slowly and then rapidly.
4. When the indicator light begins to flash
rapidly, release both buttons.
The programming for the previous device
is now erased and the new device can be
operated by pressing the HomeLink
button.
! Erasing HomeLink button memory
NOTE
. Performing this procedure erases
the memory of all the preprogrammed
buttons simultaneously. The memory
of individual buttons cannot be erased.
. It is recommended that upon the
sale of the vehicle, the memory of all
programmed HomeLink buttons be
erased for security purposes.
Black plate (225,1)
& Auto-dimming mirror with

HomeLink (except U.S.spec. models - if equipped)
1)
2)
3)
! In case a problem occurs

If you cannot activate a device using the
corresponding HomeLink button after
programming, contact HomeLink at
www.homelink.com or call 1-800-3553515 for assistance.
dimming function is on, the LED indicator

will illuminate.
Even with the mirror in the automatic
dimming mode, the mirror surface turns
bright if the shift lever/select lever is
shifted into the R (reverse) position. This
is to ensure good rearward visibility during
reversing.
When cleaning the mirror, use a paper
towel or similar material dampened with
glass cleaner. Do not spray glass cleaner
directly on the mirror as that may cause
the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror
housing and damage the mirror.
HomeLink button 1
HomeLink button 2
HomeLink button 3
1. Press and hold the two outer buttons

(button 1 and button 3) until the indicator
light begins to flash (after approximately
20 seconds).
2. Release both buttons.
3-69
! Photosensors
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
HomeLink button 1
HomeLink button 2
LED
HomeLink button 3
Sensor
Automatic dimming on button
Automatic dimming off button
The auto-dimming mirror has an anti-glare

feature which automatically reduces glare
coming from headlights of vehicles behind
you. It also contains a HomeLink wireless
control system.
By pressing the automatic dimming on/off
button, the automatic dimming function is
turned on or off. When the automatic
The mirror has a photosensor attached on

both the front and back sides. During
nighttime driving, these sensors detect
CONTINUED
Black plate (226,1)
3-70
distracting glare from vehicle headlights

behind you and automatically dim the
mirror to eliminate glare and preserve
your vision. For this reason, use care not
to cover the sensors with stickers, or other
similar items. Periodically wipe the sensors clean using a piece of dry soft cotton
cloth or an applicator.
can be used to activate remote control
devices such as gate operators, garage
door openers, door locks, home lighting
and security systems.
There are three HomeLink buttons on the
mirror, each of which can be programmed
for operation of one desired device. For
details on the device types which can be
operated by this system, consult the
HomeLink website at:
www.homelink.com or call 1-800-3553515.
. U.S.-spec. models
FCC ID: NZLPZLHL4
CAUTION
FCC WARNING
equipment.
operation.

Black plate (227,1)
WARNING
or damage.
call 1-800-355-3515.
.
CAUTION
Wireless Control System to operate
a garage door opener or an entrance
gate, unplug the devices motor
from the outlet during programming
to prevent motor burnout.
3-71
NOTE
NOTE
. After programming your HomeLink
Wireless Control System for the desired devices, retain the hand-held
transmitters for further programming
or device testing in the event of a
problem.
. It is recommended that you insert a
new battery in the hand-held transmitter of a device to ensure correct
programming.
! Garage door opener programming in the U.S.A.
NOTE
Wireless Control System for a garage
door opener, it is suggested that you
park the vehicle outside the garage.
1. Unplug the motor of the garage door
opener from the outlet.
1)
2)
3)
HomeLink button 1
HomeLink button 2
HomeLink button 3

3) until the indicator light begins to flash
(after approximately 20 seconds). Then
3. Hold the end of the garage door
openers hand-held transmitter between
1 and 3 inches (25 and 76 mm) away from
the HomeLink button you wish to program.
CONTINUED
Black plate (228,1)
3-72
4. Simultaneously press and hold both

the hand-held transmitter button and the
desired HomeLink button. DO NOT release the buttons until step 5 has been
completed.
NOTE
Some gate operators and garage door
openers may require you to replace
this programming step 4 with procedures in Programming for entrance
gates and garage door openers in
Canada F3-73.
5. Hold down both buttons until the
HomeLink indicator light flashes, first
slowly then rapidly. When the indicator
light flashes rapidly, both buttons may be
released. (The rapidly flashing light indicates successful programming of the new
frequency signal.)
6. Press and hold the programmed button and check the HomeLink indicator
light. If the indicator light stays on continuously, your garage door should activate and the programming is completed.
If the indicator light flashes rapidly for 2
seconds and then stays on continuously,
your garage door opener may be protected by a rolling code feature. In this
case you need to perform the additional
steps that are described in Programming
rolling-code-protected garage door openers in the U.S.A. F3-72.

! Programming rolling-code-protected garage door openers in
the U.S.A.
If your garage door opener has a rolling
code feature, program the HomeLink
Wireless Control System for it by following
steps 1 through 5 in Garage door opener
programming in the U.S.A. F3-71. Then
continue with the following steps.
The exact location and color of the button

may vary by brand of garage door opener.
If it is difficult to locate the training button,
refer to your garage door openers instruction manual.
NOTE
The assistance of a second person
may make the programming quicker
and easier.
1)
Training button
2. Press the training button on the

garage door opener motor head unit
(which activates the training light on the
unit). Proceed to step 3 within 30 seconds.
3. Inside the vehicle, firmly press, hold for
2 seconds and release the HomeLink
button that was programmed in the previous section. Press and release the
button a second time to complete the
programming procedure.
1. Locate the training button on the
garage door opener motor head unit.
Black plate (229,1)
NOTE
6. When the indicator light flashes slowly

and then rapidly after several seconds,
7. Plug the motor of the entrance gate/
garage door opener to the outlet.
8. Test your entrance gate/garage door
opener by pressing the programmed
HomeLink button.
Some garage door openers may require you to do the above press-holdrelease sequence a third time to complete the programming.
4. The garage door opener should now
recognize the HomeLink Wireless Control
System and your garage door opener
should activate when the HomeLink
button is pressed.
! Programming for entrance gates
and garage door openers in
Canada
1. Unplug the motor of the entrance gate
or garage door opener from the outlet.
NOTE
3-73
1)
2)
3)
HomeLink button 1
HomeLink button 2
HomeLink button 3

3) until the HomeLink indicator light
begins to flash (after approximately 20
seconds). Then release both buttons.
3. Hold the end of the entrance gates/
garage door openers hand-held transmitter between 1 and 3 inches (25 and 76
mm) away from the HomeLink button you
wish to program.
button.
5. Press and release (cycle) the handheld transmitter button every 2 seconds
until step 6 is complete.
! Operating the HomeLink Wireless Control System

Once programmed, the HomeLink Wireless Control System can be used to
remote-control the devices to which its
buttons are programmed. To activate a
device, simply press the appropriate button. The indicator light illuminates, indicating that the signal is being transmitted.
! Programming other devices
To program other devices such as door
locks, home lighting and security systems,
contact HomeLink at www.homelink.com
or call 1-800-355-3515.
! Reprogramming a single
HomeLink button
1. Press and hold the HomeLink button
you wish to reprogram. DO NOT release
the button until step 4 has been completed.
2. When the HomeLink indicator light
CONTINUED
Black plate (230,1)
3-74
& Auto-dimming mirror/compass with HomeLink (models with EyeSight system)
begins to flash slowly (after approximately

20 seconds), position the hand-held transmitter of the device between 1 to 3 inches
(25 to 76 mm) away from the HomeLink
button you wish to program.
3. Press and hold the hand-held transmitter button. The HomeLink indicator
light will flash, first slowly and then rapidly.
4. When the indicator light begins to flash
rapidly, release both buttons.
The programming for the previous device
is now erased and the new device can be
operated by pressing the HomeLink
button.
! Erasing HomeLink button memory
NOTE
. Performing this procedure erases
the memory of all the preprogrammed
buttons simultaneously. The memory
of individual buttons cannot be erased.
. It is recommended that upon the
sale of the vehicle, the memory of all
programmed HomeLink buttons be
erased for security purposes.
1)
2)
3)
HomeLink button 1
HomeLink button 2
HomeLink button 3
1. Press and hold the two outer buttons

(button 1 and button 3) until the indicator
light begins to flash (after approximately
20 seconds).
2. Release both buttons.
! In case a problem occurs
If you cannot activate a device using the
corresponding HomeLink button after
programming, contact HomeLink at
www.homelink.com or call 1-800-3553515 for assistance.
1)
2)
3)
Display
HomeLink buttons
Switch
During nighttime driving, the auto-dimming

feature senses distracting glare from
vehicle headlights behind you and automatically dims to eliminate the glare and
help preserve your vision.
Black plate (231,1)
! To Operate the Auto-Dimming Feature

Press the switch to turn the autodimming feature on/off. The auto-dimming
feature is enabled when the switchs
green LED indicator is on. The autodimming feature will default to on with
each ignition cycle.
! To Operate the Compass Feature
1. To turn the compass feature on/off,
press and hold the switch for more
than 3 seconds or until the display turns
on/off. The compass feature will default to
on with each ignition cycle.
2. If the display reads C, slowly drive
the vehicle in circles until compass is
calibrated.
Compass calibration zones
3. To adjust for compass zone variance:

(1) Find your current location and
zone number on the map.
(2) Press and hold the switch for
more than 6 seconds or until a zone
number appears in the display.
(3) Once the zone number appears in
the display, toggle the switch
again until your current location zone
number appears. After you stop pressing the switch, your new zone number
will be saved. Within a few seconds,
the display will show a compass
direction.
4. If the vehicles magnetics have changed or if the compass appears inaccurate,
recalibrate the compass. Press and hold
the switch for more than 9 seconds or
until a C appears in the display. Once a
C appears in the display, slowly drive the
vehicle in circles until compass is calibrated.
provides a convenient way to replace up
to three hand-held radiofrequency remotes used to activate devices such as
gate operators, garage door openers,
entry door locks, security systems, even
home lighting. The below steps are
3-75
generic programming instructions; for

Genie and Sommer garage door openers
please go directly to the HomeLink
website. Additional information and programming videos can be found at
www.HomeLink.com and
www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex.
CAUTION
. Before programming HomeLink
to a garage door opener or gate
operator, make sure that people
and objects are out of the way of
the device to prevent potential
harm or damage.
. When programming a garage
door opener, it is advised to park
outside of the garage.
. Do not use HomeLink with any
garage door opener that lacks
safety stop and reverse features
as required by U.S. federal safety
standards (this includes any garage door opener model manufactured before April 1, 1982). A
garage door that cannot detect
an object signaling the door to
stop and reverse does not meet
current U.S. federal safety standards.
. It is also recommended that a
CONTINUED
Black plate (232,1)
3-76
new battery be placed in the

hand-held remote (garage door
opener remote) of the device for
quicker and more accurate training.
. Turn the ignition switch to the
ON or ACC position before
programming and/or operating
HomeLink.
. Keep the hand-held remote (garage door opener remote) of the
device you are programming for
use in other vehicles as well as
for future HomeLink programming. It is also suggested that
upon the sale of the vehicle, the
programmed HomeLink buttons
be erased for security purposes.
Refer to Erasing HomeLink
buttons F3-79.
! Programming a New HomeLink

button
1)
1)
2)
Indicator Light
HomeLink buttons
1. Press and release the HomeLink

button that you would like to program.
The HomeLink indicator light will flash
orange slowly (if not, refer to Erasing
HomeLink buttons F3-79.
Garage door opener remote
2. Position the hand-held remote (garage

door opener remote) 1 to 3 inches (2 to 8
cm) away from the HomeLink button that
you would like to program.
NOTE
Some hand-held remotes (garage door
opener remotes) may actually train
better at a distance of 6 to 12 inches
(15 to 20 cm). Keep this in mind if you
have difficulty with the programming
process.
Black plate (233,1)
3-77
3. While the HomeLink indicator light is

flashing orange, press and hold the handheld remote button. Continue pressing the
hand-held remote button until the
HomeLink indicator light changes from
orange to green. You may now release the
hand-held remote button.
NOTE
Some devices may require you to
replace this Programming a New
HomeLink button step 3 with procedures noted in the Gate Operator /
Canadian Programming section. Refer
to Gate Operator / Canadian Programming F3-78.
1)
Indicator Light
4. Press the HomeLink button that you

would like to program and observe the
indicator light.
. If the indicator light remains constant green, your device should operate when the HomeLink button is
pressed. At this point, if your device
operates, programming is complete.
. If the indicator light rapidly flashes
green, firmly press, hold for two
seconds and release the HomeLink
button up to three times to complete
the programming process. At this point
if your device operates, programming
is complete. If the device does not
operate, continue with the next step of
the programming instructions.
1)
Learn button
5. At the garage door opener motor,

(security gate motor, etc...) locate the
Learn, Smart, or Program button. This
can usually be found where the hanging
antenna wire is attached to the motorhead unit (see the devices manual to
identify this button). The name and color
of the button may vary by manufacturer.
NOTE
A ladder and/or second person may
simplify the following steps.
6. Firmly press and release the Learn,
Smart, or Program button. You now
have 30 seconds in which to complete
step 7.
CONTINUED
Black plate (234,1)
3-78
7. Return to the vehicle and firmly press,

hold for 2 seconds and release the
HomeLink button up to three times. At
this point programming is complete and
your device should operate when the
HomeLink button is pressed and released.
1)
Status Indicators
8. If status indicator arrows appear next

to the indicator light, please refer to
Garage Door Two-Way Communication
F3-79.
In the event that there are still programming difficulties or questions, additional
HomeLink information and programming
videos can be found at
www.HomeLink.com and
www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex. For
Genie and Sommer garage door openers
please go directly to the HomeLink
website.
! Gate Operator / Canadian Programming

Canadian radio-frequency laws require
transmitter remote signals to time-out
(or quit) after several seconds of transmission, which may not be long enough for
HomeLink to pick up the signal during
programming. Similar to this Canadian
law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to time-out in the same manner.
The indicator LED on the hand-held
remote will go off when the device times
out, indicating that it has finished transmitting.
If you live in Canada or you are having
difficulties programming a gate operator or
garage door opener by using the programming procedures, replace Programming a
New HomeLink button step 3 with the
following:
While the HomeLink indicator light is
flashing orange, press and release (cycle) your devices hand-held remote
every two seconds until the HomeLink
indicator light changes from orange to
green. You may now release the handheld remote button.
NOTE
If programming a garage door opener
or gate operator, it is advised to unplug
Black plate (235,1)
the device during the cycling process to prevent possible overheating.

Proceed with Programming a New
HomeLink button step 4 to complete.
! Using HomeLink
To operate, simply press and release the
programmed HomeLink button. Activation will now occur for the trained device
(i.e. garage door opener, gate operator,
security system, entry door lock, home/
office lighting, etc.). For convenience, the
hand-held remote of the device may also
be used at any time.
! Erasing HomeLink buttons
To erase programming from the three
buttons (individual buttons cannot be
erased but can be reprogrammed as
outlined below), follow the step noted:
Press and hold the two outer HomeLink
buttons for at least 10 seconds. The LED
indicator will change from continuously lit
to rapidly flashing. Release both buttons.
Do not hold for longer than 20 seconds.
HomeLink is now ready to be programmed at any time beginning with
Programming a New HomeLink button
- step 1.
! Reprogramming a Single
HomeLink button
To program a previously trained button,
follow these steps:
button. DO NOT release the button.
2. The indicator light will begin to slowly
flash orange after 20 seconds. The
HomeLink button can be released at this
point. Proceed with Programming a New
HomeLink button - step 3.
3. If you do not complete the programming of a new device to the button, it will
revert to the previously stored programming.
3-79
Range may be reduced by obstacles such

as houses or trees. You may have to slow
your vehicle speed to successfully receive
the garage door opener communication.
! Programming Two-Way Communication
! Garage Door Two-Way Communication

HomeLink has the capability of communicating with your garage door opener.
HomeLink can receive and display closing or opening status messages from
compatible garage door opener systems.
At any time, HomeLink can also recall
and display the last recorded status
communicated by the garage door opener
to indicate your garage door being
closed or opened.
Within 5 seconds after programming a

new HomeLink button, both of HomeLinks garage door status indicators will
flash rapidly green indicating that the
garage door two-way communication has
been enabled. If your garage door status
indicators flashed, two-way communication programming is complete.
HomeLink has the capability of receiving

this communication from the garage door
opener at a range up to 820 feet (250 m).
If the garage door status indicators do not

flash, additional HomeLink information
and programming videos can be found
1)
Status Indicators
CONTINUED
Black plate (236,1)
3-80
. U.S.-spec. models
online at www.HomeLink.com and

www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex.
FCC ID: NZLAECHL5
! Using Two-Way Communication
CAUTION
FCC WARNING
equipment.
1)
2)
1)
Status Indicator
Recall and display (at any time) the last

recorded garage door status message
communicated to HomeLink by simultaneously pressing HomeLink buttons 1
and 2 for 2 seconds. HomeLink will
display the last recorded status for 3
seconds.
If two-way communication programming is
successful, HomeLink will display the
status of your garage door opener with
arrow indicators (see below).
3)
4)
Garage Door Opener CLOSING

ing Orange)
Garage Door Opener CLOSED
Green)
Garage Door Opener OPENING
ing Orange)
Garage Door Opener OPENED
Green)
(Blink(Solid
(Blink(Solid

operation.
! Certification
In the event that there are still programming difficulties or questions, additional
HomeLink information and programming
videos can be found at
www.HomeLink.com,
www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex, or
by calling the toll-free HomeLink-hotline
at 1-800-355-3515.
Black plate (237,1)
WARNING
or damage.
call 1-800-355-3515.
.
3-81
& Outside mirrors

! Convex mirror (passenger side)
WARNING
Objects look smaller in a convex
mirror and farther away than when
viewed in a flat mirror. Do not use
the convex mirror to judge the
distance of vehicles behind you
when changing lanes. Use the inside
mirror (or glance backwards) to
determine the actual size and distance of objects that you view in
convex mirror.

CONTINUED
Black plate (238,1)
3-82
Instruments and controls/Tilt/telescopic steering wheel
! Remote control mirror switch
Tilt/telescopic steering wheel

WARNING
: Select side to adjust

: Direction control
The remote control mirrors operate only
when the ignition switch is in the ON or
ACC position.
1. Turn the control switch to the side that
you want to adjust. L is for the left mirror,
R is for the right mirror.
2. Move the control switch in the direction
you want to move the mirror.
3. Return the control switch to the neutral
position to prevent unintentional operation.
. Do not adjust the steering wheel

tilt/telescopic position while driving. This may cause loss of
vehicle control and result in
personal injury.
. If the lever cannot be raised to
the fixed position, adjust the
steering wheel again. It is dangerous to drive without locking
the steering wheel. This may
cause loss of vehicle control
and result in personal injury.
1)
2)
Tilt adjustment
Telescopic adjustment
1. Adjust the seat position. Refer to

Front seats F1-2.
2. Pull the tilt/telescopic lock lever down.
3. Move the steering wheel to the desired
level.
4. Pull the lever up to lock the steering
wheel in place.
5. Make sure that the steering wheel is
securely locked by moving it up and down,
and forward and backward.
The mirrors can also be adjusted manually.
Black plate (239,1)
Instruments and controls/Horn
Horn
Heated Steering Wheel system (if equipped)

The Heated Steering Wheel system is a
function that warms the surface temperature of the steering wheel at the constant
temperature.
Pull the Heated Steering Wheel switch to
warm the steering wheel when the ignition
switch is in the ON position. Then, the
indicator light on the switch will illuminate.
1)
Horn mark
To sound the horn, push the horn pad.
3-83
CAUTION
. If you use the Heated Steering
Wheel system without the engine
running, the battery voltage may
drop below the permissible level
and it may not be possible to
start the engine.
. People with delicate skin may
suffer slight burns even at low
temperatures if they use the
Heated Steering Wheel for a long
period of time. When using the
Heated Steering Wheel, always
be sure to warn the persons
concerned.
. Do not cover the Heated Steering
Wheel with an object such as a
steering wheel cover. Doing so
may cause the Heated Steering
Wheel to overheat.
NOTE
1)
2)
3)
Heated Steering Wheel switch

Indicator light
Heated area
Pull the switch again to turn the Heated

Steering Wheel system off manually. The
indicator light will turn off.
. If the surface temperature of the

steering wheel is approximately above
1048F (408C) when the switch is turned
on, the system will not heat the steering wheel. Then, the indicator light will
continue to illuminate.
. The Heated Steering Wheel system
is equipped with a 30-minute timer. The
CONTINUED
Black plate (240,1)
3-84
Instruments and controls/Heated Steering Wheel system
system will automatically turn off approximately 30 minutes after the switch
has been turned on.
Black plate (9,1)
Climate control
Ventilator control.................................................
4-2
Center ventilators................................................
Side ventilators ...................................................
Rear ventilators (if equipped)...............................
4-2
4-2
4-2
Climate control panel..........................................
4-3
Type A ................................................................
Type B ................................................................
4-3
4-4
Automatic climate control system (type B) .......
4-5
Sensors ..............................................................
4-5
Manual climate control .......................................
4-6
Airflow mode selection ........................................

Temperature control ............................................
Fan speed control ...............................................
Air conditioner control ........................................
Air inlet selection ................................................
4-6
4-7
4-8
4-8
4-8
Defrosting ............................................................
4-9
Operating tips for heater and air

conditioner ........................................................
Cleaning ventilator grille ......................................
Efficient cooling after parking in direct
sunlight .............................................................
Lubrication oil circulation in the refrigerant
circuit..............................................................
Checking air conditioning system before summer
season ............................................................
Cooling and dehumidifying in high humidity and
low temperature weather condition...................
Air conditioner compressor shut-off when engine
is heavily loaded..............................................
Refrigerant for your climate control system ........
4-9
4-9
4-9
4-10
4-10
4-10
4-10
4-10
Air filtration system (if equipped).....................
4-10
Replacing an air filter.........................................
4-11
Black plate (244,1)
4-2
Climate control/Ventilator control
Ventilator control
& Side ventilators
& Rear ventilators (if equipped)
& Center ventilators
1)
2)
1)
2)
Open
Close
Move the tab to adjust the flow direction.

To open the ventilator, turn the center grille
open/close wheel upward to the
position.
To close it, turn the wheel downward to the
position.
Open
Close

To open the ventilator, turn the side grille
position.
position.
1)
2)
Open
Close

To open the ventilator, turn the rear grille
position.
position.
Black plate (245,1)
Climate control/Climate control panel
Climate control panel

& Type A
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
4-3
Fan speed control dial (Refer to Fan

speed control F4-8.)
A/C button (Refer to Air conditioner
control F4-8.)
Airflow mode selection button (Refer to
Airflow mode selection F4-6.)
Air inlet selection button (Refer to Air
inlet selection F4-8.)
Temperature control dial (Refer to Temperature control F4-7 and MAX A/C
mode F4-7.)
Defroster button (Refer to Airflow mode
selection F4-6 and Defrosting F4-9.)
Rear window defogger button (models
without outside mirror defogger) (Refer to
Defogger and deicer F3-61.)
Rear window and outside mirror defogger
button (models with outside mirror defogger) (Refer to Defogger and deicer
F3-61.)
CONTINUED
Black plate (246,1)
4-4
Climate control/Climate control panel
& Type B
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
10)
11)
12)
13)
14)
Temperature control dial (Refer to Temperature control F4-7.)

AUTO button (Refer to Automatic
climate control system (type B) F4-5.)
OFF button (Refer to Automatic climate control system (type B) F4-5.)
A/C button (Refer to Air conditioner
control F4-8.)
Airflow mode selection button (Refer to
Airflow mode selection F4-6.)
Fan speed control button (for decreasing
the fan speed) (Refer to Fan speed
control F4-8.)
Fan speed control button (for increasing
the fan speed) (Refer to Fan speed
control F4-8.)
Temperature control dial (Refer to Temperature control F4-7.)
MAX A/C button (Refer to MAX A/C
mode F4-7.)
Air inlet selection button (Refer to Air
inlet selection F4-8.)
DUAL button (Refer to Automatic
climate control system (type B) F4-5
and DUAL mode (type B) F4-8.)
Defroster button (Refer to Airflow mode
selection F4-6 and Defrosting F4-9.)
Rear window defogger button (models
without outside mirror defogger) (Refer to
Defogger and deicer F3-61.)
Rear window and outside mirror defogger
button (models with outside mirror defogger) (Refer to Defogger and deicer
F3-61.)
Black plate (247,1)
Climate control/Automatic climate control system (type B)
Automatic climate control

system (type B)
NOTE
. Operate the automatic climate control system when the engine is running.
. The blower fan rotates at a low
speed when the engine coolant temperature is low.
. For efficient defogging or dehumidifying in cold weather, press the A/C
button.
When the automatic climate control mode
is selected, the following items are automatically controlled.
. Outlet air temperature
. Fan speed
. Airflow distribution
. Air inlet control
. Air conditioner compressor operation
To activate this mode, perform the following procedure.
1. Set the preferred temperature using
the temperature control button.
2. Press the AUTO button. The FULL
AUTO mode is selected and the FULL
AUTO indicator light on the display
illuminates.
NOTE
If you operate any of the buttons on the
control panel other than the OFF
button, rear window defogger button
and temperature control buttons during
FULL AUTO mode operation, the
FULL indicator light on the control
panel will turn off and the AUTO
indicator light will remain illuminated.
You can then manually control the
system as desired. To change the
system back to the FULL AUTO mode,
press the AUTO button.
4-5
& Sensors
To turn off the climate control system,

press the OFF button. The air inlet
selection is then automatically switched
to the outside air mode.
1)
2)
Solar sensor
Interior air temperature sensor
The automatic climate control system

employs several sensors. These sensors
are delicate. If they are treated incorrectly
CONTINUED
Black plate (248,1)
4-6
Climate control/Manual climate control
and become damaged, the system may

not be able to control the interior temperature correctly. To avoid damaging the
sensors, observe the following precautions:
Do not subject the sensors to impact.
Keep water away from the sensors.
Do not cover the sensors.
Manual climate control

& Airflow mode selection
Select the preferred airflow mode by
pressing the airflow mode selection button
or defroster button.
Airflow modes are as follows.
The sensors are located as follows:

Solar sensor: beside the speaker grille
on the dashboard
Interior air temperature sensor: on the
side of the driver-side part of the center
panel
Outside temperature sensor: behind
front grille.
A)
Models with rear ventilators
(Bi-level): Instrument panel outlets and the

foot outlets
A)
(Ventilation): Instrument panel outlets
A)
(Heat): Foot outlets, both side outlets of
Black plate (249,1)
& Temperature control
the instrument panel and some through

windshield defroster outlets (A small
amount of air flows to the windshield and
both side windows to prevent fogging.)
Turn the temperature control dial over a

range from the blue side (cool) to red side
(warm) to regulate the temperature of
airflow from the air outlets.
A)
(Defrost): Windshield defroster outlets and

both side outlets of the instrument panel
A)
(Heat-def): Windshield defroster outlets,

foot outlets and both side outlets of the
instrument panel
4-7
NOTE
. When the mode or mode
is selected, the air conditioner compressor automatically operates to more
quickly defog the windshield. At the
same time, the air inlet selection is
automatically set to the outside air
mode.
In this state:
The air conditioner indicator light
does not illuminate.
You cannot stop the air conditioner compressor by pressing the
air conditioner button.
! MAX A/C mode

Perform the following operation to select
the MAX A/C mode.
. Turn the temperature control dial to the
MAX A/C position (models with type A
climate control system).
. Press the MAX A/C button (models
with type B climate control system).
When this mode is selected, some of the
settings will be changed as follows.
Type A climate control system:
. The air inlet selection mode will be
changed to the ON position (recirculation).
. The air conditioner will turn on.
Type B climate control system:
. The temperature setting will be changed to the maximum cooling mode.
. The fan speed setting will be changed
to the maximum speed.
. The airflow mode setting will be chan (ventilation) mode.
ged to the
. The air inlet selection mode will be
changed to the ON position (recirculation).
CONTINUED
Black plate (250,1)
4-8
. The air conditioner will turn on.

While the MAX A/C mode is selected,
performing the following operation returns
the system to the setting that had been
selected before the MAX A/C mode is
selected.
. Turn the temperature control dial to a
position other than MAX A/C position
(models with type A climate control system).
. Press the MAX A/C button again
(models with type B climate control system).
! DUAL mode (type B)
You can change the setting of the drivers
side and front passengers side temperature independently by selecting the
DUAL mode.
You can select the DUAL mode by
performing either of the following procedures.
. Press the DUAL button
. Turn the passengers side temperature
control dial
The DUAL mode can be canceled by
pressing the DUAL button.
When the DUAL mode is selected:
Turn the drivers side dial to set the
drivers side temperature. Turn the front
passengers side dial to set the front

passengers side temperature.
work properly.
When the DUAL mode is canceled:

Set the desired temperature by turning the
drivers side dial.
& Air inlet selection
& Fan speed control
ON position (recirculation): Interior air is

recirculated inside the vehicle. Press the
air inlet selection button to the ON position
for fast cooling with the air conditioner or
when driving on a dusty road. When the
indicator
ON position is selected, the
light on the information display (type A)/
the indicator light on the air inlet selection
button (type B) illuminates.
The fan operates only when the ignition

switch is in the ON position. Select the
preferred fan speed by turning the fan
speed control dial (type A), or by pressing
the fan speed control buttons (type B).
& Air conditioner control

The air conditioner operates only when
the engine is running.
Press the air conditioner button while the
fan is in operation to turn on the air
conditioner. When the air conditioner is
on, the A/C indicator light illuminates.
To turn off the air conditioner, press the
button again. The indicator light will turn
off.
Select the air inlet by pressing the air inlet

selection button.
OFF position (outside air): Outside air is

drawn into the passenger compartment.
Press the air inlet selection button to the
OFF position when the interior has cooled
to a comfortable temperature and the road
is no longer dusty. The indicator light will
turn off.
NOTE
For efficient defogging or dehumidifying in cold weather, turn on the air
conditioner. However, if the ambient
temperature decreases to approximately 328F (08C), the air conditioner
and dehumidification system may not
Black plate (251,1)
Climate control/Defrosting
WARNING
Continued operation in the ON position may fog up the windows. Switch
to the OFF position as soon as the
outside dusty condition clears.
Defrosting
Select the desired mode or mode
to defrost or dehumidify the windshield
and front door windows by performing the
following procedures.
4-9
Operating tips for heater and

air conditioner
& Cleaning ventilator grille
. To select the mode, press the

defroster button.
. To select the mode, press the
airflow mode selection button and select
the mode.
NOTE
. When the mode or mode
is selected, the air conditioner compressor automatically operates to more
quickly defog the windshield. (The air
conditioner indicator light does not
illuminate in this case.) At the same
time, the air inlet selection is automatically set to the outside air mode. For
details, refer to Airflow mode selection F4-6.
. If the defroster button is pressed
while the mode is selected, it will
return to the previous mode before
selecting the mode.
1)
Front ventilator inlet grille
Always keep the front ventilator inlet grille

free of snow, leaves, or other obstructions
to ensure efficient heating and defrosting.
Since the condenser is located in front of
the radiator, this area should be kept clean
because cooling performance is impaired
by any accumulation of insects and leaves
on the condenser.
& Efficient cooling after parking

in direct sunlight
After parking in direct sunlight, drive with
the windows open for a few minutes to
CONTINUED
Black plate (252,1)
4-10
Climate control/Air filtration system
allow outside air to circulate into the

heated interior. This results in quicker
cooling by the air conditioner. Keep the
windows closed during the operation of
the air conditioner for maximum cooling
efficiency.
& Lubrication oil circulation in

the refrigerant circuit
Operate the air conditioner compressor at
a low engine speed (at idle or low driving
speeds) a few minutes each month during
the off-season to circulate its oil.
& Checking air conditioning

system before summer season
Check the air conditioner unit for refrigerant leaks, hose conditions, and proper
operation each spring. Have the air conditioning system checked by your
SUBARU dealer.
& Cooling and dehumidifying in

high humidity and low temperature weather condition
Under certain weather conditions (high
relative humidity, low temperatures, etc.) a
small amount of water vapor emission
from the air outlets may be noticed. This
condition is normal and does not indicate
any problem with the air conditioning

system.
& Air conditioner compressor

shut-off when engine is
heavily loaded
To improve acceleration and gas mileage,
the air conditioner compressor is designed
to temporarily shut off during air conditioner operation whenever the accelerator
is fully depressed such as during rapid
acceleration or when driving on a steep
upgrade.
& Refrigerant for your climate

control system
Your air conditioner uses ozone friendly
refrigerant HFO-1234yf. Therefore, the
method of adding, changing or checking
the refrigerant is different from the method
for CFC12 (freon) or HFC134a. Consult
your SUBARU dealer for service. Repairs
needed as a result of using the wrong
refrigerant are not covered under warranty.
Air filtration system (if

equipped)
Your vehicles air conditioning system is
equipped with an air filtration system.
Replace the air filter element according
to the replacement schedule shown in the
following table. This schedule should be
followed to maintain the filters dust
collection ability. Under extremely dusty
conditions, the filter should be replaced
more frequently. Have your filter checked
or replaced by your SUBARU dealer. For
replacement, use only a genuine
SUBARU air filter kit. For the replacement
schedule, refer to the Warranty and
Maintenance Booklet.
CAUTION
Contact your SUBARU dealer if the
following occurs, even if it is not yet
time to change the filter.
. Reduction of the airflow through
the vents.
. Windshield gets easily fogged or
misted.
NOTE
The filter can influence the air conditioning, heating and defroster perfor-
Black plate (253,1)
4-11
doing this, be careful not to damage

the hinge.
mance if not properly maintained.
& Replacing an air filter

1. Remove the glove box.
(1) Open the glove box.
(3) Push both sides of the glove box

inward to unlock the stoppers and then
pull down the glove box as far as it will
go.
2. Remove the cover of the air filter.
(4) Pull out the glove box horizontally

and remove the hinge portion. When
3. Remove the air filter according to the

following procedure in order to prevent
(2) Remove the damper shaft from the

glove box.
CONTINUED
Black plate (254,1)
4-12
dust on the air cleaner from falling to the

inside of its housing.
(1) Pull the air filter approximately 3.9
inches (10 cm) first.
(2) Gently push the near side of the air
filter down.
(3) Pull out the air filter.
6. Reinstall the glove box, and connect

the damper shaft.
7. Close the glove box.
4. Replace the air filter element with a

new one.
5. Reinstall the cover of the air filter.
CAUTION
The arrow mark on the filter must
point UP.
Black plate (11,1)
Audio
Antenna................................................................
5-2
Printed antenna...................................................
Roof antenna (if equipped) ..................................
5-2
5-2
Audio set .............................................................
5-2
Base display audio set (if equipped) ....................

SUBARU STARLINKTM Multimedia Plus audio set
(U.S. spec. models only, if equipped) .................
Tips for operating the audio/visual system ...........
Basic information before use ..............................
Basic operation ..................................................
Unit settings ......................................................
SUBARU STARLINK (if equipped) .......................
AM/FM radio.......................................................
SiriusXM Satellite Radio (if equipped) .................
ahaTM by HARMAN .............................................
Pandora (if equipped) .......................................
CD .....................................................................
USB memory......................................................
iPod...................................................................
Bluetooth audio..................................................
AUX ...................................................................
5-4
5-6
5-7
5-15
5-18
5-19
5-26
5-28
5-37
5-44
5-50
5-53
5-55
5-56
5-58
5-61
Steering switches for audio ..............................

Bluetooth settings ............................................
5-63
5-66
Regulatory information .......................................
5-66
Registering/connecting Bluetooth device ..........

Setting Bluetooth details ....................................
5-66
5-69
Hands-free phone system .................................
5-71
Control screen...................................................
Registering/connecting a Bluetooth phone .........
Using the phone switch/microphone...................
How to change the hands-free phone system .....
Making a call .....................................................
Receiving a call .................................................
Talking on the phone .........................................
Phone settings ..................................................
5-72
5-73
5-73
5-73
5-73
5-77
5-78
5-79
Voice command system ....................................
5-81
Using the voice command system......................

Voice command system operation ......................
Command list ....................................................
5-81
5-82
5-84
What to do if.......................................................
5-88
Troubleshooting.................................................
5-88
Appendix ............................................................
5-92
Certification .......................................................
Certification for the Hands-free system...............
Certification for Mexico models ..........................
5-92
5-92
5-93
Black plate (258,1)
5-2
Audio/Antenna
Antenna
& Printed antenna
any other material over the antenna

portion of the rear window glass.
Audio set
& Roof antenna (if equipped)
Your vehicle may be equipped with one of

the following audio sets. Refer to the
pages indicated in this section for operating details.
CAUTION
Do not use sharp instruments or
window cleaner containing abrasives to clean the inner surface of
the window on which the antenna is
printed. Doing so may damage the
antenna printed on the window.
CAUTION
The satellite radio antenna and telematics

antenna (if equipped) are installed in the
center of the roof at the rear.
. Always consult your SUBARU

dealer before installing a citizen
band radio or other transmitting
device in your vehicle. Such
devices may cause the electronic
control system to malfunction if
they are incorrectly installed or if
they are not suited for the vehicle.
. To prevent the battery from being
discharged, do not leave the
audio/visual system when the
engine is not running.
NOTE
The antenna is printed on the inner
surface of the rear window glass.
NOTE
Antenna performance will deteriorate
significantly if you apply tinting film or
. If a cell phone is placed near the

audio set, it may cause the audio set to
emit noise when the phone receives
calls. This noise does not indicate an
audio set malfunction. Note that a cell
phone should not be placed near the
audio set.
Black plate (259,1)
Audio/Audio set
5-3
. Some functions may not be available depending on the market and

specifications of your vehicle.
. The images shown in this Owners
Manual are sample images. The actual
images may vary depending on the
market and specifications of your vehicle.
CONTINUED
Black plate (260,1)
5-4
Audio/Audio set
& Base display audio set (if equipped)
1)
2)
3)
4)
Power/VOLUME knob
Eject button
AUDIO/TUNE knob
HOME button
5)
6)
7)
APPS button
Display
SEEK/TRACK buttons
The audio set will operate only when the

position.
. Power and audio controls: refer to
Basic operation F5-18.
. SUBARU STARLINK (if equipped):
refer to SUBARU STARLINK F5-26.
. Radio operation: refer to AM/FM radio
F5-28.
. Satellite radio operation (if equipped):
refer to SiriusXM Satellite Radio F5-37.
. ahaTM: refer to ahaTM by HARMAN
F5-44.
. Pandora (if equipped): refer to Pandora F5-50.
. CD (compact disc) player operation:
refer to CD F5-53.
. USB storage device: refer to USB
memory F5-55.
. iPod operation: refer to iPod F5-56.
. Bluetooth audio: refer to Bluetooth
audio F5-58.
. Auxiliary input jack: refer to AUX F561.
. Hands-free phone system: refer to
Hands-free phone system F5-71.
Black plate (261,1)
Audio/Audio set
5-5
NOTE
HD RadioTM Technology (if equipped)
should be included as feature in the
base display audio set.
This display audio set is referred to as
follows.
. U.S. customers: SUBARU
STARLINKTM Multimedia
. Canadian customers: 6.2-inch infotainment system
CONTINUED
Black plate (262,1)
5-6
Audio/Audio set
& SUBARU STARLINKTM Multimedia Plus audio set (U.S. spec.

models only, if equipped)
The audio set will operate only when the

position.
For details about how to use the SUBARU
STARLINKTM Multimedia Plus audio set,
refer to the 2016 Legacy/Outback
SUBARU STARLINKTM Multimedia Plus
and SUBARU STARLINKTM Multimedia
Navigation Owners Manual.
NOTE
HD Radio Technology should be included as a feature in the SUBARU
STARLINKTM Multimedia Plus audio
set.
Black plate (263,1)
Audio/Audio set
& Tips for operating the audio/

visual system
CAUTION
To avoid damage to the audio/visual
system:
. Be careful not to spill beverages
over the audio/visual system.
. Do not put anything other than an
appropriate disc into the disc
slot.
NOTE
The use of a cell phone inside or near
the vehicle may cause a noise from the
speakers of the audio/visual system
which you are listening to. However,
this does not indicate a malfunction.
! Radio
Usually, a problem with radio reception
does not mean there is a problem with the
radio it is just the normal result of
conditions outside the vehicle.
For example, nearby buildings and terrain
can interfere with FM reception. Power
lines or phone wires can interfere with AM
signals. And of course, radio signals have
a limited range. The farther the vehicle is
from a station, the weaker its signal will

be. In addition, reception conditions
change constantly as the vehicle moves.
Here, some common reception problems
that probably do not indicate a problem
with the radio are described.
! FM
Fading and drifting stations: Generally, the
effective range of FM is about 25 miles (40
km). Once outside this range, you may
notice fading and drifting, which increase
with the distance from the radio transmitter. They are often accompanied by
distortion.
Multi-path: FM signals are reflective,
making it possible for 2 signals to reach
the vehicles antenna at the same time. If
this happens, the signals will cancel each
other out, causing a momentary flutter or
loss of reception.
Static and fluttering: These occur when
signals are blocked by buildings, trees or
other large objects. Increasing the bass
level may reduce static and fluttering.
Station swapping: If the FM signal being
listened to is interrupted or weakened, and
there is another strong station nearby on
the FM band, the radio may tune in the
second station until the original signal can
be picked up again.
5-7
! AM
Fading: AM broadcasts are reflected by
the upper atmosphere especially at
night. These reflected signals can interfere with those received directly from the
radio station, causing the radio station to
sound alternately strong and weak.
Station interference: When a reflected
signal and a signal received directly from
a radio station are very nearly the same
frequency, they can interfere with each
other, making it difficult to hear the broadcast.
Static: AM is easily affected by external
sources of electrical noise, such as high
tension power lines, lightening or electrical
motors. This results in static.
! SiriusXM (if equipped)
. Cargo loaded on the roof luggage
carrier, especially metal objects, may
adversely affect the reception of SiriusXM
Satellite Radio.
. Alternation or modifications carried out
without appropriate authorization may invalidate the users right to operate the
equipment.
CONTINUED
Black plate (264,1)
5-8
Audio/Audio set
! CD player and disc

. This CD player is intended for use with
4.7 in. (12 cm) discs only.
. Extremely high temperatures can keep
the CD player from working. On hot days,
use the air conditioning system to cool the
inside of the vehicle before using the
player.
. Bumpy roads or other vibrations may
make the CD player skip.
. If moisture gets into the CD player, the
discs may not be able to be played.
Remove the discs from the player and
wait until it dries.
Audio CDs
. Use only discs marked as shown

above. The following products may not
be playable on your player:
SACD
dts CD
Copy-protected CD
Video CD
Special shaped discs
WARNING
CD players use an invisible laser
beam which could cause hazardous
radiation exposure if directed outside the unit. Be sure to operate the
player correctly.
Transparent/translucent discs
Black plate (265,1)
Audio/Audio set
5-9
CAUTION
Low quality discs
Labeled discs
. Do not use special shaped, transparent/translucent, low quality or

labeled discs such as those
shown in the illustrations. The
use of such discs may damage
the player, or it may be impossible to eject the disc.
. This system is not designed for
use of Dual Discs. Do not use
Dual Discs because they may
cause damage to the player.
. Do not use discs with a protection ring. The use of such discs
may damage the player, or it may
be impossible to eject the disc.
. Do not use printable discs. The
use of such discs may damage
the player, or it may be impossible to eject the disc.
5
1)
2)
Correct
Wrong
. Handle discs carefully, especially when

inserting them. Hold them on the edge and
do not bend them. Avoid getting fingerprints on them, particularly on the shiny
side.
. Dirt, scratches, warping, pin holes or
other disc damage could cause the player
to skip or to repeat a section of a track. (To
see a pin hole, hold the disc up to the
light.)
. Remove discs from the players when
not in use. Store them in their plastic
cases away from moisture, heat and direct
sunlight.
CONTINUED
Black plate (266,1)
5-10
Audio/Audio set
To clean a disc: Wipe it with a soft, lintfree cloth that has been dampened with
water. Wipe in a straight line from the
center to the edge of the disc (not in
circles). Dry it with another soft, lint-free
cloth. Do not use a conventional record
cleaner or anti-static device.
! CD-R/RW discs
. CD-R/CD-RW discs that have not been
subject to the finalizing process (a
process that allows discs to be played
on a conventional CD player) cannot be
played.
. It may not be possible to play CD-R/
CD-RW discs recorded on a music CD
recorder or a personal computer because
of disc characteristics, scratches or dirt on
the disc, or dirt, condensation, etc. on the
lens of the unit.

. It may not be possible to play discs
recorded on a personal computer depending on the application settings and the
environment. Record with the correct
format. (For details, contact the appropriate application manufacturers of the applications.)
. CD-R/CD-RW discs may be damaged
by direct exposure to sunlight, high temperatures or other storage conditions. The
unit may be unable to play some damaged
discs.
. If you insert a CD-RW disc into the
player, playback will begin more slowly
than with a conventional CD or CD-R disc.
. Recordings on CD-R/CD-RW cannot
be played using the DDCD (Double
Density CD) system.
Made for
. iPod touch (5th generation)*
. iPod touch (4th generation)
. iPod touch (3rd generation)
. iPod touch (2nd generation)
. iPod touch (1st generation)
. iPod classic
. iPod nano (7th generation)*
. iPod nano (6th generation)*
. iPod nano (5th generation)
. iPod nano (4th generation)
. iPod nano (3rd generation)
. iPod nano (2nd generation)*
. iPod nano (1st generation)*
. iPhone 5s*
. iPhone 5c*
. iPhone 5*
. iPhone 4s
. iPhone 4
. iPhone 3GS
. iPhone 3G
. iPhone
! USB memory device

. USB communication formats: USB
1.1/2.0 HS (480 Mbps) and FS (12 Mbps)
. File formats: FAT 16/32
. Correspondence class: Mass storage
class
*: iPod video not supported
! iPod
The following iPod, iPod nano, iPod
classic, iPod touch and iPhone devices
can be used with this system.
Depending on differences between models or software versions etc., some models might be incompatible with this system.
Black plate (267,1)
Audio/Audio set
! File information
Compatible compressed files (Audio)
Item
USB
Compatible
file format
DISC
MP3/WMA/AAC
Folders in the
device
Maximum
512
Maximum
255
Files in the
device
Maximum
8000
Maximum
512
Files per
folder
Maximum
255
Corresponding sampling frequency

(Audio)
File type
MP3 files:
MPEG 1 LAYER 3
Frequency (kHz)
32/44.1/48
MP3 files:
MPEG 2 LSF LAYER 3 16/22.05/24
WMA files:
Ver. 7, 8, 9 (9.1/9.2)
32/48/64/80/96/128/
160/192
AAC files:
MPEG4/AAC-LC
48/44.1/32/24/22.05/
16/12/11.025/8
Corresponding bit rates (Audio)

File type
MP3 files:
MPEG 1 LAYER 3
Bit rate (kbps)

32 - 320
MP3 files:
MPEG 2 LSF LAYER 3 8 - 160
WMA files: Ver. 7, 8
CBR 48 - 192
WMA files:
Ver. 9 (9.1/9.2)
CBR 32 - 192
AAC files:
MPEG4/AAC-LC
16 - 320
(Variable Bit Rate (VBR) compatible)

. MP3 (MPEG Audio Layer 3), WMA
(Windows Media Audio) and AAC (Advanced Audio Coding) are audio compression standards.
. This system can play MP3/WMA/AAC
files on CD-R, CD-RW discs, USB memory, and Bluetooth device.
. This system can play disc recordings
compatible with ISO 9660 level 1 and level
2 and with the Romeo and Joliet file
system.
. When naming an MP3/WMA/AAC file,
add an appropriate file extension (.mp3/
.wma/.m4a).
. This system plays back files with .mp3/
.wma/.m4a file extensions as MP3/WMA/
AAC files respectively. To prevent noise
5-11
and playback errors, use the appropriate

file extension.
. This system can play only the first
session when using multi-session compatible CDs.
. MP3 files are compatible with the ID3
Tag Ver. 1.0, Ver. 1.1, Ver. 2.2 and Ver. 2.3
formats. This system cannot display disc
title, track title and artist name in other
formats.
. WMA/AAC files can contain a WMA/
AAC tag that is used in the same way as
an ID3 tag. WMA/AAC tags carry information such as track title and artist name.
. The emphasis function is available only
when playing MP3/WMA files recorded at
32, 44.1 and 48 kHz.
. This system can play back AAC files
encoded by iTunes.
. The sound quality of MP3/WMA files
generally improves with higher bit rates. In
order to achieve a reasonable level of
sound quality, discs recorded with a bit
rate of at least 128 kbps are recommended.
. The MP3/WMA player does not play
back MP3/WMA files from discs recorded
using packet write data transfer (UDF
format). Discs should be recorded using
pre-mastering software rather than packetwrite software.
CONTINUED
Black plate (268,1)
5-12
Audio/Audio set
. M3u playlists are not compatible with

the audio device.
. MP3i (MP3 interactive) and MP3PRO
formats are not compatible with the audio
device.
. The player is compatible with VBR
(Variable Bit Rate).
. When playing back files recorded as
VBR (Variable Bit Rate) files, the play time
will not be correctly displayed if the fast
forward or reverse operations are used.
. It is not possible to check folders that
do not include MP3/WMA/AAC files.
. MP3/WMA/AAC files in folders up to 8
levels deep can be played. However, the
start of playback may be delayed when
using discs containing numerous levels of
folders. For this reason, we recommend
creating discs with no more than 2 levels
of folders.
. The play order of the compact disc with

the structure shown above is as follows:
. The order changes depending on the

personal computer and MP3/WMA/AAC
encoding software you use.
! Terms
! Packet write
. This is a general term that describes
the process of writing data on-demand to
CD-R, etc., in the same way that data is
written to floppy or hard discs.
! ID3 tag
. This is a method of embedding trackrelated information in an MP3 file. This
embedded information can include the
track number, track title, the artists name,
the album title, the music genre, the year
of production, comments, cover art and
other data. The contents can be freely
edited using software with ID3 tag editing
functions. Although the tags are restricted
to a number of characters, the information
can be viewed when the track is played
back.
! WMA tag
. WMA files can contain a WMA tag that
is used in the same way as an ID3 tag.
WMA tags carry information such as track
title and artist name.
! ISO 9660 format
. This is the international standard for
the formatting of CD-ROM folders and
files. For the ISO 9660 format, there are 2
levels of regulations.
. Level 1: The file name is in 8.3 format
(8 character file names, with a 3 character
file extension. File names must be composed of one-byte capital letters and
numbers. The _ symbol may also be
included.)
Black plate (269,1)
Audio/Audio set
. Level 2: The file name can have up to

31 characters (including the separation
mark . and file extension). Each folder
must contain fewer than 8 hierarchies.
! MP3
. MP3 is an audio compression standard
determined by a working group (MPEG) of
the ISO (International Standard Organization). MP3 compresses audio data to
about 1/10 the size of that on conventional
discs.
5-13
! AAC
. AAC is short for Advanced Audio
Coding and refers to an audio compression technology standard used with
MPEG2 and MPEG4.
! WMA
. WMA (Windows Media Audio) is an
audio compression format developed by
Microsoft. It compresses files into a size
smaller than that of MP3 files. The
decoding formats for WMA files are Ver.
7, 8 and 9.
. This product is protected by certain
intellectual property rights of Microsoft
Corporation and third parties. Use or
distribution of such technology outside of
this product is prohibited without a license
from Microsoft or an authorized Microsoft
subsidiary and third parties.
CONTINUED
Black plate (270,1)
5-14
Audio/Audio set
! Error messages
Mode
Message
Explanation
This indicates that no MP3/WMA/AAC files are included in the disc.
This indicates that the disc is dirty, damaged, or it was inserted upside
down. Clean the disc or insert it correctly. It indicates a disc which is
not playable is inserted.
Disc read error.
.
.
Please eject disc.
There is a trouble inside the system.

Eject the disc.
CD
Media not connected. Press AUDIO/TUNE knob This indicates a problem in the USB memory or its connection. Refer to
to exit.
Connecting and disconnecting a USB memory/portable device F5-17.
USB
iPod
No audio file.
This indicates that no MP3/WMA/AAC files are included in the USB

memory.
Unplayable file
This indicates that the accessed file cannot play back.
Media not connected
This indicates that a USB device/iPod is not connected to the system.
No audio file
This indicates that there is no audio file in the connected iPod.
Unplayable file
This indicates that the accessed file cannot play back.
NOTE
If the malfunction is not rectified: Take your vehicle to your SUBARU dealer.
Black plate (271,1)
Audio/Audio set
& Basic information before use

WARNING
When the vehicle is stopped with the
engine running, always apply the
parking brake for safety. Failure to
do so may result in loss of control of
your vehicle and cause an accident
or serious injury.
! Touch screen gestures

Operations are performed by touching the touch screen directly with your finger.
Operation method
Outline
Touch
Quickly touch and release
once.
Main use
Changing and selecting various

settings
5
Drag*
Touch the screen with your Scrolling the lists
finger, and move the screen
to the desired position.
CAUTION
. To prevent damaging the screen,
touch the screen keys with your
finger lightly.
. Wipe off fingerprints using a
glass cleaning cloth. Do not use
chemical cleaners to clean the
screen, as they may damage the
touch screen.
5-15
Flick*
Quickly move the screen by Scrolling the main screen page
flicking with your finger.
*: The above operations may not be performed on all screens.
NOTE
There may be a delayed response to flick operation that are performed at high
altitudes.
CONTINUED
Black plate (272,1)
5-16
Audio/Audio set
! Touch screen operation

This system is operated mainly by the
keys on the screen.
When a screen key is touched, a beep
sounds. You can set the beep sound.
Refer to Unit settings F5-19.
NOTE
. If the system does not respond to
touching a screen key, move your
finger away from the screen and touch
it again.
. Grayed-out screen keys cannot be
operated.
. The displayed image may become
darker and moving images may be
slightly distorted when the screen is
cold.
. In extremely cold conditions, the
screen may not be displayed correctly.
Also, the screen keys may be less
responsive than usual when pressed.
. When you look at the screen
through polarized material such as
polarized sunglasses, the screen may
be dark and difficult to see. If so, look at
the screen from different angles, adjust
the screen settings or take off your
sunglasses. Refer to Unit settings
F5-19.
! Entering letters and numbers/list

screen operation
! Entering letters and numbers
When entering the Bluetooth device name
or PIN-code, or the phone number, letters
and numbers can be entered via the
screen.
No.
5
&
Function
Delete a character/number entered
into the window.
! List screen
Multimedia playlists (example: iPod playlist)

Enter letters (example: In-Car-Device
setting)
No.
Function
No.
Function
1
&
Select a category that wants to play

back.
1
&
Enter the desired characters (alphabet key mode).
2
&
Return to the playback display of

each mode.
2
&
3
&
Switch to the screen for characters.
3
&
Select to skip to the next or previous

page.
4
&
Confirm the characters/numbers entered into the window.
Enter a space.
Black plate (273,1)
Audio/Audio set
! Initial screen
When the ignition switch is in the ACC or
ON position, the initial screen will be
displayed and the system will begin
operating.
5-17
! Connecting and disconnecting a

USB memory/portable device
The USB port and the AUX jack are
located as shown in the following illustration.
. When using the SUBARU STARLINK

function (if equipped), the display screen
may be different from the screen above.
. After a few seconds, the caution screen
will be displayed.
. After about 5 seconds, the caution
screen automatically switches to the next
screen.
NOTE
. This unit does not support commercially available USB hubs.
. Turn on the power of the device
when it is not turned on.
. This device has a USB port for USB
memory/portable device.
. For compatible USB memory devices, refer to USB memory device
F5-10.
. For compatible iPod models, refer to
iPod F5-10.
. Even if a USB hub is used to
connect more than two USB devices,
CONTINUED
Black plate (274,1)
5-18
Audio/Audio set
only the first two connected devices

will be recognized.
! Turning the system on and off
! Selecting an audio source

1. Press the AUDIO/TUNE knob.
& Basic operation

This section describes some of the basic
features of the audio/visual system. Some
information may not pertain to your system.
Your audio/visual system works when the
ignition switch is turned to the ACC or
ON position.
CAUTION
To prevent the battery from being
discharged, do not leave the audio/
visual system on longer than necessary when the engine is not running.
NOTE
Press the power/VOLUME knob to turn

the audio/visual system on and off. When
the system turns on, the mode that was in
use the last time the system was turned off
will be displayed. Press and hold the knob
to turn the display off.
Turn this knob to adjust the volume.
2. Select the desired source.
Some functions can also be operated

by using the voice command system.
For details, refer to Voice command
system F5-81.
Example: Source select screen
Black plate (275,1)
Audio/Audio set
NOTE
. If the audio control screen appears,
select the Source key on the audio
screen or press the AUDIO/TUNE knob
again.
. When you push the AUDIO/TUNE
knob while any screen other than the
audio control screen is displayed, the
display will return to the audio control
screen.
. When the AUDIO/TUNE knob is
pushed and held, the graphic equalizer
screen will be displayed. Refer to
Graphic Equalizer F5-23.
! Selecting a function menu
Press the HOME button to display home
screen.
Item
Function
AUDIO
Select to display the main

screen of the audio source that
was selected previously.
PHONE
Select to display the hands-free

function using your cell phone.
Refer to Hands-free phone
system F5-71.
APPS
Select to display the functions

linked with a smartphone. Refer
to SUBARU STARLINK F526.
5-19
. Sound settings: Select the

tab to set
the sound quality settings. Refer to
Sound settings F5-20.
tab
. Display settings: Select to the
set the screen settings. Refer to Display
settings F5-25.
. SUBARU STARLINK settings (if
tab set the
equipped): Select to the
SUBARU STARLINK settings. Refer to
SUBARU STARLINK settings F5-26.
Select to display the functions

SETTINGS for performing various settings.
Refer to Unit settings F5-19.
& Unit settings

Sound quality adjustment, screen adjustment, and information of the audio unit are
displayed.
1. Press the HOME button on the audio
panel.
2. Touch the SETTINGS key.
3. Select the items to be set.
Available setting:
tab to
. General settings: Select the
check the system software update information. Refer to General settings F5-20.
tab to
. Bluetooth settings: Select the
set the Bluetooth settings. Refer to Bluetooth settings F5-20.
CONTINUED
Black plate (276,1)
5-20
Audio/Audio set
! General settings
Touch the
tab for the audio unit basic
settings.
! Bluetooth settings
Touch the
tab to set Bluetooth.
Item
Function
Item
Function
System
Language
Select to change the language.
BT Devices Connection
Button
Beeps
Select to set the sound beeps

on/off.
In-Car-De- Select to enter the Bluetooth

vice setting device name or PIN-code.
System
Software
Select to update software versions. This menu is not used in

usual operation.
Reset to
Factory
Setting
Select to reset the device to

factory settings. This menu is not
used in usual operation.
After resetting to factory settings,
turn ignition off and on again.
Select to pair/connect the Bluetooth devices.
For details, refer to Bluetooth settings

F5-66.
! Sound settings
Touch the
tab to set the sound quality.
Item
Function
Balance/
Fader
Select to adjust speaker volume

balance (right/left and front/rear).
Speed Volume Control
Select to adjust speaker volume

coupled to vehicle speed.
Graphic
Equalizer
Select to adjust sound quality in

each frequency band.
Sound Re- Select to add high-pitched tone

storer
to the compressed audio file.
Volume
Smoother
Select to adjust volume difference between audio sources.
Virtual
Bass
Select to add harmonic tone so

that low-pitched tone is
strengthened.
Black plate (277,1)
Audio/Audio set
Item
Vocal Image Control
Function
Select to pick-up vocal sound
signal from the sound data, and
adjust it to right/left or front/rear.
5-21
Refer to the following table for the adjustment range of each audio setting item and
default value.
Item
Balance/
Fader
Step
Default
Volume
Balance
Control
Balance
L9-R9
0 (Center)
Fader
F9-R9
0 (Center)
Vocal
Image
Control
Balance
L9-R9
R3
Fader
F9-R9
0 (Center)
Speed Volume Control
OFF, Low, High
Low
Graphic Equalizer
6-+6
0 (Flat)
Sound Restorer
ON, OFF
ON
Volume Smoother
OFF, Low, Mid, High
Mid
Virtual Bass
OFF, Low, Mid, High
Mid
CONTINUED
Black plate (278,1)
5-22
Audio/Audio set
! Balance/Fader
A good balance of the left and right stereo
channels and of the front and rear sound
levels is important for good quality audio
program listening.
Keep in mind that when listening to a
stereo recording or broadcast, changing
the right/left balance will increase the
volume of 1 group of sounds while
decreasing the volume of another.
. Volume Balance setting

1. Select the Volume Balance Control
key.
. Vocal image setting

1. Select the Vocal Image Control key.
Touch the Set key of the Balance/Fader

key. The Balance/Fader screen will
appear.
2. Adjust the balance by pressing or

key.
or
3. Adjust the fader by pressing
key.
2. Adjust the balance by pressing or

key.
or
3. Adjust the fader by pressing
key.
Black plate (279,1)
Audio/Audio set
! Speed Volume Control

The system adjusts to the optimum
volume and tone quality according to
vehicle speed to compensate for increased vehicle noise.
1. Touch the right side key of the Speed
Volume Control key.
2. Select the desired item. The High
key comes to have a bigger effect. When
the OFF key is selected, speed volume
control function is canceled.
5-23
! Graphic Equalizer
You can adjust the sound quality by
increasing/decreasing the gain for each
frequency range.
1. Touch the Set key of the Graphic
Equalizer key.
5
4. Adjust the level of each frequency
or
key.
band by touching
2. In this mode, 6 preset equalizer

patterns (the Bass, Treble, Acoustic,
Impact, Smooth and Flat key) and 3
customized patterns (the SET 1 - SET
3 key) are available.
3. When customizing the equalizer pattern, touch among SET 1, SET 2 or
SET 3 and then touch the Adjust key.
CONTINUED
Black plate (280,1)
5-24
Audio/Audio set
! Sound Restorer
You can play compressed audio data with
a sound quality that is close to the original
sound.
Select the ON or OFF key by the right
side key of the Sound Restorer key.
! Volume Smoother
This function reduces the difference in
volume among the sound sources to be
played.
1. Touch the right side key of the Volume
Smoother key.
2. Select the OFF, Low, Mid or
High key. The High key comes to have
a bigger effect. When the OFF key is
selected, the volume smoother function is
canceled.
! Virtual Bass
This function enables you to adjust the
bass tone.
1. Touch the right side key of the Virtual
Bass key.
2. Select the OFF, Low, Mid or
High key. The High key comes to have
a bigger effect. When the OFF key is
selected, the virtual bass function is
canceled.
! Vocal Image Control

Refer to Balance/Fader F5-22.
Black plate (281,1)
Audio/Audio set
! Display settings
Touch the
tab to set display.
Item
Day/Night
Mode
Brightness
Function
The Auto, Day or Night key
can be selected on the pop-up
screen.
When the Auto key is selected,
the screen changes to day or
night mode depending on the
position of the headlight switch.
Touch + or to adjust the
brightness.
NOTE
. When the screen is viewed through
polarized sunglasses, a rainbow pattern may appear on the screen due to
optical characteristics of the screen. If
this is disruptive, please operate the
5-25
screen without polarized sunglasses.

. If the screen is set to Day mode
with the headlight switch turned on,
this condition is memorized even with
the engine turned off.
! How to adjust the rear view
image
In the camera display, the brightness, tint,
color and black level of the screen can be
adjusted.
1. Depress the brake pedal fully and stop
the vehicle.
2. While the vehicle is stopped, set the
shift lever (MT models) or select lever
(CVT models) in the R position, and then
touch the display.
3. Touch the Display Adjustment key.
4. Touch the items to adjust the rear
camera screen.
5
Camera display
WARNING
When adjusting camera display
screen, make sure to depress the
brake pedal fully to avoid the vehicle
from moving. Failure to do so may
lead to a serious accident.
NOTE
The camera display can be accessed
when the rear camera monitor is displayed.
CONTINUED
Black plate (282,1)
5-26
Audio/Audio set
! SUBARU STARLINK settings (if

equipped)
Touch the
tab to change the SUBARU
STARLINK settings.
& SUBARU STARLINK (if

equipped)
The SUBARU STARLINK function allows
the system to link with a smartphone using
Bluetooth.
! How to use SUBARU STARLINK
Item
Browser
cache
Function
Select to initialize cache files
that the browser stores. If the
confirmation screen appears
and the OK key is selected, the
cache files will be deleted.
1. Connect to the audio system. Use a

USB port for an iPhone or iPod touch and
Bluetooth for Android devices.
. For details about connecting an
iPhone/iPod touch: Refer to Connecting and disconnecting a USB memory/
portable device F5-17.
. For details about registering or connecting an Android device: Refer to
Registering/connecting Bluetooth
device F5-66.
2. Press the HOME button, and then
touch the APPS key, or press the APPS
button on the audio panel. The APPS
3. Touch the SUBARU STARLINK key

on the APPS screen. The disclaimer
screen or the error screen is displayed.
4. Touch the Check key on the disclaimer screen and then the APPS main
screen will appear. If you touch the
Cancel key, the disclaimer screen disappears and the previous screen will be
displayed again.
NOTE
. The SUBARU STARLINK connection
error screen will be displayed due to
one of the following possible reasons.
Your smartphone and the system
has not been connected via USB
(for iPhone) or Bluetooth (for Android).
SUBARU STARLINK APPS has
Black plate (283,1)
Audio/Audio set
not been activated.

. You can also switch to aha or
Pandora (if equipped) from the APPS
screen.
! APPS main screen
No.
Function
1
&
Select to go to the Music APPS

screen.
2
&
Select to go to the News APPS

screen.
3
&
Select to go to the Calender APPS

screen.
4
&
Select to go to the iHeartRadio

APPS screen.
5
&
Select to go to the Weather APPS

screen.
5-27
NOTE
. The error screen will be displayed
while using SUBARU STARLINK due to
one of the following possible reasons.
When your smartphone has no
service or the Bluetooth communication is not possible.
When your smartphone is turned
off.
When the SUBARU STARLINK
APPS is quit.
When connection to the SUBARU
STARLINK server is not possible.
When a problem occurs other
than a server error.
. When using the SUBARU STARLINK
function, a disclaimer screen will be
displayed. Be sure to fully read the
contents before using the function.
. Supported devices
iPhone: iPhone 4/iPhone 4s/
iPhone 5 (iOS Ver. 5.1 or later)/
iPhone 5c/iPhone 5s
Android: (OS Ver. 4.0 or later)
CONTINUED
Black plate (284,1)
5-28
Audio/Audio set
& AM/FM radio
No.
! Control screen and audio panel
No.
Function
1
&
Select to display the audio source

selection screen.
2
&
Select to change the band.
3
&
The HD Radio indicator on the top

right of the screen changes according to the reception condition of HD
Radio (if equipped).
4
&
Select to display a station list (if

equipped). Refer to Selecting a
station from the list F5-29.
No.
Function
5
&
Select to scan radio channels.

This function enables searching for
receivable stations automatically,
and tunes in to a frequency for 5
seconds if a station is found. When
the 5-second period has elapsed, the
system searches for the next receivable station again, and tunes in to
the frequency for 5 seconds.
6
&
Select to open the Option screen.

Refer to Radio settings F5-30.
7
&
When you touch a key, the system

tunes to the stored frequency.
When you touch and hold a key, the
system stores the frequency to the
selected preset channel. Refer to
Presetting a station F5-29.
Function
8
&
Turn to adjust volume.

Press to turn the audio system on/
off.
9
&
Turn to step up/down frequencies.

Turn to move up/down the list. Also,
the knob can be used to enter
selections on the list screens by
pressing.
Press to select an audio mode. For
details, refer to Selecting an audio
source F5-18.
10
&
Press to display the sound setting

screen. Refer to Unit settings F519.
11
&
Press to seek for a station/channel.

Press and hold for continuous seek.
NOTE
. Although FM is normally static free,
reception can be affected by the surrounding area, atmospheric conditions,
station strength and transmitter distance. Buildings or other obstructions
may cause momentary static, flutter or
station interference. If reception continues to be unsatisfactory, switch to a
stronger station.
. The radio automatically changes to
stereo reception when a stereo broadcast is received.
Black plate (285,1)
Audio/Audio set
. The radio automatically blends to an

HD Radio signal (if equipped) in AM or
FM where available.
! How to change the source
Select the AM or FM key on the source
select screen. Refer to Selecting an audio
source F5-18.
! Presetting a station
In total 18 stations can be set for the FM
band (6 each for FM1, FM2 and FM3) and
12 stations can be set for the AM band (6
each for AM1 and AM2).
1. Tune in the desired station.
2. If you touch and hold a key, the system
stores the frequency to the selected
preset channel.
5-29
! Selecting a station from the list (if

equipped)
A station list can be displayed.
tab.
1. Touch the
Item
2. Touch the tab and the station list will

appear.
3. Select the desired station.
! Update the station list
Touch the Update Station List key on the
station list screen and the following screen
will be displayed.
Function
OK
Select to execute the manual

update.
Cancel
Select to cancel the manual

update.
NOTE
. The audio system sound is muted
during refresh operation.
. In some situations, it may take some
time to update the station list.
! Bookmark the list
You can store and call up the received
data (images, song titles, artist names,
etc.). The stored data is displayed as a list.
tab on the station list
1. Touch the
screen and the following screen will be
CONTINUED
Black plate (286,1)
5-30
Audio/Audio set
displayed.
on the screen. You can access a URL by

reading the QR code using a smartphone,
etc.
! Delete bookmark from the list
1. Touch the Delete Bookmark key on
the station list screen and the following
screen will be displayed.
! Radio settings
You can perform various radio settings.
1. Touch the
tab.
2. Select the desired item from the
following table.
Item
HD (if
equipped)
Function
Select to turn HD radio on/off.
PTY Select
(if
Select to set the PTY group.
equipped)
2. Select an item from the bookmark list,

the following image will be displayed.
Auto Store
2. If you select an item from the bookmark list, the item will be deleted from the
bookmark list.
3. Touch the Delete All key. If the
confirmation screen appears and the
OK key is selected, all bookmark items
in the list will be deleted.
3. When you call up bookmark information, a QR code converted from the
bookmark information will be displayed
Select to detect 6 radio stations

with strong frequencies automatically and to store them in the
order of frequency.
! About HD RadioTM technology (if

equipped)
HD RadioTM Technology is the digital
evolution of analog AM/FM radio. Your
radio product has a special receiver which
allows it to receive digital broadcasts
(where available) in addition to the analog
broadcasts it already receives. Digital
broadcasts have better sound quality than
analog broadcasts as digital broadcasts
provide free, crystal clear audio with no
static or distortion. For more information,
and a guide to available radio stations and
programming, refer to www.hdradio.com.
Black plate (287,1)
Audio/Audio set
AM and FM broadcast sound quality is

now crystal clear, with AM sound quality
that virtually matches FM quality of the
past, and FM broadcasts that have near
CD-level sound quality.
FM stations can provide additional digitalonly audio programming on HD2/HD3

Channels.
! Available HD RadioTM technology (if
equipped)
! Multicast
On the FM radio frequency most digital
stations have multiple or supplemental
programs on one FM station.
HD Radio Technology manufactured under license from iBiquity Digital Corporation. Foreign Patents. HD RadioTM and the
HD, HD Radio, and Arc logos are
proprietary trademarks of iBiquity Digital
Corp.
5-31
5
2. The indication that shows whether the
current broadcast is digital or analog is
displayed on the top right of the control
screen.
1. Touch the Sub CH key on the control

screen and the following screen will be
displayed.
3. Select the desired channel.
Turning the AUDIO/TUNE knob can also
CONTINUED
Black plate (288,1)
5-32
Audio/Audio set
. Turn on the power of the iPod if it is

not turned on.
. Once an iPod is connected, the
music tag moves from the radio into
the iPod.
. When the iPod is connected to
iTunes, the tagged information of the
songs which were tagged while listening to the radio can be viewed. Then a
user may decide to purchase the song
or CD/Album which had been listened
to on their radio.
select the desired multicast channel.
NOTE
. HD RadioTM stations can be preset.
. An orange HD) (HD)) will be displayed on the screen when in digital.
The HD) (HD)) will first appear in a gray
color indicating the station is indeed
(an analog and) a digital station. Once
the digital signal is acquired, the logo
will change to a bright orange color.
. The song title and artist name will
appear on the screen when available by
the radio station. The radio station can
send album pictures when available.
. As a user works through the analog
radio stations, (where applicable) the
radio receiver will automatically tune
from an analog signal to a digital signal
within 5 seconds.
1. Touch the Tag key in the control

screen while receiving HD Radio, the tag
setting screen will be displayed.
! Preserving a music information

Tag information in the music broadcasting
is preserved in the system and transmits
to an iPod.
2. Connect an iPod. Refer to Connecting

and disconnecting a USB memory/portable device F5-17.
Black plate (289,1)
Audio/Audio set
NOTE
In addition, the following messages appear.

Display Message
5-33
Contents
Tag storage full
If there is not enough memory in the digital

audio
Already Stored
If the same information is stored in the digital

audio
Storing Failed
If the store process in the digital audio failed
iPod full Tags cannot be stored
If there is not enough memory in the iPod
Starting to transfer the Tag files.
If the system starts to transmit music information to an iPod
Transferring Failed
If the transmitting process of music information

to an iPod failed
X Tag(s) Sent (X = number of transmitted

information) will be displayed.
If the transmitting process of music information

to an iPod is successful
. The tag information can not be

preserved while scanning or caching
the radio station.
. If tagging the music information
fails, Saving the HD Radio tag was
unsuccessful. (Saving the HD Radio
tag was unsuccessful.) will be displayed on the screen. If this occurs, tag
the information again.
. Program Service Data: Presents song

name, artist, station IDs, and other relevant data streams.
. iTunes Tagging provides you the opportunity to discover a wide range of

content and the means to tag that
content for later review and purchase from
the iTunes Store. Also refer to the Apple
Automotive specifications for implementing iTunes Tagging.
CONTINUED
Black plate (290,1)
5-34
Audio/Audio set
. Visual information related to content

being played on your HD Radio receiver,
such as Album Art, historical photographs,
still art from live broadcasts, among other
related content.
Black plate (291,1)
Audio/Audio set
5-35
! Troubleshooting guide
Experience
Cause
Action
Mismatch of time alignment - a user may hear The radio stations analog and digital volume is None, radio broadcast issue. A user can contact
a short period of programming replayed or an not properly aligned or the station is in ballgame the radio station.
echo, stutter or skip.
mode.
Sound fades, blending in and out.
Radio is shifting between analog and digital

audio.
Reception issue. May clear-up as the vehicle

continues to be driven. Turning the indicator of the
HD RadioTM off will change the radio mode to
analog audio.
Audio mute condition when an HD2/HD3

multicast channel had been playing.
The radio does not have access to digital

signals at the moment.
This is normal behavior, wait until the digital signal

returns. If out of the coverage area, seek a new
station.
Audio mute delay when selecting an HD2/

HD3 multicast channel preset.
The digital multicast content is not available until

HD RadioTM broadcast can be decoded and
This is normal behavior, wait for the audio to
make the audio available. This takes up to 7
become available.
seconds.
Text information does not match the present

song audio.
Data service issue by the radio broadcaster.
Broadcaster should be notified. Complete the form;

www.ibiquity.com/automotive/report_radio
_station_experiences.
No text information shown for the present

selected frequency.
Broadcaster should be notified. Complete the form;

www.ibiquity.com/automotive/report_radio
_station_experiences.
.
The Acquiring caution message appears

when the system attempts to acquire digital
transmission.
When acquiring digital data while receiving a

digital broadcast and SPS station.
.
.
When the reception in digital of the SPS station

is confirmed.
When the system determined that the SPS
station could not be received.
When the SPS broadcast is ended (stopped) by
the radio station while receiving SPS.
CONTINUED
Black plate (292,1)
5-36
Audio/Audio set
Experience
Cause
.
The HD Channel is unavailable caution

message appears when digital reception is not
.
possible.
When the system determined that the SPS .

station could not be received while receiving
a digital broadcast and SPS station.
.
When the SPS broadcast is ended
(stopped) by the radio station while receiving SPS.
Action
When the status is changed to acquiring digital
data because the reception condition of SPS
station has improved.
When the received station is changed.
Black plate (293,1)
Audio/Audio set
& SiriusXM Satellite Radio (if

equipped)
5-37
! SiriusXM Data Service

Data service information, which is comprised of traffic information and weather
information, can be received via the
SiriusXM Radio.
To receive the data service information in
the vehicle, a subscription to the SiriusXM
Satellite Radio service is necessary.
Content set to use the SiriusXM data
service is reset when personal information
is initialized.
Control screen
No.
No.
Function
1
&
Perform the SXM setting. See below. Refer to SXM setting F5-43.
2
&
Search for a channel which the

direction of higher frequency from
current frequency. Reproduce the
channel that can receive by 5
seconds.
3
&
A list is displayed. There are three

types of lists (Presets, Categories
or All Channels) are available.
. Presets: Preset channels are
displayed in a list.
. Categories: The channels of
the selected category are displayed in a list.
. All Channels: All selectable
channels are displayed in a list.
Function
4
&
Display the contents information of a

channel receiving.
5
&
Presets list (30 channels max.) is

displayed. Refer to Presetting a
channel F5-41.
6
&
Categories list is displayed. Refer to

Selecting a channel from the list
F5-41.
&
All channels list is displayed.

The available received channels are
displayed, and you can select a
channel.
8
&
Change to the Direct Tune display.

Refer to Direct Tune F5-42.
9
&
Return to the previous display.
CONTINUED
Black plate (294,1)
5-38
No.
10
&
Audio/Audio set
Function
Return to the playback display.
Audio panel
No.
Function
1
&

off.
2
&

3
&
Turn right to step up channels and

turn left to step down channels.
Press to select an audio source.
Refer to Selecting an audio source
F5-18.
4
&
Press to step up/down channels.

Press and hold to step up/down
channels fast.
Black plate (295,1)
Audio/Audio set
! How to subscribe to SiriusXM Satellite Radio

To listen to a satellite radio broadcast in
the vehicle, a subscription to the SiriusXM
Satellite Radio service is necessary.
A SiriusXM Satellite Radio is a tuner
designed exclusively to receive broadcasts provided under a separate subscription.
! How to subscribe
It is necessary to enter into a separate
service agreement with SiriusXM Satellite
Radio in order to receive satellite broadcast programming in the vehicle. Additional activation and service subscription
fees apply that are not included in the
purchase price of the vehicle and digital
satellite tuner.
For complete information on subscription
rates and terms, or to subscribe to
SiriusXM Satellite Radio:
. U.S. customers:
Refer to www.siriusxm.com or call
1-866-635-2349
. Canadian customers:
Refer to www.siriusxm.ca or call
1-877-209-0079
WARNING
. SiriusXM Satellite Radio Services
Legal Disclaimers and Warnings
Fees and Taxes Subscription fee, taxes, one time activation fee, and other fees may
apply. Subscription fee is consumer only. All fees and programming subject to change.
Subscriptions subject to Customer Agreement available at
www.siriusxm.com (U.S.) or
www.siriusxm.ca (Canada).
SiriusXM U.S. satellite and
data services are available
only in the contiguous USA
and DC. SiriusXM satellite
service is also available in
Canada: see www.siriusxm.
ca.
Explicit Language Notice
Channels with frequent explicit language are indicated
with an XL preceding the
channel name. Channel blocking is available for SiriusXM
Satellite Radio receivers by
notifying SiriusXM at:
5-39
. U.S. customers:
Visit www.siriusxm.com or call
1-866-635-2349
Visit www.siriusxm.ca or call
1-877-209-0079
CAUTION
. It is prohibited to copy, decompile, disassemble, reverse engineer, hack, manipulate or otherwise make available any technology or software incorporated in
receivers compatible with the
SiriusXM Satellite Radio System
or that support the XM website,
the Online Service or any of its
content. Furthermore, the
AMBE voice compression software included in this product is
protected by intellectual property
rights including patent rights,
copyrights, and trade secrets of
Digital Voice Systems, Inc.
. Note: this applies to SiriusXM
Satellite Radio receivers only
and not XM Ready devices.
CONTINUED
Black plate (296,1)
5-40
Audio/Audio set
NOTE
. SiriusXM Satellite Services Descriptions
Only SiriusXM Satellite Radio
brings you more of what you love,
all in one place. Get over 175
channels, including commercialfree music, plus the best sports,
news, talk, comedy and entertainment. Welcome to the world of
satellite radio. More information
about SiriusXM Satellite Radio is
available online at www.siriusxm.
com (U.S.) and www.siriusxm.ca
(Canada).
. SiriusXM Satellite Services Subscription Instructions
For SiriusXM Services requiring
a subscription (such as SiriusXM
Satellite Radio, and some Infotainment & data services), the following
paragraph shall be included.
Required SiriusXM Satellite Radio
and some Infotainment & data services monthly subscriptions sold
separately after trial period. Subscription fee is consumer only. All
fees and programming subject to
change. Subscriptions are subject
to the Customer Agreement available at www.siriusxm.com (U.S.) or
www.siriusxm.ca (Canada). Sirius,
XM and all related marks and logos

are trademarks of Sirius XM Radio
Inc. All other marks, channel names
and logos are the property of their
respective owners.
For more information, program
schedules, and to subscribe or
extend subscription after complimentary trial period; more information is available at:
. U.S. customers:
1-866-635-2349
Visit www.siriusxm.ca or call
1-877-209-0079
. SiriusXM Satellite Radio is solely
responsible for the quality, availability
and content of the satellite radio services provided, which are subject to
the terms and conditions of the
SiriusXM Satellite Radio customer service agreement.
. Customers should have their radio
ID ready; the radio ID can be found by
tuning to Ch 000 on the radio. For
details, see DISPLAYING THE RADIO
ID below.
. All fees and programming are the
responsibility of SiriusXM Satellite
Radio and are subject to change.

Select the Sirius XM key on the source
source F5-18.
Black plate (297,1)
Audio/Audio set
! Presetting a channel
! Selecting a channel from the list
1. The presets list is displayed via either

of the following procedures.
. When you touch the
tab in the
SiriusXM main screen (if the list that
was displayed the last time is Presets).
tab in each
. When you select the
list screen.
2. The current channel is stored if you
touch and hold the preset list key. You can
store up to 30 channels (A beep sounds
when a channel stored).
1. The categories list is displayed via

either of the following procedures.
. When you touch the
tab in the
SiriusXM main screen (if the list that
was displayed the last time is Categories).
tab in each
. When you select the
list screen.
2. Each channel list is displayed when
you select each category item.
5-41
The playing icon is displayed for the

currently selected channel.
CONTINUED
Black plate (298,1)
5-42
Audio/Audio set
In addition, the following messages appear.
! Direct Tune
Display Message
Contents
Subscription Update
Press OK to Continue
An update to your SiriusXM subscription has

been received by the SiriusXM tuner. Touch
any key to continue.
Channel XXX Not Available

(XXX refers to the selected channel number.)
This channel is not a valid SiriusXM channel.

The channel number has been entered incorrectly, or the channel was removed from the
SiriusXM channel lineup.
Channel XXX Not Subscribed Call.

Call SiriusXM to Subscribed.
(XXX refers to the selected channel number.)
This channel is not included in your SiriusXM

subscription plan.
Ch Locked
Lock Code?
The selected channel has been locked by the

parental controls.
A prompt to enter the unlock code will appear.
Check Antenna
Ensure the SiriusXM antenna cable is connected to the SiriusXM tuner correctly.
Check the SiriusXM antenna wire for breaks or
sharp bends.
Replace the antenna if necessary.
No Signal
The vehicle must be outside, and the antenna

must have a clear view of the southern sky.
1. A channel input screen is displayed

when you touch the
tab.
2. Input any number and touch the OK

key, receive the channel which input.
NOTE
Contact SiriusXM
. Listener Care Center (U.S. customers):
1-866-635-2349
. Listener Care Centre (Canadian customers):
1-877-209-0079
Black plate (299,1)
Audio/Audio set
5-43
! SXM setting
1. An option menu screen is displayed
tab on the lower
when you touch the
left side of the screen. The Options
screen will appear.
5
Password input screen
3. When the input password is approved,

change to the lock channel selection
screen.
Option menu screen
No.
Function
1
&
Set the lock function of each channel. Input the password is necessary
for operation.
2
&
Set the password of the lock function.
2. A password input screen is displayed

when you touch the Set key of the
Channel Lock function.
Lock channel selection screen
4. In the channel list, touch the channel

that should be locked.
! Displaying the Radio ID
Each SiriusXM tuner is identified with a
unique radio ID. The Radio ID is required
when activating an SiriusXM Satellite
Services or when reporting a problem.
. If Ch 000 is selected using the
AUDIO/TUNE knob, the ID code will be
displayed.
key. The Radio ID will be
. Touch the
displayed on the Options screen.
CONTINUED
Black plate (300,1)
5-44
Audio/Audio set
In this chapter, iPhone and iPod touch or

Android devices will be referred to as a
smartphone.
WARNING
Do not connect or operate the
smartphone while driving. Doing so
may result in loss of control of your
vehicle and cause an accident or
serious injury.
& ahaTM by HARMAN

aha is a cloud-based application that
connects to the system and gives you
access to your favorite web content safely
and easily. There are over 30,000 stations
spanning internet radio, personalized music, audiobooks, Facebook, Twitter, restaurant and hotel searches, weather and
more. For more about aha, go to the aha
site (http://www.aharadio.com).
When connecting iPhone and iPod touch
or Android devices with the aha application installed, you can control, view, and
hear aha content through the system.
CAUTION
. Do not leave your smartphone in
the car. In particular, high temperatures inside the vehicle may
damage the smartphone.
. Do not push down on or apply
unnecessary pressure to the
smartphone while it is connected
as this may damage the smartphone or its terminal.
. Do not insert foreign objects into
the port as this may damage the
smartphone or its terminal.
In order to connect to this system, use a

Black plate (301,1)
Audio/Audio set
! Control screen and panel
No.
13
&
5-45
Function
Select to display the nearby list.
Control screen (main screen and station screen)
No.
Function
1
&

selection screen.
2
&
Select to open the station list. Refer to

Using aha application F5-49.
3
&
Select to fast forward the current content item by 30 seconds.
4
&
Select to display the contents list of the

selected station.
5
&
Select to make a phone call to the

current content item.
A phone number is distributed depending on content items.
This feature is available only in these
cases.
No.
Function
6
&
The track pauses when pressed during

playback and plays back when touched
during pause.
7
&
8
&
Select to set thumbs up.

Select to set thumbs down.
9
&
Select to start the playback from the

beginning of the content in the target
station.
10
&
Select to rewind the current content

item by 15 seconds.
11
&
12
&
Select to display the preset list.

Return to the control screen.
CONTINUED
Black plate (302,1)
5-46
Audio/Audio set
NOTE
Audio panel
No.
Function
1
&

Press to turn the audio system on/off.
2
&

screen. Refer to Unit settings F5-19.
3
&
Press to display the station operation

screen.
Press to select an audio mode.
4
&
Turn to display the next/previous content item.

Press to select an audio source. Refer
to Selecting an audio source F5-18.
5
&
Press to display the next/previous content item.
. For safety reasons, certain functions are not available while your
vehicle is in motion.
. In order to maximize signal reception, performance and precision of the
smartphone, please ensure the smartphone is placed as close to the system
as possible, while ensuring it is stowed
and secure while driving.
. When the ignition switch is in the
ACC or ON position, the battery of
the connected iPhone/iPod touch is
charged.
. iPhone/iPod touch may not be recognized when the ignition switch is in
the ACC or ON position. In this
case, remove the iPhone/iPod touch
and reconnect it.
. The accuracy of the displayed information or the signal reception performance depends on the smartphone
or the connected device, and its wireless connection.
. Since the aha application uses signals from GPS satellites and wireless
communication lines, it may not work
properly in the following locations.
In a tunnel
In underground parking lots
Black plate (303,1)
Audio/Audio set
Outside wireless communication

range, such as some countryside
areas
Where the wireless communication network is congested, or where
communications are restricted
. Depending on the circumstances
and environment, the signal may be
weak or not be received. In such cases,
an error may occur.
. Top 35 entries in the preset station
list on the smartphone are displayed.
When there are more than 35 entries in
the preset station list, change the order
of the entries in the list on the smartphone. You can change the priority of
your preset stations within the aha
application (after disconnected from
this system) to modify the station list
shown on the screen. Please see your
smartphone aha application Edit Presets (in Main menu) to modify this list.
. For operating the smartphone, see
the instruction manual that comes with
it.
. If there are multiple music files
stored on your iPhone or iPod touch,
it may take some time until playback
starts.
. Playback may be intermittent when
you switch to streaming Bluetooth
audio from aha on your smartphone
device.
. When connecting the device via
Bluetooth, the communication speed
may become slower than via USB.
! Before using aha application
In order to use the aha application on this
system, the application must be installed
on the smartphone.
! Settings required to use aha
application
. Search and download the aha application from your smartphone app store.
iPhone and iPod touch: Apple App
Store via iTunes
Android device: Google Play Store
. Create an account and login to the aha
application on the smartphone.
NOTE
Please use the latest version of the aha
application.
! About app-based connected content
Requirements for using the connected
content services of the aha application
on this system.
. Latest version of the system is compatible with connected content application(s)
for the smartphone, available from aha,
5-47
downloaded to your smartphone.

. A current account with a wireless
content service provider.
. A smartphone data plan: If the data
plan for your smartphone does not provide
for unlimited data usage, additional
charges from your carrier may apply for
accessing app-based connected content
via 3G, 4G, Wi-Fi or 4G LTE wireless
networks.
. Connection to the internet via 3G, 4G,
Wi-Fi or 4G LTE networks.
NOTE
. Changes to product specifications
may result in differences between the
content of the manual and features of
the product.
. Be careful not to exceed the data
usage limits for your smartphone.
Doing so will result in additional data
usage charges from your phone carrier.
. Access to app-based connected
content will depend on the availability
of wireless cell and/or Wi-Fi network
coverage for the purpose of allowing
your smartphone to connect to the
internet.
. Service availability may be geographically limited by region. Consult the
wireless connected content service
CONTINUED
Black plate (304,1)
5-48
Audio/Audio set
provider for additional information.

. Ability of this product to access
connected content is subject to change
without notice and could be affected by
any of the following: compatibility
issues with future firmware versions
of the smartphone; compatibility issues with future versions of the connected content application(s) for the
smartphone; changes to or discontinuation of the connected content application(s) or service by its provider.
. Communication and phone call
charges for smartphones should be
paid by the wireless subscriber.
. If you lose the data in a smartphone
or other device while using it with the
system, no compensation will be given
for the lost data.
. Fuji Heavy Industries makes no
guarantee regarding the content provided by aha.
. aha may not work due to factors on
smartphones, smartphone applications
or stations. Fuji Heavy Industries is not
responsible for it.
! About the supported devices

This system supports the following devices.
. For Android device users

Android OS
. For iPhone/iPod touch users

Type
iPhone
iPod touch
Generation
Firmware
version or
OS
Android
Ver. 2.2 or
Ver. 2.3
Specification
Bluetooth
.
Specification
Ver. 1.1 or
higher
(Ver. 2.0 +
EDR or higher .
is recommended)
Profile
aha Connect Binary API
over SPP
Digital
audio by
A2DP
iPhone 3G
iOS 4.2.x
iPhone 3GS
iOS 6.1.x
NOTE
iPhone 4
iOS 7.0.x
iPhone 4s
iOS 7.0.x
The available functions may vary depending on the type of Android device.
iPhone 5
iOS 7.0.x
iPhone 5c
iOS 7.0.x
iPhone 5s
iOS 7.0.x
iPod touch
iOS 3.1.x
iPod touch 2
iOS 4.2.x
iPod touch 3
iOS 5.1.x
iPod touch 4
iOS 6.1.x
iPod touch 5
iOS 7.0.x
NOTE
Note that the warranty does not apply if
an unsupported iPhone/iPod touch is
connected.
! Connecting a smartphone
If you connect a smartphone to this
system after starting a supported aha
application on the smartphone, you can
display and operate the aha application
displayed on the smartphone on the
system screen.
1. Run the aha application on your
smartphone.
2. Connect the iPhone/iPod touch to the
USB port or connect the Android device
by utilizing the Bluetooth connection (SPP
and A2DP profile).
iPhone/iPod touch: Refer to Connecting and disconnecting a USB memory/
portable device F5-17.
. For details about registering or con-
Black plate (305,1)
Audio/Audio set
necting an Android device: Refer to

Registering/connecting Bluetooth
device F5-66.
! Using aha application

1. When the top screen is displayed,
touch the station key.
NOTE
When iPhone/iPod touch and Android
devices are connected at the same
time, iPhone/iPod touch is prioritized.
. Select the aha key on the source
select screen. Refer to Basic operation
F5-18.
. Select the aha key on the APPS
screen. Refer to SUBARU STARLINK
F5-26.
NOTE
When starting-up aha, there are
some smartphone models for which
aha application does not start up
automatically.
Example of the main screen
5-49
NOTE
. The following operations are not
available on this system. Perform these
operations on the smartphone.
Add/Reorder/Delete stations
Login to Facebook/Twitter
. For the aha function, the following
touch screen gestures are not available.
Multi-touch operation
Double-tap
. For details on the services or the
operations, check the aha site
(http://www.aharadio.com) on the internet.
. The button display will vary depending on each station or content item.
2. Select the desired station from the list.

The selected station is displayed.
CONTINUED
Black plate (306,1)
5-50
Audio/Audio set
& Pandora (if equipped)

Pandora is an application for a smartphone. This can automatically select and
play recommended tracks.
By rating the track currently playing, tracks
that better match your preference will be
recommended.
In order to connect to this system, use a
Depending on differences between models or software version etc., some models
might be incompatible with this system.
peratures inside the vehicle may

damage the smartphone.
smartphone while it is connected
as this may damage the smartphone or its terminal.
NOTE
Follow the specific operation procedures for the smartphone application.
This function is not available if the

Pandora application has not been installed on the smartphone.
WARNING
Do not operate the players controls
or connect the smartphone while
driving. Doing so may result in loss
of control of your vehicle and cause
an accident or serious injury.
CAUTION
. Do not leave your smartphone in
the car. In particular, high tem-
Black plate (307,1)
Audio/Audio set
No.
Function
1
&

selection screen.
2
&
Select to open the station list. Refer to

Station list F5-52.
3
&
Select to skip the current track.
4
&
The track pauses when touched during

playback and plays when touched
during pause.
5
&
Select to set thumbs up.

This gives a high rating to the current
song.
All other similar songs will be played
back more frequently.
No.
Function
6
&
Select to set thumbs down.

This gives a low rating to the current
song.
All other similar songs will be played
back less frequently.
When you select thumbs down, the
current track is skipped.
7
&
During playback of a station, you can

use this key to bookmark a song or
artist. Refer to Registering Bookmarks
F5-52.
8
&

9
&
Turn clockwise to skip to the next track.

10
&

5-51
No.
Function
11
&
Press to skip to the next track/cover art.
! Connecting a smartphone
Connect the iPhone/iPod touch to the
USB port or connect the Android device
by using Bluetooth connection (SPP and
A2DP profile).
iPhone/iPod touch: Refer to Connecting
. For details about registering or connecting an Android device: Refer to
Registering/connecting Bluetooth device F5-66.
The Pandora operation screen can be
reached by the following methods:
. Connecting a Pandora device. Refer to
Connecting a Bluetooth device F5-69 or
Connecting and disconnecting a USB
memory/portable device F5-17.
. Select the Pandora key on the source
source F5-18.
. Select the Pandora key on the APPS
screen. Refer to SUBARU STARLINK
F5-26.
CONTINUED
Black plate (308,1)
5-52
Audio/Audio set
NOTE
When starting-up Pandora, there are
some smartphone models for which
Pandora application does not start up
automatically.
! Station list
You can select, add or delete a station.
When the
tab is touched on the main
screen, a station list will be displayed.
! Registering Bookmarks
You can register the music and artist now
being played in Bookmark.
tab.
1. Touch the
2. Select the desired key. The following
items are appeared on the screen.
Item
When selected after the Bookmark key is pressed, the current

track is bookmarked.
Artist
When selected after the Bookmark key is pressed, the current

artist is bookmarked.
Cancel
Item
Select to cancel the bookmark

operation.
Function
to create a station using a

From Track Select
track name.
to create a station using
From Artist Select
an artist name.
Function
Track
! Store the station

You can register a station.
tab on the Pandora
1. Touch the
main screen.
2. Touch the New Station key, and then
select the desired key.
Cancel
No.
Function
1
&
Select to sort the list in the chronological order of when the Station List was
created.
2
&
Select to create a station.

The station can be created using track
names or artist names.
3
&
4
&
Select to delete a station.
5
&
Select to sort the list based on the

alphabetical order of the station names.
Select to cancel the operation to

add a station.
! Delete the station

You can delete a station.
tab on the Pandora top
1. Touch the
screen.
2. Touch the Delete Station key, and
then the station list is appeared.
3. Select the item to delete the station. If
the confirmation screen appears and the
OK key is selected, the selected station
will be deleted from station list.
Black plate (309,1)
Audio/Audio set
& CD
5-53
No.
Function
11
&

12
&
Press to select a track/file.

Press and hold to fast forward/rewind.
NOTE
No.
Function
No.
Function
1
&

selection screen.
6
&
MP3/WMA/AAC disc:
Select to choose a folder.
2
&
Select to display the play mode

currently selected. Refer to Select
play mode F5-54.
7
&

off.
3
&
Audio CD:
Select to display a track list.
MP3/WMA/AAC disc:
Select to display a folder list.
4
&
Shows progress.
5
&
The tracks in the disc are played

back for 10 seconds each from the
beginning of the track.
8
&
9
&
10
&
. Depending on the compression data

format of the inserted CD, some keys
may not be displayed on the screen.
. If a disc contains CD-DA files and
MP3/WMA/AAC files, only the CD-DA
files can be played back.
. If a CD-TEXT disc is inserted, the
title of the disc and track will be
displayed. Up to 32 characters can be
displayed.
. If the disc contains no CD-TEXT,
only the track number would be displayed on the screen.
Press to eject a disc.

Disc slot
Turn to select a track/file.
F5-18.
CONTINUED
Black plate (310,1)
5-54
Audio/Audio set
! Loading a disc
CAUTION
! Unloading a disc
Press the eject button to remove the disc.
Never try to disassemble the audio

kit or lubricate any part of the CD
player. Do not insert anything other
than a disc into the slot.
! Select play mode

The play mode settings display will appear
when play mode key is touched. Select
the preferred play mode from the following
items.
Icon
Function
Touch to start 1 track repeat.
Insert a disc into the disc slot. After

insertion, the disc is automatically loaded.
Touch to start repeat all.

Touch to start folder repeat.
NOTE
When inserting a disc, gently insert it
with the label facing up.

The CD operation screen can be reached
by the following methods:
. Insert a disc. Refer to Loading a disc
F5-54.
. Select the DISC key on the source
source F5-18.
Touch to start shuffle all.

Touch to start shuffle folder.
NOTE
Depending on the compression data
formant of the inserted CD, the displayed play mode may differ from the
illustration shown here.
Black plate (311,1)
Audio/Audio set
& USB memory
5-55
Audio files on the USB memory can be

played.
WARNING
or connect the USB memory while
driving. Doing so may result in
losing control of your vehicle and
cause an accident or serious injury.
CAUTION
. Do not leave your USB memory
in the car. In particular, high
temperatures inside the vehicle
may damage the USB memory.
USB memory while it is connected as this may damage the
portable player or its terminal.
USB memory or its terminal.
No.
Function
1
&

selection screen.
2
&

play mode F5-56.
3
&
4
&
Select to display folder list.

Shows progress.
5
&
The tracks in the folder are played

back 10 seconds each from the
beginning of the track.
6
&
7
&

No.
Function
8
&
Turn to select a file/track.

F5-18.
9
&

10
&
Press to select a file/track.

CONTINUED
Black plate (312,1)
5-56
Audio/Audio set
! Connecting a USB device

You can connect a USB device to the
vehicle USB port. Refer to Connecting
The USB Audio playback screen can be
. Connect a USB memory. Refer to
. Select the USB/iPod key on the
source select screen. Refer to Selecting
an audio source F5-18.
! Select play mode

items.
Icon
Function
Touch to start folder repeat.
Touch to start shuffle folder.
& iPod
Audio files on the iPod can be played.
WARNING
or connect the iPod while driving.
Doing so may result in loss of
control of your vehicle and cause
CAUTION
. Do not leave your portable player
in the car. In particular, high
temperatures inside the vehicle
may damage the portable player.
unnecessary pressure to the portable player while it is connected
as this may damage the portable
player or its terminal.
Black plate (313,1)
Audio/Audio set
NOTE
No.
Function
1
&

selection screen.
2
&

play mode F5-58.
3
&
Select to display iPod List. Refer to

iPod settings F5-58.
4
&
Shows progress.
5
&

6
&

7
&

5-57
. When an iPod is connected using a

genuine USB cable, the iPod starts
charging its battery.
. When an iPod is connected and the
audio source is changed to iPod mode,
the iPod will resume playing from the
same point it was last used.
. Depending on the iPod that is connected to the system, certain functions
may not be available.
. Files/tracks selected by operating a
connected iPod may not be recognized
or displayed properly.
No.
Function
8
&
Press to select a track/file.

! Connecting the iPod

You can connect an iPod to the vehicle
USB port using the USB cable. Refer to
CONTINUED
Black plate (314,1)
5-58
Audio/Audio set

The iPod operation screen can be
. Connect an iPod. Refer to Connecting
. Select the USB/iPod key on the
source select screen. Refer to Selecting
an audio source F5-18.
! Select play mode
items.
Icon
! iPod settings
You can choose the following items from
the list screen after touching the
tab
on the screen.
Icon
Function
Select to display the play list.
Select to display tracks list.
Select to display artists list.
Select to display albums list.
Function
Select to open other list (Genres, Composers, Audiobooks

and Podcast).
Select to open Genres list.
Select to open Composers list.
Touch to turn off shuffle.
Select to open Audiobooks list.
Touch to start shuffle album.
Select to open Podcasts list.
& Bluetooth audio

The Bluetooth audio system enables
users to enjoy listening to music that is
played on a portable player on the vehicle
speakers via wireless communication.
This audio system supports Bluetooth, a
wireless data system capable of playing
portable audio music without cables. If
your device does not support Bluetooth,
the Bluetooth audio system will not function.
WARNING
. Do not operate the players controls or connect to the Bluetooth
audio system while driving.
Doing so may result in loss of
control of your vehicle and cause
. Your audio unit is fitted with
Bluetooth antennas. People with
implantable cardiac pacemakers,
cardiac resynchronization therapy-pacemakers or implantable
cardioverter defibrillators should
maintain a reasonable distance
between themselves and the
Bluetooth antennas. The radio
waves may affect the operation
of such devices.
Black plate (315,1)
Audio/Audio set
. Before using Bluetooth devices,

users of any electrical medical
device other than implantable
cardiac pacemakers, cardiac resynchronization therapy-pacemakers or implantable cardioverter defibrillators should consult
the manufacturer of the device
for information about its operation under the influence of radio
waves. Radio waves could have
unexpected effects on the operation of such medical devices.
CAUTION
Do not leave your portable player in
the vehicle. In particular, high temperatures inside the vehicle may
damage the portable player.
5-59
No.
Function
1
&

selection screen.
2
&

play mode F5-61.
3
&
Select to display as a list (for the

models with AVRCP Ver. 1.4 or higher).
4
&
The track pauses when touched during playback and plays when touched
during pause.
5
&
Select to open Bluetooth Settings.

Refer to Setting Bluetooth details
F5-69.
6
&

No.
Function
7
&
Turn to select a track.

8
&
Select to display the sound setting

9
&
Press to select a track.

CONTINUED
Black plate (316,1)
5-60
Audio/Audio set
NOTE
. Depending on the Bluetooth device
that is connected to the system, the
music may start playing when selecting
key while it is paused. Conthe
versely, the music may pause when
key while it is playing.
selecting the
. In the following conditions, the system may not function:
The Bluetooth device is turned
off.
The Bluetooth device is not connected.
The Bluetooth device has a low
battery.
. It may take time to connect the
phone when Bluetooth audio is being
played.
. For operating the portable player,
see the instruction manual that comes
with it.
. If the Bluetooth device is disconnected due to poor reception from the
Bluetooth network when the ignition
switch is in the ACC or ON position, the system will automatically
reconnect to the portable player.
. If the Bluetooth device is disconnected on purpose, such as it was
turned off, this does not happen.
Reconnect the portable player manually.
. Bluetooth device information is registered when the Bluetooth device is

connected to the Bluetooth audio system. When selling or disposing of the
vehicle, remove the Bluetooth audio
information from the system. Refer to
Bluetooth settings F5-66.
! Connecting a Bluetooth device
To use the Bluetooth audio system, it is
necessary to register a Bluetooth device
with the system.
. Registering an additional device
1. Select the Select Add key on the
Bluetooth audio control screen.
2. For more information: Refer to Registering/connecting Bluetooth device F566.

Select the BT Audio key on the source
source F5-18.
NOTE
Depending on the type of portable
player connected, some functions
may not be available and/or the screen
may look differently than shown in this
manual.
. Selecting a registered device

1. Select the Select Device key on the
Bluetooth audio control screen.
2. For more information: Refer to BT
Devices Connection screen F5-69.
Black plate (317,1)
Audio/Audio set
! Select play mode

items.
Icon
Function
Touch to repeat the tracks in the
group.
Touch to play tracks in the order
in which they are registered in
the audio device.
Touch to start shuffle group.
NOTE
5-61
& AUX
WARNING
or connect the portable audio device
while driving. Doing so may result in
loss of control of your vehicle and
CAUTION
. Do not leave portable audio device in the vehicle. The temperature inside the vehicle may become high, resulting in damage
to the player.
unnecessary pressure to the portable audio device while it is
connected as this may damage
the portable audio device or its
terminal.
portable audio device or its terminal.
If the connected device does not support the group repeat mode, the group
functions are not available.
CONTINUED
Black plate (318,1)
5-62
Audio/Audio set
No.
Function
1
&

selection screen.
2
&
Select to adjust the audio gain level.

Refer to Audio level settings F5-62.
3
&

4
&

F5-18.
5
&

! Connecting a portable audio device

You can connect a portable audio device
to the vehicle AUX jack. Refer to Connecting and disconnecting a USB memory/portable device F5-17.
The AUX operation screen can be
. Connect a portable audio device. Refer
to Connecting and disconnecting a USB
. Select the AUX key on the source
source F5-18.
! Audio level settings
You can set the audio gain level.
tab on the screen, and
1. Select the
then touch the right side key of the Audio
Level key.
2. Select the audio level from the following items.
. Low
. Mid
. High
Black plate (319,1)
Audio/Steering switches for audio
5-63
Steering switches for audio

Some parts of the audio/visual system can
be adjusted using the switches on the
steering wheel.
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
+ switch
/ switch
Mute/Enter switch
Back switch
List switch
Source switch
CONTINUED
Black plate (320,1)
5-64
. +/ switch
Mode
Except list screen
List screen
Pandora main screen (if equipped)
Operation
Press
Function
Volume up/down
Press and hold
Volume up/down continuously
Press
Move cursor up/down
Press and hold
+ switch is thumb up/ switch is thumb down
switch
Mode
AM/FM Radio, SiriusXM (if equipped)
aha
Operation
Preset channel up/down
Press and hold
Seek up/down continuously while the switch is

being pressed
Press
Content up/down
Press and hold
Reverse the current content item for 15 seconds/Fast forward the current content item for
30 seconds
Audio CD, MP3/WMA/AAC disc, USB, iPod, BT Press

audio
Press and hold
Pandora (if equipped)
List screen
Function
Press
Select a track/file
Fast forward/rewind
Press and hold
Thumbs up
Press
Move cursor left/right
Black plate (321,1)
5-65
. Mute/Enter switch
Mode
Operation
Function
Except list screen
Press
List screen
Press
Select cursor entry
CD, USB, iPod, BT audio, Pandora (if equipped), aha Press
Pause or play back
AM/FM radio, AUX, SiriusXM (if equipped)
Audio ON/OFF
Mute or cancel mute
Press
. Back switch
Mode
All (except for SUBARU STARLINK)
All
Operation
Function
Press
Return to the previous screen
Press and hold
Return to the HOME screen
. List switch
Mode
All (except for SUBARU STARLINK)
Operation
Function
Show list screen
Press
. Source switch
Mode
All
Operation
Press
Function
Change audio modes
NOTE
In the aha, Pandora (if equipped) and SUBARU STARLINK (if equipped) mode, some operation may be done on the screen
depend on the selected APPS.
Black plate (322,1)
5-66
Audio/Bluetooth settings
Bluetooth settings
WARNING
Be sure to park the vehicle in a safe
location before connecting or operating a Bluetooth phone or audio
device. Failure to do so may result
in loss of control of your vehicle and
& Regulatory information
The Bluetooth word mark and logos are

registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth
SIG, Inc.
& Registering/connecting
Bluetooth device
tab and then the SET3. Touch the

TINGS screen will appear.
You can register up to five devices,

regardless of whether they are Bluetooth
phones or audio devices.
NOTE
. Once the phone has been registered, it is possible to use the handsfree system or Bluetooth audio.
. Devices cannot be registered during
driving.
! Registering a Bluetooth phone for
the first time
To use the hands-free system, it is
necessary to register a Bluetooth phone
with the system.
For details about registering a Bluetooth
device: Refer to Registering a Bluetooth
Audio device for the first time F5-67.
1. Turn the Bluetooth connection setting
of your cell phone on.
. This function is not available when
Bluetooth connection setting of your
cell phone is set to off.
2. Press the HOME button and select the
SETTINGS key.
Settings (When the
tab is selected)
. Operations up to this point can also

be performed by pressing the off hook
switch on the steering wheel.
4. To register a device, touch the Set
key on BT Devices Connection.
Black plate (323,1)
BT Devices Connection screen (At the

initial startup and when no device is
registered).
5. Touch the Add key.
. For details about operating the Bluetooth device, see the manual that
comes with it.
. To cancel the registration, touch the
Cancel key.
6. Register the Bluetooth device using
your Bluetooth device.
. A PIN-code is not required for SSP
(Secure Simple Pairing) compatible
Bluetooth devices. Depending on the
type of Bluetooth device being connected, a message confirming registration may be displayed on the Bluetooth devices screen. Respond and
operate the Bluetooth device according to the confirmation message.
7. Check that the screen is displayed
when registration is complete.
. The system waits for connection
requests coming from the registered
device.
. At this stage, the Bluetooth functions are not yet available.
! Registering a Bluetooth Audio device for the first time
To use the Bluetooth Audio, it is necessary
to register an audio device with the
system.
When the Add key is selected (Waiting

for the connection request from a device).
5-67
Bluetooth audio.
1. Display the BT Devices Connection
screen. Refer to Registering a Bluetooth
phone for the first time F5-66.
2. Select the Add key.
The Add key is not displayed when five
devices are already registered.
To add another device, you need to delete
one of the registered devices.
key for the device to be
Press the
deleted, and then select the OK key.
3. Register the Bluetooth device using
your Bluetooth device.
. A PIN-code is not required for SSP
(Secure Simple Pairing) compatible
Bluetooth devices. Depending on the
type of Bluetooth device being connected, a message confirming registration may be displayed on the Bluetooth devices screen. Respond and
operate the Bluetooth device according to the confirmation message.
4. Check that the screen is displayed
when registration is complete.
. The system waits for connection
requests coming from the registered
device.
. At this stage, the Bluetooth functions are not yet available.
The device registration procedure is the

same for both the hands-free system and
CONTINUED
Black plate (324,1)
5-68
! Profiles
This system supports the following services.
Bluetooth Device
Bluetooth Phone/Bluetooth
Audio Device
Bluetooth Device
Spec.
Function
Requirements
Recommendations
Registering a Bluetooth device
Ver. 1.1
Ver. 2.1 + EDR
Function
Requirements
Recommendations
Ver. 1.0
Ver. 1.5
OPP (Object Push Profile)
Ver. 1.1
Ver. 1.1
PBAP (Phone Book Access Transferring the contacts

profile)
Ver. 1.0
Ver. 1.0
Bluetooth Specification
Profile
HFP (Hands-Free Profile)
Bluetooth Phone
Bluetooth Audio Device
Hands-free system
MAP (Message Access

Profile)
Bluetooth phone message
Ver. 1.0
SPP (Serial Port Profile)
Connecting a Bluetooth
phone
Ver. 1.1
Ver. 1.0
Ver. 1.2
Ver. 1.0
Ver. 1.4
A2DP (Advanced Audio

Distribution Profile)
AVRCP (Audio/Video Remote Control Profile)
Bluetooth audio system
NOTE
. If your cell phone does not support HFP, registering the Bluetooth phone or using OPP, PBAP, MAP or SPP profiles
individually will not be possible.
. If the connected Bluetooth device version is older than recommended or incompatible, the Bluetooth device function may
not work properly.
. For USA customers, please visit www.subaru.com for details. Outside of the USA customers, contact your local dealer to
arrange a demonstration in order to confirm whether or not the device can be paired with the vehicle.
Black plate (325,1)
& Setting Bluetooth details

! BT Devices Connection screen
1. Press the HOME button.
2. Touch the SETTINGS key and then
tab.
touch the
3. Touch the BT Devices Connection
key and then select the desired device to
register.
No.
Function
3
&
This shows the status of the device

connection profile. (The icon illuminates
while connected.)
4
&
Delete the registered device. Refer to

Deleting a Bluetooth device F5-70.
5
&
Switch to connect/disconnect Bluetooth

communication. Refer to Bluetooth
ON/OFF F5-69.
! Connecting a Bluetooth device

Up to 5 Bluetooth devices (phones and
audio devices) can be registered.
BT Devices Connection screen (One

device is registered.)
No.
Function
1
&
Register the device. Refer to Registering/connecting Bluetooth device

F5-66.
2
&
Make the connection to the registered

device.
If more than 1 Bluetooth device has been

registered, select which device to connect
to.
screen. Refer to BT Devices Connection
screen F5-69.
2. Select the device to be connected.
. Supported profile icons will be displayed.
: Phone
: Audio device
: Smartphone Application
. Supported profile icons for currently
connected devices will illuminate.
. The audio icon illuminates only
when in the Bluetooth audio mode.
. All icons are dimmed when Blue-
5-69
tooth is set to off or when the connection cannot be made with the device.
NOTE
. It may take time if the device connection is carried out during Bluetooth
audio playback.
. Depending on the type of Bluetooth
device being connected, it may be
necessary to perform additional steps
on the device.
. It is not possible to establish a
Bluetooth connection with iOS devices
currently connected with a USB cable.
. Supported profile icons of the unselected devices are not displayed if
several Bluetooth devices have been
registered.
! Bluetooth ON/OFF
screen F5-69.
2. Select the ON or OFF key by the
right side of the Connect with Bluetooth
key. The ON key establishes a connection, and the OFF key disconnects the
connection.
CONTINUED
Black plate (326,1)
5-70
NOTE
The setting is fixed as the OFF key
when no device is registered.
! Deleting a Bluetooth device
When deleting a Bluetooth phone, the

contact data will be deleted at the same
time.
! In-Car-Device setting screen
The Bluetooth settings can be confirmed
and changed.
1. Display the SETTINGS screen. Refer
to Registering a Bluetooth phone for the
first time F5-66.
2. On the SETTINGS screen for InCar-Device setting, select the Set key.
Function
7
&
Switch the screen to input characters.
! Editing the Bluetooth device

name
The device name can be set or changed.
1. Touch the Name key.
2. Enter a name and then select the Set
key.

screen F5-69.
2. Select the desired device.
key for the device to be
3. Touch the
deleted, and then select the OK key.
NOTE
No.
No.
Function
1
&
Display the Bluetooth device address

of the in-vehicle equipment.
2
&
Display the Bluetooth device name of

the in-vehicle equipment. The default
name is SUBARU BT, which can be
changed by selecting it and entering
alphanumeric characters.
3
&
Display the PIN code of the in-vehicle

equipment. The default code is
1234, which can be changed by
selecting it and entering numbers.
4
&
Delete one character from the currently selected item (BT device name
or the PIN code).
5
&
Save the current BT device name and

PIN code.
6
&
Numeric input keys.
! Editing the PIN-Code

The PIN-code can be set or changed.
1. Select the PIN Key.
2. Enter a PIN-code and then select the
Set key.
NOTE
If the PIN key is already selected, the
ABC key is cross-hatched and disabled.
Black plate (327,1)
Audio/Handsfree phone system
Hands-free phone system

The hands-free system enables calls to be
made and received without having to take
your hands off the steering wheel.
This system supports Bluetooth. Bluetooth
is a wireless data system that enables cell
phones to be used without being connected by a cable or placed in a cradle.
The operating procedure of the phone is
explained here.
. Before using Bluetooth devices,

users of any electrical medical
device other than implantable
cardiac pacemakers, cardiac resynchronization therapy-pacemakers or implantable cardioverter defibrillators should consult
the manufacturer of the device
for information about its operation under the influence of radio
waves. Radio waves could have
unexpected effects on the operation of such medical devices.
WARNING
. While driving, do not use a cell
phone or connect the Bluetooth
phone. Doing so may result in
loss of control of your vehicle
and cause an accident or serious
injury.
. Your audio unit is fitted with
Bluetooth antennas. People with
implantable cardiac pacemakers,
cardioverter defibrillators should
maintain a reasonable distance
between themselves and the
Bluetooth antennas. The radio
waves may affect the operation
of such devices.
CAUTION
Do not leave your cell phone in the
vehicle. The temperature inside may
rise to a level that could damage the
phone.
NOTE
. If your cell phone does not support
Bluetooth, this system cannot function.
. In the following conditions, the system may not function:
The cell phone is turned off.
The current position is outside
the communication area.
The cell phone is not connected.
The cell phone has a low battery.
5-71
. When using the hands free function

and other Bluetooth functions at the
same time, the following problems may
occur:
The Bluetooth connection may
be cut.
Noise may be heard when playing back voice with the Bluetooth
function.
. The other partys voice will be heard
from the front speakers. The audio/
visual system will be muted during
phone calls or when hands-free voice
commands are used.
. Talk alternately with the other party
on the phone. If both parties speak at
the same time, the other party may not
hear what has been said. (This is not a
malfunction.)
. Keep call volume down. Otherwise,
the other partys voice may be audible
outside the vehicle and voice echo may
increase. When talking on the phone,
speak clearly towards the microphone.
. The other party may not hear you
clearly when:
Driving on an unpaved road.
(Making excessive traffic noise.)
Driving at high speeds.
The moonroof or windows are
open.
The air conditioning vents are
CONTINUED
Black plate (328,1)
5-72
pointed towards the microphone.

The sound of the air conditioning
fan is loud.
There is a negative effect on
sound quality due to the phone
and/or network being used.
. When another phone is connected,
the following registered data cannot be
read:
Contact data
Call history data
All phone settings
. When selling or disposing of the
vehicle, initialize the data. Refer to
Unit settings F5-19.
. Once initialized, the data and settings will be erased. Take extra caution
when initializing the data.
. The voice command system supports phone commands, so dialing a
phone number using your voice is
possible. Refer to Voice command
system F5-81.
. The images shown in this Owners
Manual are sample images. The actual
images may vary depending on the
market and specifications of your vehicle.
& Control screen
PHONE (Menu) screen
No.
Function
1
&
Open the Incoming Calls screen.

Refer to By incoming calls F5-74.
2
&
Open the Outgoing Calls screen.

Refer to By outgoing calls F5-75.
3
&
Open the Contacts screen. Refer to

By contacts list F5-75.
4
&
Open the dialpad screen. Refer to By

Dialpad F5-76.
5
&
Open the phone volume settings

screen. Refer to Phone volume settings F5-79.
6
&
Use to make a phone call. You cannot

press this key until you open the
dialpad screen and enter a phone
number.
7
&
Open the BT Devices Connection

screen. Refer to Setting Bluetooth
details F5-69.
8
&
Enter the phone number that you

want to call.
9
&
Switch the screen to the phone

(menu) screen.
NOTE
PHONE (Dialpad) screen
When the cell phone is not registered

and the Bluetooth setting is off, a
message is displayed instead of menu
items.
Black plate (329,1)
& Registering/connecting a
Bluetooth phone
& Using the phone switch/microphone
To use the hands-free system for cell

phones, it is necessary to register a cell
phone with the system. Refer to Registering/connecting Bluetooth device F5-66.
. Steering switch
! Bluetooth phone condition display

The condition of the Bluetooth phone
appears on the upper right side of the
screen.
5-73
By pressing the steering switch, a call can

be received or ended without taking your
hands off the steering wheel.
& How to change the handsfree phone system
1)
2)
3)
Volume control switch

Off hook switch
On hook switch
. Microphone
The microphone is used when talking on
the phone.
The phone (menu) screen can be used to

make a phone call. To display the handsfree operation screen, press the HOME
button and then select the PHONE key,
or press the off hook switch on the
steering wheel.
& Making a call

There are several methods by which a call
can be made, as described below.
1. Press the HOME button on the audio
panel.
2. Touch the PHONE key.
3. Select the desired key to make a call
from the list.
CONTINUED
Black plate (330,1)
5-74
Refer to Voice command system F581.

! By incoming calls
On the phone (menu) screen, select the
Incoming Calls key to open the Incoming Calls screen.
You can make a call by selecting an item
in the incoming call history list.
If there is no incoming call history, a
message appears to indicate that there
is no incoming call history data.
Item
Function
Incoming
Calls
Display the history of incoming

calls. Refer to By incoming
calls F5-74.
Outgoing
Calls
Display the history of outgoing

calls. Refer to By outgoing calls
F5-75.
Contacts
Display the phonebook. Refer to

By contacts list F5-75.
Dialpad
Dial a phone number. Refer to

By Dialpad F5-76.
NOTE
You can also make a call by using the
following functions.
. Make a call using the off hook
switch on the steering wheel. Refer to
By off hook switch F5-76.
. Make a call using voice operation.
Incoming Calls screen

No.
1
&
2
&
No.
Function
3
&
Delete all incoming call history data.

The Delete All key is disabled when
there is no incoming call history.
When you select an item in the history list

on the Incoming Calls screen, the outgoing call screen opens.
NOTE
. Up to 10 items in the incoming call
history are listed. Scroll the screen to
see items that are not on the screen.
. When making a call to the same
number continuously, only the most
recent call is listed in call history.
. When a phone number registered in
the contact list is received, the name is
displayed.
. Number-withheld calls are also
memorized in the system.
. International phone calls may not be
made depending on the type of cell
phone you have.
. The list should group together consecutive entries with the same phone
number and same call type.
Function
Open the Contacts screen.
Black plate (331,1)
! By outgoing calls
Outgoing Calls key to open the Outgoing Calls screen. You can make a call
by selecting an item in the outgoing call
history list.
If there is no outgoing call history, a
message appears to indicate that there
is no outgoing call history data.
Outgoing Calls screen

No.
1
&
2
&
3
&
Function
Open the Contacts screen.
Delete all outgoing call history data.
The Delete All key is disabled when
there is no outgoing call history.
When you select an item in the history list

on the Outgoing Calls screen, the outgoing call screen opens.
5-75
contact data.
NOTE
. Up to 10 items in the outgoing call
history are listed. Scroll the screen to
see items that are not on the screen.
. When making a call to the same
number continuously, only the most
recent call is listed in call history.
. When a phone number registered in
the contact list is received, the name is
displayed.
. Number-withheld calls are also
memorized in the system.
. International phone calls may not be
made depending on the type of cell
phone you have.
. The list should group together consecutive entries with the same phone
number and same call type.
! By contacts list
Contacts key to open the phone number
list screen.
You can make a call by selecting an item
in the list (up to five phone numbers are
listed).
If there is no contact data, a message is
displayed to indicate that there is no
Contacts screen
No.
1
&
2
&
Function
3
&
Open a pop-up screen for starting the

download of contact data. Refer to
Update contacts from phone F5-79.
&
Delete all contact data. The Delete

All key is disabled when there is no
contact data. Refer to Deleting the
contact data F5-80.
CONTINUED
Black plate (332,1)
5-76
No.
Function
5
&
Open a list of contacts that starts with

the selected character. This key is
cross-hatched and cannot be selected if there is no contact data that
starts with the selected character.
Select the up/down arrow key to scroll the

list of contacts.
When you select a phone number on the
screen, the outgoing call screen opens.
! Delete contacts
When the Delete All key is selected, all
contact data downloaded into the invehicle equipment will be deleted.
Refer to Deleting the contact data F580.
! By Dialpad
Input the phone number manually using
the keypad displayed on the screen.
NOTE
Up to 1000 items in the contact data are
listed. Scroll the screen to see items
that are not on the screen.
! When the contact is empty
For PBAP incompatible but OPP compatible Bluetooth phones
On the Contacts screen, select the
Download Contacts key. A screen where
you can select how to download contacts
opens.
You can select to download all items or
download one item. For details, refer to
Update contacts from phone F5-79.
Phone (Dialpad) screen

No.
Function
1
&
Allow you to enter numbers from 0 to

9 and *, #, and +. To enter +, press
and hold the 0 key.
2
&
Delete one character from the entered

characters.
No.
Function
3
&

(menu) screen.
4
&
Open the Outgoing Calls screen and

dials the entered phone number. This
is the same as pressing the off hook
switch on the steering wheel. This key
is cross-hatched and cannot be selected until the phone number is
entered.
5
&
Open the Options screen. Refer to

Phone volume settings F5-79.
6
&
Open the BT Devices Connection

screen. Refer to Setting Bluetooth
details F5-69.
When you enter a phone number on the

key, the Outscreen and select the
going Call screen opens.
! By off hook switch
Calls can be made using the latest call
history item.
1. Press the off hook switch on the
steering wheel to display the phone
(menu) screen.
2. Check that the call screen is displayed.
Black plate (333,1)
! Outgoing screen
. The ,
, and
keys are disabled
on the outgoing call screen.
& Receiving a call

! Incoming calls
When a call is received, the incoming call
screen is displayed with a sound.
When you receive a phone call while the
cell phone is connected, the screen
changes to the incoming call screen.
Function
1
&

&
Abort the call. The screen returns to

the phone (menu) screen. This is the
same as pressing the on hook switch
on the steering wheel.
NOTE
phone being connected, it may be
on the phone.
. When you are on the outgoing call
screen, the screen changes to the call
screen when the other party answers
the call.
No.
Function
2
&
Put the incoming call on hold. This

function may not work on some cell
phone models. This function is the
same as pressing the on hook switch
on the steering wheel for a short
period of time.
3
&
Open the call screen. This function is

the same as pressing the off hook
4
&
Reject the incoming call. This function

is the same as pressing and holding
the on hook switch on the steering
wheel.
NOTE
Outgoing call screen

No.
5-77
Incoming call screen

No.
1
&
Function
. During international phone calls, the

other partys name or number may not
be displayed correctly depending on
the type of cell phone you have.
. The ringtone that has been set in the
phone setting screen sounds when
there is an incoming call. Depending
on the type of Bluetooth phone, both
the system and Bluetooth phone may
sound simultaneously when there is an
incoming call. Refer to Phone volume
settings F5-79.

CONTINUED
Black plate (334,1)
5-78
! By off/on hook switch

When you receive a call, you can also
answer it by pressing the off hook switch
on the steering switch. To end a call, press
the on hook switch.
No.
& Talking on the phone

The call screen opens when you perform
the following operations.
. When you accept a call on the incomkey),
ing call screen (by selecting the
the call screen opens.
. When you are on the outgoing call
screen, the screen changes to the call
screen when the other party answers the
call.
While talking on the phone, this screen is
displayed. The operations outlined below
can be performed on this screen.
. When the incoming call screen is
displayed and you accept the call, the
screen changes to the call screen. The
screen stays on the incoming call screen if
you reject the call.
and
keys are disabled on
. The
the incoming call screen.
Call screen
Function
1
&

&
Mute your voice to the other party.

Touch this key again to deactivate the
Mute mode. This key is disabled in the
private mode.
&
Change the mode to private mode.

The other partys voice emits from the
cell phone. Touch this key again to
deactivate the private mode.
4
&
End the call. This will return you to the

phone (menu) screen when ending
outgoing calls and the previous
screen when ending incoming calls.
This function is the same as pressing
the on hook switch on the steering
wheel.
5
&
Open the call (dialpad) screen. For

details about how to use the function,
refer to By Dialpad F5-76.
6
&

(menu) screen.
7
&
Allow you to make DTMF (Dual Tone

Multi Frequency) calls. The numbers
you enter are sent as tone signals.
NOTE
Call (Dialpad) screen (DTMF)
. When cell phone call is changed to

hands-free call, the hands-free screen
is displayed and its functions can be
operated on the screen.
. Changing between cell phone call
and hands-free call can be performed
Black plate (335,1)
by operating the cell phone directly.

. Transferring methods and operations will be different depending on
the type of cell phone you have.
. For the operation of the cell phone,
see the manual that comes with it.
. The sound quality of the voice heard
from the other partys speaker may be
negatively impacted.
! Phone volume settings

The call and ringtone volume can be
adjusted. A ringtone can be selected.
1. Display the PHONE screen. Refer to
How to change the hands-free phone
system F5-73.
key.
2. Touch the
3. Select the desired item to be set.
& Phone settings
. On the PHONE screen, the screen

changes to the Options screen when you
key.
select the
You can transfer the phonebook information and adjust the volume of your phone
using the Bluetooth phone system.
5-79
No.
Function
1
&
Adjust the ringtone volume. The

key lowers the volume, and the +
key increases the volume. (Default
volume: 4 out of a total of 16 volume
levels)
2
&
Adjust the receive volume. The

levels)
3
&
Adjust the transmit volume. The

levels)
NOTE
NOTE
. The ringer volume for outgoing and

incoming calls, as well as the volume
while on hold or during a call are
controlled independently from the volume of the audio source. The volume
setting in the phone setting is applied.
. When making a call, receiving a call
or while talking on the phone, you can
adjust the volume by using the AUDIO/
TUNE knob on the audio panel or the
volume control switch on the steering
wheel.
. Depending on the type of phone,

certain functions may not be available.
. Contact data is managed independently for every registered phone.
When one phone is connected, another
phones registered data cannot be
read.
Options (volume settings) screen
! Update contacts from phone

Operation methods differ between PBAP
(Phone Book Access Profile) compatible
and PBAP incompatible but OPP (Object
Push Profile) compatible Bluetooth
phones.
CONTINUED
Black plate (336,1)
5-80
system F5-73.
2. Touch the Contacts key, and then
select the Download Contacts key.
NOTE
If your cell phone is neither PBAP nor
OPP compatible, the contacts cannot
be transferred.
! For PBAP compatible Bluetooth
phones
Contacts screen (Download selection)

No.
Function
1
&
Open the download confirmation

screen. Confirm whether or not to
download. If the downloaded contact
(s) already
exist(s), confirm whether or not to
overwrite the existing data.
2
&
Download one set of contact data. To

download the data, you need to
operate from the connected device.
3
&
Cancel the download. The screen

returns to the Contacts screen.
1. Select the Download Contacts or

Download 1 Entry key. Contacts are
transferred automatically.
2. Check that a confirmation screen is
displayed when the operation is complete.
. This operation may be unnecessary
depending on the type of cell phone.
. If another Bluetooth device is connected when transferring contact data,
depending on the phone, the connected Bluetooth device may need to
be disconnected.
phone being connected, it may be
on the phone.
! For PBAP incompatible but OPP

compatible Bluetooth phones
1. Select the Download 1 Entry key.
2. Transfer the contact data to the system using a Bluetooth phone.
. This operation may be unnecessary
depending on the type of cell phone.
. To cancel this function, select the
Cancel key.
3. Check that a confirmation screen is
displayed when the operation is complete.
NOTE
To download all items, you may need to
change the settings in your cell phone
beforehand.
! Deleting the contact data
You can delete the phonebook data stored
in the audio set.
system F5-73.
2. Touch the Contacts key, and then
select the Delete All key.
3. Select the OK key when the confirmation screen appears.
Black plate (337,1)
Audio/Voice command system
NOTE
. Manual transfer operation cannot be
performed while driving.
. If your cell phone is neither PBAP
nor OPP compatible, the contacts cannot be transferred.
phone:
It may be necessary to perform
additional steps on the phone when
transferring contact data.
Voice command system

The voice command system enables the
audio, hands-free phone system, etc. to
be operated using voice commands.
Refer to the Command list F5-84 for
samples of voice commands.
Voice commands can be used even when
you set the system to another language.
For details about setting language, refer to
General settings F5-20.
Action
5-81
Function
Press
Start the voice command system.
Press and hold
Cancel voice recognition.
! Microphone
& Using the voice command

system
! Steering switch
It is unnecessary to speak directly into the

microphone when giving a command.
NOTE
1)
Talk switch
. Wait for the confirmation beep before speaking a command.

. Voice commands may not be recognized if:
Spoken too quickly.
Spoken at a low or high volume.
The moonroof or windows are
CONTINUED
Black plate (338,1)
5-82
open.
Passengers are talking while
voice commands are spoken.
The air conditioning speed is set
high.
The air conditioning vents are
turned towards the microphone.
. In the following conditions, the system may not recognize the command
properly and using voice commands
may not be possible:
The command is incorrect or
unclear. Note that certain words,
accents or speech patterns may be
difficult for the system to recognize.
There is excessive background
noise, such as wind noise.
& Voice command system operation

1. Press the talk switch on the steering
wheel.
After the voice command top screen has
been displayed, speech guidance will
commence.
Example (Say PHONE)
NOTE
NOTE
When the voice command mode is
audio mode, voice guidance for the
voice command system can be skipped
by pressing the talk switch on the
steering wheel.
2. Say the command.
. Commands related with each function are displayed on the screen of the
each function tab. Some commonly
used commands are displayed on the
screen of the main tab. Even if any tab
is selected, all commands can be
operated.
. Saying Help prompts guidance to
offer examples of commands and operation methods.
. To cancel voice recognition, select
6, or press and hold the talk switch
. If the system does not respond or
the confirmation screen does not disappear, press the talk switch on the
Black plate (339,1)
steering wheel and try again.

. The notations used in the commands are as follows.
< >: Numbers, titles or names to
be spoken
! Voice command example: Call
name
wheel.
2. Say Call <contacts>.
. A confirmation screen will be displayed showing the recognition results. If multiple matching items are
found, a selection screen will be
displayed. Say <number> or select
the number.
NOTE
. In the same manner as it is displayed on the screen, Call <contacts>, after saying Call a contact
say the name of a contact. For example: Call a contact, John Smith or
Call a contact, Mary Davis
. Short or abbreviated names in the
contacts list may not be recognized.
Change names in the contacts list to
full names.
. Sometimes a voice recognition result confirmation screen will be displayed. After confirming the result, say
Yes or No.
. When the system recognizes multiple names from the contacts list, a
name candidate list will be displayed
on the screen. If the desired name is
not displayed on the top of the screen,
say or select the number of the name
from the candidate list (number 1,
number 2, etc.) to select a name from
the candidate list.
. When a contact has multiple phone
numbers registered in the contacts list,
a candidate list will be displayed. If the
desired phone number is not displayed
on the top of the screen, say or select
the number of the desired phone
number from the candidate list (number 1, number 2, etc.) to select a phone
number from the candidate list.
! Voice command example: Dial
number
wheel.
2. Say Dial a number.
3. Say Dial <number>.
For example, if the phone number is
2345678:
Say two three four five six seven
eight
Do not say twenty three forty five sixty
seven eight
5-83
4. Say Call or press the off hook switch

NOTE
. When the system recognizes multiple phone numbers, a phone number
candidate list will be displayed on the
screen. Pressing the off hook switch on
the steering wheel makes a call to the
top entry on the list. If the desired
phone number is not displayed on the
top of the screen, say the number of
the desired phone number from the
candidate list to select a phone number
from the candidate list.
. Calling to the following phone numbers
3 digit numbers (911, 411, 611)
7 digit numbers (Local phone
numbers)
10 digit numbers (Area code +
Local phone number)
11 digit phone numbers (1 + Area
code + Local phone number)
. As the system cannot recognize
additional numbers, say the complete
number without stopping.
CONTINUED
Black plate (340,1)
5-84
! Casual speech recognization

Due to natural language speech recognition technology, this system enables recognition of a command when spoken
naturally. However, the system cannot
recognize every variation of each command. In some situations, it is possible to
omit the command for the procedure and
directly state the desired operation. Not all
voice commands are displayed in the
function menu.
NOTE
If the command cannot be recognized
completely, the command input screen
will be displayed. (Search results will
be shown based on the part of the
command that was recognized.)
! Expression examples for each
function
Command
Dial <phone number>
Expression examples
Phone <phone number>.
& Command list

Recognizable voice commands and their
actions are shown below.
NOTE
. Some voice commands may not be
available depending on the market,
vehicle specifications or the device
connection status.
. Frequently used commands are
listed in the following tables.
. For devices that are not installed in
the vehicle, the related commands will
not be displayed on the screen. Also,
according to conditions, other commands may not be displayed on the
screen.
. The functions available may vary
according to the system installed.
. Voice recognition language can be
changed. Refer to Unit settings F519.
. The notations used in the commands are as follows.
>: Numbers, titles or
<
names to be spoken
(
): There is no need to
speak the command, the voice
command system will recognize
the content.
! Basic command
Voice command
Function
Back
Go back one hierarchy or cancel the

voice recognition
(voice command top
screen)
Help
Ask for help with the

current task
Cancel, Close
Cancel the current

task
Yes
No
Display OFF
Turns the display off
Audio ON
Turns the audio system on
Audio OFF
Turns the audio system off
STARLINK
Switch to APPS mode
Black plate (341,1)
! Commands for changing the audio

mode
! Commands for hands-free phone

Voice command
Voice command
Function
Change to AM
Switch to AM mode
Change to AM1
Switch to AM mode
band 1
Change to AM2
Switch to AM mode
band 2
Change to FM
Switch to FM mode
Change to FM1
Switch to FM mode
band 1
Change to FM2
Switch to FM mode
band 2
Change to FM3
Switch to FM mode
band 3
Change to SiriusXM
Switch to XM mode
Change to BT Audio
Switch to Bluetooth
Audio mode
Change to CD
Switch to CD mode
Change to USB
Switch to USB mode
Change to iPod
Switch to iPod mode
Change to aha
Switch to aha radio

mode
Change to Pandora
Switch to Pandora
mode
Change to AUX
Switch to AUX mode
Function
Dial Number ? <0-9,

+, *, #> ? Change
Places a call to the
number, Dial
said phone number
Dial <0-9, +, *, #> ?
Change number, Dial
Contacts, Phonebook
? <Name> ? <1-5>
Make a call by using
? Dial
the phonebook
Call <Name> ?
<1-5> ? Dial
Call History ? Incoming call, Outgoing Make a call by using
call ? Next (page),
the call history
Previous (page) ?
<1-5> ? Dial
Incoming Calls
Display the call history screen
Outgoing Calls
Display the call history screen
Redial

phone number of the
latest outgoing call
Callback

phone number of the
latest incoming call
Select Phone ?
<1-5>
Display the phone

select screen
Phone Menu
Display the hands

free top screen
5-85
! Commands for Pandora

Voice command
Like
Function
Mark Like flag
Dislike
Mark Dislike flag
Skip, Next
Skip to the next song
! Commands for aha
Voice command
Function
Thumbs Up, Heart,

Like
Mark Like flag
Thumbs Down, Ban,

Dislike
Mark Dislike flag
Refresh, update
Refresh the selected

station to get the latest information
Content Up
Playback next Content
Content Down
Playback previous
Content
CONTINUED
Black plate (342,1)
5-86
! Commands for AM/FM control

Voice command
Function
Seek Up
Tunes in the higher

frequency direction
Seek Down
Tunes in the lower

frequency direction
Scan
Switch to the scan

mode
Designate the freTune to <Frequency> quency to switch to a

specific radio station
Preset <preset number>
Designate the preset

channel to switch to
Tag
iTunes Tagging for

HD Radio
! Commands for SiriusXM radio control

Voice command
Function
Preset <preset number>
Designate the preset

channel to switch to
Scan
Switch to the scan

mode
Channel <Channel
number>
Designate the channel to switch to specific radio station
Voice command
Function
Category ? Next
(page), Previous
Displays the category
(page), <1-5> ? Next list screen
(page), Previous
(page), <1-5>
! Commands for CD control

Voice command
! Commands for MP3/WMA/AAC,

USB control
Voice command
Function
Track Up
Select the next track
Track Down
Select the current

track
Folder Up
Plays from the start of

the next folder
Function
Track Up
Folder Down
Plays from the start of

the previous folder
Track Down
Select the current

track
Scan
Switch to the scan

mode
Scan
Switch to the scan

mode
Select a repeat mode
Repeat ? 1 Track
Repeat, Repeat All
Repeat ? 1 Track
Repeat, Repeat
Folder, Repeat All
1 Track Repeat
Repeat single track
1 Track Repeat
Repeat single track
Repeat Folder
Repeat of the folder
Repeat All
Repeat all tracks
Repeat All
Repeat all tracks
Shuffle
Plays randomly
Shuffle ? Shuffle
Folder, Shuffle All
Select a random play

mode
Shuffle Folder
Plays randomly of the

folder
Shuffle All
Plays randomly
Black plate (343,1)
! Commands for iPod Control

Voice command
5-87
! Commands for Bluetooth audio

control
Function
Voice command
Function
Track Up
Track Down
Select the current

track
Pause
Pause play
Track Up
Repeat ? Repeat
One, Repeat All
Track Down
Select the current

track
Repeat One
Repeat single track
Repeat All
Repeat all tracks
Repeat ? 1 track
Repeat, Repeat All,
Group Repeat
1 Track Repeat
Repeat single track
Shuffle ? Shuffle
a random play
Track, Shuffle Album, Select
mode
Shuffle OFF
Shuffle Track
Shuffle all tracks
Shuffle Album
Shuffle all tracks
Shuffle OFF
Turn off shuffle
Repeat All
Repeat all tracks
Group Repeat
Repeat tracks on
group
Shuffle ? Shuffle All, Select a random play

Group Shuffle, Shuf- mode
fle OFF
Shuffle All
Shuffle all tracks
Group Shuffle
Shuffle tracks on
group
Shuffle OFF
Turn off shuffle
Black plate (344,1)
5-88
Audio/What to do if...
What to do if...
& Troubleshooting
If there is a problem with the hands-free system or a Bluetooth device, first check the table below.
When using the hands-free system with a Bluetooth device
Page
Symptom
The hands-free system or Bluetooth

device does not work.
Likely cause
Solution
Cell
phone
This
system
For USA customers, please visit

www.subaru.com for details. Outside of the
USA customers, contact your local dealer to
arrange a demonstration in order to confirm
whether or not the device can be paired with
the vehicle.
The Bluetooth version of the connected Use a cell phone with Bluetooth version 1.1 or
cell phone may be older than the
higher (recommended: Ver. 2.1 + EDR or
specified version.
higher).
5-68
The connected device may not be a

compatible Bluetooth cell phone.
*: For details, refer to the owners manual that came with the cell phone.
Black plate (345,1)
5-89
When registering/connecting a cell phone

Page
Symptom
A cell phone cannot be registered.
A Bluetooth connection cannot be

made.
Likely cause
Solution
Cell
phone
This
system
An incorrect passcode was entered

on the cell phone.
Enter the correct passcode on the cell phone.
The registration operation has not

been completed on the cell phone
side.
Complete the registration operation on the cell

phone (approve registration on the phone).
Old registration information remains

on either this system or the cell
phone.
Delete the existing registration information from

both this system and the cell phone, then register
the cell phone you wish to connect to this system.
5-69
Another Bluetooth device is already

connected.
Manually connect the cell phone you wish to use to

this system.
5-69
Bluetooth function is not enabled on

the cell phone.
Enable the Bluetooth function on the cell phone.
Automatic Bluetooth connection on

this system is set to off.
Set automatic Bluetooth connection on this system

to on when the ignition switch is turned to the ACC
or ON position.
5-69
CONTINUED
Black plate (346,1)
5-90
When using the phonebook

Page
Symptom
Phonebook data cannot be transferred manually.
Phonebook data cannot be edited.
Likely cause
Solution
The profile version of the connected cell

phone may not be compatible with
transferring phonebook data.
Cell
phone
This
system

www.subaru.com for details. Outside of the
USA customers, contact your local dealer to
arrange a demonstration in order to confirm
whether or not the device can be paired with
the vehicle.
Transfer operation on the cell phone has Complete transfer operation on the cell phone
not completed.
(approve transfer operation on the phone).
5-79
Editing function is not available on this

system.
Black plate (347,1)
5-91
In other situations
Page
Symptom
Likely cause
The cell phone is not close enough to
this system.
Solution
Bring the cell phone closer to this system.
Turn the cell phone off, remove and reinstall
the battery pack, and then restart the cell
phone.
Even though all conceivable measures have been taken, the symptom
Enable the cell phones Bluetooth connection.
The cell phone is the most likely cause
status does not change.
Stop the cell phones security software and
of the symptom.
close all applications.
Before using an application installed on the
cell phone, carefully check its source and how
its operation might affect this system.
Cell
phone
This
system
Black plate (348,1)
5-92
Audio/Appendix
Appendix
& Certification
. Bluetooth
The Bluetooth word mark and logo are
registered trademarks of Bluetooth SIG,
Inc. and any use of such marks by Clarion
Co., Ltd. is under license.
. SiriusXM Satellite Radio (if

equipped)
SiriusXMTM and all related marks and
logos are trademarks of SiriusXM Radio
Inc. All rights reserved.
http://www.clarion.com/us/en/support/index.html
. iPod
Made for iPod and Made for iPhone
mean that an electronic accessory has
been designed to connect specifically to
iPod or iPhone respectively, and has been
certified by the developer to meet Apple
performance standards. Apple is not
responsible for the operation of this device
or its compliance with safety and regulatory standards. Please note that the use of
this accessory with iPod or iPhone may
affect wireless performance.
iPhone, iPod, iPod classic, iPod nano,
iPod touch, and iTunes are trademarks of
Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other
countries.
. Pandora (if equipped)

Pandora, the Pandora logo, and other
Pandora marks are trademarks or registered trademarks of Pandora Media, Inc.,
or its subsidiaries worldwide.
If you have any issues with the Pandora
application on your mobile phone, please
direct them to
pandora-support@pandora.com.
. How to get the source code using

the open source
This system implements software using
the open source. For customers who
would like to get the source code of the
software, it is available by downloading it
from the web site of Clarion Co., Ltd.
For details, refer to the following web site.
& Certification for the Handsfree system

This device complies with Part 15 of FCC
Rules and Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this
device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Le prsent appareil est conforme la
partie 15 des rgles de la FCC et CNR
dIndustrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. Lexploitation est autorise aux deux conditions
suivantes : (1) lappareil ne doit pas
produire de brouillage, et (2) lutilisateur
de lappareil doit accepter tout brouillage
radiolectrique subi, mme si le brouillage
est susceptible den compromettre le
fonctionnement.
This equipment complies with FCC/IC
radiation exposure limits set forth for an
uncontrolled environment and meets the
FCC radio frequency (RF) Exposure
Guidelines in Supplement C to OET65
and RSS-102 of the IC radio frequency
(RF) Exposure rules. This equipment has
Black plate (349,1)
Audio/Appendix
very low levels of RF energy that it

deemed to comply without maximum
permissive exposure evaluation (MPE).
Cet quipement est conforme aux limites
dexposition aux rayonnements nonces
pour un environnement non contrl et
respecte les lignes directrices dexposition
aux frquences radiolectriques de la
FCC dans le Supplment C OET65 et
dexposition aux frquences radiolectriques (RF) CNR-102 de lIC. Cet quipement met une nergie RF trs faible qui
est considre conforme sans valuation
de lexposition maximale autorise.
5-93
& Certification for Mexico models

. IFETEL
Clarion
. IFETEL
Clarion
RCPCLPF14-250
PF-3547
RCPCLPF14-253
PF-3688
FCC CAUTION
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the users authority
to operate the equipment.
This transmitter must not be co-located or
operated in conjunction with any other
antenna or transmitter.
Black plate (2,1)
Left Page
Black plate (13,1)
Interior equipment
Interior light .........................................................
6-2
Shopping bag hook ...........................................
6-13
Dome light ..........................................................

Map light.............................................................
Cargo area light (Outback)...................................
OFF delay timer ..................................................
6-2
6-2
6-3
6-4
Legacy ..............................................................
Outback ............................................................
6-13
6-14
Sun visors ...........................................................
6-4
Convenient grip (Outback) ................................

Floor mat ............................................................
Cargo area cover (Outback if equipped).......
6-14
6-15
6-15
Vanity mirror with light ........................................
6-5
Storage compartment .........................................
6-6
Glove box ...........................................................

Center console....................................................
Overhead console ...............................................
Pocket ................................................................
6-6
6-6
6-7
6-7
Cup holder ...........................................................
6-8
Front passengers cup holder ..............................

Rear passengers cup holder ...............................
6-8
6-9
Bottle holders ...................................................... 6-9

Accessory power outlets ................................... 6-10
Ashtray (if equipped) ......................................... 6-12
Coat hook ........................................................... 6-12
Using the cover .................................................

To install the front cover ....................................
To remove the front cover ..................................
To remove the cover housing .............................
Stowage of the cargo area cover ........................
To take out the stowed cover housing ................
To install the cover housing ...............................
6-15
6-16
6-17
6-17
6-17
6-18
6-19
Convenient tie-down hooks (Outback).............

Under-floor storage compartment ....................
Rear view camera ..............................................
6-19
6-20
6-20
How to use the rear view camera .......................

Viewing range on the screen ..............................
Help line............................................................
6-22
6-22
6-24
Black plate (352,1)
6-2
Interior equipment/Interior light
Interior light
CAUTION
When leaving your vehicle, make
sure the lights are turned off to
avoid battery discharge.
DOOR: The dome light illuminates automatically when any of the doors (for
Outback, including the rear gate) is
opened. Several seconds after all of the
doors (including the rear gate) are closed,
the dome light gradually turns off. For
details, refer to OFF delay timer F6-4.
& Map light
& Dome light
To turn on the map light, press the switch.

To turn it off, press the switch again.
1)
2)
3)
ON
DOOR
OFF
The dome light switch has the following

positions:
ON: The light remains on continuously.
OFF: The light remains off.
Black plate (353,1)
Interior equipment/Interior light
! Door interlock switch
6-3
& Cargo area light (Outback)
6
Models with SUBARU STARLINK*
1) Door interlock switch
*: For details about the SUBARU STARLINK
(U.S.-spec. models only, if equipped), refer to
the Owners Manual supplement for the
SUBARU STARLINK.
Models without SUBARU STARLINK

1) Door interlock switch
The door interlock switch has the following

positions.
OFF: The map lights do not illuminate
automatically in conjunction with a door
opening. But, the lights can be turned on
manually by pressing the map light
switches.
DOOR: The map lights illuminate automatically when any of the doors (other
than the rear gate or trunk lid) is opened
even while the map light switches are in
the OFF position. Several seconds after
all of the doors (other than the rear gate or
trunk lid) are closed, the map lights
gradually turn off. For details, refer to
OFF delay timer F6-4.
1)
2)
3)
DOOR
OFF
ON
The cargo area light switch has the

following positions.
DOOR: The light illuminates only when
the rear gate is opened. The light gradually turns off several seconds after the rear
gate is closed. For derails, refer to OFF
delay timer F6-4.
OFF: The light remains off.
ON: The light remains on continuously.
CONTINUED
Black plate (354,1)
6-4
Interior equipment/Sun visors
& OFF delay timer

The following lights have an automatic
illumination function.
. dome light
. map light
. cargo area light (Outback)
After being illuminated automatically,
these lights remain on for several seconds
and then gradually turn off under the
. after the ignition switch is turned to the
LOCK/OFF position
. after any doors or the rear gate
(Outback) is closed (dome light)
. after all doors are closed (map light)
. after the rear gate is closed (cargo area
light)
. after the doors are unlocked using the
keyless access function (if equipped)
(dome light and map light)
. after the doors are unlocked using the
remote keyless entry system (dome light
and map light)
. when approaching with the access key
(if equipped) (dome light and map light)
LOCK/OFF position to the ACC or

ON position.
. All doors and the rear gate (Outback)
are locked using the keyless access
function (if equipped).
. All doors and the rear gate (Outback)
are locked using the remote keyless entry
system.
the lights remain on (OFF delay timer) can
be changed by a SUBARU dealer. Contact your SUBARU dealer for details. Also,
the setting can be changed by operating
the multi information display. For details,
refer toInterior Light F3-45.
Sun visors
To block out glare, swing down the visors.

To use the sun visor at a side window,
swing it down and move it sideways.
While the lights are illuminated, if any of

the following operations is performed, the
lights turn off immediately.
. The ignition switch is turned from the
Black plate (355,1)
Interior equipment/Sun visors
6-5
& Vanity mirror with light

CAUTION
Keep the vanity mirror cover closed
while the car is being driven to avoid
being blinded by glare.
6
With the sun visor positioned over the side
window, you can slide the sun visor
toward the rear to prevent glare through
the gap between the sun visor and center
pillar. To slide the sun visor, pull it toward
the rear of the vehicle. When you have
finished sliding it, push it toward the front
of the vehicle.
CAUTION
Do not slide the sun visor over the
windshield. The slided sun visor
would obstruct your view of the
rearview mirror.
To use the vanity mirror, swing down the
sun visor and open the vanity mirror cover.
The lights beside the vanity mirror illuminate when the mirror cover is opened.
NOTE
Use of the vanity mirror light for a long
period of time while the engine is not
running can cause battery discharge.
Black plate (356,1)
6-6
Interior equipment/Storage compartment
Storage compartment
& Glove box
The center console box provides a storage space.
CAUTION
. Always keep the storage compartment closed while driving to
reduce the risk of injury in the
event of sudden stops or an
accident.
. Do not store the following items
in the storage compartment.
Otherwise, it may cause a fire or
accident.
Spray cans, containers with
flammable or corrosive liquids or any other dangerous
items.
Plastic or other heat-vulnerable or flammable articles
such as a lighter.
& Center console
1)
2)
Lock
Unlock
To open the glove box, pull the handle. To

close it, push the lid firmly upward.
To lock the glove box, insert the key and
turn it clockwise. To unlock the glove box,
insert the key and turn it counterclockwise.
1)
2)
Coin tray
Accessory tray
The lid located inside the center console

can be used as a coin tray or an
accessory tray for small items.

push-button start system, use the mechanical key to lock or unlock the glove
box.
NOTE
Black plate (357,1)
Interior equipment/Storage compartment
& Overhead console
6-7
& Pocket
6
1)
2)
Pen holder
Card holder
When the lid inside the center console is

removed, you can use the center console
as a pen holder or a card holder.
The top of the console can be used as an
armrest.
To open the console, push on the lid lightly

and it will automatically open.
CAUTION
Before operating this vehicle, ensure that the overhead console is
closed.
CAUTION
Do not use the pocket as an ashtray
or leave a lighted cigarette in the
pocket. This could cause a fire.
To use the pocket, push on the lid lightly
and it will automatically open.
Black plate (358,1)
6-8
Interior equipment/Cup holder
Cup holder
! CVT models
console.
The dual cup holder is built into the center

console.
! MT models
The divider in the cup holder can be pulled

out. With the divider taken out, the cup
holder can be used as a storage box.
CAUTION
Take care to avoid spills. Beverages,
if hot, might burn you and/or your
passengers. Spilled beverages may
also damage upholstery, carpets or
audio equipment.
& Front passengers cup holder

CAUTION
. Do not pick up a cup from the cup
holder or put a cup in the holder
while you are driving, as this may
distract you and lead to an
accident.
. Take care not to spill a beverage
on the shift lever/select lever or
any switch(es) in the adjacent
area. If the beverage is spilled, it
may cause a malfunction of the
shift lever/select lever and/or
switch(es).
The dual cup holder is built into the center
Black plate (359,1)
Interior equipment/Bottle holders
& Rear passengers cup holder
Bottle holders
6-9
trim can be used to hold beverage bottles

and other items.
CAUTION
A dual cup holder is built into the armrest.
CAUTION
. Do not pick up a bottle from the

bottle holder or put a bottle in the
holder while you are driving, as
this may distract you and lead to
an accident.
. When placing a beverage in a
bottle holder, make sure it is
capped. Otherwise, the beverage
could spill when opening/closing
the door or while driving and, if
the beverage is hot, it could burn
you and/or your passengers.
When a cup containing a beverage

is in the cup holder, do not fold
down or recline any seat. Otherwise,
the beverage could spill while driving and, if the beverage is hot, it
could burn you and/or your passengers.
The bottle holder equipped on each door
Black plate (360,1)
6-10
Interior equipment/Accessory power outlets
Accessory power outlets
CAUTION
Power outlet in the cargo area (Outback)

Power outlet below the climate control
Power outlet in the center console (if

equipped)
Accessory power outlets are provided

below the climate control, in the center
console and in the cargo area. Electrical
power (12V DC) from the battery is
available at any of the outlets when the
ignition switch is in either the ACC or
ON position.
You can use an in-vehicle electrical
appliance by connecting it to an outlet.
The maximum power rating of an appliance that can be connected is 120W. Do
not use an appliance which exceeds the
indicated wattage for each outlet.
When using appliances connected to two
or more outlets simultaneously, the total
power consumed by them must not
exceed 120W.
. Do not attempt to use a cigarette

lighter in the accessory power
outlet.
. Do not place any foreign objects,
especially metal ones such as
coins or aluminum foil, into the
accessory power outlet. That
could cause a short circuit. Always put the cap on the accessory power outlet when it is not
in use.
. Use only electrical appliances
which are designed for 12V DC.
The maximum power rating of an
appliance that can be connected
is 120W. Do not use an appliance
which exceeds the indicated wattage for each outlet.
When using appliances connected to two or more outlets
simultaneously, the total power
consumed by them must not
exceed 120W. Overloading the
accessory power outlet can
cause a short circuit. Do not use
double adapters or more than
one electrical appliance.
. If the plug on your electric appliance is either too loose or too
Black plate (361,1)
Interior equipment/Accessory power outlets
tight for the accessory power

outlet, this can result in a poor
contact or cause the plug to get
stuck. Only use plugs that fit
properly.
. Use of an electric appliance in the
accessory power outlet for a long
period of time while the engine is
not running can cause battery
discharge.
. Before driving your vehicle, make
sure that the plug and the cord
on your electrical appliance will
not interfere with your shifting
gears and operating the accelerator and brake pedals. If they
do, do not use the electrical
appliance while driving.
6-11
power outlet in the center console to be

used. Pass the cord of the electrical
appliance through this gap.
6
Upper compartment
Lower compartment
NOTE
When the lid of the center console is
closed, a gap remains between the
center console and the lid to allow the
Black plate (362,1)
6-12
Interior equipment/Ashtray
Ashtray (if equipped)
Coat hook
CAUTION
Not doing so could result in a fire.
. Always extinguish matches and
cigarettes before putting them
into the ashtray, and then close
the ashtray securely.
. Do not put flammable material in
the ashtray.
. Do not leave a lighted cigarette in
the ashtray.
. Do not leave a lot of cigarette
butts in the ashtray.
The portable ashtray can be installed in

each cup holder. For the locations of the
cup holders, refer to Cup holder F6-8.
When using the ashtray, open the lid of the
ashtray. When removing the ashtray from
a cup holder, pull the ashtray upwards.
Fully close the lid after using the ashtray to
help reduce residual smoke.
NOTE
Particles of ash and tobacco will accumulate around the hinges of the ashtrays inner lid. Clean them off using a
toothbrush or another narrow-ended
implement.
Black plate (363,1)
Interior equipment/Shopping bag hook
Shopping bag hook
WARNING
Do not place hangers or other hard
objects on the coat hooks. If such
items were hanging on the coat
hooks during deployment of the
SRS curtain airbags, they could
cause serious injuries by coming
off the coat hooks and being thrown
through the cabin or by preventing
correct airbag deployment. Before
hanging clothing on the coat hooks,
make sure there are no pointed
objects in the pockets. Hang clothing directly on the coat hooks without using hangers.
6-13
CAUTION
Do not hang items on the shopping
bag hook that weigh 11 lbs (5 kg) or
more.
& Legacy
6
The coat hook is attached to each rear
passengers hand grip.
CAUTION
Never hang anything on the coat
hook that might obstruct the drivers
view or that could cause injury in
sudden stops or in a collision. And
do not hang items on the coat hook
that weigh 11 lbs (5 kg) or more.
A shopping bag hook is attached to each

inner side wall of the trunk near the trunk
lid opening.
CONTINUED
Black plate (364,1)
6-14
Interior equipment/Convenient grip (Outback)
& Outback
Convenient grip (Outback)

CAUTION
A shopping bag hook is attached to each

side of the cargo area.
To use the hook, push the upper portion
and the shopping bag hook will appear.
Store the hook after using it.
. Do not hang items on the convenient grip that weigh 6 lbs (3

kg) or more. Depending on the
conditions of use (for example, in
low temperatures, etc.), the rear
gate may lower even with lighter
loads. However, this is not a
malfunction. Be careful not to
hit your head or other body parts.
. When using the convenient grip,
do not try to close the rear gate.
Doing so may cause the item on
the grip to be jammed in the rear
gate and damaged. Remove the
item from the grip before closing
the rear gate.
A convenient grip is attached to the rear

gate trim. When the rear gate is open, you
can hang a candle lantern, wet suit, etc.
on the grip.
Black plate (365,1)
Interior equipment/Floor mat
Floor mat
. Do not use more than one floor

mat.
6-15
Cargo area cover

(Outback if equipped)
The cargo area cover is provided for
covering the cargo area and to protect its
contents from direct sunlight. This cover is
detachable to make room for additional
cargo.
& Using the cover

To extend the cargo area cover:
CAUTION
If the floor mat slips forward and
interferes with the movement of the
pedals during driving, it could cause
an accident. Observe the following
precautions to prevent the floor mat
from slipping forward.
. Be sure to use a genuine
SUBARU floor mat designed with
grommets in the correct locations.
. Make sure that the drivers floor
mat is placed back in its proper
location and is correctly secured
on its retaining pins.
Retaining pins are located on the drivers

side floor.
The floor mat should be properly secured
using the built-in grommets, by placing the
grommets over the pins and pushing them
downward.
1)
Stopper
1. Hold the handle located at the center

of the cargo area cover and lift the handle
upward slightly to unlock the stoppers that
are located at the right and left end of the
cover.
CONTINUED
Black plate (366,1)
6-16
Interior equipment/Cargo area cover (Outback if equipped)
CAUTION
. Be careful not to scratch the rear
gate stays while extending and
rewinding the cover. Scratches
on the stays could cause leakage
of gas from the stays, which may
result in their inability to hold the
rear gate open.
. When reclining the rear seatback,
move the front cover backward
so that the cover is not damaged.
2. Pull the handle toward you to extend
the cargo area cover. Then insert its hooks
into the catches as shown.
To rewind the cargo area cover:
1. Hold the handle located at the center
of the cargo area cover, pull it toward you
and lift up slightly to unlock the cargo area
cover from the catches.
1)
Stopper
2. Slowly rewind the cargo area cover

completely. Then lift the handle upward
slightly to lock the stoppers.
WARNING
& To install the front cover

CAUTION
When reclining the rear seatback,
move the front cover backward so
that the cover is not damaged.
Do not place anything on the extended cover. Putting excessive

weight on the extended cover can
break it and an object on the cover
could tumble forward in the event of
a sudden stop or collision. This
could cause serious injury.
Black plate (367,1)
& To remove the cover housing

1. Rewind the cover.
6-17
& Stowage of the cargo area

cover
The cargo area cover can be stowed in
under the cargo floor.
6
1. Align the right side of the front cover
with the triangle mark before fixing the
cover in place.
2. Push the front cover to the right side
and shorten the bar.
3. Align the left side of the front cover
with the triangle mark before fixing the
cover in place.
2. Hold down the button on the righthand rear quarter panel and lift up the
right-hand cover housing.
3. Remove the cover housing.
1. To open the lid, pull the handle up.
& To remove the front cover

1. Push the front cover to the right side
and shorten the bar.
2. Remove the front cover.
CONTINUED
Black plate (368,1)
6-18
2. To keep the lid open, hang the hook

(provided on the back of the lid) on the
rear edge of the roof.
3. Remove the left and right parts of the

cargo floor lid.
4. Turn the cover housing 180 degrees
toward the front.
5. Insert the left end of the cover housing

into the retainer.
& To take out the stowed cover

housing
1. Raise the right side of the cover

housing.
2. Take out the cover housing by pulling it
toward you.
6. Stow the cover housing in the cargo

area end.
Black plate (369,1)
Interior equipment/Convenient tiedown hooks (Outback)
& To install the cover housing
Convenient tie-down hooks

(Outback)
6-19
storing recesses.
CAUTION
The convenient tie-down hooks are
designed only for securing light
cargo. Never try to secure cargo
that exceeds the capacity of the
hooks. The maximum load capacity
is 110 lbs (50 kg) per hook.
1. Insert both ends of the cover housing

into the retainers.
The cargo area is equipped with four tiedown hooks so that cargo can be secured
with a luggage net or ropes.
2. Make sure to fix the front part of the
cargo area cover behind the rear seat.
When using the tie-down hooks, turn them

down out of the storing recesses. When
not in use, put the hooks up into the
Black plate (370,1)
6-20
Interior equipment/Underfloor storage compartment
Under-floor storage compartment
Rear view camera
The subfloor storage compartment is

located under the floor of the trunk or
cargo area and can be used to store small
items. To open the lid, pull the tab or
handle up.
NOTE
When storing a flat tire, put the subfloor storage in the trunk or cargo area.
CAUTION
Legacy
Legacy
. Always keep the lid of the subfloor storage compartment

closed while driving to reduce
the risk of injury in the event of
sudden stop or an accident.
. Do not store spray cans, containers with flammable or corrosive
liquids or any other dangerous
items in the subfloor storage
compartment.
Outback
For Outback, hang the hook provided on

the underside of the lid on the rear edge of
the roof to keep the lid open.
Outback
Black plate (371,1)
Interior equipment/Rear view camera
A rear view camera is attached to the

trunk lid (Legacy) or rear gate (Outback).
When the ignition switch is ON and the
shift lever (MT models) or select lever
(CVT models) is set to R, the rear view
camera automatically displays the rear
view image behind the vehicle on the
audio/navigation monitor.
WARNING
. Since the rear view camera uses
a wide-angle lens, the image on
the monitor is different from the
actual view in terms of distance.
. Since the range of the image on
the monitor is limited, you should
always check the rear view and
the surrounding area with your
eyes and mirrors, and move
backward at a slow speed. Moving backward only by checking
the rear view image from the
camera could cause an accident.
. Do not disassemble or modify the
camera, switch or wiring. If
smoke comes out or you smell
a strange odor, stop using the
rear view camera immediately.
Contact your SUBARU dealer
for an inspection. Continued use
may result in accident, fire or
electric shock.
CAUTION
. If your vehicle is washed with a
high-pressure washer, do not
allow water to contact the camera
directly. Entry of water in the
camera lens may result in condensation, malfunction, fire or
electric shock.
. Since the camera is a precision
device, do not subject it to strong
impacts. Otherwise, malfunction,
fire or electric shock may occur.
. If mud or snow sticks to or is
frozen on the camera, you must
be very careful removing it.
Otherwise, damage done to the
camera may cause a fire or
electric shock. Pour water or
lukewarm water over the camera
to remove mud and ice, and wipe
it with a soft, dry cloth.
. Do not put a flame close to the
camera or wiring. Otherwise, damage or fire may occur.
. When replacing the fuse, be sure
to use a fuse with the specified
rating. Use of a fuse with a
different rating may result in a
6-21
malfunction.
. If the rear view camera is used for
a long time while the engine is
not operated, the battery may
become completely discharged.
NOTE
. Do not wipe the camera with alcohol,
benzine or paint thinner. Otherwise,
discoloration may occur. To remove
contamination, wipe the camera with a
cloth moistened with a diluted neutral
detergent and then wipe it with a soft,
dry cloth.
. When waxing the vehicle, be careful
not to apply the wax to the camera. If it
comes in contact with the camera,
moisten a clean cloth with a diluted
neutral detergent to remove the wax.
. The camera lens has hard coating to
help prevent scratches. However, when
washing the vehicle or cleaning the
camera lens, be careful not to scratch
the camera lens. Do not use a washing
brush directly on the camera lens. The
monitor screen may be adversely affected.
. Strong light shined on the camera
lens may develop white light stripes
around the light source. This is not a
malfunction.
CONTINUED
Black plate (372,1)
6-22
. Under fluorescent lighting, the display may flicker. However, this is not a
malfunction.
. The image of the rear view camera
may be slightly different from the
actual color of the objects.
& How to use the rear view

camera
When performing the following procedure,
the rear view camera automatically displays the rear view image from the
vehicle.
1. Set the ignition switch to ON.
2. Set the shift lever or select lever to R.
When any of the following conditions
occur, the image before setting to R will
be displayed.
. Several seconds have passed after the
following operation (off delay function).
Setting the shift lever to a position
other than R (MT models)
Setting the select lever to a position
other than P or R (CVT models)
. The vehicle speed is more than 5 mph
(8 km/h).
. The select lever is set to P (CVT
models).
NOTE
. For models with the genuine
SUBARU navigation system or audio
system, the image of the rear view
camera has priority over other screen
displays. To operate other screens, set
the shift lever (MT models) or select
lever (CVT models) to a position other
than R.
. The image of the rear view camera is
horizontally reversed as is the case
with the vehicle inside rear view mirror
or the side view mirror.
. It may be difficult to see the image of
the rear view camera in the following
cases. This is not a malfunction of the
camera.
The vehicle is used for towing or
a trailer hitch is installed.
The vehicle is in a dark place (at
night, in a tunnel, etc.).
The vehicle is in an extremely hot
or cold place.
An object (such as raindrops,
snow, dirt, etc.) that disturbs the
view of the rear view camera sticks
to the lens of the camera.
Strong light shined directly on
the camera lens (occasionally, there
are vertical lines on the screen).
& Viewing range on the screen
Range of view
Range of view
Black plate (373,1)
6-23
tion cannot be seen on the screen.
CAUTION
The range that can be viewed with
the rear view camera is limited.
Always be sure to check with your
eyes when moving backward and
proceed slowly.
6
Image from camera
Range of view
The area from the rear end of the bumper

can be viewed. Areas at both ends of the
bumper and areas just under the bumper
cannot be viewed.
Also, the image from the rear view camera
looks shorter than the actual distance.
CAUTION
The range that can be viewed with
the rear view camera is limited.
Always be sure to check with your
eyes when moving backward and
proceed slowly.
Image from camera
The area above the camera cannot be

viewed. If there is an object that has a
wide projection on its upper part such as a
sign pole behind the vehicle, the projec CONTINUED
Black plate (374,1)
6-24
& Help line

The help line (distance marker and vehicle
width line) is a guide to help you realize
the actual distance from the screen.
Help lines
1) Vehicle width line (oblique vertical line)
2) Approx. 10 feet (3 m) from the bumper
(green horizontal line)
3) Approx. 3 feet (1 m) from the bumper
(yellow horizontal line)
4) Approx. 1.5 feet (0.5 m) from the bumper
(red horizontal line)
5) Vehicle centerline
When the shift lever or select lever is set

to position R, the monitor screen displays the help lines together with the rear
view image.
CAUTION
. When moving backward, always
check the back with your eyes
without relying on the help lines.
. The actual position may be different from the indication of the
help lines.
. Differences may occur due to
number of passengers or loaded
cargo.
. When the vehicle is on a slope or
when the vehicle is inclined
against the road, the indication
is different from the actual position.
. Be sure to observe the displayed
warning message Check Surroundings Before Backing Up.
! Difference between screen and actual road

The distance markers show the distance
for a level road when the vehicle is not
loaded. It may be different from the actual
distance depending on the loading conditions or road conditions.
! When there is an upward slope at
the back
NOTE
If you shift to the R range shortly
after turning on the ignition switch, the
warning message Check Surroundings Before Backing Up may not be
displayed. Wait for several seconds or
more after turning on the ignition
switch before shifting to the R range.
Then the warning message will be
displayed.
1)
3 feet (1 m)
The distance on the screen looks farther

than the actual distance.
Black plate (375,1)
! When there is a downward slope

at the back
6-25
! Feature of distance marker
6
1)
3 feet (1 m)
The distance on the screen looks nearer

than the actual distance.
NOTE
1)
2)
3 feet (1 m) line
10 feet (3 m) line
The distance marker shows the distance

on the road. If there is a car or other object
close behind, distance cannot be correctly
displayed.
When cargo is loaded, the rear view

distance on the screen looks farther
than the actual distance as in an
upward slope.
Black plate (2,1)
Left Page
Black plate (15,1)

Fuel ......................................................................
7-3
Fuel requirements ...............................................

Fuel filler lid and cap...........................................
7-3
7-4
State emission testing (U.S. only)......................

Preparing to drive ...............................................
Starting and stopping the engine (models
without push-button ignition switch) ..............
7-7
7-8
7-9
General precautions when starting/stopping

engine .............................................................. 7-9
Starting engine................................................... 7-10
Stopping the engine ........................................... 7-11
Steering lock...................................................... 7-11
Starting and stopping engine (models with

push-button start system) ..............................
7-12
Safety precautions .............................................

Operating range for push-button start
system.............................................................
Starting engine...................................................
Stopping engine .................................................
When access key does not operate properly .......
Steering lock......................................................
7-12
7-12
7-14
7-14
7-14
Remote engine start system (dealer

option)..............................................................
7-15
Models with keyless access with push-button

start system ...................................................
Models without keyless access with push-button
start system ...................................................
Entering the vehicle while it is running via remote
start.................................................................
Entering the vehicle following remote engine start
shutdown.........................................................
7-12
7-16
7-17
Pre-heating or pre-cooling the interior of the

vehicle ............................................................
Service mode (models without keyless access
with push-button start system) .......................
Remote transmitter program (models without
system)..........................................................
System maintenance..........................................
7-20
7-21
Manual transmission .........................................
7-23
Selecting reverse gear .......................................

Shifting speeds..................................................
Driving tips........................................................
7-23
7-24
7-24
Continuously variable transmission.................
7-25
Select lever .......................................................

Shift lock function .............................................
Selection of manual mode..................................
Driving tips........................................................
7-26
7-28
7-29
7-31
Power steering...................................................
Braking ...............................................................
7-31
7-32
Braking tips.......................................................
Brake system ....................................................
Disc brake pad wear warning indicators .............
7-32
7-32
7-33
ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)..........................
7-33
ABS self-check ..................................................

ABS warning light..............................................
7-34
7-34
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)

system .............................................................
7-34
7-20
7-20
7-20
Steps to take if EBD system malfunctions ..........
7-34
Vehicle Dynamics Control system....................
7-35
7-20
Vehicle Dynamics Control system monitor..........

Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF switch ................
7-37
7-37
Black plate (16,1)
X-mode (Outback CVT models).........................
7-38
To activate/deactivate the X-mode.......................

Hill descent control function ...............................
7-39
7-40
Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) (if

equipped) .........................................................
Parking your vehicle ..........................................
7-41
7-42
Electronic parking brake.....................................

Parking tips .......................................................
7-43
7-47
Hill start assist system (MT models) ................
7-48
To activate/deactivate the Hill start assist

system.............................................................
7-50
Cruise control.....................................................
7-50
To set cruise control ..........................................

To temporarily cancel the cruise control .............
To turn off the cruise control ..............................
To change the cruising speed .............................
Cruise control indicator ......................................
Cruise control set indicator ................................
7-50
7-51
7-52
7-52
7-53
7-53
BSD/RCTA (if equipped) ....................................
7-54
System features .................................................
7-54
System operation...............................................
BSD/RCTA approach indicator light/warning
buzzer .............................................................
BSD/RCTA warning indicator..............................
BSD/RCTA OFF switch .......................................
Certification for the BSD/RCTA...........................
Handling of radar sensors..................................
7-57
7-59
7-60
7-61
7-61
Reverse Automatic Braking System (if

equipped) ........................................................
7-63
Reverse Automatic Braking System overview .....

Operating conditions .........................................
Reverse Automatic Braking System
operation.........................................................
Canceling the Reverse Automatic Braking system
operation.........................................................
RAB warning indicator .......................................
Reverse Automatic Braking system ON/OFF
setting.............................................................
Handling of the sonar sensors ...........................
7-56
7-63
7-64
7-66
7-69
7-69
7-69
7-70
Black plate (379,1)
Starting and operating/Fuel
Fuel
CAUTION
Use of a fuel which is low in quality
or use of an inappropriate fuel
additive may cause damage to the
engine and/or fuel system.
& Fuel requirements

The engine is designed to operate using
unleaded gasoline with an octane rating
of 87 AKI (90 RON) or higher.
! Fuel octane rating
Using a gasoline with a lower octane
rating can cause persistent and heavy
knocking, which can damage the engine.
Do not be concerned if your vehicle
sometimes knocks lightly when you drive
up a hill or when you accelerate. See your
dealer or a qualified service technician if
you use a fuel with the specified octane
rating and your vehicle knocks heavily or
persistently.
! RON
This octane rating is the Research Octane
Number.
! AKI
This octane rating is the average of the
Research Octane and Motor Octane
numbers and is commonly referred to as
the Anti Knock Index (AKI).
! Unleaded gasoline
The neck of the fuel filler pipe is designed
to accept only an unleaded gasoline filler
nozzle. Under no circumstances should
leaded gasoline be used because it will
damage the emission control system and
may impair driveability and fuel economy.
! California fuel
If your vehicle was certified to California
Emission Standards as indicated on the
underhood tune-up label, it is designed to
optimize engine and emission control
system performance with gasoline that
meets the clean burning low-sulfur California gasoline specifications. If you live in
any other state than California, your
vehicle will operate on gasoline meeting
Federal specifications. Gasoline sold outside California is permitted to have higher
sulfur levels, which may affect the performance of your vehicles catalytic converter
and may produce a sulfur exhaust odor or
smell. SUBARU recommends that you try
a different brand of unleaded gasoline
having lower sulfur to determine if the
problem is fuel related before returning
7-3
your vehicle to an authorized dealer for

service. The CHECK ENGINE warning
light/malfunction indicator light may also
turn on. If this occurs, return to your
authorized SUBARU dealer for diagnosis.
If it is determined that the condition is
caused by the type of fuel used, repairs
may not be covered by your warranty.
! MMT
Some gasoline contains an octane-enhancing additive called MMT (Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl). If
you use such fuels, your emission control
system performance may deteriorate and
the CHECK ENGINE warning light/malfunction indicator light may turn on. If this
happens, return to your authorized
SUBARU Dealer for service. If it is
determined that the condition is caused
by the type of fuel used, repairs may not
be covered by your warranty.
! Gasoline for cleaner air
CAUTION
Do not let fuel spill on the exterior
surfaces of the vehicle. Fuels containing alcohol may cause paint
damage, which is not covered under
the SUBARU Limited Warranty.
Your use of gasoline with detergent
CONTINUED
Black plate (380,1)
7-4
additives will help prevent deposits from

forming in your engine and fuel system.
This helps keep your engine in tune and
your emission control system working
properly, and is a way of doing your part
for cleaner air. If you continuously use a
high quality fuel with the proper detergent
and other additives, you should never
need to add any fuel system cleaning
agents to your fuel tank.
Many gasolines are now blended with
materials called oxygenates. Use of these
fuels can also help keep the air cleaner.
Oxygenated blend fuels, such as MTBE
(Methyl Tertiary Butyl ether) or ethanol
(ethyl or grain alcohol) may be used in
your vehicle, but should contain no more
than 15% MTBE or 10% ethanol for the
proper operation of your SUBARU.
Do not use any gasoline that contains
more than 10% ethanol, including from
any pump labeled E15, E30, E50 or E85
(which are only some examples of fuel
containing more than 10% ethanol).
In addition, some gasoline suppliers are
now producing reformulated gasolines,
which are designed to reduce vehicle
emissions. SUBARU approves the use of
reformulated gasoline.
you should ask your service station

operators if their gasolines contain detergents and oxygenates and if they have
been reformulated to reduce vehicle emissions.
As additional guidance, only use fuels
suited for your vehicle as explained in the
following.
. Fuel should be unleaded and have an
octane rating no lower than that specified
in this manual.
. Methanol (methyl or wood alcohol) is
sometimes mixed with unleaded gasoline.
Methanol can be used in your vehicle
ONLY if it does not exceed 5% of the fuel
mixture AND if it is accompanied by
sufficient quantities of the proper cosolvents and corrosion inhibitors required to
prevent damage to the fuel system. Do not
use fuel containing methanol EXCEPT
under these conditions.
. If undesirable driveability problems are
experienced and you suspect they may be
fuel related, try a different brand of gasoline before seeking service at your
SUBARU dealer.
. Fuel system damage or driveability
problems which result from the use of
improper fuel are not covered under the
SUBARU Limited Warranty.
& Fuel filler lid and cap

! Refueling
Only one person should be involved in
refueling. Do not allow others to approach
the area of the vehicle near the fuel filler
pipe while refueling is in progress.
Be sure to observe any other precautions
that are posted at the service station.
1. Stop the vehicle and turn off the
engine.
2. To open the fuel filler lid, pull the lid

release lever up. The lever is on the floor
at the left of the drivers seat.
If you are not sure what the fuel contains,
Black plate (381,1)
7-5
left. Do not remove the cap

quickly. Fuel may be under pressure and spray out of the fuel
filler neck, especially in hot
weather. If you hear a hissing
sound while you are removing
the cap, wait for the sound to
stop and then slowly open the
cap to prevent fuel from spraying
out and creating a fire hazard.
1)
2)
1)
2)
Legacy
Outback
3. Open the fuel filler lid.
WARNING
Before opening the fuel filler cap,
first touch the vehicle body or a
metal portion of the fuel pump or
similar object to discharge any
static electricity that may be present
on your body. If your body is carrying an electrostatic charge, there is
a possibility that an electric spark
could ignite the fuel, which could
burn you. To avoid acquiring a new
static electric charge, do not get
back into the vehicle while refueling
is in progress.
Open
Close
4. Remove the fuel filler cap by turning it

slowly counterclockwise.
WARNING
. Gasoline vapor is highly flammable. Before refueling, always
first stop the engine and close all
vehicle doors and windows.
Make sure that there are no
lighted cigarettes, open flames
or electrical sparks in the adjacent area. Refueling must be
performed outside. Quickly wipe
up any spilled fuel.
. When opening the cap, grasp it
firmly and turn it slowly to the
5. Set the fuel filler cap on the cap holder

inside the fuel filler lid.
WARNING
. When refueling, insert the fuel
nozzle securely into the fuel filler
pipe. If the nozzle is lifted or not
fully inserted, its automatic stop CONTINUED
Black plate (382,1)
7-6
ping mechanism may not function, causing fuel to overflow the

tank and creating a fire hazard.
. Stop refueling when the automatic stop mechanism on the
fuel nozzle activates. If you continue to add fuel, temperature
changes or other conditions
may cause fuel to overflow from
the tank and create a fire hazard.
could be damaged.
NOTE
6. Stop filling the tank after the fuel filler

pump automatically stops. Do not add any
more fuel.
7. Put the cap back on, turn it clockwise
until you hear a clicking noise. Be certain
not to catch the tether under the cap while
tightening.
CAUTION
Make sure that the cap is tightened
until it clicks to prevent fuel spillage
in the event of an accident.
8. Close the fuel filler lid completely.
CAUTION
If you spill any fuel on the painted
surface, rinse it off immediately.
Otherwise, the painted surface
. You will see the

sign in the fuel
gauge. This indicates that the fuel filler
door (lid) is located on the right side of
the vehicle.
. If the fuel filler cap is not tightened
until it clicks or if the tether is caught
under the cap, the CHECK ENGINE
warning light/malfunction indicator
light may illuminate. Refer to CHECK
ENGINE warning light/Malfunction indicator light F3-16.
CAUTION
. Never add any cleaning agents to
the fuel tank. The addition of a
cleaning agent may cause damage to the fuel system.
. After refueling, turn the cap to the
right until it clicks to ensure that
it is fully tightened. If the cap is
not securely tightened, fuel may
leak out while the vehicle is being
driven or fuel spillage could
occur in the event of an accident,
creating a fire hazard.
. Do not let fuel spill on the exterior
surfaces of the vehicle. Because
fuel may damage the paint, be
sure to wipe off any spilled fuel
quickly. Paint damage caused by
spilled fuel is not covered under
the SUBARU Limited Warranty.
. Always use a genuine SUBARU
fuel filler cap. If you use the
wrong cap, it may not fit, and
your fuel tank and emission control system may be damaged. It
could also lead to fuel spillage
and a fire.
. Immediately put fuel in the tank
whenever the low fuel warning
light illuminates. Engine misfires
Black plate (383,1)
Starting and operating/State emission testing (U.S. only)
as a result of an empty tank

could cause damage to the engine. Continuing to operate your
vehicle at an extremely low fuel
level may result in a reduction of
engine performance.
State emission testing (U.S.

only)
WARNING
Testing of an All-Wheel Drive model
must NEVER be performed on a
single two-wheel dynamometer. Attempting to do so will result in
uncontrolled vehicle movement and
may cause an accident or injuries to
persons nearby.
CAUTION
. At state inspection time, remember to tell your inspection or
service station in advance not to
place your SUBARU AWD vehicle
on a two-wheel dynamometer.
Otherwise, serious transmission
damage will result.
. Resultant vehicle damage due to
improper testing is not covered
under the SUBARU Limited Warranty and is the responsibility of
the state inspection program or
its contractors or licensees.
California and a number of federal states
7-7
have Inspection/Maintenance programs to

inspect your vehicles emission control
system. If your vehicle does not pass this
test, some states may deny renewal of
your vehicles registration.
Your vehicle is equipped with a computer
that monitors the performance of the
engines emission control system. Certified emission inspectors will inspect the
On-Board Diagnostic (OBDII) system as
part of the state emission inspection
process. The OBDII system is designed
to detect engine and transmission problems that might cause the vehicle emissions to exceed allowable limits. OBDII
inspections apply to all 1996 model year
and newer passenger cars and trucks.
Over 30 states plus the District of Columbia have implemented emission inspection of the OBDII system.
. The inspection of the OBDII system
consists of a visual operational check of
the CHECK ENGINE warning light/malfunction indicator light (MIL) and an
examination of the OBDII system with an
electronic scan tool.
. A vehicle passes the OBDII system
inspection if proper operation of the
CHECK ENGINE warning light is observed, there are no stored diagnostic
trouble codes, and the OBDII readiness
monitors are all complete.
CONTINUED
Black plate (384,1)
7-8
Starting and operating/Preparing to drive
. A vehicle fails the OBDII inspection if

the CHECK ENGINE warning light is not
properly operating (light is illuminated or is
not working due to a burned out bulb) or
there is one or more diagnostic trouble
codes stored in the vehicles computer.
. A state emission inspection may reject
(not pass or fail) a vehicle if the number of
OBDII system readiness monitors NOT
READY is greater than one. If the
vehicles battery has been recently replaced or disconnected, the OBDII system
inspection may indicate that the vehicle is
not ready for the emission test. Under this
condition, the vehicle driver should be
instructed to drive his/her vehicle for a few
days to reset the readiness monitors and
return for an emission re-inspection.
. Owners of rejected or failing vehicles
should contact their SUBARU Dealer for
service.
Some states still use dynamometers in
their emission inspection program. A
dynamometer is a treadmill or roller-like
testing device that allows your vehicles
wheels to turn while the vehicle remains in
one place. Prior to your vehicle being put
on a dynamometer, tell your emission
inspector not to place your SUBARU
AWD vehicle on a two-wheel dynamometer. Otherwise, serious transmission damage will result.
The U.S. Environmental Protection

Agency (EPA) and states using two-wheel
dynamometers in their emission testing
program have EXEMPTED SUBARU
AWD vehicles from the portion of the
testing program that involves a two-wheel
dynamometer. There are some states that
use four-wheel dynamometers in their
testing program. When properly used, this
equipment should not damage a SUBARU
AWD vehicle.
Under no circumstances should the rear
wheels be jacked off the ground, nor
should the driveshaft be disconnected for
state emission testing.
Preparing to drive
You should perform the following checks
and adjustments every day before you
start driving.
1. Check that all windows, mirrors, and
lights are clean and unobstructed.
2. Check the appearance and condition
of the tires. Also check tires for proper
inflation.
3. Look under the vehicle for any sign of
leaks.
4. Check that the hood, trunk (Legacy)
and rear gate (Outback) are fully closed.
5. Check the adjustment of the seat.
6. Check the adjustment of the inside
and outside mirrors.
7. Fasten your seatbelt. Check that your
passengers have fastened their seatbelts.
8. Check the operation of the warning
and indicator lights when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON position.
9. Check the gauges, indicator and warning lights after starting the engine.
10. Check that no small animals enter the
engine compartment.
Black plate (385,1)
Starting and operating/Starting and stopping the engine (models without pushbutton ignition switch)
CAUTION
Trapping small animals in the cooling fan and belts of the engine may
result in a malfunction. Check that
no small animal enters the engine
compartment and under the vehicle
before starting the engine.
NOTE
. Engine oil, engine coolant, brake
fluid, washer fluid and other fluid levels
should be checked daily, weekly or at
fuel stops.
. When towing a trailer, refer to Trailer hitch (Outback if equipped) F819.
Starting and stopping the

engine (models without
push-button ignition switch)
& General precautions when
starting/stopping engine
WARNING
. Never start the engine from outside the vehicle (except when
using the remote engine start
system). It may result in an
accident.
. Do not leave the engine running
in locations with poor ventilation,
such as a garage and indoors.
The exhaust gas may enter the
vehicle or indoors, and it may
result in carbon monoxide poisoning.
. Do not start the engine near dry
foliage, paper, or other flammable substances. The exhaust
pipe and exhaust emissions can
create a fire hazard at high
temperatures.
CAUTION
7-9
driving, the catalyst may overheat and burn.

. When starting the engine, be sure
to sit in the drivers seat (except
when using the remote engine
start system).
NOTE
. Avoid rapid racing and rapid acceleration immediately after the engine
has started.
. For a short time after the engine has
started, the engine speed is kept high.
When the warm-up is completed, the
engine speed lowers automatically.
. On rare occasions, it may be difficult
to start the engine depending on the
fuel and the usage condition (repeated
driving of a distance in which the
engine has not warmed up sufficiently).
In such a case, it is recommended that
you change to a different brand of fuel.
. On rare occasions, transient knocking may be heard from the engine when
the accelerator is operated rapidly
such as a rapid start-up and a rapid
acceleration. This is not a malfunction.
. The engine starts more easily when
the headlights, air conditioner and rear
window defogger are turned off.
. If the engine is stopped during

CONTINUED
Black plate (386,1)
7-10
& Starting engine

CAUTION
Do not operate the starter motor
continuously for more than 10 seconds. If the engine fails to start after
operating the starter for 5 to 10
seconds, wait for 10 seconds or
more before trying again.
NOTE
It may be difficult to start the engine
when the battery has been disconnected and reconnected (for maintenance or other purposes). This difficulty is caused by the electronically
controlled throttles self-diagnosis
function. To overcome it, keep the
ignition switch in the ON position
for approximately 10 seconds before
starting the engine.
! MT models
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Turn off unnecessary lights and accessories.
3. Depress the clutch pedal to the floor
and shift the shift lever into neutral. Hold
the clutch pedal to the floor while starting
the engine. The starter motor will only
operate when the clutch pedal is depressed fully to the floor.

position and check the operation of the
warning and indicator lights. Refer to
Warning and indicator lights F3-13.
5. Turn the ignition switch to the START
position without depressing the accelerator pedal. Release the key immediately
after the engine has started.
(1) Turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK position and wait for at least
10 seconds. After checking that the
parking brake is applied, turn the
ignition switch to the START position
while depressing the accelerator pedal
slightly (approximately a quarter of the
full stroke). Release the accelerator
pedal as soon as the engine starts.
(2) If this fails to start the engine, turn
the ignition switch back to the LOCK
position and wait for at least 10
seconds. Then fully depress the accelerator pedal and turn the ignition
switch to the START position. If the
engine starts, quickly release the
accelerator pedal.
(3) If this does not start the engine,
turn the ignition switch again to the
LOCK position. After waiting for 10
seconds or longer, turn the ignition

switch to the START position without
depressing the accelerator pedal.
(4) If the engine still refuses to start,
for assistance.
6. Confirm that all warning and indicator
lights have turned off after the engine has
started. The fuel injection system automatically lowers the idle speed as the
engine warms up.
! CVT models
CAUTION
If you restart the engine while the
vehicle is moving, shift the select
lever into the N position. Do not
attempt to place the select lever of a
moving vehicle into the P position.
3. Shift the select lever to the P or N
position (preferably P position). The
starter will only operate when the select
lever is at the P or N position.
position and check the operation of the
Black plate (387,1)
warning and indicator lights. Refer to

Warning and indicator lights F3-13.
position without depressing the accelerator pedal. Release the key immediately
after the engine has started.
(1) Turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK position and wait for at least
10 seconds. After checking that the
parking brake is applied, turn the
ignition switch to the START position
while depressing the accelerator pedal
slightly (approximately a quarter of the
full stroke). Release the accelerator
pedal as soon as the engine starts.
the ignition switch back to the LOCK
position and wait for at least 10
seconds. Then fully depress the accelerator pedal and turn the ignition
switch to the START position. If the
engine starts, quickly release the
accelerator pedal.
the ignition switch again to the LOCK
position. After waiting for 10 seconds
or longer, turn the ignition switch to the
START position without depressing
the accelerator pedal.
(4) If the engine still does not start,
7-11

for assistance.
6. Confirm that all warning and indicator
lights have turned off after the engine has
started. The fuel injection system automatically lowers the idle speed as the
engine warms up.
& Steering lock
While the engine is warming up, make

sure that the select lever is at the P or
N position and that the parking brake is
applied.
! When the steering lock cannot be

released
When you cannot restart the engine due to
the steering lock, perform the following
steps.
& Stopping the engine

WARNING
Do not stop the engine when the
vehicle is moving. This will cause
loss of power to the power steering
and the brake booster, making steering and braking more difficult. It
could also result in accidental activation of the LOCK position on the
ignition switch, causing the steering
wheel to lock.
The ignition switch should be turned off
only when the vehicle is stopped and the
engine is idling.
After stopping the engine and the key is

removed from ignition switch, the steering
wheel will be locked due to the steering
lock function.
When the engine is restarted, the steering
lock will be automatically canceled.
! MT models
1. Check that the parking brake is applied.
3. Depress the clutch pedal to the floor
and shift the shift lever into neutral. Hold
the clutch pedal to the floor while starting
the engine.
position while turning the steering wheel
left and right.
and indicator lights.
position without depressing the accelerator pedal.
CONTINUED
Black plate (388,1)
7-12
Starting and operating/Starting and stopping engine (models with pushbutton start system)
7. Release the key immediately after the

engine has started.
If you cannot start the engine, there may
be a malfunction in the steering lock
function. Immediately contact your nearest
SUBARU dealer.
! CVT models
1. Check that the parking brake is applied.
3. Check that the select lever is set in the
P position.
4. Depress the brake pedal and keep it.
position while turning the steering wheel
left and right.
and indicator lights.
position without depressing the accelerator pedal.
8. Release the key immediately after the
engine has started.
If you cannot start the engine, there may
be a malfunction in the steering lock
function. Immediately contact your nearest
SUBARU dealer.
Starting and stopping engine

(models with push-button
start system)
Refer to Safety precautions F2-11.
& Operating range for pushbutton start system

Refer to Operating range for push-button
start system F3-6.
& Starting engine

WARNING
. There are some general precautions when starting the engine.
Carefully read the precautions
described in General precautions when starting/stopping engine F7-9.
. If the indicator on the pushbutton ignition switch flashes in
green after the engine has
started, never drive the vehicle.
The steering is still locked, and it
may result in an accident.
CAUTION
. When the operation indicator on
the push-button ignition switch is
flashing in orange, there may be
a malfunction with the vehicle.
Contact a SUBARU dealer immediately.
. If the indicator on the pushbutton ignition switch is flashing
in green after the engine has
started, it means that the steering
is still locked. While moving the
steering wheel right and left,
depress the brake pedal, and
press the push-button ignition
switch.
. Do not continue pressing the
push-button ignition switch for
more than 10 seconds. Doing so
could cause a malfunction. If the
engine does not start, stop
pressing the push-button ignition
switch. Instead, press the pushbutton ignition switch without
depressing the brake pedal to
switch the power status to
OFF. Wait 10 seconds, and
then press the push-button ignition switch to start the engine.
Black plate (389,1)
NOTE
. When pressing the push-button ignition switch while depressing the brake
pedal:
The engine starter operates for a
maximum of 10 seconds and after
starting the engine, the starter
stops automatically.
The engine can be started regardless of the power status.
. If the engine does not start, check
the security indicator light. Then press
the push-button ignition switch without
depressing the brake pedal to switch
the power to OFF.
If the light had illuminated, try to
start the engine again.
If the light had been off, press the
push-button ignition switch while
depressing the brake pedal more
forcefully.
. The engine start procedures may
not function depending on the radio
wave conditions around the vehicle. In
such a case, refer to Starting engine
F9-19.
. If the vehicle battery is discharged,
the steering cannot be unlocked.
Charge the battery.
7-13
indicator does not turn green.

5. While depressing the brake pedal,
press the push-button ignition switch.
NOTE
1)
2)
Operation indicator
When the push-button ignition switch is

pressed while depressing the brake pedal,
the engine will start. The starting procedure for the engine is as follows.
1. Carry the access key, and sit in the
drivers seat.
position. The engine can also start when
the select lever is in the N position,
however, for safety reasons, start in the
P position.
4. Depress the brake pedal until the
operation indicator on the push-button
ignition switch turns green. When starting
with the select lever in the N position, the
. While pressing the select lever button in, the indicator on the push-button
ignition switch will not turn green even
when the select lever is in the P
position.
. In case the engine does not start by
the normal engine start procedure,
move the select lever to the P position, and switch the power to ACC.
Depress the brake pedal, and press the
push-button ignition switch for at least
15 seconds. The engine may start. Only
use this engine start procedure in case
of emergency.
. When the engine is not started, the
brake pedal may feel stiff. In such a
case, depress the brake pedal more
forcefully than usual. Check that the
operation indicator on the push-button
ignition switch turns green, and press
the push-button ignition switch to start
the engine.
CONTINUED
Black plate (390,1)
7-14
& Stopping engine

1. Stop the vehicle completely.
2. Move the select lever to the P
position.
3. Press the push-button ignition switch.
The engine will stop, and the power will be
switched off.
doors until the vehicle is stopped

in a safe location. It is dangerous
because the steering lock may be
activated. Stop the vehicle in a
safe place, and contact a
CAUTION
WARNING
. Do not touch the push-button
ignition switch during driving.
When the push-button ignition
switch is operated as follows,
the engine will stop.
The switch is pressed and held
for 3 seconds or longer.
The switch is pressed briefly 3
times or more in succession.
When the engine stops, the brake
booster will not function. A greater foot pressure will be required
on the brake pedal.
The power steering system will
not operate either. A greater
force will be required to steer,
and it may result in an accident.
. If the engine stops during driving,
do not operate the push-button
ignition switch or open any of the
& Steering lock

After stopping the engine and the drivers
door is open, the steering wheel will be
locked due to the steering lock function.
When the engine is restarted, the steering
lock will be automatically canceled.
! When the steering lock cannot be
released
. Do not stop the engine while the

select lever is in a position other
than the P position.
. If the engine is stopped while the
select lever is in a position other
than the P position, the power
will be in ACC. If the vehicle is
left in this condition, the battery
may be discharged.
NOTE
Although you can stop the engine by
operating the push-button ignition
switch, do not stop the engine during
driving except in an emergency.

operate properly
1)
2)
Operation indicator
When you cannot restart the engine due to

the steering lock, check the status of
operation indicator and perform the following steps.

Black plate (391,1)
Starting and operating/Remote engine start system (dealer option)
! Operation indicator flashing in

green
1. Check that the select lever is set in the
P position.
2. Depress the brake pedal and keep it.
3. Press the push-button ignition switch
while turning the steering wheel left and
right.
! Operation indicator flashing in
orange
There may be a malfunction in the
steering lock function. Immediately contact your nearest SUBARU dealer.
Remote engine start system

(dealer option)
WARNING
. There are some general precautions when starting the engine.
Carefully read the precautions
described in General precautions when starting/stopping engine F7-9.
. Do not remote start a vehicle in
an enclosed environment (e.g.
closed garage). Prolonged operation of a motor vehicle in an
enclosed environment can cause
a harmful build-up of Carbon
Monoxide. Carbon Monoxide is
harmful to your health. Exposure
to high levels of Carbon Monoxide can cause headaches, dizziness or in extreme cases unconsciousness and/or death.
. Before performing any servicing
of the vehicle, temporarily place
the remote engine start system in
service mode to prevent the
system from unexpectedly starting the engine.
7-15
you to start the engine from outside the

vehicle. In addition, the remote engine
start system can activate the heater or air
conditioner, providing you with a comfortable cabin upon entry.
NOTE
The length of time for which it is
acceptable to allow the engine to
remain idling may be bound by local
laws and regulations. Check the local
rules when using the remote engine
start system.
The remote engine start system allows

CONTINUED
Black plate (392,1)
7-16
& Models with keyless access

with push-button start system
NOTE
For more details, refer to the Owners
Manual supplement for the remote
engine start system.
Access key
1) Lock button
An access key can be used as the remote

engine start transmitter. Operate the lock
button to start or stop the engine as
follows.
! Before starting the engine
Before using the remote engine start
system to start the engine, confirm the

. All doors including the rear gate are
closed.
. The engine hood is closed.
. The push-button ignition switch is in the
OFF position.
! When starting the engine
To start the engine with remote engine
start system, briefly press the lock button
twice within 2 seconds, then press and
hold the lock button for 3 seconds.
1. Press the lock button briefly. The
hazard warning flashers then flash once
and the keyless buzzer chirps once.
2. Within 2 seconds, press the lock
button briefly again. The hazard warning
flashers then flash once again, and the
keyless buzzer chirps once again.
3. After step 2, immediately press and
hold the lock button. The hazard warning
flashers then flash three times, and the
horn will honk once.
4. Approximately 3 seconds after step 3,
release the lock button. The engine will
then start successfully.
! Automatic engine shutdown

The remote engine start system will
automatically shut down or will not start
the engine under the following conditions.
. The total run-time has exceeded 20
minutes.
. Any door or the rear gate is opened.
. The select lever is moved to any
position other than P.
. The engine hood is opened.
. The push-button ignition switch is
pressed.
. The brake pedal is depressed.
. The engine speed is 3,000 rpm or
more.
The time until the engine automatically
stops differs according to the setting.
To change the time until the engine
automatically stops, contact your
SUBARU dealer. However, local laws
and regulations may prohibit changing
this time.
! When stopping the engine

Press and hold the lock button to stop the
engine with remote engine start system.
Black plate (393,1)
& Models without keyless access with push-button start

system
operating range of the system and the

start request is received, the following will
occur.
. The fob flashes and beeps once.
. The horn sounds once.
. The side marker lights, tail lights, and
parking lights flash once.
If the fob is not within range (the user is
too far away from the vehicle), the fob will
indicate two long flashes without beeping.
Remote engine starter transceiver (fob)

1) Fob button
! Starting the engine
NOTE
All vehicle doors (including rear gate/
trunk lid) and the engine hood must be
closed prior to activating the remote
engine start system. Any open entry
point will prevent starting or cause the
engine to stop.
The remote engine start system is activated by pressing the fob button on your
remote engine starter transceiver (fob)
twice within 3 seconds. If the fob is within
The system will check certain safety

preconditions before starting, and if all
conditions are met, the engine will start
within 5 seconds. After the engine starts,
the following will occur.
. The fob flashes and beeps twice.
. The horn sounds once.
parking lights flash once.
While the engine is idling via the remote
engine start system, the following will
occur.
parking lights remain illuminated.
. The fob button flashes once every 3
seconds.
. The power windows are disabled.
If the engine turns over but does not start
(or starts and stalls) the remote engine
7-17
start system will power off and then

attempt to start the engine 3 additional
times. The system will not attempt to
restart the engine if it determines a vehicle
malfunction is preventing starting. If the
engine does not start after 3 additional
attempts, the remote engine start request
will be aborted.
! Stopping the engine
Press and hold the fob button for at least 2
seconds to stop the engine. The fob will
flash and beep three times, indicating the
engine has stopped. If the stop request is
not received (for example, if the user is too
far away from the vehicle), the fob will
continue to flash once every 3 seconds.
The system will automatically stop the
engine after 15 minutes.
! Remote start safety features
For safety and security reasons, the
remote engine start system will prevent
starting (or stop the engine if running) and
sound the horn twice if any of the following
conditions is detected. In addition, the fob
will flash and beep 3 times.
. The brake pedal is depressed
. A key is in the ignition switch
. The engine hood is open
. The remote start system Service
mode is engaged
. The engine idle speed exceeds 3,500
CONTINUED
Black plate (394,1)
7-18
RPM
. The security alarm is triggered
. The select lever is not in the P
position
If the system detects any door (including
the rear gate/trunk lid) open during operation, it will prevent starting or stop the
engine, and sound the horn and flash side
marker lights, tail lights, and parking lights
6 times.
! Remote start operation - fob confirmation

Your remote engine starter fob is a
bidirectional transceiver that can confirm
system operation with several different
visual and audible indications. The fobs
LED-backlit button and internal piezo
buzzer will indicate status of the system
using the following flash and beep sequences, provided the fob is within operational range of the system.
In addition to the items above, if the

vehicles engine management system
determines there is a safety risk due to a
vehicle-related problem, the vehicle will
power down and the horn will sound 3
times.
NOTE
. If the alarm system is armed at the
time of remote engine starter activation
(the security indicator light on the
combination meter is flashing), the
alarm system will remain armed
throughout the remote start run cycle.
. If the alarm system is disarmed at
the time of remote engine starter
activation (the security indicator light
on the combination meter is not flashing), the alarm system will remain
disarmed throughout the remote start
run cycle.
Black plate (395,1)
Fob Indication
Precondition
Fob start button is being pressed
User attempts to start engine by pressing fob

button twice within 3 sec
Flash
1 beep
2 flashes
2 beeps
3 flashes
Engine idling by remote engine start operation

User attempts to stop engine by pressing and
holding fob button for at least 2 sec.
1 flash
1 flash every 3 sec
Meaning
Beep
Continuous while button is

held down
7-19
The fob is transmitting an RF signal

Engine start request received
3 beeps
Engine started successfully

Engine idling
Vehicle is in range but engine not started
2 long flashes
Vehicle not in range (engine not started)
1 flash every 3 sec
Engine idling
3 flashes
3 beeps
Engine stopped by system timeout or for safety

reasons (see sections above)
3 flashes
3 beeps
Engine stopped by user request
1 flash every 3 sec
Stop request not received. Engine still idling.
CONTINUED
Black plate (396,1)
7-20
& Entering the vehicle while it

is running via remote start
1. Unlock the vehicle doors using the
keyless access function (if equipped) or
remote keyless entry system, then open
the door(s). If the vehicles doors are
unlocked manually using the key, the
vehicles alarm system will trigger when
a door is opened (if the alarm system is
armed prior to activating the remote
engine start system) and the engine will
turn off. Perform either of the following
procedures to disarm the alarm system.
Refer to Alarm system F2-28.
. Insert the key into the ignition switch
and turn it to the ON position (models
without keyless access with pushbutton start system)
. Push the push-button ignition switch
to the ACC or ON position (models
with keyless access with push-button
start system)
. Press any button on the access key/
remote keyless entry transmitter.
2. Enter the vehicle.
3. The engine will shut down when any
door or rear gate is opened.
4. For models without keyless access
with push-button start system, insert the
key into the ignition switch and turn to the
START position to restart the engine. For
models with keyless access with pushbutton start system, press the pushbutton ignition switch while depressing
the brake pedal to restart the engine.
& Entering the vehicle following remote engine start shutdown

An alarm trigger may occur if the vehicle is
opened by the remote keyless entry
system/keyless access function within a
few seconds immediately following remote
engine start shutdown.
& Pre-heating or pre-cooling

the interior of the vehicle
Before exiting the vehicle, set the temperature controls to the desired setting
and operation. After the system starts the
engine, the heater or air conditioning will
activate and heat or cool the interior to
your setting.
& Service mode (models without keyless access with

In service mode, the remote engine start
function is temporarily disabled to prevent
the system from unexpectedly starting the
engine while being serviced.
To engage or disengage service mode:

1. Enter the vehicle and close all vehicle
doors and the rear gate/trunk lid.
2. Verify that the select lever is in the P
position (CVT models)
3. Depress and hold the brake pedal
position
5. Press and release the remote engine
start transmitter button three times.
The system will honk the vehicles horn
each time the button is pressed.
6. The system will pause for 1 second
then honk the vehicles horn three times to
indicate that the service mode has been
engaged or honk one time to indicate that
the service mode has been disengaged.
NOTE
When taking your vehicle in for service,
it is recommended that you inform the
service personnel that your vehicle is
equipped with a remote engine start
system.
& Remote transmitter program

(models without keyless access with push-button start
system)
New transmitters can be programmed to
the remote engine start system in the
Black plate (397,1)
event that a transmitter is lost, stolen,

damaged or additional transmitters are
desired (the system will accept up to eight
transmitters). New remote engine start
transmitters can be programmed according to the following procedure.
1. Open the drivers door (the drivers
door must remain opened throughout the
entire process).
2. Depress and hold the brake pedal.
3. Turn the ignition switch to ON then
LOCK, back to ON then LOCK, back
to ON then LOCK, then back to ON
again and leave the ignition ON throughout the programming process.
4. The system will flash the side marker
lights, tail lights and parking lights and
honk the horn three times, indicating that
the system has entered the transmitter
learn mode.
5. Press and release the button on
the transmitter that you want to program.
6. The system will flash the side marker
lights, tail lights and parking lights and
honk the horn one time, indicating that the
system has learned the transmitter. Upon
successful programming, the remote start
confirmation transmitter button will flash
one time.
7. Repeat step 5 for any additional
transmitters (the system will accept up to
eight transmitters).
8. The system will exit the transmitter
learn mode if the key is turned to the
LOCK position, the door is closed or
after 2 minutes.
& System maintenance

NOTE
In the event that the vehicles battery is
replaced, discharged or disconnected,
it will be necessary to start the vehicle
a minimum of one time using the key
prior to activating the remote engine
start system. This is required to allow
the vehicle electronic systems to resynchronize.
! Changing the batteries
CAUTION
. Do not let dust, oil or water get on
or in the remote engine start
transmitter when replacing the
battery.
. Be careful not to damage the
printed circuit board in the remote engine start transmitter
when replacing the battery.
7-21
. Be careful not to allow children to

touch the battery and any removed parts; children could
swallow them.
. There is a danger of explosion if
an incorrect replacement battery
is used. Replace only with the
same or equivalent type of battery.
. Batteries should not be exposed
to excessive heat such as sunshine, fire or the like.
Perform the procedure described in Replacing battery of access key F11-50.
The 3-volt lithium battery (model CR2032) supplied in your remote engine start
transmitter should last approximately one
year, depending on usage. When the
battery begins to weaken, you will notice
a decrease in range (distance from the
vehicle that your remote control operates).
Follow the instructions below to change
the remote engine start transmitter battery.
CONTINUED
Black plate (398,1)
7-22
(battery + should be pointed away from

the transmitter circuit board on the battery).
4. Carefully snap the case halves back
together, reinstall the phillips screw and
test the remote engine start system.
NOTE
1. Remove the small phillips screw located on the back side of the transmitter.
2. Carefully pry the remote engine start

transmitter halves apart using a small flathead screwdriver.
3. Remove the circuit board from the

bottom half of the case and remove the
battery and replace with a new one. Be
sure to observe the (+) sign on the old
battery before removing it to ensure that
the new battery is inserted properly
. This device complies with Part 15 of

the FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of
Industry Canada. Operation is subject
to the following two conditions: (1) This
device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the
users authority to operate the equipment and void warranty.
. To comply with the FCC RF exposure compliance requirements, no
change to the antenna or the device is
permitted. Any change to the antenna
or the device could result in the device
exceeding the RF exposure requirements and void users authority to
operate the device.
Black plate (399,1)
Starting and operating/Manual transmission
7-23
Manual transmission
WARNING
. Do not drive the vehicle with the
clutch disengaged (i.e., when the
clutch pedal is depressed) or
with the shift lever in the neutral
position. Engine braking has no
effect in either of these conditions and the risk of an accident
is consequently increased.
. Do not engage the clutch (i.e.,
release the clutch pedal) suddenly when starting the vehicle.
By doing so the vehicle might
unexpectedly accelerate or the
transmission could malfunction.
The manual transmission is a full synchromesh, 6-forward-speed and 1-reversespeed transmission.

The shift pattern is shown on the shift
lever knob.
& Selecting reverse gear

CAUTION
Shift into reverse ONLY when the
vehicle has completely stopped. It
may cause damage to the transmission to try shifting into reverse when
the vehicle is moving.
1)
Slider
You must raise the slider and hold it in that

position before you can move the shift
lever to the R position.
To change gears, fully depress the clutch
pedal, move the shift lever, and gradually
let up on the clutch pedal.
If it is difficult to shift into gear, put the
transmission in neutral, release the clutch
pedal momentarily, and then try again.
CONTINUED
Black plate (400,1)
7-24
Starting and operating/Manual transmission
& Shifting speeds

! Recommended shifting speeds
The best compromise between fuel economy and vehicle performance during
normal driving is ensured by shifting up
at the speeds listed in the following table.
Shift up
mph (km/h)
1st to 2nd
15 (24)
2nd to 3rd
25 (40)
3rd to 4th
40 (64)
4th to 5th
45 (72)
5th to 6th
50 (80)
! Maximum allowable speeds
WARNING
When shifting down a gear, ensure
that the vehicle is not travelling at a
speed exceeding the Maximum Allowable Speed for the gear which is
about to be selected. Failure to
observe this precaution can lead to
engine over-revving and this in turn
can result in engine damage.
In addition, sudden application of
engine brakes when the vehicle is
travelling on a slippery surface can
lead to wheel locking; as a conse-
quence, control of the vehicle may

be lost and the risk of an accident
increased.
The following table shows the maximum
speeds that are possible with each different gear. The tachometers needle will
enter the red area if these speeds are
exceeded.
With the exception of cases where sudden
acceleration is required, the vehicle
should not be driven with the tachometers
needle inside the red area. Failure to
observe this precaution can lead to
excessive engine wear and poor fuel
economy.
Gear
Legacy
mph (km/h)
Outback
1st
30 (49)
30 (48)
2nd
57 (92)
56 (90)
3rd
4th
5th
Legal speed limit

(Posted limit speed)
6th
NOTE
Never exceed posted speed limits.
& Driving tips

NOTE
If the accelerator and brake pedals are
depressed at the same time, driving
torque may be restrained. This is not a
malfunction.
Do not drive with your foot resting on the
clutch pedal and do not use the clutch to
hold your vehicle at a standstill on an
upgrade. Either of those actions may
cause clutch damage.
Do not drive with your hand resting on the
shift lever. This may cause wear on the
transmission components.
When it is necessary to reduce vehicle
speed due to slow traffic, turning corners,
or driving up steep hills, downshift to a
lower gear before the engine starts to
labor.
On steep downgrades, downshift the
transmission to 5th, 4th, 3rd or 2nd gear
as necessary; this helps to maintain a safe
speed and to extend brake pad life.
In this way, the engine provides a braking
effect. Remember, if you ride (over use)
the brakes while descending a hill, they
may overheat and not work properly.
The engine may, on rare occasions, knock
when the vehicle rapidly accelerates or
Black plate (401,1)
Starting and operating/Continuously variable transmission
rapidly pulls away from a standstill. This

phenomenon does not indicate a problem.
Continuously variable transmission

The continuously variable transmission is
electronically controlled and provides an
infinite number of forward speeds and 1
reverse speed. It also has a manual mode.
WARNING
Do not shift from the P or N
position into the D or R position
while depressing the accelerator
pedal. This may cause the vehicle
to lurch forward or backward.
CAUTION
. Observe the following precautions. Failure to observe these
precautions could cause damage
to the transmission.
Shift into the P or R position only after the vehicle has
completely stopped.
Do not shift from the D
position into the R position
or vice versa until the vehicle
has completely stopped.
. Do not race the engine for more
than 5 seconds in any position
7-25
except the N or P position

when the brake is applied or
when chocks are used in the
wheels. This may cause the
transmission fluid to overheat.
. Never move the vehicle rearward
by inertia with the select lever set
in a forward driving position or
move the vehicle forward by
inertia with the select lever set
in the R position. Doing so may
result in an unexpected accident
or malfunction.
. When parking the vehicle, first
securely apply the parking brake
and then place the select lever in
the P position. Do not park for
a long time with the select lever
in any other position as doing so
could result in a dead battery.
NOTE
. When the engine coolant temperature is still low, the transmission will
upshift to higher engine speeds than
when the coolant temperature is sufficiently high in order to shorten the
warm-up time and improve driveability.
The gearshift timing will automatically
shift to the normal timing after the
engine has warmed up.
CONTINUED
Black plate (402,1)
7-26
. Immediately after transmission fluid

is replaced, you may feel that the
transmission operation is somewhat
unusual. This results from invalidation
of data which the on-board computer
has collected and stored in memory to
allow the transmission to shift at the
most appropriate times for the current
condition of your vehicle. Optimized
shifting will be restored as the vehicle
continues to be driven for a while.
. When driving under continuous heavy load conditions such as towing a
camper or climbing a long, steep hill,
the engine speed, vehicle speed and air
conditioning system cooling performance may automatically be reduced.
This is not a malfunction. This phenomenon results from the engine control function maintaining the cooling
performance of the vehicle. The engine
and vehicle speed will return to a
normal speed when the engine is able
to maintain the optimum cooling performance after the heavy load decreases. Driving under a heavy load
must be performed with extreme care.
Do not try to pass a vehicle in front
when driving on an uphill slope while
towing.
. The continuously variable transmission is a chain type system that
provides superior transmission effi-
ciency for maximum fuel economy. At

times, depending on varying driving
conditions, a chain operating noise
may be heard that is characteristic of
this type of system.
& Select lever
: With the brake pedal depressed, shift

while pressing the select lever button
in
: Shift while pressing the select lever
button in
: Shift without pressing the select lever
button
1)
Select lever button
The select lever has four positions, P,

R, N, D and also has a manual gate
for using the manual mode.
NOTE
For some models, to protect the engine
while the select lever is in the P or
N position, the engine is controlled
so that the engine speed may not
become too high even if the accelerator
pedal is depressed hard.
Black plate (403,1)
! P (Park)
This position is for parking the vehicle and
starting the engine. In this position, the
transmission is mechanically locked to
prevent the vehicle from rolling freely.
When you park the vehicle, first apply the
parking brake, then shift into the P
position. Do not hold the vehicle with only
the mechanical friction of the transmission.
To shift the select lever from the P to any
other position, you should depress the
brake pedal fully then move the select
lever. This prevents the vehicle from
lurching when it is started.
! R (Reverse)
This position is for backing the vehicle. To
shift from the N to R position, stop the
vehicle completely then move the lever to
the R position while pressing the select
lever button in.
When the ignition switch has been turned
to the LOCK/OFF position, movement
of the select lever from the N to R
position is possible for a limited time
period by depressing the brake pedal,
and then it becomes impossible. For
details, refer to Shift lock function F7-28.
! N (Neutral)
This position is for restarting a stalled
engine. In this position, the transmission is
neutral, meaning that the wheels and
transmission are not locked. Therefore,
the vehicle will roll freely, even on the
slightest incline unless the parking brake
or foot brake is applied.
Avoid coasting with the transmission in
neutral. Engine braking has no effect in
this condition.
WARNING
Do not drive the vehicle with the
select lever in the N (neutral)
position. Engine braking has no
effect in this condition and the risk
of an accident is consequently increased.
NOTE
If the select lever is in the N position
when you stop the engine for parking,
you may not subsequently be able to
move it to the R and P positions. If
this happens, turn the ignition switch to
the ON position. You will then be able
to move the select lever to the P
position.
7-27
! D (Drive)
This position is for normal driving. The
transmission shifts automatically and continuously into a suitable gear according to
the vehicle speed and the acceleration
you require. Also, while driving up and
down a hill, the transmission assists and
controls the driving performance and
engine braking while corresponding to
the road grade.
When more acceleration is required in D
position, depress the accelerator pedal
fully to the floor and hold that position. The
transmission will automatically downshift.
In this case, the transmission will operate
like a conventional automatic transmission. When you release the pedal, the
transmission will return to the original gear
position.
To use the manual mode, move the lever
from this position into the manual gate.
! While climbing a grade
When driving up a hill, undesired upshift is
prevented from taking place when the
accelerator is released. This minimizes
the chance of subsequent downshifting to
a lower gear when accelerating again.
This prevents repeated upshifting and
downshifting resulting in a smoother operation of the vehicle.
CONTINUED
Black plate (404,1)
7-28
NOTE
The transmission may downshift, depending on the way the accelerator
pedal is depressed to accelerate the
vehicle again.
& Shift lock function

The shift lock function helps prevent the
improper operation of the select lever.
. The select lever cannot be operated
unless the ignition switch is turned to the
ON position and the brake pedal is
depressed.
. The select lever cannot be moved from
the P position to any other position
before the brake pedal is depressed.
Depress the brake pedal first, and then
operate the select lever.
. Only the P position allows you to turn
the key from the ACC position to the
LOCK position and remove the key from
the ignition key cylinder (models without
system).
. Only the P position allows you to turn
the push-button ignition switch to the
OFF position (models with keyless
access with push-button start system).
. If the ignition switch is turned to the
LOCK/OFF position while the select
lever is in the N position, the select lever
may not be moved to the P position after

a period of time. Therefore, move the
select lever to the P position with the
brake pedal depressed soon after the
ignition switch is turned to the LOCK/
OFF position.
SUBARU dealer for an inspection as soon

as possible.
! Shift lock release

If the select lever cannot be operated, turn
the ignition switch back to the ON
position then move the select lever to the
P position with the select lever button
pressed and brake pedal depressed.
! Shift lock release using the shift

lock release portion
Perform the following procedure to release
the shift lock.
1. Apply the parking brake and stop the
engine.
If the select lever does not move after

performing the above procedure, perform
the following steps.
. When the select lever cannot be
shifted from P to N:
Refer to Shift lock release using the shift
lock release portion F7-28.
. When the select lever cannot be
shifted from N to R, P:
Within 60 seconds after placing the ignition switch in the ACC position, move the
select lever to the P position with the
select lever button pressed and brake
pedal depressed.

performing the above procedure, refer to
Shift lock release using the shift lock
release portion F7-28.
2. Open the lid of the pocket.
If you must perform the above procedure,

the shift lock system (or the vehicle control
system) may be malfunctioning. Contact a
Black plate (405,1)
7-29
& Selection of manual mode
1)
Hole
3. Turn over the inner trim of the pocket.
5. While depressing the brake pedal,

insert the screwdriver into the hole, press
the shift lock release portion using the
screwdriver, and then move the select
lever.
With the vehicle either moving or stationary, move the select lever from the D
position to the M position to select the
manual mode.

performing the above procedure, the shift
lock system may be malfunctioning. Contact a SUBARU dealer for an inspection
4. Remove the grip portion of the screwdriver.
CONTINUED
Black plate (406,1)
7-30
shift paddle behind the steering wheel.
result in accidental gear shifting.
NOTE
1)
2)
3)
Upshift indicator
Downshift indicator
Gear position indicator
When the manual mode is selected, the

gear position indicator and upshift indicator and/or downshift indicator on the
combination meter illuminate. The gear
position indicator shows the currently
selected gear in the 1st-to-6th gear range.
The upshift and downshift indicators show
when a gearshift is possible. When the
upshift indicator is on, upshifting is
possible. When the downshift indicator
is on, downshifting is possible. When
both indicators are on, upshifting and
downshifting are both possible. When the
vehicle stops (for example, at traffic
signals), the downshift indicator turns off.
Gearshifts can be performed using the
To upshift to the next higher gear position,

pull the shift paddle that has + indicated
on it. To downshift to the next lower gear
position, pull the shift paddle that has
indicated on it.
To deselect the manual mode, return the
select lever to the D position from the M
position.
While driving with the select lever in the
D position, if you change gears by
operating the shift paddle, the gear position indicator light illuminates and shows
the current gear condition.
CAUTION
Please read the following points carefully and bear them in mind when using
the manual mode.
. If you attempt to shift down when
the engine speed is too high, i.e., when
a downshift would push the tachometer
needle beyond the red zone, beeps will
be emitted to warn you that the downshift is not possible.
. If you attempt to shift up when the
vehicle speed is too low, the transmission will not respond.
. You can perform a skip-shift (for
example, from 4th to 2nd) by operating
the shift paddle twice in rapid succession.
. The transmission automatically selects 1st gear when the vehicle stops
moving.
. If the temperature of the transmission fluid becomes too high, the AT
OIL TEMP warning light will illuminate.
Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe
place and let the engine idle until the
warning light turns off.
Do not place or hang anything on

the shift paddles. Doing so may
Black plate (407,1)
Starting and operating/Power steering
& Driving tips

NOTE
If the accelerator and brake pedals are
depressed at the same time, driving
torque may be restrained. This is not a
malfunction.
. On a road surface where there is a risk
of wheelspin (for example, a snow- or
gravel-covered road), you can pull away
from a standstill safely and easily by first
selecting the 2nd gear of the manual
mode.
. Always apply the foot or parking brake
when the vehicle is stopped in the D or
R position.
. Make sure to apply the parking brake
when parking your vehicle. Do not hold
the vehicle with only the transmission.
. Do not keep the vehicle in a stationary
position on an uphill grade by using the
D position. Use the brake instead.
. The engine may, on rare occasions,
knock when the vehicle rapidly accelerates or rapidly pulls away from a standstill.
This phenomenon does not indicate a
malfunction.
. A slight reduction in output torque may
occur in the models with a 3.6 L engine
before the engine warms up.
Power steering
7-31
wheel is operated. Drive carefully to

the nearest SUBARU dealer and
have the vehicle inspected immediately.
NOTE
Power steering warning light
The vehicle is equipped with an electric

power steering system. When the ignition
switch is turned to the ON position, the
power steering warning light on the
combination meter illuminates to inform
the driver that the warning system is
functioning properly. Then, if the engine
started, the warning light turns off to inform
the driver that the steering power assist is
operational.
CAUTION
While the power steering warning
light is illuminated, there may be
more resistance when the steering
If the steering wheel is operated in the

following ways, the power steering
control system may temporarily limit
the power assist in order to prevent the
system components, such as the control computer and drive motor, from
overheating.
. The steering wheel is operated frequently and turned sharply while the
vehicle is maneuvered at extremely low
speeds, such as while frequently turning the steering wheel during parallel
parking.
. The steering wheel remains in the
fully turned position for a long period
of time.
At this time, there will be more resistance when steering. However this is
not a malfunction. Normal steering
force will be restored after the steering
wheel is not operated for a while and
the power steering control system has
an opportunity to cool down. However,
if the power steering is operated in a
non-standard way which causes power
CONTINUED
Black plate (408,1)
7-32
Starting and operating/Braking
assist limitation to occur too frequently, this may result in a malfunction of the power steering control
system.
Braking
& Braking tips
WARNING
Never rest your foot on the brake
pedal while driving. This can cause
dangerous overheating of the
brakes and needless wear on the
brake pads and linings.
! When the brakes get wet
When driving in rain or after washing the
vehicle, the brakes may get wet. As a
result, brake stopping distance will be
longer. To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle
at a safe speed while lightly depressing
the brake pedal to heat up the brakes.
! Use of engine braking
Remember to make use of engine braking
in addition to foot braking. When descending a grade, if only the foot brake is used,
the brakes may start working improperly
because of brake fluid overheating,
caused by overheated brake pads. To
help prevent this, shift into a lower gear to
get stronger engine braking.
! Braking when a tire is punctured
Do not depress the brake pedal suddenly
when a tire is punctured. This could cause
a loss of control of the vehicle. Keep

driving straight ahead while gradually
reducing speed. Then slowly pull off the
road to a safe place.
& Brake system

! Two separate circuits
Your vehicle has a dual circuit brake
system. Each circuit works diagonally
across the vehicle. If one circuit of the
brake system should fail, the other half of
the system still works. If one circuit fails,
the brake pedal will go down much closer
to the floor than usual and you will need to
press it down much harder. And a much
longer distance will be needed to stop the
vehicle.
! Brake booster
The brake booster uses engine manifold
vacuum to assist braking force. Do not
turn off the engine while driving because
that will turn off the brake booster, resulting in poor braking power.
The brakes will continue to work even
when the brake booster completely stops
functioning. If this happens, however, you
will have to depress the pedal much
harder than normal and the braking distance will increase.
Black plate (409,1)
Starting and operating/ABS (Antilock Brake System)
! Brake assist system
WARNING
Do not be overconfident about the
brake assist. It is not a system that
brings more braking ability to the
vehicle beyond its braking capability. Always use the utmost care
when driving regarding vehicle
speed and safe distance.
cate any malfunctions, and the brake

assist system is operating properly.
. You might feel that the brake pedal
is applied by lighter force and generates a greater braking force.
. You might hear the sound of ABS
operating from the engine compartment.
& Disc brake pad wear warning

indicators
CAUTION
NOTE
When you depress the brake pedal
strongly or suddenly, the following
phenomena occur. However, even
though these occur, they do not indi-
ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)

WARNING
Always use the utmost care in
driving overconfidence because
you are driving with an ABS
equipped vehicle could easily lead
to a serious accident.
CAUTION
When you need to brake suddenly,

continue depressing the brake pedal
strongly to bring the effect of the
brake assist.
Brake assist is a driver assistance system.
It assists the brake power when the driver
cannot depress the brake pedal strongly
and the brake power is insufficient.
Brake assist generates the brake power
according to the speed at which the driver
depresses the brake pedal.
7-33
The disc brake pad wear warning indicators on the disc brakes give a warning
noise when the brake pads are worn.
If a squeaking or scraping noise is heard
from the disc brakes while braking, immediately have your vehicle inspected by
the nearest SUBARU dealer.
. The ABS does not always decrease stopping distance. You

should always maintain a safe
following distance from other
vehicles.
. When driving on badly surfaced
roads, gravel roads, icy road, or
over deep newly fallen snow,
stopping distances may be longer for a vehicle with the ABS than
one without. When driving under
these conditions, therefore, reduce your speed and leave ample
distance from other vehicles.
. When you feel the ABS operating,
you should maintain constant
brake pedal pressure. Do not
CONTINUED
Black plate (410,1)
7-34
Starting and operating/Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) system
pump the brake pedal since

doing so may defeat the operation of the ABS.
The ABS prevents the lock-up of wheels
which may occur during sudden braking or
braking on slippery road surfaces. This
helps prevent the loss of steering control
and directional stability caused by wheel
lock-up.
When the ABS is operating, you may hear
a chattering noise or feel a slight vibration
in the brake pedal. This is normal when
the ABS operates.
The ABS will not operate when the vehicle
speed is below approximately 6 mph (10
km/h).
& ABS self-check

You may feel a slight shock in the brake
pedal and hear the operating noise of the
ABS from the engine compartment just
after the vehicle is started. This is caused
by an automatic functional test of the ABS
being carried out and does not indicate
any abnormal condition.
& ABS warning light

Refer to ABS warning light F3-19.
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) system

The EBD system maximizes the effectiveness of the brakes by allowing the rear
brakes to supply a greater proportion of
the braking force. It functions by adjusting
the distribution of braking force to the rear
wheels in accordance with the vehicles
loading condition and speed.
The EBD system is an integral part of the
ABS and uses some of the ABS components to perform its function of optimizing
the distribution of braking force. If any of
the ABS components used by the EBD
function fails, the EBD system also stops
working.
When the EBD system is operating, you
may hear a chattering noise or feel a slight
vibration in the brake pedal. This is normal
& Steps to take if EBD system

malfunctions
If a malfunction occurs in the EBD system,

the system stops working and the brake
system warning light and ABS warning
light illuminate simultaneously.
The EBD system may be malfunctioning if
the brake system warning light and ABS
warning light illuminate simultaneously
during driving.
Even if the EBD system fails, the conventional braking system will still function.
However, the rear wheels will be more
prone to locking when the brakes are
applied harder than usual and the vehicles motion may therefore become somewhat harder to control.
Black plate (411,1)
Starting and operating/Vehicle Dynamics Control system
If the brake system warning light and ABS

warning light illuminate simultaneously,
take the following steps.
1. Stop the vehicle in the nearest safe,
flat location.
2. Apply the parking brake and turn off
the engine.
3. Restart the engine.
4. Release the parking brake.
Even if both warning lights turn off:
The EBD system may be malfunctioning.
Drive carefully to the nearest SUBARU
dealer and have the system inspected.
If both warning lights illuminate again
and remain illuminated after restarting
the engine:
1. Turn off the engine again.
3. Check the brake fluid level. For details
about checking the brake fluid level, refer
to Checking the fluid level F11-20.
. If the brake fluid level is not below the
MIN mark, the EBD system may be
malfunctioning. Drive carefully to the
nearest SUBARU dealer and have the
system inspected.
. If the brake fluid level is below the
MIN mark, DO NOT drive the vehicle.
Instead, have the vehicle towed to the
WARNING
. Driving with the brake system
warning light on is dangerous.
This indicates your brake system
may not be working properly. If
the light remains on, have the
brakes inspected by a SUBARU
dealer immediately.
7-35
Vehicle Dynamics Control

system
WARNING
Always use the utmost care in
driving overconfidence because
you are driving with a Vehicle Dynamics Control system equipped
vehicle could easily lead to a serious accident.
CAUTION
. Even if your vehicle is equipped
with Vehicle Dynamics Control
system, winter tires should be
used when driving on snow-covered or icy roads; in addition,
vehicle speed should be reduced
considerably. Simply having a
Vehicle Dynamics Control system does not guarantee that the
vehicle will be able to avoid
accidents in any situation.
. Activation of the Vehicle Dynamics Control system is an
indication that the road being
travelled on has a slippery surface; since having Vehicle Dy CONTINUED
Black plate (412,1)
7-36
namics Control is no guarantee

that full vehicle control will be
maintained at all times and under
all conditions, its activation
should be seen as a sign that
the speed of the vehicle should
be reduced considerably.
. Whenever suspension components, steering components, or
an axle are removed from a
vehicle equipped with the Vehicle
Dynamics Control system, have
an inspection of that system
performed by an authorized
SUBARU dealer.
. The following precautions should
be observed in order to ensure
that the Vehicle Dynamics Control system is operating properly.
All four wheels should be
fitted with tires of the same
size, type, and brand. Furthermore, the amount of wear
should be the same for all
four tires.
Keep the tire pressure at the
proper level as shown on the
vehicle placard attached to
the drivers side door pillar.
Use only the specified temporary spare tire to replace a
flat tire. With a temporary

spare tire, the effectiveness
of the Vehicle Dynamics Control system is reduced and
this should be taken into account when driving the vehicle in such a condition.
. If non-matching tires are used,
the Vehicle Dynamics Control
system may not operate correctly.
In the event of wheelspin and/or skidding
on a slippery road surface and/or during
cornering and/or an evasive maneuver,
the Vehicle Dynamics Control system
adjusts the engines output and the
wheels respective braking forces to help
maintain traction and directional control.
. Traction Control Function
The traction control function is designed to
prevent spinning of the driving wheels on
slippery road surfaces, thereby helping to
maintain traction and directional control.
Activation of this function is indicated by
flashing of the Vehicle Dynamics Control
operation indicator light.
. Skid Suppression Function
The skid suppression function is designed
to help maintain directional stability by
suppressing the wheels tendency to slide
sideways during steering operations. Activation of this function is indicated by

flashing of the Vehicle Dynamics Control
operation indicator light.
NOTE
. The Vehicle Dynamics Control system may be considered normal when
the following conditions occur.
Slight twitching of the brake
pedal is felt.
The vehicle or steering wheel
shakes to a small degree.
An operating noise from the engine compartment is heard briefly
when starting the engine and when
driving off after starting the engine.
The brake pedal seems to jolt
when driving off after starting the
engine.
. In the following circumstances, the
vehicle may be less stable than it feels
to the driver. The Vehicle Dynamics
Control System may therefore operate.
Such operation does not indicate a
system malfunction.
on gravel-covered or rutted
roads
on unfinished roads
when the vehicle is towing a
trailer
when the vehicle is fitted with
Black plate (413,1)
snow tires or winter tires

. Activation of the Vehicle Dynamics
Control system will cause operation of
the steering wheel to feel slightly
different compared to that for normal
conditions.
. It is always important to reduce
speed when approaching a corner,
even if the vehicle is equipped with
Vehicle Dynamics Control.
. Always turn off the engine before
replacing a tire as failure to do so may
render the Vehicle Dynamics Control
system unable to operate correctly.
& Vehicle Dynamics Control

system monitor
Refer to Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light/Vehicle Dynamics Control operation indicator light F3-24 and Vehicle
Dynamics Control OFF indicator light F325.
& Vehicle Dynamics Control

OFF switch
7-37
operation, the Vehicle Dynamics Control

OFF indicator light on the combination
meter illuminates. The Vehicle Dynamics
Control system will be deactivated. When
the switch is pressed again to reactivate
the Vehicle Dynamics Control system, the
Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indicator
light turns off.
You should not deactivate the Vehicle
Dynamics Control system except under
the above-mentioned situations.
CAUTION
Pressing the Vehicle Dynamics Control

OFF switch deactivates the Vehicle Dynamics Control system.
Creating an adequate driving wheel slip by
deactivating the Vehicle Dynamics Control
system temporarily may help to escape
from the following situations. Use the
Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF switch as
necessary.
. a standing start on a steeply sloping
road with a snowy, gravel-covered, or
otherwise slippery surface
. extrication of the vehicle when its
wheels are stuck in mud or deep snow
When the switch is pressed during engine
The Vehicle Dynamics Control system helps prevent unstable vehicle

motion such as skidding using control of the brakes and engine power.
Do not turn off the Vehicle Dynamics
Control system unless it is absolutely necessary. If you must turn off
the Vehicle Dynamics Control system, drive very carefully based on
the road surface condition.
NOTE
. When the switch has been pressed
to deactivate the Vehicle Dynamics
Control system, the Vehicle Dynamics
Control system automatically reactivates itself the next time the ignition
switch is turned to the LOCK/OFF
CONTINUED
Black plate (414,1)
7-38
Starting and operating/Xmode (Outback CVT models)
position and the engine is restarted.

. If the switch is held down for 30
seconds or longer, the indicator light
turns off, the Vehicle Dynamics Control
system is activated, and the system
ignores any further pressing of the
switch. To make the switch usable
again, turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK/OFF position and restart the
engine.
. When the switch is pressed to
deactivate the Vehicle Dynamics Control system, the vehicles running performance is comparable with that of a
vehicle that does not have a Vehicle
Dynamics Control system. Do not deactivate the Vehicle Dynamics Control
system except when absolutely necessary.
. Even when the Vehicle Dynamics
Control system is deactivated, components of the brake control system may
still activate. When the brake control
system is activated, the Vehicle Dynamics Control operation indicator
light illuminates.
X-mode (Outback CVT models)

WARNING
. Always use the utmost care in
driving overconfidence because you are driving a vehicle
with X-mode could easily lead to
a serious accident.
driving overconfidence because you are driving a vehicle
with hill descent control function
could easily lead to a serious
accident. Be especially careful,
and depress the brake pedal if
necessary when driving on extremely steep downhill, frozen,
muddy or sandy roads. Failure
to control the vehicles speed
may cause a loss of control and
result in a serious accident.
CAUTION
. Even if your vehicle is equipped
with X-mode, winter tires should
be used when driving on snowcovered or icy roads; in addition,
vehicle speed should be reduced
considerably. Simply having Xmode does not guarantee that

the vehicle will be able to avoid
accidents in any situation.
. Activate the X-mode when you
encounter a very slippery surface
at low speed. However, having Xmode is no guarantee that full
vehicle control will be maintained
at all times and under all conditions. When activating X-mode,
the speed of the vehicle should
be reduced considerably.
. Whenever suspension components, steering components, or
an axle are removed from a
vehicle, have the system inspected by an authorized
SUBARU dealer.
. Observe the following precautions in order to ensure that the
X-mode is operating properly:
All four wheels should be
fitted with tires of the same
size, type, and brand. Furthermore, the amount of wear
should be the same for all
four tires.
Keep the tire pressure at the
proper level as shown on the
label attached to the vehicles
Black plate (415,1)
door pillar.
Use only the special temporary spare tire to replace a flat
tire. With a normal temporary
spare tire, the effectiveness of
the X-mode is reduced and
this should be taken into account when driving the vehicle in such a condition.
. If the hill descent control function
has operated continuously for a
long time, the temperature of the
brake disc may increase and the
hill descent control function may
be temporarily disabled. In this
case, the hill descent control
indicator will disappear. When
the hill descent control indicator
disappears, the hill descent control function is disabled.
X-mode has the following functions.

. Hill descent control function:
Using the hill descent control function, you
can keep the vehicle at a consistent speed
driving downhill. If the vehicle speed is
likely to increase, the brake control system
will be activated to adjust the vehicle
speed.
. Driving ability control:
This mode increases the hill-climbing
ability and driving ability as well as
enabling smooth application of torque for
easier control of the steering wheel.
& To activate/deactivate the Xmode
7-39
X-mode indicator
To activate:
Press the X-mode switch. While the Xmode is activated, the X-mode indicator
appears.
To deactivate:
Press the X-mode switch again. The Xmode indicator will disappear when the Xmode is deactivated.
X-mode is the integrated control system of

the engine, AWD and Vehicle Dynamics
Control system, etc. for driving with bad
road conditions. Using X-mode, you can
drive more comfortably even in slippery
road conditions including uphill and downhill.
NOTE
X-mode switch
. Even if you try to activate the Xmode by pressing the X-mode switch
when the vehicle speed is 12 mph (20
km/h) or more, the X-mode will not be
activated. At this time, a buzzer will
sound twice.
. If the vehicle speed reaches 25 mph
CONTINUED
Black plate (416,1)
7-40
(40 km/h) or more while the X-mode is

activated, a buzzer will sound once and
the X-mode will be deactivated.
. While the engine is running, if any of
the following conditions is met, the Xmode will be deactivated. In this case, it
is not possible to activate the X-mode.
The CHECK ENGINE warning
light/malfunction indicator light illuminates.
The AT OIL TEMP warning light
flashes.
The ABS warning light illuminates.
The Vehicle Dynamics Control
warning light illuminates.
. If the engine could overheat because of a temperature increase of the
engine coolant, it may not be possible
to activate the X-mode. Even while the
X-mode is activated, the X-mode will be
deactivated when the engine coolant
temperature increases.
& Hill descent control function

The hill descent control function will be in
standby mode when the X-mode is activated and the vehicle speed is less than
approximately 12 mph (20 km/h).
The function will operate when the vehicle
speed is less than approximately 12 mph
(20 km/h) and the accelerator ratio is less

than approximately 10%.
The function will turn off when the vehicle
speed is more than approximately 12 mph
(20 km/h) and the accelerator pedal is
depressed.
CAUTION
function is operating.
The sensation of depressing the
brake pedal is different, (harder
than usual etc.) when the brake
pedal is depressed during hill descent control function operation.
! Hill descent control indicator
The braking power of the hill descent control function may not be
sufficient when strong braking
power is needed (e.g., when towing
a trailer (Outback)).
NOTE
. Even while the hill descent control
function is operating, you can vary the
vehicle speed by using the brake pedal
or accelerator pedal.
. During braking by the hill descent
control function, the hill descent control indicator will flash.
. The hill descent control function is
operable regardless of the gradient of
the road.
. The hill descent control function
may be considered normal when the
following conditions occur.
An operating sound is heard
briefly from the engine compartment while the hill descent control
This indicator appears while the hill

descent control function is in the standby
mode. It flashes while the function is
operating. It will disappear when the
function is in the disabled mode. When
this function is changed from operational
to non-operational, it will disappear when
the vehicle speed reaches more than
approximately 18 mph (30 km/h).
Black plate (417,1)
Starting and operating/Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
Tire pressure monitoring

system (TPMS) (if equipped)
Low tire pressure warning light
The tire pressure monitoring system provides the driver with a warning message
by sending a signal from a sensor that is
installed in each wheel when tire pressure
is severely low.
The tire pressure monitoring system will
activate only when the vehicle is driven at
speeds above 20 mph (32 km/h). Also,
this system may not react immediately to a
sudden drop in tire pressure (for example,
a blow-out caused by running over a
sharp object).
WARNING
. If the low tire pressure warning
light illuminates while driving,
never brake suddenly. Instead,
perform the following procedure.
Otherwise an accident involving
serious vehicle damage and serious personal injury could occur.
(1) Keep driving straight ahead
while gradually reducing
speed.
(2) Slowly pull off the road to a
safe place.
(3) Check the pressure for all four
tires and adjust the pressure
to the COLD tire pressure
shown on the vehicle placard
on the door pillar on the
drivers side.
Even when the vehicle is driven a
very short distance, the tires get
warm and their pressures increase accordingly. Be sure to
let the tires cool thoroughly before adjusting their pressures to
the standard values shown on
the tire placard. Refer to Tires
and wheels F11-25. The tire
pressure monitoring system
does not function when the ve-
7-41
hicle is stationary. After adjusting

the tire pressures, increase the
vehicle speed to at least 20 mph
(32 km/h) to start the TPMS
rechecking of the tire inflation
pressures. If the tire pressures
are now above the severe low
pressure threshold, the low tire
pressure warning light should
turn off a few minutes later.
driving after adjusting the tire
pressure, a tire may have significant damage and a fast leak that
causes the tire to lose air rapidly.
If you have a flat tire, replace it
with a spare tire as soon as
possible.
. When a spare tire is mounted or a
original pressure sensor/transmitter being transferred, the low
tire pressure warning light will
illuminate steadily after blinking
for approximately one minute.
This indicates the TPMS is unable to monitor all four road
wheels. Contact your SUBARU
dealer as soon as possible for
tire and sensor replacement and/
or system resetting.
. When a tire is repaired with liquid
CONTINUED
Black plate (418,1)
7-42
Starting and operating/Parking your vehicle
sealant, the tire pressure warning

valve and transmitter may not
operate properly. If a liquid sealant is used, contact your nearest
SUBARU dealer or other qualified
service shop as soon as possible. Make sure to replace the tire
pressure warning valve and
tire. You may reuse the wheel if
there is no damage to it and if the
sealant residue is properly
cleaned off. Do not inject any tire
liquid or aerosol tire sealant into
the tires, as this may cause a
malfunction of the tire pressure
sensors. If the light illuminates
steadily after blinking for approximately one minute,
promptly contact a SUBARU
dealer to have the system inspected.
CAUTION
Do not place metal film or any metal
parts under the drivers seat. This
may cause poor reception of the
signals from the tire pressure sensors, and the tire pressure monitoring system will not function properly.
FCC ID: CWTWD1U848
NOTE
This device complies with Part 15 of
the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions: (1) This
device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
FCC CAUTION
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the
users authority to operate the equipment.
Parking your vehicle

WARNING
. Never leave unattended children
or pets in the vehicle. They could
accidentally injure themselves or
others through inadvertent operation of the vehicle. Also, on
hot or sunny days, the temperature in a closed vehicle could
quickly become high enough to
cause severe or possibly fatal
injuries to them.
. Do not park the vehicle over
flammable materials such as dry
grass, waste paper or rags, as
they may burn easily if they come
near hot engine or exhaust system parts.
. Be sure to stop the engine if you
take a nap in the vehicle. If
engine exhaust gas enters the
passenger compartment, occupants in the vehicle could die
from carbon monoxide (CO) contained in the exhaust gas.
Black plate (419,1)
& Electronic parking brake
CVT models
1) Parking brake switch
2) Indicator light
3) Release the electronic parking brake
4) Apply the electronic parking brake
MT
1)
2)
3)
4)
models
Parking brake switch
Indicator light
Release the electronic parking brake
Apply the electronic parking brake
WARNING
. Before exiting the vehicle, make
sure that you turn off the engine.
Otherwise, the parking brake
may be released and an accident
may occur.
. If the brake system warning light
turns on, the electronic parking
brake system may be malfunctioning. Immediately stop your
vehicle in a safe location, use
tire stops under the tires to
7-43
prevent the vehicle from moving

and contact your SUBARU dealer.
. If the electronic parking brake is
operated under the following
conditions, the electronic parking brake indicator light may
flash.
the brake is overheated
the vehicle is on a steep slope
In such cases, the vehicle may
start to move which may lead to
an accident. Always use the tire
stops.
CAUTION
. When the electronic parking
brake cannot be applied due to
a malfunction, contact your
SUBARU dealer immediately for
an inspection. If you have to park
your vehicle in such conditions,
Stop your vehicle in a flat
location.
Shift the shift lever in the 1
or reverse position (MT models).
Shift the select lever in the P
CONTINUED
Black plate (420,1)
7-44
position (CVT models). When

the select lever cannot be
shifted into the P position,
you must release shift lock.
Refer to Shift lock function
F7-28.
Use tire stops under the tires
to prevent the vehicle from
moving.
. Never drive with the parking
brake applied in order to avoid
unnecessary wear on the brake
linings. Before starting to drive,
always make sure that the parking brake has been released and
that the electronic parking brake
indicator light has turned off.
. The braking power of the electronic parking brake may not be
sufficient when strong braking
power is needed (e.g., when
parking on a steep slope while
towing a trailer (Outback)).
Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic
parking brake. You can apply/release the
parking brake by operating the parking
brake switch.
To apply: Depress the brake pedal and
pull up the parking brake switch.
To release: Press the parking brake
switch firmly while the ignition switch is

in the ON position and the brake pedal is
depressed.
Electronic parking brake indicator light
When the parking brake is applied while

the ignition switch is in the ON position,
the following indicator lights illuminate.
. the indicator light on the parking brake
switch
. the electronic parking brake indicator
light on the combination meter (for details,
refer to Electronic parking brake indicator
light F3-21.)
NOTE
. The parking brake will not be released under the following conditions
even if the parking brake switch is
pressed.
The ignition switch is in the

ACC or LOCK/OFF position.
The brake pedal (all models) and/
or clutch pedal (MT models) are not
depressed.
. The electronic parking brake system
uses motors to apply the parking
brake. Therefore, operating sounds
from the motors will be heard when
applying or releasing the parking
brake. Make sure that the motor
sounds are heard when applying or
releasing the parking brake.
system has a malfunction or the electronic parking brake operation is prohibited temporarily, if the parking brake
switch is operated, a chirp sound is
heard and the electronic parking brake
indicator light flashes.
. When you cannot release the parking brake due to, for example, a system
malfunction, contact your SUBARU
dealer and have your SUBARU dealer
release the parking brake.
. If the operation of the electronic
parking brake switch is stopped midway or performed extremely slowly, the
system may detect an error and turn on
the brake system warning light. However, this does not indicate a malfunction if the warning light turns off after
Black plate (421,1)
operating the switch.

has not been used for a long period of
time, the electronic parking brake may
operate automatically after the ignition
switch is turned to the LOCK/OFF
position. This occurs due to checking
the proper operation of the electronic
parking brake and does not indicate a
malfunction.
. If the electronic parking brake
switch is malfunctioning and the electronic parking brake cannot be released, refer to the instructions described in Automatic release function
by accelerator pedal F7-45.
. After activating the electronic parking brake, you may hear a short sound
several minutes after the electronic
parking brake indicator light and the
indicator light on the electronic parking
brake switch illuminate as the system
confirms proper engagement. This
sound is different from the apply and
release sound.
This can occur:
If the brakes are extremely hot.
If the car is parked on a steep
incline.
If the electronic parking brake is
applied after the ignition switch is
turned OFF.
This is a normal operating sound under

any of these conditions.
! Automatic release function by accelerator pedal
The electronic parking brake system has
an automatic release function. The parking brake will be automatically released by
depressing the accelerator pedal. However, the automatic release function does
not operate under the following conditions.
. Any door (other than the trunk lid or
rear gate) is open.
. The drivers seatbelt is not fastened.
. The clutch pedal is released from the
fully depressed position to partially engaged position (MT models).
If the parking brake is automatically
released, the electronic parking brake
indicator light and the indicator light on
the parking brake switch turn off.
NOTE
Even if you have applied the parking
brake, the parking brake will be automatically released when the accelerator pedal is depressed.
7-45
! Hill Holder function

The electronic parking brake system has a
Hill Holder function. If the Hill Holder
function is activated, the parking brake
will be automatically applied when stopping on an uphill slope with the brake
pedal depressed. In this case, the electronic parking brake indicator light and the
indicator light on the parking brake switch
illuminate.
The Hill Holder function also operates
while driving uphill in reverse.
NOTE
. The Hill Holder function may not
activate on a gentle uphill slope. In this
case, manually apply the electronic
parking brake.
. If you do not depress the brake
pedal sufficiently, the Hill Holder function may not operate properly. However, this is not a malfunction. When
stopping on an uphill slope, depress
the brake pedal firmly and release it
after the electronic parking brake indicator light illuminates.
. Depending on the condition of the
road surface and braking force, the
brakes operate temporarily and feel
different than usual.
system has a malfunction while the Hill
CONTINUED
Black plate (422,1)
7-46
Holder function is activated, a chirp

sound is heard, the Hill Holder indicator light turns off and the brake system
warning light turns on.
. When the hill holder activates on a
slope, the electronic parking brake is
engaged. The electronic parking brake
will release when you accelerate from
the stop. If you manually release the
electronic parking brake while the hill
holder is activated, the hill holder
function is canceled and will not reengage until the vehicle has moved
some distance. In that case, you will
need to manually engage the electronic
parking brake if needed.
! Hill Holder switch
WARNING
When stopping on an uphill slope
with the Hill Holder function activated, release the brake pedal after
the electronic parking brake indicator light has illuminated. Otherwise,
the Hill Holder function may not
operate properly and an accident
may occur.
MT models
You can activate/deactivate the Hill Holder

function by pressing the Hill Holder switch.
To activate: Press the Hill Holder switch.
To deactivate: Press the Hill Holder
switch again.
CVT models
Deactivate the Hill Holder function under

the following conditions.
. When towing a trailer (Outback)
. When carrying a heavy load
. When you do not frequently use the
parking brake when stopping on an uphill
slope
NOTE
. If the Hill Holder switch is pressed
for more than 30 seconds, the Hill
Holder indicator light turns off and the
Black plate (423,1)
system ignores any further pressing of

the switch. To activate the switch again,
turn the ignition switch to the LOCK/
OFF position and restart the engine.
. When the Hill Holder function is
deactivated while the Hill Holder function has a malfunction, if you press the
Hill Holder switch, a chirp sounds.
! Hill Holder indicator light
! Emergency brake
CAUTION
Use the emergency brake only in
case of an emergency. If the emergency brake is excessively used,
the brake parts will wear down
faster or the brake may not work
sufficiently due to brake overheating.
NOTE
When the Hill Holder function is activated,

the Hill Holder indicator light illuminates.
Refer to Hill Holder indicator light F3-22.
. While using the emergency brake,

the electronic parking brake indicator
light and the indicator light on the
parking brake switch illuminate and a
chirp sounds.
. While using the emergency brake, a
sound may be heard from the engine
compartment. This is the operating
sound of the brake that is activated by
the Vehicle Dynamics Control system,
If the foot brake has a malfunction, you
can stop the vehicle by pulling the parking
brake switch continuously.
While applying the emergency brake, the
electronic parking brake indicator light and
the indicator light on the parking brake
switch illuminate and a chirp sounds.
7-47

warning
CAUTION
If the brake system warning light
turns on, the electronic parking
brake system may be malfunctioning. Immediately stop your vehicle
in the nearest safe location and
If a malfunction occurs in the electronic
parking brake system, the brake system
warning light turns on. Refer to Electronic
parking brake system warning F3-21.
& Parking tips

When parking your vehicle, always perform the following items.
. Apply the parking brake.
. For MT models, place the shift lever in
the 1 (1st) for upgrade or R (Reverse)
for a downgrade.
. For CVT models, place the select lever
in the P (Park) position.
Never rely on the transmission alone to
hold the vehicle.
CONTINUED
Black plate (424,1)
7-48
Starting and operating/Hill start assist system (MT models)
should be turned into the curb.
Hill start assist system (MT

models)
WARNING
When parking on a hill, always turn the

steering wheel as described here. When
the vehicle is headed up the hill, the front
wheels should be turned away from the
curb.
. The Hill start assist system is a

device only for helping the driver
to START the vehicle on an uphill
grade. To prevent accidents
when the vehicle is parked on a
slope, be sure to firmly set the
parking brake. When setting the
parking brake, make sure that the
vehicle remains stationary when
the clutch pedal and brake pedal
are released.
. Do not turn the ignition switch to
the LOCK/OFF position while
the Hill start assist system is
operating. The Hill start assist
system will be deactivated, causing an accident.
The Hill start assist system is a device to
make the following vehicle operations
easier.
When facing downhill, the front wheels
Black plate (425,1)
Starting and operating/Hill start assist system (MT models)
7-49
assist system when the brake pedal is

released. The driver is therefore able to
start the vehicle the same way as on a
level grade, just using the clutch and
accelerator pedal.
If the braking power of the Hill start assist
system is insufficient after the brake pedal
is released, apply more braking power by
depressing the brake pedal again.
The Hill start assist system may not
operate on slight grades. Also, the Hill
start assist system does not operate in the
following cases.
1)
2)
Starting forward facing uphill

Starting backward facing downhill
In both these cases, when the clutch

pedal is depressed while the brake pedal
is also depressed, braking power is
maintained temporarily by the Hill start
.
.
.
.
or
.
when starting backward facing uphill

when starting forward facing downhill
while the parking brake is applied
while the ignition switch is in the ACC
LOCK/OFF position
while the Hill Holder indicator light is
CONTINUED
Black plate (426,1)
7-50
Starting and operating/Cruise control
Cruise control
OFF
When using the Hill start assist system, a
braking effect may be felt even after the
brake pedal has been released. However,
this braking effect should disappear once
the clutch pedal is released.
CAUTION
The braking power of the Hill start
assist system may not be sufficient
when strong braking power is
needed (e.g., when towing a trailer
(Outback)).
NOTE
A slight jolt may be felt when the
vehicle begins to move forward after
being reversed.
& To activate/deactivate the Hill

start assist system
When activating/deactivation the Hill
Holder function, the Hill start assist system
will also be activated/deactivated. For
details about activating/deactivating the
Hill Holder function, refer to Hill Holder
switch F7-46.
& To set cruise control
NOTE
For models with EyeSight system:
Refer to the Owners Manual supplement for the EyeSight system.
Cruise control enables you to maintain a
constant vehicle speed without holding
your foot on the accelerator pedal and it is
operative when the vehicle speed is 25
mph (40 km/h) or more.
WARNING
Do not use the cruise control under
any of the following conditions.
These may cause loss of vehicle
control.
. driving up or down a steep grade
. driving on slippery or winding
roads
. driving in heavy traffic
. towing a trailer
Cruise control main button
1. Press the cruise control main button.
NOTE
Make sure the cruise control system is
turned off when the cruise control is
not in use to avoid unintentionally
setting of the cruise control.
Cruise control indicator
The cruise control indicator on the combi-
Black plate (427,1)
nation meter will appear.

2. Depress the accelerator pedal until the
vehicle reaches the desired speed.
7-51
maintain the previous cruising speed.
& To temporarily cancel the

cruise control
The cruise control can be temporarily
canceled in the following ways.
3. Press the RES/SET switch to the

SET side and release it. Then release
the accelerator pedal.
Cruise control set indicator

1) When setting the displayed unit as
MPH.
2) When setting the displayed unit as
km/h.
At this time, the cruise control set indicator

appears in the combination meter. The set
speed will be shown on the combination
meter. You can change the displayed unit
by operating the multi information display.
For details, refer to Units F3-44.
The vehicle will maintain the desired
speed.
. Press the CANCEL button.

. Press the X-mode switch to activate
the X-mode (models with X-mode).
. Depress the brake pedal.
. Depress the clutch pedal (MT models).
Vehicle speed can be temporarily increased while driving with the cruise
control activated. Simply depress the
accelerator pedal to accelerate the vehicle. When the accelerator pedal is released, the vehicle will return to and
For CVT models, do not place the

select lever in the N position while
driving. If the select lever is shifted
into the N position, cruise control
can be canceled but the engine
WARNING
CONTINUED
Black plate (428,1)
7-52
brake will no longer work. This

could result in an accident.
The cruise control set indicator in the
combination meter disappears when the
cruise control is canceled.
& To turn off the cruise control

There are two ways to turn off the cruise
control:
. Press the cruise control main button
again.
. Turn the ignition switch to the ACC or
LOCK/OFF position (but only when the
vehicle is completely stopped).
& To change the cruising speed

! To increase the speed (by the RES/
SET switch)
When setting the displayed unit as

MPH:
The set speed can be increased 1 mph
(1.6 km/h) each time by pressing the
RES/SET switch to the RES side.
km/h:
The set speed can be increased 1 km/h
each time by pressing the RES/SET
switch to the RES side.
! To increase the speed (by accelerator pedal)
1. Depress the accelerator pedal to
accelerate the vehicle to the desired
speed.
To resume the cruise control after it has

been temporarily canceled and with vehicle speed of approximately 20 mph (30
km/h) or more, press the RES/SET
switch to the RES side to return to the
original cruising speed automatically.
The cruise control set indicator in the
combination meter will automatically appear at this time.
Press the RES/SET switch to the RES

side and hold it until the vehicle reaches
the desired speed. Then, release the
switch. The vehicle speed at that moment
will be memorized and treated as the new
set speed.
2. Press the RES/SET switch to the

SET side once. Now the desired speed
Black plate (429,1)
is set and the vehicle will keep running at

that speed without depressing the accelerator pedal.
! To decrease the speed (by the
RES/SET switch)

km/h:
The set speed can be decreased 1 km/h
each time by pressing the RES/SET
switch to the SET side.
! To decrease the speed (by brake
pedal)
7-53
& Cruise control indicator

Refer to Cruise control indicator F3-31.
& Cruise control set indicator

Refer to Cruise control set indicator F332.
1. Depress the brake pedal to release

cruise control temporarily.
Press the RES/SET switch to the SET

side and hold it until the vehicle reaches
the desired speed. Then, release the
switch. The vehicle speed at that moment
will be memorized and treated as the new
set speed.
MPH:
The set speed can be decreased 1 mph
(1.6 km/h) each time by pressing the
RES/SET switch to the SET side.
2. When the speed decreases to the

desired speed, press the RES/SET
switch to the SET side once. Now the
desired speed is set and the vehicle will
keep running at that speed without depressing the accelerator pedal.
Black plate (430,1)
7-54
Starting and operating/BSD/RCTA
BSD/RCTA (if equipped)

The BSD/RCTA consists of rear radar with
Blind Spot Detection and Rear Cross
Traffic Alert.
These functions of BSD/RCTA are the
systems that detect objects and vehicles
to the rear and draw attention to the driver
when changing a lane or when driving in
reverse.
WARNING
The driver is responsible for driving
safely. Always be sure to check the
surroundings with your eyes when
changing lanes or reversing the
vehicle.
The system is designed to assist the
driver by monitoring the rear and
side areas of the vehicle during a
lane change or reversing. However,
you cannot rely on this system
alone in assuring the safety during
a lane change or reversing. Overconfidence in this system could
result in an accident and lead to
serious injury or death. Since the
system operation has various limitations, the flashing or illumination of
the BSD/RCTA approach indicator
light may be delayed or it may not
operate at all even when a vehicle is

present in a neighboring lane or
approaching from either side.
The driver is responsible for paying
attention to the rear and side areas
of the vehicle.
! Blind Spot Detection (BSD)
& System features

BSD/RCTA consists of the following functions.
. To detect a vehicle in a blind spot on an
adjacent lane or a vehicle approaching at
high speed while driving the vehicle (Blind
Spot Detection)
. To detect a vehicle approaching from
the right or left while reversing the vehicle
(Rear Cross Traffic Alert)
The system uses radar sensors for the
following features.
NOTE
The BSD/RCTA radar sensor has been
certified by the radio wave related laws
of the U.S. and Canada. When driving
in other countries, certification of the
country where the vehicle is driven
must be obtained. For certification in
the U.S. and Canada, refer to Certification for the BSD/RCTA F7-61.
1)
Operating range
The system notifies the driver of the

presence of vehicles in its blind spot.
. If the system detects a vehicle in its
blind spot, it warns the driver by illuminating the BSD/RCTA approach indicator
light(s) on the outside mirror(s).
. If the driver operates the turn signal
lever in the direction where the BSD/
RCTA approach indicator light is illuminating, the system warns the driver of
dangers by flashing the BSD/RCTA approach indicator light.
Black plate (431,1)
! Lane Change Assist (LCA)
1)
Operating range
The system notifies the driver of vehicles

approaching at a high speed in the
neighboring lanes.
. If the system detects a vehicle approaching at a high speed in the neighboring lanes, it warns the driver of dangers by
illuminating the BSD/RCTA approach indicator light(s) on the outside mirror(s).
. If the driver operates the turn signal
lever in the direction where the BSD/
RCTA approach indicator light is illuminating, the system warns the driver of
dangers by flashing the BSD/RCTA approach indicator light.
! Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)
1)
7-55
! Limitations of the detectability of

RCTA
Since the detectability of RCTA is limited,
the RCTA may not operate properly in
parking areas in which the parking spaces
are drawn diagonally to the driving lanes.
Operating range
The system notifies the driver of another

vehicle approaching from either side when
driving in reverse. This feature helps the
driver check the rear and side areas of the
vehicle when moving backward.
If the system detects a vehicle approaching from either side while moving backward, it warns the driver of dangers in the
following way.
. The BSD/RCTA approach indicator
light(s) on the outside mirror(s) flashes.
. A warning buzzer sounds.
. An icon appears on the rear view
camera screen (if equipped)
Example 1
1) The detection range of the radar sensors
2) Area out of detection range of the radar
sensors
A) Vehicle that may not be detected
B) Parked vehicle
WARNING
An approaching vehicle (A) may not
be detected because the detection
range is limited by the parked
vehicle (B). Always be sure to check
CONTINUED
Black plate (432,1)
7-56
the surroundings with your eyes

when reversing the vehicle.
Example 2
1) The detection range of the radar sensors
C) Vehicle that may be detected
NOTE
The system may detect that a vehicle
(C) is passing in front of your vehicle.
Always be sure to check the surroundings with your eyes when reversing the
vehicle.
& System operation

! Operating conditions
The BSD/RCTA will operate when all of
the following conditions are met.
position.
. The BSD/RCTA warning indicator and
BSD/RCTA OFF indicator are turned off.
. The vehicle is driven at speeds above
6 mph (10 km/h) (except when reversing).
. The shift lever/select lever is in the R
position (RCTA only).
The BSD/RCTA will not operate in the
following situations.
. The BSD/RCTA OFF indicator appears.
. The vehicle speed is below 6 mph (10
km/h) even when the BSD/RCTA OFF
indicator does not appear (except when
reversing).
NOTE
. In the following cases, the BSD/
RCTA will stop operating and the
BSD/RCTA warning indicator will appear.
When a malfunction occurs in the
system, including the BSD/RCTA
approach indicator light
. If the BSD/RCTA warning indicator
appears, exercise proper caution. For

details, refer to BSD/RCTA warning
indicator F7-59.
. In the following cases, the BSD/
RCTA will temporarily stop operating
(or may stop operating) and the BSD/
RCTA warning indicator will appear.
When the radar sensor becomes
significantly misaligned (If the orientation of the radar sensor is
shifted for any reason, readjustment is required. Have the sensor
adjusted at a SUBARU dealer.)
When a large amount of snow or
ice sticks to the rear bumper surface around the radar sensors
When the vehicle is driven on a
snow-covered road or in an environment in which there are no
objects around (such as in a desert)
for a prolonged period of time
When the temperature around
the radar sensors increases excessively due to long driving on uphill
grades in the summer, etc.
When the temperature around
the radar sensors becomes extremely low
When the vehicle battery voltage
lowers
When the vehicle voltage exceeds the battery voltage rating
Black plate (433,1)
The BSD/RCTA will resume operation

once these conditions are corrected,
and the BSD/RCTA warning indicator
will disappear. However, if the BSD/
RCTA warning indicator appears for a
prolonged period of time, have the
system inspected at a SUBARU dealer
. The detectability of the radar sensors is restricted. The BSD/RCTA detection may be impaired and the system may not operate properly under the
When the rear bumper around
the radar sensors is distorted
When ice, snow or mud adheres
to the rear bumper surface around
the radar sensors
When stickers, etc. are affixed on
the areas of the radar sensors on
the rear bumper
During adverse weather conditions such as rain, snow or fog
When driving on wet roads such
as snow-covered roads and
through puddles
. The radar sensors may not detect or
may have difficulty detecting the following vehicles and objects.
Small motorcycles, bicycles, pedestrians, stationary objects on the
road or road side, etc.
Vehicles with body shapes that

the radar may not reflect (vehicles
with lower body height such as a
trailer with no cargo and sports
cars)
Vehicles that are not approaching your vehicle even though they
are in the detection area (either on a
neighboring lane to the rear or
beside your vehicle when reversing) (The system determines the
presence of approaching vehicles
based on data detected by the radar
sensors.)
Vehicles traveling at significantly
different speeds
Vehicles driving in parallel at
almost the same speed as your
vehicle for a prolonged time
Oncoming vehicles
Vehicles in a lane beyond the
neighboring lane
Vehicles travelling at a significantly lower speed that you are
trying to overtake
. On a road with extremely narrow
lanes, the system may detect vehicles
driving in a lane next to the neighboring lane.
7-57
& BSD/RCTA approach indicator light/warning buzzer

While the BSD/RCTA is active, the following item(s) will operate to alert the driver:
light (when there are vehicles in the
neighboring lanes).
light and warning buzzer (when a vehicle
is approaching from the left or right side
while your vehicle is reversing)
! BSD/RCTA approach indicator light
BSD/RCTA approach indicator light
It is mounted on each side of the outside

mirrors.
The indicator light will illuminate when a
vehicle approaching from behind is de CONTINUED
Black plate (434,1)
7-58
tected.
The indicator light will flash to warn the
driver of dangers under the following
conditions.
. While the indicator light is illuminating,
if the turn signal lever is operated toward
the side in which this light turned on
. When reversing the vehicle while the
system detects a vehicle approaching
from either side
! BSD/RCTA approach indicator
light dimming function
When the headlights are turned on, the
brightness of the BSD/RCTA approach
indicator light will be reduced.
NOTE
. You may have difficulty seeing the
BSD/RCTA approach indicator light
When sunlight shines directly on
it
When the headlight beams from a
vehicle traveling behind shines directly on it
. While the illumination brightness
control dial is in the fully upward
position, even if the headlights are
turned on, the brightness of the BSD/
RCTA approach indicator light will not
be reduced. For details about the
illumination brightness control dial,

refer to Illumination brightness control F3-55.
! BSD/RCTA approach warning buzzer (only when reversing)
A warning buzzer sounds along with
flashing of the BSD/RCTA approach indicator light to warn the driver of dangers.
The setting of the warning buzzer volume
can be changed by operating the multi
information display of the combination
meter. For details, refer to BSD/RCTA
F3-45.
! Safety tips regarding the BSD/RCTA
approach indicator light/warning
buzzer
. In the following cases, operation of the
BSD/RCTA approach indicator light and
the warning buzzer may be delayed or the
system may fail to issue these warnings.
When a vehicle moves to the
neighboring lane from a lane next to
the neighboring lane
When driving on a steep incline or
on repeated sharp uphill and downhill
grades
When going beyond a pass
When both your vehicle and a
vehicle driving on a neighboring lane
are driving on the far side of each lane.
When several narrowly-spaced vehicles are approaching in a row

In low radius bends (tight bends or
when making turns at an intersection)
When there is a difference in height
between your lane and the neighboring lane
Immediately after the BSD/RCTA is
activated by pressing the BSD/RCTA
OFF switch
Immediately after the shift lever/
select lever is shifted to the R
position
When extremely heavy cargo is
loaded in the trunk or cargo area
. During reversing, operation of the BSD/
RCTA approach indicator light and the
warning buzzer may be delayed or the
system may fail to issue these warnings
When backing out of an angled
parking space
When a large-sized vehicle is
parked next to your vehicle (That
vehicle prevents the propagation of
radar waves.)
When reversing on sloped roads
When reversing at a high speed
Black plate (435,1)
When the vehicle driving two lanes

away drives on the near side of its lane
from your vehicle
7-59
! System temporary stop indicator

due to reduced radar sensitivity
& BSD/RCTA warning indicator

! System temporary stop indicator

light may illuminate when driving close to
solid objects on the road or road side
(such as guardrails, tunnels and sidewalls).
. When turning at an intersection in
urban areas, or a multilane intersection,
the BSD/RCTA approach indicator light
may flash.
. If a building or a wall exists in the
reversing direction, the BSD/RCTA approach indicator light may flash and the
warning buzzer may sound.
. In the following cases, the system may
detect a vehicle driving two lanes away
from your vehicle.
When your vehicle drives on the
near side of its lane from the corresponding vehicle
System temporary stop indicator due to

reduced radar sensitivity
System temporary stop indicator
This indicator appears when the system is

used at extremely high or low temperatures or when abnormal voltage exists.
Once these conditions are corrected, the
system will recover from the temporary
stop condition and the indicator will
disappear.
This indicator appears when the detectability of the radar sensors is reduced.
Once the condition is corrected, the
system will recover from the temporary
stop condition and the indicator will
disappear.
If the indicator remains displayed for a
prolonged time, have the system inspected at a SUBARU dealer.
If the indicator remains displayed for a

prolonged time, have the system inspected at a SUBARU dealer.
CONTINUED
Black plate (436,1)
7-60
! System malfunction indicator
& BSD/RCTA OFF switch
nation meter, and the BSD/RCTA is

deactivated.
Press the switch again to activate the
BSD/RCTA. The BSD/RCTA OFF indicator disappears.
NOTE
System malfunction indicator

1) At first, this message will appear
2) Then this message will appear
BSD/RCTA OFF switch
This indicator appears when a malfunction

occurs in the system. Contact a SUBARU
dealer and have the system inspected.
BSD/RCTA OFF indicator
If the BSD/RCTA OFF switch is pressed,

the BSD/RCTA OFF indicator appears on
the multi information display of the combi-
. In the following cases, press the

BSD/RCTA OFF switch to deactivate
the system. The system may not operate properly due to blocked radar
waves.
When towing a trailer
When a bicycle carrier or other
item is fitted to the rear of the
vehicle
When using a chassis dynamometer or free roller device, etc.
When running the engine and
making the wheels rotate while
lifting up the vehicle
. If the ignition switch is turned to the
LOCK/OFF position, the last known
status of the system is maintained. For
example, if the ignition switch is turned
to the LOCK/OFF position with the
BSD/RCTA deactivated, the BSD/RCTA
remains deactivated the next time the
position.
. If the vehicle battery is disconnected
due to situations such as battery
Black plate (437,1)
terminal or fuse replacement, after the

battery is reconnected, the BSD/RCTA
will be activated.
cause interference, and (2) this device

must accept any interference, including
operation of the device.
& Certification for the BSD/

RCTA
Le prsent appareil est conforme aux

CNR dIndustrie Canada applicables aux
appareils radio exempts de licence. Lexploitation est autorise aux deux conditions suivantes: (1) lappareil ne doit pas
produire de brouillage, et (2) lutilisateur
de lappareil doit accepter tout brouillage
radiolectrique subi, mme si le brouillage
est susceptible den compromettre le
fonctionnement.
. U.S.-spec. models
FCC ID: OAYSRR2A
CAUTION
FCC WARNING
equipment.
7-61
& Handling of radar sensors
Radar sensors (Legacy)

This device complies with
Canada licence-exempt RSS
(s). Operation is subject to the
two conditions: (1) this device
Industry
standard
following
may not
Radar sensors (Outback)
The radar sensors, one on each side of

the vehicle, are mounted inside the rear
bumper.
CONTINUED
Black plate (438,1)
7-62
CAUTION
To ensure correct operation of the
BSD/RCTA, observe the following
precautions.
. Always keep the bumper surface
near the radar sensors clean.
. Do not affix any stickers or other
items on the bumper surface
near the radar sensors. For details, consult your SUBARU dealer.
. Do not modify the bumper near
the radar sensors.
. Do not paint the bumper near the
radar sensors.
. Do not expose the bumper near
the radar sensors to strong impacts. If a sensor becomes misaligned, a system malfunction
may occur, including the inability
to detect vehicles entering the
detection areas. If any strong
shock is applied to the bumper,
be sure to contact your SUBARU
dealer for inspection.
. Do not disassemble the radar
sensors.
NOTE
If the radar sensors require repair or
replacement, or the bumper area
around the radar sensors requires
repair, paintwork or replacement, contact your SUBARU dealer for assistance.
Black plate (439,1)
Starting and operating/Reverse Automatic Braking System
Reverse Automatic Braking

System (if equipped)
Reverse Automatic Braking is a system
designed to help avoid collisions or reduce
collision damage when reversing the
vehicle. If a wall or an obstacle is detected
in the reversing direction, the system will
notify the driver with a warning sound and
may activate the vehicles brakes automatically.
WARNING
. Reverse Automatic Braking is not
a system intended to replace the
drivers responsibility to check
their surroundings for vehicles
or obstacles to avoid a collision.
. The driver is responsible for
driving safely. Always be sure to
check the surroundings visually
when reversing the vehicle.
. Since the system operation has
various limitations, the warning
sound or automatic braking may
be delayed or may not operate at
all even when an obstacle is
present in the reversing direction.
. The system is not designed to
detect people (including children), animals or other moving

objects.
. Depending on the vehicle condition or the surrounding environment, the sonar sensors ability
to detect objects may become
unstable.
NOTE
The Reverse Automatic Braking System records and stores the following
data when automatic braking operates.
It does not record conversations, personal information or other audio data.
. Distance from the object
. Vehicle speed
. Accelerator pedal operation status
. Brake pedal operation status
. Select lever position
. Outside temperature
. The sensitivity setting of the sonar
sensors
SUBARU and third parties contracted
by SUBARU may acquire and use the
recorded data for the purpose of vehicle re search and d evelopment.
SUBARU and third parties contracted
by SUBARU will not disclose or provide the acquired data to any other
7-63
third party except under the following

conditions.
. The vehicle owner has given his/her
consent.
. The disclosure/provision is based
on a court order or other legally
enforceable request.
. Data that has been modified so that
the user and vehicle cannot be identified is provided to a research institution for statistical processing or similar
purposes.
& Reverse Automatic Braking

System overview
The system detects objects using sonar
sensors installed in the rear bumper.
. If the system determines a possible
collision with an object in the reversing
direction, automatic deceleration will be
activated. Also, beeping sounds will activate.
. If the vehicle is further reversed, automatic hard braking will be applied and a
continuous beeping sound will activate.
CONTINUED
Black plate (440,1)
7-64
! Detecting range
cancel the system, refer to Canceling the Reverse Automatic Braking

system operation F7-69.
& Operating conditions
1)
2)
3)
Detecting range (width): Approximately 6

in (15 cm) outside of the vehicle width
Range that the system cannot detect:
Approximately 20 in (50 cm) behind the
rear of the vehicle
Detecting range (length): Approximately
5 ft (1.5 m) from the rear of the vehicle
WARNING
If your vehicle is trapped on a railroad crossing and you are trying to
escape by reversing through the
crossing gate, the system may recognize the crossing gate as an
obstacle and brake may activate. In
this case, remain calm and either
continue to depress the accelerator
pedal or cancel the system. To
The Reverse Automatic Braking system

will operate when all of the following
conditions are met.
position
. The EyeSight warning indicator is off
. The RAB warning indicator is off
. HALT (Reverse Automatic Braking
system OFF) indicator is off
. The Reverse Automatic Braking system is set to on
. The select lever is in the R position
. The vehicle speed is between 1 to 9
mph (1.5 to 15 km/h)
CAUTION
. In the following cases, the Reverse Automatic braking system
will not operate. Promptly contact a SUBARU dealer to have the
system inspected.
The EyeSight warning indicator is illuminated
The RAB warning indicator is
illuminated
. In the following cases, the Reverse Automatic braking system
cannot be operated.
The
(EyeSight Temporary
Stop indicator: White) is illuminated, and the messages
corresponding to the
EyeSight temporary stop are
displayed on the multi information display. For details,
refer to the Owners Manual
supplement for the EyeSight
system.
The Reverse Automatic Braking system OFF indicator is
illuminated
. In the following cases, the system may not be able to properly
detect an obstacle. Promptly
contact a SUBARU dealer to have
the system inspected.
A sticker, paint, or a chemical
is applied to the rear bumper
near the sonar sensor
The rear bumper is modified
The rear bumper has been
removed and attached
The ground clearance is changed due to the vehicles load-
Black plate (441,1)
.
.
ing condition or modification

Ice, snow or mud is adhered
to the rear bumper near the
sonar sensor
The rear bumper is exposed to
strong impact, or the rear
bumper is deformed
On a steep hill, the systems
automatic braking ability will be
reduced.
The system is designed to avoid
collisions by automatic hard
braking when the vehicles reversing speed is less than approximately 3 mph (5 km/h). However,
the system does not guarantee
that the vehicle will be able to
avoid collisions in any situation.
If the vehicle is reversed at an
extremely slow speed, the drivers operation may be prioritized. In this case, automatic
braking will not operate.
The system may not be able to
detect the following objects
Sharp or thin objects such as
poles, fences and ropes which
may not reflect the sound
wave emitted from the sonar
sensor
Objects that are too close to

the rear bumper when the
select lever is set to the R
position
Objects with a surface which
may not reflect the sound
wave emitted from the sonar
sensor such as a chain link
fence
. Objects the system is not designed to detect
Pedestrians
Moving objects including
moving vehicles
Objects which absorbs sound
waves such as cloth or snow
Objects whose surface has a
diagonal angle
Objects that are low to the
ground such as parking
blocks
Objects that are high above
the ground such as objects
hanging from above
. When reversing the vehicle, the
system may not be able to properly detect objects or may cause
a system malfunction if the following conditions exist
High frequency sound from other
7-65
sources are nearby

Horn sound from another vehicle
Engine sound from other vehicles
Sound of an air brake
Vehicle detection equipment
or a sonar from another vehicle
A sound wave with a frequency similar to the vehicles
system is transmitted near by
A vehicle equipped with the
same system is reversing toward your reversing direction
Weather conditions
Extremely high or extremely
low temperatures in which the
area near the sonar sensor
becomes too hot or too cold
to operate
The rear bumper near the
sonar sensors are exposed
to heavy rain or a significant
amount of water
Fog, snow or sandstorm, etc.
Air is moving rapidly such as
when a strong wind is blowing
Parts attached to the rear bumper
CONTINUED
Black plate (442,1)
7-66
near the sonar sensor

Commercial electronic parts
(fog light, fender pole, radio
antenna) or commercial attachment parts (trailer hitch,
bicycle carrier, bumper guard)
are attached
Parts that emit high frequency
sound, such as a horn or
speaker, are attached
Vehicle conditions
The vehicle is significantly
inclined
The ground clearance is significantly reduced due to the
vehicles loading condition,
etc.
When the sonar sensor is
misaligned due to a collision
or an accident
Surrounding environment
A cloth banner, flag, hanging
branch or railroad crossing
bars are present in the reversing direction
When reversing on a gravel or
grassy area
When reversing in an area
where objects or walls are
adjacent to the vehicle such
as narrow tunnels, narrow

bridges, narrow roads or narrow garages
Wheel track or hole is present
in the ground of the reversing
direction
When reversing over a drainage cover (grating cover)
The path of the reversing
direction is inclined such as
on a steep uphill
A curb is present in the reversing direction
When reversing downhill
NOTE
The Reverse Automatic Braking system will operate at vehicle speed
between 1 to 9 mph (1.5 to 15 km/h).
However, stopping the vehicle by automatic hard braking is designed to
operate when the vehicle speed is less
than 3 mph (5 km/h).

System operation
When Reverse Automatic Braking System
is in operation, an audible warning beeps
will sound in 3 levels to warn the driver of
a potential collision.
Example: The path of the reversing direction is inclined such as on a steep uphill.
Black plate (443,1)

Guideline of detecting range
Alert level
Range of detected object*
Medium proximity alert (approaching the object)
28 to 35 inches (70 to 90 cm)
Alarm pattern
Short beeps
Short proximity alert (approaching closer to the object) 20 to 28 inches (50 to 70 cm)
Rapid short beeps
Closest proximity alert (too

close to the object)
Continuous beep
20 inches (50 cm) or less
*: Range of detection may vary depending on the environmental condition.
7-67
! Obstacle detected and proximity

alert
When an object is detected in the reversing direction, the alarm will sound from
the combination meter to warn the driver.
A warning alarm will sound and, depending on the speed, either torque control to
generate engine braking or automatic
braking will be applied.
! Object close behind warning
Automatic braking warning

1) Warning message
If the vehicle continues to go in reverse,

the system may determine the risk of
collision with the object. In this case, short
warning beeps or continuous warning
beeps will sound and either strong automatic braking or torque control will be
CONTINUED
Black plate (444,1)
7-68
applied to prevent collision.

! When the vehicle is being stopped
by the system
! After the vehicle is stopped by the

system
1)
Depress brake pedal warning
1) Warning message
Make sure to depress the brake pedal

once the vehicle has been stopped by
automatic braking. Until the brake pedal is
depressed, a message will be displayed
on the audio/navigation monitor and the
continuous beep will remain sounding.
Reverse Automatic Braking system OFF

indicator
After the brake pedal is depressed, the

Reverse Automatic Braking system OFF
indicator will illuminate and the system will
temporarily stop operating. The Reverse
Automatic Braking system OFF indicator
will turn off when the select lever is shifted
to a position other than the R position.
The system will operate again the next
time the select lever is shifted to R
position.
NOTE
. In the following cases, after the
vehicle has been stopped by the Reverse Automatic Braking system, brake
control is released and the electronic
parking brake operates. For details
about releasing the parking brake, refer
to Electronic parking brake F7-43.
When 2 minutes pass after the
vehicle is stopped
When any door is opened
When the EyeSight system malfunctions
When the EyeSight system stops
temporarily
When the Reverse Automatic
Braking system stops temporarily
. The message/warning message will
not display for approximately 8 seconds after turning the ignition switch to
the ON position.
Black plate (445,1)
& Canceling the Reverse Automatic Braking system operation

The Reverse Automatic Braking system
can be temporarily canceled by any of the
following operation.
. While automatic braking is in operation,
the brake pedal is depressed
. While automatic braking is in operation,
the accelerator pedal is depressed
. The accelerator pedal is depressed
hard (in this case, limited acceleration will
be canceled and the vehicle will continue
reversing)
. The select lever is shifted to a position
other than the R position
NOTE
The system will be canceled if the
object is no longer detected.
& RAB warning indicator
7-69

system ON/OFF setting
While the select lever is shifted to the R
position, the below functions of the Reverse Automatic Braking system can be
set by operating the audio/navigation
monitor.
If the Reverse Automatic Braking System

malfunctions, the above indicator illuminates on the combination meter. Contact
the nearest SUBARU dealer for details.
1)
2)
3)
4)
ON setting key of Reverse Automatic

Braking
OFF setting key of Reverse Automatic
Braking
ON setting key of the object detection
warning beeping sound
OFF setting key of the object detection
warning beeping sound
When the ON setting key is shown, the

corresponding setting is ON.
Touch and hold the ON setting key to turn
the setting OFF.
CONTINUED
Black plate (446,1)
7-70
When the OFF setting is shown, the

corresponding setting is OFF.
Touch and hold the OFF setting key to turn
the setting ON.
When the Reverse Automatic Braking
system and/or the object detection warning beeping sounds are turned OFF, the
following indicator(s) will illuminate.
1)
2)
RAB OFF indicator: illuminates when the

Reverse Automatic Braking system is
turned OFF.
Sonar audible alarm OFF indicator:
illuminates when the object detection
warning beeping sound is turned OFF.
Each indicator will turn off when the

corresponding function is turned ON.
NOTE
. When the settings cannot be changed, the ON/OFF setting key will be
grayed out.
. The settings cannot be changed for
approximately 14 seconds after turning
the ignition switch to the ON position.
. The ON/OFF setting key may be
greyed out if the Reverse Automatic
Braking system malfunctions, etc. In
this case, turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK/OFF position and then turn it
to the ON position again. If the
setting cannot be changed even after
turning the ignition switch to the ON
position again, consult your SUBARU
dealer.
. The settings will be restored as
follows when the select lever is shifted
to the R position next time.
Reverse Automatic Braking system settings: default (ON setting)
Object detection warning beeping sound: the setting selected by
operating the multi function display
Also, the following settings can be changed by operating the multi information
display.
. Warning volume
. Sonar audible alarm
For details, refer to RAB F3-45.
& Handling of the sonar sensors

The 4 sonar sensors are located in the
rear bumper. To ensure the proper operation of the Reverse Automatic Braking
system, observe the following precautions.
. Do not affix any stickers or other items

on the bumper surface near the sonar
sensors.
. Always keep the rear bumper surface
near the sonar sensors clean.
. Do not modify the rear bumper.
. Do not paint the bumper near the sonar
sensors.
. Do not apply strong impacts to the rear
Black plate (447,1)
7-71
bumper near the sonar sensors. If a

sensor becomes misaligned, a system
malfunction may occur, including inability
to detect objects in the reversing direction.
If any strong impact is applied to the rear
bumper, contact a SUBARU dealer to
have the system inspected.
. Do not disassemble the sonar sensors.
NOTE
If the sonar sensors require repair or
replacement, or if the area of the rear
bumper near the sonar sensors requires repair, paintwork or replacement, contact your SUBARU dealer
for assistance.
Black plate (2,1)
Left Page
Black plate (17,1)
Driving tips
New vehicle break-in driving the first
1,000 miles (1,600 km) .....................................
Fuel economy hints ............................................
Engine exhaust gas (carbon monoxide)............
Catalytic converter ..............................................
Periodic inspections ...........................................
Driving in foreign countries ...............................
Driving tips for AWD vehicles ............................
Off road driving ...................................................
8-2
8-2
8-2
8-3
8-4
8-4
8-5
8-6
Legacy................................................................
Outback ..............................................................
8-6
8-6
Winter driving ......................................................
8-8
Operation during cold weather.............................

Driving on snowy and icy roads .........................
Corrosion protection ..........................................
Snow tires .........................................................
Tire chains .........................................................
Rocking the vehicle............................................
8-8
8-10
8-11
8-11
8-12
8-12
Loading your vehicle.........................................

Vehicle capacity weight......................................
GVWR and GAWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
and Gross Axle Weight Rating) ........................
Roof rack (Outback if equipped) ......................
Roof rails with integrated crossbars (Outback if
equipped) ........................................................
8-13
8-14
8-14
8-15
8-15
Trailer hitch (Outback if equipped) ..............
8-19
Connecting a trailer ...........................................

If not towing a trailer..........................................
8-20
8-21
Trailer towing (Legacy)......................................

Trailer towing (Outback)....................................
8-22
8-22
Warranties and maintenance ..............................

Maximum load limits ..........................................
Trailer Hitches ...................................................
Connecting a trailer ...........................................
Trailer towing tips ..............................................
8-22
8-22
8-26
8-26
8-27
Black plate (450,1)
8-2
Driving tips/New vehicle breakin driving the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km)
New vehicle break-in driving

the first 1,000 miles (1,600
km)
The performance and long life of your
vehicle are dependent on how you handle
and care for your vehicle while it is new.
Follow these instructions during the first
1,000 miles (1,600 km):
. Do not race the engine. And do not
allow engine speed to exceed 4,000 rpm
except in an emergency.
. Do not drive at one constant engine or
vehicle speed for a long time, either fast or
slow.
. Avoid starting suddenly and rapid
acceleration, except in an emergency.
. Avoid hard braking, except in an
emergency.
The same break-in procedures should be
applied to a newly installed or overhauled
engine or when brake pads or brake
linings are replaced with new ones.
Fuel economy hints

The following suggestions will help to save
your fuel.
. Select the proper gear position for the
speed and road conditions.
. Avoid sudden acceleration or deceleration. Always accelerate gently until you
reach the desired speed. Then try to
maintain that speed for as long as
possible.
. Do not pump the accelerator and avoid
racing the engine.
. Avoid unnecessary engine idling.
. Keep the engine properly tuned.
. Keep the tires inflated to the correct
pressure shown on the tire placard, which
is located under the door latch on the
drivers side. Low pressure will increase
tire wear and fuel consumption.
. Use the air conditioner only when
necessary.
. Keep the front and rear wheels in
proper alignment.
. Avoid carrying unnecessary luggage or
cargo.
. The indication of the ECO gauge
shows a reference for saving fuel. For
details, refer to ECO gauge F3-12.
Engine exhaust gas (carbon

monoxide)
WARNING
. Never inhale engine exhaust gas.
Engine exhaust gas contains
carbon monoxide, a colorless
and odorless gas which is dangerous, or even lethal, if inhaled.
. Always properly maintain the engine exhaust system to prevent
engine exhaust gas from entering the vehicle.
. Never run the engine in a closed
space, such as a garage, except
for the brief time needed to drive
the vehicle in or out of it.
. Avoid remaining in a parked
vehicle for a long time while the
engine is running. If that is
unavoidable, then use the ventilation fan to force fresh air into
the vehicle.
. Always keep the front ventilator
inlet grille free from snow, leaves
or other obstructions to ensure
that the ventilation system always works properly.
. If at any time you suspect that
Black plate (451,1)
Driving tips/Catalytic converter
exhaust fumes are entering the

vehicle, have t he probl em
checked and corrected as soon
as possible. If you must drive
under these conditions, drive
only with all windows fully open.
. Keep the trunk lid (Legacy) or
rear gate (Outback) closed while
driving to prevent exhaust gas
from entering the vehicle.
NOTE
Due to the expansion and contraction
of the metals used in the manufacture
of the exhaust system, you may hear a
crackling sound coming from the exhaust system for a short time after the
engine has been shut off. This sound is
normal.
8-3
Catalytic converter
WARNING
. Avoid fire hazards. Do not drive
or park the vehicle anywhere
near flammable materials (e.g.
grass, paper, rags or leaves),
because the catalytic converter
operates at very high temperatures.
. Keep everyone and flammable
materials away from the exhaust
pipe while the engine is running.
The exhaust gas is very hot.
2.5 L models
3.6 L models
The catalytic converter is installed in the

exhaust system. It serves as catalyst to
reduce HC, CO and NOx in exhaust
gases, thus providing cleaner exhaust.
To avoid damage to the catalytic converter:
. Use only unleaded gasoline. Even a
small amount of leaded gasoline will
damage the catalytic converter.
. Never start the engine by pushing or
pulling the vehicle.
. Avoid racing the engine.
. Never turn off the ignition switch while
the vehicle is moving.
. Keep your engine tuned-up. If you feel
the engine running rough (misfiring, backfiring or incomplete combustion), have
CONTINUED
Black plate (452,1)
8-4
Driving tips/Periodic inspections
your vehicle checked and repaired by an

authorized SUBARU dealer.
. Do not apply undercoating or rust
prevention treatment to the heat shield of
catalytic converter and the exhaust system.
. Do not drive with an extremely low fuel
level.
Periodic inspections
Driving in foreign countries
To keep your vehicle in the best condition

at all times, always have the recommended maintenance services listed in
the maintenance schedule in the Warranty and Maintenance Booklet performed at the specified time or mileage
intervals.
When planning to use your vehicle in

another country:
. Confirm the availability of the correct
fuel. Refer to Fuel requirements F7-3.
. Comply with all regulations and requirements of each country.
Black plate (453,1)
Driving tips/Driving tips for AWD vehicles
Driving tips for AWD vehicles

WARNING
. Always maintain a safe driving
speed according to the road and
weather conditions in order to
avoid having an accident on a
sharp turn, during sudden braking or under other similar conditions.
driving overconfidence because you are driving an AllWheel Drive vehicle could easily
. When replacing or installing tire
(s), all four tires must be the
same for the following items.
(a) Size
(b) Circumference
(c) Speed symbol
(d) Load index
(e) Construction
(f) Manufacturer
(g) Brand (tread pattern)
(h) Degrees of wear
For items (a) to (d), you must
8-5
obey the specification that is

printed on the tire placard. The
tire placard is located on the
drivers door pillar.
If all four tires are not the same in
items (a) to (h), it may lead to
serious mechanical damage to
the drive train of your car and
affect the following factors.
Ride
Handling
Braking
Speedometer/Odometer
calibration
Clearance between the body
and the tires
It also may be dangerous and
lead to loss of vehicle control,
and it can lead to an accident.
CAUTION
If you use a temporary spare tire to
replace a flat tire, be sure to use the
original temporary spare tire stored
in the vehicle. Using other sizes may
result in severe mechanical damage
to the drive train of your vehicle.
All-Wheel Drive distributes the engine

power to all four wheels. AWD vehicles
provide better traction when driving on
slippery, wet or snow-covered roads and
when moving out of mud, dirt and sand.
By shifting power between the front and
rear wheels, SUBARU AWD can also
provide added traction during acceleration, and added engine braking force
during deceleration.
Therefore, your SUBARU AWD vehicle
may handle differently than an ordinary
two wheel drive vehicle and it contains
some features unique to AWD. For safety
purposes as well as to avoid damaging
the AWD system, you should keep the
following tips in mind:
. An AWD vehicle is better able to climb
steeper roads under snowy or slippery
CONTINUED
Black plate (454,1)
8-6
Driving tips/Off road driving
conditions than a two wheel drive vehicle.

There is little difference in handling,
however, during extremely sharp turns or
sudden braking. Therefore, when driving
down a slope or turning corners, be sure
to reduce your speed and maintain an
ample distance from other vehicles.
. Always check the cold tire pressure
before starting to drive. The recommended tire pressure is provided on the
tire placard, which is located on the door
pillar on the drivers side.
. There are some precautions that you
must observe when towing your vehicle.
For detailed information, refer to Towing
F9-13.
Off road driving

WARNING
. Always maintain a safe driving
speed according to the road and
weather conditions in order to
avoid having an accident on a
sharp turn, during sudden braking or under other similar conditions.
driving overconfidence because you are driving an AllWheel Drive vehicle could easily
under warranty. If you do take your

SUBARU off road, you should review the
common sense precautions in the next
section (applicable to the Outback) for
general guidance. But please keep in
mind that your vehicles off-road capabilities are more limited than those of the
Outback.
Never attempt to drive through pools and
puddles, or roads flooded with water.
Water entering the engine air intake or
the exhaust pipe or water splashing onto
electrical parts may damage your vehicle
and may cause it to stall.
& Outback
CAUTION
& Legacy
Your AWD vehicle is neither a conventional off-road vehicle nor an all terrain
vehicle. It is a passenger car designed
primarily for on-road use. The AWD
feature gives it some limited off-road
capabilities in situations in which the
driving surface is relatively level, obstruction-free and otherwise similar to on-road
driving conditions. Operating it under other
than those conditions could subject the
vehicle to excessive stress which might
result in damage not eligible for repair
Frequent driving of an AWD model

under hard-driving conditions such
as rough roads or off roads will
necessitate more frequent replacement of the following items than that
specified in the maintenance schedule described in the Warranty and
. Engine oil
. Brake fluid
. Manual transmission oil (MT
models)
Black plate (455,1)
Driving tips/Off road driving
. Continuously variable transmission fluid (CVT models)

. Front differential gear oil (CVT
models)
Remember that damage done to
your SUBARU while operating it
off-road and not using common
sense precautions such as those
listed above is not eligible for warranty coverage.
Because of the AWD feature and higher
ground clearance, you can drive your
SUBARU on ordinary roads or off-road.
But please keep in mind that an AWD
SUBARU is a passenger car and is
neither a conventional off-road vehicle
nor an all-terrain vehicle. If you do take
your SUBARU off-road, certain common
sense precautions such as those in the
following list should be taken.
! Before driving
. Make certain that you and all of your
passengers are wearing seatbelts.
. Carry some emergency equipment,
such as a towing rope or chain, a shovel,
wheel blocks, first aid kit and cell phone or
citizens band radio.
. Secure all cargo carried inside the
vehicle and make certain that it is not
piled higher than the seatbacks. During
sudden stops or jolts, unsecured cargo

could be thrown around in the vehicle and
cause injury. Do not pile heavy loads on
the roof. Those loads raise the vehicles
center of gravity and make it more prone
to tip over.
. Never equip your vehicle with tires
larger than those specified in this manual.
! During driving
General precautions:
. Drive carefully. Do not take unnecessary risks by driving in dangerous areas or
over rough terrain.
. Slow down and employ extra caution at
all times. When driving off-road, you will
not have the benefit of marked traffic
lanes, banked curves, traffic signs and
the like.
. Do not drive across steep slopes.
Instead, drive either straight up or straight
down the slopes. A vehicle can much
more easily tip over sideways than it can
end over end. Avoid driving straight up or
down slopes that are too steep.
. Avoid sharp turning maneuvers, especially at higher speeds.
. Do not grip the inside or spokes of the
steering wheel. A bad bump could jerk the
wheel and injure your hands. Instead,
drive with your fingers and thumbs on
the outside of the rim.
8-7
. Do not drive or park over or near

flammable materials such as dry grass or
fallen leaves, as they may burn easily. The
exhaust system is very hot while the
engine is running and right after the
engine stops. This could create a fire
hazard.
Precautions when driving under especially dangerous situations:
. If driving through water, such as when
crossing shallow streams:
First, check the depth of the water
and the bottom of the stream bed for
firmness.
Next, ensure that the bed of the
stream is flat.
Then, drive slowly and completely
through the stream. The water should
be shallow enough that it does not
reach the vehicles undercarriage.
. Water entering the engine air intake or
the exhaust pipe or water splashing onto
electrical parts may damage your vehicle
and may cause it to stall. Never drive
through rushing water. Regardless of its
depth, it can wash away the ground from
under your tires, resulting in possible loss
of traction and even vehicle rollover.
. If you must rock the vehicle to free it
from sand or mud, depress the accelerator
pedal slightly and move the shift lever/
CONTINUED
Black plate (456,1)
8-8
Driving tips/Winter driving
select lever back and forth between 1/

D and R repeatedly. Do not race the
engine. For the best possible traction,
avoid spinning the wheels when trying to
free the vehicle.
. When the road surface is extremely
slippery, you can obtain better traction by
starting the vehicle with the transmission
in 2nd than 1st (both for MT and CVT). For
CVT models, refer to Selection of manual
mode F7-29.
! After driving
. Always check your brakes for effectiveness immediately after driving in sand,
mud or water. Do this by driving slowly
and stepping on the brake pedal. Repeat
that process several times to dry out the
brake discs and brake pads.
. After driving through tall grass, mud,
rocks, sand, rivers, etc., check that there
is no grass, bush, paper, rags, stones,
sand, etc. adhering to or trapped on the
underbody. Clear off any such matter from
the underbody. If the vehicle is used with
these materials trapped or adhering to the
underbody, a mechanical breakdown or
fire could occur.
. Wash the vehicles underbody after offroad driving. Suspension components are
particularly prone to dirt buildup, so they
need to be washed thoroughly.
Winter driving
& Operation during cold
weather
Carry some emergency equipment, such
as a window scraper, a bag of sand,
flares, a small shovel and jumper cables.
Check the battery and cables. Cold
temperatures reduce battery capacity.
The battery must be in good condition to
provide enough power for cold winter
starts.
It normally takes longer to start the engine
in very cold weather conditions. Use an
engine oil of a proper grade and viscosity
for cold weather. Using heavy summer oil
will make it harder to start the engine.
Keep the door locks from freezing by
squirting them with deicer or glycerin.
Forcing a frozen door open may damage
or separate the rubber weather strips
around the door. If the door is frozen,
use hot water to melt the ice, and afterwards thoroughly wipe the water away.
Use a windshield washer fluid that contains an antifreeze solution. Do not use
engine antifreeze or other substitutes
because they may damage the paint of
the vehicle.
Black plate (457,1)
SUBARU Windshield Washer Fluid contains 58.5% methyl alcohol and 41.5%
surfactant, by volume. Its freezing temperature varies according to how much it
is diluted, as indicated in the following
table.
Washer Fluid Concentration
Freezing Temperature
30%
10.48F (128C)
50%
48F (208C)
100%
498F (458C)
In order to prevent freezing of washer

fluid, check the freezing temperatures in
the table above when adjusting the fluid
concentration to the outside temperature.
If you fill the reservoir tank with a fluid with
a different concentration from the one
used previously, purge the old fluid from
the piping between the reservoir tank and
washer nozzles by operating the washer
for a certain period of time. Otherwise, if
the concentration of the fluid remaining in
the piping is too low for the outside
temperature, it may freeze and block the
nozzles.
CAUTION
. Adjust the washer fluid concentration appropriately for the out-
side temperature. If the concentration is inappropriate, sprayed

washer fluid may freeze on the
windshield and obstruct your
view, and the fluid may freeze in
the reservoir tank.
. State or local regulations on
volatile organic compounds may
restrict the use of methanol, a
common windshield washer antifreeze additive. Washer fluids
containing non-methanol antifreeze agents should be used
only if they provide cold weather
protection without damaging
your vehicles paint, wiper blades
or washer system.
! Before driving your vehicle
Before entering the vehicle, remove any
snow or ice from your shoes because that
could make the pedals slippery and
driving dangerous.
While warming up the vehicle before
driving, check that the accelerator pedal,
brake pedal, and all other controls operate
smoothly.
Clear away ice and snow that has
accumulated under the fenders to avoid
making steering difficult. During severe
8-9
winter driving, stop when and where it is

safe to do so and check under the fenders
periodically.
! Parking in cold weather
WARNING
Snow can trap dangerous exhaust
gases under your vehicle. Keep
snow clear of the exhaust pipe and
from around your vehicle if you park
the vehicle in snow with the engine
running.
CAUTION
. Do not use the parking brake
when parking for long periods in
cold weather since it could freeze
in that position.
. When the vehicle is parked in
snow or when it snows, raise the
wiper blades off the glass to
prevent damage to them.
. Under either of the following
conditions, icing may develop
on the brake system, which could
cause poor braking action.
When the vehicle has been left
parked after use on roads
heavily covered with snow
CONTINUED
Black plate (458,1)
8-10
When the vehicle has been left

parked during a snowstorm
Check for snow or ice buildup on
the suspension, disc brakes and
brake hoses underneath the vehicle. If there is caked snow or
ice, remove it, being careful not
to damage the disc brakes and
brake hoses and ABS harness.
When parking for long periods in cold
weather, you should observe the following
tips.
1. For MT models, place the shift lever in
the 1 or R position. For CVT models,
place the select lever in the P position.
2. Use tire stops under the tires to
prevent the vehicle from moving.
! Refueling in cold weather
To help prevent moisture from forming in
the fuel system and the risk of its freezing,
use of an antifreeze additive in the fuel
tank is recommended during cold weather.
Use only additives that are specifically
designed for this purpose. When an
antifreeze additive is used, its effect lasts
longer if the tank is refilled whenever the
fuel level reaches half empty.
If your SUBARU is not going to be used
for an extended period, it is best to have
the fuel tank filled to capacity.
& Driving on snowy and icy

roads
WARNING
Do not use the cruise control on
slippery roads such as snowy or icy
roads. This may cause loss of
vehicle control.
CAUTION
Avoid prolonged continuous driving
in snowstorms. Snow will enter the
engines intake system and may
hinder the airflow, which could result in engine shutdown or even
breakdown.
To prevent skidding and slipping, avoid
sudden braking, abrupt acceleration, highspeed driving, and sharp turning when
driving on snowy or icy roads.
Always maintain ample distance between
your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you
to avoid the need for sudden braking.
To supplement the foot brake, use the
engine brake effectively to control the
vehicle speed. (Shift into a lower gear
when necessary.)
Avoid shifting down abruptly. Such behavior can cause the wheels to lock, possibly
leading to loss of vehicle control.
An anti-lock brake system (ABS) enhances your vehicles braking performance on snowy and icy roads. For
information about braking on slippery
surfaces, refer to ABS (Anti-lock Brake
System) F7-33 and Vehicle Dynamics
Control system F7-35.
! Wiper operation when snowing
Before driving in cold weather, make sure
the wiper blade rubbers are not frozen to
the windshield or rear window.
If the wiper blade rubbers are frozen to the
windshield or rear window, perform the
. To thaw the windshield wiper blade
rubbers, use the defroster with the airflow
selection in and the temperature set
for maximum warmth until the wiper blade
rubbers are completely thawed. Refer to
Climate control F4-1.
. If your vehicle is equipped with a wiper
deicer, use it. It is helpful to thaw the
windshield wiper blade rubbers. Refer to
Defogger and deicer F3-61.
. To thaw the rear wiper blade rubbers,
use the rear window defogger. Refer to
Defogger and deicer F3-61.
Black plate (459,1)
When driving in snow, if frozen snow starts

to stick on the surface of the windshield
despite wiper operation, use the defroster
with the airflow selection in and the
temperature set for maximum warmth.
After the windshield gets warmed enough
to melt the frozen snow on it, wash it away
using the windshield washer. Refer to
Windshield washer F3-59.
Snow stuck on the wiper arm prevents the
wiper from working effectively. If snow is
stuck on the wiper arm, pull off the road to
a safe place, then remove it. If you stop
the vehicle at road side, use the hazard
warning flasher to alert other drivers.
Refer to Hazard warning flasher F3-8.
We recommend use of non-freezing type
wiper blades (winter blades) during the
seasons you could have snow and freezing temperatures. Blades of this type give
superior wiping performance in snowy
conditions. Be sure to use blades that
are suitable for your vehicle.
CAUTION
During high-speed driving, nonfreezing type wiper blades may not
perform as well as standard wiper
blades. If this happens, reduce the
vehicle speed.
NOTE
When the season requiring non-freezing type wiper blades is over, replace
them with standard wiper blades.
& Corrosion protection

Refer to Corrosion protection F10-4.
& Snow tires

WARNING
. When replacing or installing winter tire(s), all four tires must be
the same for the following items.
(a) Size
(b) Circumference
(c) Speed symbol
(d) Load index
(e) Construction
(f) Manufacturer
8-11

(h) Degrees of wear
Ride
Handling
Braking
calibration
and the tires
. Do not use a combination of
radial, belted bias or bias tires
since it may cause dangerous
handling characteristics and lead
to an accident.
CONTINUED
Black plate (460,1)
8-12
Your vehicle is equipped with all season

tires which are designed to provide an
adequate measure of traction, handling
and braking performance in year-round
driving. In winter, it may be possible to
enhance performance through use of tires
designed specifically for winter driving
conditions.
If you choose to install winter tires on your
vehicle, be sure to use the correct tire size
and type. You must install four winter tires
that are of the same size, construction,
brand and load range and you should
never mix radial, belted bias or bias tires
since this may result in dangerous handling characteristics. When you choose a
tire, make sure that there is enough
clearance between the tire and vehicle
body.
Remember to drive with care at all times
regardless of the type of tires on your
vehicle.
& Tire chains

CAUTION
Tire chains cannot be used on your
vehicle because of the lack of
clearance between the tires and
vehicle body.
NOTE
When tire chains cannot be used, use
of another type of traction device (such
as spring chains) may be acceptable if
use on your vehicle is recommended
by the device manufacturer, taking into
account tire size and road conditions.
Follow the device manufacturers instructions, especially regarding maximum vehicle speed.
To help avoid damage to your vehicle,
drive slowly, readjust or remove the
device if it is contacting your vehicle,
and do not spin your wheels. Damage
caused to your vehicle by use of a
traction device is not covered under
warranty.
cause you are using a traction device

could easily lead to a serious accident.
& Rocking the vehicle

If you must rock the vehicle to free it from
snow, sand, or mud, depress the accelerator pedal slightly and move the shift
lever/select lever back and forth between
1/D and R repeatedly. Do not race the
engine. For the best possible traction,
avoid spinning the wheels when trying to
free the vehicle.
When the road surface is extremely
slippery, you can obtain better traction by
starting the vehicle with the transmission
in 2nd than 1st (for MT and CVT).
For information on holding the transmission in 2nd position, refer to Selection of
manual mode F7-29.
Make certain that any traction device

you use is an SAE class S device, and
use it on the front wheels only. Always
use the utmost care when driving with
a traction device. Overconfidence be-
Black plate (461,1)
Driving tips/Loading your vehicle
Loading your vehicle

WARNING
Never allow passengers to ride on a
folded rear seatback, in the trunk or
in the cargo area. Doing so may
result in serious injury.
WARNING
possible.
. When you carry something inside
the vehicle, secure it whenever
you can to prevent it from being
thrown around inside the vehicle
during sudden stops, sharp turns
or in an accident.
. Do not pile heavy loads on the
roof. These loads raise the vehicles center of gravity and make it
more prone to tip over.
. Secure long items properly to
prevent them from shooting forward and causing serious injury
during a sudden stop.
. Never exceed the maximum load
limit. If you do, some parts on
your vehicle can break, or it can
change the way your vehicle
handles. This could result in loss
of control and cause personal
injury. Also, overloading can
shorten the life of your vehicle.
8-13
. Do not place anything on the rear

shelf behind the rear seatback
(Legacy) or the extended cargo
area cover (Outback if
equipped). Such items could
tumble forward in the event of a
sudden stop or a collision. This
could cause serious injury.
CAUTION
Do not carry spray cans, containers
with flammable or corrosive liquids
or any other dangerous items inside
the vehicle.
NOTE
For better fuel economy, do not carry
unneeded cargo.
. Never stack luggage or other

cargo higher than the top of the
seatback because it could tumble
forward and injure passengers in
the event of a sudden stop or
accident. Keep luggage or cargo
low, as close to the floor as
CONTINUED
Black plate (462,1)
8-14
& Vehicle capacity weight
side door pillar. It includes the total weight

of the driver and all passengers and their
belongings, any optional equipment such
as a trailer hitch, roof rack or bike carrier,
etc., and the tongue load of a trailer.
& GVWR and GAWR (Gross

Vehicle Weight Rating and
Gross Axle Weight Rating)
Certification label
The load capacity of your vehicle is

determined by weight, not by available
cargo space. The maximum load you can
carry in your vehicle is shown on the
vehicle placard attached to the drivers
The certification label attached to the

drivers side door shows GVWR (Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating) and GAWR (Gross
Axle Weight Rating).
The GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) must
never exceed the GVWR. GVW is the
combined total of weight of the vehicle,
fuel, driver, all passengers, luggage, any
optional equipment and trailer tongue
load. Therefore, the GVW changes depending on the situation.

In addition, the total weight applied to
each axle (GAW) must never exceed the
GAWR. The front and rear GAWs can be
adjusted by relocating luggage inside the
vehicle.
Even if the total weight of your luggage is
lower than the vehicle capacity weight,
either front or rear GAW may exceed the
GAWR, depending on the distribution of
the luggage.
When possible, the load should be evenly
distributed throughout the vehicle.
If you carry heavy loads in the vehicle, you
should confirm that GVW and front and
rear GAWs are within the GVWR and
GAWR by putting your vehicle on a
vehicle scale, found at a commercial
weighing station.
Do not use replacement tires with a lower
load range than the originals because they
may lower the GVWR and GAWR limitations. Replacement tires with a higher load
range than the originals do not increase
the GVWR and GAWR limitations.
Black plate (463,1)
& Roof rack (Outback if

equipped)
and create a safety hazard.

Cargo can be carried on the roof after
securing the roof rack to the roof. When
installing the roof rack on the roof, follow
the manufacturers instructions.
The maximum load limit of the cargo, roof
rack and carrying attachments must not
exceed 176 lbs (80 kg). Place the
heaviest load at the bottom, nearest the
roof, and evenly distribute the cargo.
Always properly secure all cargo.
CAUTION
. For cargo carrying purposes, the
roof rail must be used together
with the roof rack. The roof rail
must never be used alone to
carry cargo. Otherwise, damage
to the roof or paint or a dangerous road hazard due to loss of
cargo could result.
. When using the roof rack, make
sure that the total weight of the
roof rack, carrying attachments
and cargo does not exceed the
maximum load limit. Overloading
may cause damage to the vehicle
! Installing carrying attachments on

the roof rack
When installing any carrying attachments
such as a bike carrier, ski carrier, kayak
carrier, cargo basket, etc. on the roof rack,
follow the manufacturers instructions and
make sure that the attachments are
securely fixed to the roof rack. Use only
attachments designed specifically for the
roof rack. A roof rack set is designed to
carry loads (cargo and attachments) of not
more than 165 lbs (75 kg). Before
operating the vehicle, make sure that the
cargo is properly secured on the attachments.
NOTE
Remember that the vehicles center of
gravity is altered with the weight of the
8-15
load on the roof, thus affecting the

driving characteristics.
Drive carefully. Avoid rapid starts, hard
cornering and abrupt stops. Crosswind
effects will be increased.
& Roof rails with integrated

crossbars (Outback if
equipped)
1)
Integrated crossbars
CAUTION
. For cargo carrying purposes, the
bars must be used as crossbars
and be used together with the
genuine SUBARU carrying attachment. The bars must never
CONTINUED
Black plate (464,1)
8-16
be used alone to carry cargo.

Otherwise, damage to the roof or
paint or a dangerous road hazard
due to loss of cargo could result.
. When using the bars as crossbars, make sure that the total
weight of the carrying attachment and cargo does not exceed
the 150 lbs (67.5 kg). Overloading
may cause damage to the vehicle
and create a safety hazard.
The bars can be used as crossbars.
Cargo can be carried after setting the
bars as crossbars and installing the
genuine SUBARU carrying attachment.
When you carry cargo on the roof using
the crossbars and a carrying attachment,
never exceed the maximum load limit
explained in the following. You should
also be careful that your vehicle does not
exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR) and front and rear Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR). For information
on loading cargo into or onto your vehicle,
refer to Loading your vehicle F8-13. The
maximum load limit of the cargo and
carrying attachment must not exceed the
allowable load limit described in the Owners Manual of a genuine SUBARU carrying attachment. Place the heaviest load at
the bottom, nearest the roof, and evenly
distribute the cargo. Always properly

secure all cargo.
! Installing carrying attachments on
the crossbars
When installing any carrying attachment
such as a bike carrier, ski carrier, kayak
carrier, cargo basket, etc. on the crossbars, follow the manufacturers instructions and make sure that the attachment is
securely fixed to the crossbars. Use only
attachments designed specifically for the
crossbars. A set of the crossbars is
designed to carry loads (cargo and attachment) of not more than 150 lbs (67.5 kg).
Before operating the vehicle, make sure
that the cargo is properly secured on the
attachment.
NOTE
. Remember that the vehicles center
of gravity is altered with the weight of
the load on the roof, thus affecting the
driving characteristics. Drive carefully,
avoid rapid starts, hard cornering and
abrupt stops. Crosswind effects will be
increased.
. Restore the bars to the original
position when the bars are not used
as crossbars.
! How to use as crossbars
CAUTION
. Do not raise the bar higher than
necessary. The base of the bar
may be damaged.
. Be careful not to contact the bars
while sliding them. Otherwise,
the bars may be scratched or
the latch portions may be damaged.
. Do not slide the bar more than
necessary when sliding the bar.
The base of the bar may be
damaged.
. Do not allow the bar to fall on or
contact the roof panel or the
moonroof when sliding the bar.
Otherwise the roof panel may be
dented or the glass of the moonroof may be damaged.
Black plate (465,1)
1. Pull out the integrated crossbars from

the roof rail holders by pulling up the
covers.
3. Install the bars into the holders.

4. Make sure that the latches are fitted
securely.
8-17
2. Remove the cap of the roof rail holder

by using the torque wrench.
! How to change the position of the

crossbar
WARNING
Carefully read the warning label
attached to the roof rail.
2. Slide the bars in the direction shown in

the illustration.
You can change the position of the rear

crossbar. To change the position, perform
the following procedure.
1. Take out the torque wrench from the
under-floor storage compartment.
3. Remove the bolt of the crossbar by

using the torque wrench.
CONTINUED
Black plate (466,1)
8-18
torque is approximately 8.9 + 2.2 lbfft (12

+ 3.0 Nm, 1.2 + 0.3 kgfm).
4. Pull out the crossbar from the roof rail

holder by pulling up the cover.
5. Install the crossbar into the other
holder.
2. Pull out the crossbars from the roof rail

holders by pulling up the covers.
7. Install the plastic plug by pushing it
into the hole until it is fully seated.
! How to re-stow bars
CAUTION
Do not use the bars as roof rails
when the bars are stowed.
1. Check that the rear crossbar is stowed
in the front side holder.
3. Slide the bars in the direction shown in
the illustration.
6. Tighten the bolt of the crossbar by
using the torque wrench. The tightening
Black plate (467,1)
Driving tips/Trailer hitch (Outback if equipped)
CAUTION
4. Install the bars into the holders.

5. Make sure that the latches are fitted
securely.
! Rope hook (attached to the roof rail)
Rope hook
. When you use the rope hooks,

always secure the rope at all four
hook points.
. Do not tighten the rope excessively. Otherwise, it may lead to
damage to the vehicle body or
cargo.
. Check that the rope is not loose
before driving the vehicle.
. When you use the rope hooks,
never exceed the maximum load
limit.
Load limit:
Observe the load limit that is indicated on
the rope hook.
8-19
Trailer hitch (Outback if

equipped)
WARNING
. Never exceed the maximum
weight specified for the trailer
hitch. Exceeding the maximum
weight could cause an accident
resulting in serious personal injuries. Permissible trailer weight
changes depending on the situation. For possible recommendations and limitations, refer to
Trailer towing (Outback) F822.
. Trailer brakes are required when
the towing load exceeds 1,000
lbs (453 kg). Be sure your trailer
has safety chains and that each
chain will hold the trailers maximum gross weight. Towing trailers without safety chains could
create a traffic safety hazard if
the trailer separates from the
hitch due to coupling damage or
hitch ball damage.
. Be sure to check the hitch pin
and safety pin for positive locking placement before towing a
trailer. If the ball mount comes off
CONTINUED
Black plate (468,1)
8-20
the hitch receiver, the trailer

could get loose and create a
traffic safety hazard.
. Use only the ball mount supplied
with this hitch. Use the hitch only
as a weight carrying hitch. Do not
use with any type of weight
distributing hitch.
& Connecting a trailer

1. Remove the receiver cover from the
hitch receiver tube. Then insert the ball
mount into the hitch receiver tube.
The maximum gross trailer weight and

maximum gross tongue weight are indicated in the following table.
Maximum
gross trailer
weight
Outback
2,700 lbs
(1,224 kg)
Maximum
gross tongue
weight
200 lbs
(90 kg)
When towing a trailer, refer to Trailer

towing (Outback) F8-22.
2. Insert the hitch pin into the hole

located on the hitch receiver tube so that
the pin passes through the ball mount.
3. Insert the safety pin through the

provided hole on the hitch pin securely.
4. Check the ball mount assembly by
pulling on it to make sure it does not come
off the hitch receiver.
Black plate (469,1)
WARNING
Do not connect safety chains to any
part of the vehicle other than the
safety chain hooks.
1)
2)
8-21
watercraft.
& If not towing a trailer

. Remove the ball mount from the hitch
receiver tube and insert the receiver cover
onto the hitch receiver tube.
. Place the dust cap over the four-pin
connector of the hitch wire harness to
protect against possible damage.
. Occasionally lubricate terminals of the
four-pin connector using terminal grease.
Hitch ball installation point

Hooks for safety chains
5. Use only a hitch ball that is appropriate

for the ball mount and your trailer. The
hitch ball must be securely installed on the
ball mount.
6. Connect your trailer to the hitch ball.
7. Connect the trailer and the hitch with
safety chains that will hold the trailers
maximum gross weight. The chains
should cross under the trailer tongue to
prevent the tongue from dropping onto the
ground in case it should disconnect from
the hitch ball. Allow sufficient slack in the
chains taking tight turn situations into
account; however, be careful not to let
them drag on the ground.
8
Hitch harness connector
8. Connect the hitch wire harnesss black

four-pin wire connector to the towing
trailers wire harness.
9. Confirm proper function of the hitch
wire harness by individually activating the
brake, stop and turn signal lights on the
trailer.
NOTE
Always disconnect the trailer wire harness before launching or retrieving a
Black plate (470,1)
8-22
Driving tips/Trailer towing (Legacy)
Trailer towing (Legacy)
Trailer towing (Outback)
Your vehicle is neither designed nor

intended to be used for trailer towing.
Therefore, never tow a trailer with your
vehicle.
SUBARU assumes no responsibility for
injuries or vehicle damage that may result
from trailer towing, from any trailer towing
equipment or from any errors or omissions
in the instructions accompanying such
equipment. SUBARU warranties do not
apply to vehicle damage or malfunction
caused by trailer towing.
Your vehicle is designed and intended to

be used primarily as a passenger-carrying
vehicle. Towing a trailer puts additional
loads on your vehicles engine, drivetrain,
brakes, tires and suspension and has an
adverse effect on fuel economy and air
conditioning system cooling performance.
If you do decide to tow a trailer, your safety
and satisfaction depend upon proper use
of correct equipment and cautious operation of your vehicle. Seek the advice of
your SUBARU dealer to assist you in
purchasing a hitch and other necessary
towing equipment appropriate for your
vehicle. Do not use towing equipment
other than genuine SUBARU towing
equipment. In addition, be sure to follow
the instructions on correct installation and
use provided by SUBARU.
SUBARU assumes no responsibility for
injuries or vehicle damage that result from
trailer towing equipment, or from any
errors or omissions in the instructions
accompanying such equipment or for your
failure to follow the proper instructions.
Regularly check that the hitch mounting
bolts and nuts are tightened securely.
& Warranties and maintenance

SUBARU warranties do not apply to
vehicle damage or malfunction caused
by trailer towing. If you use your vehicle to
tow a trailer, more frequent maintenance
will be required due to the additional load.
(Refer to Maintenance schedule under
severe driving conditions in the Warranty
and Maintenance Booklet.)
Under no circumstances should a trailer
be towed with a new vehicle or a vehicle
with any new powertrain component (engine, transmission, differential, wheel
bearings, etc.) for the first 1,000 miles
(1,600 km) of driving.
& Maximum load limits

WARNING
Never exceed the maximum load
limits explained in the following.
Exceeding the maximum load limits
could cause personal injury and/or
vehicle damage.
CAUTION
. Adequate size trailer brakes are
required when the trailer and its
cargo exceed 1,000 lbs (453 kg)
Black plate (471,1)
Driving tips/Trailer towing (Outback)
total weight.
. Before towing a trailer, check the
trailer total weight, GVW, GAWs
and tongue load. Make sure the
load and its distribution in your
vehicle and trailer are acceptable.
! Total trailer weight
8-23
3.6 L models
Conditions
Maximum total trailer weight
When towing a trailer without brakes.
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
When towing a trailer with brakes.
2,700 lbs (1,224 kg)

1,500 lbs (680 kg)
When towing a trailer on a long uphill grade

continuously for over 5 miles (8 km) with an
outside temperature of 1048F (408C) or above.
2.5 L models
Model
MT models
Conditions
CVT models

When towing a trailer on a long uphill
grade continuously for over 5 miles (8
km) with an outside temperature of
1048F (408C) or above.
Maximum total trailer

weight
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
2,700 lbs (1,224 kg)
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
2,700 lbs (1,224 kg)
1,350 lbs (612 kg)
Total trailer weight
The total trailer weight (trailer weight plus

its cargo load) must never exceed the
maximum total trailer weight. The maximum total trailer weight is indicated in the
following tables.
CONTINUED
Black plate (472,1)
8-24
! Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) and

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR)
vehicle.
Certification label
Gross Vehicle Weight
The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) must

never exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating (GVWR).
Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) is the
combined total of the weight of the vehicle,
driver, passengers, luggage, trailer hitch,
trailer tongue load and any other optional
equipment installed on your vehicle.
Therefore, the GVW changes depending
on the situation. Determine the GVW each
time before going on a trip by putting your
vehicle and trailer on a vehicle scale.
The GVWR of your vehicle that is set by
SUBARU is shown on the certification
label located on the drivers door of your
! Gross Axle Weight (GAW) and

Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The total weight applied to each axle

(GAW) must never exceed the Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR). The front and rear
GAWs can be adjusted by relocating
passengers and luggage inside the vehicle. The front and rear GAWR of your
vehicle that are set by SUBARU are also
shown on the certification label.
To check both GVWR and GAWR and to
confirm that the total weight and weight
distribution are within safe driving limits,
you should have your vehicle and trailer
weighed at a commercial weighing station.
Be sure that all cargo is firmly secured to
prevent a change in weight distribution
while driving.
Gross Axle Weight
Black plate (473,1)
8-25
NOTE
! Tongue load
For vehicles with trailer brakes, the

trailer tongue load exceeds 200 lbs (90
kg) when calculated at 8% of the
maximum total trailer weight.
Even in this case, the maximum value
is 200 lbs (90 kg).
F:
Tongue load
WARNING
If the trailer is loaded with more
weight in the back of trailers axle
than in the front, the load is taken off
the rear axle of the towing vehicle.
This may cause the rear wheels to
skid, especially during braking or
when vehicle speed is reduced during cornering, resulting in oversteer, spin out and/or jackknifing.
Ensure that the trailer tongue load is from
8 to 11 percent of the total trailer weight
and does not exceed the maximum value
of 200 lbs (90 kg).
1)
2)
Jack
Bathroom scale
The tongue load can be weighed with a

bathroom scale as shown in the following
illustration. When weighing the tongue
load, be sure to position the towing
coupler at the height at which it would be
during actual towing, using a jack as
shown.
Front
The tongue load can be adjusted by

proper distribution of the load in the trailer.
Never load the trailer with more weight in
the back than in the front; approximately
60 percent of the trailer load should be in
the front and approximately 40 percent in
the rear. Also, distribute the load as evenly
as possible on both the left and right
sides.
Be sure that all cargo is firmly secured to
prevent a change in weight distribution
while driving.
CONTINUED
Black plate (474,1)
8-26
& Trailer Hitches

WARNING
Never drill the frame or under-body
of your vehicle to install a commercial trailer hitch. If you do, dangerous exhaust gas, water or mud may
enter the passenger compartment
through the drilled hole. Exhaust
gas contains carbon monoxide, a
colorless and odorless gas which is
dangerous, or even lethal, if inhaled.
Also, drilling the frame or underbody of your vehicle could cause
deterioration of strength of your
vehicle and cause corrosion around
the drilled hole.
CAUTION
. Do not modify the vehicle exhaust system, brake system, or
other systems when installing a
hitch or other trailer towing
equipment.
. Do not use axle-mounted hitches
as they can cause damage to the
axle housing, wheel bearings,
wheels or tires.
Do not use a trailer hitch other than
genuine SUBARU trailer hitch. A genuine

SUBARU hitch is available from your
SUBARU dealer.
& Connecting a trailer

! Trailer brakes
WARNING
. Adequate size trailer brakes are
required when the trailer and its
cargo exceed 1,000 lbs (453 kg)
total weight.
. Do not directly connect your
trailers hydraulic brake system
to the hydraulic brake system in
your vehicle. Direct connection
would cause the vehicles brake
performance to deteriorate and
could lead to an accident.
If your trailers total weight (trailer weight
plus its cargo weight) exceeds 1,000 lbs
(453 kg), the trailer is required to be
equipped with its own brake system.
Electric brakes or surge brakes are
recommended, and must be installed
properly. Check that your trailers brakes
conform with Federal, state/province and/
or other applicable regulations. Your
SUBARUs brake system is not designed
to be tapped into the trailers hydraulic
brake system. Please ask your SUBARU

dealer and professional trailer supplier for
more information about the trailers brake
system.
! Trailer safety chains
WARNING
Always use safety chains between
your vehicle and the trailer. Towing
trailer without safety chains could
create a traffic safety hazard if the
trailer separates from the hitch due
to coupling damage or hitch ball
damage.
In case the trailer hitch connector or hitch
ball should break or become disconnected, the trailer could get loose and
create a traffic safety hazard.
For safety, always connect the towing
vehicle and trailer with trailer safety
chains. Two chains should be used in
total, one to the right side and the other to
the left side trailer tongue. Pass the chains
crossing each other under the trailer
tongue to prevent the trailer from dropping
onto the ground in case the trailer tongue
should disconnect from the hitch ball.
Allow sufficient slack in the chains taking
tight turn situations into account; however,
be careful not to let them drag on the
Black plate (475,1)
ground.
! Side mirrors
Connection of trailer lights to your vehicles electrical system requires modifications to the vehicles lighting circuit to
increase its capacity and accommodate
wiring changes. To ensure the trailer lights
are connected properly, please consult
your SUBARU dealer. Check for proper
operation of the turn signals and the stop
lights each time you connect a trailer to
your vehicle.
! Tires
WARNING
After hitching a trailer to your vehicle,
check that the standard side mirrors
provide a good rearward field of view
without significant blind spots. If significant
blind spots occur with the vehicles standard side mirrors, use towing mirrors that
conform with Federal, state/province and/
or other applicable regulations.
! Trailer lights
CAUTION
Direct splicing or other improper
connection of trailer lights may
damage your vehicles electrical
system and cause a malfunction of
your vehicles lighting system.
Never tow a trailer when the temporary spare tire is used. The temporary spare tire is not designed to
sustain the towing load. Use of the
temporary spare tire when towing
can result in failure of the spare tire
and/or less stability of the vehicle.
Make sure that all the tires on your vehicle
are properly inflated. Refer to Tires F129 and in GAS STATION REFERENCE at
the end of this manual.
Trailer tire condition, size, load rating and
proper inflation pressure should be in
accordance with the trailer manufacturers
specifications.
In the event your vehicle gets a flat tire
8-27
when towing a trailer, ask a commercial

road service representive or professional
to repair the flat tire.
If you carry a regular size spare tire in your
vehicle or trailer as a precaution against
getting a flat tire, be sure that the spare
tire is firmly secured.
& Trailer towing tips

CAUTION
. For models equipped with the
BSD (Blind Spot Detection) and
RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert)
driving support systems, when
towing a trailer, press the BSD/
RCTA OFF switch to deactivate
the system. The system may not
operate properly due to the
blocked radar waves. For details
about the BSD/RCTA OFF switch,
refer to BSD/RCTA OFF switch
F7-60.
. For models equipped with RAB
(Reverse Automatic Braking)
system, consult your SUBARU
dealer for additional information
about towing a trailer.
. Never exceed 45 mph (72 km/h)
when towing a trailer in hilly
CONTINUED
Black plate (476,1)
8-28
country on hot days.

. When towing a trailer, steering,
stability, stopping distance and
braking performance will be different when compared to normal
operation. You should never
drive at excessive speeds but
always employ extra caution
when towing a trailer. You should
also keep the following tips in
mind.
. When parking on a steep slope
with a trailer attached to your
vehicle, the braking power of the
electronic parking brake may not
be sufficient since strong braking power is needed.
! Before starting out on a trip
. Check the towing regulations for trailer
or caravan vehicles that vary by state/
region. Failure to comply with the procedures set forth will not only compromise
your safety, but will also negate your
insurance coverage and/or may violate
the state road and traffic acts and regulations.
. Check that the vehicle and vehicle-tohitch mounting are in good condition. If
any problems are apparent, do not tow the
trailer.
. Check that the vehicle rests horizontally with the trailer attached. If the vehicle
is tipped sharply up at the front and down
at the rear, check the total trailer weight,
GVW, GAWs and tongue load again, then
confirm that the load and its distribution
are acceptable.
. Check that the tire pressures are
correct.
. Check that the vehicle and trailer are
connected properly. Confirm that
the trailer tongue is connected
properly to the hitch ball.
the trailer lights connector is connected properly and trailers stop lights
illuminate when the vehicles brake
pedal is pressed, and that the trailers
turn signal lights flash when the
vehicles turn signal lever is operated.
the safety chains are connected
properly.
all cargo in the trailer is secured
safely in position.
the side mirrors provide a good
rearward field of view without a significant blind spot.
. Sufficient time should be taken to learn
the feel of the vehicle/trailer combination
before starting out on a trip. In an area free
of traffic, practice turning, stopping and
backing up.
! Driving with a trailer

. You should allow for considerably more
stopping distance when towing a trailer.
Avoid sudden braking because it may
result in skidding or jackknifing and loss of
control.
. Avoid abrupt starts and sudden accelerations. For MT models, always start out
in first gear and release the clutch pedal at
moderate engine revolution.
. Avoid uneven steering, sharp turns and
rapid lane changes.
. Slow down before turning. Make a
longer than normal turning radius because
the trailer wheels will be closer than the
vehicle wheels to the inside of the turn. In
a tight turn, the trailer could hit your
vehicle.
. Crosswinds will adversely affect the
handling of your vehicle and trailer, causing sway. Crosswinds can be due to
weather conditions or the passing of large
trucks or buses. If swaying occurs, firmly
grip the steering wheel and promptly begin
decelerating your vehicle at a gradual
pace.
. When passing other vehicles, considerable distance is required because of the
added weight and length caused by
attaching the trailer to your vehicle.
Black plate (477,1)
1)
2)
Left turn
Right turn
. Backing up with a trailer is difficult and

takes practice. When backing up with a
trailer, never accelerate or steer rapidly.
When turning back, grip the bottom of the
steering wheel with one hand and turn it to
the left for a left turn, and turn it to the right
for a right turn.
. If the ABS warning light illuminates
while the vehicle is in motion, stop towing
the trailer and have repairs performed
immediately by your nearest SUBARU
dealer.
! Driving on grades
. Before going down a steep hill, slow
down and shift into lower gear (if necessary, use 1st gear) in order to utilize the
engine braking effect and prevent overheating of your vehicles brakes. Do not
make sudden downshifts.
. When driving uphill in hot weather, the
air conditioner may turn off automatically
to protect the engine from overheating.
. When driving uphill in hot weather,
because the engine and transmission are
relatively prone to overheating, pay attention to the following items.
Temperature gauge
AT OIL TEMP warning light (CVT
models)
. If any of the following conditions occur,
immediately turn off the air conditioner and
stop the vehicle in the nearest safe
location. Refer to If you park your vehicle
in an emergency F9-2 and Engine
overheating F9-13.
Temperature gauge needle approaches the OVERHEAT zone. Refer
to Temperature gauge F3-12.
AT OIL TEMP warning light illuminates (CVT models). Refer to AT OIL
TEMP warning light (CVT models)
F3-17.
8-29
! Parking on a grade
Always block the wheels under both
vehicle and trailer when parking. Apply
the parking brake. You should not park on
a hill or slope. If parking on a hill or slope
cannot be avoided, you should take the
following steps:
1. Apply the brakes and hold the pedal
down.
2. Have someone place wheel blocks
under both the vehicle and trailer wheels.
3. When the wheel blocks are in place,
release the regular brakes slowly until the
blocks absorb the load.
4. Apply the regular brakes and then
apply the parking brake; slowly release
the regular brakes.
5. Shift into 1st or reverse gear (MT
models) or P (CVT models) and shut
off the engine.
. For CVT models, do not use the

accelerator pedal to stay stationary on
an uphill slope instead of using the
parking brake or foot brake. That may
cause the transmission fluid to overheat.
Black plate (2,1)
Left Page
Black plate (19,1)
In case of emergency
If you park your vehicle in an emergency.........
Temporary spare tire...........................................
Maintenance tools ...............................................
9-2
9-2
9-3
Legacy................................................................
Outback ..............................................................
9-4
9-5
Flat tires...............................................................
9-5
Changing a flat tire.............................................. 9-5

Storing a flat tire ................................................. 9-8
equipped)......................................................... 9-10
Jump starting .....................................................
9-11
How to jump start...............................................
9-11
Engine overheating ............................................
9-13
If steam is coming from the engine

compartment....................................................
If no steam is coming from the engine
compartment....................................................
9-13
9-13
Towing.................................................................
9-13
Towing hook and tie-down hooks/holes ..............

Using a flat-bed truck .........................................
9-14
9-16
Towing with all wheels on the ground.................
9-17
Electronic parking brake if the electronic

parking brake cannot be released.................
Access key if access key does not
operate properly .............................................
9-18
Locking and unlocking.......................................

Switching power status......................................
Starting engine ..................................................
9-18
9-18
9-19
Trunk lid (Legacy) if the trunk lid cannot

be opened .......................................................
Rear gate (Outback) if the rear gate
cannot be opened...........................................
Power rear gate - if power rear gate does
not operate properly.......................................
9-17
9-19
9-20
9-21
When the power rear gate is deactivated ............

When the rear gate cannot be opened ................
When the rear gate cannot be closed .................
9-21
9-22
9-22
If your vehicle is involved in an accident ........
9-22
Black plate (482,1)
9-2
In case of emergency/If you park your vehicle in an emergency
If you park your vehicle in an

emergency
The hazard warning flasher should be

used in day or night to warn other drivers
when you have to park your vehicle under
emergency conditions.
Avoid stopping on the road. It is best to
safely pull off the road if a problem occurs.
The hazard warning flasher can be activated regardless of the ignition switch
position.
Turn on the hazard warning by pressing
the hazard warning flasher switch. Turn it
off by pressing the switch again.
NOTE
When the hazard warning flasher is on,
the turn signals do not work.
Temporary spare tire

WARNING
. Never tow a trailer when the
temporary spare tire is used.
The temporary spare tire is not
designed to sustain the towing
load. Use of the temporary spare
tire when towing can result in
failure of the spare tire and/or
less stability of the vehicle and
may lead to an accident.
original pressure sensor/transmitter being transferred, the low
This indicates the tire pressure
monitoring system (TPMS) is unable to monitor all four road
Black plate (483,1)
In case of emergency/Maintenance tools
CAUTION
has a smaller diameter, so road clearance

is reduced.
Never use any temporary spare tire

other than the original. Using other
sizes may result in severe mechanical damage to the drive train of your
vehicle.
Check the inflation pressure of the temporary spare tire periodically to keep the
tire ready for use. The correct pressure is
60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2).
When using the temporary spare tire, note
the following precautions.
. Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
. Do not put a tire chain on the temporary
spare tire. Because of the smaller tire size,
a tire chain will not fit properly.
. Do not use two or more temporary
spare tires at the same time.
. Do not drive over obstacles. This tire
Maintenance tools
Your vehicle is equipped with the following
maintenance tools.
. Jack
. Jack handle
. Screwdriver
. Towing hook (eye bolt) (Outback)
. Wheel nut wrench
. Torque wrench (Outback)
The temporary spare tire is stored under

the under-floor storage compartment.
The temporary spare tire is smaller and
lighter than a conventional tire and is
designed for emergency use only. Remove the temporary spare tire and reinstall the conventional tire as soon as
possible because the spare tire is designed only for temporary use.
9-3
CAUTION
1)
2)
Tread wear indicator bar

Indicator location mark
. When the wear indicator appears on

the tread, replace the tire.
. The temporary spare tire must be used
only on a rear wheel. If a front wheel tire
gets punctured, replace the wheel with a
rear wheel and install the temporary spare
tire in place of the removed rear wheel.
The torque wrench is designed to be

used only when changing the position of the crossbar. Do not use the
torque wrench in other cases. Otherwise, the torque wrench may be
deformed.
CONTINUED
Black plate (484,1)
9-4
In case of emergency/Maintenance tools
& Legacy
5)
Jack
The maintenance tools are stored in the

For the method to use the jack, refer to
Flat tires F9-5.
NOTE
To use the jack handle, insert the jack
handle into the hole of the wheel nut
wrench.
1)
2)
3)
4)
Under-floor storage compartment (Refer

to Under-floor storage compartment
F6-20.)
Wheel nut wrench
Screwdriver
Jack handle
Black plate (485,1)
In case of emergency/Flat tires
& Outback
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
Torque wrench
Towing hook (eye bolt)
Screwdriver
Tire fixing band
Tire bag
The maintenance tools are stored in the

For the method to use the jack, refer to
Flat tires F9-5.
9-5
Flat tires
If you have a flat tire while driving, never
brake suddenly; keep driving straight
ahead while gradually reducing speed.
Then slowly pull off the road to a safe
place.
& Changing a flat tire

WARNING
. Do not jack up the vehicle on an
incline or a loose road surface.
The jack can come out of the
jacking point or sink into the
ground and this can result in a
serious accident.
. Use only the jack provided with
your vehicle. The jack supplied
with the vehicle is designed only
for changing a tire. Never get
under the vehicle while supporting the vehicle with this jack.
1)
2)
3)
4)
Under-floor storage compartment (Refer

to Under-floor storage compartment
F6-20.)
Jack handle
Wheel nut wrench
Jack
CONTINUED
Black plate (486,1)
9-6
. Always turn off the engine before

raising the flat tire off the ground
using the jack. Never swing or
push the vehicle supported with
the jack. The jack can come out
of the jacking point due to a jolt
and this can result in a serious
accident.
1. Park on a hard, level surface, whenever possible, then stop the engine.
2. Apply the parking brake and shift the
shift lever in reverse (MT models) or the
select lever in the P (Park) position (CVT
models).
3. Turn on the hazard warning flasher
and unload all occupants and luggage
from the vehicle.
of the tire diagonally opposite the flat tire.

5. Take out the jack, jack handle and
wheel nut wrench.
The tools and the spare tire are stored
under the floor of the trunk (Legacy) or the
cargo area (Outback). Refer to Maintenance tools F9-3.
tions.
NOTE
Make sure that the jack is well lubricated before using it.
1)
2)
Notch
Valve hole
7. If your vehicle has wheel covers, insert

a flat-head screwdriver into the notch on
the opposite side of the valve hole and pry
the wheel cover to remove it.
6. Take out the under-floor storage compartment and turn the attaching bolt
counterclockwise, then take the spare tire
out.
NOTE
4. Put wheel blocks at the front and rear
Carefully read Temporary spare tire

F9-2 and strictly follow the instruc-
Black plate (487,1)
8. Loosen the wheel nuts using the wheel

nut wrench but do not remove the nuts.
9. Place the jack under the side sill at the

front or rear jack-up point closest to the flat
tire.
Turn the jackscrew by hand until the jack

head engages firmly into the jack-up point.
9-7
11. Insert the jack handle into the jackscrew, and turn the handle until the tire
clears the ground. Do not raise the vehicle
higher than necessary.
12. Remove the wheel nuts and the flat
tire.
10. Insert the jack handle into the hole of

the wheel nut wrench.
CONTINUED
Black plate (488,1)
9-8
WARNING
Never place a tire or tire changing
tools in the passenger compartment
after changing wheels. In a sudden
stop or collision, loose equipment
could strike occupants and cause
injury. Store the tire and all tools in
the proper place.
& Storing a flat tire

13. Before putting the spare tire on, clean
the mounting surface of the wheel and hub
with a cloth.
14. Put on the spare tire. Replace the
wheel nuts. Tighten them by hand.
WARNING
Do not use oil or grease on the
wheel studs or nuts when the spare
tire is installed. This could cause the
nuts to become loose and lead to an
accident.
15. Turn the jack handle counterclockwise
to lower the vehicle.
16. Use the wheel nut wrench to securely

tighten the wheel nuts to the specified
torque, following the tightening order in the
illustration.
For the wheel nut tightening torque, refer
to Tires F12-9. Never use your foot on
the wheel nut wrench or a pipe extension
on the wrench because you may exceed
the specified torque. Have the wheel nut
torque checked at the nearest automotive
service facility.
17. Store the flat tire. For details, refer to
Storing a flat tire F9-8. Also store the
jack and jack handle in their storage
locations.
! Storing in the spare tire compartment (Legacy)
Store the flat tire in the spare tire

compartment. Put the spacer and tighten
the attaching bolt firmly.
Black plate (489,1)
9-9
! Storing with the tire bag (Outback)

1. If your vehicle has wheel covers, keep
the wheel cover removed.
2. Take out the tire bag and tire fixing
band from the under-floor storage compartment. For details, refer to Outback
F9-5.
1)
2)
Rear seatback
Tire bag
4. Place the tire bag against the rear

seatback.
1)
1)
2)
3)
Convenient tie-down hook

Tire fixing band
Center of the wheels
5. Pass the tire fixing band through the

center of the wheels and the convenient
tie-down hooks.
Tire bag
3. Place the flat tire in the tire bag.
CONTINUED
Black plate (490,1)
9-10
6. Fasten the tire fixing band to secure

the tire bag.
& Tire pressure monitoring

Low tire pressure warning light
The tire pressure monitoring system provides the driver with the warning message
indicated by sending a signal from a
sensor that is installed in each wheel
when tire pressure is severely low.
The tire pressure monitoring system will
activate only when the vehicle is driven.
Also, this system may not react immediately to a sudden drop in tire pressure (for
example, a blow-out caused running over
a sharp object).
WARNING
. If the low tire pressure warning
light illuminates while driving,
never brake suddenly. Instead,
Otherwise an accident involving
serious vehicle damage and serious personal injury could occur.
(1) Keep driving straight ahead
while gradually reducing
speed.
(2) Slowly pull off the road to a
safe place.
(3) Check the pressure for all four
tires and adjust the pressure
to the COLD tire pressure
shown on the vehicle placard
on the door pillar on the
drivers side.
driving after adjusting the tire
pressure, a tire may have significant damage and a fast leak that
causes the tire to lose air rapidly.
If you have a flat tire, replace it
with a spare tire as soon as
possible.
original pressure sensor/trans-
mitter being transferred, the low

This indicates the TPMS is unable to monitor all four road
. When a tire is repaired with liquid
sealant, the tire pressure warning
valve and transmitter may not
operate properly. If a liquid sealant is used, contact your nearest
SUBARU dealer or other qualified
service shop as soon as possible. Make sure to replace the tire
pressure warning valve and
tire. You may reuse the wheel if
there is no damage to it and if the
sealant residue is properly
cleaned off.
If the light illuminates steadily
after blinking for approximately
one minute, promptly contact a
SUBARU dealer to have the system inspected.
Black plate (491,1)
In case of emergency/Jump starting
Jump starting
WARNING
. Battery fluid is SULFURIC ACID.
Do not let it come in contact with
the eyes, skin, clothing or the
vehicle.
If battery fluid gets on you,
thoroughly flush the exposed
area with water immediately. Get
medical help if the fluid has
entered your eyes.
If battery fluid is accidentally
swallowed, immediately drink a
large amount of milk or water,
and obtain immediate medical
help.
Keep everyone including children away from the battery.
. The gas generated by a battery
explodes if a flame or spark is
brought near it. Do not smoke or
light a match while jump starting.
. Never attempt jump starting if the
discharged battery is frozen. It
could cause the battery to burst
or explode.
. Whenever working on or around
a battery, always wear suitable
.
.
.
eye protectors, and remove metal

objects such as rings, bands or
other metal jewelry.
Be sure the jumper cables and
clamps on them do not have
loose or missing insulation.
Do not jump start unless cables
in suitable condition are available.
A running engine can be dangerous. Keep your fingers, hands,
clothing, hair and tools away
from the cooling fan, belts and
any other moving engine parts.
Removing rings, watches and
ties is advisable.
Jump starting is dangerous if it is
done incorrectly. If you are unsure about the proper procedure
for jump starting, consult a competent mechanic.
9-11
& How to jump start

1. Make sure the booster battery is 12
volts and the negative terminal is
grounded.
2. If the booster battery is in another
vehicle, do not let the two vehicles touch.
3. Turn off all unnecessary lights and
accessories.
4. Connect the jumper cables exactly in
the sequence illustrated.
When your vehicle does not start due to a

run down (discharged) battery, the vehicle
may be jump started by connecting your
battery to another battery (called the
booster battery) with jumper cables.
CONTINUED
Black plate (492,1)
9-12
In case of emergency/Jump starting

1)
2)
3)
4)
Connect one jumper cable to the positive

(+) terminal on the discharged battery.
Connect the other end of the jumper
cable to the positive (+) terminal of the
booster battery.
Connect one end of the other cable to the
negative () terminal of the booster
battery.
Connect the other end of the cable to the
strut mounting nut.
Make sure that the cables are not near

any moving parts and that the cable
clamps are not in contact with any other
metal.
5. Start the engine of the vehicle with the
booster battery and run it at moderate
speed. Then start the engine of the vehicle
that has the discharged battery.
6. When finished, carefully disconnect
the cables in exactly the reverse order.
A)
B)
Booster battery
Strut mounting nut
Black plate (493,1)
In case of emergency/Engine overheating
Engine overheating
WARNING
Never attempt to remove the radiator cap until the engine has been
shut off and has fully cooled down.
When the engine is hot, the coolant
is under pressure. Removing the
cap while the engine is still hot
could release a spray of boiling hot
coolant, which could burn you very
seriously.
If the engine overheats, pull off the road
safely and stop the vehicle in a safe place.
& If steam is coming from the

engine compartment
Turn off the engine and get everyone
away from the vehicle until it cools down.
& If no steam is coming from

the engine compartment
NOTE
For details about how to check the
coolant level or how to add coolant,
refer to Engine coolant F11-15.
1. Keep the engine running at idling
speed.
2. Open the hood to ventilate the engine

compartment. Refer to Engine hood
F11-7.
Confirm that the cooling fan is turning. If
the fan is not turning, immediately turn off
the engine and contact your authorized
dealer for repair.
3. After the engine coolant temperature
has dropped, turn off the engine.
If the temperature gauge stays in the
overheated zone, turn off the engine.
4. After the engine has fully cooled down,
check the coolant level in the reserve
tank.
If the coolant level is below the LOW
mark, add coolant up to the FULL mark.
5. If there is no coolant in the reserve
tank, add coolant to the reserve tank.
Then remove the radiator cap and fill the
radiator with coolant.
If you remove the radiator cap from a hot
radiator, first wrap a thick cloth around the
radiator cap, then turn the cap counterclockwise slowly without pressing down
until it stops. Release the pressure from
the radiator. After the pressure has been
fully released, remove the cap by pressing
down and turning it.
9-13
Towing
WARNING
Never tow AWD vehicles with the
front wheels raised off the ground
while the rear wheels are on the
ground, or with the rear wheels
raised off the ground while the front
wheels are on the ground. This will
cause the vehicle to spin away due
to the operation or deterioration of
the center differential.
If towing is necessary, SUBARU recommends it be done by your SUBARU dealer

or a commercial towing service.
CONTINUED
Black plate (494,1)
9-14
In case of emergency/Towing
& Towing hook and tie-down

hooks/holes
The towing hook should be used only in
an emergency (e.g., to free a stuck vehicle
from mud, sand or snow).
A towing hook is supplied with Outback
only. Legacy is not supplied with a towing
hook (it is available as an accessory). On
Legacy, the towing access cover is on the
rear bumper only.
SUBARU recommends towing be done
by your SUBARU dealer or a commercial towing service.
Front towing hook (Outback):

1. Take out the screwdriver, towing hook,
wheel nut wrench and jack handle from
3. Screw the towing hook into the

threaded hole until the threads can no
longer be seen.
CAUTION
. Use only the specified towing
hook and tie-down hooks/holes.
Never use suspension parts or
other parts of the body for towing
or tie-down purposes.
. Never use the tie-down hole closest to the muffler under the
vehicle for towing purposes.
. To prevent deformation to the
bumper and the towing hook, do
not apply excessive lateral load
to the towing hooks.
2. Pry off the towing access cover on the

front bumper using a screwdriver, and you
will find a threaded hole for attaching the
towing hook.
4. Tighten the towing hook securely

using the jack handle and wheel nut
wrench.
Black plate (495,1)
9-15
longer be seen.
After towing, remove the towing hook from

the vehicle and stow it in the under-floor
storage compartment.
Fit the towing hook cover on the bumper.
WARNING
. Do not use the towing hook for
purposes other than towing your
vehicle.
. Be sure to remove the towing
hook after towing. Leaving the
towing hook mounted on the
vehicle could interfere with proper operation of the SRS airbag
system in a frontal collision.
Rear towing hook (Outback):
1. Take out the screwdriver, towing hook,
wheel nut wrench and jack handle from
2. Pry off the cover on the rear bumper

using a screwdriver, and you will find a
threaded hole for attaching the towing
hook.
4. Tighten the towing hook securely

using the jack handle and wheel nut
wrench.
After towing, remove the towing hook from
the vehicle and stow it in the under-floor
storage compartment.
Fit the towing hook cover on the bumper.
WARNING
3. Screw the towing hook into the

threaded hole until its thread can no
. Do not use the towing hook for

purposes other than towing.
. Be sure to remove the towing
hook after towing. Leaving the
towing hook mounted on the
vehicle could interfere with proper operation of the fuel pump
CONTINUED
Black plate (496,1)
9-16
shut off function when the vehicle is struck from behind.
Rear tie-down holes:
Front tie-down hooks:
the plugs. After using the rear tie-down

holes, return the plugs to their original
places.
WARNING
Use the rear tie-down holes only for
downward anchoring. If they are
used to anchor the vehicle in any
other direction, cables may slip out
of the holes, possibly causing a
dangerous situation.
& Using a flat-bed truck
The front tie-down hooks are located

between each of the front tires and the
front bumper.
Front Tie-down Hooks are for tying down
the vehicle. They are not for towing.
1)
Rear tie-down hole
The rear tie-down holes are located near

each of the jack-up reinforcements.
There is a plug in each rear tie-down hole.
To use the rear tie-down holes, remove
This is the best way to transport your

vehicle. Use the following procedures to
ensure safe transportation.
1. For CVT models, shift the select lever
into the P position. For MT models, shift
Black plate (497,1)
In case of emergency/Electronic parking brake if the electronic parking brake cannot be released
the shift lever into the 1st position.

2. Apply the parking brake firmly.
3. Secure the vehicle onto the carrier
properly with safety chains. Each safety
chain should be equally tightened and
care must be taken not to pull the chains
so tightly that the suspension bottoms out.
& Towing with all wheels on the

ground
. Remember that the brake booster

and power steering do not function when the engine is not
running. Because the engine is
turned off, it will take greater
effort to operate the brake pedal
and steering wheel.
9-17
Electronic parking brake if

the electronic parking brake
cannot be released
Contact your SUBARU dealer and have
your SUBARU dealer release the electronic parking brake.
CAUTION
. If transmission failure occurs,
transport your vehicle on a flatbed truck.
. For CVT models, the traveling
speed must be limited to less
than 20 mph (30 km/h) and the
traveling distance to less than 31
miles (50 km). For greater speeds
and distances, transport your
vehicle on a flat-bed truck.
WARNING
. Never turn the ignition switch to
the LOCK/OFF position while
the vehicle is being towed because the steering wheel and the
direction of the wheels will be
locked.
1. Release the parking brake and put the

transmission in neutral.
2. The ignition switch should be in the
ON position while the vehicle is being
towed.
3. Take up slack in the towline slowly to
prevent damage to the vehicle.
Black plate (498,1)
9-18
In case of emergency/Access key if access key does not operate properly
Access key if access key

does not operate properly
& Locking and unlocking
position.
3. Depress the brake pedal.
CAUTION
Keep metallic objects, magnetic
sources and signal transmitters
away from the area between the
access key and the push-button
ignition switch. They may interfere
with the communication between
the access key and the push-button
ignition switch.
The following functions may be inoperable
because of strong radio signals in the
surrounding area or a low battery condition of the access key.
. Locking/unlocking doors including rear
gate
. Switching power status
. Starting engine
In such cases, perform the following
procedure. When the battery of the access
key is discharged, replace it with a new
one. Refer to Replacing battery of access
key F11-50.
1)
2)
Release button
Mechanical key
While pressing the release button of the

access key, take out the mechanical key.
Lock or unlock the drivers door with the
mechanical key in the procedure described in Locking and unlocking from
the outside F2-6.
NOTE
After locking or unlocking, be sure to
attach the mechanical key back to the
access key.
& Switching power status

4. Hold the access key with the buttons

facing you, and touch the push-button
ignition switch with it.
When the communication between the
access key and the vehicle is completed,
a chime (ding) will sound. At the same
time, the status of the push-button ignition
switch changes to either of the following.
. When the keyless access with pushbutton start system is deactivated:
ACC
. Under other conditions: ON
5. When the keyless access with pushbutton start system is deactivated, press
the push-button ignition switch with the
brake pedal released. The status of the
push-button ignition switch then changes
Black plate (499,1)
In case of emergency/Trunk lid (Legacy) if the trunk lid cannot be opened
If the power does not switch even

though the above procedure was followed precisely, contact your SUBARU
dealer.
a chime (ding) will sound. At the same

time, the push-button ignition switch turns
to the ACC or ON position.
5. After the push-button ignition switch
turns to the ACC or ON position, while
depressing the brake pedal, press the
push-button ignition switch.
& Starting engine
NOTE

position.
3. Depress the brake pedal.
If the engine does not start even

though the above procedure was followed precisely, contact your SUBARU
dealer.
to ON.
NOTE
9-19
Trunk lid (Legacy) if the

trunk lid cannot be opened
NOTE
If you open the trunk lid with a key
while the alarm system is armed, the
alarm system is triggered and the
vehicles horn sounds. In this case,
perform any of the following operations.
. Press any button on the remote
transmitter.
. Insert the key into the ignition
switch and turn the ignition switch to
the ON position.
For details about the alarm system,
refer to Alarm system F2-28.
The trunk lid can also be opened using the
key.
4. Hold the access key with the buttons

facing you, and touch the push-button
ignition switch with it.
When the communication between the
access key and the vehicle is completed,
CONTINUED
Black plate (500,1)
9-20
In case of emergency/Rear gate (Outback) if the rear gate cannot be opened
Rear gate (Outback) if the

rear gate cannot be opened
Always use a flat-head screwdriver

or a similar tool.
In the event that you cannot open the rear

gate by pressing the rear gate opener
button (all models) or using the power rear
gate (if equipped), you can open it from
inside the cargo area.
To open the trunk lid, insert the key into

the key cylinder and turn it clockwise.
NOTE
Models without power rear gate
1. Remove the access cover at the

bottom-center of the rear gate trim using
flat-head screwdriver.
2. Locate the rear gate lock release lever
behind the rear gate trim panel.
CAUTION
Never operate the rear gate lock
release lever with your fingers because doing so may cause an injury.
Models with power rear gate
3. Turn the lever to the right position
Black plate (501,1)
In case of emergency/Power rear gate if power rear gate does not operate properly
using a flat-head screwdriver or a similar

tool. Then the rear gate will open.
9-21
Power rear gate - if power

rear gate does not operate
properly
and close automatically after carrying out

this operation, we recommend that you
have the vehicle checked at a SUBARU
dealer.
& When the power rear gate is

deactivated
! When the rear gate is closed
CAUTION
When operating the power rear gate
manually, do not use excessive
force. Doing so may cause a malfunction.
NOTE
While the power rear gate is temporarily deactivated, if it is struck by body
parts or objects and sustains a strong
impact, the temporary deactivation
may be canceled. The purpose of this
is to absorb the impact of the collision
and it is not a malfunction. In this case,
the rear gate will not open or close
automatically.
If the power rear gate senses a malfunction, an electronic chirp will sound and the
rear gate will stop opening or closing.
1. Press and hold the rear gate opener

button. If the rear gate does not open,
perform the procedure described in Rear
gate (Outback) if the rear gate cannot be
opened F9-20.
2. Gently close the rear gate by hand
until it reaches the half-shut position.
3. Operate the power rear gate to confirm
it is recovered.
In order for the rear gate to open and close

automatically, carry out the following
operation. If the rear gate does not open
CONTINUED
Black plate (502,1)
9-22
In case of emergency/If your vehicle is involved in an accident
! When the rear gate is stuck at the

fully open position or does not fully
close
If the rear gate cannot be closed due to a
dead battery, etc., while the rear gate is
stopped midway, it can be closed by hand.
it is recovered.
& When the rear gate cannot be

opened
Perform the procedure described in Rear
gate (Outback) if the rear gate cannot be
opened F9-20.
& When the rear gate cannot be

closed
CAUTION
. On areas which are not flat, such
as hills, do not conduct any of
the following actions. The rear
gate may close suddenly and hit
someones head, face or catch
fingers and body parts in it,
resulting in injury.
. Even while conducting the following actions on a flat surface,
be careful not to be injured by

getting caught in or hit by the
rear gate.
. When operating the power rear
gate manually, do not use excessive force. Doing so may cause a
malfunction.
. After closing the rear gate by the
following methods, we recommend that you have the vehicle
checked at a SUBARU dealer.
If the rear gate cannot be closed due to a
dead battery, etc., while the rear gate is
stopped midway, it can be closed by hand.
it is recovered.
If your vehicle is involved in

an accident
CAUTION
If your vehicle is involved in an
accident, be sure to inspect the
ground under the vehicle before
restarting the engine. If you find that
fuel has leaked on the ground, do
not try to restart the engine. The fuel
system has been damaged and is in
need of repair. Immediately contact
the nearest automotive service facility. We recommend that you consult
your SUBARU dealer.
Your vehicle has a fuel pump shut off
system. When the vehicle sustains an
impact in an accident, etc., the fuel pump
shut off system stops supplying the fuel in
order to minimize fuel leakage.
Perform the following procedures to restart the engine after the system is
activated.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK
or ACC position.
Black plate (503,1)
In case of emergency/If your vehicle is involved in an accident
9-23

1. Turn the push-button ignition switch to
the ACC or OFF position.
Black plate (2,1)
Left Page
Black plate (21,1)
Appearance care
Exterior care .......................................................
10-2
Cleaning the interior..........................................
10-5
Washing.............................................................
Waxing and polishing .........................................
Cleaning aluminum wheels .................................
10-2
10-3
10-3
10-5
10-5
10-6
Corrosion protection..........................................
10-4
Most common causes of corrosion .....................

To help prevent corrosion...................................
10-4
10-4
Seat fabric .........................................................

Leather seat materials........................................
Synthetic leather upholstery...............................
Climate control panel, audio panel, instrument
panel, console panel, switches, combination
meter, and other plastic surface .......................
Monitor (if equipped)..........................................
10-6
10-6
10
Black plate (506,1)
10-2
Appearance care/Exterior care
Exterior care
& Washing
CAUTION
. When washing the vehicle, the
brakes may get wet. As a result,
the brake stopping distance will
be longer. To dry the brakes,
drive the vehicle at a safe speed
while lightly pressing the brake
pedal to heat up the brakes.
. Do not wash the engine compartment and areas adjacent to it. If
water enters the engine air intake
or electrical parts, it will cause
engine trouble or a malfunction
of the power steering.
. When washing inner fenders,
underbody, bumpers and protruding objects such as exhaust
pipes and exhaust finishers, be
careful to prevent injuries from
contacting sharp ends.
. Do not use any organic solvents
when washing the surface of the
bulb assembly cover. However, if
a detergent with organic solvents
is used to wash the cover surface, completely rinse off the
detergent with water. Otherwise,
the cover surface may be damaged.

. Outback: Since your vehicle is
equipped with a rear wiper, automatic car-wash brushes could
become tangled around it, damaging the wiper arm and other
components. Ask the automatic
car-wash operator not to let the
brushes touch the wiper arm or
to fix the wiper arm on the rear
window glass with adhesive tape
before operating the machine.
NOTE
When having your vehicle washed in
an automatic car wash, make sure
beforehand that the car wash is of
suitable type.
The best way to preserve your vehicles
beauty is frequent washing. Wash the
vehicle at least once a month to avoid
contamination by road grime.
Wash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty
of lukewarm or cold water. Do not wash
the vehicle with hot water and in direct
sunlight.
Salt, chemicals, insects, tar, soot, tree
sap, and bird droppings should be washed
off by using a light detergent, as required.
If you use a light detergent, make certain

that it is a neutral detergent. Do not use
strong soap or chemical detergents. All
cleaning agents should be promptly
flushed from the surface and not allowed
to dry there. Rinse the vehicle thoroughly
with plenty of lukewarm water. Wipe the
remaining water off with a chamois or soft
cloth. Wear rubber gloves and use a hand
brush when washing down underbody,
inner fenders and suspension to effectively remove mud and dirt off.
! Washing the underbody
Chemicals, salts and gravel used for
deicing road surfaces are extremely corrosive, accelerating the corrosion of underbody components, such as the exhaust
system, fuel and brake lines, brake
cables, floor pan and fenders, and suspension.
Thoroughly flush the underbody and inside of the fenders with lukewarm or cold
water at frequent intervals to reduce the
harmful effects of such agents.
Mud and sand adhering to the underbody
components may accelerate their corrosion.
After driving off-road or on muddy or
sandy roads, wash the mud and sand off
the underbody.
Carefully flush the suspension and axle
Black plate (507,1)
Appearance care/Exterior care
parts, as they are particularly prone to

mud and sand buildup. Do not use a
sharp-edged tool to remove caked mud.
CAUTION
. Be careful not to damage brake
hoses, sensor harnesses, and
other parts when washing suspension components.
. Be careful not to flush the engine
bottom for a long time. It may
cause damage of some electrical
parts.
! Using a warm water washer
. Keep a good distance of 12 in (30 cm)
or more between the washer nozzle and
the vehicle.
. Do not wash the same area continuously.
. If a stain will not come out easily, wash
by hand. Some warm water washers are
of the high temperature, high pressure
type, and they can damage or deform the
resin parts such as mouldings, or cause
water to leak into the vehicle.
& Waxing and polishing

Always wash and dry the vehicle before
waxing and polishing.
Use a good quality polish and wax and
apply them according to the manufacturers instructions. Wax or polish when
the painted surface is cool.
Be sure to polish and wax the chrome trim,
as well as the painted surfaces. Loss of
wax on a painted surface leads to loss of
the original luster and also quickens the
deterioration of the surface. It is recommended that a coat of wax be applied at
least once a month, or whenever the
surface no longer repels water.
If the appearance of the paint has diminished to the point where the luster or tone
cannot be restored, lightly polish the
surface with a fine-grained compound.
Never polish just the affected area, but
include the surrounding area as well.
Always polish in only one direction. A
No. 2000 grain compound is recommended. Never use a coarse-grained
compound. Coarser grained compounds
have a smaller grain-size number and
could damage the paint. After polishing
with a compound, coat with wax to restore
the original luster. Frequent polishing with
a compound or an incorrect polishing
technique will result in removing the paint
10-3
layer and exposing the undercoat. When

in doubt, it is always best to contact your
SUBARU dealer or an auto paint specialist.
CAUTION
Do not use any agents with organic
solvents on the surface of the bulb
assembly cover. However, if a polish
or wax with organic solvents is
applied to the cover surface, completely wipe off the polish or wax.
Otherwise, the cover surface may be
damaged.
NOTE
Be careful not to block the windshield
washer nozzles with wax when waxing
the vehicle.
& Cleaning aluminum wheels

. Promptly wipe the aluminum wheels
clean of any kind of grime or agent. If dirt
is left on too long, it may be difficult to
clean off.
. Do not use soap containing grit to
clean the wheels. Be sure to use a neutral
cleaning agent, and later rinse thoroughly
with water. Do not clean the wheels with a
stiff brush or expose them to a high-speed
CONTINUED
10
Black plate (508,1)
10-4
Appearance care/Corrosion protection
washing device.
. Clean the vehicle (including the aluminum wheels) with water as soon as
possible when it has been splashed with
sea water, exposed to sea breezes, or
driven on roads treated with salt or other
agents.
Corrosion protection
Your SUBARU has been designed and
built to resist corrosion. Special materials
and protective finishes have been used on
most parts of the vehicle to help maintain
fine appearance, strength, and reliable
operation.
& Most common causes of

corrosion
The most common causes of corrosion
are:
. The accumulation of moisture retaining
dirt and debris in body panel sections,
cavities, and other areas.
. Damage to paint and other protective
coatings caused by gravel and stone
chips or minor accidents.
Corrosion is accelerated on the vehicle
when:
. It is exposed to road salt or dust control
chemicals, or used in coastal areas where
there is more salt in the air, or in areas
where there is considerable industrial
pollution.
. It is driven in areas of high humidity,
especially when temperatures range just
above freezing.
. Dampness in certain parts of the
vehicle remains for a long time, even

though other parts of the vehicle may be
dry.
. High temperatures will cause corrosion
to parts of the vehicle which cannot dry
quickly due to lack of proper ventilation.
& To help prevent corrosion

Wash the vehicle regularly to prevent
corrosion of the body and suspension
components. Also, wash the vehicle
promptly after driving on any of the
following surfaces.
. roads that have been salted to prevent
them from freezing in winter
. mud, sand, or gravel
. coastal roads
After the winter has ended, it is recommended that the underbody be given a
very thorough washing.
Before the beginning of winter, check the
condition of underbody components, such
as the exhaust system, fuel and brake
lines, brake cables, suspension, steering
system, floor pan, and fenders. If any of
them are found to be rusted, they should
be given an appropriate rust prevention
treatment or should be replaced. Contact
your SUBARU dealer to perform this kind
of maintenance and treatment if you need
Black plate (509,1)
Appearance care/Cleaning the interior
assistance.
Repair chips and scratches in the paint as
soon as you find them.
Check the interior of the vehicle for water
and dirt accumulation under the floor mats
because that could cause corrosion.
Occasionally check under the mats to
make sure the area is dry.
Keep your garage dry. Do not park your
vehicle in a damp, poorly ventilated
garage. In such a garage, corrosion can
be caused by dampness. If you wash the
vehicle in the garage or put the vehicle
into the garage when wet or covered with
snow, that can cause dampness.
If your vehicle is operated in cold weather
and/or in areas where road salts and other
corrosive materials are used, the door
hinges and locks, trunk lid lock, and hood
latch should be inspected and lubricated
periodically.
Cleaning the interior

Use a soft, damp cloth to clean the climate
control panel, audio equipment, instrument panel, center console, combination
meter panel, and switches. (Do not use
organic solvents.)
& Seat fabric

Remove loose dirt, dust or debris with a
vacuum cleaner. If the dirt is caked on the
fabric or hard to remove with a vacuum
cleaner, use a soft brush then vacuum it.
Wipe the fabric surface with a tightly
wrung cloth and dry the seat fabric
thoroughly. If the fabric is still dirty, wipe
using a solution of mild soap and lukewarm water then dry thoroughly.
If the stain does not come out, try a
commercially available fabric cleaner. Use
the cleaner on a hidden place and make
sure it does not affect the fabric adversely.
Use the cleaner according to its instructions.
10-5
CAUTION
When cleaning the seat, do not use
benzine, paint thinner, or any similar
materials. Doing so could damage
the surface and cause the color to
deteriorate.
& Leather seat materials

The leather used by SUBARU is a high
quality natural product which will retain its
distinctive appearance and feel for many
years with proper care.
Allowing dust or road dirt to build up on the
surface can cause the material to become
brittle and to wear prematurely. Regular
cleaning with a soft, moist, natural fiber
cloth should be performed monthly, taking
care not to soak the leather or allow water
to penetrate the stitched seams.
A mild detergent suitable for cleaning
woolen fabrics may be used to remove
difficult dirt spots, rubbing with a soft, dry
cloth afterwards to restore the luster. If
your SUBARU is to be parked for a long
time in bright sunlight, it is recommended
that the seats and headrests be covered,
or the windows shaded, to prevent fading
or shrinkage.
Minor surface blemishes or bald patches
may be treated with a commercial leather
CONTINUED
10
Black plate (510,1)
10-6
Appearance care/Cleaning the interior
spray lacquer. You will discover that each

leather seat section will develop soft folds
or wrinkles, which is characteristic of
genuine leather.
& Synthetic leather upholstery

The synthetic leather material used on the
SUBARU may be cleaned using mild soap
or detergent and water, after first vacuuming or brushing away loose dirt. Allow the
soap to soak in for a few minutes and wipe
off with a clean, damp cloth. Commercial
foam-type cleaners suitable for synthetic
leather materials may be used when
necessary.
CAUTION
Strong cleaning agents such as
solvents, paint thinners, window
cleaner or gasoline must never be
used on leather or synthetic interior
materials. Doing so could damage
the surface and cause the color to
deteriorate.
& Climate control panel, audio

panel, instrument panel,
console panel, switches,
combination meter, and other
plastic surface
Use a soft, damp cloth to clean the climate
control panel, audio equipment, instrument panel, center console, combination
meter panel, and switches.
CAUTION
. Do not use organic solvents such
as paint thinners or gasoline, or
strong cleaning agents that contain those solvents. Doing so
could damage the surface and
cause the color to deteriorate.
. Do not use chemical solvents
that contain silicone on the vehicle audio system, electrical components of the air-conditioner or
any switches. If silicone adheres
to these parts, it may cause
damage to electrical components.
& Monitor (if equipped)

To clean the audio/navigation monitor,
wipe it with a silicone cloth or with a soft
cloth. If the monitor is extremely dirty,
clean it with a soft cloth moistened with
neutral detergent then carefully wipe off
any remaining detergent.
CAUTION
. Do not spray neutral detergent
directly onto the monitor. Doing
so could damage the monitors
components.
. Do not wipe the monitor with a
hard cloth. Doing so could
scratch the monitor.
. Do not use cleaning fluid that
contains thinner, gasoline, or any
other volatile substance. Such
cleaning fluid could erase the
lettering on the switches at the
bottom of the monitor.
Black plate (23,1)

Maintenance schedule .......................................
Maintenance precautions...................................
Before checking or servicing in the engine
compartment....................................................
When checking or servicing in the engine
compartment (2.5 L models) .............................
When checking or servicing in the engine
compartment while the engine is running..........
11-3
11-3
11-4
11-5
11-5
Maintenance tips ................................................
11-5
Removing and reinstalling clips ..........................
11-5
Engine hood .......................................................

Engine compartment overview..........................
11-7
11-9
2.5 L models ...................................................... 11-9

3.6 L models .................................................... 11-10
Engine oil..........................................................
11-11
Engine oil consumption....................................

Checking the oil level .......................................
Changing the oil and oil filter............................
Recommended grade and viscosity ..................
Synthetic oil.....................................................
11-11
11-11
11-13
11-13
11-13
Cooling system ................................................
11-14
Cooling fan, hose and connections ...................

Engine coolant .................................................
11-14
11-15
Air cleaner element ..........................................
11-15
Replacing the air cleaner element .....................
11-16
Spark plugs ......................................................
11-18
Recommended spark plugs ..............................
11-18
Drive belts ........................................................

Manual transmission oil ..................................
11-18
11-19
11-19
Continuously variable transmission fluid ......

Front differential gear oil (CVT models) and
rear differential gear oil................................
11-19
11-19
11-19
Brake fluid........................................................
11-20
Checking the fluid level....................................

Recommended brake fluid ...............................
11-20
11-21
Clutch fluid (MT models) .................................
11-21
Checking the fluid level....................................

Recommended clutch fluid...............................
11-21
11-22
Brake booster ..................................................

Brake pedal ......................................................
11-22
11-23
Checking the brake pedal free play ..................

Checking the brake pedal reserve distance.......
11-23
11-23
Clutch pedal (MT models) ...............................
11-23
Checking the clutch function............................

Checking the clutch pedal free play..................
11-23
11-24
Replacement of brake pad ..............................
11-24
Breaking-in of new brake pads .........................
11-24
Tires and wheels..............................................
11-25
Types of tires...................................................
equipped) ......................................................
Tire inspection.................................................
Tire pressures and wear ..................................
Wheel balance .................................................
Wear indicators ...............................................
Tire rotation direction mark ..............................
Tire rotation.....................................................
Tire replacement..............................................
11-25
11-25
11-27
11-27
11-29
11-29
11-29
11-30
11-30
11
Black plate (24,1)
Wheel replacement...........................................
11-31
Aluminum wheels.............................................
Windshield washer fluid ..................................
Replacement of wiper blades ..........................
11-32
11-32
11-33
Windshield wiper blade assembly .....................

Windshield wiper blade rubber .........................
Rear window wiper blade assembly
(Outback) .......................................................
Rear window wiper blade rubber (Outback) .......
11-34
11-34
11-35
11-36
Battery...............................................................
Fuses ................................................................
Installation of accessories...............................
Replacing bulbs ...............................................
11-37
11-38
11-40
11-40
HID headlights (if equipped) .............................

Halogen headlights ..........................................
11-40
11-41
Front turn signal light ......................................

Front side marker light.....................................
Front fog light (if equipped)..............................
Rear combination lights ...................................
Backup light ....................................................
License plate light ...........................................
Dome light.......................................................
Map light .........................................................
Door step light.................................................
Cargo area light (Outback) ...............................
Trunk light (Legacy) .........................................
Other bulbs .....................................................
11-42
11-42
11-42
11-44
11-46
11-47
11-48
11-48
11-49
11-49
11-49
11-49
Replacing battery.............................................
11-50
Replacing battery of access key.......................

Replacing battery of transmitter .......................
11-50
11-51
Black plate (515,1)
Maintenance and service/Maintenance schedule
Maintenance schedule
Maintenance precautions
U.S. models
The scheduled maintenance items required to be serviced at regular intervals
are shown in the Warranty and Maintenance Booklet. For details, read the
separate Warranty and Maintenance
Booklet.
When maintenance and service are required, it is recommended that all work be
done by an authorized SUBARU dealer.
Canada models
The scheduled maintenance items required to be serviced at regular intervals
are shown in the Warranty and Service
Booklet. For details, read the separate
Warranty and Service Booklet.
Except for U.S. and Canada models
Some items of your vehicle are required to
be serviced at scheduled intervals. For
details about your maintenance schedule,
read the separate Warranty and Maintenance Booklet.
If you perform maintenance and service

by yourself, you should familiarize yourself
with the information provided in this
section on general maintenance and
service for your SUBARU.
Incorrect or incomplete service could
cause improper or unsafe vehicle operation. Any problems caused by improper
maintenance and service performed by
you are not eligible for warranty coverage.
WARNING
. Testing of an All-Wheel Drive
vehicle must NEVER be performed on a single two-wheel
dynamometer or similar apparatus. Attempting to do so will
result in transmission damage
and in uncontrolled vehicle
movement and may cause an
accident or injuries to persons
nearby.
. Always select a safe area when
performing maintenance on your
vehicle.
11-3
. Always be very careful to avoid

injury when working on the vehicle. Remember that some of the
materials in the vehicle may be
hazardous if improperly used or
handled, for example, battery
acid.
. Your vehicle should only be serviced by persons fully competent
to do so. Serious personal injury
may result to persons not experienced in servicing vehicles.
. Always use the proper tools and
make certain that they are well
maintained.
. Never get under the vehicle supported only by a jack. Always use
safety stands to support the
vehicle.
. Never keep the engine running in
a poorly ventilated area, such as
a garage or other closed areas.
. Do not smoke or allow open
flames around the fuel or battery.
This will cause a fire.
. Because the fuel system is under
pressure, replacement of the fuel
filter should be performed only
by your SUBARU dealer.
. Wear adequate eye protection to
CONTINUED
11
Black plate (516,1)
11-4
Maintenance and service/Maintenance precautions
guard against getting oil or fluids

in your eyes. If something does
get in your eyes, thoroughly
wash them out with clean water.
. Do not tamper with the wiring of
the SRS airbag system or seatbelt pretensioner system, or attempt to take its connectors
apart, as that may activate the
system or it can render it inoperative. NEVER use a circuit
tester for these wiring. If your
SRS airbag or seatbelt pretensioner needs service, consult
your nearest SUBARU dealer.
NOTE
SUBARU does not endorse the use of
non-SUBARU approved flushing systems and strongly advises against
performing these services on a
SUBARU vehicle. Non-SUBARU approved flushing systems use chemicals and/or solvents which have not
been tested or approved by SUBARU.
SUBARU warranties do not cover any
part of the vehicle which is damaged by
adding or applying chemicals and/or
solvents other than those approved or
recommended by SUBARU.
& Before checking or servicing

in the engine compartment
WARNING
. Always stop the engine and apply
the parking brake to prevent the
vehicle from moving.
. Always let the engine cool down.
Engine parts become very hot
when the engine is running and
remain hot for some time after
the engine is stopped.
. Do not spill engine oil, engine
coolant, brake fluid or any other
fluid on hot engine components.
This may cause a fire.
. When the ignition switch is in the
ON position, the cooling fan
may operate suddenly even
when the engine is stopped. If
your body or clothes come into
contact with a rotating fan, that
could result in serious injury. To
avoid risk of injury, perform the
following precautions.
Models with push-button start
system:
Always turn the push-button
ignition switch to the OFF
position and confirm that the
operation indicator on the

switch is turned off. Then take
the access key out from the
vehicle.
Models without push-button
start system:
Always remove the key from
. Before performing any servicing
on a vehicle equipped with a
remote engine start system temporarily place that system in the
service mode to prevent it from
unexpectedly starting the engine.
Black plate (517,1)
Maintenance and service/Maintenance tips
& When checking or servicing

(2.5 L models)
the engine has stopped.
& When checking or servicing

WARNING
A running engine can be dangerous.
Keep your fingers, hands, clothing,
hair and tools away from the cooling
fan, belts and any other moving
engine parts. Removing rings,
watches and ties is advisable.
11-5
Maintenance tips
Some clips and fender linings must be
removed before replacing the air cleaner
elements or specific bulbs.
& Removing and reinstalling

clips
! Removing clips
There are several types of clips used for
your vehicle.
! Type A and D clips
CAUTION
. Do not contact the belt cover
while checking the components
in the engine compartment.
Doing so may cause your hand
to slip off the belt cover and
result in an unexpected injury.
. Do not touch the oil filter until the
engine has cooled down completely. Doing so may result in a
burn or other injury. Note that the
oil filter becomes very hot when
the engine is running and remains hot for some time after
11
Type A clips
CONTINUED
Black plate (518,1)
11-6
Maintenance and service/Maintenance tips
! Type B clips
! Type C clips
Type D clips
1. Turn the clips counterclockwise using

a flat-head screwdriver until the center
portion of the clip is raised.
2. Remove the clips with a flat-head
screwdriver using leverage.
1. Pull out the center portion of the clip

using a flat-head screwdriver as shown in
the illustration.
2. Pull the protruded center portion to
remove the entire body of the clip.
1. Turn the clip counterclockwise using a

Phillips screwdriver until the center portion
of the clip is raised.
2. Remove the entire clip by pulling it up.
Black plate (519,1)
Maintenance and service/Engine hood
11-7
Engine hood
! Reinstalling clips
CAUTION
Type C clips
Type A clips
Type D clips
Type B clips
Insert the clip without the center portion

first and then push the center portion of
the clip into the hole.
. When you open the engine hood,

do not stand the wiper blades up.
Furthermore, while the hood is
open, do not operate the windshield wipers. Doing so could
result in damage to the engine
hood and wiper blades.
. Be extremely careful not to catch
fingers or other objects when
closing the engine hood.
. Do not push the hood forcibly to
close it. It could deform the
metal.
. Be extremely careful opening the
engine hood when the wind is
strong. The engine hood could
close suddenly, possibly causing
injuries from slamming.
. Do not install accessories other
than genuine SUBARU parts to
the engine hood. If the engine
hood becomes too heavy, the
stay may not be able to support
holding it open.
CONTINUED
11
Black plate (520,1)
11-8
Maintenance and service/Engine hood
To open the hood:

1. If the wiper blades are lifted off the
windshield, return them to their original
positions.
3. Release the secondary hood lock by

moving the lever between the front grille
and the hood toward the left.
4. Lift up the hood.
To close the hood:
1. Lower the hood to a height of approximately 5.9 in (15 cm) above its closed
position and then throw it down.
2. After closing the hood, be sure the
hood is securely locked.
If this does not close the hood, release it
from a slightly higher position.
WARNING
2. Pull the hood lock release knob under
the instrument panel.
Always check that the hood is

properly locked before you start
driving. If it is not, it might fly open
while the vehicle is moving and
block your view, which may cause
an accident and serious bodily injury.
Black plate (521,1)
Maintenance and service/Engine compartment overview
Engine compartment overview

& 2.5 L models
11-9
1)
Brake fluid reservoir/Clutch fluid reservoir

(MT) (page 11-20)
2) Fuse box (page 11-38)
3) Windshield washer tank (page 11-32)
4) Battery (page 11-37)
5) Engine oil filler cap (page 11-11)
6) Engine coolant reservoir (page 11-15)
7) Radiator cap (page 11-15)
8) Engine oil filter (page 11-13)
9) Engine oil level gauge (page 11-11)
10) Air cleaner case (page 11-15)
11
CONTINUED
Black plate (522,1)
11-10
Maintenance and service/Engine compartment overview
& 3.6 L models
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
Brake fluid reservoir (page 11-20)

Fuse box (page 11-38)
Windshield washer tank (page 11-32)
Battery (page 11-37)
Engine oil filler cap (page 11-11)
Engine coolant reservoir (page 11-15)
Radiator cap (page 11-15)
Engine oil level gauge (page 11-11)
Air cleaner case (page 11-15)
Black plate (523,1)
Maintenance and service/Engine oil
Engine oil
CAUTION
. If the level gauge is not pulled out
easily, twist the level gauge right
and left, then pull it out. Otherwise, you may be injured accidentally straining yourself.
. Use only engine oil with the
recommended grade and viscosity.
. Be careful not to spill engine oil
when adding it. If oil touches the
exhaust pipe, it may cause a bad
smell, smoke, and/or a fire. If
engine oil gets on the exhaust
pipe, be sure to wipe it off.
& Engine oil consumption

Some engine oil will be consumed while
driving. The rate of consumption can be
affected by such factors as transmission
type, driving style, terrain and temperature. Under the following conditions, oil
consumption can be increased and thus
require refilling between maintenance
intervals:
. When the engine is new and within the
break-in period
. When the engine oil is of lower quality

. When the incorrect oil viscosity is used
. When engine braking is employed
(repeatedly)
. When the engine is operated at high
engine speeds (for extended periods of
time)
. When the engine is operated under
heavy loads (for extended periods of time)
. When towing a trailer (Outback)
. When the engine idles for extended
periods of time
. When the vehicle is operated in stop
and go and/or heavy traffic situations
. When the vehicle is used under severe
thermal conditions
. When the vehicle accelerates and
decelerates frequently
Under these or similar conditions, you
should check your oil at least every 2nd
fuel fill-up and change your engine oil
more frequently. Different drivers in the
same car may experience different results.
If your oil consumption rate is greater than
expected, contact your authorized
SUBARU retailer who may perform a test
under controlled conditions.
11-11
& Checking the oil level

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and
stop the engine. If you check the oil level
just after stopping the engine, wait a few
minutes for the oil to drain back into the oil
pan before checking the level.
2.5
1)
2)
3)
L models
Oil level gauge
Oil filler cap
Oil filter
11
CONTINUED
Black plate (524,1)
11-12
3.6 L models
1) Oil level gauge
2) Oil filler cap
CAUTION
If the level gauge is not pulled out
easily, twist the level gauge right
and left, then pull it out. Otherwise,
you may be injured accidentally
straining yourself.
2. Pull out the level gauge, wipe it clean,
and insert it again.
3. Be sure the level gauge is correctly
inserted until it stops.
2.5
1)
2)
3)
L models
Full level
Low level
Approximately 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter, 0.9
Imp qt) from low level to full level
3.6
1)
2)
3)
L models
Full level
Low level
Approximately 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter, 0.9
Imp qt) from low level to full level
4. Pull out the oil level gauge again.

5. 2.5 L models:
Check the oil levels on both sides of the
level gauge. The engine oil level must be
judged by the lowest of the two levels. If
the oil level is below the low level mark,
add oil so that the full level is reached.
3.6 L models:
Check the oil level on the gauge. If the oil
level is below the low level mark, add oil
so that the full level is reached.
Black plate (525,1)
CAUTION
. For 2.5 L models, be careful not
to touch the engine oil filter when
removing the oil filler cap. Doing
so may result in a burn, a
pinched finger, or may cause
some other injury.
. Use only engine oil with the
recommended grade and viscosity.
. Be careful not to spill engine oil
when adding it. If oil touches the
exhaust pipe, it may cause a bad
smell, smoke, and/or a fire. If
engine oil gets on the exhaust
pipe, be sure to wipe it off.
To add engine oil, remove the engine oil
filler cap and slowly pour engine oil
through the filler neck. After pouring oil
into the engine, you must use the level
gauge to confirm that the oil level is
correct.
NOTE
To prevent overfilling the engine oil, do
not add any additional oil above the full
level when the engine is cold.
& Changing the oil and oil filter
11-13
Change the oil and oil filter according to

the maintenance schedule in the Warranty and Maintenance Booklet.
provide better fuel economy. However,

in hot weather, oil of higher viscosity is
required to properly lubricate the engine.
NOTE
& Synthetic oil
. Changing the engine oil and oil filter

should be performed by a well-trained
expert. Contact your SUBARU dealer
for changing the engine oil and oil filter.
Fully trained mechanics are on standby
at a SUBARU dealer to utilize the
special tools, spare parts and recommended oil for this work, and also,
used oils are properly disposed of.
. If performing oil replacement yourself, observe the local regulations and
dispose of waste oil properly.
& Recommended grade and

viscosity
You should use synthetic engine oil that

meets the same requirements given for
conventional engine oil. When using
synthetic oil, you must use oil of the same
classification, viscosity and grade shown
in this Owners Manual. Refer to Engine
oil F12-4. Also, you must follow the oil
and filter changing intervals shown in the
Warranty and Maintenance booklet.
NOTE
Synthetic oil of the grade and viscosity
noted in chapter 12 is the recommended engine oil for optimum engine
performance. Conventional oil may be
used if synthetic oil is unavailable.
CAUTION
11
Use only engine oil with the recommended grade and viscosity.
Refer to Engine oil F12-4.
NOTE
Engine oil viscosity (thickness) affects
fuel economy. Oils of lower viscosity
Black plate (526,1)
11-14
Maintenance and service/Cooling system
Cooling system
WARNING
Never attempt to remove the radiator cap until the engine has been
shut off and has cooled down
completely. Since the coolant is
under pressure, you may suffer
serious burns from a spray of boiling hot coolant when the cap is
removed.
CAUTION
. Vehicles are filled at the factory
with SUBARU Super Coolant that
does not require the first change
for 11 years/137,500 miles (11
years/220,000 km). This coolant
should not be mixed with any
other brand or type of coolant
during this period. Mixing with a
different coolant will reduce the
life of the coolant. Should it be
necessary to top off the coolant
for any reason, use only
SUBARU Super Coolant.
If the SUBARU Super Coolant is
diluted with another brand or
type, the maintenance interval is

shortened to that of the mixing
coolant.
. Do not splash the engine coolant
over painted parts. The alcohol
contained in the engine coolant
may damage the paint surface.
& Cooling fan, hose and connections

Your vehicle employs an electric cooling
fan which is thermostatically controlled to
operate when the engine coolant reaches
a specific temperature.
1)
ture gauge exceeds the normal operating

range, the cooling fan circuit may be
defective. Refer to Temperature gauge
F3-12.
Check the fuse and replace it if necessary.
Refer to Fuses F11-38 and Fuses and
circuits F12-10. If the fuse is not blown,
have the cooling system checked by your
SUBARU dealer.
If frequent addition of coolant is necessary, there may be a leak in the engine
cooling system. It is recommended that
the cooling system and connections be
checked for leaks, damage, or looseness.
Normal operating range
If the radiator cooling fan does not operate

even when the engine coolant tempera-
Black plate (527,1)
Maintenance and service/Air cleaner element
& Engine coolant

! Checking the coolant level
1)
2)
FULL level mark

LOW level mark
Check the coolant level at each fuel stop.

1. Check the coolant level on the outside
of the reservoir while the engine is cool.
2. If the level is close to or lower than the
LOW level mark, add coolant up to the
FULL level mark. If the reserve tank is
empty, remove the radiator cap and refill
as required.
3. After refilling the reserve tank and the
radiator, reinstall the caps and check that
the rubber gaskets inside the radiator cap
are in the proper position.
CAUTION
. Be careful not to spill engine
coolant when adding it. If coolant
touches the exhaust pipe, it may
cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or
a fire. If engine coolant gets on
the exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe
it off.
. Do not splash the engine coolant
over painted parts. The alcohol
contained in the engine coolant
may damage the paint surface.
! Changing the coolant
It may be difficult to change the coolant.
Have the coolant changed by your
SUBARU dealer if necessary.
The coolant should be changed according
to the maintenance schedule in the
11-15
Air cleaner element

WARNING
air cleaner element removed. The air
cleaner element not only filters
intake air but also stops flames if
the engine backfires. If the air
cleaner element is not installed
when the engine backfires, you
could be burned.
CAUTION
When replacing the air cleaner element, use a genuine SUBARU air
cleaner element. If it is not used,
there is the possibility of causing a
negative effect to the engine.
The air cleaner element functions as a
filter screen. When the element is perforated or removed, engine wear will be
excessive and engine life shortened.
The air cleaner element is a dry type. It is
unnecessary to clean or wash the element.
CONTINUED
11
Black plate (528,1)
11-16
& Replacing the air cleaner

element
CAUTION
If the inside of the air cleaner case is
extremely soiled (for example, by
sand), contact a SUBARU dealer
and have the air cleaner case
cleaned.
Replace the air cleaner element according

Warranty and Maintenance Booklet. Under extremely dusty conditions, replace it
more frequently. It is recommended that
you always use genuine SUBARU parts.
4. If you find large foreign objects such

as leaves inside the air cleaner case,
remove the foreign objects.
! 2.5 L models
2. Open the air cleaner case.
1)
Clip
1. Unsnap the two clips holding the air

cleaner case (rear).
3. Remove the air cleaner element.
5. Install a new air cleaner element in the

way the longitudinal side and the transverse side face as shown in the illustration.
Black plate (529,1)
! 3.6 L models
11-17
the air cleaner element.
CAUTION
If the inside of the air cleaner case is
extremely soiled (for example, by
sand), contact a SUBARU dealer
and have the air cleaner case
cleaned.
3. If you find large foreign objects such
as leaves inside the air cleaner case,
remove the foreign objects.
6. To install the air cleaner case (rear),
insert the three projections on the air
cleaner case (rear) into the slits on the
air cleaner case (front).
7. Install in the reverse order of removal.
1)
Clips
1. Unsnap the two clips holding the air

cleaner case (rear).
11
4. Install a new air cleaner element in the
way the longitudinal side and the transverse side face as shown in the illustration.
2. Open the air cleaner case and remove
CONTINUED
Black plate (530,1)
11-18
Maintenance and service/Spark plugs
Spark plugs
Drive belts
It may be difficult to replace the spark

plugs. It is recommended that you have
the spark plugs replaced by your
SUBARU dealer.
It is unnecessary to check the deflection of

the drive belt periodically because your
engine is equipped with an automatic belt
tension adjuster. However, replacement of
the belt should be done according to the
maintenance schedule in the Warranty
and Maintenance Booklet. Consult your
SUBARU dealer for replacement.
If the belt is loose, cracked or worn,
The spark plugs should be replaced

according to the maintenance schedule
in the Warranty and Maintenance Booklet.
5. To install the air cleaner case (rear),
insert the three projections on the air
cleaner case (rear) into the slits on the
air cleaner case (front).
6. Install the removed parts in the reverse
order of removal.
& Recommended spark plugs

Refer to Electrical system F12-9.
Black plate (531,1)
Maintenance and service/Manual transmission oil
Manual transmission oil

It is unnecessary to check the manual
transmission oil level. However, if necessary, consult your SUBARU dealer for
inspection.

viscosity
Each oil manufacturer has its own base
oils and additives. Never use different
brands together. For details, refer to
Manual transmission, front differential
and rear differential gear oil F12-7.
Continuously variable transmission fluid

There is no fluid level gauge. It is
unnecessary to check the continuously
variable transmission fluid level. However,
if necessary, consult your SUBARU dealer
for inspection.
11-19
Front differential gear oil

(CVT models) and rear differential gear oil
It is not necessary to check the gear oil
level. Check that there are no cracks,
damage or leakage. However, the oil
inspection should be performed according

viscosity
Each oil manufacturer has its own base
oils and additives. Never use different
brands together. For details, refer to
Manual transmission, front differential
and rear differential gear oil F12-7.
CAUTION
Using a differential gear oil other
than the specified oil may cause a
decline in vehicle performance.
11
Black plate (532,1)
11-20
Maintenance and service/Brake fluid
Brake fluid
& Checking the fluid level
WARNING
. Never let brake fluid contact your
eyes because brake fluid can be
harmful to your eyes. If brake
fluid gets in your eyes, immediately flush them thoroughly with
clean water. For safety, when
performing this work, wearing
eye protection is advisable.
. Brake fluid absorbs moisture
from the air. Any absorbed moisture can cause a dangerous loss
of braking performance.
. If the vehicle requires frequent
refilling, there may be a leak. If
you suspect a problem, have the
vehicle checked at your SUBARU
dealer.
CAUTION
Alcohol contained in the brake

fluid may damage them.
. Be careful not to spill brake fluid
when adding it. If brake fluid
a fire. If brake fluid gets on the
exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe it
off.
The reservoir has two chambers, one for
clutch fluid and the other for brake fluid.
Each fluid level must therefore be checked
in the appropriate chamber. Check the
fluid level on the outside of the reservoir
monthly.
3.6
1)
2)
A)
L models
MAX level line
MIN level line
The brake fluid level must be checked in
this area.
For 3.6 L models, be sure to check the

brake fluid level on the outboard side of
the reservoir (shaded area in the illustration). It cannot be checked on the inboard
side of the reservoir. If the fluid level is
below MIN, add the recommended brake
fluid to MAX. Use only brake fluid from a
sealed container.
. When adding brake fluid, be careful not to allow any dirt into the
reservoir.
. Never splash the brake fluid over
painted surfaces or rubber parts.
Black plate (533,1)
Maintenance and service/Clutch fluid (MT models)
& Recommended brake fluid

Refer to Fluids F12-8.
CAUTION
Never use different brands of brake
fluid together. Also, avoid mixing
DOT 3 and DOT 4 brake fluids even if
they are the same brand.
2.5
1)
2)
A)
L models
MAX level line
MIN level line
The brake fluid level must be checked in
this area.
For 2.5 L models, be sure to check the

brake fluid level at the front part of the
reservoir (shaded area in the illustration).
If the fluid level is below MIN, add the
recommended brake fluid to MAX. Use
only brake fluid from a sealed container.
11-21
Clutch fluid (MT models)

& Checking the fluid level
WARNING
Never let clutch fluid contact your
eyes because clutch fluid can be
harmful to your eyes. If clutch fluid
gets in your eyes, immediately flush
them thoroughly with clean water.
For safety, when performing this
work, wearing eye protection is
advisable.
CAUTION
. Clutch fluid absorbs moisture
from the air. Any absorbed moisture can cause improper clutch
operation.
. If the vehicle requires frequent
refilling, there may be a leak. If
you suspect a problem, have the
vehicle checked at your SUBARU
dealer.
. When clutch fluid is added, be
careful not to allow any dirt into
the tank.
. Never splash the clutch fluid over
painted surfaces or rubber parts.
CONTINUED
11
Black plate (534,1)
11-22
Maintenance and service/Brake booster
Alcohol contained in the clutch

fluid may damage them.
. Be careful not to spill clutch fluid
when adding it. If clutch fluid
a fire. If clutch fluid gets on the
exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe it
off.
. The fluid level for the clutch
system must be checked at the
inboard side of the reservoir. It
cannot be checked at the outboard side of the reservoir.
Check the fluid level monthly.

Check the fluid level on the outside of the
reservoir. Because this reservoir is used
for both the brake and clutch systems and
has chambers for each system, be sure to
check the fluid level for the clutch system
at the inboard side of the reservoir
(shaded area in the illustration). If the fluid
level is below MIN, add the recommended clutch fluid to MAX.
Use only clutch fluid from a sealed
container.
& Recommended clutch fluid

Refer to Fluids F12-8.
CAUTION
Never use different brands of clutch
fluid together. Also, avoid mixing
DOT 3 and DOT 4 brake fluids even if
they are the same brand.
1)
2)
A)
Brake booster
If the brake booster does not operate as
described in the following procedure, have
it checked by your SUBARU dealer.
1. With the engine off, depress the brake
pedal several times, applying the same
pedal force each time. The distance the
pedal travels should not vary.
2. With the brake pedal depressed, start
the engine. The pedal should move
slightly down to the floor.
3. With the brake pedal depressed, stop
the engine and keep the pedal depressed
for 30 seconds. The pedal height should
not change.
4. Start the engine again and run for
approximately 1 minute then turn it off.
Depress the brake pedal several times to
check the brake booster. The brake
booster operates properly if the pedal
stroke decreases with each depression.
MAX level line

MIN level line
The clutch fluid level must be checked in
this area.
Black plate (535,1)
Maintenance and service/Brake pedal
Brake pedal
& Checking the brake pedal

reserve distance
Check the brake pedal free play and

reserve distance according to the maintenance schedule in the Warranty and
& Checking the clutch function
1)
0.02 0.11 in (0.5 2.7 mm)
Stop the engine and firmly depress the

brake pedal several times. Lightly pull the
brake pedal up with one finger to check
the free play with a force of less than 2 lbf
(10 N, 1 kgf).
If the free play is not within proper
specification, contact your SUBARU dealer.
Clutch pedal (MT models)

Check the clutch pedal free play according
& Checking the brake pedal

free play
1)
11-23
More than 2.56 in (65 mm)
Depress the pedal with a force of approximately 66 lbf (294 N, 30 kgf) and measure
the distance between the upper surface of
the pedal pad and the floor.
When the measurement is smaller than
the specification, or when the pedal does
not operate smoothly, contact with your
SUBARU dealer.
Check the clutch engagement and disengagement.

1. With the engine idling, check that there
are no abnormal noises when the clutch
pedal is depressed, and that shifting into
1st or reverse feels smooth.
2. Start the vehicle by releasing the pedal
slowly to check that the engine and
transmission smoothly couple without
any sign of slippage.
11
CONTINUED
Black plate (536,1)
11-24
Maintenance and service/Replacement of brake pad
& Checking the clutch pedal

free play
Replacement of brake pad

CAUTION
1)
0.19 0.44 in (5 11 mm)
Lightly press the clutch pedal down with

your finger until you feel resistance, and
check the free play.
If the free play is not within proper
specification, contact your SUBARU dealer.
. If you continue to drive despite

the scraping noise from the audible brake pad wear indicator, it
will result in the need for costly
brake rotor repair or replacement.
. It is recommended that you disconnect the vehicle battery before replacing the brake pad.
However, it is dangerous to disconnect the vehicle battery. We
recommend that you have your
SUBARU dealer replace the
brake pad.
The disc brakes have audible wear

indicators on the brake pads. If the brake
pads wear close to their service limit, the
wear indicator makes a very audible
scraping noise when the brake pedal is
applied.
If you hear this scraping noise each time
you apply the brake pedal, have the brake
pads serviced by your SUBARU dealer as
soon as possible.
& Breaking-in of new brake

pads
When replacing the brake pad, use only
genuine SUBARU parts. After replacement, the new parts must be broken in as
follows:
! Brake pad
While maintaining a speed of 30 to 40
mph (50 to 65 km/h), step on the brake
pedal lightly. Repeat this five or more
times. Also, apply and release the electronic parking brake five or more times.
Black plate (537,1)
Maintenance and service/Tires and wheels
Tires and wheels

& Types of tires
You should be familiar with type of tires
present on your vehicle.
! All season tires
The factory-installed tires on your new
vehicle are all season tires.
All season tires are designed to provide
an adequate measure of traction, handling
and braking performance in year-round
driving including snowy and icy road
conditions. However all season tires do
not offer as much traction performance as
winter (snow) tires in heavy or loose snow
or on icy roads.
All season tires are identified by ALL
SEASON and/or M+S (Mud & Snow) on
the tire sidewall.
! Summer tires
Summer tires are high-speed capability
tires best suited for highway driving under
dry conditions.
Summer tires are inadequate for driving
on slippery roads such as on snowcovered or icy roads.
If you drive your vehicle on snow-covered
or icy roads, we strongly recommend the
use of winter (snow) tires.
When installing winter tires, be sure to
replace all four tires.

! Winter (snow) tires
Winter tires are best suited for driving on
snow-covered and icy roads. However
winter tires do not perform as well as
summer tires and all season tires on roads
other than snow-covered and icy roads.
& Tire pressure monitoring

The tire pressure monitoring system provides the driver with a warning message
by sending a signal from a sensor that is
installed in each wheel when tire pressure
is severely low. The tire pressure monitoring system will activate only when the
vehicle is driven. Also, this system may
not react immediately to a sudden drop in
tire pressure (for example, a blow-out
caused by running over a sharp object).
If you adjust the tire pressures in a warm
garage and will then drive the vehicle in
cold outside air, the resulting drop in tire
pressures may cause the low tire pressure
warning light to illuminate. To avoid this
problem when adjusting the tire pressures
in a warm garage, inflate the tires to
pressures higher than those shown on the
tire placard. Specifically, inflate them by an
extra 1 psi (6.9 kPa, 0.07 kgf/cm2) for
every difference of 108F (5.68C) between
11-25
the temperature in the garage and the

temperature outside. By way of example,
the following table shows the required tire
pressures that correspond to various outside temperatures when the temperature
in the garage is 608F (15.68C).
Example:
Tire size: 225/55R17 97V, 225/50R18 95H
Standard tire pressures:
Front: 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2)
Rear: 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm2)
Garage temperature: 608F (15.68C)
Outside
temperature
Adjusted pressure
[psi (kPa, kgf/cm2)]
Front
Rear
308F (18C)
36 (250, 2.5)
35 (240, 2.4)
108F (128C)
38 (265, 2.65) 37 (255, 2.55)
108F (238C) 40 (280, 2.8)
39 (270, 2.7)
Example:
Tire size: 225/65R17 102H, 225/60R18
100H
Standard tire pressures:
Front: 35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm2)
Rear: 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2)
Garage temperature: 608F (15.68C)
CONTINUED
11
Black plate (538,1)
11-26
Outside
temperature
Adjusted pressure
[psi (kPa, kgf/cm2)]
Front
Rear
308F (18C)
38 (265, 2.65) 36 (250, 2.5)
108F (128C)
40 (280, 2.8) 38 (265, 2.65)
108F (238C) 42 (295, 2.95) 40 (280, 2.8)
If the low tire pressure warning light

illuminates when you drive the vehicle in
cold outside air after adjusting the tire
pressures in a warm garage, re-adjust the
tire pressures using the method described
above. Then, increase the vehicle speed
to at least 20 mph (32 km/h) and check to
see that the low tire pressure warning light
goes off a few minutes later. If the low tire
pressure warning light does not go off, the
tire pressure monitoring system may not
be functioning normally. In this event, go
to a SUBARU dealer to have the system
inspected as soon as possible.
While the vehicle is driven, friction between tires and the road surface causes
the tires to warm up. After illumination of
the low tire pressure warning light, any
increase in the tire pressures caused by
an increase in the outside air temperature
or by an increase in the temperature in the
tires can cause the low tire pressure
warning light to go off.
System resetting is necessary when the

wheels are changed (for example, a
switch to snow tires) and new TPMS
valves are installed on the newly fitted
wheels. Have this work performed by a
SUBARU dealer following wheel replacement.
It may not be possible to install TPMS
valves on certain wheels that are on the
market. Therefore, if you change the
wheels (for example, a switch to snow
tires), use wheels that have the same part
number as the standard-equipment
wheels. Without four operational TPMS
valve/sensors on the wheels, the TPMS
will not fully function and the warning light
in the instrument panel will illuminate
steadily after blinking for approximately
one minute.
When a tire is replaced, adjustments are
necessary to ensure continued normal
operation of the tire pressure monitoring
system. As with wheel replacement, therefore, you should have the work performed
by a SUBARU dealer.
WARNING
If the low tire pressure warning light
does not illuminate briefly after the
ignition switch is turned ON or the
light illuminates steadily after blink-
ing for approximately one minute,

you should have your Tire Pressure
Monitoring System checked at a
If this light illuminates while driving,
never brake suddenly. Instead, perform the following procedure. Otherwise an accident involving serious
vehicle damage and serious personal injury could occur.
1) Keep driving straight ahead while
gradually reducing speed.
2) Slowly pull off the road to a safe
place.
driving after adjusting the tire pressure, a tire may have significant
damage and a fast leak that causes
the tire to lose air rapidly. If you have
a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire
When a spare tire is mounted or a
original pressure sensor/transmitter
being transferred, the low tire pressure warning light will illuminate
steadily after blinking for approximately one minute. This indicates
the TPMS is unable to monitor all
four road wheels. Contact your
Black plate (539,1)
SUBARU dealer as soon as possible

for tire and sensor replacement and/
or system resetting. If the light
illuminates steadily after blinking
for approximately one minute,
promptly contact a SUBARU dealer
to have the system inspected.
& Tire inspection

Check on a daily basis that the tires are
free from serious damage, nails, and
stones. At the same time, check the tires
for abnormal wear.
Contact your SUBARU dealer immediately if you find any problem.
NOTE
. When the wheels and tires strike
curbs or are subjected to harsh treatment as when the vehicle is driven on a
rough surface, they can suffer damage
that cannot be seen with the naked eye.
This type of damage does not become
evident until time has passed. Try not
to drive over curbs, potholes or on
other rough surfaces. If doing so is
unavoidable, keep the vehicles speed
down to a walking pace or less, and
approach the curbs as squarely as
possible. Also, make sure the tires are
not pressed against the curb when you
park the vehicle.

. If you feel unusual vibration while
driving or find it difficult to steer the
vehicle in a straight line, one of the
tires and/or wheels may be damaged.
Drive slowly to the nearest authorized
SUBARU dealer and have the vehicle
inspected.
& Tire pressures and wear

Maintaining the correct tire pressures
helps to maximize the tires service lives
and is essential for good running performance. Check and, if necessary, adjust
the pressure of each tire (including the
spare) at least once a month (for example,
during a fuel stop) and before any long
journey.
11-27
Check the tire pressures when the tires

are cold. Use a pressure gauge to adjust
the tire pressures to the values shown on
the tire placard. The tire placard is located
on the door pillar on the drivers side.
Driving even a short distance warms up
the tires and increases the tire pressures.
Also, the tire pressures are affected by the
outside temperature. It is best to check tire
pressure outdoors before driving the
vehicle.
When a tire becomes warm, the air inside
it expands, causing the tire pressure to
increase. Be careful not to mistakenly
release air from a warm tire to reduce its
pressure.
NOTE
. The air pressure in a tire increases
by approximately 4.3 psi (30 kPa, 0.3
kgf/cm2) when the tire becomes warm.
. The tires are considered cold when
the vehicle has been parked for at least
3 hours or has been driven less than 1
mile (1.6 km).
WARNING
Tire placard
Do not let air out of warm tires to

adjust pressure. Doing so will result
in low tire pressure.
CONTINUED
11
Black plate (540,1)
11-28
Incorrect tire pressures detract from controllability and ride comfort, and they
cause the tires to wear abnormally.
. Correct tire pressure (tread worn
evenly)
Roadholding is good, and steering is

responsive. Rolling resistance is low, so
fuel consumption is also lower.
. Abnormally low tire pressure (tread

worn at shoulders)
. Abnormally high tire pressure (tread

worn in center)
Rolling resistance is high, so fuel consumption is also higher.
Ride comfort is poor. Also, the tire

magnifies the effects of road surface
bumps and dips, possibly resulting in
vehicle damage.
WARNING
the tires to deform severely and to
tread separation, and destruction of
the tires. The resulting loss of
accident.
Black plate (541,1)
& Wheel balance

Each wheel was correctly balanced when
your vehicle was new, but the wheels will
become unbalanced as the tires become
worn during use. Wheel imbalance causes
the steering wheel to vibrate slightly at
certain vehicle speeds and detracts from
the vehicles straight-line stability. It can
also cause steering and suspension system problems and abnormal tire wear. If
you suspect that the wheels are not
correctly balanced, have them checked
and adjusted by your SUBARU dealer.
Also have them adjusted after tire repairs
and after tire rotation.
CAUTION
Loss of correct wheel alignment
causes the tires to wear on one side
and reduces the vehicles running
stability. Contact your SUBARU
dealer if you notice abnormal tire
wear.
NOTE
The suspension system is designed to
hold each wheel at a certain alignment
(relative to the other wheels and to the
road) for optimum straight-line stability
and cornering performance.
& Wear indicators
11-29
cause the vehicle to hydroplane.

The resulting loss of vehicle control
can lead to an accident.
NOTE
For safety, inspect the tire tread regularly and replace the tires before their
tread wear indicators become visible.
& Tire rotation direction mark
1)
2)
3)
New tread
Worn tread
Tread wear indicator
Each tire incorporates a tread wear

indicator, which becomes visible when
the depth of the tread grooves decreases
to 0.063 in (1.6 mm). A tire must be
replaced when the tread wear indicator
appears as a solid band across the tread.
WARNING
When a tires tread wear indicator
becomes visible, the tire is worn
beyond the acceptable limit and
must be replaced immediately. With
a tire in this condition, driving at
high speeds in wet weather can
11
Example of tire rotation direction mark
1) Front
If the tire has a rotation direction specification, the tire rotation direction mark is
placed on its sidewall.
When you install a tire that has the tire
rotation direction mark, install the tire with
CONTINUED
Black plate (542,1)
11-30
& Tire replacement
the direction mark facing forward.
& Tire rotation
Vehicles equipped with unidirectional tires

1) Front
Vehicles equipped with 4 non-unidirectional tires
1) Front
Tire wear varies from wheel to wheel.

Move the tires to the positions shown in
the illustration each time they are rotated.
For the tire rotation schedule, refer to the
Replace any damaged or unevenly worn
tire at the time of rotation. After tire
rotation, adjust the tire pressures and
make sure the wheel nuts are correctly
tightened.
After driving approximately 600 miles
(1,000 km), check the wheel nuts again
and retighten any nut that has become
loose.
The wheels and tires are important and

integral parts of your vehicles design;
they cannot be changed arbitrarily. The
tires fitted as standard equipment are
optimally matched to the characteristics
of the vehicle and were selected to give
the best possible combination of running
performance, ride comfort, and service
life. It is essential for every tire to have a
size and construction matching those
shown on the tire placard and to have a
speed symbol and load index matching
those shown on the tire placard.
Using tires of a non-specified size detracts
from controllability, ride comfort, braking
performance, speedometer accuracy and
odometer accuracy. It also creates incorrect body-to-tire clearances and inappropriately changes the vehicles ground
clearance.
All four tires must be the same in terms of
manufacturer, brand (tread pattern), construction, and size. You are advised to
replace the tires with new ones that are
identical to those fitted as standard equipment.
For safe vehicle operation, SUBARU
recommends replacing all four tires at
the same time.
Black plate (543,1)
WARNING
. When replacing or installing
tire(s), all four tires must be the
same for the following items.
(a) Size
(b) Circumference
(c) Speed symbol
(d) Load index
(e) Construction
(f) Manufacturer
(h) Degrees of wear
Ride
Handling
Braking
calibration
and tires
11-31

accident.

. Use only radial tires. Do not use
radial tires together with belted
bias tires and/or bias-ply tires.
Doing so can dangerously reduce controllability, resulting in
an accident.
& Wheel replacement

When replacing wheels due, for example,
to damage, make sure the replacement
wheels match the specifications of the
wheels that are fitted as standard equipment. Replacement wheels are available
from SUBARU dealers.
11
WARNING
Use only those wheels that are
specified for your vehicle. Wheels
not meeting specifications could
interfere with brake caliper operation and may cause the tires to rub
against the wheel well housing during turns. The resulting loss of
Black plate (544,1)
11-32
Maintenance and service/Aluminum wheels
Aluminum wheels
Aluminum wheels can be scratched and
damaged easily. Handle them carefully to
maintain their appearance, performance,
and safety.
. When any of the wheels is removed
and replaced for tire rotation or to change
a flat, always check the tightness of the
wheel nuts after driving approximately 600
miles (1,000 km). If any nut is loose,
tighten it to the specified torque.
. Never apply oil to the threaded parts,
wheel nuts, or tapered surface of the
wheel.
. Never let the wheel rub against sharp
protrusions or curbs.
. When wheel nuts, balance weights, or
the center cap is replaced, be sure to
replace them with genuine SUBARU parts
designed for aluminum wheels.
Windshield washer fluid

CAUTION
Never use engine coolant as washer
fluid because it could cause paint
damage.
1)
Windshield washer fluid warning indicator
When there is only a small amount of

washer fluid remaining, the windshield
washer fluid warning indicator will appear.
When this occurs, refill the washer fluid as
follows.
FULL mark
Remove the washer tank filler cap, then

add fluid until it reaches the FULL mark
on the tank.
Use windshield washer fluid. If windshield
washer fluid is unavailable use clean
water.
In areas where water freezes in winter,
use an anti-freeze type windshield washer
fluid. SUBARU Windshield Washer Fluid
contains 58.5% methyl alcohol and 41.5%
surfactant, by volume. Its freezing temperature varies according to how much it
is diluted, as indicated in the following
table.
Black plate (545,1)
Maintenance and service/Replacement of wiper blades
Washer Fluid
Concentration
Freezing
Temperature
30%
10.48F (128C)
50%
48F (208C)
100%
498F (458C)
CAUTION
Never use engine coolant as washer
fluid because it could cause paint
damage.
In order to prevent freezing of washer
fluid, check the freezing temperatures in
the table above when adjusting the fluid
concentration to the outside temperature.
If you fill the reservoir tank with a fluid with
a different concentration from the one
used previously, purge the old fluid from
the piping between the reservoir tank and
washer nozzles by operating the washer
for a certain period of time. Otherwise, if
the concentration of the fluid remaining in
the piping is too low for the outside
temperature, it may freeze and block the
nozzles.
CAUTION
. Adjust the washer fluid concentration appropriately for the outside temperature. If the concentration is inappropriate, sprayed
washer fluid may freeze on the
windshield and obstruct your
view, and the fluid may freeze in
the reservoir tank.
. State or local regulations on
volatile organic compounds may
restrict the use of methanol, a
common windshield washer antifreeze additive. Washer fluids
containing non-methanol antifreeze agents should be used
only if they provide cold weather
protection without damaging
your vehicles paint, wiper blades
or washer system.
11-33
Replacement of wiper blades

Grease, wax, insects, or other materials
on the windshield or the wiper blade
results in jerky wiper operation and streaking on the glass. If you cannot remove the
streaks after operating the windshield
washer or if the wiper operation is jerky,
clean the outer surface of the windshield
(or rear window) and the wiper blades
using a sponge or soft cloth with a neutral
detergent or mild abrasive cleaner. After
cleaning, rinse the windshield and wiper
blades with clean water. The windshield is
clean if beads do not form when you rinse
the windshield with water.
CAUTION
. Do not clean the wiper blades
with gasoline or a solvent, such
as paint thinner or benzine. This
will cause deterioration of the
wiper blades.
. When you wish to raise the
passenger-side wiper arm, first
raise the driver-side wiper arm.
Otherwise, the passenger-side
wiper assembly and driver-side
wiper assembly will touch each
other, possibly resulting in
scratches.
CONTINUED
11
Black plate (546,1)
11-34
. Return the passenger-side wiper

arm to its original position before
returning the driver-side wiper
arm to its original position.
Otherwise, the passenger-side
wiper assembly and driver-side
wiper assembly will touch each
other, possibly resulting in
scratches.
. When returning the raised wipers
to the original positions, return
the wipers slowly on the windshield by hand. Returning the
wipers from the detached positions by the spring operation
might change the shape of the
wiper arm or scratch the windshield.
& Windshield wiper blade assembly

NOTE
lower it into position. First lower the front

passengers side wiper arm and then
lower the drivers side wiper arm.
Do not lower the wiper arm while the

wiper blade assembly is removed.
& Windshield wiper blade rubber
1. Raise the wiper arm off the windshield.

First raise the drivers side wiper arm and
then raise the front passengers side wiper
arm.
If you cannot eliminate the streaking even

after following this method, replace the
wiper blades using the following procedures.
1)
1)
2)
Open the cover

Pull down the wiper blade
Support
1. Grasp the locked end of the blade

rubber assembly and pull it firmly until the
stoppers on the rubber are free of the
support.
2. Remove the wiper blade assembly by

opening the cover and pulling it down in
the direction shown in the illustration.
3. Install the wiper blade assembly to the
wiper arm. Make sure that it locks in place.
4. Hold the wiper arm by hand and slowly
Black plate (547,1)
grooves in the rubber and slide the blade

rubber assembly into the support until it
locks.
1)
11-35
& Rear window wiper blade

assembly (Outback)
1. Raise the wiper arm off the rear
window.
Metal spines
2. If the new blade rubber is not provided

with two metal spines, remove the metal
spines from the old blade rubber and
install them in the new blade rubber.
1)
2)
Claw
Stopper
4. Be sure to position the claws at the

end of the support between the stoppers
on the rubber as shown. If the rubber is
not retained properly, the wiper blade may
scratch the windshield.
2. Turn the wiper blade assembly counterclockwise.
11
3. Align the claws of the support with the

CONTINUED
Black plate (548,1)
11-36
& Rear window wiper blade

rubber (Outback)
3. Pull the wiper blade assembly toward

you to remove it from the wiper arm.
1. Pull out the end of the blade rubber
assembly to unlock it from the plastic
support.
2. Pull the blade rubber assembly out of

the plastic support.
1)
Metal spines
3. If the new blade rubber is not provided

with two metal spines, remove the metal
spines from the old blade rubber and
install them in the new blade rubber.
Black plate (549,1)
Maintenance and service/Battery
ends. If the rubber is not retained properly,

the wiper may scratch the rear window
glass.
5. Install the wiper blade assembly to the
wiper arm. Make sure that it locks in place.
6. Hold the wiper arm by hand and slowly
lower it in position.
4. Align the claws of the plastic support

with the grooves in the blade rubber
assembly, then slide the blade rubber
assembly into place.
Securely retain both ends of the rubber

with the stoppers on the plastic support
11-37
Battery
WARNING
. Before beginning work on or near
any battery, be sure to extinguish
all cigarettes, matches, and lighters. Never expose a battery to an
open flame or electric sparks.
Batteries give off a gas which is
highly flammable and explosive.
. For safety, in case an explosion
does occur, wear eye protection
or shield your eyes when working near any battery. Never lean
over a battery.
. Do not let battery fluid contact
eyes, skin, fabrics, or paint because battery fluid is a corrosive
acid. If battery fluid gets on your
skin or in your eyes, immediately
flush the area with water thoroughly. Seek medical help immediately if acid has entered the
eyes.
If battery fluid is accidentally
swallowed, immediately drink a
large amount of milk or water,
and seek medical attention immediately.
. To lessen the risk of sparks,
CONTINUED
11
Black plate (550,1)
11-38
Maintenance and service/Fuses
remove rings, metal watchbands,

and other metal jewelry. Never
allow metal tools to contact the
positive battery terminal and anything connected to it WHILE you
are at the same time in contact
with any other metallic portion of
the vehicle because a short circuit will result.
. Keep everyone including children
away from the battery.
. Charge the battery in a wellventilated area.
. Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories contain lead
and lead compounds, chemicals
known to the State of California
to cause cancer and reproductive
harm. Batteries also contain
other chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer. Wash hands after handling.
CAUTION
Never use more than 10 amperes
when charging the battery because
it will shorten battery life.
It is unnecessary to periodically check the
battery fluid level or periodically refill with
distilled water.
Fuses
CAUTION
Never replace a fuse with one having a higher rating or with material
other than a fuse because serious
damage or a fire could result.
The fuses are designed to melt during an
overload to prevent damage to the wiring
harness and electrical equipment. The
fuses are located in two fuse boxes.
One is located under the instrument panel

behind the fuse box cover on the drivers
seat side. To remove the cover, pull it out.
Black plate (551,1)
Maintenance and service/Fuses
11-39
If any lights, accessories or other electrical

controls do not operate, inspect the
corresponding fuse. If a fuse has blown,
replace it.
OFF position and turn off all electrical
accessories.
2. Remove the fuse box cover.
3. Determine which fuse may be blown.
Look at the back side of each fuse box
cover and refer to Fuses and circuits
F12-10.
The other one (main fuse box) is housed
The fuse puller is stored in the main fuse

box in the engine compartment. To pick up
the fuse puller, pull it out while pinching
the puller head with your fingers.
11
1)
Spare fuses
The spare fuses are stored in the main

fuse box cover in the engine compartment.
1)
2)
Good
Blown
4. Pull out the fuse with the fuse puller.

5. Inspect the fuse. If it has blown,
replace it with a spare fuse of the same
rating.
6. If the same fuse blows again, this
indicates that its system has a problem.
CONTINUED
Black plate (552,1)
11-40
Maintenance and service/Installation of accessories
Contact your SUBARU dealer for repairs.
Installation of accessories
Always consult your SUBARU dealer
before installing fog lights or any other
electrical equipment in your vehicle. Such
accessories may cause the electronic
system to malfunction if they are incorrectly installed or if they are not suited for
the vehicle. We recommend that you
install only genuine SUBARU accessories
on your vehicle.
Replacing bulbs
WARNING
Bulbs may become very hot while
illuminated. Before replacing bulbs,
turn off the lights and wait until the
bulbs cool down, Otherwise, there is
the risk of sustaining a burn injury.
CAUTION
Replace any bulb only with a new
bulb of the specified wattage. Using
a bulb of different wattage could
result in a fire. For the specified
wattage of each bulb, refer to Bulb
chart F12-14. For replacement,
& HID headlights (if equipped)

WARNING
High-intensity-discharge (HID) bulbs
are used for the low beams of the
headlights. These HID bulbs use an
extremely high voltage. To avoid the
risk of an electric shock that could
result in serious injury, observe the
Black plate (553,1)
Maintenance and service/Replacing bulbs
following precautions.
. Do not replace any headlight
bulbs (both low beam and high
beam) by yourself.
. Do not remove/restore the headlight assemblies by yourself.
. Do not remove any headlightassembly components by yourself.
For replacement, contact your
SUBARU dealer.
NOTE
. If headlight aiming is required, consult your SUBARU dealer for proper
adjustment of the headlight aim.
. It may be difficult to replace the
bulbs. Have the bulbs replaced by your
SUBARU dealer if necessary.
Perform the following steps to replace the
bulbs.
High beam headlight
& Halogen headlights
1. Disconnect the electrical connector

from the bulb. When replacing the low
beam headlight bulb, remove the electrical
connector from the clip before disconnecting the connector.
CAUTION
Halogen headlight bulbs become
very hot while in use. If you touch
the bulb surface with bare hands or
greasy gloves, fingerprints or
grease on the bulb surface will
develop into hot spots, causing the
bulb to break. If there are finger
prints or grease on the bulb surface,
wipe them away with a soft cloth
moistened with alcohol.
11-41
Low beam headlight (if equipped)

1) Electrical connector
2) Clip
11
CONTINUED
Black plate (554,1)
11-42
surface.
4. To install the bulb to the headlight
assembly, turn it clockwise until it clicks.
5. Reconnect the electrical connector.
& Front side marker light
& Front turn signal light
Low beam headlight (if equipped)
1. Turn the socket counterclockwise and

pull it out.
2. Pull out the bulb from the socket and
replace the bulb with a new one.
1. Turn the socket counterclockwise and
pull it out.
2. Pull out the bulb from the socket and
replace the bulb with a new one.
& Front fog light (if equipped)

NOTE
It may be difficult to replace the bulbs.
We recommend that you have the bulbs
replaced by your SUBARU dealer if
necessary.
High beam headlight
2. Remove the bulb from the headlight

assembly by turning it counterclockwise.
3. Replace the bulb with new one. At this
time, use care not to touch the bulb
Black plate (555,1)
11-43
1. Remove the clips.

2. Turn over the mud guard.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector.
11
Legacy
Outback
4. Remove the bulb.

5. Replace the bulb with a new one.
6. After replacing the bulb, reattach the
mud guard.
CONTINUED
Black plate (556,1)
11-44
& Rear combination lights
4. Pull the bulb out of the bulb holder and

replace it with a new one.
5. Set the bulb holder into the rear
combination light assembly and turn it
clockwise until it locks.
6. Securely reposition the trunk trim
panel.
7. Reattach the shopping bag hook.
! Legacy
NOTE
necessary.
! Outback
2. Turn over the trunk trim panel.
1. Turn the shopping bag hook 90 degrees counterclockwise and pull it out.
1. Undo the clips. For the method to undo

the clips, refer to Type C clips F11-6.
2. Remove the cover.
1)
2)
Rear side marker light

Rear turn signal light
3. Remove the bulb holder from the rear

combination light assembly by turning it
counterclockwise. Use pliers if necessary.
Black plate (557,1)
3. Remove the upper and lower screws.
1)
2)
Rear turn signal light

Rear side marker light
5. Remove the bulb holder from the rear

combination light assembly by turning it
counterclockwise.
6. Pull the bulb out of the bulb holder and
7. Set the bulb holder into the rear
combination light assembly and turn it
clockwise until it locks.
4. Slide the rear combination light assembly straight rearward and remove it
from the vehicle.
11-45
8. Reinstall the rear combination light

assembly by sliding the two-pronged part
of the combination light assembly securely
to each holder of the vehicle side.
11
9. Tighten the upper and lower screws.

10. Reinstall the side cover.
CONTINUED
Black plate (558,1)
11-46
& Backup light
! Outback
! Legacy
NOTE
necessary.
1. Open the trunk.
3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise

and remove it.
4. Pull the bulb out of the bulb socket and
5. Install the bulb socket by turning it
clockwise.
7. Reinstall the trunk trim lining.
1. Apply a flat-head screwdriver to the

light cover as shown in the illustration, and
pry the light cover off from the rear gate
trim.
2. Remove the trunk trim lining by removing the clips indicated in the illustration.
Black plate (559,1)
11-47
5. Install the light cover on the rear gate.
& License plate light

! Legacy
NOTE
necessary.
1. Open the trunk.
and remove it.

and remove it.
clockwise.
7. Reinstall the trunk trim lining.
11
2. Remove the trunk trim lining by removing the clips indicated in the illustration.
clockwise.
CONTINUED
Black plate (560,1)
11-48
! Outback
3. Pull the bulb out of the socket.

4. Install a new bulb.
5. Reinstall the bulb socket and the
license plate light cover.
& Dome light
2. Turn the bulb until the flat surfaces at

its ends are aligned vertically.
3. Pull the bulb straight downward to
remove it.
5. Reinstall the lens.
1. The license plate light must be pushed

inwards, and then pulled out to be
removed.
1. Remove the lens by prying the edge of

the lens with a flat-head screwdriver.
& Map light

CAUTION
Replacing the bulb could cause
burns since the bulb may be very
hot. Have the bulb replaced by your
SUBARU dealer.

and pull out the socket.
Black plate (561,1)
& Door step light
11-49
& Other bulbs

necessary.
CAUTION
Replacing the bulb could cause a
short circuit. Have the bulb replaced
by your SUBARU dealer.
& Cargo area light (Outback)
2. Pull the bulb out of the socket.

4. Reinstall the lens.
& Trunk light (Legacy)

CAUTION
1. Remove the lens by prying the edge of

the lens with a flat-head screwdriver.
Replacing the bulb could cause

burns since the bulb may be very
hot. Have the bulb replaced by your
SUBARU dealer.
11
Black plate (562,1)
11-50
Maintenance and service/Replacing battery
Replacing battery
The access key / transmitter battery may
be discharged under the following conditions.
. The operation of the keyless access
function is unstable
. The operating distance of the remote
keyless entry system is unstable
. The transmitter does not operate properly when used within the standard distance
Replace the battery with a new one.
CAUTION
. Do not let dust, oil or water get on
or in the access key/transmitter
when replacing battery.
. Be careful not to damage the
printed circuit board in the access key/transmitter when replacing the battery.
. Be careful not to allow children to
touch the battery and any removed parts; children could
swallow them.
. There is a danger of an explosion
if the battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the
same or equivalent type of the

battery.
. Batteries shall not be exposed to
excessive heat such as bright
sunlight, fire or the like.
NOTE
. Replace only with the same or
equivalent type of battery recommended by the manufacturer.
. Dispose of used batteries according
to the local laws.
. Mount the battery in the correct
orientation to prevent fluid leakage.
Be careful not to bend the terminals. It
may result in a malfunction.
. It is recommended that the battery
should be replaced by a SUBARU
dealer.
. Use a new battery.
. After replacing the battery, confirm
that the access key/transmitter functions properly.
& Replacing battery of access

key
CAUTION
When removing or fitting the access
key cover, make sure that the plastic
part does not come off or become
misaligned.
Battery: Button battery CR2032
1)
2)
Release button
Mechanical key
1. Take out the mechanical key.
Black plate (563,1)
11-51
& Replacing battery of transmitter
2. Wrap a flat-head screwdriver with vinyl

tape or a cloth, and insert it in the gap to
remove the cover.
4. Insert a new battery with its positive (+)

side facing upward as shown in the figure.
1. Open the key head using a flat-head
screwdriver.
11
3. Take out the battery using a flat-head

screwdriver with vinyl tape or a cloth.
5. Attach the cover to the access key by

fitting the projections and recesses together.
2. Remove the transmitter case from the

CONTINUED
Black plate (564,1)
11-52
key head.
battery (Type CR1620 or equivalent)

making sure to install the new battery with
the negative () side facing up.
5. Put together the transmitter case by
fitting the hooks on the case.
6. Reinstall the transmitter case in the
key head.
7. Refit the removed half of the key head.
After the battery is replaced, the transmitter must be synchronized with the
remote keyless entry systems control
unit. Press either the or button
six times to synchronize the unit.
3. Open the transmitter case by releasing

the hooks.
1)
Negative () side facing up
4. Replace the old battery with a new
Black plate (25,1)
Specifications
Brake disc .........................................................
12-9
Specifications .....................................................
12-2
Dimensions........................................................
Engine ...............................................................
Fuel ...................................................................
Engine oil ..........................................................
Manual transmission, front differential and rear
differential gear oil ...........................................
Fluids ................................................................
Engine coolant ...................................................
Electrical system................................................
Tires ..................................................................
12-2
12-3
12-3
12-4
Fuses and circuits ...........................................
12-7
12-8
12-8
12-9
12-9
Bulb chart.........................................................
12-14
Safety precautions ...........................................

Bulb chart .......................................................
12-14
12-15
Vehicle identification .......................................
12-18
Fuse panel located in the passenger

compartment .................................................
Fuse panel located in the engine
compartment .................................................
12-10
12-10
12-12
12
Black plate (568,1)
12-2
Specifications/Specifications
Specifications
These specifications are subject to change without notice.
& Dimensions
in (mm)
Legacy
Item
2.5 L
Outback
2.5 L
3.6 L
Drive system
3.6 L
AWD
Transmission type
MT
CVT
CVT
MT
CVT
Overall length
188.8 (4,796)
Overall width
72.4 (1,840)
72.4 (1,840)
59.0 (1,500)
66.1 (1,680)*2
65.2 (1,655)*3
64.0 (1,625)*4
Overall height
Wheelbase
Tread
108.3 (2,750)
108.1 (2,745)
Front
62.2 (1,580)
61.8 (1,570)
Rear
62.8 (1,595)
62.2 (1,580)
5.9 (150)
8.7 (220)
Ground clearance*1
CVT
189.6 (4,817)
*1: Measured with vehicle empty

*2: Models with high profile roof rails
*3: Models with low profile roof rails (U.S.-spec. models)
*4: Models with low profile roof rails (except U.S.-spec. models)
MT: Manual transmission
CVT: Continuously variable transmission
AWD: All-Wheel Drive
Black plate (569,1)
12-3
& Engine
Engine model
FB25
(2.5 L, DOHC, non-turbo)
EZ36
(3.6 L, DOHC, non-turbo)
Horizontally opposed, liquid cooled 4 cylinder,

4 stroke gasoline engine
Horizontally opposed, liquid cooled 6 cylinder,

4 stroke gasoline engine
Displacement cu-in (cc)
152 (2,498)
221.5 (3,630)
Bore 6 Stroke in (mm)
3.70 6 3.54 (94.0 6 90.0)
3.62 6 3.58 (92.0 6 91.0)
Engine type
Compression ratio
Firing order
10.3 : 1
10.5 : 1
1324
163254
& Fuel
Fuel requirement
Fuel tank capacity
Unleaded gasoline with 87 AKI (90 RON) or higher
18.5 US gal (70 liters, 15.4 Imp gal)
12
CONTINUED
Black plate (570,1)
12-4
& Engine oil

For the checking, adding and replacing procedure or other details, refer to Engine oil F11-11.
NOTE
The procedure for changing the engine oil and oil filter should be performed by a properly-trained expert. It is recommended
that you have this service performed by your SUBARU dealer.
! Approved engine oil
Always use the SUBARU approved engine oil. For further details, please contact your SUBARU dealer.
If the approved engine oil is unavailable, use the alternative engine oil described on the next page.
! Alternative engine oil
If the SUBARU approved oil is unavailable, the following alternative oil can be used.
NOTE
. Each quantity indicated is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly depending on the
temperature and other factors.
. In choosing an oil, you want the proper quality and viscosity, as well as one that will enhance fuel economy. Oils of lower
viscosity provide better fuel economy. However, in hot weather, oil of higher viscosity is required to properly lubricate the
engine. The following table lists the recommended viscosities and applicable temperatures.
. When adding oil, different brands may be used together as long as they are the same API classification and SAE viscosity
as those recommended by SUBARU.
Black plate (571,1)
12-5
! 2.5 L models
Oil grade
SAE viscosity No. and

applicable temperature
0W-20 synthetic oil is the required oil

for optimum engine performance and
protection. Conventional oil may be
used if synthetic oil is unavailable.
Adding the oil from low level to

full level:
1.1 US qt (1.0 liter, 0.9 Imp qt)
Changing the oil and oil filter:
5.1 US qt (4.8 liters, 4.2 Imp qt)
*: If 0W-20 synthetic oil is not available,

5W-30 or 5W-40 conventional oil may
be used if you need to add oil.
However, you should change to 0W-20
synthetic oil at the next oil change.
or
API (American Petroleum Institute) classification SN with the

words RESOURCE CONSERVING
Engine oil capacity
ILSAC (International Lubricant

Specification Advisory Committee) GF-5, which can be identified with the ILSAC certification
mark (Starburst mark)
12
CONTINUED
Black plate (572,1)
12-6
! 3.6 L models
Oil grade
SAE viscosity No. and

applicable temperature
Engine oil capacity
Your vehicle is designed to use 5W-30 Adding the oil from L to F level:
1.1 US qt (1.0 liter, 0.9 Imp qt)
conventional motor oil, however 5W-30
Changing the oil and oil filter:
synthetic may be used for optimum
engine performance.
*: If 5W-30 synthetic oil is not available,
10W-30 or 10W-40 conventional oil
may be used if you need to add oil.
However, you should change to 5W-30
synthetic or conventional oil at the next
oil change.
or
API (American Petroleum Institute) classification SN with the

words RESOURCE CONSERVING
ILSAC (International Lubricant

Specification Advisory Committee) GF-5, which can be identified with the ILSAC certification
mark (Starburst mark)
Black plate (573,1)
12-7
& Manual transmission, front differential and rear differential gear oil
Oil
Manual transmission oil
Oil grade
.
.
Front differential gear oil (CVT models)
SUBARU Extra MT*3

API classification GL-5 (75W-90)*4
Rear differential gear oil

API classification GL-5
.
.
SAE viscosity
No. and applicable temperature
75W-90*
90
*: Recommended
1
Oil capacity*
Remarks*2
3.5 US qt
(3.3 liters, 2.9 Imp qt)
Manual transmission
oil F11-19
2.5 L models: 1.3 US qt (1.2 liters, 1.1 Imp qt)

Front differential gear oil (CVT models) and
rear differential gear oil F11-19

Front differential gear oil (CVT models) and rear differential gear oil F11-19
*1: The indicated oil quantity is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly depending on the temperature and other
factors. After refilling the gearbox with oil, the oil level should be checked.
*2: For more details about maintenance and service, refer to the indicated section.
*3: The vehicle is filled at the factory with this type of manual transmission oil/front differential gear oil.
*4: You may use this type of manual transmission oil/front differential gear oil. However, using this type of oil will detract from driveability and fuel
efficiency.
CONTINUED
12
Black plate (574,1)
12-8
& Fluids
Fluid type*1
Fluid
Fluid capacity*2
Remarks*3
2.5 L models: 12.0 US qt (11.4 liters,

10.0 Imp qt)
Continuously variable trans3.6 L models: 13.4 US qt (12.7
mission fluid F11-19
liters, 11.2 Imp qt)
Continuously variable transmission Consult your SUBARU dealer.

fluid (CVT models)
Brake fluid
FMVSS No. 116, fresh DOT 3 or DOT 4

brake fluid
Clutch fluid (MT models)
FMVSS No. 116, fresh DOT 3 or DOT 4

brake fluid
Brake fluid F11-20

Clutch fluid (MT models) F1121
*1: Use one of the indicated types of fluid.

*2: The indicated fluid quantity is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly depending on the temperature and other
factors.
*3: For more details about maintenance and service, refer to the indicated section.
& Engine coolant

Vehicle model
2.5 L models
Coolant capacity
MT models
CVT models
3.6 L models
Coolant type

SUBARU Super Coolant
The indicated coolant quantity is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly depending on the temperature and other
factors. For more details about maintenance and service, refer to Cooling system F11-14.
Black plate (575,1)
12-9
& Electrical system

Battery type
2.5 L models except Canada-spec. models
55D23R
Other models
75D23R
2.5 L models
SILZKAR7B11 (NGK)
3.6 L models
SILFR6C11 (NGK)
Alternator
12V-130A
Spark plugs
& Tires
Tire size
Wheel size
Pressure
Temporary spare tire
Front
225/55R17
97V
225/50R18
95H
225/65R17
102H
225/60R18
100H
17 6 7J
17 6 7 1/2J
18 6 7 1/2J
17 6 7J
18 6 7J
35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm2)
33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2)
33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm )
Rear
32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm )
Size
T155/70 D17 110M
Pressure
Wheel nut tightening torque
T155/80 R17 101M

2
60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm )

88.5 lbfft (120 Nm, 12.2 kgfm)*1
*1: This torque is equivalent to applying approximately 88 to 110 lbf (40 to 50 kgf) at the end of the wheel nut wrench. If you have tightened the wheel
nuts by yourself, have the tightening torque checked at the nearest automotive service facility as soon as possible. For the wheel nut tightening
procedure, refer to Changing a flat tire F9-5.
& Brake disc

If you need information on the usage limit value of brake discs and the method for measuring them, consult your SUBARU dealer.
12
Black plate (576,1)
12-10
Specifications/Fuses and circuits
Fuses and circuits

& Fuse panel located in the passenger compartment
Fuse
panel
Fuse
rating
7.5A
START1
20A
12V SOCKET
7.5A
IG1-1
15A
AUDIO NAVI
15A
UNIT IG2-2
20A
P/W R.LH
10A
CIGAR
15A
A/C IG
7.5A
ACC
10
7.5A
UNIT IG2-1
Circuit
11
30A
P/W MAIN1
12
7.5A
START2
13
Empty
14
7.5A
UNIT+B
15
7.5A
METER IG
16
20A
P/W R.RH
17
7.5A
MIR
18
7.5A
LAMP IG
19
7.5A
IG1-2
20
10A
SRS AIR BAG
21
20A
P/W PASS1
22
15A
SEAT HTR R
Black plate (577,1)
Fuse
panel
Fuse
rating
23
10A
DRL
24
20A
P/W MAIN2
25
Empty
26
10A
BACK UP
27
20A
WIPER DEICER
28
20A
TRAIL R.FOG
29
20A
P/W PASS2
30
Empty
31
7.5A
SMT
32
15A
SEAT HTR F
33
7.5A
KEY SW
34
7.5A
D_OP+B
35
20A
SUN ROOF
36
Empty
37
7.5A
STOP
38
7.5A
EYE SIGHT
12-11
Circuit
12
CONTINUED
Black plate (578,1)
12-12
& Fuse panel located in the engine compartment
A)
Main fuse
Fuse
panel
Fuse
rating
7.5A
HORN RH
7.5A
HORN LH
10A
ILLUMI
10A
TAIL
15A
H/L LO RH
15A
H/L LO LH
Empty
Circuit
10A
H/L HI LH
7.5A
DCM
10
15A
D/L
11
10A
H/L HI RH
12
7.5A
ALT-S
13
20A
FUEL
14
15A
HAZARD
15
30A
IG2
16
7.5A
PU B/UP
17
7.5A
OBD
18
Empty
19
Empty
Black plate (579,1)
Fuse
panel
Fuse
rating
20
20A*1
25A*2
21
15A
E/G2
22
15A
ETC
23
15A
E/G1
24
15A
AVCS
Circuit
O2 HTR
25
15A
INJ
26
7.5A
CVT SSR
27
20A
TCU
28
Empty
29
30A
BACKUP
30
7.5A
ACTGS
31
25A
SUB FAN
32
25A
MAIN FAN
33
30A
ABS SOL
34
20A
AUDIO
35
25A
R.DEF
36
15A
BLOWER
37
15A
BLOWER
38
10A
F.FOG RH
39
10A
F.FOG LH
40
Empty
41
15A
Fuse
panel
Fuse
rating
42
15A
R.WIPER
43
15A
F.WASH
44
30A
F.WIPER
45
Empty
12-13
Circuit
*1: 2.5 L models

*2: 3.6 L models
12
STRG/H
Black plate (580,1)
12-14
Specifications/Bulb chart
Bulb chart
CAUTION

WARNING
. Bulbs may become very hot while
illuminated. Before replacing
bulbs, turn off the lights and wait
until the bulbs cool down. Otherwise, there is a risk of sustaining
a burn injury.
. For models with HID low beam
headlights, observe the following
precautions. Not doing so carries
the risk of an electric shock that
could result in serious injury
because the HID bulbs use an
extremely high voltage.
Do not replace any headlight
bulbs (both low beam and
high beam) by yourself.
Do not remove/restore the
headlight assemblies by yourself.
Do not remove any headlightassembly components by
yourself.
For replacement, contact your
SUBARU dealer.
Replace any bulb only with a new

bulb of the specified wattage. Using
a bulb of different wattage could
result in a fire.
Black plate (581,1)
12-15
& Bulb chart
12
NOTE
Lights A, B, C, D, E and F are the LED (Light Emitting Diode) type. Consult your SUBARU dealer for replacement.
CONTINUED
Black plate (582,1)
12-16
Wattage
Bulb No.
12V-60W
HB3
Models with HID headlights
12V-35W
D4S
Models without HID headlights
1)
High beam headlight
2)
Low beam headlight

12V-55W
H11
3)
Front side marker light
12V-5W
W5W
4)
Map light
12V-8W
5)
Dome light
12V-8W
6)
Door step light
12V-5W
W5W
7)
Front turn signal light
12V-21W
WY21W
8)
Front fog light

12V-19W
H16
Legacy (models with steering responsive fog lights 12V-55W

system)
H11
Outback
Legacy (models without steering responsive fog

lights system)
12V-55W
H11
9)
Vanity mirror light
14V-1.4W
HTU
10)
Cargo area light
11)
Licence plate light (Outback)
12V-13W
12V-5W
SAE #912
W5W
12)
13)
Backup light (Outback)
12V-16W
W16W
Rear turn signal light (Outback)

Rear side marker light (Outback)
12V-21W
WY21W
12V-5W
W5W
Trunk light (Legacy)
12V-3.8W
SAE #194
License plate light (Legacy)

Backup light (Legacy)
12V-5W
12V-16W
W5W
W16W
14)
15)
16)
17)
Black plate (583,1)
Wattage
12V-21W
Bulb No.
WY21W
Rear side marker light (Legacy)
12V-5W
W5W
Parking light
C)
Side turn signal light (if equipped)

High-mounted stop light (Outback)
D)
Tail and stop light (Outback)
E)
High-mounted stop light (Legacy)
F)
Tail and stop light (Legacy)
18)
Rear turn signal light (Legacy)
19)
A)
B)
12-17
12
Black plate (584,1)
12-18
Specifications/Vehicle identification
Vehicle identification
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
Emission control label

Certification and bar code label
Tire inflation pressure label
Vehicle identification number plate
Model number label
Fuel label
Air conditioner label
Black plate (27,1)
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

For U.S.A. ...........................................................
Tire information ..................................................
13-2
13-2
Tire labeling ....................................................... 13-2

Recommended tire inflation pressure.................. 13-4
Glossary of tire terminology ............................... 13-5
Tire care maintenance and safety practices...... 13-9
Vehicle load limit how to determine................ 13-10
Determining compatibility of tire and vehicle
load capacities ............................................... 13-13
Adverse safety consequences of overloading

on handling and stopping and on tires ...........
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit.........
13-13
13-14
Uniform tire quality grading standards ..........
13-14
Treadwear .......................................................
Traction AA, A, B, C.........................................
Temperature A, B, C.........................................
13-15
13-15
13-15
Reporting safety defects (USA) ......................
13-16
13
Black plate (588,1)
13-2
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/For U.S.A.
For U.S.A.
Tire information
The following information has been

compiled according to Code of
Federal Regulations Title 49, Part
575.
& Tire labeling

Many markings (e.g. Tire size, Tire
Identification Number or TIN) are
placed on the sidewall of a tire by
tire manufacturers. These marking
can provide you with useful information on the tire.
! Tire size
Your vehicle comes equipped with

P-Metric tire size. It is important to
understand the sizing system in
selecting the proper tire for your
vehicles. Here is a brief review of
the tire sizing system with a breakdown of its individual elements.
! P Metric
With the P-Metric system, Section

Width is measured in millimeters.
To convert millimeters into inches,
divide by 25.4. The Aspect Ratio
(Section Height divided by Section
Width) helps provide more dimensional information about the tire
size.
Example:
(1) P = Certain tire type used on

light duty vehicles such as passenger cars
(2) Section Width in millimeters
(3) Aspect Ratio (= section height
7 section width).
(4) R = Radial Construction
(5) Rim diameter in inches
! Load and Speed Rating Descriptions
The load and speed rating descriptions will appear following the size
designation.
They provide two important facts
about the tire. First, the number
designation is its load index. Second, the letter designation indicates
the tires speed rating.
Black plate (589,1)
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/Tire information
Example:
13-3
WARNING
. Speed ratings apply only to
(6) Load Index: A numerical code

which specifies the maximum load
a tire can carry at the speed
indicated by its speed symbol, at
maximum inflation pressure.
For example, 91 means 1,356 lbs
(615 kg), 90 means 1,323 lbs (600
kg), 89 means 1,279 lbs (580 kg)
WARNING
Load indices apply only to the

tire, not to the vehicle. Putting
a load rated tire on any vehicle
does not mean the vehicle can
be loaded up to the tires rated
load.
(7) Speed Rating: An alphabetical
system describing a tires capability
to travel at established and predetermined speeds.
For example, V means 149 mph
(240 km/h)
the tire, not to the vehicle.

Putting a speed rated tire on
any vehicle does not mean
the vehicle can be operated
at the tires rated speed.
. The speed rating is void if
the tires are worn out, damaged, repaired, retreaded,
or otherwise altered from
their original condition. If
tires are repaired, retreaded, or otherwise altered, they may not be suitable for original equipment
tire designed loads and
speeds.
! Tire Identification Number (TIN)
Tire Identification Number (TIN) is

marked on the intended outboard
sidewall. The TIN is composed of
four groups. Here is a brief review
of the TIN with a breakdown of its
individual elements.
(1) Manufacturers Identification

Mark
(2) Tire Size
(3) Tire Type Code
(4) Date of Manufacture
The first two figures identify the
week, starting with 01 to represent
the first full week of the calendar
year; the second two figures represent the year. For example, 0101
means the 1st week of 2001.
! Other markings
The following makings are also

placed on the sidewall.
! Maximum permissible inflation pressure
The maximum cold inflation pressure to which this tire may be

inflated. For example, 350 kPa
(51 PSI) MAX. PRESS
CONTINUED
13
Black plate (590,1)
13-4
! Maximum load rating
The load rating at the maximum

permissible weight load for this tire.
For example, MAX. LOAD 615 kg
(1,356 LBS) @ 350 kPa (51 PSI)
MAX. PRESS.
WARNING
Maximum load rating applies

only to the tire, not to the
vehicle. Putting a load rated
tire on any vehicle does not
mean the vehicle can be
loaded up to the tires rated
load.
STEEL + 2 POLYESTER + 1
NYLON SIDEWALL 2 POLYESTER
! Vehicle placard
! Uniform Tire Quality Grading

(UTQG)
For details, refer to Uniform tire

quality grading standards F13-14.
& Recommended tire inflation

pressure
! Recommended cold tire inflation pressure
For the recommended cold tire

inflation pressure for your vehicles
tires, refer to Tires F12-9.
The vehicle placard is affixed to the

drivers side B-pillar.
Example:
! Construction type
Applicable construction of this tire.

For example, TUBELESS STEEL
BELTED RADIAL
! Construction
The generic name of each cord

material used in the plies (both
sidewall and tread area) of this tire.
For example, PLIES: TREAD 2
Black plate (591,1)
The vehicle placard shows original

tire size, recommended cold tire
inflation pressure on each tire at
maximum loaded vehicle weight,
seating capacity and loading information.
! Adverse safety consequences
of under-inflation
the tires to flex severely and to
tread separation, and failure of the
tire(s). Possible resulting loss of
accident.
! Measuring and adjusting air
pressure to achieve proper inflation
Check and, if necessary, adjust the

pressure of each tire (including the
spare) at least once a month and
before any long journey. Check the
tire pressures when the tires are
cold. Use a pressure gauge to
adjust the tire pressures to the
specific values. Driving even a

short distance warms up the tires
and increases the tire pressures.
Also, the tire pressures are affected
by the outside temperature. It is
best to check tire pressure outdoors before driving the vehicle.
When a tire becomes warm, the air
inside it expands, causing the tire
pressure to increase. Be careful not
to mistakenly release air from a
warm tire to reduce its pressure.
& Glossary of tire terminology

. Accessory weight
The combined weight (in excess of

those standard items which may be
replaced) of automatic transmission, power steering, power brakes,
power windows, power seats, radio,
and heater, to the extent that these
items are available as factory-installed equipment (whether installed or not).
. Bead
The part of the tire that is made of

steel wires, wrapped or reinforced
13-5
by ply cords and that is shaped to fit

the rim.
. Bead separation
A breakdown of the bond between

components in the bead.
. Bias ply tire
A pneumatic tire in which the ply

cords that extend to the beads are
laid at alternate angles substantially
less than 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.
. Carcass
The tire structure, except tread and

sidewall rubber which, when inflated, bears the load.
. Chunking
The breaking away of pieces of the

tread or sidewall.
. Cold tire pressure
The pressure in a tire that has been

driven less than 1 mile or has been
standing for three hours or more.
. Cord
The strands forming the plies in the

tire.
. Cord separation
The parting of cords from adjacent

CONTINUED
13
Black plate (592,1)
13-6
rubber compounds.
. Cracking
Any parting within the tread, sidewall, or inner liner of the tire
extending to cord material.
. Curb weight
The weight of a motor vehicle with

standard equipment including the
maximum capacity of fuel, oil and
coolant, and if so equipped, air
conditioning and additional weight
optional engine.
. Extra load tire
A tire designed to operate at higher

loads and higher inflation pressure
than the corresponding standard
tire.
. Groove
The space between two adjacent

tread ribs.
. Innerliner
The layer(s) forming the inside surface of a tubeless tire that contains
the inflating medium within the tire.
. Innerliner separation
The parting of the innerliner from

cord material in the carcass.
. Intended outboard sidewall

(1) The sidewall that contains a
whitewall, bears white lettering

or bears manufacturer, brand,
and/or model name molding that
is higher or deeper than the
same molding on the other sidewall of the tire, or
(2) The outward facing sidewall
of an asymmetrical tire that has
a particular side that must always face outward when mounting on a vehicle.
. Light truck (LT) tire
A tire designated by its manufacturer as primarily intended for use

on lightweight trucks or multipurpose passenger vehicles.
. Load rating
The maximum load that a tire is

rated to carry for a given inflation
pressure.
. Maximum inflation pressure
The maximum cold inflation pressure to which a tire may be inflated.

. Maximum load rating
The load rating for a tire at the
maximum permissible inflation

pressure for that tire.
. Maximum loaded vehicle weight
The sum of:

(a) Curb weight
(b) Accessory weight
(c) Vehicle capacity weight
(d) Production options weight
. Maximum permissible inflation
pressure
The maximum cold inflation pressure to which a tire may be inflated.

. Measuring rim
The rim on which a tire is fitted for

physical dimension requirements.
. Normal occupant weight
150 lbs (68 kg) times the number of

occupants specified in the second
column of Table 1 that is appended
to the end of this section.
. Occupant distribution
Distribution of occupants in a vehicle as specified in the third column

of Table 1 that is appended to the
end of this section.
. Open splice
Any parting at any junction of tread,
Black plate (593,1)
sidewall, or innerliner that extends

to cord material.
. Outer diameter
The overall diameter of an inflated

new tire.
. Overall width
The linear distance between the

exteriors of the sidewalls of an
inflated tire, including elevations
due to labeling, decorations, or
protective bands or ribs.
. Passenger car tire
A tire intended for use on passenger cars, multipurpose passenger

vehicles, and trucks, that have a
gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR)
of 10,000 lbs (4,535 kg) or less.
. Ply
A layer of rubber-coated parallel

cords.
. Ply separation
A parting of rubber compound

between adjacent plies.
mounted on an automotive wheel,

provides the traction and contains
the gas or fluid that sustains the
load.
. Production options weight
The combined weight of those

installed regular production options
weighing over 5.1 lbs (2.3 kg) in
excess of those standard items
which they replace, not previously
considered in curb weight or accessory weight, including heavy duty
brakes, ride levelers, roof rack,
heavy duty battery, and special
trim.
. Radial ply tire
A pneumatic tire in which the ply

cords that extend to the beads are
laid at substantially 90 degrees to
the centerline of the tread.
. Recommended inflation pressure
. Pneumatic tire
The cold inflation pressure recommended by a vehicle manufacturer.
A mechanical device made of rubber, chemicals, fabric and steel or

other materials, that, when
A tire designed to operate at higher

loads and at higher inflation pres-
. Reinforced tire
13-7
sures than the corresponding standard tire.

. Rim
A metal support for a tire or a tire

and tube assembly upon which the
tire beads are seated.
. Rim diameter
Nominal diameter of the bead seat.

. Rim size designation
Rim diameter and width.

. Rim type designation
The industry of manufacturers designation for a rim by style or code.

. Rim width
Nominal distance between rim

flanges.
. Section width
The linear distance between the

exteriors of the sidewalls of an
inflated tire, excluding elevations
due to labeling, decoration, or
protective bands.
. Sidewall
That portion of a tire between the

tread and bead.
. Sidewall separation
The parting of the rubber com CONTINUED
13
Black plate (594,1)
13-8
pound from the cord material in the

sidewall.
. Test rim
The rim on which a tire is fitted for

testing, and it may be any rim listed
as appropriate for use with that tire.
. Tread
That portion of a tire that comes

into contact with the road.
. Tread rib
A tread section running circumferentially around a tire.

. Tread separation
Pulling away of the tread from the

tire carcass.
. Treadwear indicators (TWI)
The projections within the principal

grooves designed to give a visual
indication of the degrees of wear of
the tread.
. Vehicle maximum load on the
tire
Load on an individual tire that is

determined by distributing to each
axle its share of the maximum
loaded vehicle weight and dividing
by two.
. Vehicle normal load on the tire
Load on an individual tire that is

determined by distributing to each
axle its share of the curb weight,
accessory weight, and normal occupant weight (distributed in accordance with Table 1 that is appended to the end of this section)
and dividing by 2.
. Wheel-holding fixture
The fixture used to hold the wheel

and tire assembly securely during
testing.
. Vehicle capacity weight
The rated cargo and luggage load

plus 150 lbs (68 kg) times the
vehicles designated seating capacity.
Black plate (595,1)
Table 1 Occupant loading and distribution for vehicle normal load for
various designated seating capacities
Designated seating
capacity, number of
occupants
2 through 4
Vehicle normal load,

number of occupants
Occupant distribution in a
normally loaded vehicle
5 through 10
11 through 15
16 through 22
2 in front.
2 in front, 1 in second
seat.
seat, 1 in third seat, 1 in
fourth seat.
seat, 2 in third seat, 1 in
fourth seat.
13-9
& Tire care maintenance and

safety practices
. Check on a daily basis that the
tires are free from serious damage,
nails, and stones. At the same time,
check the tires for abnormal wear.
. Inspect the tire tread regularly
and replace the tires before their
tread wear indicators become visible. When a tires tread wear
indicator becomes visible, the tire
is worn beyond the acceptable limit
and must be replaced immediately.
With a tire in this condition, driving
at even low speeds in wet weather
can cause the vehicle to hydroplane. Possible resulting loss of
vehicle control can lead to an
accident.
13
CONTINUED
Black plate (596,1)
13-10
. To maximize the life of each tire

and ensure that the tires wear
uniformly, it is best to rotate the
tires every 7,500 miles (12,000 km).
Rotating the tires involves switching the front and rear tires on the
right-hand side of the vehicle and
similarly switching the front and
rear tires on the left-hand side of
the vehicle. (Each tire must be kept
on its original side of the vehicle.)
Replace any damaged or unevenly
worn tire at the time of rotation.
After tire rotation, adjust the tire
pressures and make sure the wheel
nuts are correctly tightened. For
information about the tightening
torque and tightening sequence
for the wheel nuts, refer to Flat
tires F9-5.
& Vehicle load limit how to

determine
The load capacity of your vehicle is
determined by weight, not by available cargo space. The load limit of
your vehicle is shown on the
vehicle placard attached to the
drivers side B-pillar. Locate the

statement The combined weight
of occupants and cargo should
never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs
on your vehicles placard.
The vehicle placard also shows
seating capacity of your vehicle.
The total load capacity includes the
total weight of driver and all passengers and their belongings, any
cargo, any optional equipment such
as a trailer hitch, roof rack or bike
carrier, etc., and the tongue load of
a trailer. Therefore cargo capacity
can be calculated by the following
method.
Cargo capacity = Load limit (total
weight of occupants + total weight
of optional equipment + tongue
load of a trailer (if applicable))
For towing capacity information and
weight limits, refer to Trailer towing
(Outback) F8-22.
! Calculating total and load capacities varying seating configurations
Calculate the available load capacity as shown in the following

examples:
Example 1A
Vehicle capacity weight of the

vehicle is 800 lbs (363 kg), which
is indicated on the vehicle placard
with the statement The combined
weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed 363 kg or
800 lbs.
For example, if the vehicle has one
Black plate (597,1)
occupant weighing 154 lbs (70 kg)

plus cargo weighing 551 lbs (250
kg).
1. Calculate the total weight.
Example 1B
2. Calculate the available load ca-
pacity by subtracting the total

weight from the vehicle capacity
weight of 800 lbs (363 kg).
3. The result of step 2 shows that a

further 95 lbs (43 kg) of cargo can
be carried.
For example, if a person weighing

176 lbs (80 kg) now enters the
same vehicle (bringing the number
of occupants to two), the calculations are as follows:
13-11
2. Calculate the available load capacity.
3. The total weight now exceeds

the capacity weight by 81 lbs (37
kg), so the cargo weight must be
reduced by 81 lbs (37 kg) or more.
Example 2A (Outback only)
CAUTION
Legacy: Your vehicle is neither

designed nor intended to be
used for trailer towing. Therefore, never tow a trailer with
your vehicle.
13
CONTINUED
Black plate (598,1)
13-12
load = 176 lbs (80 kg)).

Vehicle capacity weight of the

vehicle is 800 lbs (363 kg), which
is indicated on the vehicle placard
with the statement The combined
weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed 363 kg or
800 lbs.
For example, the vehicle has one
occupant weighing 165 lbs (75 kg)
plus cargo weighing 265 lbs (120
kg). In addition, the vehicle is fitted
with a trailer hitch weighing 22 lbs
(10 kg), to which is attached a
trailer weighing 1,764 lbs (800 kg).
10% of the trailer weight is applied
to the trailer tongue (i.e. Tongue
used for trailer towing. Therefore, never tow a trailer with

your vehicle.
3. The result of step 2 shows that a

further 172 lbs (78 kg) of cargo can
be carried.
Example 2B (Outback only)
CAUTION
For example, if a person weighing

143 lbs (65 kg) and a child weighing
40 lbs (18 kg) now enter the same
vehicle (bringing the number of
occupants to three), and a child
restraint system weighing 11 lbs (5
kg) is installed in the vehicle for the
child to use, the calculations are as
follows:
Legacy: Your vehicle is neither

designed nor intended to be
Black plate (599,1)
3. The total weight now exceeds

the capacity weight by 22 lbs (10
kg), so the cargo weight must be
reduced by 22 lbs (10 kg) or more.
& Determining compatibility of

tire and vehicle load capacities
The sum of four tires maximum
load ratings must exceed the maximum loaded vehicle weight
(GVWR). In addition, sum of the
maximum load ratings of two front
tires and of two rear tires must
exceed each axles maximum
loaded capacity (GAWR). Original
equipment tires are designed to
fulfill those conditions.
The maximum loaded vehicle
weight is referred to Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR). And each
axles maximum loaded capacity is
referred to Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). The GVWR and each
axles GAWR are shown on the
vehicle certification label affixed to
the drivers door.
The GVWR and front and rear
GAWRs are determined by not only
the maximum load rating of tires but
also loaded capacities of the vehicles suspension, axles and other
13-13
parts of the body.

Therefore, this means that the
vehicle cannot necessarily be
loaded up to the tires maximum
load rating on the tire sidewall.
& Adverse safety consequences of overloading on

handling and stopping and
on tires
Overloading could affect vehicle
handling, stopping distance, vehicle
and tire as shown in the following.
This could lead to an accident and
possibly result in severe personal
injury.
. Vehicle stability will deteriorate.
. Heavy and/or high-mounted
loads could increase the risk of
rollover.
. Stopping distance will increase.
. Brakes could overheat and fail.
. Suspension, bearings, axles and
other parts of the body could break
or experience accelerated wear
that will shorten vehicle life.
. Tires could fail.
. Tread separation could occur.
CONTINUED
13
Black plate (600,1)
13-14
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/Uniform tire quality grading standards
. Tire could separate from its rim.
& Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit

1. Locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed XXX
kg or XXX lbs. on your vehicles
placard.
2. Determine the combined weight
of the driver and passengers that
will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of
the driver and passengers from
XXX kg or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity. For example, if the XXX amount equals
1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will be
five 150 lbs (68 kg) passengers in
your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs (1,400 750 (5 6
150) = 650 lbs).
5. Determine the combined weight
of luggage and cargo being loaded
on the vehicle. That weight may not

safely exceed the available cargo
and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a
trailer, load from your trailer will be
transferred to your vehicle. Consult
this manual to determine how this
reduces the available cargo and
luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
Uniform tire quality grading

standards
This information indicates the relative performance of passenger car
tires in the area of treadwear,
traction, and temperature resistance. This is to aid the consumer
in making an informed choice in the
purchase of tires.
Quality grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. For example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
The quality grades apply to new

pneumatic tires for use on passenger cars. However, they do not
apply to deep tread, winter type
snow tires, space-saver or temporary use spare tires, tires with
nominal rim diameters of 12 inches
or less, or to some limited production tires.
All passenger car tires must con-
Black plate (601,1)
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/Uniform tire quality grading standards
form to Federal Safety Requirements in addition to these grades.
& Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of
the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified
government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150
would wear one and one-half (11/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions
of their use, however, and may
depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits,
service practices and differences in
road characteristics and climate.
& Traction AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B and C. Those
grades represent the tires ability to
stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on spe-
cified government test surfaces of

asphalt and concrete. A tire marked
C may have poor traction performance.
WARNING
The traction grade assigned to

this tire is based on straightahead braking traction tests,
and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
& Temperature A, B, C
The temperature grades are A (the
highest), B, and C, representing the
tires resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high
temperature can cause the material
of the tire to degenerate and reduce
tire life, and excessive temperature
can lead to sudden tire failure. The
13-15
grade C corresponds to a level of

performance which all passenger
car tires must meet under the
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel
than the minimum required by law.
WARNING
The temperature grade for this

tire is established for a tire
that is properly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessive
speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can
cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
13
Black plate (602,1)
13-16
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/Reporting safety defects (USA)
Reporting safety defects

(USA)
If you believe that your vehicle has
a defect which could cause a
crash or could cause injury or
death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA) in
addition to notifying Subaru of
America, Inc.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety
defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and
remedy campaign. However,
NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between
you, your dealer, or Subaru of
America, Inc. To contact NHTSA,
you may call the Vehicle Safety
Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
http://www.safercar.gov; or write
to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200
New Jersey Avenue, SE, West

Building, Washington, DC 20590.
You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety
from http://www.safercar.gov.
Black plate (31,1)
Index
14
Black plate (2,1)
14-2
Index
A
Abbreviation ................................................................... 3
ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) ..................................... 7-33
Warning light ......................................................... 3-19
Access key ............................................................... 2-10
Warning indicator ................................................... 3-25
Accessories.............................................................. 11-40
Accessory power outlet............................................... 6-10
Air cleaner element ................................................... 11-15
Air conditioner
Automatic climate control system ............................... 4-5
Manual climate control system................................... 4-6
Air filtration system..................................................... 4-10
Airflow selection........................................................... 4-6
Alarm system ............................................................ 2-28
All-Wheel Drive warning light ....................................... 3-23
Aluminum wheel ....................................................... 11-32
Cleaning ............................................................... 10-3
Antenna...................................................................... 5-2
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) ..................................... 7-33
Arming the system ..................................................... 2-30
Armrest..................................................................... 1-15
Ashtray ..................................................................... 6-12
AT OIL TEMP warning light ......................................... 3-17
Audio
ahaTM by HARMAN................................................ 5-44
AM/FM radio ......................................................... 5-28
AUX ..................................................................... 5-61
Base display audio set.............................................. 5-4
Basic operation...................................................... 5-18
Bluetooth audio...................................................... 5-58
CD ....................................................................... 5-53
iPod...................................................................... 5-56
Pandora .............................................................. 5-50
SiriusXM Satellite Radio .......................................... 5-37
Steering switches for audio ...................................... 5-63
SUBARU STARLINK............................................... 5-26
SUBARU STARLINKTM Multimedia Plus audio set ....... 5-6
Unit setting ............................................................ 5-19
USB memory ......................................................... 5-55
Auto on/off headlights ................................................. 3-47
Sensor .................................................................. 3-49
Vehicle setting........................................................ 3-46
Auto-dimming mirror.................................................... 3-69
Automatic climate control system................................... 4-5
Automatic headlight beam leveler
Warning light.......................................................... 3-32
Automatic Locking Retractor/Emergency Locking
Retractor (ALR/ELR) ................................................ 1-17
B
Battery
Drainage prevention function..................................... 2-8
Jump starting ......................................................... 9-11
Replacement (access key)..................................... 11-50
Replacement (remote engine start transmitter) ........... 7-21
Replacement (transmitter)...................................... 11-51
Vehicle battery ..................................................... 11-37
Bluetooth
Audio .................................................................... 5-58
Hands-free phone system........................................ 5-71
Settings................................................................. 5-66
Black plate (3,1)
Index
Troubleshooting ..................................................... 5-88

Bluetooth settings..................................................... 5-66
Booster seat.............................................................. 1-34
Bottle holder................................................................ 6-9
Brake
Assist ................................................................... 7-33
Booster........................................................ 7-32, 11-22
Disc ..................................................................... 12-9
Fluid............................................................ 11-20, 12-8
Pad ..................................................................... 11-24
Parking ................................................................. 7-43
Pedal .................................................................. 11-23
System ................................................................. 7-32
Brake pedal
Free play ............................................................. 11-23
Reserve distance .................................................. 11-23
Brake system ............................................................ 7-32
Warning light ......................................................... 3-19
Braking ..................................................................... 7-32
Tips...................................................................... 7-32
Breaking-in of new brake pads ................................... 11-24
BSD/RCTA................................................................ 7-54
Approach indicator light/warning buzzer .................... 7-57
OFF indicator ........................................ 3-32, 3-40, 7-57
OFF switch ........................................................... 7-60
Warning indicator ................................... 3-32, 3-40, 7-59
Warning volume..................................................... 3-45
Bulb
Chart .................................................................. 12-14
Replacing............................................................. 11-40
14-3
C
Cargo area
Cover.................................................................... 6-15
Light ............................................................. 6-3, 11-49
Tie-down hooks...................................................... 6-19
Catalytic converter ....................................................... 8-3
Center
Console ................................................................. 6-6
Changing
Coolant ............................................................... 11-15
Flat tire .................................................................. 9-5
Oil and oil filter..................................................... 11-13
Charge warning light ................................................... 3-16
CHECK ENGINE warning light/Malfunction indicator
light ....................................................................... 3-16
Checking
Brake pedal free play ............................................ 11-23
Brake pedal reserve distance ................................. 11-23
Clutch function ..................................................... 11-23
Clutch pedal free play ........................................... 11-24
Coolant level........................................................ 11-15
Fluid level (brake fluid) .......................................... 11-20
Fluid level (clutch fluid).......................................... 11-21
Fluid level (washer fluid)........................................ 11-32
Oil level (engine oil) .............................................. 11-11
Child restraint systems ................................................ 1-27
Installation of a booster seat .................................... 1-34
Installation with ALR/ELR seatbelt ............................ 1-30
Lower and tether anchorages................................... 1-36
Top tether anchorages ............................................ 1-39
Child safety ................................................................... 5
Black plate (4,1)
14-4
Index
Locks ................................................................... 2-34

Chime
Key ........................................................................ 3-5
Light..................................................................... 3-46
Seatbelt ................................................................ 3-13
Cleaning
Aluminum wheels................................................... 10-3
Interior .................................................................. 10-5
Ventilation grille ....................................................... 4-9
Climate control system ................................................. 4-3
Automatic................................................................ 4-5
Manual ................................................................... 4-6
Clock........................................................................ 3-34
Clutch
Fluid............................................................ 11-21, 12-8
Pedal .................................................................. 11-23
Coat hook ................................................................. 6-12
Console ...................................................................... 6-6
Continuously variable transmission (CVT) ..................... 7-25
Fluid............................................................ 11-19, 12-8
Oil temperature warning light (AT OIL TEMP) ............ 3-17
Coolant............................................................ 11-15, 12-8
Cooling system ......................................................... 11-14
Corrosion protection ................................................... 10-4
Crossbars ................................................................. 8-15
Cruise control ............................................................ 7-50
Indicator................................................................ 3-31
Set indicator .......................................................... 3-32
Cup holder .................................................................. 6-8
Front passengers .................................................... 6-8
Rear passengers..................................................... 6-9
D
Daytime running light system ....................................... 3-53
Defogger ................................................................... 3-61
Defrosting................................................................... 4-9
Deicer ....................................................................... 3-61
Differential gear oil
Front........................................................... 11-19, 12-7
Rear ........................................................... 11-19, 12-7
Dimensions................................................................ 12-2
Disarming the alarm system......................................... 2-32
Disc brake pad wear warning indicators ........................ 7-33
Dome light ......................................................... 6-2, 11-48
Door
Locks..................................................................... 2-6
Open indicator light................................................. 3-23
Step light............................................................. 11-49
Unlock selection function ................................. 2-18, 3-45
Double trip meter........................................................ 3-10
Drive belts ............................................................... 11-18
Driving
All-Wheel Drive warning light ................................... 3-23
AWD vehicles ......................................................... 8-5
Car phone/cell phone .................................................. 7
Drinking..................................................................... 6
Drugs........................................................................ 6
Foreign countries..................................................... 8-4
Off road.................................................................. 8-6
Pets.......................................................................... 7
Snowy and icy roads .............................................. 8-10
Tips ................................................. 7-24, 7-31, 8-2, 8-5
Tired or sleepy ........................................................... 7
Black plate (5,1)
Index
Winter .................................................................... 8-8

E
ECO gauge ............................................................... 3-12
Electrical system........................................................ 12-9
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) system .......... 7-34
Warning ................................................................ 3-20
Electronic parking brake.............................................. 7-43
Automatic release function by accelerator pedal......... 7-45
Hill Holder ............................................................. 7-45
Indicator light......................................................... 3-21
Warning ........................................................ 3-21, 7-47
Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)............................. 1-17
Engine
Compartment overview ........................................... 11-9
Coolant........................................................ 11-15, 12-8
Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide)............................. 6, 8-2
Hood .................................................................... 11-7
Low oil level warning indicator ................................. 3-17
Oil............................................................... 11-11, 12-4
Overheating .......................................................... 9-13
Starting & stopping........................................... 7-9, 7-12
Event data recorder......................................................... 9
Exterior care.............................................................. 10-2
F
Flat tires ..................................................................... 9-5
Floor mat .................................................................. 6-15
Fluid level
Brake .................................................................. 11-20
Clutch.................................................................. 11-21
14-5
Continuously variable transmission ......................... 11-19

Fog light
Bulb.......................................................... 11-42, 12-14
Indicator light ......................................................... 3-32
Steering responsive fog lights system ....................... 3-56
Switch................................................................... 3-56
Front
Differential gear oil........................................ 11-19, 12-7
Seatbelt pretensioners ............................................ 1-24
Side marker light .................................................. 11-42
Turn signal light.................................................... 11-42
Front seats ................................................................. 1-2
Forward and backward adjustment ............................ 1-4
Head restraint adjustment......................................... 1-8
Memory function...................................................... 1-6
Power seat ............................................................. 1-5
Reclining ................................................................ 1-4
Seat height adjustment (drivers seat) ........................ 1-4
Fuel ........................................................................... 7-3
Consumption indicator............................................. 3-38
Economy hints ........................................................ 8-2
Filler lid and cap...................................................... 7-4
Gauge................................................................... 3-11
Requirements ................................................. 7-3, 12-3
Fuses ..................................................................... 11-38
Fuses and circuits .................................................... 12-10
G
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)............................... 8-14
Glove box................................................................... 6-6
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)........................... 8-14
Black plate (6,1)
14-6
Index
H
Hands-free phone system ........................................... 5-71
Hazard warning flasher ........................................... 3-8, 9-2
Head restraint adjustment
Front seat ............................................................... 1-8
Rear seat.............................................................. 1-14
Headlight .................................................................. 3-47
Beam leveler ......................................................... 3-54
Bulb wattage ....................................................... 12-14
Control switch........................................................ 3-46
Flasher ................................................................. 3-53
Indicator light......................................................... 3-32
Welcome lighting function ....................................... 3-48
Heated Steering Wheel system.................................... 3-83
High beam assist function ........................................... 3-49
Indicator light......................................................... 3-31
Warning indicator ................................................... 3-31
High beam indicator light ............................................ 3-31
High/low beam change (dimmer).................................. 3-49
Hill descent control..................................................... 7-40
Indicator................................................................ 3-32
Hill Holder ................................................................. 7-45
Indicator light......................................................... 3-22
Switch .................................................................. 7-46
Hill start assist ........................................................... 7-48
To activate/deactivate ............................................. 7-50
HomeLink ........................................................ 3-63, 3-69
Hook
Coat ..................................................................... 6-12
Convenient............................................................ 6-14
Convenient tie-down............................................... 6-19
Shopping bag ........................................................ 6-13

Towing and tie-down ............................................... 9-14
Horn ......................................................................... 3-83
Hose and connections............................................... 11-14
I
Ignition switch ............................................................. 3-4
Light ...................................................................... 3-5
Illumination brightness control ...................................... 3-55
Immobilizer ................................................................. 2-4
Indicator light (security indicator light)........................ 3-30
Indicator light
BSD/RCTA OFF ..................................................... 3-32
Cruise control ........................................................ 3-31
Cruise control set ................................................... 3-32
Door open ............................................................. 3-23
Electronic parking brake .......................................... 3-21
Front fog light......................................................... 3-32
Headlight............................................................... 3-32
High beam............................................................. 3-31
High beam assist.................................................... 3-31
Hill descent control ................................................. 3-32
Hill Holder ............................................................. 3-22
Immobilizer ............................................................ 3-30
Security................................................................. 3-30
Select lever/Gear position........................................ 3-31
Steering responsive fog lights OFF ........................... 3-32
Turn signal ............................................................ 3-31
Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF................................. 3-25
Vehicle Dynamics Control operation.......................... 3-24
X-mode ................................................................. 3-32
Black plate (7,1)
Index
Information display ..................................................... 3-33

Inside mirror .............................................................. 3-63
Interior lights ............................................................... 6-2
Internal trunk lid release handle ................................... 2-39
J
Jack-up point............................................................... 9-5
Jump starting............................................................. 9-11
K
Key ............................................................................ 2-3
Number .................................................................. 2-3
Reminder chime....................................................... 3-5
Replacement ........................................................... 2-5
Keyless access with push-button start system ............... 2-10
Disabling keyless access functions........................... 2-18
Locking and unlocking doors ................................... 2-14
Opening rear gate .................................................. 2-16
Opening trunk........................................................ 2-16
Warning chimes and warning indicator...................... 3-25
When access key does not operate properly ............. 9-18
Keyless entry system ................................................. 2-24
L
LCA ......................................................................... 7-55
Leather seat materials ................................................ 10-5
License plate light ..................................................... 11-47
Light
Backup ................................................................ 11-46
Cargo area.................................................... 6-3, 11-49
Control switch........................................................ 3-46
14-7
Daytime running ..................................................... 3-53

Dome............................................................ 6-2, 11-48
Door step ............................................................ 11-49
Front fog ..................................................... 3-56, 11-42
Front side marker ................................................... 3-47
Ignition switch ......................................................... 3-5
License plate ....................................................... 11-47
Map .............................................................. 6-2, 11-48
Rear combination ................................................. 11-44
Rear side marker light ........................................... 11-44
Rear turn signal.................................................... 11-44
Trunk .................................................................. 11-49
Turn signal ........................................ 3-54, 11-42, 11-44
Vanity mirror ........................................................... 6-5
Loading your vehicle ................................................... 8-13
Low fuel warning light ................................................. 3-22
Low tire pressure warning light..................................... 3-17
Lower and tether anchorage ........................................ 1-36
M
Maintenance
Precautions ........................................................... 11-3
Schedule ............................................................... 11-3
Seatbelt................................................................. 1-24
Tips ...................................................................... 11-5
Tools...................................................................... 9-3
Malfunction indicator light (check engine warning light).... 3-16
Manual
Climate control system ............................................. 4-6
Mode (continuously variable transmission) ................. 7-29
Seat....................................................................... 1-4
Black plate (8,1)
14-8
Index
Transmission ......................................................... 7-23

Transmission oil............................................ 11-19, 12-7
Map light........................................................... 6-2, 11-48
Maximum load limits................................................... 8-22
Meters and gauges ...................................................... 3-8
Mirror defogger .......................................................... 3-61
Mirrors ...................................................................... 3-63
Moonroof .................................................................. 2-48
Multi information display.............................................. 3-36
N
New vehicle break-in driving.......................................... 8-2
O
Odometer.................................................................... 3-9
Off road driving............................................................ 8-6
Oil filter.................................................................... 11-13
Oil level
Engine................................................................. 11-11
Manual transmission.............................................. 11-19
Warning light ......................................................... 3-17
Oil pressure warning light............................................ 3-16
Outside
Mirror defogger ...................................................... 3-61
Mirrors .................................................................. 3-81
Temperature indicator ............................................. 3-35
Overhead console ........................................................ 6-7
Overheating engine .................................................... 9-13
P
Parking ..................................................................... 7-42
Brake.................................................................... 7-43
Tips ...................................................................... 7-47
Periodic inspections ..................................................... 8-4
Petrol fuel................................................................... 7-3
PIN Code Access ....................................................... 2-22
Pocket ....................................................................... 6-7
Power
Door locking switch.................................................. 2-9
Outlets .................................................................. 6-10
Outside mirrors ...................................................... 3-82
Rear gate ...................................................... 2-42, 9-21
Seat....................................................................... 1-5
Steering ................................................................ 7-31
Steering warning light.............................................. 3-23
Windows ............................................................... 2-34
Precautions against vehicle modification................ 1-27, 1-70
Preparing to drive ........................................................ 7-8
Push-button
Ignition switch ......................................................... 3-6
Starting and stopping engine.................................... 7-12
R
RAB (Reverse Automatic Braking)
OFF indicator ......................................................... 3-33
ON/OFF setting ...................................................... 7-69
Warning indicator.................................................... 3-33
RCTA........................................................................ 7-55
Rear
Combination lights ................................................ 11-44
Differential gear oil........................................ 11-19, 12-7
Gate ..................................................................... 2-41
Black plate (9,1)
Index
Turn signal light .................................................... 11-44

Rear seat.................................................................. 1-11
Armrest................................................................. 1-15
Folding down......................................................... 1-12
Head restraint adjustment ....................................... 1-14
Reclining............................................................... 1-11
Rear view camera ...................................................... 6-20
How to adjust the rear view image ........................... 5-25
Rear window
Defogger............................................................... 3-61
Wiper and washer switch ........................................ 3-60
Wiper blades ........................................................ 11-35
Recommended
Brake fluid............................................................. 12-8
Clutch fluid ............................................................ 12-8
Continuously variable transmission fluid .................... 12-8
Engine oil.............................................................. 12-4
Front differential gear oil ......................................... 12-7
Manual transmission oil .......................................... 12-7
Rear differential gear oil.......................................... 12-7
Spark plugs........................................................... 12-9
Refueling .................................................................... 7-4
Remote engine start system ........................................ 7-15
Remote keyless entry system ...................................... 2-24
Replacement
Brake pad and lining ............................................. 11-24
Wiper blades ........................................................ 11-33
Replacing
Access key battery................................................ 11-50
Air cleaner element ............................................... 11-16
Lost transmitters (remote keyless entry system) ......... 2-27
14-9
Remote engine start transmitter battery ..................... 7-21

Remote keyless entry transmitter battery ................. 11-51
Replacing bulbs ............................................. 11-40, 12-14
Backup light......................................................... 11-46
Cargo area light ................................................... 11-49
Dome light ........................................................... 11-48
Door step light ..................................................... 11-49
Front fog light....................................................... 11-42
Front side marker light .......................................... 11-42
Front turn signal light ............................................ 11-42
Halogen headlight................................................. 11-41
HID headlight ....................................................... 11-40
License plate light................................................. 11-47
Map light ............................................................. 11-48
Rear combination light .......................................... 11-44
Rear side marker light ........................................... 11-44
Rear turn signal light............................................. 11-44
Trunk light ........................................................... 11-49
Rocking the vehicle .................................................... 8-12
Roof rack .................................................................. 8-15
Roof rails with integrated cross bars ............................. 8-15
Rope hook................................................................. 8-19
S
Safety
Precautions when driving............................................. 4
Symbol...................................................................... 3
Warnings ................................................................... 2
Seat
Fabric ................................................................... 10-5
Front...................................................................... 1-2
Black plate (10,1)
14-10
Index
Heater .................................................................... 1-9

Height adjustment .................................................... 1-4
Memory function ...................................................... 1-6
Power..................................................................... 1-5
Rear..................................................................... 1-11
Seatbelt ................................................................. 4, 1-16
Fastening.............................................................. 1-17
Maintenance.......................................................... 1-24
Pretensioners ........................................................ 1-24
Safety tips............................................................. 1-16
Warning light and chime ......................................... 3-13
Security
Alarm system ........................................................ 2-28
Immobilizer.............................................................. 2-4
Indicator light......................................................... 3-30
Shock sensors....................................................... 2-33
Select lever
Position indicator ................................................... 3-31
Shift lock function................................................... 7-28
Shock sensors........................................................... 2-33
Shopping bag hook .................................................... 6-13
Snow tires........................................................ 8-11, 11-25
Snowy and icy roads .................................................. 8-10
Spark plugs...................................................... 11-18, 12-9
Specifications ............................................................ 12-2
Speedometer............................................................... 3-9
SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag) ... 4, 1-41
SRS airbag system
Monitors................................................................ 1-68
Servicing............................................................... 1-69
Warning light ......................................................... 3-15
Starting & stopping engine.................................... 7-9, 7-12

State emission testing (U.S. only) .................................. 7-7
Steering responsive fog lights system ........................... 3-56
OFF indicator ......................................................... 3-32
Steering switches for audio .......................................... 5-63
Steering wheel
Lock ............................................................. 7-11, 7-14
Power ................................................................... 7-31
Tilt/telescopic ......................................................... 3-82
Stop light................................................................. 12-15
Storage compartment................................................... 6-6
Sun shade................................................................. 2-50
Sun visors .................................................................. 6-4
Supplemental Restraint System airbag (SRS) ................ 1-41
Synthetic leather upholstery ......................................... 10-6
T
Tachometer................................................................ 3-10
Temperature gauge..................................................... 3-12
Temperature warning light
AT OIL TEMP......................................................... 3-17
Temporary spare tire .................................................... 9-2
Tether (child restraint system) .............................. 1-36, 1-39
Tie-down hooks.......................................................... 9-14
Tire................................................................. 11-25, 12-9
Chains .................................................................. 8-12
Inspection............................................................ 11-27
Pressures and wear.............................................. 11-27
Replacement........................................................ 11-30
Rotation .............................................................. 11-30
Size and pressure .................................................. 12-9
Black plate (11,1)
Index
Types .................................................................. 11-25

Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)..... 7-41, 9-10, 11-25
Warning light ......................................................... 3-17
Tires and wheels....................................................... 11-25
Tools .......................................................................... 9-3
Top tether anchorages ........................................ 1-36, 1-39
Towing...................................................................... 9-13
All wheels on the ground ........................................ 9-17
Flat-bed truck ........................................................ 9-16
Hooks................................................................... 9-14
Weight.................................................................. 8-22
Trailer
Connecting............................................................ 8-20
Hitch (Outback).............................................. 8-19, 8-26
Towing.................................................................. 8-22
Towing tips............................................................ 8-27
Trip meter ................................................................. 3-10
Trunk lid ........................................................... 2-38, 9-19
Release handle ..................................................... 2-39
Trunk light................................................................ 11-49
Turn signal
Indicator lights ....................................................... 3-31
Lever.................................................................... 3-54
U
Under-floor storage compartment ................................. 6-20
V
Valet mode................................................................ 2-33
Vanity mirror ................................................................ 6-5
14-11
Vehicle
Capacity weight...................................................... 8-14
Identification ........................................................ 12-18
Symbols .................................................................... 4
Vehicle Dynamics Control
OFF indicator light .................................................. 3-25
OFF switch ............................................................ 7-37
Operation indicator light........................................... 3-24
System.................................................................. 7-35
Warning light.......................................................... 3-24
Ventilator .................................................................... 4-2
Voice command operation ........................................... 5-81
W
Warning and indicator lights ......................................... 3-13
Warning chimes
Keyless access with push-button start system............ 3-25
Seatbelt................................................................. 3-13
Warning light
ABS...................................................................... 3-19
Access key ............................................................ 3-25
All-Wheel Drive ...................................................... 3-23
AT OIL TEMP......................................................... 3-17
Automatic headlight beam leveler ............................. 3-32
Brake system......................................................... 3-19
BSD/RCTA ............................................................ 3-32
Charge.................................................................. 3-16
CHECK ENGINE .................................................... 3-16
Engine low oil level................................................. 3-17
High beam assist.................................................... 3-31
Keyless access with push-button start system............ 3-25
Black plate (12,1)
14-12
Index
Low fuel................................................................ 3-22

Low tire pressure ................................................... 3-17
Oil pressure .......................................................... 3-16
Power steering ...................................................... 3-23
Seatbelt ................................................................ 3-13
SRS airbag system ................................................ 3-15
Vehicle Dynamics Control ....................................... 3-24
Windshield washer fluid .......................................... 3-23
Warning volume
BSD/RCTA............................................................ 3-45
EyeSight system .................................................... 3-44
Warranties ..................................................................... 1
Warranties and maintenance ....................................... 8-22
Washing ................................................................... 10-2
Waxing and polishing ................................................. 10-3
Wear indicators......................................................... 11-29
Welcome lighting function ........................................... 3-48
Wheel
Aluminum............................................................. 11-32
Balance ............................................................... 11-29
Nut tightening torque .............................................. 12-9
Replacement ........................................................ 11-31
Windows................................................................... 2-34
Windshield
Washer fluid ......................................................... 11-32
Wiper and washer switches..................................... 3-59
Wiper blades ........................................................ 11-34
Wiper deicer.......................................................... 3-61
Winter
Driving.................................................................... 8-8
Tires............................................................ 8-11, 11-25
Wiper and washer ...................................................... 3-57

Wiper deicer .............................................................. 3-61
X
X-mode ..................................................................... 7-38
Indicator ................................................................ 3-32
Black plate (2,1)
& Fuel:
GAS STATION REFERENCE

& Engine oil capacity:
Use only unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87 AKI

(90 RON) or higher.

& Fuel octane rating
The indicated oil quantity is only a guideline and is estimated

based on a case when the engine oil is changed with an oil
filter. After refilling the engine with oil, the oil level should be
checked using an oil level gauge. For more details about
maintenance and service, refer to Engine oil F11-11.
! RON
This octane rating is the Research Octane Number.
! AKI
This octane rating is the average of the Research Octane and
Motor Octane numbers and is commonly referred to as the Anti
Knock Index (AKI).
& Cold tire pressure:

Refer to Tires F12-9.
& Fuel capacity:

& Engine oil:

Always use the SUBARU approved engine oil. For further
details, please contact your SUBARU dealer.
If the approved engine oil is unavailable, use the alternative
engine oil described as follows.
. API classification SN with the words RESOURCE CONSERVING
. or ILSAC GF-5, which can be identified with the ILSAC
certification mark (Starburst mark)
For the complete viscosity requirements, refer to Engine oil
F12-4.
Foreword
This supplement contains explanations and instructions for correctly
operating the following systems.
Navigation System
Audio and Visual System
Handsfree System
APPS
If your vehicle contains one of the systems above, be sure to check the
contents of this supplement carefully.
If you transfer the ownership of the vehicle to another person, make
sure that this supplement is provided with the Owner's Manual inside
the vehicle.
The information, specifications and illustrations in this supplement are
valid at the time of publication. Fuji Heavy Industries reserves the right
to change the specifications and design without prior notice, with no
obligation to perform the same or equivalent changes to vehicles sold
in the past.
This Owner's Manual supplement applies to all models, and describes
all devices, including manufacturer-installed options. This means that
information may be included about devices that are not installed in
your vehicle.
SUBARU STARLINK is the in-car connectivity system available on select

Subaru vehicles.

is a registered trademark of Fuji Heavy Industries Ltd.
Copyright 2016, Fuji Heavy Industries Ltd.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 QUICK GUIDE
BASIC FUNCTION... 20 QUICK REFERENCE... 28
NAVIGATION OPERATION... 29 FUNCTION INDEX... 34
2 BASIC FUNCTION
BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION... 38
REAR VIEW CAMERA... See vehicle Owners Manual
3 AUDIO
BASIC OPERATION... 54 RADIO OPERATION... 60
MEDIA OPERATION... 78 AUDIO/VISUAL REMOTE CONTROLS... 96
SETUP... 98 TIPS FOR OPERATING THE AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM... 101
QUICK GUIDE
19
BASIC FUNCTION
37
AUDIO
53
PHONE
113
APPS
145
INFORMATION
161
SETTINGS
173
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
(WITH NAVIGATION FUNCTION)
199
Siri/VOICE RECOGNITION
SYSTEM
251
APPENDIX/WHAT TO DO IF/
INDEX
277
4 PHONE
PHONE OPERATION... 114
SETUP... 133
5 APPS
SUBARU STARLINK... 149
MirrorLinkTM... 150
ahaTM... 152
Pandora*... 158
6 INFORMATION
USEFUL INFORMATION... 162
7 SETTINGS
Bluetooth SETTINGS... 174
OTHER SETTINGS... 188
8 NAVIGATION SYSTEM (WITH NAVIGATION FUNCTION)

NAVIGATION... 199
9 Siri / VOICE RECOGNITION SYSTEM

Siri... 252 VOICE RECOGNITION SYSTEM OPERATION... 255
COMMAND LIST... 261
10 APPENDIX / WHAT TO DO IF / INDEX

MAP DATABASE INFORMATION AND UPDATES... 278
TROUBLESHOOTING... 287 ERROR MESSAGES... 293
10
INDEX... 300
*:Pandora is available in the United States, Australia, and New Zealand.
docstructure.indb
2016/03/30
11:15:04
INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION
The symbols described below are found in this instruction
manual as well as on the unit itself to insure its proper and
safe usage and to prevent injury or damage to property.
Make sure you understand the meaning of these symbols
before reading the rest of this manual.
READ FIRST
We recommend that you wait until the positioning stabilizes
before starting to drive.
If you start to drive while the positioning is not complete,
the indicated position may differ from the actual vehicle
position. We recommend waiting until the GPS indicator
before starting to drive.
displays
The screens shown in this manual may differ from the actual
screens depending on the data type or when the map data
was created.
When maps are created, land surveys are conducted
and information on road improvements and reopening
is collected to provide the most accurate information
possible. However, modifications to roads, place names and
facilities may be carried out at any time. Consequently, we
cannot guarantee that map data contains no errors in road
positions, configuration and names, or in facility names.
docstructure.indb
2016/03/30
11:15:04
INTRODUCTION
WARNING
l This sign indicates a situation in which incorrect handling
through disregard of written information might result in death
or serious personal injury.
CAUTION
l This sign indicates a situation in which incorrect handling
through disregard of written information might result in
personal injury or damage to property.
SYMBOLS USED IN ILLUSTRATIONS

INTRODUCTION
Information in this manual that must be observed for the

unit, and information that is useful to know is indicated as
follows.
Safety symbol
The symbol of a circle with a slash through it means
Do not, Do not do this or Do not let this happen.
Arrows indicating operations

Indicates the action
(pushing, turning,
etc.) used to operate
switches and other
devices.
NOTE
l Useful information for the user is described.
l Be sure to read all materials such as manuals and warranties
that come with the product. Fuji Heavy Industries is not
responsible for problems that arise due to failure to follow these
instructions.
l Changes to product specifications may result in differences
between the content of the manual and the features of the unit.
docstructure.indb
2016/03/30
11:15:05
INTRODUCTION
PRECAUTIONS FOR USE

WARNING
l The main unit requires a 12 V DC power supply. The main unit
should not be installed in any vehicle which does not have a
12 V power system with a ground-connected negative side.
An installation other than the one intended may cause severe
damage to the main unit, and electric shock or serious injury
to the users.
l Even when using the route guidance of the navigation
system, be sure to drive by following the actual traffic
regulations. If you drive by following only the route guidance
of the navigation system, you may violate the actual traffic
regulations and cause a traffic accident.
l To ensure safety, the driver should not operate the navigation
system while driving. Operating the navigation system while
driving may result in an accidental steering wheel operation
or otherwise cause an accident. Stop the vehicle before
operating the navigation system. Also, do not watch the
screen while driving because doing so may be dangerous
(ETC). Inattention to road conditions ahead may result in an
accident.
l The driver should not perform operations such as volume

adjustment while driving. Inattention to road conditions ahead
may result in an accident, so be sure to stop the vehicle in a
safe place before performing the operation.
l The driver should not change discs while driving. Inattention
to road conditions ahead may result in an accident, so be
sure to stop the vehicle in a safe place before performing the
operation.
l The driver should not perform operations such as adding
a location or setting the memory while driving. Inattention to
road conditions ahead may result in an accident, so be sure
to stop the vehicle in a safe place before performing the
operation.
l Before viewing a video, be sure to stop the vehicle in a safe
place and apply the parking brake. To ensure safety, videos
are not displayed during driving.
l To ensure safety, never operate a cell phone while driving.
l Do not let foreign objects enter the disc slot or SD memory
card slot. Doing so may result in a fire or electric shock.
l Do not disassemble or modify the unit. Doing so may result in
an accident, fire or electric shock.
docstructure.indb
2016/03/30
11:15:05
INTRODUCTION
l Do not use the unit when it is malfunctioning, such as when

the screen is not lit or no sound comes out. Doing so may
result in an accident, fire or electric shock.
l Always replace fuses with fuses of the same specified
capacity (amperage). Using a fuse with a higher capacity than
the specification may result in a fire.
l If a foreign object or water enters the unit, smoke or a strange
odor may be emitted. If such an abnormality occurs, stop
using the unit immediately and contact your SUBARU dealer.
An accident, fire or electric shock may result if you continue to
use the unit under these conditions.
l In a thunderstorm, do not touch the antenna line or the unit.
Lightning may cause an electric shock.
CAUTION
INTRODUCTION
l Do not let water or foreign objects enter the internal parts

of the unit. Doing so may result in smoke, fire or an electric
shock.
l Although the unit can be used when the ignition switch is set
to either ACC or ON position, to protect the battery, start
the engine before using the unit.
l Do not use the unit anywhere other than in a vehicle. Doing so
may result in an electric shock or other injury.
l While driving, keep the volume low enough for you to hear
outside sounds. Driving while not being able to hear sounds
from outside the vehicle may result in an accident.
l Be careful of the volume when turning on the power. If a loud
noise is emitted suddenly when you turn on the power, it may
damage your hearing.
l Do not apply a strong force to the display. Doing so may result
in a malfunction.
l Do not park or stop in prohibited areas to use the unit.
l Do not put your fingers or hands into the disc slot or SD

memory card slot. Doing so may result in an injury.
l If direct sunlight shines into the vehicle, light may reflect off
the product. Be very careful while driving.
l Do not touch the hot parts of the unit. The hot parts may burn
you.
l Never use headphones or earphones while driving. Driving

while not being able to hear sounds from outside the vehicle
may result in a traffic accident.
l Do not use while there is an abnormality such as sound

breakup or distortion. Doing so may result in a fire.
docstructure.indb
2016/03/30
11:15:05
INTRODUCTION
l Using the unit during extremely high or low temperature may

result in mistaken operation or a malfunction. In particular, the
temperature inside the vehicle can often rise to a high level
during the summer. Cool the vehicle, for example by opening
a window, before using the unit.
l Be careful if metal or water enters the unit, or the unit is
exposed to a strong impact, because it may result in a
malfunction.
l The touch buttons on the display screen may not operate
correctly if condensation forms inside them. If this happens,
do not attempt to operate the switches until the condensation
has disappeared.
l If juice or similar liquid is spilled on the display, wipe
off immediately. Failure to do so may result in product
malfunction.
l The screen is easily marked by fingerprints and tends to
attracts dust, and should therefore be cleaned occasionally.
When cleaning, turn off the power, and wipe lightly with a soft,
dry cloth. To remove dirt, soak a soft cloth in neutral detergent
and squeeze well before wiping. Do not use a wet floor-cloth,
organic solvents (benzene, ethanol, thinner, etc.), acids, or
alkalis. Using such agents will result in screen deterioration.
Furthermore, do not hit the screen or rub it with hard objects.
l Avoid touching the SD memory card terminals to prevent
contamination. Doing so may cause card read failure.
NOTE
l Fuji Heavy Industries is not responsible for any damages to the
purchaser or third parties that occur from using the map data.
l We do not provide any replacements or refunds for any mistakes
there may be in the map data displays or contents, such as
misspelling, omissions or misaligned positions.
l Fuji Heavy Industries makes no guarantee that the functions
included in the map data will be appropriate for the specific
objectives of the purchaser.
l Functions that cannot be operated while driving have their colors
toned down when the vehicle is being driven, and their operation
is disabled. Touching a disabled switch may result in the display
of an operation prohibited message on the screen.
l During strong vibrations, such as when driving on a poor road
surface, the unit may no longer be able to read the data from the
disc or SD memory card, and it will not operate correctly. When
the vibration lessens, normal operation will return after a short
time.
l Immediately after turning on the heater when the temperature
is low, dew (water drops) may adhere to the lens of the CD
reader (condensation). If this happens, leaving the unit for about
an hour should remove the condensation and return the unit to
normal operation.
If the unit does not return to normal operation even after several
hours, contact your SUBARU dealer.
docstructure.indb
2016/03/30
11:15:05
INTRODUCTION
NOTE
l When using the unit for the first time after purchase, or after
the battery was removed for a long time, the current position
may not be displayed correctly. Wait a short time until the GPS
positioning corrects the displayed position.
l This device is precision-engineered equipment and the recorded
data can be lost as a result of static electricity, electrical noise,
vibration, or other influences. To protect the device against data
loss, we recommend keeping a separate record of the data that
you record after purchase.
l Note that the following events are not covered by the warranty.
Corruption or loss of the data recorded on the SD memory
card by the purchaser resulting from failure, incorrect
operation or malfunction of the unit, or any problems
associated with it, or due to the effects of electrical noise or
other influences.
Corruption or loss of the map data or basic program stored in
the SD memory card resulting from the incorrect use of the
unit by the purchaser or a third party.
Corruption or loss of data recorded on the SD memory card
by the purchaser resulting from the malfunction or repair of the
unit.
Note that by installing or using the unit, you are regarded as
having consented to the points above.
l The screen may be adversely affected or disturbed by noise if
electrical equipment that generates powerful electrical noise
is used near the system. In such cases, keep the electrical
equipment at a distance, or refrain from use.
l The display may appear brighter when the temperature is low,

or immediately after starting the engine, however, this is a
characteristic of the LED elements, and does not indicate a fault.
The display will return to its original brightness when the vehicle
cabin has warmed up.
l When you look at the screen through polarized material such as
polarized sunglasses, the screen may be dark and hard to see.
If so, look at the screen from different angles, adjust the screen
settings on the Display Settings (Display Settings) screen or
take off your sunglasses.
l It may be difficult to view the screen if the display is exposed to
sunlight from an awkward angle.
l The LCD screen may not function normally if covered with a
protective film. Do not affix a protective film.
l The touch panel may function incorrectly or fail to respond if
operated with objects other than fingers (nails, operation when
wearing gloves, pens, etc.)
l When inserting or removing CDs or SD cards, take care not
to touch the touch panel. The touch panel will respond if
inadvertently touched by hand.
l If the system functions unexpectedly such as an area other than
the one touched being selected, or failure to respond when
touched, there is a possibility that another finger or part of the
hand is in contact with display.
l Scratches on the system panel surface are easily noticeable,
and it should therefore be handled with care.
INTRODUCTION
NOTE
docstructure.indb
2016/03/30
11:15:05
INTRODUCTION
SAFETY INSTRUCTION (WITHOUT

NAVIGATION FUNCTION)
WARNING
l For safety, the driver should not operate the system while he/
she is driving. Insufficient attention to the road and traffic may
cause an accident.
SAFETY INSTRUCTION (WITH NAVIGATION

FUNCTION)
To use this system in the safest possible manner, follow all

the safety tips shown below.
Do not use any feature of this system to the extent it
becomes a distraction and prevents safe driving. The first
priority while driving should always be the safe operation
of the vehicle. While driving, be sure to observe all traffic
regulations.
Prior to the actual use of this system, learn how to use it and
become thoroughly familiar with it. Read the entire manual
to make sure you understand the system. Do not allow
other people to use this system until they have read and
understood the instructions in this manual.
For your safety, some functions may become inoperable
when driving. Unavailable screen buttons are dimmed.
To use this system in the safest possible manner, follow all

the safety tips shown below.
This system is intended to assist in reaching the destination
and, if used properly, can do so. The driver is solely
responsible for the safe operation of your vehicle and the
safety of your passengers.
Do not use any feature of this system to the extent it
becomes a distraction and prevents safe driving. The first
priority while driving should always be the safe operation
of the vehicle. While driving, be sure to observe all traffic
regulations.
docstructure.indb
2016/03/30
11:15:05
INTRODUCTION
For your safety, some functions may become inoperable

when driving. Unavailable screen buttons are dimmed. Only
when the vehicle is not moving, can the destination and
route selection be done.
WARNING
l For safety, the driver should not operate the system while he/
she is driving. Insufficient attention to the road and traffic may
cause an accident.
l While driving, be sure to obey the traffic regulations and
maintain awareness of the road conditions. If a traffic sign on
the road has been changed, route guidance may not have the
updated information such as the direction of a one way street.
While driving, listen to the voice instructions as much as

possible and glance at the screen briefly and only when it
is safe. However, do not totally rely on voice guidance. Use
it just for reference. If the system cannot determine the
current position correctly, there is a possibility of incorrect,
late, or non-voice guidance.
The data in the system may occasionally be incomplete.
Road conditions, including driving restrictions (no left turns,
street closures, etc.) frequently change. Therefore, before
following any instructions from the system, look to see
whether the instruction can be done safely and legally.
INTRODUCTION
Prior to the actual use of this system, learn how to use it and
become thoroughly familiar with it. Read the entire manual
to make sure you understand the system. Do not allow
other people to use this system until they have read and
understood the instructions in this manual.
This system cannot warn about such things as the safety of

an area, condition of streets, and availability of emergency
services. If unsure about the safety of an area, do not drive
into it. Under no circumstances is this system a substitute
for the drivers personal judgement.
Use this system only in locations where it is legal to do so.
Some states/provinces may have laws prohibiting the use of
video and navigation screens next to the driver.
docstructure.indb
2016/03/30
11:15:05
INTRODUCTION
HOW TO READ THIS MANUAL

BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION
INFO SCREEN OPERATION

REORDERING THE MENU ICONS
Order of the menu icons can be changed.
3.
Display the INFO (INFO) screen. (P.24)

Select Reorder (Reorder).
The split screen can display multiple information screens,

such as the audio system screen and hands-free screen,
simultaneously.
The following describes screen operation for the system
with navigation function.
1.
2.
Press and hold the AUDIO/TUNE knob.

Split screen is displayed.
2
BASIC FUNCTION
1.
2.
SPLIT SCREEN OPERATION
Select the desired menu icon to be moved.

When a screen is selected, the selected screen will
change to a full-screen display.
4.
Select
or
to move the menu icon, and then
select OK (OK).
No.
Name
Description
Operational Outlines
An outline of the operation is explained.
Main Operations
The steps of an operation are explained.
Supplemental information
Describes supplemental information relating to main operation.
When a panel button should be selected, button names are shown as
When a touch button on the screen should be selected, button names are shown as
10
docstructure.indb
10
2016/03/30
11:15:06
Table of Contents
2 BASIC FUNCTION
BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION ... 38
1 QUICK GUIDE
BASIC FUNCTION ................................................ 20
OVERVIEW BUTTONS .........................................................20
HOME (HOME) SCREEN ..................................................22
APPS (APPS) SCREEN ....................................................23
INFO (INFO) SCREEN .......................................................24
SPLIT SCREEN .....................................................................25
STATUS DISPLAY .................................................................26
QUICK REFERENCE ............................................ 28

SETTINGS (SETTINGS) SCREEN ....................................28
NAVIGATION OPERATION .................................. 29

REGISTERING HOME (WITH NAVIGATION FUNCTION) ...29
OPERATION FLOW: GUIDING THE ROUTE
(WITH NAVIGATION FUNCTION).........................................31
SETTING HOME AS THE DESTINATION
FUNCTION INDEX ................................................ 34

FUNCTION INDEX ................................................................34
INITIAL SCREEN ..................................................................38

INITIAL SCREEN ............................................................38
LOADING AND UNLOADING A DISC ..................................41
LOADING A DISC ............................................................41
UNLOADING A DISC.......................................................41
CONNECTING AND DISCONNECTING A USB MEMORY/
PORTABLE DEVICE .............................................................42
CONNECTING A DEVICE ...............................................42
LOADING AND REMOVING AN SD CARD
LOADING AN SD CARD .................................................42
REMOVING AN SD CARD ..............................................44
TOUCH SCREEN GESTURES .............................................45
TOUCH SCREEN OPERATION ............................................46
INFO SCREEN OPERATION ................................................47
REORDERING THE MENU ICONS ................................47
SPLIT SCREEN OPERATION...............................................47
CUSTOMIZING THE SPLIT SCREEN ............................48
ENTERING LETTERS AND NUMBERS/
LIST SCREEN OPERATION .................................................48
ENTERING LETTERS AND NUMBERS .........................48
LIST SCREEN OPERATION ...........................................49
SCREEN ADJUSTMENT ......................................................51
CHANGING BETWEEN DAY AND NIGHT MODE ..........52
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
docstructure.indb
11
2016/03/30
11:15:06
3 AUDIO
BASIC OPERATION ............................................. 54
SOME BASICS ......................................................................54
TURNING THE SYSTEM ON AND OFF .........................54
SELECTING AN AUDIO SOURCE ..................................55
SOUND SETTINGS.........................................................56
AUDIO SCREEN ADJUSTMENT ....................................58
VOICE RECOGNITION SYSTEM ...................................59
RADIO OPERATION ............................................. 60

AM/FM RADIO.......................................................................60
OVERVIEW .....................................................................60
PRESETTING A STATION ..............................................61
SELECTING A STATION FROM THE LIST .....................62
RADIO BROADCAST DATA SYSTEM ............................62
AVAILABLE HD Radio TECHNOLOGY .......................64
CACHING RADIO PROGRAMS......................................67
SiriusXM Satellite Radio ....................................................69
OVERVIEW .....................................................................69
HOW TO SUBSCRIBE TO SiriusXM Satellite Radio .....70
DISPLAYING THE RADIO ID ..........................................73
PRESETTING A CHANNEL ............................................73
CACHING RADIO PROGRAMS......................................74
REGISTERING A SMART FAVORITE CHANNEL...........75
TuneStartTM FUNCTION ..................................................75
TuneScanTM FUNCTION..................................................76
SEARCHING BY FEATURED FAVORITES ....................76
SELECTING A CHANNEL FROM THE LIST ...................76
PRESERVING A MUSIC INFORMATION .......................77
MEDIA OPERATION ............................................. 78

CD ..........................................................................................78
OVERVIEW .....................................................................78
USB MEMORY ......................................................................81
OVERVIEW .....................................................................81
iPod .......................................................................................84
OVERVIEW .....................................................................84
SD CARD (WITH NAVIGATION FUNCTION) .......................87
OVERVIEW .....................................................................87
Bluetooth AUDIO..................................................................91
OVERVIEW .....................................................................91
CONNECTING A Bluetooth DEVICE ...............................94
AUX .......................................................................................94
OVERVIEW .....................................................................94
AUDIO/VISUAL REMOTE CONTROLS ............... 96

STEERING SWITCHES ........................................................96
SETUP................................................................... 98
AUDIO SETTINGS ................................................................98
AUDIO SETTINGS SCREEN ..........................................98
TIPS FOR OPERATING THE AUDIO/VISUAL

SYSTEM .............................................................. 101
OPERATING INFORMATION..............................................101
RADIO ...........................................................................101
CD PLAYER AND DISC ................................................103
USB MEMORY ..............................................................106
iPod ...............................................................................106
SD CARD (WITH NAVIGATION FUNCTION) ...............107
FILE INFORMATION .....................................................107
TERMS .......................................................................... 111
12
docstructure.indb
12
2016/03/30
11:15:07
4 PHONE
PHONE OPERATION (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM
FOR CELLULAR PHONES) ............................... 114
QUICK REFERENCE ..........................................................114
SOME BASICS ....................................................................115
REGISTERING/CONNECTING A Bluetooth PHONE.... 116
USING THE PHONE SWITCH/MICROPHONE ............ 116
VOICE RECOGNITION SYSTEM ................................. 117
ABOUT THE CONTACTS IN THE CONTACT LIST ...... 117
WHEN SELLING OR DISPOSING
OF THE VEHICLE ........................................................ 118
CALLING ON THE Bluetooth PHONE ...............................118
BY SPEED DIAL LIST ...................................................120
BY CALL HISTORY .......................................................120
BY CONTACTS LIST.....................................................121
BY DIAL PAD .................................................................122
BY OFF HOOK SWITCH ...............................................123
BY SPLIT SCREEN .......................................................123
RECEIVING ON THE Bluetooth PHONE ...........................124
INCOMING CALLS ........................................................124
TALKING ON THE Bluetooth PHONE ...............................125
SENDING TONES .........................................................126
TRANSMIT VOLUME SETTING ...................................126
INCOMING CALL WAITING ..........................................127
Bluetooth PHONE MESSAGE FUNCTION ........................127

RECEIVING A MESSAGE .............................................129
CHECKING MESSAGES ..............................................129
REPLYING TO A MESSAGE (QUICK REPLY)..............130
CALLING THE MESSAGE SENDER ............................131
SETUP................................................................. 133
PHONE/MESSAGE SETTINGS ..........................................133

PHONE/MESSAGE SETTINGS SCREEN ...................133
Sound Settings (Sound Settings) SCREEN ...............134
Contact/Call History Settings
(Contact/Call History Settings) SCREEN ...................135
Messaging Settings
(Messaging Settings) SCREEN .................................142
Phone Display Settings
(Phone Display Settings) SCREEN ...........................143
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
13
docstructure.indb
13
2016/03/30
11:15:07
5 APPS
6 INFORMATION
BEFORE USING THE APPLICATION ................ 146
USEFUL INFORMATION .................................... 162
BEFORE USING THE APPLICATION ................................146

SETTINGS REQUIRED
TO USE THE APPLICATION .......................................147
ABOUT APP-BASED CONNECTED CONTENT...........147
SiriusXM RADIO DATA SERVICE ......................................162

DISPLAYING SPORTS INFORMATION........................162
DISPLAYING WEATHER INFORMATION.....................163
DISPLAYING STOCKS INFORMATION........................167
DISPLAYING FUEL INFORMATION
(NOT AVAILABLE IN CANADA) ...................................168
VEHICLE MONITOR ...........................................................169
DISPLAYING VEHICLE MONITOR ...............................169
ECO MONITOR ...................................................................170
DISPLAYING ECO MONITOR ......................................170
SUBARU STARLINK .......................................... 149

SUBARU STARLINK...........................................................149
USING SUBARU STARLINK APPLICATION ................149
MirrorLink ....................................................... 150

MirrorLink .......................................................................150
USING MirrorLinkTM APPLICATION ...............................150
OVERVIEW ...................................................................150
aha
TM
by HARMAN ............................................. 152
aha by HARMAN .............................................................152

OVERVIEW ...................................................................152
USING aha APPLICATION ............................................154
TM
Pandora* ........................................................... 158

Pandora*............................................................................158
OVERVIEW ...................................................................158
7 SETTINGS
Bluetooth SETTINGS ....................................... 174
REGISTERING/CONNECTING Bluetooth DEVICE .........174
REGISTERING A Bluetooth PHONE
FOR THE FIRST TIME.................................................174
REGISTERING A Bluetooth AUDIO DEVICE
FOR THE FIRST TIME.................................................177
PROFILES .....................................................................178
SETTING Bluetooth DETAILS ...........................................179
Bluetooth Settings (Bluetooth Settings) SCREEN ......179
REGISTERING A Bluetooth DEVICE ............................180
DELETING A Bluetooth DEVICE ...................................181
CONNECTING A Bluetooth DEVICE .............................182
EDITING THE Bluetooth DEVICE INFORMATION .......184
System Settings (System Settings) SCREEN .............186
*:Pandora is available in the United States, Australia, and New Zealand.
14
docstructure.indb
14
2016/03/30
11:15:07
OTHER SETTINGS ............................................. 188
DESTINATION SEARCH .................................... 209
GENERAL SETTINGS ........................................................188

GENERAL SETTINGS SCREEN ..................................188
VOICE SETTINGS ...............................................................193
VOICE SETTINGS SCREEN ........................................194
VEHICLE CUSTOMIZATION...............................................194
VEHICLE SETTINGS SCREEN ....................................195
MAINTENANCE ..................................................................196
MAINTENANCE ............................................................196
DESTINATION SEARCH SCREEN.....................................209

SEARCH OPERATION........................................................210
SETTING HOME AS DESTINATION............................. 211
SEARCHING BY FIND ADDRESS ................................ 211
SEARCHING BY FIND PLACES ...................................214
SEARCHING BY FIND ON MAP ...................................218
SEARCHING BY FAVORITES ......................................218
SEARCHING FROM A FREQUENTLY USED
DESTINATION (SMART HISTORY).............................219
SEARCHING FROM HISTORY.....................................219
SEARCHING BY COORDINATES ................................219
OTHER SEARCH OPERATION ..........................................220
SEARCHING BY WHERE AM I? ...................................220
SEARCHING GAS STATION
IN LOW FUEL WARNING ............................................220
SEARCHING FOR A REST AREA
FOLLOWING PERIODIC REST NOTIFICATION.........221
STARTING ROUTE GUIDANCE .........................................222
STARTING ROUTE GUIDANCE ...................................222
DISPLAYING ROUTE SIMULATION .............................222
CANCELING ROUTE ....................................................223
8 NAVIGATION SYSTEM
BASIC OPERATION ........................................... 200
QUICK REFERENCE ..........................................................200
MAP SCREEN ...............................................................200
MAP OPERATIONS ......................................................201
NAVIGATION MENU .....................................................203
CHECK CURRENT POSITION .....................................204
MAP SCREEN OPERATION ...............................................205
CURRENT POSITION DISPLAY ...................................205
SHOW MAP...................................................................205
MAP SCALE ..................................................................206
ORIENTATION OF THE MAP........................................207
POSITION MARKER .....................................................208
TRAFFIC INFORMATION ...................................................208
DISPLAYING TRAFFIC INFORMATION .......................208
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
15
docstructure.indb
15
2016/03/30
11:15:07
ROUTE GUIDANCE ............................................ 224
MEMORY POINTS .............................................. 237
ROUTE GUIDANCE SCREEN ............................................224

SCREEN FOR ROUTE GUIDANCE .............................224
STANDARD MAP ICON ................................................224
DATA FIELDS ................................................................225
ROUTE OVERVIEW......................................................226
LANE INFORMATION AND SIGNS...............................226
HIGHWAY SERVICES...................................................227
JUNCTION DISPLAY ....................................................228
TYPICAL VOICE GUIDANCE PROMPTS ..........................228
ROUTE RELATED FUNCTIONS.........................................229
DISPLAYING CHANGE ROUTE ...................................229
EDITING ROUTE ..........................................................230
ADDING DESTINATIONS .............................................230
REORDERING DESTINATIONS ...................................230
DELETING DESTINATIONS .........................................231
SETTING ROUTE PREFERENCES .............................231
AVOIDANCES SETTING...............................................233
CHANGING ROUTE......................................................233
SETTING A NEW STARTING POINT............................234
CREATING A ROUTE....................................................235
ROUTE ALTERNATIVES...............................................236
MEMORY POINTS SETTINGS ...........................................237

SETTING UP HOME .....................................................237
SAVING DESTINATIONS ..............................................238
SETUP................................................................. 239
NAVIGATION SETTINGS ....................................................239
OPTIONAL FUNCTIONS ..............................................239
TIPS FOR THE NAVIGATION SYSTEM ............. 247

GPS (GLOBAL POSITIONING SYSTEM) ..........................247
REGARDING ERRORS
IN CURRENT POSITION DISPLAY ............................247
LIMITATIONS OF THE NAVIGATION SYSTEM ............247
MAP DATA...........................................................................249
REGARDING ROADS AND PLACE NAME DATA ........249
16
docstructure.indb
16
2016/03/30
11:15:07
9 Siri/VOICE RECOGNITION SYSTEM

Siri ....................................................................... 252
Siri......................................................................................252
BEFORE USING Siri .....................................................252
USING Siri .....................................................................253
Siri OPERATION ...........................................................253
VOICE RECOGNITION SYSTEM

OPERATION ....................................................... 255
VOICE RECOGNITION SYSTEM .......................................255
USING THE VOICE RECOGNITION SYSTEM.............255
VOICE RECOGNITION SYSTEM OPERATION ...........256
CASUAL SPEECH RECOGNITION ..............................259
COMMAND LIST................................................. 261
10 APPENDIX/WHAT TO DO IF/INDEX
MAP DATABASE INFORMATION
AND UPDATES ................................................... 278
CERTIFICATION ................................................. 281
CERTIFICATION .................................................................281
SiriusXM Satellite Radio ..............................................281
SiriusXM DATA SERVICE..............................................281
RADIO WAVE COMMUNICATIONS..............................281
Gracenote ......................................................................283
Bluetooth .......................................................................284
microSDHC....................................................................284
iPod ...............................................................................285
MirrorLinkTM....................................................................285
Pandora .........................................................................285
Google ...........................................................................285
HOW TO GET THE SOURCE CODE

USING THE OPEN SOURCE ............................. 286
WHAT TO DO IF ................................................. 287
TROUBLESHOOTING ........................................................287
RADIO OPERATION .....................................................287
PHONE ..........................................................................288
ERROR MESSAGES .......................................... 293

INDEX ................................................................. 300
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
17
docstructure.indb
17
2016/03/30
11:15:07
MEMO
18
docstructure.indb
18
2016/03/30
11:15:07
QUICK GUIDE
19
docstructure.indb
19
2016/03/30
11:15:07
BASIC FUNCTION
BASIC FUNCTION
OVERVIEW BUTTONS
XWithout navigation function
XWith navigation function
No.
Function
Page
By touching the screen with your finger,

you can control the selected functions.
45, 46
Insert a disc into this slot. The CD player

turns on immediately.
41
Turn the AUDIO/TUNE knob to select

a radio station or skip to the next or
previous track/file.
60, 69,
78, 81,
84, 87,
91, 152
Press the AUDIO/TUNE knob to

access the audio/visual screen. The
audio/visual system displays the Select
Audio Source (Select Audio Source)
screen or the last mode used.
55
Press and hold the AUDIO/TUNE knob

to display the split screen.
25
Select to display the INFO (INFO)

screen.
24
20
docstructure.indb
20
2016/03/30
11:15:08
BASIC FUNCTION
No.
Function
*1
60, 69,
78, 81,
84, 87,
91,
152, 158
No.
Function
Page
*2 * 3
microSD card slot*4

Open the cover and insert an SD card
into this slot.
42
* 2 *3
Select to display the navigation screen

(while the map SD card is inserted).
200
1
QUICK GUIDE
Select
or
to seek up or
down for a radio station or to access a
desired track/file.
Press and hold
or
to
continuously seek for a radio station, or
to fast forward/rewind files or tracks.
Page
*1: Without navigation function
Select to display the APPS (APPS)

screen.
23
Select to access the Bluetooth handsfree system.
114
Select to display the HOME (HOME)

screen.
22
Press the POWER/VOLUME knob to

turn the audio system on and off, and
turn it to adjust the volume.
Press and hold to turn the screen off.
54
41
*2: With navigation function

*3: An Unable to read the map SD data. Check the map SD. If necessary,
consult your dealer. message appears if the map SD card is not inserted,
or if an SD card containing no map data is inserted.
*4: In this manual, microSD card is now referred to as SD card.
21
docstructure.indb
21
2016/03/30
11:15:09
BASIC FUNCTION
HOME (HOME) SCREEN
No.
Select
to display the HOME (HOME) screen.
Function
Page
Select to display the map screen.
200
Select to display the audio control

screen.
55
Select to display the hands-free operation

screen.
114
Select to display the SETTINGS

(SETTINGS) screen.
28
Select to display the INFO (INFO)

screen.
24
Select to display the APPS (APPS)

screen.
23
*: With navigation function
22
docstructure.indb
22
2016/03/30
11:15:10
BASIC FUNCTION
APPS (APPS) SCREEN

, or select
Function
Page
Select to display the SUBARU

STARLINK disclaimer (SUBARU
STARLINK disclaimer) screen.
149
Select to display the MirrorLink

(MirrorLink) screen.
150
Select to display the Pandora

(Pandora)* screen.
158
Select to display the aha (aha) screen.
152
1
QUICK GUIDE
and then select APPS

(APPS), to display the APPS (APPS) screen.
Select
No.
*: Pandora is a registered trademark of Pandora Media, Inc.

Pandora is available in the United States, Australia, and New Zealand.
23
docstructure.indb
23
2016/03/30
11:15:10
BASIC FUNCTION
INFO (INFO) SCREEN
No.
This screen can be used to specify vehicle maintenance

settings, display photos, etc.
*1
and then select INFO

(INFO), to display the INFO (INFO) screen.
Select
, or select
*2
Function
Page
Select to display stocks information.
167
Select to display fuel information.
168
Select to view pictures in the USB

memory connected to USB port 1.
81
Select to display the Maintenance

(Maintenance) screen.
196
Select to display the Eco Monitor (Eco

Monitor) screen.
170
Select to display the Vehicle Monitor

(Vehicle Monitor) screen.
169
Select to view pictures in the USB

memory connected to USB port 2.
81
Select to view pictures in the SD card.
87
Select to reorder the menu icons.
47
* : Service is not available in Canada.

1
No.
Function
Page
Select to display sports information.
162
Select to display weather information.
163
24
docstructure.indb
24
2016/03/30
11:15:11
BASIC FUNCTION
SPLIT SCREEN
1
QUICK GUIDE
Press and hold the AUDIO/TUNE knob, to display the

split screen.
The split screen can display two information screens
simultaneously, such as the audio system screen and
hands-free screen or the hands-free screen and navigation*
screen. When hands-free mode is selected, it is possible
to make a call on the home screen if the desired telephone
number is registered to one of the 4 displayed buttons. In
order to register the contact, select and hold the desired
button and register the desired contact by obey displayed
messages on the screen. (P.123)
When a screen is selected, the selected screen is switched

to a full-screen display. The split screen can be set to a twoway split screen.
For details about setting the split screen: P.47
No.
Function
Page
Select to display the Customize Split

Screen (Customize Split Screen) screen.
48
25
docstructure.indb
25
2016/03/30
11:15:11
BASIC FUNCTION
STATUS DISPLAY
No.
Indicators
The status of the Bluetooth connection and so on is

displayed on the screen.
No.
Indicators
Conditions
This icon is displayed when the Bluetooth
connection is established.
An antenna for the Bluetooth connection is
built into the instrument panel. The condition
of the Bluetooth connection may deteriorate
and the system may not function when a
Bluetooth device is used in the following
conditions and/or places:
The Bluetooth device is obstructed by certain
objects (such as when it is behind the seat or
in the glove box or console box).
The Bluetooth device is touching or is
covered with metal materials.
Leave the Bluetooth device in a place where
the condition of the Bluetooth connection is
good.
Conditions
Poor
This icon is displayed when a disc has been

inserted.
This icon is displayed when audio is off or the
steering switch is pressed.
The
level of
reception
Excellent
The level of reception does not always

correspond with the level displayed on the
cellular phone. The level of reception may not
be displayed depending on the phone you
have.
Rm is displayed when receiving in a
roaming area. While roaming, display Rm
top-left on the icon.
The receiving area may not be displayed
depending on the type of phone you have.
26
docstructure.indb
26
2016/03/30
11:15:12
BASIC FUNCTION
No.
Indicators
Conditions
QUICK GUIDE
Low
The
amount
of battery
charge left
1
Full
The amount displayed does not always

correspond with the amount displayed on the
Bluetooth device.
The amount of battery charge left may not
be displayed depending on the type of the
Bluetooth device connected.
27
docstructure.indb
27
2016/03/30
11:15:12
QUICK REFERENCE
QUICK REFERENCE
SETTINGS (SETTINGS) SCREEN

The items shown on the SETTINGS (SETTINGS) screen
can be set. Select
and then select SETTINGS
(SETTINGS) to display the SETTINGS (SETTINGS)
screen.
No.
Function
Select to turn the screen off.
Page
-
Select to change the selected language,

operation sound, automatic screen
change settings, etc.
188
Select to customize the split screen.
48
Select to specify voice settings.
193
Select to specify audio settings.
98
Select to specify phone sound, contacts,

message settings, etc.
133
Select to set Bluetooth phones and

Bluetooth audio devices.
179
Select to adjust the brightness, contrast,

tone and color of the screens.
51
Select to set vehicle customization.
194
Select to specify vehicle information

settings.
171, 171,
172
28
docstructure.indb
28
2016/03/30
11:15:13
NAVIGATION OPERATION
1.
2.
Select
(MAP).
, or select
3.
Select Destination (Destination).
4.
Select Go Home (Go Home).
5.
Select Yes (Yes).
1
QUICK GUIDE
REGISTERING HOME (WITH

NAVIGATION FUNCTION)
and then select MAP
Select Menu (Menu).
29
docstructure.indb
29
2016/03/30
11:15:14
6.
Select Find on Map (Find on Map).
7.
Select Select (Select).
8.
Select OK (OK).
Registration of home is complete.

XRegistering home in a different way
P.237
XSetting home as the destination
P.32
30
docstructure.indb
30
2016/03/30
11:15:15
1.
2.
Select
(MAP).
, or select
3.
1
QUICK GUIDE
OPERATION FLOW: GUIDING

THE ROUTE (WITH NAVIGATION
FUNCTION)
and then select MAP
4.
There are different kinds of methods to search for a

destination. (P.209)
5.
Select Next (Next).
Select Menu (Menu).
31
docstructure.indb
31
2016/03/30
11:15:15
6.
Select Go! (Go!).

Guidance to the destination is displayed on the
screen and can be heard via voice guidance.
SETTING HOME AS THE

DESTINATION (WITH NAVIGATION
FUNCTION)
1.
Select
(MAP).
2.
Select Menu (Menu).
, or select
and then select MAP
32
docstructure.indb
32
2016/03/30
11:15:16
3.
1
QUICK GUIDE
4.
5.
6.
Select Next (Next).

Select Go! (Go!).
Guidance to the destination is displayed on the
screen and can be heard via voice guidance.
33
docstructure.indb
33
2016/03/30
11:15:16
FUNCTION INDEX
FUNCTION INDEX
XMap*
FUNCTION INDEX
XAudio
Displaying maps
Function
Using the radio
Page
60, 69
Playing an audio CD or MP3/WMA/AAC disc
78
Playing an SD*1 card
87
Playing a USB memory
81
Playing an iPod
84
Playing a Bluetooth device
91
Using the aha application
152
Using the AUX port
94
Using the MirrorLinkTM application
150
Using the Pandora*2 application
158
Using the steering wheel audio switches
96
Audio system settings
98
Page
Viewing the map screen
200
Displaying the current position
205
Changing the scale
206
Changing the map orientation
207
Displaying the estimated travel/arrival time to the

destination
225
Displaying traffic information
208
Searching for destinations

Searching for the destination
Page
210

*2: Pandora is available in the United States, Australia, and New Zealand.
34
docstructure.indb
34
2016/03/30
11:15:16
FUNCTION INDEX
XRoute guidance*
XUseful functions
Information
Page
Displaying vehicle maintenance
196
Starting route guide
222
Editing the route
230
Viewing the entire route map
226
Registering/connecting Bluetooth phone
174
Adjusting route guidance volume
193
Making a call on a Bluetooth phone
118
Deleting the destination
231
Receiving a call on the Bluetooth phone
124
Hands-free system (for cellular phone)
Voice recognition system

Operating the system with your voice
QUICK GUIDE
Before starting or during route guidance
Page
Page
Page
255
35
docstructure.indb
35
2016/03/30
11:15:16
MEMO
36
docstructure.indb
36
2016/03/30
11:15:16
BASIC FUNCTION
37
docstructure.indb
37
2016/03/30
11:15:16
INITIAL SCREEN
2.
Select I Agree (I Agree).
INITIAL SCREEN
WARNING
l When the vehicle is stopped with the engine running, always
apply the parking brake for safety.
1.
After about 5 seconds, the CAUTION (CAUTION)

screen automatically switches to the next screen.
When the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON

position, the initial screen will be displayed and the
system will begin operating.
With navigation function: Select

(Language) to select a language.
Language
3.
Select Accept (Accept).
After a few seconds, the CAUTION (CAUTION)

Confirm the end-user license agreement.
38
docstructure.indb
38
2016/03/30
11:15:17
4.
Select Next (Next).
6.
Change the unit settings if necessary. Select Next

(Next) to continue.
5.
Select the desired language and narrator. Select Next

(Next) to continue.
When the TTS Voice (TTS Voice) mode is selected,

the voice control navigation and street guidance
can be used. These functions cannot be used when
the Natural Voice (Natural Voice) mode is selected.
You can change this at any time from Units and

Formats (Units and Formats). (P.244)
7.
Change the initial route plan settings if necessary.

Select Next (Next) to continue.
BASIC FUNCTION
The Configuration Wizard (Configuration Wizard)

starts.
You can change this at any time from Route Settings

(Route Settings). (P.231)
You can change this at any time from Sound and

Warnings (Sound and Warnings) settings. (P.241)
39
docstructure.indb
39
2016/03/30
11:15:17
8.
Select Finish (Finish).
After setting up, you can run the Configuration

Wizard (Configuration Wizard) at any time from
the Settings (Settings) menu. (P.240)
MAINTENANCE INFORMATION
The screen goes off if the screen is not operated for

several seconds.
To prevent the screen from being displayed again,
select Do Not Tell Me Again (Do Not Tell Me
Again).
To register maintenance information: P.196
This system reminds users when to replace certain parts or

components and shows dealer information (if registered) on
the screen.
is selected, the registered phone number can

If
be called.
When the vehicle reaches a previously set driving distance

or date* specified for a scheduled maintenance check, the
Maintenance Reminder (Maintenance Reminder) screen
will be displayed when the system is turned on.
40
docstructure.indb
40
2016/03/30
11:15:18
LOADING AND UNLOADING A DISC

LOADING A DISC
UNLOADING A DISC
1.
Press
and remove the disc.
2
BASIC FUNCTION
CAUTION
l Never try to disassemble or oil any part of the CD player. Do
not insert anything other than a disc into the slot.
1.
Insert a disc into the disc slot.
NOTE
l Discs can be unloaded even when the engine switch is turned
off.
After insertion, the disc is automatically loaded.
NOTE
l Compatible Disc: P.103
l When inserting a disc, gently insert the disc with the label facing
up.
41
docstructure.indb
41
2016/03/30
11:15:19
CONNECTING AND
DISCONNECTING A USB MEMORY/
PORTABLE DEVICE
CONNECTING A DEVICE
1.
Connect a device.
LOADING AND REMOVING AN

SD CARD (WITH NAVIGATION
FUNCTION)
LOADING AN SD CARD
CAUTION
l Position the SD card with the mark at the far end and
insert it until it clicks into place. When contact is made with the
stopper inside, the card cannot be inserted any further. Do not
try to forcibly push the card.
AUX
USB
l Do not insert anything other than an SD card into the slot.

l Do not pull the SD card slot cover with force. By doing so, the
SD card slot cover may come off, or be damaged. If the SD
card slot cover comes off, it can be reattached by inserting the
cover clip into the hole.
Turn on the power of the device if it is not turned on.
l Avoid touching the SD card terminals to prevent

NOTE
l Compatible USB memory: P.106
l Compatible iPod: P.106
l This unit does not support commercially available USB hubs.
l By connecting a device such as a cellular phone, charging starts
depending on the device.
42
docstructure.indb
42
2016/03/30
11:15:19
1.
2.
Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.
4.
Open the SD card slot cover.
NOTE
Close the SD card slot cover.
3.
Insert the SD card.
2
BASIC FUNCTION
l Compatible SD card: P. 107

l You can enjoy music/video by inserting an SD card containing
audio files and/or video files. (P.87)
l You can preview images, play a slideshow, (P.87) or set an
image as the screen off images (P.191) by inserting an SD
card containing image data.
Make sure that the SD card is fully inserted.
43
docstructure.indb
43
2016/03/30
11:15:19
REMOVING AN SD CARD
1.
2.
Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.
3.
Remove the SD card.
Open the SD card slot cover.
CAUTION
l When removing an SD card from the unit, pull it out
horizontally. Do not pull it out upward or downward with force.
Doing so may damage the SD card.
l Do not remove an SD card during playback. Doing so may
corrupt the data. Please understand that no compensation will
be given for corrupted data.
l Do not pull the SD card slot cover with force. By doing so, the
SD card slot cover may come off, or be damaged. If the SD
card slot cover comes off, it can be reattached by inserting the
cover clip into the hole.
l Avoid touching the SD card terminals to prevent
NOTE
l The system is reset and the initial screen appears if the map SD
card is removed during use, however, this is not a malfunction.
The map screen appears again approximately 7 seconds after
reinserting the map SD card.
l When removing an SD card from the unit and Auto Adjust by
GPS (Auto Adjust by GPS) is selected in the Clock Settings
(P.190), the time on the Climate Control will change to
Greenwich Mean Time (GMT).
Press in the SD card until you hear it click, let go of

the card, and then pull it straight out.
4.
Close the SD card slot cover.
44
docstructure.indb
44
2016/03/30
11:15:19
TOUCH SCREEN GESTURES

Operations are performed by touching the touch screen
directly with your finger.
Operation method
Outline
Main use
Changing
and selecting
various settings
Double Touch
with one
finger*1
Quickly touch
and release
twice with one
finger.
Enlarging the
scale of the map
screen
Double Touch
with two
fingers*1
Quickly touch
and release
twice with two
fingers.
Reducing the
scale of the map
screen
Outline
Main use
Drag*2
Touch the
screen with
your finger,
and move the
screen to the
desired position.
Scrolling the
lists
Scrolling the
map screen*1
Flick*2
Quickly move
the screen by
flicking with your
finger.
Scrolling the
main screen
page
Scrolling the
map screen*1
Pinch*1
Move your two
fingers further
apart (pinchout) to zoom in
the map. Move
your two fingers
closer together
(pinch-in) to
zoom out the
map.
Changing the
scale of the map
screen
2
BASIC FUNCTION
Touch
Quickly touch
and release
once.
Operation method
45
docstructure.indb
45
2016/03/30
11:15:20
Operation method
Outline
Main use
Rotate*1
To change the
map direction,
rotate with two
fingers touching
the screen.
Changing the
horizontal
display angle of
the map.

*2: The above operations may not be performed on all screens.
NOTE
l Flick operations may not be performed smoothly in high
altitudes.
TOUCH SCREEN OPERATION

This system is operated mainly by the buttons on the
screen. (Referred to as screen buttons in this manual.)
When a screen button is touched, a beep sounds.
The beep sound can be turned on or off. (P.188)
CAUTION
l To prevent damaging the screen, lightly touch the screen
buttons with your finger.
l Do not use objects other than your finger to touch the screen.
l Wipe off fingerprints using a glass cleaning cloth. Do not use
chemical cleaners to clean the screen, as they may damage
the touch screen.
NOTE
l If the system does not respond to touching a screen button,
move your finger away from the screen and then touch it again.
l Dimmed screen buttons cannot be operated.
l The displayed image may become darker and moving images
may be slightly distorted when the screen is cold.
l In extremely cold conditions, the map may not be displayed
and the data input by a user may be deleted. Also, the screen
buttons may be harder than usual to depress.
l When
is displayed on the screen, select

to the previous screen.
to return
46
docstructure.indb
46
2016/03/30
11:15:20
INFO SCREEN OPERATION

REORDERING THE MENU ICONS
Order of the menu icons can be changed.
3.

The split screen can display multiple information screens,

such as the audio system screen and hands-free screen,
simultaneously.
The following describes screen operation for the system
with navigation function.
1.
2.
Press and hold the AUDIO/TUNE knob.

Split screen is displayed.
2
BASIC FUNCTION
1.
2.
SPLIT SCREEN OPERATION
Select the desired menu icon to be moved.

When a screen is selected, the selected screen will
change to a full-screen display.
4.
Select
or
to move the menu icon, and then
select OK (OK).
47
docstructure.indb
47
2016/03/30
11:15:21
CUSTOMIZING THE SPLIT SCREEN

The display items/area on the split screen can be changed.
XFrom the split screen
1.
Select
ENTERING LETTERS AND

NUMBERS/LIST SCREEN
OPERATION
ENTERING LETTERS AND NUMBERS
When searching by an address, name, etc., or entering
data, letters and numbers can be entered via the screen.
XFrom the SETTINGS (SETTINGS) screen
1.
Select Split Screen (Split Screen) on the SETTINGS

(SETTINGS) screen. (P.28)
2.
3.
4.
Select the desired area.

Select the desired item.
Select OK (OK).
No.
Function
Select to enter desired characters.
NOTE
Text field. Entered character(s) will be displayed.
l When the selected item is already being displayed and another

area is selected for that item, the item that it is replacing will be
displayed in the original items location.
Select to erase one character. Select and hold to continue

erasing characters.
Select to display the alphabet keys.
Select to display other symbols.
48
docstructure.indb
48
2016/03/30
11:15:22
On certain letter entry screens, letters can be entered

in upper or lower case.
: Select to enter in lower case.
: Select to enter in upper case.
Icon
Select to skip to the next or previous page.

Select and hold
or
to scroll through the
displayed list.
Keyboard layout can be changed. (P.188)
Select
to move to the beginning of the name.
SELECTING ALL ITEMS

Some lists contain Select All (Select All). If Select All
(Select All) is selected, it is possible to select all items.
1.
BASIC FUNCTION
When a list is displayed, use the appropriate screen button

to scroll through the list.
If
appears to the right of an item name, the
complete name is too long to display.
Select
to scroll to the end of the name.
The appearance of the keyboard may change or

the input method may be limited depending on
the circumstances where the software keyboard is
displayed.
LIST SCREEN OPERATION
Function
Select Select All (Select All).
Unselect All (Unselect All): Unselect all items in the

list.
49
docstructure.indb
49
2016/03/30
11:15:23
CHARACTER JUMP BUTTONS IN LISTS
SORTING (WITH NAVIGATION FUNCTION)
Some lists contain character screen buttons, ABC (ABC),

DEF (DEF) etc., which allow a direct jump to list entries
The order of a list displayed on the screen can be sorted in

the order of name, distance, detour, etc.
that begin with the same letter as the character screen

button.
1.
Select More (More).
2.
Select the desired sorting criteria.
1.
Select the desired character jump buttons.
NOTE
l Every time the same character screen button is selected, the list
starting with the subsequent character is displayed.
50
docstructure.indb
50
2016/03/30
11:15:24
SCREEN ADJUSTMENT
No.
The brightness, contrast, tone and color of the screen can

be adjusted.
1.
Select
Function
Select to adjust the general screen display.
Select to adjust the camera display.
5.
BASIC FUNCTION
Select to adjust the video display.
Select the desired item to be adjusted.
XGeneral
2.
3.
4.
Select SETTINGS (SETTINGS).

Select Display (Display).
Select the items to be set.
XCamera
51
docstructure.indb
51
2016/03/30
11:15:25
XVideo (USB video/SD video*)
CHANGING BETWEEN DAY AND NIGHT

MODE
Depending on the position of the headlight switch, the

screen changes to day or night mode.
NOTE
l If the screen is set to day mode with the headlight switch turned
on, this condition is memorized even with the engine turned off.
Screen button
Select to darken the screen.
Brightness
(Brightness)
Select to brighten the screen.

Select to weaken the contrast of
the screen.
Contrast
(Contrast)
Select to strengthen the contrast of

the screen.
Select to weaken the tone of the
screen.
Tone (Tone)
Select to strengthen the tone of the

screen.
R (R)
Select to strengthen the red color

of the screen.
G (G)
Select to strengthen the green

color of the screen.
Color (Color)
6.
Function
Select OK (OK).
52
docstructure.indb
52
2016/03/30
11:15:26
AUDIO
53
docstructure.indb
53
2016/03/30
11:15:26
BASIC OPERATION
BASIC OPERATION
SOME BASICS
TURNING THE SYSTEM ON AND OFF
This section describes some of the basic features of the

audio/visual system. Some information may not pertain to
your system.
Your audio/visual system works when the ignition switch is
turned to the ACC or ON position.
CAUTION
l To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not leave
the audio/visual system on longer than necessary when the
engine is not running.
POWER/VOLUME knob: Press to turn the audio/visual

system on and off. The system turns on in the last mode
used. Turn this knob to adjust the volume. Note that the
voice guidance volume can be adjusted during guidance.
AUDIO/TUNE knob: Press to display screen buttons for
the audio/visual system.
A function that enables automatic return to the split
screen from the audio/visual screen can be selected.
(P.188)
54
docstructure.indb
54
2016/03/30
11:15:26
BASIC OPERATION
SELECTING AN AUDIO SOURCE
1.
Press the AUDIO/TUNE knob.
l When there are two pages, select
or
to change the page.
REORDERING THE AUDIO SOURCE
1.
Display the Select Audio Source (Select Audio Source)

screen. (P.55)
2.
3.
Select the desired audio source then

reorder.
4.
Select OK (OK).
3
AUDIO
The screen can also be displayed by selecting

followed by AUDIO (AUDIO).
If the audio control screen appears, select Source
(Source) on the audio screen or press the AUDIO/
TUNE knob again.
2.
NOTE
or
to
Select the desired source.
55
docstructure.indb
55
2016/03/30
11:15:27
BASIC OPERATION
SOUND SETTINGS
The following sound quality can be adjusted, however, the
adjustments that can be made will differ depending on the
connected amplifier.
1.
2.
Select Sound (Sound) on the audio control screen.

Select the desired screen button.
XType A
TONE:
How good an audio program sounds is largely determined
by the mix of the treble, mid and bass levels. In fact,
different kinds of music and vocal programs usually sound
better with different mixes of treble, mid and bass.
XType B
BALANCE:
A good balance of the left and right stereo channels and of
the front and rear sound levels is also important.
Keep in mind that when listening to a stereo recording or
broadcast, changing the right/left balance will increase the
volume of 1 group of sounds while decreasing the volume of
another.
EQUALIZER:
Equalizer curves set beforehand to match sound quality can
be selected, and curves can be set to your favorite music by
adjusting them individually over low to high bands.
No.
Function
Select to adjust the sound balance between the front
and rear speakers.
Select to adjust the sound balance between the left and
right speakers.
Select to adjust the sound quality. (P.57)
56
docstructure.indb
56
2016/03/30
11:15:28
BASIC OPERATION
No.
Function
ADJUSTING THE SOUND QUALITY (type A model

only)
Select to reset the adjusted sound quality.
You can adjust the sound quality from the low band to the
high band.
Select
or
to adjust lowpitched tones.
n ADJUSTING THE SOUND QUALITY
Select
or
to adjust midpitched tones.
1.
On the sound settings screen, select Adjust (Adjust)

in EQ Settings (EQ Settings).
Select
or
to adjust highpitched tones.
2.
Select the sound band that you want to adjust.
3.
Select
Select
3
AUDIO
3.
Select to change to sound quality appropriate for the

music (POP, ROCK, JAZZ) type.
or
You can also adjust to the desired level by touching

the screen.
To reset the sound quality, select FLAT (FLAT).
57
docstructure.indb
57
2016/03/30
11:15:30
BASIC OPERATION
n SAVING THE SOUND QUALITY

You can save the adjusted sound quality settings.
1.
2.
Adjust the sound quality.

Select EQ1 (EQ1) or EQ2 (EQ2) for 2 seconds or
more.
Values cannot be saved for FLAT (FLAT).
n USING A PRESET SOUND QUALITY
1.
AUDIO SCREEN ADJUSTMENT

The screen size can be selected for each type of media.
XUSB video/SD video*
1.
2.
3.
Select
on the audio control screen.
Select Screen Format (Screen Format).

Select EQ1 (EQ1) or EQ2 (EQ2) to activate the

corresponding preset sound quality.
To reset the sound quality, select FLAT (FLAT).
This function can also be used at the EQ Settings
(EQ Settings).
n RESETTING THE EQ CURVE

You can return the adjusted value for the currently stored
equalizer to its initial value.
1.
Select and hold FLAT (FLAT) for 2 seconds or more.

The adjusted values for the stored EQ1 (EQ1) and
EQ2 (EQ2) are returned to their initial values.
No.
Function
Select to display a screen with either side in black.
Select to enlarge the image horizontally to full screen.
Select to enlarge the image by the same ratio
horizontally and vertically.
58
docstructure.indb
58
2016/03/30
11:15:30
BASIC OPERATION
XMirrorLinkTM
1.
2.
Screen Format
application list screen.
Select
(Screen
Format)
on
the
1.
Press this switch to operate the voice recognition

system.
3
AUDIO
No.
Function
Select to display a screen surrounded by black on all
four sides.
The voice recognition system and

commands can be operated. (P.255)
its
list
of
Select to enlarge the image horizontally and vertically to

full screen.
Select to enlarge the image horizontally or vertically.
NOTE
l The brightness, contrast, tone and color of the audio screen can
be changed. (P.51)
59
docstructure.indb
59
2016/03/30
11:15:31
RADIO OPERATION
RADIO OPERATION
AM/FM RADIO
No.
Function
Select to seek for a station/channel.
Select and hold for continuous seek.
OVERVIEW
XControl screen
Select AM (AM) or FM (FM) on the Select Audio Source
(Select Audio Source) screen. (P.55)
XControl panel
<Top screen>
<Option screen>
No.
Function
No.
Function

Select to scroll the list of preset buttons.
Turn to step up/down frequencies.

Select to display the option screen.
60
docstructure.indb
60
2016/03/30
11:15:32
RADIO OPERATION
No.
Function
Select to display the audio source selection screen.
Select to display the cache radio operation buttons.
(P.67)
Select to display the sound setting screen. (P.56)
Select to display a list of receivable stations/channels.
PRESETTING A STATION
Radio mode has a mix preset function, which can store up
to 36 stations from any of the AM, FM or SiriusXM Satellite
Radio bands.
1.
2.
Tune in the desired station.
Select (add new) ((add new)).

AUDIO
Select to scan for receivable stations/channels.

HD Radio only: Select to store information of the audio
currently being broadcast on the radio. (P.66)
Select to tune to a preset station/channel.
Select to turn HD Radio mode on/off. When the HD
Radio indicator is off, the station list shows only analog
broadcasts.
Select to display the additional text information.
Analog FM only: Select to display RBDS text messages.
NOTE
l The radio automatically changes to stereo reception when a
stereo broadcast is received.
l The radio automatically blends to an HD Radio signal in AM or
FM where available.
To change the preset station to a different one, select

and hold the preset station.
3.
4.
Select Yes (Yes) on the confirmation screen.

Select OK (OK) after setting the new preset station.
NOTE
l The number of preset radio stations displayed on the screen can
be changed. (P.99)
61
docstructure.indb
61
2016/03/30
11:15:33
RADIO OPERATION
SELECTING A STATION FROM THE LIST

A station list can be displayed.
1.
2.
Select
FM radio only: Select the desired program genre.
RADIO BROADCAST DATA SYSTEM

This audio system is equipped with Radio Broadcast Data
Systems (RBDS). RBDS mode allows text messages to be
received from radio stations that utilize RBDS transmitters.
When RBDS is on, the radio can
only select stations of a particular program type,
display messages from radio stations,
search for a stronger signal station.
3.
Select the desired station and then select OK (OK).
RBDS features are available only when listening to an FM

station that broadcasts RBDS information and the FM Info
(FM Info) indicator is on.
62
docstructure.indb
62
2016/03/30
11:15:33
RADIO OPERATION
SELECTING A DESIRED GENRE
REFRESHING THE STATION LIST
1.
2.
1.
Select
FM radio only: Select a desired genre of station and

select a desired station.
Select Refresh (Refresh) on the station list screen

and the following screen will be displayed.
The genre list is in the following order:
Classical
AUDIO
Country
Easy Listening
Information
Jazz
News
Oldies
Other
Pop Music
Cancel Refresh (Cancel Refresh): Select to cancel

the refresh.
Source (Source): Select to change to another audio
source while refreshing.
Religion
NOTE
Rock
l The audio system sound is muted during refresh operation.

l In some situations, it may take some time to update the station
list.
R&B
Sports
Talk
Traffic (Not available when HD Radio indicator is
off.)
Alert (Emergency Alert)
63
docstructure.indb
63
2016/03/30
11:15:33
RADIO OPERATION
TRAFFIC ANNOUNCEMENT (FM RADIO)
AVAILABLE HD Radio TECHNOLOGY
A station that regularly broadcasts traffic information is

automatically located.
1.
2.
3.
Select
Select Traffic (Traffic).

Select the desired traffic program station.
NOTE
l If a traffic program station is found, the name of the traffic
program station will be displayed for a while.
64
docstructure.indb
64
2016/03/30
11:15:34
RADIO OPERATION
HD Radio Technology manufactured under license from

iBiquity Digital Corporation. U.S. and Foreign Patents.
HD Radio and the HD, HD Radio, and Arc logos are
proprietary trademarks of iBiquity Digital Corp.
On the FM radio frequency most digital stations have

multiple or supplemental programs on one FM station.
1.
Select the HD) .
3
AUDIO
HD Radio Technology is the digital evolution of analog

AM/FM radio. Your radio product has a special receiver
which allows it to receive digital broadcasts (where
available) in addition to the analog broadcasts it already
receives. Digital broadcasts have better sound quality than
analog broadcasts as digital broadcasts provide free, crystal
clear audio with no static or distortion. For more information,
and a guide to available radio stations and programming,
refer to www.hdradio.com.
MULTICAST
Each time the HD) is selected, the channel is

changed.
Turning the AUDIO/TUNE knob can also select the
desired multicast channel.
Digital, CD-quality sound. HD Radio Technology enables

local radio stations to broadcast a clean digital signal. AM
sounds like todays FM and FM sounds like a CD.
65
docstructure.indb
65
2016/03/30
11:15:34
RADIO OPERATION
NOTE
FM stations can provide additional digital-only audio
programming on HD2/HD3 Channels.
PRESERVING A MUSIC INFORMATION

Tag information in the music broadcasting is preserved in
the system and transmits to an iPod.
1.
Select Tag (Tag) to bookmark the music information.
2.
Connect an iPod. (P.42)
l The tag information can not be preserved while scanning or

caching the radio station.
l If tagging the music information fails, Saving the HD Radio
tag was unsuccessful. (Saving the HD Radio tag was
unsuccessful.) will be displayed on the screen. If this occurs,
tag the information again.
l HD Radio stations can be preset.
l An orange HD) will be displayed on the screen when in digital.
The HD) will first appear in a gray color indicating the station is
indeed (an analog and) a digital station. Once the digital signal is
acquired, the logo will change to a bright orange color.
l The song title and artist name will appear on the screen when
available by the radio station. The radio station can send album
pictures when available.
l As a user works through the analog radio stations, (where
applicable) the radio receiver will automatically tune from an
analog signal to a digital signal within 5 seconds.
Turn on the power of the iPod if it is not turned on.

Once an iPod is connected, the music tag moves
from the radio into the iPod.
When the iPod is connected to iTunes, the tagged
information of the songs which were tagged while
listening to the radio can be viewed. Then a user may
decide to purchase the song or CD/Album which had
been listened to on their radio.
Up to 50 items of tag information can be stored.
66
docstructure.indb
66
2016/03/30
11:15:35
RADIO OPERATION
CACHING RADIO PROGRAMS

Program Service Data: Presents song name, artist, station
IDs, and other relevant data streams.
A radio program can be cached and played back in a timeshifted manner.
AUTOMATIC PLAYBACK OF THE CACHE
iTunes Tagging provides you the opportunity to discover

a wide range of content and the means to tag that
content for later review and purchase from the iTunes
Store. Also refer to the Apple Automotive specifications for
implementing iTunes Tagging.
If the radio broadcast is interrupted by another audio

output, such as an incoming phone call, the system will
automatically cache the interrupted portion and perform
time-shift playback when the interruption ends. To manually
operate the cache operation: (P.68)
3
AUDIO
Visual information related to content being played on

your HD Radio receiver, such as Album Art, historical
photographs, still art from live broadcasts, among other
related content.
NOTE
l The system can store up to 20 minutes. Cached data will be
erased when the radio mode or station is changed or when the
audio system is turned off.
l If noise or silence occurs during the caching process, cachewriting will continue, with the noise or silence recorded as is. In
this case, the cached broadcast will contain the noise or silence
when played back.
67
docstructure.indb
67
2016/03/30
11:15:35
RADIO OPERATION
PLAYING BACK THE CACHE MANUALLY

The broadcast cached in the program cache can be played
back manually.
1.
2.
Display the cache radio operation buttons. (P.60)
No.
Function
Returns to the live radio broadcast.
Shows the current playback location relative to the
cached broadcast recording time with a bar scale.
Select the desired cache radio operation button.

Allows HD Radio receivers to store content (songs/
programs and data) in a buffer. Playback shall start at
any point in the buffer and shall continue until the end of
the buffer or until the user has selected to stop playback.
Live Pause has the ability to store both analog and digital
content in the buffer.
No.
Function
Hides the cache operation buttons.
Skips backward 2 minutes.
Fast rewinds continuously.
Plays or pauses the radio broadcast.
Fast forwards continuously.
Skips forward 2 minutes.
68
docstructure.indb
68
2016/03/30
11:15:35
RADIO OPERATION
SiriusXM Satellite Radio
XControl screen
OVERVIEW
Select SiriusXM (SiriusXM) on the Select Audio Source
XControl panel
AUDIO
<Top screen>
<Option screen>
No.
Information/Function
Select to scroll the list of preset buttons.
No.
Function
Turn to step up/down channels.
Select to seek for a channel.
Select and hold for continuous seek.
Select to display the option screen.

Displayed when playing cached programs.
Select to display the cache radio operation buttons.
(P.74)
69
docstructure.indb
69
2016/03/30
11:15:36
RADIO OPERATION
No.
Select to display a list of categories. (P.76)
Select to search subscribed channels by category.
By turning TuneScan Enable ON with channels
registered in Smart Favorites, Tune Scan (Tune
Scan) is displayed. (P.76)
Select to receive tag information. (P.77)
Select to tune to a preset channel.
is displayed for channels registered in Smart
Favorites.
Select to turn the SXM Featured on/off. (P.76)
Select to show information such as channel name, song
title, and artist name.
Select to turn the TuneScan on/off. (P.76)
Select to display the Edit Favorites (Edit Favorites)
screen. (P.75)
Select to turn the TuneStart on/off. (P.75)
NOTE
l A clear line of sight is required from the satellite to the SiriusXM
Satellite Radio antenna. Obstacles such as trees, tall buildings,
and tunnels can block the SiriusXM signal, causing the SiriusXM
radio reception to cut in and out.
l If the ignition switch is turned OFF and then set to the ACC
or ON position when listening to an XL channel, broadcasting
from the XL channel will not begin. If so, the SXM001 channel
will be broadcast.
l XL channels may include frequent explicit language or mature
programming.
HOW TO SUBSCRIBE TO SiriusXM Satellite

Radio
To listen to a satellite radio broadcast in the vehicle, a
subscription to the SiriusXM Satellite Radio service is
necessary.
A SiriusXM Satellite Radio is a tuner designed exclusively
to receive broadcasts provided under a separate
subscription. SiriusXM U.S. satellite and data services
are available only in the 48 contiguous USA and DC.
SiriusXM satellite service is also available in Canada; see
www.siriusxm.ca.
70
docstructure.indb
70
2016/03/30
11:15:37
RADIO OPERATION
HOW TO SUBSCRIBE
It is necessary to enter into a separate service agreement
with SiriusXM Satellite Radio Services in order to receive
satellite broadcast programming in the vehicle. Additional
activation and service subscription fees apply that are not
included in the purchase price of the vehicle and digital
satellite tuner.
XU.S.A.
Refer to www.siriusxm.com or call
1-877-447-0011.
XCanada
Refer to www.siriusxm.ca or call
1-877-209-0079.
l SiriusXM Satellite Radio Services Legal Disclaimers and

Warnings
Fees and Taxes Subscription fee, taxes, one time
activation fee, and other fees may apply. Subscription fee
is consumer only. All fees and programming subject to
change.
Subscriptions subject to Customer Agreement available

at www.siriusxm.com. (U.S.A.) or www.siriusxm.ca
(Canada) SiriusXM U.S. satellite and data services are
available only in the 48 contiguous USA and DC. SiriusXM
Satellite Radio Service is also available in Canada; see
www.siriusxm.ca.
AUDIO
For complete information on subscription rates and

terms, or to subscribe to SiriusXM Satellite Radio:
WARNING
Explicit Language Notice Channels with frequent explicit

language are indicated with an XL preceding the channel
name. Channel blocking is available for SiriusXM Satellite
Radio receivers by notifying SiriusXM at;
U.S.A. Customers:
Visit www.siriusxm.com or calling
1-877-447-0011
Canadian Customers:
Visit www.siriusxm.ca or calling
1-877-209-0079
71
docstructure.indb
71
2016/03/30
11:15:37
RADIO OPERATION
CAUTION
l It is prohibited to copy, decompile, disassemble, reverse
engineer, hack, manipulate, or otherwise make available any
technology or software incorporated in receivers compatible
with the SiriusXM Satellite Radio Services or that support
the SiriusXM website, the Online Service or any of its content.
Furthermore, the AMBE voice compression software included
in this product is protected by intellectual property rights
including patent rights, copyrights, and trade secrets of Digital
Voice Systems, Inc.
l Note: this applies to SiriusXM Satellite Radio receivers only
and not SiriusXM Ready devices.
NOTE
l SiriusXM Satellite Radio Services--Descriptions
Only SiriusXM Satellite Radio brings you more of what
you love, all in one place. Get over 175 channels, including
commercial-free music, plus the best sports, news, talk,
comedy and entertainment. Welcome to the world of satellite
radio. More information about SiriusXM Satellite Radio is
available online at www.siriusxm.com (U.S.A.) or
www.siriusxm.ca (Canada).
NOTE
l SiriusXM Satellite Radio Services Subscription Instructions
For SiriusXM Services requiring a subscription (such as
SiriusXM Satellite Radio Services, and some Infotainment &
data services), the following paragraph shall be included.
Required SiriusXM Satellite Radio Services and some
Infotainment & data services monthly subscriptions sold
separately after trial period. Subscription fee is consumer only.
All fees and programming subject to change. Subscriptions
are subject to the Customer Agreement available at
www.siriusxm.com. SiriusXM U.S. satellite and data services
are available only in the 48 contiguous USA and DC.
SiriusXM satellite service is also available in Canada; see
www.siriusxm.ca. 2013 SiriusXM Radio Inc. Sirius, XM
and all related marks and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM
Radio Inc. All other marks, channel names and logos are the
property of their respective owners.
For more information, program schedules, and to subscribe
or extend subscription after complimentary trial period; more
information is available at:
USA Customers:
1-877-447-0011
72
docstructure.indb
72
2016/03/30
11:15:37
RADIO OPERATION
NOTE
PRESETTING A CHANNEL
1.
2.
Tune in the desired channel.

Select (add new) ((add new)).
3
AUDIO
l SiriusXM Satellite Radio Service is solely responsible for the

quality, availability and content of the satellite radio services
provided, which are subject to the terms and conditions of the
SiriusXM Satellite Radio customer service agreement.
l Customers should have their radio ID ready; the radio ID can
be found by tuning to Ch 000 on the radio. For details, see
DISPLAYING THE RADIO ID below.
l All fees and programming are the responsibility of SiriusXM
Satellite Radio Services and are subject to change.
DISPLAYING THE RADIO ID

Each SiriusXM tuner is identified with a unique radio ID.
The radio ID is required when activating SiriusXM Satellite
Services or when reporting a problem.
If Ch 000 is selected using the AUDIO/TUNE
knob, the ID code, which is 8 alphanumeric
characters, will be displayed. If another channel is
selected, the ID code will no longer be displayed. The
channel (000) alternates between displaying the radio
ID and the specific radio code.
To change the preset channel to a different one,

select and hold the preset channel.
3.
4.
Select Yes (Yes) on the confirmation screen.

Select OK (OK) after setting the new preset channel.
73
docstructure.indb
73
2016/03/30
11:15:37
RADIO OPERATION
CACHING RADIO PROGRAMS
PLAYING BACK THE CACHE
A radio program can be cached and played back in a timeshifted manner.
The broadcast cached in the program cache can be played

back.
The program that is currently being listened to, and channel

programs registered as Smart Favorites can be cached.
1.
2.
Display the cache radio operation buttons. (P.69)

Select the desired cache radio operation button.
NOTE
l If noise or silence occurs during the caching process, cachewriting will continue, with the noise or silence recorded as
is. In this case, the cached broadcast will contain the noise or
silence when played back. If reception is poor or radio waves are
disrupted, the caching process will not be performed properly,
and several seconds of silence will be recorded.
l It may not be possible to cache depending on the
broadcasting channel and program (advertising or billboard, etc.)
being broadcasted.
No.
Function
Hides the cache radio operation buttons.
Select to access the desired program.
Skips back through program.
Fast rewinds continuously.
The fast rewind speed increased the longer the button is
held down.
Plays or pauses the radio broadcast.
74
docstructure.indb
74
2016/03/30
11:15:37
RADIO OPERATION
No.
Function
Fast forwards continuously.
The fast forward speed increased the longer the button
is held down.
Select to access the desired program.
Skips forward through program.
TuneStartTM FUNCTION
TuneStart begins playing the current program from the
beginning when tuning to a channel registered in Smart
Favorites, allowing you to enjoy the complete program.
Shows the current playback location relative to the

cached broadcast recording time with a bar scale.
It is necessary to turn on TuneStart at the option screen to

use this function. (P.69)
NOTE
NOTE
l The time displayed on the bar scale may differ from the actual
time.
l Live radio is broadcast immediately after switching from another

mode to SiriusXM mode even if the TuneStart setting is turned
ON. The TuneStart function starts if switching to a channel
registered in Smart Favorites within SiriusXM mode.
l The TuneStart function is not applicable to programs for which
even a little has been listened to from the start.
REGISTERING A SMART FAVORITE

CHANNEL
3
AUDIO
Returns to the live radio broadcast.
TuneStart is applicable to channels registered in Smart

Favorites. (P.75)
The TuneStart and TuneScan functions can be used by

registering preset channels as Smart Favorites. Up to 5
channels can be registered in Smart Favorites.
1.
Select Smart Favs Setup (Smart Favs Setup) on the

option screen.
2.
Select check boxes for preset channels to be

registered, and then select OK (OK).
75
docstructure.indb
75
2016/03/30
11:15:37
RADIO OPERATION
TuneScanTM FUNCTION
TuneScan is a function used to listen to the first 10 seconds
of all recorded programs one after another.
TuneScan is applicable to channels registered in Smart
Favorites, and programs that are currently being listened to.
(P.75)
It is necessary to turn on TuneScan at the option screen to
use this function. (P.69)
1.
Select Tune Scan (Tune Scan).

Select Tune Scan (Tune Scan) again when the
desired program is reached to continue playing that
program.
SEARCHING BY FEATURED FAVORITES

Featured Favorites are a collection of channels that are
created by the SiriusXM programming team that are
updated several times throughout the year.
The desired Featured Favorite channel can be selected
from the list screen. (P.76)
It is necessary to turn on SXM Featured at the option screen
to listen to a Featured Favorite channel. (P.69)
SELECTING A CHANNEL FROM THE LIST
1.
If the program of the Featured Favorites bank is

is displayed. It
updated when SXM Featured is on,
will then disappear when selected.
NOTE
l The TuneScan function is not applicable to the following
program.
Program that has been listened to for 30 seconds or longer
If the start of the program has not been cached
If the cached program is shorter than 45 seconds (However,
this excludes programs that are currently being broadcast.)
And in addition to the above conditions, the TuneScan function
may not work depending on the channel or program.
Select
2.
Select the desired program genre.

Received Featured Favorite channels appear at the
very bottom of the list.
3.
Select the desired channel and then select OK (OK).

If the Featured Favorites list is selected, Bank
Information is displayed if More Info (More Info) is
selected.
76
docstructure.indb
76
2016/03/30
11:15:38
RADIO OPERATION
PRESERVING A MUSIC INFORMATION

Tag information in the music broadcasting is preserved in
the system and transmits to an iPod.
1.
Select Tag (Tag) to bookmark the music information.
NOTE
l The tag information can not be preserved while scanning or
caching the radio program.
l The song title and artist name will appear on the screen when
available by the radio program. The radio program can send
album pictures when available.
l As a user works through the analog radio channels, (where
applicable) the radio receiver will automatically tune from an
analog signal to a digital signal within 5 seconds.
3
AUDIO
2.

Turn on the power of the iPod if it is not turned on.
Once an iPod is connected, the music tag moves
from the radio into the iPod.
When the iPod is connected to iTunes, the tagged
information of the songs which were tagged while
listening to the radio can be viewed. Then a user may
decide to purchase the song or CD/Album which had
been listened to on their radio.
Up to 50 items of tag information can be stored.
77
docstructure.indb
77
2016/03/30
11:15:38
MEDIA OPERATION
MEDIA OPERATION
CD
XControl panel
OVERVIEW
The CD operation screen can be reached by the following
methods:
Insert a disc. (P.41)
Select DISC (DISC) on the Select Audio Source
No.
Function
Disc slot
Select to select a track/file.
Select and hold to fast forward/rewind.
78
docstructure.indb
78
2016/03/30
11:15:38
MEDIA OPERATION
XControl screen
No.
Function
XAudio CD
Select to enable/disable repeat playback of the track
currently playing.
XMP3/WMA/AAC disc
The repeat method changes as shown below each time
the repeat button is selected.
: Repeat playback is disabled.
AUDIO
<Audio CD>
: The file currently playing will be
repeated.
<MP3/WMA/AAC disc>
No.
: The files contained within the folder

currently playing will be repeated.
Function
Displays cover art.
Select to display a track/file list.
Select to play/pause.
Shows progress.
79
docstructure.indb
79
2016/03/30
11:15:39
MEDIA OPERATION
No.
Function
XAudio CD
Select to enable/disable random playback for the tracks
currently playing on the CD.
XMP3/WMA/AAC disc
The random playback method changes as shown below
each time the shuffle button is selected.
NOTE
l If a disc contains CD-DA files and MP3/WMA/AAC files, only the
CD-DA files can be played back.
l If a CD-TEXT disc is inserted, the title of the disc and track will
be displayed. Up to 32 characters can be displayed.
l If the disc contains no CD-TEXT, only the track number would be
: Random playback is disabled.
: The files contained within the folder

currently playing will be played in
random order.
: The files contained on the disc
random order.
XAudio CD
XMP3/WMA/AAC disc
Select to display a folder/file list.
To return to the top screen, select Now Playing (Now
Playing) on the list screen.
80
docstructure.indb
80
2016/03/30
11:15:39
MEDIA OPERATION
USB MEMORY
XControl panel
Audio files, video files and image files on the USB memory
can be played back/viewed. Image files can be viewed at
the same time that audio files are being played back.
While driving, video/slideshow will not be displayed. Only
sound will be output.
3
AUDIO
OVERVIEW
The USB Audio/Video playback screen can be reached by
the following methods:
Connect a USB memory. (P.42)
Select
(USB (DEVICE
USB (DEVICE NAME)
NAME)) on the Select Audio Source (Select Audio
Source) screen. (P.55)
The USB photo playback screen can be reached by the
following method:
Select USB (DEVICE NAME) Photo (USB (DEVICE
NAME) Photo) on the INFO (INFO) screen.
(P.24)
No.
Function
Select to select a file/track.
81
docstructure.indb
81
2016/03/30
11:15:40
MEDIA OPERATION
XControl screen (Audio/Video)
No.
Function
: The file/track currently playing will be
repeated.
: The files/tracks contained within the
folder/album currently playing will be
repeated.
<USB Audio>

No.
<USB Video>
Function

played in random order.
Displays cover art.

Select to display file/track list.
: The files/tracks contained on the USB

memory currently playing will be played
in random order.
Shows progress.
82
docstructure.indb
82
2016/03/30
11:15:40
MEDIA OPERATION
No.
Function
XControl screen (Photo)
Select to display the play mode selection screen.

Artists (Artists)/Albums (Albums)/Songs
(Songs)/Genres (Genres)/Composers
(Composers)/Folder (Folder)/Videos (Videos) are
on the play mode selection screen.
Switching between USB audio and USB video is
possible on the play mode selection screen. To
return to the top screen, select Now Playing (Now
3
AUDIO
Select to choose the folder.

Select to display the options screen.
The following can be done on the options screen.
Select to change the screen size. (P.58)
Select to display the audio settings screen. (P.98)
Displays video image.
Select to display full screen video.
Selecting
will also change to full screen.
No.
Function
Select to set slideshow.
The slideshow displays the images contained within
the currently selected folder.
Select to set play time of slideshow.
Select to set random playback.
The files can be switched.
Select to display the USB photo folder list selection
screen.
83
docstructure.indb
83
2016/03/30
11:15:41
MEDIA OPERATION
WARNING
l Do not operate the players controls or connect the USB
memory while driving.
iPod
When an iPod is connected, you can play iPod music files.
On this unit, you can perform operations such as selecting
a file from a list or changing to the random playback mode.
CAUTION
l Do not leave your portable player in the car. In particular, high
temperatures inside the vehicle may damage the portable
player.
l Do not push down on or apply unnecessary pressure to the
portable player while it is connected as this may damage the
l Do not insert foreign objects into the port as this may damage
the portable player or its terminal.
OVERVIEW
The iPod operation screen can be reached by the following
methods:
Select
(iPod (DEVICE
iPod (DEVICE NAME)
NAME)) on the Select Audio Source (Select Audio
Source) screen. (P.55)
NOTE
l Ensure to engage the parking brake when watching video
content. If not, only a blue screen will be displayed. Audio,
however, can be heard normally.
l Audio files and image files can be played back at the same time.
However, the slideshow interval may be longer than when an
audio file is not being played back.
l If tag information exists, the file names will be changed to track
names.
l The compatible photo file extensions are JPG and JPEG.
84
docstructure.indb
84
2016/03/30
11:15:41
MEDIA OPERATION
XControl panel
XControl screen
3
AUDIO
No.
Function
Select to select a track.
No.
Function
Displays cover art.
Shows progress.
85
docstructure.indb
85
2016/03/30
11:15:41
MEDIA OPERATION
No.
Function
Select to set repeat playback.
each time the random button is selected.
: The tracks contained within the list
random order.
: The albums contained within the list
random order.
(Songs)/Playlists (Playlists)/Genres
(Genres)/Composers (Composers)/Audiobooks
(Audiobooks)/Podcasts (Podcasts)/Videos (Videos)
are on the play mode selection screen.
WARNING
l Do not operate the players controls or connect the iPod while
driving.
CAUTION
l Do not leave your portable player in the car. In particular, high
temperatures inside the vehicle may damage the portable
player.
portable player while it is connected as this may damage the
the portable player or its terminal.
NOTE
l When an iPod is connected using a genuine iPod cable, the iPod
starts charging its battery.
l If playing iPod music, perform operation at the system. Certain
functions may not be available if played directly from the
iPod. Furthermore, depending on the connected iPod, certain
functions may not be available.
l Depending on the iPod and the songs in the iPod, iPod cover
art may be displayed. This function can be changed to on/
off. (P.98) It may take time to display iPod cover art, and
the iPod may not be operated while the cover art display is in
process.
l When an iPod is connected and the audio source is changed to
iPod mode, the iPod will resume playing from the same point it
was last used.
l Tracks selected by operating a connected iPod may not be
recognized or displayed properly.
86
docstructure.indb
86
2016/03/30
11:15:42
MEDIA OPERATION
SD CARD (WITH NAVIGATION

FUNCTION)
Audio files, video files and image files on the SD card can
be played back/viewed. Image files can be viewed at the
same time that audio files are being played back.
While driving, video/slideshow will not be displayed. Only
sound will be output.
The SD Audio/Video playback screen can be reached by the

following methods:
Insert an SD card. (P.42)
Select microSD (microSD) on the Select Audio
Source (Select Audio Source) screen. (P.55)
The SD Photo playback screen can be reached by the
following method:
Select microSD Photo (microSD Photo) on the
INFO (INFO) screen. (P.24)
3
AUDIO
NOTE
l Do not store audio, video, or image files on the map SD card. It
will not be possible to use the navigation function if an SD card
other than the map SD card is inserted in the SD card slot.
l Audio, video, or image files stored on the map SD card cannot
be played.
OVERVIEW
87
docstructure.indb
87
2016/03/30
11:15:42
MEDIA OPERATION
XControl screen (Audio/Video)
XControl panel
<SD Audio>
No.
Function
<SD Video>

Select to select a file/track.
No.
Function
Displays cover art.
Select to display file/track list.
Shows progress.
88
docstructure.indb
88
2016/03/30
11:15:43
MEDIA OPERATION
No.
Function
: The file/track currently playing will be

repeated.

played in random order.
Function
(Songs)/Genres (Genres)/Composers
(Composers)/Folder (Folder)/Videos (Videos) are
on the play mode selection screen.
Switching between SD audio and SD video is possible
on the play mode selection screen. To return to the top
screen, select Now Playing (Now Playing) on the
list screen.
3
AUDIO

repeated.
No.
Select to choose the folder.

Select to display the options screen.
The following can be done on the options screen.
Select to display the audio settings screen. (P.98)
Displays video.
Select to display full screen video.
Selecting
will also change to full screen.
: The files/tracks contained on the SD

card currently playing will be played in
random order.
89
docstructure.indb
89
2016/03/30
11:15:43
MEDIA OPERATION
XControl screen (Photo)
WARNING
l Do not operate the players controls or insertion and pulling
out the SD card while driving.
CAUTION
l Do not insert foreign objects into the SD card slot.
NOTE
No.
Function
l Ensure to engage the parking brake when watching video

content. If not, only a blue screen will be displayed. Audio,
however, can be heard normally.
l Audio files and image files can be played back at the same time.
However, the slideshow interval may be longer than when an
audio file is not being played back.
l If tag information exists, the file names will be changed to track
names.
l The compatible photo file extensions are JPG and JPEG.
Select to set slideshow.

The slideshow displays the images contained within the
currently selected folder.
Select to set play time of slideshow.
Select to set random playback.
The files can be switched.
Select to display the microSD photo folder list selection
screen.
90
docstructure.indb
90
2016/03/30
11:15:44
MEDIA OPERATION
Bluetooth AUDIO
XControl panel
The Bluetooth audio system enables users to enjoy listening

to music that is played on a portable player on the vehicle
speakers via wireless communication.
This audio system supports Bluetooth, a wireless data
system capable of playing portable audio music without
cables. If your device does not support Bluetooth, the
Bluetooth audio system will not function.
3
AUDIO
OVERVIEW
Select Bluetooth Audio (Bluetooth Audio) on the Select
Audio Source (Select Audio Source) screen. (P.55)
Depending on the type of portable player connected, some
functions may not be available and/or the screen may look
differently than shown in this manual.
No.
Function
Select to select a track.
91
docstructure.indb
91
2016/03/30
11:15:44
MEDIA OPERATION
XControl screen
No.
Function
Select to enable/disable repeat playback of the track
currently playing.
Select to enable/disable random playback for the tracks
currently playing on the Bluetooth audio device.
Select to display the playlist screen.
Select to display the portable device connection screen.
(P.182)
Displays cover art.
No.
Function
Select to display the sound settings screen. (P.56)
Shows progress.
92
docstructure.indb
92
2016/03/30
11:15:44
MEDIA OPERATION
WARNING
l Do not operate the players controls or connect to the
Bluetooth audio system while driving.
l Your audio unit is fitted with Bluetooth antennas. People with
implantable cardiac pacemakers, cardiac resynchronization
therapy-pacemakers or implantable cardioverter defibrillators
should maintain a reasonable distance between themselves
and the Bluetooth antennas. The radio waves may affect the
operation of such devices.
CAUTION
l Do not leave your portable player in the vehicle. In particular,
high temperatures inside the vehicle may damage the portable
player.
l Depending on the Bluetooth device that is connected to the

system, the music may start playing when selecting
while
it is paused. Conversely, the music may pause when selecting
while it is playing.
l In the following conditions, the system may not function:
The Bluetooth device is turned off.
The Bluetooth device is not connected.
The Bluetooth device has a low battery.
l It may take time to connect the phone when Bluetooth audio is
being played.
l For operating the portable player, see the instruction manual that
comes with it.
l If the Bluetooth device is disconnected due to poor reception
from the Bluetooth network when the ignition switch is turned
to the ACC or ON position, the system will automatically
reconnect to the portable player.
l If the Bluetooth device is disconnected on purpose, such as it
was turned off, this does not happen. Reconnect the portable
player manually.
l Bluetooth device information is registered when the Bluetooth
device is connected to the Bluetooth audio system. When
selling or disposing of the vehicle, remove the Bluetooth audio
information from the system. (P.192)
3
AUDIO
l Before using Bluetooth devices, users of any electrical

medical device other than implantable cardiac pacemakers,
cardioverter defibrillators should consult the manufacturer
of the device for information about its operation under the
influence of radio waves. Radio waves could have unexpected
effects on the operation of such medical devices.
NOTE
93
docstructure.indb
93
2016/03/30
11:15:45
MEDIA OPERATION
CONNECTING A Bluetooth DEVICE

To use the Bluetooth audio system, it is necessary to
register a Bluetooth device with the system.
XRegistering an additional device
1.
Select Select Device (Select Device) on the Bluetooth

audio control screen.
2.
For more information: P.180
XSelecting a registered device
1.
Select Select Device (Select Device) on the Bluetooth

audio control screen.
2.
For more information: P.182
AUX
OVERVIEW
The AUX operation screen can be reached by the following
methods:
Connect a portable audio device. (P.42)
Select AUX (AUX) on the Select Audio Source
XControl panel
No.
Function
94
docstructure.indb
94
2016/03/30
11:15:45
MEDIA OPERATION
XControl screen
WARNING
l Do not operate the players controls or connect the portable
audio device while driving.
CAUTION
l Do not leave portable audio device in the vehicle. The
temperature inside the vehicle may become high, resulting in
damage to the player.
3
AUDIO
l Do not push down on or apply unnecessary pressure to

the portable audio device while it is connected as this may
damage the portable audio device or its terminal.
the portable audio device or its terminal.
No.
Function
95
docstructure.indb
95
2016/03/30
11:15:45
AUDIO/VISUAL REMOTE CONTROLS
STEERING SWITCHES
X+/- switch
Mode
Some parts of the audio/visual system can be adjusted

using the switches on the steering wheel.
Operation
Function
Press
Volume up/down
Press and hold
Volume up/down continuously
Press
Cursor up/down
Volume
List screen
switch
Mode
AM/FM Radio,
SiriusXM
No.
Switch
+/- switch
switch
Mute/enter switch
Operation
Function
Press
Preset channel up/down
Press and hold
Seek up/down continuously
Press
Content up/down
Press and hold
Rewind the current content

item for 15 seconds/ Fast
forward the current content
item for 30 seconds
aha
Back switch
List switch
Source switch
96
docstructure.indb
96
2016/03/30
11:15:46
Mode
Audio CD, MP3/
WMA/AAC disc,
SD*1,USB,iPod,
Bluetooth audio
Operation
Select a track/file
Press and hold
Fast forward/rewind
Press
Track up (
Press and hold
Thumbs up/down
Press
Cursor left/right
only)
XBack switch
Mode
Press
Press and hold
Mode
Operation
Function
Except list
screen
Press
Mute/unmute
List screen
Press
Select cursor entry
Return to the previous screen

when
is displayed on
Return to the HOME
(HOME) screen
XList switch
Mode
XMute/enter switch
Function
the screen.
All

Operation
AUDIO
Press
Pandora*2
List screen
Function
Audio screen,
Navigation*
screen
Operation
Press
Function
Show list screen
XSource switch
Mode
All
Operation
Press
Function
Change audio modes
NOTE
l In the aha, Pandora* and SUBARU STARLINK mode, some
operation may be done on the screen depend on the selected
APPS.
*: Pandora is available in the United States, Australia, and New Zealand.
97
docstructure.indb
97
2016/03/30
11:15:46
SETUP
SETUP
AUDIO SETTINGS
AUDIO SETTINGS SCREEN
Detailed audio settings can be programmed.
1.
Select
2.
3.
4.
Select Audio (Audio).

98
docstructure.indb
98
2016/03/30
11:15:47
SETUP
No.
Function
Select to specify the sound settings.
56
Select to change the number of preset radio

stations/channels displayed on the screen.
99
Select to specify the iPod/SD*1/USB auto play

settings on/off.
100
Unsupported.
Select to specify cover art settings on/off.
Select to specify automatic sound levelizer

settings.
DISPLAYING THE Audio Settings (Audio

Settings) SCREEN IN A DIFFERENT WAY
XUSB video/SD video*
1.
2.
Select to reset all setup items.
on the audio control screen.
Select Settings (Settings).
SETTING THE NUMBER OF RADIO PRESETS
1.
Display the Audio Settings (Audio Settings) screen.

(P.98)
2.
Select Number of Radio Presets (Number of Radio

Presets).
3.
Select the button with the desired number to be

displayed.
100
Select to enable cache radio.
Select
AUDIO
Select to specify the iPod sound signal input

settings.
*2
Page

*2: This setting can be made depending on the connected amplifier type.
99
docstructure.indb
99
2016/03/30
11:15:47
SETUP
iPod SETTINGS
1.

(P.98)
2.
3.
Select iPod Sound Input (iPod Sound Input).

Select a screen button for the desired setting.
AUTOMATIC SOUND LEVELIZER (ASL)

The system adjusts to the optimum volume and tone quality
according to vehicle speed to compensate for increased
vehicle noise.
1.

(P.98)
2.
Select Automatic Sound Levelizer (Automatic Sound

Levelizer).
3.
Select High (High), Mid (Mid), Low (Low), or Off

(Off).
100
docstructure.indb
100
2016/03/30
11:15:48
TIPS FOR OPERATING THE AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM
OPERATING INFORMATION
CAUTION
l To avoid damage to the audio/visual system:
Do not put anything other than an appropriate disc into the

disc slot.
Do not insert anything other than an SD card into the SD
card slot.
NOTE
l The use of a cellular phone inside or near the vehicle may cause
a noise from the speakers of the audio/visual system which you
are listening to. However, this does not indicate a malfunction.
Usually, a problem with radio reception does not mean there

is a problem with the radio it is just the normal result of
conditions outside the vehicle.
For example, nearby buildings and terrain can interfere
with FM reception. Power lines or phone wires can interfere
with AM signals. And of course, radio signals have a limited
range. The farther the vehicle is from a station, the weaker
its signal will be. In addition, reception conditions change
constantly as the vehicle moves.
3
AUDIO
Be careful not to spill beverages over the audio/visual

system.
RADIO
Here, some common reception problems that probably do

not indicate a problem with the radio are described.
101
docstructure.indb
101
2016/03/30
11:15:48
FM
AM
Fading and drifting stations: Generally, the effective range

of FM is about 25 miles (40 km). Once outside this range,
you may notice fading and drifting, which increase with
the distance from the radio transmitter. They are often
accompanied by distortion.
Fading: AM broadcasts are reflected by the upper

atmosphere especially at night. These reflected signals
can interfere with those received directly from the radio
station, causing the radio station to sound alternately strong
and weak.
Multi-path: FM signals are reflective, making it possible for

2 signals to reach the vehicles antenna at the same time. If
this happens, the signals will cancel each other out, causing
a momentary flutter or loss of reception.
Station interference: When a reflected signal and a signal

received directly from a radio station are very nearly the
same frequency, they can interfere with each other, making
it difficult to hear the broadcast.
Static and fluttering: These occur when signals are blocked

by buildings, trees or other large objects. Increasing the
bass level may reduce static and fluttering.
Static: AM is easily affected by external sources of electrical

noise, such as high tension power lines, lightening or
electrical motors. This results in static.
Station swapping: If the FM signal being listened to is

interrupted or weakened, and there is another strong station
nearby on the FM band, the radio may tune in the second
station until the original signal can be picked up again.
SiriusXM
Cargo loaded on the roof luggage carrier, especially
metal objects, may adversely affect the reception of
SiriusXM Satellite Radio.
Alternation or modifications carried out without
appropriate authorization may invalidate the users
right to operate the equipment.
102
docstructure.indb
102
2016/03/30
11:15:48
CD PLAYER AND DISC

Extremely high temperatures can keep the CD player
from working. On hot days, use the air conditioning
system to cool the inside of the vehicle before using
the player.
Bumpy roads or other vibrations may make the CD
player skip.
SACD
dts CD
Copy-protected CD
Video CD
XSpecial shaped discs

AUDIO
If moisture gets into the CD player, the discs may

not be able to be played. Remove the discs from the
player and wait until it dries.
Use only discs marked as shown above. The

following products may not be playable on your
player:
WARNING
l CD players use an invisible laser beam which could cause
hazardous radiation exposure if directed outside the unit. Be
sure to operate the player correctly.
XTransparent/translucent discs
Audio CDs
103
docstructure.indb
103
2016/03/30
11:15:49
XLow quality discs
CAUTION
l Do not use special shaped, transparent/translucent,
low quality or labeled discs such as those shown in the
illustrations. The use of such discs may damage the player, or
it may be impossible to eject the disc.
l This system is not designed for use of Dual Discs. Do not use
Dual Discs because they may cause damage to the player.
l Do not use discs with a protection ring. The use of such discs
may damage the player, or it may be impossible to eject the
disc.
XLabeled discs
l Do not use printable discs. The use of such discs may

damage the player, or it may be impossible to eject the disc.
Correct
Wrong
Handle discs carefully, especially when inserting

them. Hold them on the edge and do not bend them.
Avoid getting fingerprints on them, particularly on the
shiny side.
104
docstructure.indb
104
2016/03/30
11:15:50
Dirt, scratches, warping, pin holes or other disc

damage could cause the player to skip or to repeat a
section of a track. (To see a pin hole, hold the disc up
to the light.)
Remove discs from the players when not in use.
Store them in their plastic cases away from moisture,
heat and direct sunlight.
CD-R/RW DISCS
CD-R/CD-RW discs that have not been subject to
the finalizing process (a process that allows discs
to be played on a conventional CD player) cannot be
played.
It may not be possible to play discs recorded on a

personal computer depending on the application
settings and the environment. Record with the
correct format. (For details, contact the appropriate
application manufacturers of the applications.)
To clean a disc: Wipe it with a soft, lint-free cloth that has
been dampened with water. Wipe in a straight line from
the center to the edge of the disc (not in circles). Dry it
with another soft, lint-free cloth. Do not use a conventional
record cleaner or anti-static device.
3
AUDIO
It may not be possible to play CD-R/CD-RW discs

recorded on a music CD recorder or a personal
computer because of disc characteristics, scratches
or dirt on the disc, or dirt, condensation, etc. on the
lens of the unit.
CD-R/CD-RW discs may be damaged by direct

exposure to sunlight, high temperatures or other
storage conditions. The unit may be unable to play
some damaged discs.
If you insert a CD-RW disc into the player, playback
will begin more slowly than with a conventional CD or
CD-R disc.
Recordings on CD-R/CD-RW cannot be played using
the DDCD (Double Density CD) system.
105
docstructure.indb
105
2016/03/30
11:15:50
iPod nano (7th generation)
USB MEMORY
USB communication formats: USB 2.0 HS (480

Mbps) and FS (12 Mbps)
File formats: FAT 16/32
iPod nano (3rd generation)
Correspondence class: Mass storage class
iPod nano (2nd generation)*
iPod nano (1st generation)*
iPod
iPhone 5
The following iPod , iPod nano , iPod classic , iPod

touch and iPhone devices can be used with this system.
Made for
iPod touch (5th generation)

iPod touch (3rd generation)*
iPod touch (2nd generation)*
iPod touch (1st generation)*
iPod classic
iPod with video*
iPhone 4S
iPhone 4*
iPhone 3GS*
iPhone 3G*
iPhone*
*: The voice recognition system not supported
Depending on differences between models or

software versions etc., some models might be
incompatible with this system.
iPod video is not supported.
For USA customers, please visit www.subaru.com for
details. Outside of the USA customers, contact your
local dealer to arrange a demonstration in order to
confirm whether or not the phone can be paired with
the vehicle.
106
docstructure.indb
106
2016/03/30
11:15:50
SD CARD (WITH NAVIGATION FUNCTION)
CORRESPONDING SAMPLING FREQUENCY

(Audio)
SD cards that are marked as follows can be used.

File type
Audio files saved to the map SD card cannot be

played.
Supported capacity: Maximum 32 GB
Bumpy roads or other vibrations may make the SD
player skip.
FILE INFORMATION
MP3 files:
MPEG 1 LAYER 3
32/44.1/48
MP3 files:
MPEG 2 LSF LAYER 3
16/22.05/24
WMA files:
Ver. 7, 8, 9 (9.1/9.2)
32/44.1/48
AAC files:
MPEG4/AAC-LC
11.025/16/22.05/24/
32/44.1/48
3
AUDIO
Multi Media Cards (MMC) cannot be used.
Frequency (kHz)
CORRESPONDING BIT RATES (Audio)

COMPATIBLE COMPRESSED FILES (Audio)
File type
Item
Compatible file
format
USB/SD*
DISC
MP3/WMA/AAC
Bit rate (kbps)
MP3 files: MPEG 1 LAYER 3
32 - 320
MP3 files:
MPEG 2 LSF LAYER 3
8 - 160
WMA files: Ver. 7, 8
CBR 48 - 192
Folders in the
device
Maximum 3000
Maximum 192
Files in the device
Maximum 9999
Maximum 255
WMA files: Ver. 9 (9.1/9.2)
CBR 48 - 320
Files per folder
Maximum 255
AAC files: MPEG4/AAC-LC
16 - 320
107
docstructure.indb
107
2016/03/30
11:15:50
The player is compatible with VBR (Variable Bit Rate).

MP3 (MPEG Audio Layer 3), WMA (Windows Media
Audio) and AAC (Advanced Audio Coding) are audio
compression standards.
This system can play MP3/WMA/AAC files on CD-R,
CD-RW discs, USB memory, SD card*, and Bluetooth
device.
This system can play disc recordings compatible with

ISO 9660 level 1 and level 2 and with the Romeo and
Joliet file system.
When naming an MP3/WMA/AAC file, add an
appropriate file extension (.mp3/.wma/.m4a).
This system plays back files with .mp3/.wma/.m4a
file extensions as MP3/WMA/AAC files respectively.
To prevent noise and playback errors, use the
appropriate file extension.
This system can play only the first session when
using multi-session compatible CDs.
MP3 files are compatible with the ID3 Tag Ver. 1.0,
Ver. 1.1, Ver. 2.2 and Ver. 2.3 formats. This system
cannot display disc title, track title and artist name in
other formats.
WMA/AAC files can contain a WMA/AAC tag that is

used in the same way as an ID3 tag. WMA/AAC tags
carry information such as track title and artist name.
This system can play back AAC files encoded by
iTunes.
The sound quality of MP3/WMA files generally
improves with higher bit rates. In order to achieve a
reasonable level of sound quality, discs recorded with
a bit rate of at least 128 kbps are recommended.
The MP3/WMA player does not play back MP3/
WMA files from discs recorded using packet write
data transfer (UDF format). Discs should be recorded
using pre-mastering software rather than packetwrite software.
M3u playlists are not compatible with the audio
device.
MP3i (MP3 interactive) and MP3PRO formats are not
compatible with the audio device.
When playing back files recorded as VBR (Variable
Bit Rate) files, the play time will not be correctly
displayed if the fast forward or rewind operations are
used.
It is not possible to check folders that do not include
MP3/WMA/AAC files.
108
docstructure.indb
108
2016/03/30
11:15:50
MP3/WMA/AAC files in folders up to 8 levels deep

can be played. However, the start of playback may be
delayed when using discs containing numerous levels
of folders. For this reason, we recommend creating
discs with no more than 2 levels of folders.
001.mp3
002.wma
Folder 1
003.mp3
Folder 2
004.mp3
005.wma
Folder 3
006.m4a
3
AUDIO
The play order of the compact disc with the structure

shown above is as follows:
001.mp3
002.wma . . .
006.m4a
The order changes depending on the personal

computer and MP3/WMA/AAC encoding software you
use.
109
docstructure.indb
109
2016/03/30
11:15:51
COMPATIBLE COMPRESSED FILES (Video)

XVideo Codec
File Type
Profile
Simple Profile
Main Profile
Advanced Profile
WMV9
WMV
AVI
MPEG4
AVI
MPEG4
Simple Profile
Advanced Simple Profile
H.264/AVC
AVI
MPEG4
Baseline Profile
Main Profile
High Profile
Resolution (Pixels)
12896
160120
176144
320240
352240
352288
640480
720480
720576
XAudio Codec
File Type
Corresponding Sampling
Frequency (kHz)
MP3
WMV
AVI
MPEG4
MPEG1 Layer3: 32/44.1/48

MPEG2 LSF Layer3: 16/22.05/24
MPEG1 Layer3: 32-320

MPEG2 LSF Layer3: 8-160
Stereo
Joint Stereo
Dual Channel
Monaural
WMA Ver.7/8/9
WMV
AVI
32/44.1/48
Ver. 7/8: 48-192

Ver. 9 (9.1/9.2): 48-320
Stereo
AAC
AVI
MPEG4
11.025/16/22.05/24/32/44.1/48
16-320
Stereo
Monaural
Corresponding Bit Rates (kbps)
Channel Mode
The player is compatible with VBR (Variable Bit Rate).
110
docstructure.indb
110
2016/03/30
11:15:51
TERMS
PACKET WRITE
This is a general term that describes the process of
writing data on-demand to CD-R, etc., in the same
way that data is written to floppy or hard discs.
This is a method of embedding track-related

information in an MP3 file. This embedded information
can include the track number, track title, the artists
name, the album title, the music genre, the year of
production, comments, cover art and other data. The
contents can be freely edited using software with ID3
tag editing functions. Although tags are restricted to a
certain number of characters, the artist name, track
title, and album title can be viewed when the track is
played back.
WMA files can contain a WMA tag that is used in the

same way as an ID3 tag. WMA tags carry information
such as track title and artist name.
ISO 9660 FORMAT

This is the international standard for the formatting of
CD-ROM folders and files. For the ISO 9660 format,
there are 2 levels of regulations.
Level 1: The file name is in 8.3 format (8 character file
names, with a 3 character file extension. File names
must be composed of one-byte capital letters and
numbers. The _ symbol may also be included.)
3
AUDIO
ID3 TAG
WMA TAG
Level 2: The file name can have up to 31 characters

(including the separation mark . and file extension).
Each folder must contain fewer than 8 hierarchies.
111
docstructure.indb
111
2016/03/30
11:15:51
m3u
Playlists created using WINAMP software have a
playlist file extension (.m3u).
MP3
AAC
AAC is short for Advanced Audio Coding and refers to
an audio compression technology standard used with
MPEG2 and MPEG4.
MP3 is an audio compression standard determined

by a working group (MPEG) of the ISO (International
Standard Organization). MP3 compresses audio data
to about 1/10 the size of that on conventional discs.
WMA
WMA (Windows Media Audio) is an audio
compression format developed by Microsoft. It
compresses files into a size smaller than that of MP3
files. The decoding formats for WMA files are Ver. 7,
8 and 9.
This product is protected by certain intellectual
property rights of Microsoft Corporation and third
parties. Use or distribution of such technology outside
of this product is prohibited without a license from
Microsoft or an authorized Microsoft subsidiary and
third parties.
112
docstructure.indb
112
2016/03/30
11:15:51
PHONE
113
docstructure.indb
113
2016/03/30
11:15:51
PHONE OPERATION (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONES)
QUICK REFERENCE
Function
The phone top screen can be used to make a phone call. To

display the hands-free operation screen, select
and
then select PHONE (PHONE), select
the
*, or press
Several functions are available to operate on each screen

that is displayed by selecting the 4 tabs.
*: Without navigation function
Phone
operation
Message
function
Setting up
a phone
Page
Registering/connecting Bluetooth phone
174
Calling on the Bluetooth phone
118
Receiving on the Bluetooth phone
124
Talking on the Bluetooth phone
125
Using the Bluetooth phone message

function
127
Phone settings
133
Bluetooth settings
179
114
docstructure.indb
114
2016/03/30
11:15:52
SOME BASICS
The hands-free system enables calls to be made and
received without having to take your hands off the steering
wheel.
This system supports Bluetooth. Bluetooth is a wireless
data system that enables cellular phones to be used without
being connected by a cable or placed in a cradle.
The operating procedure of the phone is explained here.
l While driving, do not use a cellular phone or connect the

Bluetooth phone.
l Your audio unit is fitted with Bluetooth antennas. People with
implantable cardiac pacemakers, cardiac resynchronization
therapy-pacemakers or implantable cardioverter defibrillators
should maintain a reasonable distance between themselves
and the Bluetooth antennas. The radio waves may affect the
operation of such devices.
l Before using Bluetooth devices, users of any electrical
medical device other than implantable cardiac pacemakers,
cardioverter defibrillators should consult the manufacturer
of the device for information about its operation under the
influence of radio waves. Radio waves could have unexpected
effects on the operation of such medical devices.
l Do not leave your cellular phone in the vehicle. The

temperature inside may rise to a level that could damage the
phone.
NOTE
l If your cellular phone does not support Bluetooth, this system
cannot function. Certain functions may not be available
depending on the type of cellular phone.
l In the following conditions, the system may not function:
The cellular phone is turned off.
The current position is outside the communication area.
The cellular phone is not connected.
The cellular phone has a low battery.
l When using the hands-free function and other Bluetooth
functions at the same time, the following problems may occur:
The Bluetooth connection may be cut.
Noise may be heard when playing back voice with the
Bluetooth function.
l The other partys voice will be heard from the front speakers.
The audio/visual system will be muted during phone calls or
when hands-free voice commands are used.
l Talk alternately with the other party on the phone. If both parties
speak at the same time, the other party may not hear what has
been said. (This is not a malfunction.)
4
PHONE
WARNING
CAUTION
115
docstructure.indb
115
2016/03/30
11:15:52
NOTE
l Keep call volume down. Otherwise, the other partys voice
may be audible outside the vehicle and voice echo may
increase. When talking on the phone, speak clearly towards the
microphone.
l The other party may not hear you clearly when:
Driving on an unpaved road. (Making excessive traffic noise.)
Driving at high speeds.
Driving with a window open.
When air from the ventilator blows directly toward the
microphone.
The sound of the air conditioning fan is loud.
There is a negative effect on sound quality due to the phone
and/or network being used.
REGISTERING/CONNECTING A Bluetooth
PHONE
To use the hands-free system for cellular phones, it is
necessary to register a cellular phone with the system.
(P.174)
Bluetooth PHONE CONDITION DISPLAY
USING THE PHONE SWITCH/MICROPHONE

XSteering switch
By pressing the phone switch, a call can be received or
ended without taking your hands off the steering wheel.
Volume control switch

Press the + side to increase the volume.
Press the - side to decrease the volume.
Off hook switch
On hook switch
The condition of the Bluetooth phone appears on the upper

right side of the screen. (P.26)
116
docstructure.indb
116
2016/03/30
11:15:53
XMicrophone
ABOUT THE CONTACTS IN THE CONTACT

LIST
The microphone is used when talking on the phone.
The following data is stored for every registered

phone. When another phone is connected, the
following registered data cannot be read:
Contact data
Call history data
Speed dial data
Image data
Message settings
NOTE
Press this switch to operate the voice recognition system.
The voice recognition system and

commands can be operated. (P.256)
PHONE
All phone settings
its
list
l When a phones registration is deleted, the above-mentioned

data is also deleted.
of
117
docstructure.indb
117
2016/03/30
11:15:53
WHEN SELLING OR DISPOSING OF THE

VEHICLE
A lot of personal data is registered when the hands-free
system is used. When selling or disposing of the vehicle,
initialize the data. (P.192)
The following data in the system can be initialized:
Contact data
CALLING ON THE Bluetooth

PHONE
After a Bluetooth phone has been registered, a call can
be made using the hands-free system. There are several
methods by which a call can be made, as described below.
1.
Select
2.
Select the desired tab to call from.
Call history data

Speed dial data
Image data
All phone settings
Message settings
NOTE
l Once initialized, the data and settings will be erased. Pay close
attention when initializing the data.
118
docstructure.indb
118
2016/03/30
11:15:53
1.
How to make a call list
Select PHONE (PHONE).

Select the desired tab to call from.
Page
By speed dial list
120
By call history
120
By contacts list
121
By dial pad*1
122
By e-mail/SMS/MMS
131
By POI call*2
201
By off hook switch
123
By voice recognition system
258
By split screen
123
4
PHONE
2.
3.
Select
*1: The operation cannot be performed while driving.

The phone top screen can be displayed by pressing

the
119
docstructure.indb
119
2016/03/30
11:15:53
BY SPEED DIAL LIST

Calls can be made using registered contacts which can be
selected from a contact list. (P.140)
1.
2.
Display the phone top screen. (P.118)

Select the Speed Dial (Speed Dial) tab and then
select the desired contact.
3.
4.
BY CALL HISTORY
Up to 30 of the latest call history items (missed, incoming
and outgoing) can be selected from the Call History (Call
History) tab.
1.
2.

Select the Call History (Call History) tab and then
or the desired contact.
select
Select the desired number.

Check that the Call (Call) screen is displayed.
The icons of call type are displayed.
: Missed call
: Incoming call
: Outgoing call
120
docstructure.indb
120
2016/03/30
11:15:54
XWhen
3.
is selected
XWhen the desired contact is selected
3.
4.
Select
corresponding to the desired number to call.
NOTE
Calls can be made by using contact data which is

transferred from a registered cellular phone. (P.122)
Up to 2500 contacts (maximum of 4 phone numbers and
e-mail addresses per contact) can be registered in the
contact list.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Select the Contacts (Contacts) tab and then select the

desired contact.
4
PHONE
l When making a call to the same number continuously, only the

most recent call is listed in call history.
l When a phone number registered in the contact list is received,
the name is displayed.
l International phone calls may not be made depending on the
type of cellular phone you have.
l The list should group together consecutive entries with the same
phone number and same call type. For example, two calls from
Kay Rowless mobile would be displayed as follows: Kay Rowles
(2)
BY CONTACTS LIST
121
docstructure.indb
121
2016/03/30
11:15:55
WHEN THE CONTACT IS EMPTY

n FOR PBAP COMPATIBLE Bluetooth PHONES
When Automatic Contact/History Transfer (Automatic
Contact/History Transfer) is set to on, contacts are
transferred automatically. (P.135)
BY DIAL PAD
1.
2.

Select the Dial Pad (Dial Pad) tab and enter the phone
number.
n FOR OPP COMPATIBLE Bluetooth PHONES

Contacts can be transferred or added manually.
To transfer, select Update Contacts from Phone (Update
Contacts from Phone) at the Contact/Call History Settings
(Contact/Call History Settings) screen. (P.137)
New Contact (New Contact) at the
Contact/Call History Settings (Contact/Call History
Settings) screen. (P.137)
3.
Select
wheel.
4.
To add, select
or press the
switch on the steering
NOTE
l Depending on the type of Bluetooth phone being connected, it
may be necessary to perform additional steps on the phone.
122
docstructure.indb
122
2016/03/30
11:15:56
BY OFF HOOK SWITCH

Calls can be made using the latest call history item.
1.
Press the
switch on the steering wheel to display
the phone top screen.
2.
Press the
switch on the steering wheel to display
the Call History (Call History) screen.
3.
Press the
switch on the steering wheel to call the
latest history item.
1.
Display the split screen. (P.47)
2.
Select the desired contact.
PHONE
4.
BY SPLIT SCREEN
REGISTERING A NEW CONTACT
1.
2.
3.
Select and hold the screen button to add a contact.

123
docstructure.indb
123
2016/03/30
11:15:56
RECEIVING ON THE Bluetooth

PHONE
INCOMING CALLS
When a call is received, the incoming call screen is
displayed with a sound.
1.
Select
or press the
NOTE
l During international phone calls, the other partys name or
number may not be displayed correctly depending on the type of
cellular phone you have.
l The incoming call display mode can be set. (P.143)
l The ringtone that has been set in the Sound Settings (Sound
Settings) screen sounds when there is an incoming call.
Depending on the type of Bluetooth phone, both the system and
Bluetooth phone may sound simultaneously when there is an
incoming call. (P.134)
wheel to talk on the phone.
To refuse to receive the call: Select

To put on hold: Select and hold
the
or press the
, or press and hold
To adjust the volume of a received call: Turn the

POWER/VOLUME knob, or use the volume control switch
124
docstructure.indb
124
2016/03/30
11:15:57
TALKING ON THE Bluetooth PHONE
No.
While talking on the phone, this screen is displayed. The

operations outlined below can be performed on this screen.
Function
Page
Select to send tones. This button only appears

when a number that contains a (w) is dialed in
hands-free mode.
126
Select to hang up the phone.
Select
or
to adjust the volume of the
other partys voice.
Select to start talking with the other party.
Function
Page
Select to display the dial pad to send tones.
122
Select to mute your voice to the other party.
Select to change handset modes between

hands-free and cellular phone.
Select to adjust your voice volume that the

other party hears from their speaker.
126
NOTE
l When cellular phone call is changed to hands-free call, the
hands-free screen will be displayed and its functions can be
l Changing between cellular phone call and hands-free call can be
performed by operating the cellular phone directly.
l Transferring methods and operations will be different depending
on the type of cellular phone you have.
l For the operation of the cellular phone, see the manual that
comes with it.
l Turn the POWER/VOLUME knob, or use the volume control
switch on the steering wheel to adjust the volume of the other
party's voice.
PHONE
No.
127
125
docstructure.indb
125
2016/03/30
11:15:58
SENDING TONES
BY DIAL PAD
This operation cannot be performed while driving.
1.
Select Dial Pad (Dial Pad).
NOTE
l A continuous tone signal is a character string that consists of
numbers and the characters p or w. (e.g. 056133w0123p#1)
l When the p pause tone is used, the tone data up until the
next pause tone will be automatically sent after 2 seconds have
elapsed. When the w pause tone is used, the tone data up
until the next pause tone will be automatically sent after a user
operation is performed.
l Release tones can be used when automated operation of a
phone based service such as an answering machine or bank
phone service is desired. A phone number with continuous tone
signals can be registered in the contact list.
l Tone data after a w pause tone can be operated on voice
command during a call.
TRANSMIT VOLUME SETTING
2.
Enter the desired number.
BY SELECTING Release Tones (Release Tones)
1.
2.
Select Mic Volume (Mic Volume).

Select the desired level for the transmit volume.
Release Tones (Release Tones) appears when a

continuous tone signal(s) containing a (w) is registered in
the contact list.
This operation can be performed while driving.
1.
Select Release Tones (Release Tones).
126
docstructure.indb
126
2016/03/30
11:15:58
3.
Bluetooth PHONE MESSAGE

FUNCTION
Select OK (OK).
NOTE
l The sound quality of the voice heard from the other partys
speaker may be negatively impacted.
l To reset the transmit volume, select Default (Default).
l The volume cannot be adjusted while muted.
Depending on the type of Bluetooth phone connected,

received messages may not be transferred to the message
inbox.
INCOMING CALL WAITING
Select
or press the
wheel to start talking with the other party.
To refuse to receive the call: Select

If the phone does not support the message function, this

function cannot be used.
1.
Select
2.
Select
4
PHONE
When a call is interrupted by a third party while talking, this

1.
Received messages can be forwarded from the connected

Bluetooth phone, enabling checking and replying using the
system.
or press the
or press the
Select
wheel to end the current call and return to the
conversation with the party on hold.

the
127
docstructure.indb
127
2016/03/30
11:15:59
3.
Check that the message inbox screen is displayed.
4.
Check that the message inbox screen is displayed.
1.
Select
: Select to change to phone mode.

Function
2.
3.
Select PHONE (PHONE).

Select

the
Page
Receiving a message
129
Checking messages
129
Replying to a message (quick reply)
130
Calling the message sender
131
Message settings
142
128
docstructure.indb
128
2016/03/30
11:15:59
RECEIVING A MESSAGE
When an e-mail/SMS/MMS is received, the incoming
message screen pops up with sound and is ready to be
Function
Select to check the message.
Select to not open the message.
l Depending on the cellular phone used for receiving messages,

or its registration status with the system, some information may
not be displayed.
l The pop up screen is separately available for incoming e-mail
and SMS/MMS messages under the following conditions:
Incoming E-mail Display (Incoming E-mail Display) is set to
Full Screen (Full Screen). (P.142)
E-mail Notification Popup (E-mail Notification Popup) is set
to on. (P.142)
Incoming SMS/MMS Display (Incoming SMS/MMS Display)
is set to Full Screen (Full Screen). (P.142)
SMS/MMS Notification Popup (SMS/MMS Notification
Popup) is set to on. (P.142)
CHECKING MESSAGES
1.
2.
4
PHONE
No.
NOTE
Display the message inbox screen. (P.127)

Select the desired message from the list.
Select to call the message sender.
129
docstructure.indb
129
2016/03/30
11:16:00
3.
Check that the message is displayed.
No.
Function
Select Mark Unread (Mark Unread) or Mark Read
(Mark Read) to mark mail unread or read on the
message inbox screen.
This function is available when Update Message Read
Status on Phone (Update Message Read Status on
Phone) is set to on. (P.142)
Select to reply the message. (P.130)
Select to display the previous or next message.
NOTE
l Depending on the type of Bluetooth phone being connected, it
may be necessary to perform additional steps on the phone.
l Messages are displayed in the appropriate connected Bluetooth
phones registered mail address folder. Select the tab of the
desired folder to be displayed.
l Only received messages on the connected Bluetooth phone can
be displayed.
l The text of the message is not displayed while driving.
switch on the steering wheel to adjust the message readout
volume.
REPLYING TO A MESSAGE (QUICK REPLY)

15 messages have already been stored.
1.
2.
3.

Select the desired message from the list.
Select Quick Message (Quick Message).
Select to have messages read out.

To cancel this function, select Stop (Stop).
When Automatic Message Readout (Automatic
Message Readout) is set to on, messages will be
automatically read out. (P.142)
Select to make a call to the sender.
*: E-mail only
130
docstructure.indb
130
2016/03/30
11:16:02
4.
5.
Select the desired message.

Select Send (Send).
While the message is being sent, a sending message
EDITING QUICK REPLY MESSAGES

1.
Select Quick Message (Quick Message).
NOTE
l To reset the editquick reply messages, select
(Default).
Default
*1: Without navigation function

4
PHONE
l Quick Message 1 ( I'm driving right now. I will call you back later.
(I'm driving right now. I will call you back later.)*1 or
I am driving and will arrive in approximately [ETA] minutes. (I am
driving and will arrive in approximately [ETA] minutes.)*2)
cannot be edited. [ETA] will automatically be replaced with the
estimated time of arrival on the confirm message screen.
If there are waypoints set, [ETA] to the next waypoint will be
shown.
If there is no route currently set in the navigation system, Quick
Message 1 cannot be selected.
CALLING THE MESSAGE SENDER
2.
Select
edit.
3.
Select OK (OK) when editing is completed.
corresponding to the desired message to
Calls can be made to an e-mail/SMS/MMS message

senders phone number.
This operation can be performed while driving.
131
docstructure.indb
131
2016/03/30
11:16:03
CALLING FROM E-MAIL/SMS/MMS MESSAGE

DISPLAY
1.
2.
3.
3.
Select the text area.
4.
Select

Select
.
corresponding to the desired number to call.
Identified phone numbers contained in the message

are displayed.
5.
If there are 2 or more phone numbers, select the
desired number.
4.
NOTE
l A series of numbers may be recognized as a phone number.
Additionally, some phone numbers may not be recognized, such
as those for other countries.
CALLING FROM A NUMBER WITHIN A MESSAGE
CALLING FROM THE INCOMING MESSAGE

SCREEN
Calls can be made to a number identified in a messages

text area.
P.129
1.
2.

132
docstructure.indb
132
2016/03/30
11:16:03
SETUP
SETUP
PHONE/MESSAGE SETTINGS
1.
Select
PHONE/MESSAGE SETTINGS SCREEN
2.
3.
4.
Information
Page
Connect phone
179
Select Phone (Phone).
Sound settings
134
Select the item to be set.
Contact/call history settings
135
Messaging settings
142
Phone display settings
143
PHONE
No.
133
docstructure.indb
133
2016/03/30
11:16:04
SETUP
DISPLAYING THE PHONE/MESSAGE SETTINGS

SCREEN IN A DIFFERENT WAY
1.
2.
3.
Select the desired item to be set.

Select
Sound Settings (Sound Settings) SCREEN

The call and ringtone volume can be adjusted. A ringtone
can be selected.
1.
Display the Phone/Message Settings (Phone/Message

2.
Select Sound Settings (Sound Settings).
No.
Function
Select to set the desired ringtone.
Select
or
to adjust the ringtone volume.
Select
volume.
or
to adjust the message readout
Select to set the desired incoming SMS/MMS tone.

Select
or
tone volume.
to adjust the incoming SMS/MMS
134
docstructure.indb
134
2016/03/30
11:16:05
SETUP
No.
3.
Function
Select to set the desired incoming e-mail tone.

Select
volume.
or
to adjust the incoming e-mail tone
Select
or
to adjust the default volume of the
other partys voice.
The contact can be transferred from a Bluetooth phone

to the system. The contact also can be added, edited and
deleted.
The call history can be deleted and contact and speed dial
can be changed.
1.

2.
Select

History Settings).
(Contact/Call
PHONE
Contact/Call History Settings (Contact/Call

History Settings) SCREEN
No.
Function
Page
For PBAP compatible Bluetooth phones, select

to set automatic contact/history transfer on/off.
When set to on, the phones contact data and
history are automatically transferred.
Select to update contacts from the connected

phone.
136
Select to sort contacts by the first name or last

name field.
135
docstructure.indb
135
2016/03/30
11:16:06
SETUP
No.
Function
Page
Select to add contacts to the speed dial list.
140
Select to delete contacts from the speed dial

list.
141
Select to set the transferred contact image

display on/off.
Select to clear contacts from the call history.
UPDATE CONTACTS FROM PHONE

Operation methods differ between PBAP compatible and
OPP compatible Bluetooth phones.
If your cellular phone is neither PBAP nor OPP compatible,
the contacts cannot be transferred.
NOTE
Select to add new contacts to the contact list.
137
Select to edit contacts in the contact list.
138
l During the smartphone Bluetooth connection process, only

individual contacts will be transferred from the smartphone to
the system. Contact group folders that have been created on the
smartphone will not be transferred to the system.
Select to delete contacts from the contact list.
139
n FOR PBAP COMPATIBLE Bluetooth PHONES
*: For PBAP compatible Bluetooth phones, this function is available when

Automatic Contact/History Transfer (Automatic Contact/History Transfer)
is set to off. (P.135)
NOTE
l Contact data is managed independently for every registered
phone. When one phone is connected, another phones
registered data cannot be read.
1.
Update Contacts from Phone

Contacts from Phone).
Select
(Update
Contacts are transferred automatically.
2.
Check that a confirmation screen is displayed when the

operation is complete.
This operation may be unnecessary depending on the
type of cellular phone.
If another Bluetooth device is connected when
transferring contact data, depending on the phone,
the connected Bluetooth device may need to be
disconnected.
Depending on the type of Bluetooth phone being
connected, it may be necessary to perform additional
steps on the phone.
136
docstructure.indb
136
2016/03/30
11:16:06
SETUP
n FOR OPP COMPATIBLE Bluetooth PHONES
REGISTERING A NEW CONTACT TO THE

CONTACT LIST
1.
Select
2.
Transfer the contact data to the system using a

Bluetooth phone.
Update Contacts from Phone

Contacts from Phone).
(Update
This operation may be unnecessary depending on the

type of cellular phone.
Up to 4 numbers per person can be registered. For PBAP

compatible Bluetooth phones, this function is available when
Automatic Contact/History Transfer (Automatic Contact/
History Transfer) is set to off. (P.135)
To cancel this function, select Cancel (Cancel).
NOTE

l During the smartphone Bluetooth connection process, only

individual contacts will be transferred from the smartphone to
the system. Contact group folders that have been created on the
smartphone will not be transferred to the system.
XUpdating the contacts in a different way (from the

Call History (Call History) screen)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Select Update Contact (Update Contact).

select a contact not yet registered in the contact list.
Select a phone type for the phone number.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
PHONE
3.
New contact data can be registered.
Select New Contact (New Contact).

Enter the name and then select OK (OK).
Enter the phone number and then select OK (OK).
Select the phone type for the phone number.
To add another number to this contact, select Yes
(Yes).
137
docstructure.indb
137
2016/03/30
11:16:07
SETUP
n REGISTERING A NEW CONTACT IN A DIFFERENT

WAY (FROM THE Call History (Call History)
SCREEN)
3.
Select
number.
corresponding to the desired name or
This function is available for OPP compatible Bluetooth

phones.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Select Add to Contacts (Add to Contacts).

select a contact not yet registered in the contact list.
Follow the steps in REGISTERING A NEW CONTACT
TO THE CONTACT LIST from STEP 2. (P.137)
EDITING THE CONTACT DATA

For PBAP compatible Bluetooth phones, this function
is available when Automatic Contact/History Transfer
(Automatic Contact/History Transfer) is set to off.
(P.135)
1.
2.
Select Edit Contact (Edit Contact).

XFor editing the name
4.

XFor editing the number
4.

n EDITING THE CONTACT IN A DIFFERENT WAY (FROM

THE Contact Details (Contact Details) SCREEN)
1.
2.

Select the Contacts (Contacts), Call History (Call
History) tab or the Speed Dial (Speed Dial) tab and
then select the desired contact.
138
docstructure.indb
138
2016/03/30
11:16:07
SETUP
3.
Select Edit Contact (Edit Contact).
3.
Select Yes
appears.
(Yes) when the confirmation screen
NOTE
l Multiple data can be selected and deleted at the same time.
n DELETING THE CONTACT IN A DIFFERENT WAY

(FROM THE Contact Details (Contact Details)
SCREEN)
E-mail Addresses (E-mail Addresses): Select to
display all registered e-mail addresses for the contact.
Follow the steps in EDITING THE CONTACT DATA
from STEP 3. (P.138)
DELETING THE CONTACT DATA

For PBAP compatible Bluetooth phones, this function
is available when Automatic Contact/History Transfer
(Automatic Contact/History Transfer) is set to off.
(P.135)
1.
2.
Select Delete Contacts (Delete Contacts).

then select the desired contact.
3.
4.
Select Delete Contact (Delete Contact).

Select Yes
appears.
PHONE
4.
1.
2.
NOTE
l When a Bluetooth phone is deleted, the contact data will be
deleted at the same time.
Select the desired contact and then select Delete

(Delete).
139
docstructure.indb
139
2016/03/30
11:16:08
SETUP
SPEED DIAL LIST SETTING

Up to 15 contacts (maximum of 4 numbers per contact) can
be registered in the speed dial list.
XWhen 15 contacts have already been registered to

the speed dial list
1.
When 15 contacts have already been registered to

the speed dial list, a registered contact needs to be
replaced.
Select Yes (Yes) when the confirmation screen
appears to replace a contact.
2.
Select the contact to be replaced.
3.

n REGISTERING THE CONTACTS IN THE SPEED DIAL

LIST
1.
2.
Select Add Speed Dial (Add Speed Dial).

Select the desired contact to add to the speed dial list.
Dimmed contacts are already stored as a speed dial.
3.

XRegistering contacts in the speed dial list in a

different way (from the Contacts (Contacts) screen)
1.
2.

Select the Contacts (Contacts) tab.
140
docstructure.indb
140
2016/03/30
11:16:09
SETUP
3.
Select
at the beginning of the desired contact list
name to be registered in the speed dial list.
n DELETING THE CONTACTS IN THE SPEED DIAL LIST
1.
2.
Select Remove Speed Dial (Remove Speed Dial).

Select the desired contacts and then select Remove
(Remove).
When selected,
is changed to
, and the
contact is registered in the speed dial list.
3.
Select Yes
appears.

1.
2.
4.
(Contacts) tab or the

Contacts
Call History (Call History) tab and then select the
desired contact.
XDeleting contacts in the speed dial list in a different

way (from the Contacts (Contacts) screen)
3.
4.
Select Add Speed Dial (Add Speed Dial).
Select
the

1.
2.
PHONE
XRegistering contacts in the speed dial list in a

different way (from the Contact Details (Contact
Details) screen)

Select the Contacts (Contacts) tab.
141
docstructure.indb
141
2016/03/30
11:16:10
SETUP
3.
Select
at the beginning of the contact list name to
be deleted from the speed dial list.
When selected,
is changed to
is deleted from the list.
Messaging Settings (Messaging Settings)

SCREEN
1.

2.
3.
Select Messaging Settings (Messaging Settings).

, and the data
XDeleting contacts in the speed dial list in a different

way (from the Contact Details (Contact Details)
screen)
1.
2.

then select the desired contact to delete.
3.
4.
Select Remove Speed Dial (Remove Speed Dial).

Select Yes
appears.
5.

142
docstructure.indb
142
2016/03/30
11:16:11
SETUP
No.
Function
No.
Select to change the incoming e-mail display.

Full Screen (Full Screen): When an e-mail is
received, the incoming e-mail display screen is the
displayed and can be operated on the screen.
Select to set automatic message transfer on/off.

Select to set automatic message readout on/off.
Select to set the SMS/MMS notification popup on/off.
Drop-Down (Drop-Down): When an e-mail is

received, a message is displayed on the upper side of
the screen.
Select to set the e-mail notification popup on/off.

Select to set adding the vehicle signature to outgoing
messages on/off.
Select to set display of messaging account names on

the inbox tab on/off.
When set to on, messaging account names used on the
cellular phone will be displayed.
4
PHONE
Select to set updating message read status on phone

on/off.
Select to change the incoming SMS/MMS display.
Full Screen (Full Screen): When an SMS/MMS
message is received, the incoming SMS/MMS display
screen is displayed and can be operated on the screen.
Drop-Down (Drop-Down): When an SMS/MMS
message is received, a message is displayed on the
upper side of the screen.
Function
Phone Display Settings (Phone Display

Settings) SCREEN
1.

2.
Select
Phone Display Settings
Settings).
(Phone
Display
143
docstructure.indb
143
2016/03/30
11:16:12
SETUP
3.
No.
Function
Select to change the incoming call display.
Full Screen (Full Screen): When a call is received,
the hands-free screen is displayed and can be operated
on the screen.
Drop-Down (Drop-Down): A message is displayed
on the upper side of the screen.
Select to set display of the contact/history transfer
completion message on/off.
144
docstructure.indb
144
2016/03/30
11:16:12
APPS
145
docstructure.indb
145
2016/03/30
11:16:12
BEFORE USING THE APPLICATION

Precautions to be aware of when using the application are
shown below.
In this chapter, iPhone or Android devices will be referred to
as a smartphone.
WARNING
l Do not connect or operate the smartphone while driving.
l Be sure to park the vehicle in a safe location before
connecting or operating the smartphone.
CAUTION
l Do not leave your smartphone in the car. In particular, high
temperatures inside the vehicle may damage the smartphone.
smartphone while it is connected as this may damage the
l If connecting your smartphone via USB, do not insert foreign
objects into the USB port as this may damage the smartphone
or its terminal.
NOTE
l Depending on the application, certain functions are not available
while driving for reasons of safety.
l In order to maximize signal reception, performance and precision
of the smartphone, please ensure the smartphone is placed as
close to the system as possible, while ensuring it is stowed and
secure while driving.
l When connecting your smartphone via USB, use the original
cables provided with your smartphone or equivalent third-party
(certified) cables.
l When the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position, the
battery of the connected smartphone is charged.
l If connecting your smartphone via USB, smartphone may not
be recognized when the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON
position. In this case, remove the smartphone and reconnect it.
l The accuracy of the displayed information or the signal reception
performance depends on the smartphone or the connected
device, and its wireless connection.
l For operating the smartphone, see the instruction manual that
comes with it.
l Follow the specific operation procedures for the smartphone
application.
l When connecting the device via Bluetooth, the communication
speed may become slower than via USB.
146
docstructure.indb
146
2016/03/30
11:16:12
SETTINGS REQUIRED TO USE THE

APPLICATION
ABOUT APP-BASED CONNECTED

CONTENT
In order to use the application on this system, the

application must be installed on the smartphone.
Requirements for using the connected content services of

the application on this system.
Search and download the application from your

smartphone app.
The latest version of the system is compatible with

connected content application(s) for the smartphones,
and is downloaded to your smartphone.
iPhone: App Store via iTunes

Android device: Google Play Store
Create an account and login to the application on the
smartphone.
NOTE
A smartphone data plan: If the data plan for your

smartphone does not provide for unlimited data
usage, additional charges from your carrier may apply
for accessing app-based connected content via 3G,
4G, Wi-Fi, or 4G LTE wireless networks.
Connection to the internet via 3G, 4G, Wi-Fi, or 4G
LTE networks.
5
APPS
l Please use the latest version of the application.
A current account with a wireless content service

provider.
NOTE
l Changes to product specifications may result in differences
between the content of the manual and features of the product.
l Be careful not to exceed the data usage limits for your
smartphone. Doing so will result in additional data usage
charges from your phone carrier.
147
docstructure.indb
147
2016/03/30
11:16:12
NOTE
NOTE
l Limitations:
Access to app-based connected content will depend on the
availability of wireless cellular and/or Wi-Fi network coverage
for the purpose of allowing your smartphone to connect to the
internet.
Service availability may be geographically limited by region.
Consult the wireless connected content service provider for
additional information.
Ability of this product to access connected content is subject
to change without notice and could be affected by any of the
following: compatibility issues with future firmware versions
of the smartphone; compatibility issues with future versions
of the connected content application(s) for the smartphone;
changes to or discontinuation of the connected content
application(s) or service by its provider.
l Since some applications use signals from GPS satellites and
wireless communication lines, they may not work properly in the
following locations.
In tunnels
In underground parking lots
Outside wireless communication range, such as some
countryside areas
Where the wireless communication network is congested, or
where communications are restricted
l Depending on the circumstances and environment, the signal
may be weak or not be received. In such cases, an error may
occur.
l Communication and phone call charges for smartphones should

be paid by the wireless subscriber.
l If you lose the data in a smartphone or other device while using
it with the system, no compensation will be given for the lost
data.
l Fuji Heavy Industries does not guarantee content provided by
the application.
l The application may not work due to factors on smartphones,
smartphone applications or stations. Fuji Heavy Industries
accepts no responsibility for this.
148
docstructure.indb
148
2016/03/30
11:16:12
SUBARU STARLINK
SUBARU STARLINK
SUBARU STARLINK
4.
Check that the SUBARU STARLINK disclaimer

(SUBARU STARLINK disclaimer) screen is displayed.
The SUBARU STARLINK function allows the system to link

with a smartphone using Bluetooth.
When connecting iPhone or Android devices with the
SUBARU STARLINK application installed, you can control
SUBARU STARLINK content through the system.
To use the SUBARU STARLINK application, connect
your iPhone or Android device via Bluetooth.
When using the application, read the precautions indicated
in BEFORE USING THE APPLICATION. (P.146)
1.
Run the SUBARU STARLINK application on your

smartphone.
2.
Connect your smartphone by utilizing the Bluetooth

connection.
For details about registering or connecting your
smartphone: P.174
3.
Select SUBARU STARLINK (SUBARU STARLINK) on

the APPS (APPS) screen.
l There may be times when SUBARU STARLINK (SUBARU

STARLINK) does not appear immediately when the ignition
switch is set in the ACC or ON position. If so, please wait.
5
APPS
USING SUBARU STARLINK APPLICATION
NOTE
l When using the SUBARU STARLINK function, a disclaimer
screen will be displayed. Be sure to fully read the contents
before using the function.
ABOUT THE SUPPORTED DEVICES

iPhone: iOS 4.3.5 or later
Android: Android 4.0 or later
149
docstructure.indb
149
2016/03/30
11:16:13
MirrorLink
MirrorLink
MirrorLink
OVERVIEW
The MirrorLinkTM function allows smartphone content to be

operated via the system.
XControl panel
To use the MirrorLinkTM application, connect your

Android device to the USB port.
Depending on differences between models or software
version etc., some models might be incompatible with this
system.
This function is not available if the smartphone is
not compliant with MirrorLink of Car Connectivity
Consortium.
No.
USING MirrorLink
TM
1.
2.
APPLICATION
Function
Run the MirrorLinkTM application on your smartphone.

Connect your smartphone to the USB port.
For details about connecting your smartphone:
P.42
3.
Select MirrorLinkTM (MirrorLink) on the APPS

(APPS) screen.
150
docstructure.indb
150
2016/03/30
11:16:13
MirrorLink
XControl screen
No.
Function
Displays software buttons that function as the buttons
on the smartphone.
Select to change the other audio source (Radio, Disc
etc.).
NOTE
l This function cannot be used while USB audio, video or photo is
in use.
l The video displayed on the screen may differ from that displayed
on the smartphone.
l It may not be possible to use certain applications while driving.
<Application list screen>

*: The displayed screen will differ depending on the connected smartphone.
No.
Function
Select to choose a MirrorLink device.
Select to return the application list screen.
Your smartphone must support the MirrorLinkTM

version 1.1, 1.0 function.
Information on MirrorLinkTM compatible phones
and MirrorLinkTM enabled apps is available on the
MirrorLinkTM web site (www.mirrorlink.com).
APPS
<Operation screen*>
Available operations will differ depending on your

smartphone. Refer to your smartphone owner's
manual, or consult the manufacturer.
151
docstructure.indb
151
2016/03/30
11:16:14
ahaTM by HARMAN
ahaTM by HARMAN
ahaTM by HARMAN
aha is a cloud-based application that connects to the system
and gives you access to your favorite web content safely
and easily. There are over 40,000 stations spanning internet
radio, personalized music, audiobooks, Facebook, Twitter,
restaurant and hotel searches, weather and more. For more
about aha, go to the aha site (http://www.aharadio.com).
OVERVIEW
XControl panel
When connecting iPhone or Android devices with the aha

application installed, you can control, view, and hear aha
content through the system.
To use the aha application, connect your iPhone to the
USB port, or connect your Android device via Bluetooth.
With navigation function: You may be also display POI
information from the aha application on the map screen and
route to these POIs.
No.
Function
Turn to display the next/previous content item.
Select to display the next/previous content item.
Select to display the APPS (APPS) screen.
152
docstructure.indb
152
2016/03/30
11:16:14
ahaTM by HARMAN
XControl screen
No.
Function
Station list
Select to display the station operation screen.
Displays station name.
Select to display the top screen.
<Top screen>
Station operation screen buttons. (P.156)

Select to change the station operation screen buttons.
Select to display the content item list.
No.
Function
Select to display a list of preset stations.
A maximum of 35 entries can be displayed in this list.
Select to display a list of stations using the location
information.
A maximum of 10 entries can be displayed in this list.
APPS
<Station operation screen>
Displays cover art.
NOTE
l When you switch to other modes with the aha application
activated and then turn the system Off/On with the smartphone
device still connected, the aha mode will start instead of
the last mode used. If you do not want to start the aha mode
automatically, turn off the aha application on the smartphone.
153
docstructure.indb
153
2016/03/30
11:16:15
ahaTM by HARMAN
NOTE
l Top 35 entries in the preset station list on the smartphone are
displayed. When there are more than 35 entries in the preset
station list, change the order of the entries in the list on the
smartphone. You can change the priority of your preset stations
within the aha application (after disconnected from this system)
to modify the station list shown on the screen. Please see your
smartphone aha application Edit Presets to modify this list.
l If there are multiple audio files stored on your iPhone, it may
take some time until playback starts.
l Playback may be intermittent when you switch to streaming
Bluetooth audio from aha on your smartphone device.
ABOUT THE SUPPORTED DEVICES FOR aha

iPhone: iOS 5.0 or later
Android: Android2.2 or later
NOTE
l Note that the warranty does not apply if an unsupported iPhone
is connected.
l The available functions may vary depending on the type of
Android device.
USING aha APPLICATION

If you connect a smartphone to this system after starting
a supported aha application on the smartphone, you can
display and operate the aha application displayed on the
smartphone on the system screen.
1.
2.
Run the aha application on your smartphone.

Connect the iPhone to the USB port, or connect the
Android device by utilizing the Bluetooth connection.
For details about connecting an iPhone: P.42
For details about registering or connecting an Android
device: P.174
154
docstructure.indb
154
2016/03/30
11:16:15
ahaTM by HARMAN
3.
4.
Main functions of the station operation screen button:

P.156
The aha top screen can also be displayed by

selecting aha (aha) on the Select Audio Source
(Select Audio Source) screen.
For details on the services or the operations, check

the aha site (http://www.aharadio.com) on the
internet.
Check that the top screen is displayed.
Select the desired station.

Check that the station operation screen is displayed.
NOTE
l When iPhone and Android devices are connected at the same
time, select the smartphone which you want to use on the
General Settings (General Settings) screen. (P.188)
l The following operations are not available on this system.
Perform these operations on the smartphone.
Add/Reorder/Delete stations
Log in to Facebook/Twitter (When not logged in, login will
be required by the station. It is necessary to do so when the
device is disconnected from the system.)
l For the aha function, the following touch screen gestures are not
available.
Double touch with one finger
Double touch with two fingers
l The audio system will turn off when the aha application is closed
on the iPhone and/or Android device.
5
APPS
5.
6.
For Android devices: Select aha (aha) on the APPS

(APPS) screen.
155
docstructure.indb
155
2016/03/30
11:16:15
ahaTM by HARMAN
STATION OPERATION SCREEN BUTTONS

Button
Function
Select to refresh the content item information in
the current station.
Function
Select to start playback.
Select to rewind the current content item for 15

seconds.
Select to pause playback.
Select to fast forward the current content item for

30 seconds.
Select to stop playback.

Select to upload Like information to the
application server. To cancel Like information
that is being uploaded to the server, select this
button again.
Button
NOTE
l The button display will vary depending on each station or content
item.
Select to upload Dislike information to the

application server. To cancel Dislike information
that is being uploaded to the server, select this
button again.
SHOUT FUNCTION
Select to display the POI information on the map

screen and set it as a destination. (P.218)
1.
Your voice can be sent to the application server.

Select
Select to call the registered number.

Select to upload your current location to your
social network.
Select to send your voice to the application
server. (P.156)
156
docstructure.indb
156
2016/03/30
11:16:16
ahaTM by HARMAN
2.
3.
Check that the countdown screen is displayed.
4.
Cancel (Cancel): Select to cancel shout function.
Select Send (Send).
Confirmation (Confirmation): Select to confirm the

saved voice.
Record your voice and then select Save (Save).
Try Again (Try Again): Select to record your voice

again.
Check that sending is completed.
APPS
5.

A maximum of 30 seconds can be recorded.
157
docstructure.indb
157
2016/03/30
11:16:17
Pandora
Pandora
Pandora
Pandora is free personalized radio that offers effortless and
endless music enjoyment and discovery.
To use the Pandora application, connect your iPhone
to the USB port, or connect your Android device via
Bluetooth.
Depending on differences between models or software
version etc., some models might be incompatible with this
system.
This function is not available if the Pandora application has
not been installed on the smartphone.
OVERVIEW
The Pandora operation screen can be reached by the
following methods:
Connect the iPhone to the USB port, or connect the
Android device by utilizing the Bluetooth connection.
For details about connecting an iPhone: P.42
For details about registering or connecting an
Android device: P.174
Select Pandora (Pandora) on the Select Audio
Source (Select Audio Source) screen. (P.55)
Select Pandora (Pandora) on the APPS (APPS)
screen. (P.23)
NOTE
l Pandora is available in the United States, Australia, and New
Zealand.
158
docstructure.indb
158
2016/03/30
11:16:17
Pandora
XControl panel
No.
Function
5
APPS

Select
to skip to the next track.
Select and hold to rate the track currently playing as
Like or Dislike.
159
docstructure.indb
159
2016/03/30
11:16:18
Pandora
XControl screen
No.
Function
Select to skip to the next track.
Select to display a station list.
Displays cover art.

iPhone: iOS 5.0 or later
Android: Differs with mobile device used
No.
Function
Shows progress.
Select to rate the track currently playing as Like or
Dislike.
Select to bookmark the track currently playing.
160
docstructure.indb
160
2016/03/30
11:16:18
INFORMATION
161
docstructure.indb
161
2016/03/30
11:16:18
USEFUL INFORMATION
USEFUL INFORMATION
SiriusXM RADIO DATA SERVICE*

*: SiriusXM U.S. satellite and data services are available only in the 48
contiguous USA and DC. SiriusXM satellite service is also available in
Canada; see www.siriusxm.ca.
Data service information, which is comprised of traffic

information, sports information, weather information, stock
information and fuel information, can be received via the
SiriusXM Radio.
To receive the data service information in the vehicle, a
subscription to the SiriusXM Satellite Radio Service is
necessary. (P.70)
DISPLAYING SPORTS INFORMATION

Sports information can be received via the SiriusXM
Satellite Radio Service.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Select Sports (Sports).
Select OK (OK).
Select the desired sports to be displayed.
Select Select (Select) next to the item to be displayed.
Check that sports information is displayed.
Refer to TRAFFIC INFORMATION for details on traffic

information*. (P.208)
Content set to use the SiriusXM Satellite Radio Service is
reset when personal information is initialized.
NOTE
l The time displayed in the upper right of the data service
information screen on models without navigation function is
American Eastern Time.
No.
Function
Select to change the displayed information.
162
docstructure.indb
162
2016/03/30
11:16:19
USEFUL INFORMATION
No.
Function
Select to switch to an audio broadcast while information
during a game is being displayed.
The scores are compared, and the affiliate with the
highest score is displayed in yellow.
Select to set which sports information is displayed.
Select to set your favorite affiliate. (P.163)
1.
2.
3.
Select Edit Favorites (Edit Favorites).

Select the desired sports.

Select Select (Select) next to the item you want to set
as a favorite.
n DELETING FAVORITE
1.
2.
REGISTERING FAVORITE
1.
2.
Select Change (Change) next to the item to be edited.
Select Delete (Delete) next to the item to be deleted.

Select Yes
appears.
DISPLAYING WEATHER INFORMATION

Weather information can be received via the SiriusXM
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Select OK (OK).
INFORMATION
Select to update with the latest information.
n CHANGING THE FAVORITE
Select Weather (Weather).

NOTE
l Up to 10 affiliates can be registered.
Select the desired state name.

Select the desired city name.
Check that weather information is displayed.
163
docstructure.indb
163
2016/03/30
11:16:20
USEFUL INFORMATION
3.
Weather forecast icons
Check that weather information is displayed.

Display
none
Information
No Data Available
Unknown Precip
Isolated Thunderstorms
Scattered Thunderstorms
No.
Function
Select to switch the timing of the displayed forecast.
Items such as the weather forecast, forecast
temperature or highest temperature (orange)/lowest
temperature (blue), and chance of precipitation are
displayed.
Scattered Thunderstorms (night)

Severe Thunderstorms
Thunderstorms
Rain
Select to display alert list.

Select to set the forecast region. Follow the steps in
XWithout navigation function from STEP 4.
Light Rain
Select to update the forecast location.
Heavy Rain

Scattered Showers
Showers
164
docstructure.indb
164
2016/03/30
11:16:21
USEFUL INFORMATION
Display
Information
Display
Information
Moderate Snow
Snow
Drizzle
Heavy Snow
Freezing Drizzle
Scattered Snow Showers (night)
Freezing Rain
Mixed Rain And Hail
Blowing Snow
Wintry Mix
Mixed Rain And Snow
Blizzard
INFORMATION
Scattered Showers (night)
6
Mixed Rain And Sleet
Sandstorm
Hail
Ice Pellets
Blowing Dust
Sleet
Dust
Flurries
Light Snow
Scattered Snow Showers
Snow Showers
Foggy
Moderate Fog
165
docstructure.indb
165
2016/03/30
11:16:21
USEFUL INFORMATION
Display
Information
Display
Information
Light Fog
Sunny
Heavy Fog
Mostly Sunny
Mist
Clear (night)
Hazy
Mostly Clear (night)
Smoky
Partly cloudy
Blustery
Partly cloudy (night)
Windy
Mostly cloudy
Cold
Mostly cloudy (night)
Hot
Cloudy
166
docstructure.indb
166
2016/03/30
11:16:22
USEFUL INFORMATION
Display
Information
6.
Check that stock information is displayed.
Tropical Storm
Hurricane
No.
Stock information can be received via the SiriusXM

Select to delete stocks. (P.167)
Select OK (OK).
Select to add stocks.

Up to 30 stocks can be registered.
Select Stocks (Stocks).

Function
Changes in brand, stock price and variation are
displayed.
Variations greater than zero are displayed in white and
variations less than zero are displayed in red.
DISPLAYING STOCKS INFORMATION
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
INFORMATION
Funnel Cloud
Tornado
DELETING STOCKS
1.
2.
3.
Select Delete Stocks (Delete Stocks).

Select the item to be deleted and then select Delete
(Delete).
Select Yes
appears.
167
docstructure.indb
167
2016/03/30
11:16:22
USEFUL INFORMATION
DISPLAYING FUEL INFORMATION

(NOT AVAILABLE IN CANADA)
No.
*
Fuel information can be received via the SiriusXM Satellite

Radio Service.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Select OK (OK).
Select to display information about the gas station and

to set* it as a destination. (P.169)
The fuel price on the present day is displayed in white.
The fuel price one day ago is displayed in light gray and
two days ago is displayed in dark gray.
Select to set the fuel type. (P.169)
Select the desired state name.
Select to set the search region. Follow the steps in

XWithout navigation function from STEP 4.
Select the desired city name.

Check that fuel information is displayed.
3.
Check that fuel information is displayed.
Select to sort gas station by Distance from the current

position.
Select to sort gas station by price.
Select Fuel (Fuel).

Function
Select to update the current position.
NOTE
l Up to 20 gas stations can be registered.
l The distance and direction from the current position are
displayed only when the system is equipped with the navigation
function.
168
docstructure.indb
168
2016/03/30
11:16:23
USEFUL INFORMATION
SETTING FUEL TYPE
1.
2.
Select Fuel Type (Fuel Type).

Select the desired fuel type.
VEHICLE MONITOR
DISPLAYING VEHICLE MONITOR
SETTING GAS STATION AS DESTINATION
Vehicle information such as the vehicle mode, acceleration,

and engine oil temperature can be displayed.
1.
2.
3.
1.
2.
3.
Select the desired nearby gas station.

Follow the steps in SEARCH OPERATION from
STEP 5. (P.210)
Select Vehicle Monitor (Vehicle Monitor).

Check that the Vehicle Monitor (Vehicle Monitor)
INFORMATION
With navigation function: The system is reset if the

map SD card is removed during use, and the Elapsed
Time is also reset (0:00).
169
docstructure.indb
169
2016/03/30
11:16:24
USEFUL INFORMATION
ECO MONITOR
DISPLAYING ECO MONITOR
Three items of information can be displayed from remaining
travel distance (range), instantaneous fuel consumption,
average interval fuel consumption, and lifetime fuel
consumption.
1.
2.
3.

Select Eco Monitor (Eco Monitor).
DISPLAYING FUEL HISTORY

The average fuel consumption and instantaneous fuel
consumption history can be displayed.
1.
2.
3.
4.

Select Fuel History (Fuel History).
Check that the Eco Monitor (Eco Monitor) screen is
displayed.
Check that the Eco Monitor (Eco Monitor) screen is

displayed.
No.
With navigation function: The system is reset if the

map SD card is removed during use, and the Elapsed
Time is also reset (0:00).
Name
Average fuel consumption value
Average fuel consumption per unit time
170
docstructure.indb
170
2016/03/30
11:16:24
USEFUL INFORMATION
CUSTOMIZE ECO MONITOR
FUEL HISTORY SETTINGS
Three items can be selected and displayed from remaining

travel distance (range), instantaneous fuel consumption,
average interval fuel consumption, and lifetime fuel
consumption.
The scale of the time axis used to display Eco history can
be changed.
1.
1.
Display
(P.28)
Display
(P.28)
Select Info (Info).
2.
3.
4.
Select Info (Info).
2.
3.
4.
5.
the
SETTINGS
(SETTINGS)
screen.
Select Customize Eco Monitor

Monitor).
(Customize
Eco
5.
Select the area to be displayed from the left, right, or

center display area.
6.
SETTINGS
(SETTINGS)
screen.
INFORMATION
the
Select Fuel History Settings (Fuel History Settings).

If an item displayed in another area is selected,

the display area changes. The same items are not
displayed simultaneously.
171
docstructure.indb
171
2016/03/30
11:16:25
USEFUL INFORMATION
RESETTING THE LIFETIME FUEL CONSUMPTION

The lifetime fuel consumption can be reset.
1.
Display
(P.28)
2.
3.
4.
Select Info (Info).
5.
Select Yes (Yes).
the
SETTINGS
(SETTINGS)
screen.

Select Lifetime Fuel Cons Reset (Lifetime Fuel Cons
Reset).
172
docstructure.indb
172
2016/03/30
11:16:25
7
7
SETTINGS
173
docstructure.indb
173
2016/03/30
11:16:25
Bluetooth SETTINGS
Bluetooth SETTINGS
REGISTERING/CONNECTING
Bluetooth DEVICE
1.
Turn the Bluetooth connection setting of your cellular

phone on.
This function is not available when Bluetooth
connection setting of your cellular phone is set to off.
2.
The Bluetooth word mark and logos are registered
trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
REGISTERING A Bluetooth PHONE FOR

THE FIRST TIME
To use the hands-free system, it is necessary to register a
Bluetooth phone with the system.
Select
to display the phone top screen.
Operations up to this point can also be performed by

pressing the
2.
Select
and select PHONE (PHONE) to display
the phone top screen.
Operations up to this point can also be performed by
pressing the
3.
Select Yes (Yes) to register a phone.
Once the phone has been registered, it is possible to use

the hands-free system.
For details about registering a Bluetooth device: P.180
174
docstructure.indb
174
2016/03/30
11:16:26
Bluetooth SETTINGS
4.
When this screen is displayed, search for the device

name displayed on this screen on the screen of your
Bluetooth device.
XFor PBAP compatible Bluetooth phones
6.
Yes (Yes): Transfer contacts from cellular phone.
For details about operating the Bluetooth device, see

the manual that comes with it.
Register the Bluetooth device using your Bluetooth
device.
A PIN-code is not required for SSP (Secure Simple
Pairing) compatible Bluetooth devices. Depending
on the type of Bluetooth device being connected, a
message confirming registration may be displayed on
the Bluetooth devices screen. Respond and operate
the Bluetooth device according to the confirmation
message.
No (No): Do not transfer contacts from cellular

phone.
NOTE
l The system waits for connection requests from the registered
device.
l At this stage, Bluetooth functions are not yet available.
l If an error message is displayed, follow the guidance on the
screen and try again.
7.
SETTINGS
5.
To cancel the registration, select Cancel (Cancel).
Select OK (OK).
175
docstructure.indb
175
2016/03/30
11:16:27
Bluetooth SETTINGS
XFor OPP compatible Bluetooth phones
6.
8.
Select OK (OK).
Transfer (Transfer): Select to transfer contacts from

the connected cellular phone.
NOTE
l The system waits for connection requests from the registered
device.
l If an error message is displayed, follow the guidance on the
screen and try again.
7.
Select
, or select
Add (Add): Select to add a new contact manually.

Cancel (Cancel): Select to cancel transfer.
and then select
PHONE (PHONE) to display the telephone top screen.
176
docstructure.indb
176
2016/03/30
11:16:27
Bluetooth SETTINGS
The screen can also be displayed by selecting

followed by AUDIO (AUDIO).
If the audio control screen appears, select Source
(Source) on the audio screen, or press the AUDIO/
TUNE knob again.
REGISTERING A Bluetooth AUDIO DEVICE

FOR THE FIRST TIME
To use the Bluetooth Audio, it is necessary to register an
audio device with the system.
Once the player has been registered, it is possible to use
the Bluetooth Audio.
3.
4.
5.
Select Bluetooth Audio (Bluetooth Audio).

Select Yes (Yes) to register an audio device.
Follow the steps in REGISTERING A Bluetooth
DEVICE from STEP 2. (P.180)
For details about registering a Bluetooth device: P.180
1.
Turn the Bluetooth connection setting of your audio

device on.
SETTINGS
This function is not available when the Bluetooth

connection setting of your audio device is set to off.
2.
Press the AUDIO/TUNE knob.
177
docstructure.indb
177
2016/03/30
11:16:28
Bluetooth SETTINGS
PROFILES
This system supports the following services.
Bluetooth Device
Bluetooth Phone/
Bluetooth Device
Spec.
Bluetooth Specification
Profile
HFP (Hands-Free Profile)
Function
Registering a Bluetooth
device
Function
Hands-free system
OPP (Object Push Profile)

Bluetooth Phone
PBAP (Phone Book

Access Profile)
Requirements
Recommendations
Ver. 1.1
Ver. 3.0 +EDR
Requirements
Recommendations
Ver. 1.0
Ver. 1.6
Ver. 1.1
Ver. 1.2
Ver. 1.0
Ver. 1.1
Transferring the contacts
MAP (Message Access

Profile)
Bluetooth phone message
Ver. 1.0
SPP (Serial Port Profile)
APPS function
Ver. 1.1
Ver. 1.0
Ver. 1.2
Ver. 1.0
Ver. 1.4
A2DP (Advanced Audio

Distribution Profile)
AVRCP (Audio/Video
Remote Control Profile)
Bluetooth audio system
NOTE
l If your cellular phone does not support HFP, registering the Bluetooth phone or using OPP, PBAP, MAP or SPP profiles individually will not be
possible.
l If the connected Bluetooth device version is older than recommended or incompatible, the Bluetooth device function may not work properly.
178
docstructure.indb
178
2016/03/30
11:16:28
Bluetooth SETTINGS
SETTING Bluetooth DETAILS

1.
Select
Bluetooth Settings (Bluetooth Settings)

SCREEN
Function

Select Bluetooth (Bluetooth).
Registering a Bluetooth device
180
Deleting a Bluetooth device
181
Connecting a Bluetooth device
182
Editing the Bluetooth device information
184
Bluetooth system settings
186
SETTINGS
2.
3.
4.
Page
179
docstructure.indb
179
2016/03/30
11:16:28
Bluetooth SETTINGS
DISPLAYING THE Bluetooth Settings (Bluetooth

Settings) SCREEN IN A DIFFERENT WAY
2.
Select Add (Add).

XWhen another Bluetooth device is connected
To disconnect the Bluetooth device, select
(Yes).
XFrom the phone/message settings screen
1.
2.
3.
4.
Select
1.
Select status display area on the screen. (P.26)
XWhen 5 Bluetooth devices have already been

registered
A registered device needs to be replaced. Select
Yes (Yes), and then select the device to be
replaced.
Select Phone (Phone).
Select Connect Phone (Connect Phone).

XFrom the status display
REGISTERING A Bluetooth DEVICE
Yes
3.
When this screen is displayed, search for the device

name displayed on this screen on the screen of your
Bluetooth device.
Up to 5 Bluetooth devices can be registered.

Bluetooth compatible phones (HFP) and audio devices
(AVP) can be registered simultaneously.
1.
Display the Bluetooth Settings (Bluetooth Settings)

screen. (P.179)
For details about operating the Bluetooth device, see

the manual that comes with it.
To cancel the registration, select Cancel (Cancel).
180
docstructure.indb
180
2016/03/30
11:16:29
Bluetooth SETTINGS
4.
Register the Bluetooth device using your Bluetooth

device.
6.
A PIN-code is not required for SSP (Secure Simple

Pairing) compatible Bluetooth devices. Depending
on the type of Bluetooth device being connected, a
message confirming registration may be displayed on
the Bluetooth devices screen. Respond and operate
the Bluetooth device according to the confirmation
message.
5.
Select OK (OK) when the connection status changes

from Connection waiting... (Connection waiting...) to
Connected (Connected).
Check that the screen is displayed when registration is

complete.
If an error message is displayed, follow the guidance
on the screen to try again.
The system waits for connection requests coming

from the registered device.
At this stage, the Bluetooth functions are not yet

available.
DELETING A Bluetooth DEVICE
1.

screen. (P.179)
2.
3.
Select Remove (Remove).
SETTINGS
If a confirmation message appears asking whether

to transfer the phones contact data to the system,
select the appropriate button.
Select the desired device.
181
docstructure.indb
181
2016/03/30
11:16:29
Bluetooth SETTINGS
4.
Select Yes
appears.
5.

2.
Select the device to be connected.
NOTE
l When deleting a Bluetooth phone, the contact data will be
deleted at the same time.
Supported profile icons will be displayed.
CONNECTING A Bluetooth DEVICE

Up to 5 Bluetooth devices (Phones (HFP) and audio devices
(AVP)) can be registered.
: Phone
: Audio device
: Smartphone Application
Supported profile icons for currently connected

devices will illuminate.
If more than 1 Bluetooth device has been registered, select

which device to connect to.
1.
Dimmed icons can be selected to connect to the

phone/audio function directly.

screen. (P.179)
3.
If the desired Bluetooth device is not on the list, select

Add (Add) to register the device. (P.180)
Select the desired connection.
XWhen another Bluetooth device is connected

To disconnect the Bluetooth device, select
(Yes).
Yes
182
docstructure.indb
182
2016/03/30
11:16:30
Bluetooth SETTINGS
4.

connection is complete.
CONNECTING MANUALLY
If an error message is displayed, follow the guidance

on the screen to try again.
When the auto connection has failed or Bluetooth Power

(Bluetooth Power) is turned off, it is necessary to connect
Bluetooth manually.
NOTE
l It may take time if the device connection is carried out during
Bluetooth audio playback.
l Depending on the type of Bluetooth device being connected, it
may be necessary to perform additional steps on the device.
AUTO CONNECTION MODE
When the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON

position, the system searches for a nearby registered
device.
The system will connect with the registered device
that was last connected, if it is nearby.
Select
and
then
select
SETTINGS
(SETTINGS).
2.
3.
Select Bluetooth (Bluetooth).

Follow the steps in CONNECTING A Bluetooth
DEVICE from STEP 2. (P.182)
RECONNECTING THE Bluetooth PHONE

If a Bluetooth phone is disconnected due to poor reception
from the Bluetooth network when the ignition switch
is turned to the ACC or ON position, the system
automatically reconnect the Bluetooth phone.
If a Bluetooth phone is disconnected on purpose,
such as turning it off, this does not happen.
Reconnect the Bluetooth phone manually.
SETTINGS
To turn auto connection mode on, set Bluetooth Power

(Bluetooth Power) to on. (P.186) Leave the Bluetooth
device in a location where the connection can be
established.
1.
183
docstructure.indb
183
2016/03/30
11:16:30
Bluetooth SETTINGS
EDITING THE Bluetooth DEVICE

INFORMATION
4.
Confirm and change the Bluetooth device information.
The Bluetooth devices information can be displayed on the

screen. The displayed information can be edited.
1.

screen. (P.179)
2.
3.
Select the desired device to be edited.

Select Device Info (Device Info).
No.
Information
The name of the Bluetooth device. Can be changed to a
desired name. (P.185)
Select to set the Bluetooth audio device connection
method. (P.185)
Device address is unique to the device and cannot be
changed.
Phone number of the Bluetooth phone.
184
docstructure.indb
184
2016/03/30
11:16:31
Bluetooth SETTINGS
No.
Information
Compatibility profile of the Bluetooth device.
NOTE
l If 2 Bluetooth devices have been registered with the same
device name, the devices can be distinguished referring to the
devices address.
l Depending on the type of phone, some information may not be
displayed.
CHANGING A DEVICE NAME

Select Device Name (Device Name).
1.
Select Connect Audio Device from (Connect Audio

Device from).
2.
Select the desired connection method.

Vehicle (Vehicle): Select to connect the audio
system to the audio device.
Device (Device): Select to connect the audio device
to the audio system.
Depending on the audio device, the Vehicle
(Vehicle) or Device (Device) connection method
may be best. As such, refer to the manual that comes
with the audio device.
To reset the connection method, select
(Default).
Default
NOTE
SETTINGS
1.
2.
SETTING AUDIO DEVICE CONNECTION METHOD
l Even if the device name is changed, the name registered in your

Bluetooth device does not change.
185
docstructure.indb
185
2016/03/30
11:16:32
Bluetooth SETTINGS
System Settings (System Settings)

SCREEN
The Bluetooth settings can be confirmed and changed.
1.

screen. (P.179)
2.
3.
Select System Settings (System Settings).

No.
Information
Page
Select to set Bluetooth connection on/off.
187
Displays system name. Can be changed to a

desired name.
187
PIN-code used when the Bluetooth device

was registered. Can be changed to a desired
code.
187
Device address is unique to the device and

cannot be changed.
Select to set the phone connection status

display on/off.
Select to set the connection status display of

the audio device on/off.
Compatibility profile of the system device.
186
docstructure.indb
186
2016/03/30
11:16:32
Bluetooth SETTINGS
CHANGING Bluetooth Power (Bluetooth Power)
1.
Select Bluetooth Power (Bluetooth Power).
n WHEN Bluetooth Power (Bluetooth Power) IS ON

The Bluetooth device is automatically connected when
the ignition switch is turned to the ACC or ON position.
n WHEN Bluetooth Power (Bluetooth Power) IS OFF
The Bluetooth device is disconnected, and the system will
not connect to it next time.
SETTINGS
NOTE
l While driving, the auto connection state can be changed from off
to on, but cannot be changed from on to off.
EDITING THE Bluetooth NAME
1.
2.
Select Bluetooth Name (Bluetooth Name).

Enter a name and then select OK (OK).
EDITING THE PIN-CODE
1.
2.
Select Bluetooth PIN (Bluetooth PIN).

Enter a PIN-code and then select OK (OK).
187
docstructure.indb
187
2016/03/30
11:16:33
OTHER SETTINGS
OTHER SETTINGS
GENERAL SETTINGS
GENERAL SETTINGS SCREEN
Settings are available for keyboard layout, operation

sounds, etc.
1.
Select
2.
3.
4.
Select General (General).

188
docstructure.indb
188
2016/03/30
11:16:33
OTHER SETTINGS
No.
Function
Select to set the connected device when using aha.
Select USB (USB) when using an iPhone, and then
select Bluetooth (Bluetooth) when using Android
devices.
Select to set the connected device when using
Pandora*2. Select USB (USB) when using an iPhone,
No.
*
Function
and then select Bluetooth (Bluetooth) when using

Android devices.
Select to change the vehicle clock settings. (P.190)
Select to update the Gracenote database. For details,

Select to change the language.
Select to change the button and screen color.

Select to change the keyboard layout.
Select to set the back camera delay control on/off.

When set to on, the back camera image displays for
approximately 6 seconds after moving the shift lever/
select lever R to any position other than R.
The display disappears when the shift lever/select lever
is moved to P, or when the vehicle speed reaches
approximately 5 mph (8 km/h) or faster.
Select to turn on/off the setting that returns the display

to the split screen automatically after 20 seconds when
a screen other than the split screen is displayed.
Select to turn the animation function on/off.
Select to customize the screen off image. (P.192)
Select to delete personal data. (P.192)
SETTINGS
Select to display the software information. Notices

related to third party software used in this product are
enlisted. (This includes instructions for obtaining such
software, where applicable.)
Select to turn the beep sound on/off.
Select to set the welcome display on/off when getting

into the vehicle.
*1
Select to set the low fuel - gas station search on/off.
189
docstructure.indb
189
2016/03/30
11:16:35
OTHER SETTINGS
No.
*1
Function
No.
Select to set automatic time adjustment using GPS

information on/off.
Select to set the periodic rest notification on/off.

Select to change the time zone. (P.190)
* : With navigation function

1
Select to set daylight saving time on/off or to auto.

When set to auto, the daylight saving time setting
automatically turns on or off based on the current
location information.
CLOCK SETTINGS (WITH NAVIGATION

FUNCTION)
Function
4.
Select OK (OK).
Used to set the auto update setting for time zones, daylight
saving time and automatic time adjustment on/off.
n SETTING THE TIME ZONE
1.
1.
2.
Display the General Settings (General Settings)

screen. (P.188)
2.
3.
Select Time Zone (Time Zone).

Select the desired time zone.
Select Clock (Clock).

190
docstructure.indb
190
2016/03/30
11:16:36
OTHER SETTINGS
CUSTOMIZING THE SCREEN OFF IMAGES
6.
7.
When the screen is turned off, the desired set image

can be displayed as the screen off image. Images
can be copied from a USB memory or SD card*.
A USB memory or SD card* must be connected when
editing screen off images. (P.42, 42)
Select Copy from [device] (Copy from [device]).

Select the desired images from the list and then select
Copy (Copy).
NOTE
The selected image is displayed on the right side
of the screen. If the selected image file is broken or
incompatible,
will be displayed.
The remaining number of image files that can be

transferred is displayed at the bottom of the screen.
l Image files saved to the map SD card cannot be played.
8.
n TRANSFERRING IMAGES
1.
2.
3.
4.
Select
5.
Select the device that the image is stored on.
Select General (General).

Customize Screen Off Image
Screen Off Image).
NOTE

Select
Select Yes
appears.
(Customize
SETTINGS
l When saving the images to a USB or SD card* name the folder

that the screen off image is saved to Image. If this folder name
is not used, the system cannot download the images. (The folder
name is case sensitive.)
l Copy from [device] (Copy from [device]) : [device] will

automatically be filled in with the name of the selected device.
l The compatible file extensions are JPG and JPEG.
l Image files of 10 MB or less can be transferred.
l Up to 10 images can be downloaded.
l Files with non-ASCII filenames can not be downloaded.
191
docstructure.indb
191
2016/03/30
11:16:37
OTHER SETTINGS
n SETTINGS THE SCREEN OFF IMAGES
1.

screen. (P.188)
2.
Select
3.
4.
5.

Screen Off Image).
5.
Select the images to be deleted and then select Delete

(Delete).
6.
Select Yes
appears.
(Customize
Select Select Images (Select Images).

Select the desired image.
DELETING PERSONAL DATA
6.
Select OK (OK).
n DELETING TRANSFERRED IMAGES
1.

screen. (P.188)
2.
Select
3.
4.

Screen Off Image).
1.

screen. (P.188)
2.
3.
Select Delete Personal Data (Delete Personal Data).

Select Delete (Delete).
(Customize
Select Delete Images (Delete Images).
192
docstructure.indb
192
2016/03/30
11:16:38
OTHER SETTINGS
4.
VOICE SETTINGS
Registered or changed personal settings will be

deleted or returned to their default conditions.
For example:
Voice volume, etc. can be set.
Select Yes
appears.
1.
Select
2.
3.
4.
Navigation settings*
Audio settings
SiriusXM Radio settings
SiriusXM Radio service contents
Phone settings
l With navigation function: Make sure the map SD card is

inserted when deleting personal data. The personal data
cannot be deleted when the map SD card is removed.
To delete the data, after inserting the map SD card, turn
the ignition switch to the ACC or ON position.
SETTINGS
CAUTION
Select Voice (Voice).
NOTE
l Voice Settings (Voice Settings) screen can also be displayed
from the voice recognition top screen. (P.256)
193
docstructure.indb
193
2016/03/30
11:16:38
OTHER SETTINGS
VOICE SETTINGS SCREEN
VEHICLE CUSTOMIZATION
Settings are available for vehicle customization.
No.
1.
Select
2.
3.
4.
Function
Select to adjust the volume of voice guidance.
Select to mute/unmute the navigation voice guidance.
Select to set the voice recognition prompts.
Select Vehicle Customization (Vehicle Customization).

NOTE
l The volume can even be adjusted by turning the POWER/
VOLUME knob or by pressing the +/- steering switches
(P.96) during voice guidance.
194
docstructure.indb
194
2016/03/30
11:16:39
OTHER SETTINGS
VEHICLE SETTINGS SCREEN
No.
Function
Select to set the audible signal on/off.
Select to set the hazard warning flashers on/off.
Select to set the leaving time for the welcome lighting.
Select to set the approaching time for the welcome
lighting.
Select to change the defogger setting.
Select to change the interior light off timer.
Select to change the auto light sensor setting.
SETTINGS
Select to change the drivers door unlock setting.

Select to change the rear gate unlock setting.
195
docstructure.indb
195
2016/03/30
11:16:39
OTHER SETTINGS
3.
MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
When this system is turned on, the Maintenance Reminder
(Maintenance Reminder) screen displays when it is time to
replace a part or certain components. (P.40)
1.
Select
(INFO).
, or select
and then select INFO
No.
Function
Select to set the condition of parts or components.
(P.197)
Select to add new information items separately from
provided ones.
Select to cancel all conditions which have been entered.
Select to reset the item which have expired conditions.
Select to call the registered dealer.
2.
Select Maintenance (Maintenance).
Select to register/edit dealer information. (P.198)

Set Dealer (Set Dealer) appears if no dealer
information has been registered.
196
docstructure.indb
196
2016/03/30
11:16:40
OTHER SETTINGS
No.
Function
No.
When set to on, the indicator will illuminate. The

system is set to give maintenance information with the
Maintenance Reminder (Maintenance Reminder)
screen. (P.40)
Function
Select to enter the next maintenance date.
Select to enter the driving distance until the next
maintenance check.
NOTE
Select to cancel the conditions which have been

entered.
l When the vehicle needs to be serviced, the screen button color

will change to orange.
Select to reset the conditions which have expired.
MAINTENANCE INFORMATION SETTING
1.
Select the desired part or component screen button.
2.
Set the conditions.
Select OK (OK) after entering the conditions.
NOTE
l Depending on driving or road conditions, the actual date and
distance that maintenance should be performed may differ from
the stored date and distance in the system.
l Without navigation function: No reminder is given even if the
entered date has passed. A reminder is only given when the
entered distance is reached.
SETTINGS
When the vehicle needs to be serviced, the screen

button color will change to orange.
3.
197
docstructure.indb
197
2016/03/30
11:16:41
OTHER SETTINGS
n EDITING DEALER OR CONTACT NAME
DEALER SETTING
1.
Select
(Contact).
Select Set Dealer (Set Dealer).
2.
Select the items to be edited.
n EDITING PHONE NUMBER
Dealer information can be registered in the system.
1.
2.
1.
2.
No.
Function
next to Phone # (Phone #).
Enter the phone number and then select OK (OK).
Page
Select to enter the name of a dealer.
198
Select to enter the name of a dealer member.
198
Select to enter the phone number.
198
Select to delete the dealer information

Select
next to Dealer (Dealer) or Contact
198
docstructure.indb
198
2016/03/30
11:16:41
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
(WITH NAVIGATION
FUNCTION)
199
docstructure.indb
199
2016/03/30
11:16:41
BASIC OPERATION
BASIC OPERATION
QUICK REFERENCE
No.
MAP SCREEN
To display this screen, select
then select MAP (MAP).
, or select
and
Name
Page
2D North-up, 2D
heading-up or
3D symbol
Select to change the map

display mode between 2D
north-up, 2D heading-up
or 3D. In 3D map, only
a heading-up view is
available.
207
Traffic button
Select to check the traffic

detailed conditions.
208
Zoom in/out
button
Select to magnify or reduce

the map scale.
206
Menu button
Select to display the menu

screen.
203
Scale indicator
This figure indicates the

map scale.
206
Current street
Select to display the Where

Am I? (Where Am I?)
screen.
204
Drive Alert
Indicator
Display the drive alert

indicator.
200
docstructure.indb
200
2016/03/30
11:16:42
BASIC OPERATION
No.
Name
Highway
information
Select to display the

highway information.
Speed Limit
indicator
Displays the speed limit for

the road being driven on.
Page
227
-
*: The default setting is not displayed, and can be displayed from Display
on Map (Display on Map) in Map Settings (Map Settings). (P.243)
MAP OPERATIONS
You can touch a position on the map, and then check that
position during navigation. The maps current position
tracking function stops (the car marker (a blue arrow by
default) is not fixed in position on the screen), and the
control buttons are displayed allowing you to change the
map display.
NOTE
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
l An Unable to read the map SD data. Check the map SD. If

necessary, consult your dealer. message appears if the map SD
card is not inserted, or if an SD card containing no map data is
inserted.
8
No.
Operation
2D or 3D
display
Function
Select to change the map display
mode between 2D north-up, 2D
heading-up or 3D.
201
docstructure.indb
201
2016/03/30
11:16:43
BASIC OPERATION
No.
Operation
Point
information
Function
No.
Select to open another screen

displaying information on the
selected map position (cursor). When
Bluetooth is enabled on your cellular
phone, a call can be placed if the
displayed information screen contains
phone number information.
Return to
normal
navigation
Select to return the map to the current

GPS position. Auto map rotation is
also enabled. The map operation
buttons are not displayed, and
navigation restarts.
Tilt up/down
Select to change the vertical display

angle of the map in 3D mode. Select
and hold to continue changing the
motion of the map screen.
Operation
Function
Selecting a
destination
Select to select the cursor as a new

destination. The route is researched
automatically.
Additional
functions
Select to display the additional

functions list. For example, saving
the cursor to the destination list, and
searching the area around the cursor.
Zoom in/out
Select to change the area of the map

displayed on the screen. Select and
hold to continue changing the scale of
the map screen.
NOTE
l The map screen scale can be changed by double-touching or
pinching the screen. (P.45)
l The map direction can be changed by rotating the screen.
(P.45)
202
docstructure.indb
202
2016/03/30
11:16:43
BASIC OPERATION
NAVIGATION MENU
No.
Function
Select to search for a destination. You can select which
method to use to reach your destination by entering the
address, selecting a favorite spot, selecting a position
on the map, or selecting from the destination list. You
can also select recent destinations from Smart History,
or enter coordinates into the system.
When you select Menu (Menu) on the navigation screen,

the navigation menu (main menu) appears. You can access
all of the softwares functions from this menu.
Select to perform various route related functions such

as editing or canceling the route, setting the route
departure point, selecting a different route, avoiding a
part of the route, performing a navigation simulation, or
adding an entry to the destination list.
Select
or
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Select to set the navigation software operating method,

start the tutorial, show a demo route simulation, or start
various other auxiliary applications.
to adjust the guidance volume.
Select to mute/unmute the navigation voice guidance.

Select to clear the route and cancel navigation.
Select to open the Traffic Summary (Traffic Summary)
screen.
No.
Function
Select to start navigation on the map. The button itself
shows the current position, recommended route, and
reduces the surrounding area to display on the map
being used. Select to enlarge the map to full-screen
size.
NOTE
l Guidance volume can be adjusted during guidance by turning
the POWER/VOLUME knob, or by using the volume control
203
docstructure.indb
203
2016/03/30
11:16:44
BASIC OPERATION
CHECK CURRENT POSITION

The button on this screen searches for information on the
current position (if there is no GPS reception it uses the last
confirmed position) and recommended spots in the area,
and displays them on the screen.
1.
2.
Select street name on the map screen.

Check that the Where Am I? (Where Am I?) screen is
displayed.
No.
Latitude/Longitude (Current positional coordinates use
the WGS84 land survey system)
Altitude (Advanced information acquired by the GPS
receiver - may not be accurate)
The latest location information is displayed, or the time
after the latest information was acquired is displayed.
A detailed address (when available) for the current
position is displayed at the bottom of the screen.
Address of current position on left
Address of current position on right
Select to save the current position in the destination list.
(P.238)
Select to search for nearby help around the current
position. (P.220)
204
docstructure.indb
204
2016/03/30
11:16:44
BASIC OPERATION
MAP SCREEN OPERATION

CURRENT POSITION DISPLAY
1.
Select
(MAP).
, or select
and then select MAP
NOTE
l While driving, the current position mark is fixed on the screen
and the map moves.
l The current position is automatically set as the vehicle receives
signals from the GPS (Global Positioning System). If the current
position is not correct, it is automatically corrected after the
vehicle receives signals from the GPS.
l After the battery disconnection, or on a new vehicle, the current
position may not be correct. As soon as the system receives
signals from the GPS, the correct current position is displayed.
SHOW MAP
1.
2.
Select Show Map

menu screen.
(Show Map) on the navigation
Check that the current position map is displayed.
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
In the navigation menu screen, the currently active map is

reduced and displayed in Show Map (Show Map).
205
docstructure.indb
205
2016/03/30
11:16:45
BASIC OPERATION
This map shows the current position (shown as the

vehicle marked as a blue arrow), recommended
routes (blue lines), and the immediate surrounding
area.
MANUAL OPERATION
1.
Select
or
to change the scale of the map screen.
When GPS positioning is not active, the vehicle

marker is clear. The latest confirmed position is
displayed. When GPS positioning is active, the
vehicle marker is displayed in fullcolor, and the
current position is shown.
MAP SCALE
AUTO ZOOM
Select and hold

or
scale of the map screen.
XWhile driving the route
You can also change the scale of the map screen by

selecting double touch (P.45) or pinch operation
(P.45).
When approaching an intersection, the screen is enlarged

and the viewpoint raised so that you can easily see which
way to drive at the next intersection. After navigating the
intersection, the screen is reduced and the angle lowered to
check the road in front.
to continue changing the
NOTE
l In 3D mode, the map cannot be reduced endlessly. The map
changes to 2D mode if you zoom out beyond the defined
amount.
XWhen driving without route navigation

The screen is enlarged as you slow down and reduced as
you speed up.
This function is OFF by default, and can be turned
ON from Auto Zoom (Auto Zoom) in Map Settings
(Map Settings). (P.243)
206
docstructure.indb
206
2016/03/30
11:16:45
BASIC OPERATION
ORIENTATION OF THE MAP
X3D screen
The orientation of the map can be changed between 2D

north-up, 2D heading-up and 3D.
1.
Select
or
XNorth-up screen
: 2D north-up symbol
Regardless of the direction of vehicle travel, north is
always up.
: 2D heading-up and 3D symbol

The direction of vehicle travel is always up.
The letter(s) indicate the vehicles heading direction

(e.g. N for north).
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
XHeading-up screen
207
docstructure.indb
207
2016/03/30
11:16:45
BASIC OPERATION
POSITION MARKER
SELECTED MAP LOCATION (CURSOR)
Use one of the following methods to mark a map location.
Select the map during navigation.
Select the map when the destination you want is
displayed in the search results.
Select the map in Find on Map (Find on Map).
You can use the cursors position as the routes destination,
search for locations around the cursor, and save the position
in the destination list.
After selecting a map location, a cursor is displayed
at the point selected on the map. The cursor is
displayed as a red point (
) and can be checked at
all zoom levels.
TRAFFIC INFORMATION
DISPLAYING TRAFFIC INFORMATION
Road sections affected by traffic conditions are displayed in
a different color on the map, and a small icon representing
the type of traffic condition is displayed above the road.
You can change the items displayed by setting the Traffic.
(P.242)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Select
on the map screen.
Select Event List (Event List).

Select the desired event type.
Select the desired traffic information.
Check that the traffic condition is displayed.
: Select to open another screen displaying

information on the selected map position.
208
docstructure.indb
208
2016/03/30
11:16:46
DESTINATION SEARCH
DESTINATION SEARCH
DESTINATION SEARCH SCREEN

The Destination (Destination) screen enables to search
for a destination. To display the Destination (Destination)
screen, select
, or select
and then select
MAP (MAP), and select Menu (Menu) on the MAP
(MAP) screen. Then select Destination (Destination) on
the navigation menu screen.
No.
Function
Page
211
Select to search for a destination by point of

interest.
214
Select to search for a destination by the map.
218
Select to search for a destination from

destination list.
218

frequently used destination.
219

previously set destinations.
219
Select to search for a destination by

coordinates.
219
Select to set a destination by home.
211
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Select to search for a destination by address.
209
docstructure.indb
209
2016/03/30
11:16:46
DESTINATION SEARCH
SEARCH OPERATION
1.
Select
(MAP).
2.
3.
4.
, or select
If necessary, you can touch another point on the map

to change the destination.
and then select MAP
The cursor (
5.
) is displayed at the new position.
Select Next (Next) (when a route has been set) or

Select (Select) (when no route has been set) to set the
destination.
Select Menu (Menu).

Search for a destination.
No.
Function
Select to return to the previous location when the map
has been moved.
Displays the name and address of the spot.
Select to open another screen displaying information on
the selected map position.
Select to select another destination.
Select to display the additional functions list.
There are different kinds of methods to search for a

destination. (P.209)
The map is displayed in full-screen mode with the
selected point at the center.
After a summary of the route plan is displayed, the

entire route is displayed on the map.
210
docstructure.indb
210
2016/03/30
11:16:47
DESTINATION SEARCH
SETTING HOME AS DESTINATION
4.
Select the desired country or state (province).
5.
Select the desired search method.
To use this function, it is necessary to register a home

address. (P.237)
1.
Display the
(P.209)
2.
3.
Destination
(Destination)
screen.
Select Next (Next) (when a route has been set) or

Go! (Go!) (when no route has been set).
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
The navigation system performs a search for

the route and the entire route map is displayed.
(P.222)
SEARCHING BY FIND ADDRESS

There are 4 methods to search for a destination by address.
1.
Display the
(P.209)
2.
3.
Select Find Address (Find Address).
Destination
(Destination)
screen.
Select Country or State/Province (Country or State/

Province).
By default, the country and district for your current
position are displayed.
No.
Function
Page
Select to search by city.
212
Select to search by street.
212
Select to search by intersection.
213
Select to search by city/town center.
212
211
docstructure.indb
211
2016/03/30
11:16:48
DESTINATION SEARCH
SEARCHING BY CITY
NOTE
1.
2.
l If the destination is to be used frequently, it can be saved to the

destination list before selecting Next (Next) (when a route
has been set) or Go! (Go!) (when no route has been set).
(P.238)
Select City (City).

Enter a city name or ZIP Code.
Refer to HINTS FOR QUICK ADDRESS ENTRY for
information on quicker searching. (P.213)
3.
4.
5.
Select the desired city name or ZIP Code.

Select Street (Street).
n SEARCHING BY CITY/TOWN CENTER
1.
Enter a street name.

6.
7.
8.
Select the desired street name.

Select House Number (House Number).
Enter a house number.
If the house number is not found, the center of the
street is selected as the destination.
9.
Select Next (Next) (When a route has been set) or

Go! (Go!) (when no route has been set).
Select Select City (Select City) without entering the

street name.
Set the city/town center displayed as the routes
destination.
SEARCHING BY STREET
1.
2.
Select Street (Street).

Enter a street name.
3.
4.
Select the desired street name.

Select Select Street (Select Street) without entering
an address.
The center of the street is selected as the destination.
212
docstructure.indb
212
2016/03/30
11:16:49
DESTINATION SEARCH
SEARCHING BY INTERSECTION
1.
2.
Select Intersecting Street (Intersecting Street).

Select from the list.
If there are only a few roads at the intersection, the
list is displayed immediately.
If the road is a long way off, the keyboard screen is
displayed. Use the keyboard to enter the start of the
intersection name. A list is automatically displayed
when the entered road name matches and can be
displayed on one screen.
When entering a city/town name or a street name:

Only characters that can be displayed in the
search results are shown on the keyboard. Other
characters are grayed out.
While entering text, the most likely search result is
always displayed in the text entry field. If the search
to select it.
result is correct, select
If you select Results (Results) after entering two
characters, items that contain those two characters
are displayed in the list.
You can find intersections easily by using the
following method.
First, when searching for an uncommon road name,
you only need to enter the first few letters to acquire
the name.
When one street name is shorter than the other, the
shorter one is searched for first. This shortens the
search time for the road with the longer name.
NAVIGATION SYSTEM

HINTS FOR QUICK ADDRESS ENTRY
213
docstructure.indb
213
2016/03/30
11:16:49
DESTINATION SEARCH
You can search by road category as well as road

name. When the same word is included in names
such as the street, road, and main street, by entering
the first character for the type of road, you can quickly
bring up the search results. For example, if you are
searching for Pine Avenue and you enter Pi A,
roads such as Pine Street or Pickwick Road are
not displayed.
You can also search by using the ZIP Code. If the ZIP
Code only contains a few characters, you can search
more quickly than when entering the city/town name.
SEARCHING BY FIND PLACES

There are 3 methods to search for a destination by Find
Places.
1.
Display the
(P.209)
2.
3.
Select Find Places (Find Places).
Destination
(Destination)
screen.
Select the desired search method.
No.
Function
Page
Select to search by name.
215
Select to search by location.
215
Select to search by preset category.
217
214
docstructure.indb
214
2016/03/30
11:16:50
DESTINATION SEARCH
SEARCHING BY NAME
1.
Select Quick Search Along Route

Along Route).
SEARCHING BY LOCATION
(Quick Search
1.
2.
Select Custom Search (Custom Search).

Select the spot area.
When
no
route
has
been
set,
select
Quick Search Around Last Known Position (Quick Search
Around Last Known Position) (no GPS signal) or
Quick Search Around Here (Quick Search Around Here)
(on GPS signal).
2.
Enter a spot name.
3.
Select the desired spot.
No.
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Select Results (Results) after entering the first few

characters to open a list of spot names that include
the characters you entered.
Function
Select to search for city/town spots.
Select to search along the route being navigated, rather
than around an optional point.
Select to search around your current position, or the
latest confirmed position.
Select to search for spots at the destination during route
navigation.
Filter (Filter): Select to narrow down the list.

More (More): Select to change the sort order of the
list or to display all listed spots on the map.
215
docstructure.indb
215
2016/03/30
11:16:51
DESTINATION SEARCH
n SELECTING FROM THE CATEGORIES
n SEARCHING BY NAME
1.
Select a main category (such as accommodation) or

List All Places (List All Places).
1.
Select a main category (such as accommodations) or

Find by Name (Find by Name).
2.
Select a sub-category (such as hotel or motel) or

List All Places (List All Places).
2.
Select a sub-category (such as hotels or motels) or

Find by Name (Find by Name).
Brand names of services may also be displayed

depending on the sub-category of the selected spot.
Select a brand name or List All Places (List All
Places).
3.
3.
Select Find by Name (Find by Name) to search a

sub-category of the select spot.
4.
Enter a spot name.

Select Results (Results) after entering the first few
characters to open a list of spot names that include
the characters you entered.

5.
216
docstructure.indb
216
2016/03/30
11:16:52
DESTINATION SEARCH
SEARCHING BY PRESET CATEGORY
1.
2.
Select the desired search category.
Function
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
No.

Select to search for gas stations along the set route.

Select to search for parking lots at the destination.
Select to search for restaurant along the set route.
Select to search for accommodation at the destination.
Searches around the current position if navigation is

not being performed (if no destination is set).
Searches the area around the last confirmed position

if the current position is unavailable (no GPS signal).
217
docstructure.indb
217
2016/03/30
11:16:52
DESTINATION SEARCH
SEARCHING BY FIND ON MAP
1.
Display the
(P.209)
2.
3.
Select Find on Map (Find on Map).
Destination
(Destination)
SEARCHING BY FAVORITES
screen.
Scroll the map to the desired point and touch.
The cursor (
4.
) is displayed.
: Select to return to the previous location when the

map has been moved.
Select Next (Next).
1.
Display the
(P.209)
2.
3.
Select Favorites (Favorites).
Destination
(Destination)
screen.
Select the desired destination.
Refer to SAVING DESTINATIONS for information on

how to save the destination. (P.238)
: Select to delete the favorites.

list, to display all listed spots on the map or to delete
all favorites on the list.
218
docstructure.indb
218
2016/03/30
11:16:53
DESTINATION SEARCH
SEARCHING FROM A FREQUENTLY USED

DESTINATION (SMART HISTORY)
1.
Display the
(P.209)
2.
Select the destination
Destination
or
(Destination)
: Select to delete the previous destination.
More (More): Select to delete all destinations on the

list.
screen.
SEARCHING BY COORDINATES
1.
Display the
(P.209)
2.
3.
4.
Select More (More).
Destination
(Destination)
screen.
Select
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Select Coordinate (Coordinate).

.
SEARCHING FROM HISTORY
1.
Display the
(P.209)
2.
3.
Select History (History).
Destination
(Destination)
screen.
Select the desired destination.
Select
to enable the numeric keypad input. Since
the second time to erase one character at the cursor
position.
5.
Select More (More) to set the UTM coordinates.

Enter the latitude and longitude and then select Next
(Next).
219
docstructure.indb
219
2016/03/30
11:16:54
DESTINATION SEARCH
OTHER SEARCH OPERATION
No.
Function
Select to search for police stations.
SEARCHING BY WHERE AM I?
Select to search for gas stations.
You can search for the closest assistance service by using

the Where Am I? (Where Am I?) screen.
1.
Display the Where Am I? (Where Am I?) screen.

(P.204)
2.
3.
Select Help Nearby (Help Nearby).

Select the desired search category.
This button searches for everything around your

current position (or the latest confirmed position if it is
unavailable).
4.
SEARCHING GAS STATION IN LOW FUEL

WARNING
LOW FUEL WARNING POP-UP
When the fuel level is low, a warning message will pop up
on the screen.
No.
Function
Select to search for vehicle repairs / road-side
assistance services.
1.

screen. (P.188)
2.
Select Low Fuel - Gas Station Search (Low Fuel Gas Station Search).
Select to search for hospitals / emergency services.
220
docstructure.indb
220
2016/03/30
11:16:54
DESTINATION SEARCH
SEARCHING GAS STATION IN LOW FUEL

WARNING
1.

screen. (P.188)
2.
Select Periodic Rest Notification

Notification).
A nearby gas station can be selected as a destination.
1.
2.
Select Yes (Yes) when the low fuel warning appears.

Select the desired nearby gas station.
(Periodic
Rest
SEARCHING FOR A REST AREA FOLLOWING

PERIODIC REST NOTIFICATION
A nearby place to rest can be selected as a destination.
Select Yes (Yes) when the long time drive warning
appears.
2.
Select the desired nearby place to rest.
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
1.
SEARCHING FOR A REST AREA

FOLLOWING PERIODIC REST
NOTIFICATION
PERIODIC REST NOTIFICATION POP-UP
8
When you have been driving for a long time, a warning
message will pop up on the screen.
221
docstructure.indb
221
2016/03/30
11:16:55
DESTINATION SEARCH
STARTING ROUTE GUIDANCE
When the countdown is displayed in the Go! (Go!),

guidance begins automatically after 10 seconds even
if you do not select the button.
When the destination is set, the entire route map from the
current position to the destination is displayed.
WARNING
STARTING ROUTE GUIDANCE
1.
Select Go! (Go!) to start guidance.
l Be sure to obey traffic regulations and keep road conditions

in mind while driving. If a traffic sign on the road has been
changed, the route guidance may not indicate such changed
information.
NOTE
No.
l The route for returning may not be the same as that for going.
l The route guidance to the destination may not be the shortest
route or a route without traffic congestion.
l Route guidance may not be available if there is no road data for
the specified location.
l If a destination that is not located on a road is set, the vehicle will
be guided to the point on a road nearest to the destination. The
road nearest to the selected point is set as the destination.
Current position
Destination point
Select to display the map around the current position.
Select to display the route options list.
DISPLAYING ROUTE SIMULATION

You can run a simulation of the route currently being
navigated.
1.
Display the Change Route (Change Route) screen.

(P.229)
222
docstructure.indb
222
2016/03/30
11:16:55
DESTINATION SEARCH
2.
3.
4.
Select More (More).

Select Simulate Navigation (Simulate Navigation).
No.
Select to change the speed of the simulation. You can

select from speeds of 4x, 8x, or 16x. Select again to
return to normal speed.
Check that the route simulation is displayed.

The simulation begins from the start point and works
through the entire route at the recommended speed.
You can use the following buttons during the
simulation (although the control buttons disappear
after a few seconds, you can touch the map to show
them again).
Function
Select to stop the simulation.
CANCELING ROUTE
The route being navigated is deleted, including all
waypoints.
No.
Select Menu (Menu) on the map screen.

Select Cancel Route (Cancel Route).
You can also cancel the route guidance by selecting
Cancel Route (Cancel Route) on the Change
Route (Change Route) screen. (P.229)
Function
Select to return to the previous route event (the previous
change in the route).
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
1.
2.
Select to pause the simulation.

Select to go to the next route event (the next change in
the route).
223
docstructure.indb
223
2016/03/30
11:16:56
ROUTE GUIDANCE
ROUTE GUIDANCE
ROUTE GUIDANCE SCREEN
No.
Current street name
Select to display the Where Am I? (Where Am I?)
screen. (P.204)
During the route guidance, various types of guidance

screens can be displayed depending on conditions.
Next street name
SCREEN FOR ROUTE GUIDANCE

NOTE
l If the vehicle goes off the guidance route, the route is searched
again.
l For some areas, the roads have not been completely digitized in
our database. For this reason, the route guidance may select a
road that should not be traveled on.
STANDARD MAP ICON

No.
Distance to the next turn and an arrow indicating the
turning direction
Arrow indicating the direction of the turn after the next
turn
Guidance route
Current position
The following table shows the most frequently displayed

route events.
Icon
Explanation
Turn left
Turn right
U-turn left
Data fields
224
docstructure.indb
224
2016/03/30
11:16:56
ROUTE GUIDANCE
Icon
Explanation
Icon
Disembark from the ferry.
U-turn right
You are half way to your destination.
Keep left at the fork in the road.
You have arrived at your destination.
Keep right at the fork in the road.

Turn left & sharp curve.
Explanation
DATA FIELDS
Turn right & sharp curve.

Stay in the left lane.
Turn left at the T junction.
Each time data fields are selected, the distance, the time
left, and the arrival time are displayed. A single data field
can then be displayed by selecting from these three items.
Turn right at the T junction.
CHANGING DATA FIELDS
Go straight ahead at the intersection.
Go left at the roundabout. Third exit (next change in

direction).
Join the roundabout (the route change after the next
change).
Join the expressway.
If the waypoint has been set, the distance, the time left, and
the arrival time to the waypoint can be displayed.
1.
Select and hold the data fields to change the display of

the data fields.
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Stay in the right lane.
When the vehicle is on the guidance route, the data fields

display the distance, the time left or the estimated arrival
time to the destination.
Leave the expressway.

Board the ferry.
225
docstructure.indb
225
2016/03/30
11:16:58
ROUTE GUIDANCE
2.
Select to display the desired item.
NOTE
l When the vehicle is on the guidance route, the distance
measured along the route is displayed. Travel time and arrival
time are calculated based on the average speed for the specified
speed limit.
ROUTE OVERVIEW
4.
Check that the entire route map is displayed.
LANE INFORMATION AND SIGNS

LANE INFORMATION
When lane information is available on the map, the lane and
direction are indicated below the map with small arrows. The
lane that you should drive in is highlighted.
The entire route from the current position to the destination

can be displayed during the route guidance.
1.
2.
3.

Select Change Route (Change Route).
Select Overview (Overview).
226
docstructure.indb
226
2016/03/30
11:16:59
ROUTE GUIDANCE
SIGNS
When detailed information is available, the arrows are
removed and signs are displayed. Signs are displayed
at the top of the map. The color and design of the signs is
the same as signs actually found at the side of the road or
overhead signs. These signs show the district and the route
number for the lane direction.
HIGHWAY SERVICES
When driving on the expressway, this displays information
on up to the next three highway service areas. By default,
Gas Station (Gas Station), Restaurant (Restaurant),
Rest Area (Rest Area), and Car Service (Car Service) are
displayed. You can change the items displayed by setting
the Visual Guidance (Visual Guidance). (P.245)
1.
Select
on the map screen.
When information is available for the highway service

area,
is displayed.
Check that the highway service area information
(distance, time needed, and services provided) is
displayed.
All signs are displayed in the same manner even

when driving without using the navigation system.
During navigation, only the sign that shows the lane in
which you should drive is highlighted, the other signs
are toned down.
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
2.
8
The highway service area
disappears after 15 seconds.
3.
information
display
Select the desired highway service area information.
227
docstructure.indb
227
2016/03/30
11:16:59
ROUTE GUIDANCE
4.
Select one from the list to display more details.
TYPICAL VOICE GUIDANCE

PROMPTS
As the vehicle approaches an intersection, or point, where
maneuvering the vehicle is necessary, the systems voice
guidance will provide various messages.
You can check it on the map and set it as a waypoint

or as a destination.
JUNCTION DISPLAY
When approaching an expressway exit or a complicated
intersection, the map switches to a 3D display if the
necessary information can be displayed. An arrow indicates
the lane in which you should drive. Signs are also displayed
if the information is available.
WARNING
l Be sure to obey the traffic regulations and keep the road
condition in mind especially when you are driving on IPD
roads. The route guidance may not have the updated
information such as the direction of a one way street.
NOTE
l To adjust the voice guidance volume: P.193
The volume can even be adjusted by turning the POWER/
VOLUME knob or by pressing the +/- steering switches
(P.96) during voice guidance.
l Voice guidance may be made early or late.
l If the system cannot determine the current position correctly,
you may not hear voice guidance or may not see the magnified
intersection on the screen.
228
docstructure.indb
228
2016/03/30
11:17:00
ROUTE GUIDANCE
ROUTE RELATED FUNCTIONS

DISPLAYING CHANGE ROUTE
You can check a variety of route settings recommended by
the software.
1.
2.
3.

Select Change Route (Change Route).
Check that the list is displayed, or select the desired
item.
No.
Destination Name/Address
Displays detailed information (unpaved roads, toll
roads, and so on) on the warning icons (depending on
conditions) for the current route.
Total time for route
Total distance for route
Estimated delay times calculated from traffic conditions
on the route
Route planning method (Priority to time and so on)
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Select to add or delete a destination, or change the

order for the destinations. You can set the route
departure point, excluding the current position. This is
useful for creating a route in advance and saving it for
later use. (P.230)
Select to display the entire route on the map. (P.226)
Select to avoid a section of the route. (P.233)
Select to delete the route currently being navigated.
Select to display a list of various options such as
selecting another route, displaying the itinerary list,
changing the route settings, running a simulation of the
route, saving the route being navigated, and reading a
previously saved route.
229
docstructure.indb
229
2016/03/30
11:17:00
ROUTE GUIDANCE
EDITING ROUTE
ADDING DESTINATIONS
You can change the destination list and edit the route. You
can add or delete destinations, change the start point, or
change the order of the list.
1.

(P.229)
2.
3.
Select Edit Route (Edit Route).
Function
Display the Edit Route (Edit Route) screen. (P.230)

Select
Search for an additional destination in the same way as

a destination search. (P.209)
REORDERING DESTINATIONS
No.
1.
2.
3.
1.
2.
3.
4.

Select More (More).
Select the desired destination and then select
or
of left side on the screen to change the arrival order.
Page
Select to add a destination.
230
Select to change the start point of the route.
234
Select to delete a destination.
231
Select to change the display order of the list.

You can also manually select the optimum
route in the application.
230
230
docstructure.indb
230
2016/03/30
11:17:01
ROUTE GUIDANCE
DELETING DESTINATIONS
1.
2.
3.

Select
Select Delete (Delete) when the confirmation screen

appears.
SETTING ROUTE PREFERENCES

The conditions to determine the route can be selected from
various choices such as Highways, Toll Road, Ferries, etc.
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Select More (More).
Select Route Settings (Route Settings).
Select the desired route preferences and then select
.
No.
Function
Sets various factors to take into account when
performing a search, such as fuel consumption, fuel
costs, and maximum speed.
You can change between On-road and Off-road. Set to
On-road to perform normal navigation, or set to Off-road
to navigate using the straightest possible route to the
destination.
By changing the route search method, you can search

for the optimum route for a variety of situations and
types of vehicle.
231
docstructure.indb
231
2016/03/30
11:17:02
ROUTE GUIDANCE
No.
SELECTING ROUTE TYPE
Function
Select whether or not to use the expressway when
creating the route.
1.
Select whether or not to use toll roads (Period Charge)

in the route.
Display the Route Settings (Route Settings) screen.

(P.231)
2.
Select whether or not to use toll roads (Per-use Toll) in

the route.
Select Route Planning Method

Method).
3.
Select the desired route type.
(Route
Planning
Select whether or not to use ferries when creating the

route. (However, ferries might not always be selected for
the route.) However, information on temporary service
ferries may not be displayed on the map. There may be
a fee for using the ferry.
Select whether or not to use Carpool/HOV lanes when
creating the route.
Select whether or not to use unpaved roads when
creating the route.
No.
Select to search for the best green alternative route. If

this alternative route is much better than the selected
method, you can quickly switch to Green mode.
The route is searched again, and the

recommended route is indicated by a blue line.
new
Function
Select to search all roads for the quickest route following
the speed limits of the roads.
Select to search for the route that conserves the most
energy.
Select to search for a route that is easiest to drive, with
few right and left turns. Using this option, the program
allows you to avoid combinations of smaller roads and
to take the expressway.
232
docstructure.indb
232
2016/03/30
11:17:02
ROUTE GUIDANCE
AVOIDANCES SETTING
The avoidances feature allows you to remove any of the
roads or special sections on the planned route.
1.

(P.229)
2.
3.
Select Avoidances (Avoidances).

Select the item to be set.
No.
Function
Select to delete the avoid route being navigated.
In each case, the result of the selected avoidance is

shown on the map with an indication of additional or
saved time and distance. The user can review and
confirm the avoidance on this screen.
NOTE
l Avoidances are not permanent. They are only applied for the
active route.
When navigation has already begun, you can change

the route being navigated by using one of the following
methods.
No.
Function
Select to remove any special road types (e.g. highways
or ferries) from your route. This feature is only available
if there are special sections along the planned route.
If a recommended route is already available, and a new

destination has been selected using the method described
in the previous section, the start new route, add a new
waypoint (midway point), and add the destination you
selected as the final destination buttons are displayed.
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
CHANGING ROUTE
Select to skip a specific road from your calculated route.

Select to skip a predefined length of the planned route
(500m, 1000m, etc.) right ahead of the current position.
233
docstructure.indb
233
2016/03/30
11:17:03
ROUTE GUIDANCE
SETTING A NEW STARTING POINT

In standard navigation, all routes are created from the
current position. You can turn off the GPS so that you
can study a route that is not currently being driven, run a
simulation, and check the time or distance for the route. This
way, you can set a start point for the route without using the
current GPS position.
No.
Function
Select to create a new route at the position you
selected. Previous destinations and waypoints are
deleted.
Select to add the position you selected as a new
waypoint for the current route. Other destinations for
the route are already enabled. Note: Waypoints are
set so that the optimum route is maintained between
destinations. You can use the route editing function to
set the position for waypoints on the route.
Select to add the destination you selected as the final
destination for the current route. Other destinations for
the route are already enabled. Up to now, the position
marked as the final destination becomes the final
waypoint.
1.

(P.229)
2.
Select Edit Route

(Create Route).
(Edit Route) /
Create Route
Edit Route (Edit Route) is displayed only when

a route is set. Create Route (Create Route) is
displayed when a route is not set.
3.
Select
, if a warning message is displayed, select
which operation to perform.
234
docstructure.indb
234
2016/03/30
11:17:03
ROUTE GUIDANCE
The first row shows the start position (displays the

current position) for the route.
CREATING A ROUTE
4.
Select the routes start point by using the same method

as selecting the destination.
5.
You can create a route for each destination in the saved

routes menu.
Set the new start point and then select Go! (Go!).
The vehicle marker goes clear on the map, indicating
that there is no GPS reception.
1.

(P.229)
2.
Select Create Route (Create Route).

Create Route (Create Route) is displayed when a
route is not set.
3.
Select
to select a destination.
To
return
to
standard
navigation,
select
Turn on GPS (Turn on GPS), and if a warning
message is displayed, select which operation to
perform.
Only one row showing the routes start point (current

position displayed) is displayed in the route point list.
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
If a route is already being navigated, it is recalculated

using the position selected at that time.
235
docstructure.indb
235
2016/03/30
11:17:04
ROUTE GUIDANCE
4.
Search for a destination. (P.209)
4.
Select the desired route.
Select the routes destination using the same method

as described previously.
After selecting a new destination, you are returned to
the list.
at the point
To add another destination, select
where you want to add a new route point to the list,
and repeat the steps above.
Using the current search method, three routes are
displayed in order of recommendation.
ROUTE ALTERNATIVES
More Results (More Results): Select to search

using a different method. Also, if only a short distance
is being navigated or only a few search candidates
are found, each search method displays only one
route.
Change the Route settings to perform a new search for the

route being navigated using a different method. You can
even search again by comparing different routes.
1.

(P.229)
2.
3.
Select More (More).

Select Route Alternatives (Route Alternatives).
5.
Select
to return to the previous screen.
The route is searched again using the selected

method. The new recommended route is indicated by
a blue line.
236
docstructure.indb
236
2016/03/30
11:17:04
MEMORY POINTS
MEMORY POINTS
MEMORY POINTS SETTINGS
2.
Select
Set as HOME location
location).
(Set
as
HOME
Home and preset destinations can be set as memory points.

The registered points can be used as the destinations.
(P.209)
SETTING UP HOME
If home has already been registered, select Yes
(Yes) when the overwrite confirmation screen
appears.
Destination (Destination) screen. (P.211)
REGISTERING HOME
3.
1.
DELETING HOME
Select More (More) on the map screen.

and
You can also register home by touching
then selecting More (More) on the displayed place
information screen.
Select OK (OK).
1.
Display the
(P.209)
2.
3.
4.
Select Favorites (Favorites).
Destination
(Destination)
screen.
Select HOME (HOME) from the list, then select
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
If home has been registered, that information can be

recalled by selecting Go Home (Go Home) on the
Select Delete (Delete) when the confirmation screen

appears.
237
docstructure.indb
237
2016/03/30
11:17:05
MEMORY POINTS
SAVING DESTINATIONS
The destination list is a list of frequently used destinations.
Up to 100 destinations can be stored in the favorites list.
1.
Select the desired item to search for the location.

(P.209)
The map is displayed in full-screen mode with the
selected point at the center.
2.
3.
Select More (More).
4.
Enter a name and then select OK (OK).
Select Add to Favorites (Add to Favorites).
238
docstructure.indb
238
2016/03/30
11:17:05
SETUP
SETUP
NAVIGATION SETTINGS
OPTIONAL FUNCTIONS
Various options are available from the More (More) menu.
1.
2.
3.

Select More (More).
Function
Function
Select to check global sunrise and sunset times. Places
a mark on the map to show the users current position
and route points. Select Details button to check accurate
sunrise and sunset times for all points along the route
(current position, all waypoints, final destination).
Select to display a list of all trip logs, whether they are
saved by the user upon reaching the destination or
whether they are saved automatically. Select an item
from the trip that is displayed, you can check trip data,
speeds, and more detailed contents. When a path log
has been saved, you can display it on the map in the
color selected.
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
No.
No.
Select to display a tutorial allowing for a quick grasp

of the softwares functions, and starts a demonstration
showing a sample route simulation to check the
navigation functions. The about section displays
product information. Here you can view the software
and database user license agreements, search for the
contents license, and check the software ID. You can
check statistical data for program use.
Select to configure programs and change operational

patterns for the software. Performs functions such as
fine tuning route search options, changing the map
screen design, turning warnings on or off, and launching
the Configuration Wizard (Configuration Wizard).
239
docstructure.indb
239
2016/03/30
11:17:06
SETUP
SCREENS FOR NAVIGATION SETTINGS
1.
2.
3.
Display the More (More) screen. (P.239)

No.
Function
Page
Select to change the voice guidance language.

Select to specify various warnings and warning
settings.
241
Select to set On/Off of traffic information

display and the method to use the received
real-time traffic information on route search.
242
Select to set the route search method.
231
Select to fine tune the map screen

appearance.
243
Select to set display units and the date display.
244
Select to save trip logs automatically by turning

this setting on, or save them manually when
arriving at a destination.
245
Select to change basic software configurations

set during the initial setup process.
38
Select to change settings related to map

screen guidance.
245
240
docstructure.indb
240
2016/03/30
11:17:06
SETUP
SOUND AND WARNINGS
WARNING
l Be sure to set the volume of the audio at an appropriate level.
Improper volume setting may result in hearing damage or a
traffic accident.
1.
2.
3.
Display the Settings (Settings) screen. (P.240)

Select Sound and Warnings (Sound and Warnings).
No.
Function
This button displays the current language for voice
guidance. Select to change to a new language/narrator
from the available languages and list of narrators. When
you select an item from the list, a sample of the audio is
played back.
Select to select the frequency of voice information, as
well as turning on or off various voice information such
as information on traffic conditions.
Select to select the Verbosity Level from Minimal
(Minimal), Compact (Compact), or Verbose
(Verbose).
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Select to turn on or off talk back voice recognition

results, or change the voice recognition method.
Select to warn you if you exceed the current speed limit.
This information may not be available for your region
(ask your local dealer), or may not be fully correct for all
roads in the map.
Select to receive a warning when approaching
other alert points such as school zones or railroad
crossings. You can set the different alert point categories
individually.
Select to turn on or off warning sign alerts and to set

the distance from the hazard to receive the warning at.
These can be set individually for the different warning
types.
241
docstructure.indb
241
2016/03/30
11:17:07
SETUP
n DETOUR SETTINGS
TRAFFIC
1.
2.
3.

Select Traffic (Traffic).
No.
Function
1.
Display the Traffic Settings (Traffic Settings) screen.

(P.242)
2.
3.
Select Detour (Detour).

No.
Select to turn on or off the traffic information display.
When this button is selected, the system will not suggest

alternative routes.
Select to set to use real-time traffic information when

searching for a route. When searching for a new route,
or when it is necessary to search again based on the
traffic information received, it searches for merits to
avoiding the current traffic conditions.
Set so that confirmation is needed every time you
perform another search by delaying the timing when the
search is remade.
Select to open a list of types of traffic conditions, and
select the events to take into consideration when
searching for a route.
Function
When this button is selected, the system will suggest

alternative routes.
Adjust the timing before starting another route search.
(You can set 0 to 60 every 5 minutes)
Select to turn the route confirmation display on or off for
each new search.
NOTE
l Depending on the suggested route or traffic conditions,
alternative routes do not necessarily result in a shorter arrival
time.
242
docstructure.indb
242
2016/03/30
11:17:08
SETUP
n EVENT TYPES SETTINGS
MAP SETTINGS
1.
Display the Traffic Settings (Traffic Settings) screen.

(P.242)
2.
3.
4.
Select Event Types (Event Types).

Select an item from the event list.
1.
2.
3.

Select Map Settings (Map Settings).
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
No.
Fine tunes the map screen appearance. Because the map

is displayed on the screen, you can check the results as you
change settings.
Function
Select Considered (Considered) or Ignored (Ignored)
when searching for a route.
Select to turn the icon display on the map on or off.
The icon display does not appear when Considered
(Considered) is selected at All events in this category
will be: (All events in this category will be:).
No.
Function
Select to select the display mode from 2D north-up, 2D
heading-up or 3D.
243
docstructure.indb
243
2016/03/30
11:17:09
SETUP
No.
Function
UNITS AND FORMATS
Select to adjust the standard zoom and the angle of tilt.

You can set the level in three stages.
Sets the units used by the program to measure distance.
Select to turn the auto zoom function on or off.
You can select to display the time in various international

date formats.
Select to automatically reduce the scale of the 2D map

to display the entire route.
Select to select the screen color used in daytime mode.
Select to select the screen color used in nighttime mode.
1.
2.
3.

Select Units and Formats (Units and Formats).
Select to select the switches that display on the map.

Select to turn the path log save function on or off (saves
in positional order for each trip).
Select a spot displayed on the map during navigation.
Select the check box to show or hide the spot category.
Select the spot category name to open a sub-category.
More (More): Select to save the currently displayed
spot position, or read spot displays saved previously.
You can also restore the default display settings.
By turning ON the Auto Zoom (Auto Zoom) function,

Viewpoint (Viewpoint) and Automatic Overview
(Automatic Overview) cannot be set.
No.
Function
Select to enter the currency name.
Select to change the coordinate display format.
244
docstructure.indb
244
2016/03/30
11:17:14
SETUP
TRIP MONITOR
VISUAL GUIDANCE
Contains useful information on the users distance moved

in the trip logs and path logs. You can save trip logs
automatically by turning this setting on, or save them
manually when arriving at a destination. You can view all
logs on the trip monitor.
Changes settings related to map screen guidance.
1.
2.
3.
1.
2.
3.

Select Visual Guidance (Visual Guidance).

Select Trip Monitor (Trip Monitor).
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
No.
Function
Select to save a log automatically.

This line indicates the current size of the trip database.
This shows the total for all saved trip logs and path logs.
Select to save path logs (positional order acquired from
GPS receiver) in the trip log.
No.
Function
Select to set the data fields. Select the guidance you
want to display. You can select route data related to the
final destination or the next waypoint on the route.
245
docstructure.indb
245
2016/03/30
11:17:15
SETUP
No.
Function
Displays service area information while driving on the
expressway. Select to turn this function on and off.
Select to select the service area information display
items.
When information is available, lane information similar to
overhead road traffic signs is displayed at the top of the
map. Select to turn this function on and off.
When approaching an expressway exit or a complicated
intersection, the map switches to a 3D display if the
necessary information can be displayed. Select to turn
this function on and off.
Select to turn on the route progress bar which is
displayed as a straight line to the left of the map. This
shows the progress made on the current route. When
a blue arrow is used to indicate position, the arrow
continues to rise as you drive towards your destination.
Waypoints and traffic conditions are displayed on the
line.
246
docstructure.indb
246
2016/03/30
11:17:15
TIPS FOR THE NAVIGATION SYSTEM
GPS (GLOBAL POSITIONING

SYSTEM)
REGARDING ERRORS IN CURRENT
POSITION DISPLAY
LIMITATIONS OF THE NAVIGATION SYSTEM

This navigation system calculates the current position using
satellite signals, various vehicle signals, map data, etc.
However, an accurate position may not be shown depending
on satellite conditions, road configuration, vehicle condition
or other circumstances.
The GPS signal may be physically obstructed, leading to

inaccurate vehicle position on the map screen. Tunnels, tall
buildings, trucks, or even the placement of objects on the
instrument panel may obstruct the GPS signals.
The GPS satellites may not send signals due to repairs or
improvements being made to them.
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
The system displays the vehicle current position based on

GPS information and data from various sensors and road
maps. However, when the radiowave signals from GPS
satellites are weak or when signals are received from only
two satellites or less, errors may occur in the position.
Modifying or adjusting the system will not prevent these
errors.
The Global Positioning System (GPS) developed and

operated by the U.S. Department of Defense provides
an accurate current position, normally using 4 or more
satellites, and in some case 3 satellites. The GPS system
has a certain level of inaccuracy. While the navigation
system compensates for this most of the time, occasional
positioning errors of up to 300 ft. (100 m) can and should be
expected. Generally, position errors will be corrected within
a few seconds.
Even when the navigation system is receiving clear GPS

signals, the vehicle position may not be shown accurately or
inappropriate route guidance may occur in some cases.
247
docstructure.indb
247
2016/03/30
11:17:15
CAUTION
l The installation of window tinting may obstruct the GPS
signals. Most window tinting contains some metallic content
that will interfere with GPS signal reception of the antenna in
the instrument panel. We advise against the use of window
tinting on vehicles equipped with navigation systems.
Accurate current position may not be shown in the

following cases:
When driving on a small angled Y-shaped road.
When driving on a winding road.
When driving on a slippery road such as in sand,
gravel, snow, etc.
When driving on a long straight road.
When freeway and surface streets run in parallel.
After moving by ferry or vehicle carrier.
When a long route is searched during high speed
driving.
After repeating a change of direction by going
forward and backward, or turning on a turntable in
a parking lot.
When leaving a covered parking lot or parking
garage.
When a roof carrier is installed.
When the tires are worn.

After replacing a tire or tires.
When using tires that are smaller or larger than the
factory specifications.
When the tire pressure in any of the 4 tires is not
correct.
Inappropriate route guidance may occur in the
following cases:
When turning at an intersection off the designated
route guidance.
If you set more than 1 destination but skip any of
them, auto reroute will display a route returning to
the destination on the previous route.
When turning at an intersection for which there is
no route guidance.
When passing through an intersection for which
there is no route guidance.
During auto reroute, the route guidance may not be
available for the next turn to the right or left.
During high speed driving, it may take a long time
for auto reroute to operate. In auto reroute, a detour
route may be shown.
After auto reroute, the route may not be changed.
If an unnecessary U-turn is shown or announced.
When driving with tire chains installed.
248
docstructure.indb
248
2016/03/30
11:17:15
If a location has multiple names and the system

announces 1 or more of them.
When a route cannot be searched.
If the route to your destination includes gravel,
unpaved roads or alleys, the route guidance may
not be shown.
Your destination point might be shown on the
opposite side of the street.
When a portion of the route has regulations
prohibiting the entry of the vehicle that vary by time
or season or other reasons.
REGARDING ROADS AND PLACE NAME

DATA
When maps are created, land surveys are conducted
and information on road improvements and reopening
is collected to provide the most accurate information
possible. However, modifications to roads, place names and
facilities may be carried out at any time. Consequently, we
cannot guarantee that map data contains no errors in road
positions, configuration and names, or in facility names.
NOTE
l This navigation system uses tire turning data and is designed to
work with factory-specified tires for the vehicle. Installing tires
that are larger or smaller than the originally equipped diameter
may cause inaccurate display of the current position. The tire
pressure also affects the diameter of the tires, so make sure that
the tire pressure of all 4 tires is correct.
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
The road and map data stored in the navigation

system may not be complete or may not be the
latest version.
MAP DATA
249
docstructure.indb
249
2016/03/30
11:17:15
MEMO
250
docstructure.indb
250
2016/03/30
11:17:16
Siri/VOICE
RECOGNITION
SYSTEM
251
docstructure.indb
251
2016/03/30
11:17:16
Siri
Siri
Siri
Siri is a function that allows your iPhone and iPod touch to
be used without any manual operation by connecting your
device to the unit.
To use Siri, connect your device via Bluetooth.
BEFORE USING Siri

This section describes the preparation required to use Siri.
Register your iPhone or iPod touch in the unit.
(P.174)
Connect your iPhone or iPod touch to the unit.
(P.182)
An iPhone and iPod touch data plan: If the data plan

for your iPhone and iPod touch does not provide for
unlimited data usage, additional charges from your
carrier may apply for accessing app-based connected
content via 3G, 4G, Wi-Fi, or 4G LTE wireless
networks.
Connection to the internet via 3G, 4G, Wi-Fi, or 4G
LTE networks.
NOTE
l Available operations will differ based on your iPhone and iPod
touch.
l Be careful not to exceed the data usage limits for your iPhone
and iPod touch. Doing so will result in additional data usage
charges from your phone carrier.
When using the hands-free system, turn Phone on

(Connected).
When listening to music, turn Phone and Audio
device on (Connected).
Enable Siri in your iPhone or iPod touch settings.
(See Apple website for details.)
252
docstructure.indb
252
2016/03/30
11:17:16
Siri
USING Siri
MICROPHONE
STEERING SWITCH
Talk switch
Press and hold the talk switch to start Siri.
To cancel Siri, press and hold the talk switch.
directly
into
the
Siri OPERATION
1.
2.
Press and hold the talk switch.

Speak when you hear the beep sound.
Siri/VOICE RECOGNITION SYSTEM
It is unnecessary to speak
microphone when using Siri.
253
docstructure.indb
253
2016/03/30
11:17:16
Siri
If required to say more, the system will notify you with

the beep sound. Continue speaking.
If the system fails to recognize what is being said, or
, or press
to request a different operation, select
the talk switch.
To cancel Siri, select Cancel (Cancel), or press and
hold the talk switch.
NOTE
l Siri cannot be started while placing or receiving hands-free
calls with your iPhone and iPod touch (including while holding
incoming calls), or while having a hands-free conversation.
l Siri cannot be used while using the system's voice recognition
function. Start Siri after exiting the voice recognition function.
l The system screen will display the calling screen when a handsfree call is placed.
l Unit operation while using Siri will differ depending on your
iPhone or iPod touch.
l Siri may not recognize what is being said if:
Spoken too quickly.
Passengers are talking while using Siri.
The air conditioning speed is set high.
microphone.
NOTE
l In the following conditions, the system may not recognize what is
being said properly, and use of Siri may not be possible.
What is being said is incorrect or unclear. Note that certain
words, accents or speech patterns may be difficult for your
iPhone or iPod touch to recognize.
There is excessive background noise, such as wind noise.
l Functionality offered by Siri is dependent on the iOS version,
and as such, specifications may be subject to change without
prior notice.
ABOUT THE SUPPORTED DEVICES FOR Siri

n Supported iOS versions
iOS6 or later (6, 7)
n Supported models
iPhone 5
iPhone 4s
254
docstructure.indb
254
2016/03/30
11:17:17
VOICE RECOGNITION SYSTEM OPERATION
Press the talk switch to start the voice recognition

system.
The voice recognition system enables the navigation,

audio, hands-free systems, etc. to be operated using voice
commands.
To cancel voice recognition, press and hold the talk

switch or the source switch.
MICROPHONE
Refer to the command list for samples of voice commands.

(P.261)
STEERING SWITCH
It is unnecessary to speak directly

microphone when giving a command.
into
the
NOTE
Talk switch
l Wait for the confirmation beep before speaking a command.

l Voice commands may not be recognized if:
Spoken too quickly.
Passengers are talking while voice commands are spoken.
The air conditioning speed is set high.
microphone.
USING THE VOICE RECOGNITION SYSTEM
255
docstructure.indb
255
2016/03/30
11:17:17
NOTE
2.
Say the command.
l In the following conditions, the system may not recognize the

command properly and using voice commands may not be
possible:
The command is incorrect or unclear. Note that certain words,
accents or speech patterns may be difficult for the system to
recognize.
There is excessive background noise, such as wind noise.
1.
Press the talk switch.

After the voice recognition top screen has been
displayed, speech guidance will commence.
NOTE
l A caution display appears after pressing the talk switch while
an external device is connected and the stored data is being
read. Be sure to start the operation after the caution display
disappears.
l When the voice recognition mode is in audio mode, voice
guidance for the voice recognition system can be skipped by
pressing the talk switch.
Commands related with each function are displayed

on the screen of the each function tab. Some
commonly used commands are displayed on the
screen of the main tab. Even if any tab is selected, all
commands can be operated.
Selecting Help (Help) or saying Help prompts
voice guidance to offer examples of commands and
operation methods.
To cancel voice recognition, select Cancel (Cancel),
or press and hold the talk switch.
256
docstructure.indb
256
2016/03/30
11:17:17
With navigation function:

To use the voice recognition system for navigation
function, say the command to change to the
navigation function first. (P.261)
This function is available when Voice Language
(Voice Language) is set to TTS voice. (P.38)
Voice recognition can be set on the Voice
Recognition
(Voice
Recognition)
screen.
(P.241)
l If the system does not respond or the confirmation screen does

not disappear, press the talk switch and try again.
l Selecting Voice Settings (Voice Settings) can be displayed
the Voice Settings (Voice Settings) screen. (P.193)
Voice Recognition Prompts (Voice Recognition Prompts) can
be set on the Voice Settings (Voice Settings) screen.
Some voice guidance can be canceled by setting voice
prompts to off. Use this setting when it is desirable to say a
command immediately after pressing the talk switch and
hearing a beep.
switch on the steering wheel to adjust the speech guidance
volume.
l The system's voice recognition function cannot be used while
using Siri. Start the voice recognition function after exiting Siri.
1.
2.

Say Play song <name>.
A confirmation screen will be displayed showing
the recognition result, and the system starts playing
music.
If multiple matching items are found, a selection
screen will be displayed. Say <number> or select
the number. The system then starts playing music.
NOTE
l The Gracenote database is only compatible with the SD*, USB
or iPod mode.
l An SD card*, USB memory or iPod must be connected to enable

track searching and playback. (P.42, 42)
l When an SD card*, USB memory or iPod is connected,

recognition data is created so tracks can be searched using
voice commands.
l Recognition data is updated under the following conditions:

When the SD card*, USB memory or iPod data has changed.
When the voice recognition language is changed. (P.188)
NOTE
VOICE COMMAND EXAMPLE: SEARCH FOR A

SONG
257
docstructure.indb
257
2016/03/30
11:17:17
NOTE
NOTE
l While the recognition data is being created or being updated, a

track search cannot be performed using a voice command.
l When the system recognizes multiple names from the contacts

list, a name candidate list will be displayed on the screen. If the
desired name is not displayed on the top of the screen, say or
select the number of the name from the candidate list (number 1,
number 2, etc.) to select a name from the candidate list.
l When a contact has multiple phone numbers registered in the
contacts list, a candidate list will be displayed. If the desired
phone number is not displayed on the top of the screen, say
or select the number of the desired phone number from the
candidate list (number 1, number 2, etc.) to select a phone
number from the candidate list.
VOICE COMMAND EXAMPLE: CALL NAME
1.
2.

Say Call <contacts> <phone types>.
If multiple matching items are found, a selection
screen will be displayed. Say <number> or select
the number.
NOTE
l In the same manner as it is displayed on the screen, Call
<contacts> <phone types> (Call <contacts> <phone types>),
after saying Call a contact say the name, or the name and
type of phone, of a contact.
For example: Call a contact, John Smith or Call a
contact, Mary Davis, Mobile
l There are 4 types of phones: Home, Mobile, Work and Other.
l Short or abbreviated names in the contacts list may not be
recognized. Change names in the contacts list to full names.
l Sometimes a voice recognition result confirmation screen will be
displayed. After confirming the result, say Yes or No.
VOICE COMMAND EXAMPLE: DIAL NUMBER
1.
2.
3.

Say Call a number.
Say Call <number>.
Say the phone number one digit at a time.
For example, if the phone number is 4251231234:
Say four two five one two three one two three
four.
258
docstructure.indb
258
2016/03/30
11:17:17
4.
When the confirmation screen appears, say Yes,

select Yes (Yes), or press the
switch on the
steering wheel.
Try saying the complete number. If it is not
recognized, however, numbers can be added,
deleted, or changed.
VOICE COMMAND EXAMPLE: ENTERING

ADDRESS WITH NAVIGATION FUNCTION
Say Go to navigation.
Say Destination.
Say Address.
Due to natural language speech recognition technology, this

system enables recognition of a command when spoken
naturally. However, the system cannot recognize every
variation of each command. In some situations, it is possible
to omit the command for the procedure and directly state the
desired operation. Not all voice commands are displayed in
the function menu.
NOTE
l If the command cannot be recognized completely, the command
input screen will be displayed. (Search results will be shown
based on the part of the command that was recognized.)
Say the whole address without any pauses between

<house
number><street
name><city
and
state>. If there are any pauses between parts of the
destination address, the system may not be able to
recognize voice command operation.
1.
2.
3.
4.
CASUAL SPEECH RECOGNITION
259
docstructure.indb
259
2016/03/30
11:17:18
EXPRESSION EXAMPLES FOR EACH FUNCTION

Command
Expression examples
Call by specifying
contact
Phone the <phone types> number of

<contacts>,
Ring <contacts> s <phone types>
number
Call by specifying
phone number
Phone <phone number>
Search artists to
listen to song
Put on the artist <name>,

Listen to the singer <name>
Search album names

to listen to song
Listen to <name> album,

Play me the album <name>
Use navigation
function*
Go to GPS,
Go to address entry
260
docstructure.indb
260
2016/03/30
11:17:18
COMMAND LIST
COMMAND LIST
Recognizable voice commands and their actions are shown
below.
Frequently used commands are listed in the following
tables.
For devices that are not installed in the vehicle, the
related commands will not be displayed in the screen.
Also, according to conditions, other commands may
not be displayed in the screen.
Voice recognition
(P.188)
language
can
be
NOTE
l The notations used in the commands are as follows.
[, rrr]: Commands that need not to be spoken
rrr: Numbers, titles, or names to be spoken
changed.
Voice command
Phrase
Function
System pause
pause
Pause the current

voice interaction
System back
[go] back
Go back one
hierarchy
System cancel
cancel
Cancel the current

task
System help
help
Ask for help with

the current task
System start over
start over
Start the current

task over
Page change
first page, last

page, previous
page, next page
Change display
page
The functions available may vary according to the

system installed.
XBasic command
261
docstructure.indb
261
2016/03/30
11:17:18
COMMAND LIST
XCommands for changing the mode
XCommands for changing the audio mode

Voice command
Phrase
Function
Voice command
Phrase
Function
AM mode
change
play AM, select AM
Switch to AM
mode
Hands-free mode
change
[go to] phone, phone

screen, phone menu
Switch to HF mode
FM mode change
play FM, select FM
Switch to FM
mode
Audio mode
change
go to audio
Switch to audio
mode
SiriusXM radio
mode change
play XM, select XM
Switch to SiriusXM
mode
aha mode
change
go to aha
Switch to aha
mode
CD mode change
play CD, select CD
Switch to CD
mode
Pandora*1 mode
change
go to Pandora
Switch to Pandora
mode
USB mode
change
play USB, select USB
Switch to USB
mode
Climate mode
change
[go to] AC, [go to]

climate control
Switch to climate
mode
SD mode
change*
play microSD, select

microSD
Switch to SD
mode
Navigation mode
change*2
iPod mode
change
Switch to the voice

command on NAV
system
play iPod, select iPod
Switch to iPod
mode
navigation,
go to navigation,
go to NAV system
AUX mode
change
select AUX
Switch to AUX
mode
Audio off mode

change
audio off, turn off audio
Turn off the Audio
Audio on mode
change
audio on, turn on audio
Turn on the Audio
262
docstructure.indb
262
2016/03/30
11:17:18
COMMAND LIST
XCommands for Hands-free
XCommands for Pandora*

*: Pandora is available in the United States, Australia, and New Zealand.
Voice command
Phrase
Function
redial, call again, dial

again
Call back
call back, return phone

call

phone number of
latest incoming call
Recent calls
[show] recent calls
Displays the call

history screen
Dial number
calling
call <phone number>,

dial <phone number>
Places a call to
the said phone
number
Call by name
and type
call <contacts>
<phone types>,
dial <contacts> on
<phone types>
Place a call to the

said phone type of
the contact from
the phone book
List message
list messages, list

<messagetypes>
messages
Displays e-mails
Call
call
Ignore
ignore
Read
read
Reply
reply
Voice command
Phrase
Function
Pandora mode
change
play Pandora stations
Switch to Pandora
mode
List Pandora
stations
list Pandora stations
List Pandora
stations
Thumb up
like, thumbs up
Mark Like flag
Thumb down
dislike, thumbs down
Mark Dislike flag

and skip to the
next song
Redial

phone number of
the latest outgoing
call
XCommands for aha

Voice command
Phrase
Function
aha mode
change
play aha stations
Switch to aha
mode
List aha stations
list aha stations
List aha stations
Like on/off
like/unselect like,
thumbs up/unselect
thumbs up
Mark Like flag/

Unmark it
This can be used

when receiving
messages
263
docstructure.indb
263
2016/03/30
11:17:18
COMMAND LIST
Voice command
Dislike on/off
Go*
Map
Call
Refresh
Phrase
Function
dislike/unselect dislike,
thumbs down/unselect
thumbs down
Mark Dislike flag/

Unmark it
go there, route,
guidance, take me
there
When station
has location
information, user
can say go to
navigation.
check in, mark location
Location
information
obtained from
GPS updated to
server
call, dial it
Making a call from

a content (with
phone info)
refresh, reload screen
Refresh the
selected station
to get the latest
information
XCommands for climate

Voice command
Phrase
Function
Auto
auto mode on, turn on

auto mode
Auto mode on
Temperature+
increase the
temperature,
warm it up
Relative
temperature
increase
Temperature-
decrease the
temperature,
make it colder
Relative
temperature
decrease
Direct fan
settings
change the fan to low,

change the fan to
[setting] <fanspeed>
Direct fan settings
Fan+
increase the fan speed
Increase the fan

speed
Fan-
decrease the fan speed
Decrease the fan

speed
Direct
temperature
settings
change the temperature

to <temperature>
Direct temperature
settings
Max A/C
maximize the AC, AC to

full blast
AC maximize
264
docstructure.indb
264
2016/03/30
11:17:18
COMMAND LIST
XCommands for AM control

Voice command
Phrase
XCommands for SiriusXM Radio Control

Function
tune to AM
<frequencies>
Designate the
frequency to
switch to a specific
radio station
Preset number
tuning
tune to preset
<number>
Select a preset
channel to switch
to a specific radio
station
Phrase
Function
Direct frequency
tuning
tune to FM
<frequencies>
Designate the
frequency to
switch to a specific
radio station
Preset number
tuning
tune to preset
<number>
Designate the
preset channel to
switch to specific
radio station
tune to preset
<number>
Function
Designate the
preset channel to
switch to specific
radio station
XCommands for HD Radio Control

Voice command
Tune to HD
Radio station
XCommands for FM control

Voice command
Preset number
tuning
Phrase
Phrase
play <FM frequencies*>
<HDsubchannels*>
Function
Direct frequency
tuning
Voice command
Select an HD
Radio station
*: Say the name of the actual radio station.
265
docstructure.indb
265
2016/03/30
11:17:18
COMMAND LIST
XCommands for MP3/WMA/AAC, USB, SD* Control
XCommands for iPod Control
Voice command
Voice command
Phrase
Phrase
Function
Artist music
selection
play artist <artists>
Select a song by
artist name
Album music
selection
play album <albums>
Select a song by
album name
Song music
selection
play song <songs>
Select a song by
track name
Genre music
selection
play genre <genres>
Select a song by
genre name
Function
Artist music
selection
play artist <artists>
Select a song in
the iPod by artist
name
Album music
selection
play album <albums>
Select a song in
the iPod by album
name
Song music
selection
play song <songs>
Select a song in
the iPod by track
name
Genre
music selection
play genre <genres>
Select a song from

the iPod by genre
name
Playlist music
selection
play playlist <playlists>
Select a song from

the iPod by Playlist
name
Podcast music
selection
play podcast
<podcasts>
Select a song
from the iPod by
Podcast name
Audiobook music
selection
play audiobook
<audiobooks>
Select a song
from the iPod by
Audiobook name
266
docstructure.indb
266
2016/03/30
11:17:18
COMMAND LIST
XCommands for navigation mode*
Voice command
Voice command
Accept
Phrase
accept
[find, search for, look

for] [a] motel
Accepts questions
(such as talkback)
[find, go to, search

for, look for] [an]
accommodation at the
destination
Accommodation
at my destination
[find, go to, search for,

look for] [a] hotel at the
destination

for, look for] [an]
accommodation along
[the] route
Accommodation
along route

look for] [a] hotel along
[the] route
look for] [a] motel along
[the] route

look for] [a] hotel at my
destination
Searches for
accommodations
along the route
Searches for
accommodations
around the
destination
Narrows down POI

search targets to
accommodations

look for] [a] hotel
Function

for, look for] [an]
accommodation at my
destination
Function

for] accommodation
Accommodation*
Phrase

look for] [a] motel at my
destination
look for] [a] motel at the
destination
267
docstructure.indb
267
2016/03/30
11:17:18
COMMAND LIST
Voice command
Phrase
Function

for, look for] [an]
accommodation near
here
Voice command
Address

for, look for] [an]
accommodation nearby
Accommodation
near here

for, look for] [an]
accommodation around
here
look for] [a] hotel near
here
[find, enter, search for,

look for] [an] address
avoidances
Searches for
accommodations
around the current
position
Avoidances
avoid
bypass
along [the] route
Along route

for, look for] [a] hotel
nearby
for, look for] [a] hotel
around here
Phrase
around [the] route

near [the] route
At my destination
[at, near, close to,

around] [my, the]
destination
Function
Transits to the
screen that allows
you to search for
the destination
by reading the
address
Transits to the
screen that allows
you to set detour
routes
Narrows down
the selected POI
search candidates
to places along the
route
Narrows down
the selected POI
search candidates
to places around
the destination
268
docstructure.indb
268
2016/03/30
11:17:18
COMMAND LIST
Voice command
Phrase
Function
back
Transits to the
previous screen
Bottom
[go, jump, move, scroll]

[to] [the] bottom
Transits to the
bottom of the list
cancel
Exits from the

voice recognition
mode and transits
to the map, main
or other menu
Cancel
Go
cancel [my, the] route

Delete
delete
Down
[page, scroll, move]

down
[find, select, search for,
look for] [a] favorite
Favorite
[find] favorites
go
Function
Reflects the
selected route
and starts the
navigation
guidance
go to [the] map
Go map
[screen] show [me]

[the] map
Transits to the
Map screen
[screen] back to [the]

map
delete [my, the] route

Cancel route
Phrase
Back
Voice command
Deletes the route

that has been set
Moves the list on

the list screen one
page down
Selects the
conditions to set
the destination
from your favorite
spots
Help
Half
help
Transits to the
voice recognition
modes help
screen
half
Reduces the
detour distance set
on the avoid route
screen by half
269
docstructure.indb
269
2016/03/30
11:17:18
COMMAND LIST
Voice command
History
Less
Phrase
[find] [in] history
less
[line] 1
Line 1
first [line]
[line] 2
Line 2
second [line]
Function
Sets the
destination from
the search history
results
Voice command
[line] 3
Line 3
third [line]
Reduces the
detour distance set
(on the avoid route
screen)
Selects the item
listed in the first
line of the list
(on the screen
where the list is
displayed)
Selects the item
listed in the
second line of the
list (on the screen
where the list is
displayed)
Phrase
[line] 4
Line 4
fourth [line]
Function
Selects the item
listed in the third
line of the list
(on the screen
where the list is
displayed)
Selects the item
listed in the fourth
line of the list
(on the screen
where the list is
displayed)
Middle

[to] [the] middle
Transits to the
middle of the list
(on the screen
where the list is
displayed)
More
more
Transits to the
information list
reception screen
270
docstructure.indb
270
2016/03/30
11:17:18
COMMAND LIST
Voice command
Phrase
Function
Voice command
[near] here
nearby
Near here
around here
Narrows down
the selected POI
search candidates
to places along the
route
Parking along
route
in the neighborhood
new route
Registers
the selected
destination as a
new destination
Next
next
Transits to the next

screen
no
No
nope
nop
Rejects questions
or other contents
spoken to you

look for] [a] parking [lot]
[along, around, near,
on] [the] route
look for] [a] car park
[lot] [along, around,
near, on] [the] route
Function
Searches for
parking lots along
the route

at my destination
Parking at my
destination

at the destination
look for] [a] car park at
my destination
New route
Phrase
Searches for
parking lots around
the destination

look for] [a] car park at
the destination
271
docstructure.indb
271
2016/03/30
11:17:18
COMMAND LIST
Voice command
Phrase
Function

near here
Voice command
Parking*

nearby
Parking near
here

around here
near here
nearby
Phrase
look for] [a] parking
[lot] [find, go to, search
for, look for] [a] car park
look for] [a] place
Searches for
parking lots
around the current
position

for] places
Place

look for] [a] point of
interest
look for] [a] POI
Function
Narrows down POI
search targets to
parking lots
Selects POI
search as the
destination search
method (POI
search method
searches only
for gas stations,
accommodations,
parking lots and
restaurants.)

around here
272
docstructure.indb
272
2016/03/30
11:17:18
COMMAND LIST
Voice command
Phrase
Function
Voice command
route info
Route info
route information
route summary
info
Info
information
Reads the route

information that
has been set
(after the voice
recognition mode
is turned off )
Restaurant along
route
[my, change] route
Restaurant*

look for] [a] restaurant
for] food
Transits to the
route editing
screen
Narrows down POI
search targets to
restaurants

for] food along [the]
route
Searches for
restaurants along
the route
Restaurant at my
destination

at the destination
[find, search for,
look for] food at my
destination
route options

along [the] route
Function

at my destination
summary
Route
Phrase
Searches for
restaurants around
the destination
[find, search for,

look for] food at the
destination
273
docstructure.indb
273
2016/03/30
11:17:19
COMMAND LIST
Voice command
Phrase
Function
Voice command

look for] [a] gas station

near here
Gas station*

nearby
Restaurant near
here

around here
for] food near here
Phrase
Searches for
restaurants
around the current
position

for] food nearby
Gas station along

route

for, look for] [a] petrol
[station]
along [the] route
[station] along [the]
route
Function
Narrows down POI

search targets to
gas stations
Searches for gas

stations along the
route

for] food around here
Read out
read [it] out
Reads the search

results on the list
displayed on the
screen
274
docstructure.indb
274
2016/03/30
11:17:19
COMMAND LIST
Voice command
Gas station at
my destination
Phrase
Function
Voice command
Phrase

at my destination

near here

at the destination

nearby

for, look for] [a]
petrol [station] at the
destination
Searches for gas

stations around
the destination
Gas station near
here

around here
[station] near here
Searches for gas

stations around
the current
position

for, look for] [a]
petrol [station] at my
destination
Function

[station] nearby
[station] around here
275
docstructure.indb
275
2016/03/30
11:17:19
COMMAND LIST
Voice command
Top
Up
Waypoint
Where am I
Phrase
Function

[to] [the] top
Transits to the top

of the list (on the
screen where the
list is displayed)
[page, scroll, move] up
Moves the list one

page up (on the
screen where the
list is displayed)
waypoint
Registers
the selected
destination as a
relay point
where am I
Displays the
vehicle position
information (When
there is a self-car
location in the
location besides
the road, this
function cant be
used.)
Voice command
Phrase
Function
yes
Yes
yep
Accepts questions
or other contents
spoken to you
yeah
*: Searches for candidates close to your vehicles position.
Commands on the touch screen that cannot be

operated have their colors toned down.
276
docstructure.indb
276
2016/03/30
11:17:19
10
APPENDIX/WHAT TO
DO IF/INDEX
10
277
docstructure.indb
277
2016/03/30
11:17:19
MAP DATABASE INFORMATION AND UPDATES
278
docstructure.indb
278
2016/03/30
11:17:20
APPENDIX/WHAT TO DO IF/INDEX
10
279
docstructure.indb
279
2016/03/30
11:17:21
280
docstructure.indb
280
2016/03/30
11:17:22
CERTIFICATION
CERTIFICATION
CERTIFICATION
SiriusXM Satellite Radio
SiriusXM DATA SERVICE

Neither SiriusXM nor Subaru is responsible for any errors
or inaccuracies in the SiriusXM data services or its use in
vehicle.
XU.S.A.
FCC ID: BABFT0054A
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
WARNING
2013 SiriusXM Radio Inc. Sirius, XM and all related

marks and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM Radio
Inc. All other marks, channel names and logos are the
property of their respective owners.
RADIO WAVE COMMUNICATIONS
l FCC WARNING
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the users authority to
operate the equipment.
l CAUTION: Radio Frequency Radiation Exposure
This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits
set forth for an uncontrolled environment and meets the FCC
radio frequency (RF) Exposure Guidelines. This equipment
should be installed and operated keeping the radiator at
least 20cm or more away from persons body in normal use
position.
l Co-location: This transmitter must not be co-located or
operated in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.
10
281
docstructure.indb
281
2016/03/30
11:17:22
CERTIFICATION
XCanada
IC: 2024B-FT0054A
This device complies with Industry Canada licenceexempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference, including interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
Le prsent appareil est conforme aux CNR dIndustrie
Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de
licence. Lexploitation est autorise aux deux conditions
suivantes : (1) lappareil ne doit pas produire de
brouillage, et (2) lutilisateur de lappareil doit accepter
tout brouillage radiolectrique subi, mme si le brouillage
est susceptible den compromettre le fonctionnement.
WARNING
l CAUTION: Radio Frequency Radiation Exposure
This equipment complies with IC radiation exposure limits set
forth for an uncontrolled environment and meets RSS-102 of
the IC radio frequency (RF) Exposure rules. This equipment
should be installed and operated keeping the radiator at
least 20cm or more away from persons body (excluding
extremities: hands, wrists, feet and ankles).
ATTENTION : lexposition aux rayonnements radiofrquence
- Cet quipement est conforme aux limites dexposition
aux rayonnements nonces pour un environnement non
contrl et respecte les rgles dexposition aux frquences
radiolectriques (RF) CNR-102 de lIC. Cet quipement doit
tre install et utilis en gardant une distance de 20cm ou
plus entre le dispositif rayonnant et le corps ( lexception des
extrmits : mains, poignets, pieds et chevilles).
282
docstructure.indb
282
2016/03/30
11:17:22
CERTIFICATION
XMxico
Gracenote
Gracenote, Gracenote logo and logotype, and the
Powered by Gracenote logo are either registered
trademarks or trademarks of Gracenote, Inc. in the United
States and/or other countries.
RCPFUFT14-1151
La operacin de este equipo est sujeta a las siguientes
dos condiciones: (1) es posible que este equipo o
dispositivo no cause interferencia perjudicial y (2) este
equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interferencia,
incluyendo la que pueda causar su operacin no
deseada.
Music and recognition technology and related data are

provided by Gracenote.
Gracenote is the industry standard in music recognition
technology and related content delivery.
For more information, please visit www.gracenote.com.
10
283
docstructure.indb
283
2016/03/30
11:17:22
CERTIFICATION
Bluetooth
The Bluetooth word mark and logos are registered

trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of
such marks by Fujitsu Ten Limited is under license. Other
trademarks and trade names are those of their respective
owners.
microSDHC
microSDHC Logo is a trademark of SD-3C,LLC.
284
docstructure.indb
284
2016/03/30
11:17:23
CERTIFICATION
iPod
Made for iPod and Made for iPhone mean that an

electronic accessory has been designed to connect
specifically to iPod or iPhone respectively, and has been
certified by the developer to meet Apple performance
standards.
MirrorLink Certified, the Design Only Certification

Logo, MirrorLink and the MirrorLink Logo are
certification marks and trademarks of the Car Connectivity
Consortium LLC. Unauthorized use is strictly prohibited.
Pandora
iPhone, iPod, iPod classic, iPod nano, and iPod touch are
trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other
countries. Lightning is a trademark of Apple Inc.
App Store is a service mark of Apple Inc.
Pandora, the Pandora logo, and the Pandora trade dress

are trademarks or registered trademarks of Pandora
Media, Inc. Used with permission.
Google
Google Play is a trademark of Google Inc.
Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device

or its compliance with safety and regulatory standards.
Please note that the use of this accessory with iPod or
iPhone may affect wireless performance.
MirrorLinkTM
10
285
docstructure.indb
285
2016/03/30
11:17:24
HOW TO GET THE SOURCE CODE USING THE OPEN SOURCE
HOW TO GET THE SOURCE CODE USING THE OPEN SOURCE

This system implements software using the open source.
For customers who would like to get the source code of the
software, it is available by downloading it from the web site
of Clarion, Co., Ltd.
For details, refer to the following web site.
http://www.clarion.com/us/en/support/index.html
286
docstructure.indb
286
2016/03/30
11:17:24
WHAT TO DO IF
WHAT TO DO IF
TROUBLESHOOTING
RADIO OPERATION
Cause
Mismatch of time alignment- a user may hear

a short period of programming replayed or an
echo, stutter or skip.
The radio stations analog and digital volume

is not properly aligned or the station is in
ballgame mode.
None, radio broadcast issue. A user can

contact the radio station.
Sound fades, blending in and out.
Radio is shifting between analog and digital

audio.
Reception issue, may clear-up as the vehicle

continues to be driven. Turning the indicator
of the HD Radio button off can force radio in
an analog audio.
Audio mute condition when an HD2/HD3

multicast channel had been playing.
The radio does not have access to digital

signals at the moment.
This is normal behavior, wait until the digital

signal returns. If out of the coverage area,
seek a new station.
Audio mute delay when selecting an HD2/

HD3 multicast channel preset.
The digital multicast content is not available

until HD Radio broadcast can be decoded
and make the audio available. This takes up
to 7 seconds.
This is normal behavior, wait for the audio to

become available.
Broadcaster should be notified. Complete

the form;
www.ibiquity.com/automotive/report_radio_
station_experiences.
Text information does not match the present

song audio.
Action
Experience
10
287
docstructure.indb
287
2016/03/30
11:17:24
WHAT TO DO IF
Experience
Cause
No text information shown for the present

selected frequency.
Action
Broadcaster should be notified. Complete

the form;
www.ibiquity.com/automotive/report_radio_
station_experiences.
PHONE
If there is a problem with the hands-free system or a Bluetooth device, first check the table below.
XWhen using the hands-free system with a Bluetooth device
Page
Symptom
The hands-free system or Bluetooth

device does not work.
Likely cause
Solution
Cellular
phone
This
system
The connected device may not be a

compatible Bluetooth cellular phone.
For a list of specific devices which

operation has been confirmed on this
system.
www.subaru.com for details.
Outside of the USA customers,
contact your local dealer to arrange
a demonstration in order to confirm
whether or not the phone can be
paired with the vehicle.
178
The Bluetooth version of the

connected cellular phone may be
older than the specified version.
Use a cellular phone with Bluetooth

version 1.1 or higher (recommended:
Ver. 3.0 +EDR or higher).
178
*: For details, refer to the owners manual that came with the cellular phone.
288
docstructure.indb
288
2016/03/30
11:17:24
WHAT TO DO IF
XWhen registering/connecting a cellular phone

Page
Symptom
A cellular phone cannot be

registered.
Solution
Cellular
phone
This
system
An incorrect passcode was entered

on the cellular phone.
Enter the correct passcode on the

cellular phone.
The registration operation has not

been completed on the cellular phone
side.
Complete the registration operation

on the cellular phone (approve
registration on the phone).
Old registration information remains

on either this system or the cellular
phone.
Delete the existing registration

information from both this system and
the cellular phone, then register the
cellular phone you wish to connect to
this system.
181
Another Bluetooth device is already

connected.
Manually connect the cellular phone

you wish to use to this system.
182
Bluetooth function is not enabled on

the cellular phone.
Enable the Bluetooth function on the

cellular phone.
Automatic Bluetooth connection on

this system is set to off.
Set automatic Bluetooth connection

on this system to on when the ignition
switch is turned to the ACC or ON
position.
187
A Bluetooth connection cannot be

made.
Likely cause
10
289
docstructure.indb
289
2016/03/30
11:17:24
WHAT TO DO IF
XWhen making/receiving a call

Page
Symptom
A call cannot be made/received.
Likely cause
Your vehicle is in a No Service area.
Solution
Move into the service area.
Cellular
phone
This
system
XWhen using the phonebook

Page
Symptom
Likely cause
Solution
Cellular
phone
This
system
The profile version of the connected

cellular phone may not be compatible
with transferring phonebook data.
For a list of specific devices which

operation has been confirmed on this
system.
www.subaru.com for details.
Outside of the USA customers,
contact your local dealer to arrange
a demonstration in order to confirm
whether or not the phone can be
paired with the vehicle.
178
Automatic contact transfer function

on this system is set to off.
Set automatic contact transfer

function on this system to on.
135
Transfer operation on the cellular

phone has not completed.
Complete transfer operation on the

cellular phone (approve transfer
operation on the phone).
Automatic contact transfer function

on this system is set to on.
Set automatic contact transfer

function on this system to off.
135
Phonebook data cannot be

transferred manually/automatically.
Phonebook data cannot be edited.
290
docstructure.indb
290
2016/03/30
11:17:24
WHAT TO DO IF
XWhen using the Bluetooth message function

Page
Symptom
Messages cannot be viewed.
New message notifications are not

displayed.
Likely cause
Solution
Cellular
phone
This
system
Enable message transfer on the

cellular phone (approve message
transfer on the phone).
Automatic transfer function on this

system is set to off.
Set automatic transfer function on

this system to on.
142
Notification of SMS/MMS/E-mail
reception on this system is set to off.
Set notification of SMS/MMS/E-mail

reception on this system to on.
142
Automatic message transfer function

is not enabled on the cellular phone.
Enable automatic transfer function on

the cellular phone.
Message transfer is not enabled on

the cellular phone.
10
291
docstructure.indb
291
2016/03/30
11:17:24
WHAT TO DO IF
XIn other situations

Page
Symptom
The Bluetooth connection status is
displayed at the top of the screen
each time the ignition switch is turned
to the ACC or ON position.
Even though all conceivable

measures have been taken, the
symptom status does not change.
Likely cause
Solution
Cellular
phone
This
system
Connection confirmation display on

this system is set to on.
To turn off the display, set connection

confirmation display on this system
to off.
186
The cellular phone is not close

enough to this system.
Bring the cellular phone closer to this

system.
Turn the cellular phone off, remove

and reinstall the battery pack, and
then restart the cellular phone.
Enable the cellular phones Bluetooth

connection.
Stop the cellular phones security

software and close all applications.
Before using an application installed

on the cellular phone, carefully check
its source and how its operation
might affect this system.
The cellular phone is the most likely

cause of the symptom.
292
docstructure.indb
292
2016/03/30
11:17:24
ERROR MESSAGES
ERROR MESSAGES
If the following messages appear, check by referring to the cause and action below.
Mode
FM radio
HD Radio
Message
Cause
Action
Displayed when the FM radio signal

is lost (while accessing).
Try to receive the signal again in a

location free from obstructions.
No HD Radio signal available.

(No HD Radio signal available.)
The HD Radio reception is poor.

No channels available.
(No channels available.)
Displayed when the HD Radio signal

is lost (while accessing).

Saving the HD Radio tag was

unsuccessful.
(Saving the HD Radio tag was
unsuccessful.)
Failed to save the tag information.
Acquire the tag information again.
No stations available.
(No stations available.)
10
293
docstructure.indb
293
2016/03/30
11:17:24
ERROR MESSAGES
Mode
Message
Check Antenna
(Check Antenna)
Action
The SiriusXM antenna is not

connected.
Check whether the SiriusXM antenna

cable is attached securely.
Antenna Shorted (Antenna Shorted)
A short circuit occurs in the antenna

or the surrounding antenna cable.
See a SUBARU certified dealer for

assistance.
No Signal (No Signal)
The SiriusXM signal is too weak at

the current location.
Wait until your vehicle reaches a

location with a stronger signal.
Ch Unavailable (Ch Unavailable)
The channel you selected is no

longer available.
Wait for a few seconds until the

radio returns to the previous channel
or Ch 001. If it does not change
automatically, select another channel.
Ch Unsubscribed (Ch
Unsubscribed)
The current radio station is no longer

available due to changes in the
contract status.
Wait for a few seconds until the

radio returns to the previous channel
or Ch 001. If it does not change
automatically, select another channel.
Antenna Disconnected (Antenna

Disconnected)
SiriusXM
Cause
294
docstructure.indb
294
2016/03/30
11:17:24
ERROR MESSAGES
Mode
CD
USB
Message
Cause
Action
This indicates that no MP3/WMA/

AAC files are included in the disc.
Insert a disc on which playable music

data is recorded.
Check DISC (Check DISC)
It indicates that the disc is dirty,

damaged, or it was inserted upside
down.
Clean the disc or insert it correctly.
DISC Error (DISC Error)
There is a trouble inside the system.
Eject the disc.
No music files found. (No music files

found.)

AAC files are included in the USB
memory.
Connect a USB memory in which

playable music data is stored.
No video files found. (No video files

found.)
This indicates that there is no video

data in the USB memory.
Connect a USB memory in which

playable video data is stored.
USB Error (USB Error)
Because an over current was

detected.
Stop using the device for a short time

and then try again.

found.)
10
295
docstructure.indb
295
2016/03/30
11:17:24
ERROR MESSAGES
Mode
iPod
SD*1
Message
Cause
Action
No music files found.

(No music files found.)
This indicates that there is no music

data in the iPod.
Connect a iPod in which playable

music data is stored.
iPod Error.
(iPod Error.)
Playback failure or communication

abnormality.
detected.
Connect a iPod correctly.

(P.42)
Stop using the device for a short
time and then try again.
Please check the iPod firmware

version.
(Please check the iPod firmware
version.)
This indicates that the software

version is not compatible.
Perform the iPod firmware updates

and try again.
iPod authorization has failed.

(iPod authorization has failed.)
This indicates that it failed to

authorize the iPod.
Please check your iPod.
iPod storage is full. Tags cannot be

stored.
(iPod storage is full. Tags cannot be
stored.)
There is no space remaining in the

iPod memory.
Connect an iPod with space

remaining in its memory.

found.)

AAC files are included in the SD card.
Insert a SD card in which playable

music data is stored.
No video files found. (No video files

found.)
This indicates that there is no video

data in the SD card.
Insert a SD card in which playable

video data is stored.
SD Error. (SD Error.)

detected.
Stop using the SD card for a short

time and then try again.
296
docstructure.indb
296
2016/03/30
11:17:24
ERROR MESSAGES
Mode
Bluetooth Audio
Message
Music tracks not supported. Please
check your audio player. (Music
tracks not supported. Please check
your audio player.)
The SUBARU STARLINK

application has not been installed
on your smartphone.
Your smartphone power was turned
OFF.
The Bluetooth connection has been
lost.
The signal quality is weak.
Lines are congested.
Install the SUBARU STARLINK

application.
Turn ON the your smartphone
power.
Check the Bluetooth connection.
Move the car and connect to
SUBARU STARLINK again.
Wait a short while and connect to
SUBARU STARLINK again.
Start the SUBARU STARLINK
application on your smartphone,
check the service availability, and
then reconnect.
Information acquisition error.

(Information acquisition error.)
When not able to get the requested

information.
Please try again (Refresh etc.) later

or reconnect it.
Poor wireless reception. (Poor

wireless reception.)
When a communication error has

been detected.
Please try again in a better

communications environment.
Entry not recognized. (Entry not

recognized.)
When an invalid operation has been

executed.

or reconnect it.
The station list cannot be acquired.

(The station list cannot be acquired.)
When not able to get the station

information.

or reconnect it.
Bluetooth disconnected, please

reconnect and try again.
Check the device settings.

Connect a device that is compatible
with audio playback.
Smartphone data connection is poor,

please try to connect again.
aha
Action
A device that is incompatible with

audio playback was connected.
Please disconnect mobile device

and install the SUBARU STARLINK
application on your mobile device and
try again.
SUBARU
STARLINK
Cause
10
297
docstructure.indb
297
2016/03/30
11:17:24
ERROR MESSAGES
Mode
Message
Cause
Action
The content cannot be acquired.

(The content cannot be acquired.)
When not able to get the content

information.
When not able to switch to the Top
.
content when touching

or reconnect it.
Select the desired station again
when the station list appears.
Action not available. (Action not

available.)
When content-specific operations

such as fast forward or rewind are
not available.

or reconnect it.
Failed. (Failed.)
When data transmission failed when

touching
.
Please try again later.
aha communication error - Please

check Owner's Manual. (aha
communication error - Please check
Owner's Manual.)
When invalid data is received from

the aha application or there is no
response.
When the connection to the aha
application via Bluetooth is not
available.
When the data reception from this
unit is rejected.
Please try again (Refresh etc.)

later or reconnect it. If it is still not
improved, restart the aha application.
Please select the type of connection

in aha Settings. (Please select the
type of connection in aha Settings.)
When aha radio setting is set to

USB (USB) when the Android
device is going to be paired via
Bluetooth.
When you want to connect to the aha

application with the Android device,
select Bluetooth (Bluetooth) in
the aha radio setting from the setting
screen.
aha
298
docstructure.indb
298
2016/03/30
11:17:25
ERROR MESSAGES
Mode
Pandora*2
Message
Cause
Action
When no stations have been

registered.
Please register stations.
Your ratings information was not

saved. (Your ratings information was
not saved.)
When ratings information has not

been updated to the Pandora server.
Bookmark not saved. (Bookmark not

saved.)
When bookmark registration

information has not been updated to
the Pandora server.
Pandora is not available at your

current location. (Pandora is not
available at your current location.)
When Pandora is used in an area

where it is not available.
Please try again at a different

location.
The selected Pandora station is

no longer available. (The selected
Pandora station is no longer
available.)
When the selected station has been

deleted, or has expired.
Please select another station.
Pandora Error. (Pandora Error.)
When the Pandora server is

undergoing maintenance, or another
error has occurred.
No stations have been added to your

list. (No stations have been added to
your list.)

NOTE
l If the malfunction is not rectified: Take your vehicle to your SUBARU dealer.
10
299
docstructure.indb
299
2016/03/30
11:17:25
INDEX
INDEX
A
ahaTM by HARMAN .......................................................................152
AM radio .........................................................................................60
APPS (APPS) screen ................................................................... 23
Audio settings .................................................................................98
AUX ................................................................................................94
B
Bluetooth ......................................................................................174
Profiles ......................................................................................178
Registering Bluetooth audio device .......................................... 177
Registering Bluetooth phone .................................................... 174
Bluetooth audio...............................................................................91
Connecting Bluetooth devices .................................................. 182
Bluetooth phone message ............................................................ 127
CD ..................................................................................................78
Command list................................................................................261
D
Destination search screen ............................................................ 209
E
Eco monitor ..................................................................................170
Entering letters, numbers/list screen .............................................. 48
Entering letters/numbers............................................................. 48
List screen operation ..................................................................49
Error messages ............................................................................293
F
FM radio .........................................................................................60
Calling on Bluetooth phone .......................................................... 118

By call history............................................................................120
By contacts ...............................................................................121
By dial pad ................................................................................122
By off hook sw ..........................................................................123
By speed dial list .......................................................................120
By split screen ..........................................................................123
General settings ...........................................................................188

GPS ..............................................................................................247
Limitations.................................................................................247
Guiding the route ............................................................................31
H
HOME (HOME) screen ................................................................ 22
300
docstructure.indb
300
2016/03/30
11:17:26
INDEX
INFO (INFO) screen .....................................................................24

Info screen operation ...................................................................... 47
Reordering the menu icons......................................................... 47
Initial screen ...................................................................................38
iPod ................................................................................................84
Operating information ...................................................................101

CD player/disc ..........................................................................103
File information .........................................................................107
iPod...........................................................................................106
Radio ........................................................................................101
SD card .....................................................................................107
Terms ........................................................................................ 111
Overview buttons ............................................................................20
L
Loading/removing an SD card ........................................................ 42
Loading .......................................................................................42
Removing....................................................................................44
Pandora ........................................................................................158
Phone/message settings ..............................................................133
(Contact/Call History Settings) screen ................................. 135
Messaging Settings (Messaging Settings) screen ................. 142
Phone Display Settings (Phone Display Settings) screen ...... 143
Phone/Message Settings
(Phone/Message Settings) screen ...................................... 133
Sound Settings (Sound Settings) screen ............................... 134
Maintenance .................................................................................196
Map screen operation ...................................................................205
Current position display ............................................................ 205
Map scale .................................................................................206
Orientation of the map .............................................................. 207
Position marker .........................................................................208
Show map .................................................................................205
Memory points settings................................................................. 237
Saving destinations................................................................... 238
Setting up home........................................................................237
MirrorLinkTM...................................................................................150
10
301
docstructure.indb
301
2016/03/30
11:17:26
INDEX
Receiving on Bluetooth phone...................................................... 124

Incoming calls ...........................................................................124
Registering home ...........................................................................29
Route guidance screen................................................................. 224
Data fields .................................................................................225
Highway services ......................................................................227
Junction display ........................................................................228
Lane information/signs.............................................................. 226
Route overview .........................................................................226
Screen for route guidance ........................................................ 224
Standard map icon....................................................................224
Route related functions................................................................. 229
Adding destinations .................................................................. 230
Avoidances setting....................................................................233
Changing route .........................................................................233
Creating a route ........................................................................235
Deleting destinations ................................................................ 231
Displaying change route ........................................................... 229
Editing route..............................................................................230
Reordering destinations ............................................................ 230
Route alternatives .....................................................................236
Setting a new starting point ...................................................... 234
Setting route preferences ......................................................... 231
Screen adjustment..........................................................................51
Day and night mode....................................................................52
SD card...........................................................................................87
Search operation ..........................................................................210
Coordinates ..............................................................................219
Favorites ...................................................................................218
Find address ............................................................................. 211
Find on map ..............................................................................218
Find places ...............................................................................214
Frequently used destination ..................................................... 219
History.......................................................................................219
Setting home as destination ..................................................... 211
Setting Bluetooth details ...............................................................179
Bluetooth Settings (Bluetooth Settings) screen ...................... 179
Connecting................................................................................182
Deleting.....................................................................................181
Editing .......................................................................................184
Registering................................................................................180
System Settings (System Settings) screen ............................ 186
Setting home as the destination ..................................................... 32
SETTINGS (SETTINGS) screen .................................................. 28
Siri ................................................................................................252
302
docstructure.indb
302
2016/03/30
11:17:26
INDEX
U
USB memory ..................................................................................81
V
Vehicle customization ...................................................................194
Vehicle monitor .............................................................................169
Voice recognition system ................................................................ 59
Voice settings ...............................................................................193
SiriusXM radio data service .......................................................... 162

Fuel information ........................................................................168
Sports information.....................................................................162
Stock information ......................................................................167
Weather information ................................................................. 163
SiriusXM satellite radio ................................................................. 69
Split screen .....................................................................................25
Split screen operation .....................................................................47
Customizing ................................................................................48
Starting route guidance ................................................................ 222
Canceling ..................................................................................223
Route simulation .......................................................................222
Starting .....................................................................................222
Status display .................................................................................26
Steering switches ...........................................................................96
SUBARU STARLINK .................................................................... 149
T
Talking on Bluetooth phone .......................................................... 125
Incoming call waiting................................................................. 127
Sending tones ...........................................................................126
Transmit volume setting............................................................ 126
Touch screen gestures ................................................................... 45
Touch screen operation .................................................................. 46
Traffic information .........................................................................208
Troubleshooting ............................................................................287
Typical voice guidance prompts ................................................... 228
10
303
docstructure.indb
303
2016/03/30
11:17:27
MEMO
304
docstructure.indb
304
2016/03/30
11:17:27
B2532BE-A.book
Foreword
Congratulations on choosing a SUBARU vehicle equipped with EyeSightTM.
EyeSight incorporates the latest driver assistance features available from
SUBARU, including such features as Adaptive Cruise Control, a Lead Vehicle Start
Alert and a Lane Departure and Lane Sway Warning, all of which are designed to
assist the driver in making decisions and increase driver comfort and
convenience. Initially, the operation and use of the various EyeSight features may
be unfamiliar to you. That is why we urge you to read this manual carefully before
using EyeSight. We also recommend that you first take the time to test EyeSight in
order to experience its features for yourself so that you can become familiar with
their operation.
Please keep in mind that it is the responsibility of drivers to operate their vehicles
safely at all times. Drivers should always remain alert and should never become
complacent while operating their vehicles because of the presence of EyeSight.
EyeSight is never a substitute for active driver involvement and it may not operate
optimally under all driving conditions.
This booklet is a supplement to the Owners Manual for your SUBARU vehicle and
contains a detailed description of EyeSight. It should be read in conjunction with
your Owners Manual so that you will gain a thorough understanding of the proper
operation of your vehicle.
The information, specifications and illustrations found in this booklet are those in
effect at the time of printing. FUJI HEAVY INDUSTRIES LTD. reserves the right to
change specifications and designs at any time without prior notice and without
incurring any obligation to make the same or similar changes on vehicles
previously sold.
Please keep this booklet together with your Owners Manual and leave it in the
vehicle at the time of resale. The next owner will need the information it contains.

is a registered trademark of FUJI HEAVY INDUSTRIES LTD.
Copyright 2016 FUJI HEAVY INDUSTRIES LTD.
B2532BE-A.book
EyeSight
About EyeSight .................................................................. 2
Pre-Collision Braking System........................................... 20
Adaptive Cruise Control ................................................... 32

Lane Keep Assist ............................................................. 54
Pre-Collision Throttle Management.................................. 62
Lane Departure Warning.................................................. 68

Lane Sway Warning ......................................................... 71
Lead Vehicle Start Alert ................................................... 74

Conventional Cruise Control ............................................ 75
List of buzzer sounds ....................................................... 85
EyeSight malfunction and temporary stop ....................... 86

Customizing functions ...................................................... 89
Message screen list ......................................................... 91
Troubleshooting ............................................................... 93
6
7
8
B2532BE-A.book
About EyeSight
EyeSight
EyeSight is a driving support system that uses a range of functions to assist the driver in
making decisions in order to provide for more safe and comfortable driving and to reduce
driver fatigue. Making use of images created by stereo cameras specially designed by
SUBARU, EyeSight detects the vehicle in front, obstacles, traffic lanes and other items.
WARNING
Drivers are responsible for driving safely. Always comply with all
traffic rules and regulations regardless of the fact that your vehicle
is equipped with EyeSight. Always maintain a safe following distance behind the vehicle in front of you, pay attention to your surroundings and the driving conditions, operate the brake pedal and
take other action as necessary in order to maintain a safe following
distance.
Never attempt to drive relying on EyeSight alone.
EyeSight is intended to assist the driver in making decisions in
order to reduce the chance of accidents or damage and lessen the
burden on the driver.
When a warning is activated, pay attention to what is in front of you
and to your surroundings, operate the brake pedal and take other
action as necessary.
This system is not designed to support driving in poor visibility or
in extreme weather conditions, or to protect against careless driving when the driver is not paying complete attention to the road
ahead. It also cannot prevent collisions from occurring in all driving
conditions.
There are limits to the EyeSight recognition performance and control performance. Be sure to read the instructions for each function
before using the system, and always use it properly. Improper use
may lead to failure of control performance, which could cause an
accident.
Refer to the following pages for each function:
For the Pre-Collision Braking System, refer to page 20.

For Adaptive Cruise Control, refer to page 32.
For Pre-Collision Throttle Management, refer to page 62.
For Conventional Cruise Control, refer to page 75.
About EyeSight
The EyeSight system in your vehicle is designed for use in

countries in which traffic drives on the right-hand side of the road.
EyeSight for LHD vehicles such as yours is not designed for use in
countries in which vehicles are driven on the left-hand side of the
road.
The system may not operate correctly under the conditions listed below.
When these conditions occur, turn off the Pre-Collision Braking System.
Also, do not use Adaptive Cruise Control and Conventional Cruise Control.
- The tire pressure is not correct.*1
- The temporary spare tire is installed.*1
- Tires that are unevenly worn or tires with uneven wear patterns are
installed.*1
- Tires that are the wrong size are installed.*1
- Flat tires have been fixed temporarily with a tire repair kit.
- The suspension has been modified (including a genuine SUBARU suspension that has been modified).
- Any object that disturbs the stereo cameras view is installed on the vehicle.
- The headlights are dirty or they have snow and ice or dirt on them.
(Objects are not correctly illuminated and are difficult to detect.)
- The optical axes are not aligned correctly. (Objects are not correctly illuminated and are difficult to detect.)
- The lights including headlights and fog lamps have been modified.
- Vehicle operation has become compromised due to an accident or malfunction.
- The brake system warning light is illuminated in red.
- A heavy cargo is loaded onto or inside the vehicle.
- The maximum number of occupants is exceeded.
- There is something wrong with the combination meter; such as when the
lights do not illuminate, the beeps do not sound, the display is different
from when it is normal, etc.*2
*1: The wheels and tires have functions that are critically important. Be
sure to use the correct ones. For details, refer to the Owners Manual
for your vehicle.
*2: For details about the combination meter, refer to the Owners Manual
for your vehicle.
B2532BE-A.book
About EyeSight
CAUTION
The characteristics of the stereo cameras are similar to those of human
eyes. For this reason, conditions that make it difficult for the driver to see
in the forward direction have the same effect on the stereo cameras and
make it difficult for the system to detect vehicles, obstacles and traffic
lanes.
Detection by the EyeSight system is limited to objects that are within the
range of the stereo cameras field of view. Also, after an object enters the
range of the cameras field of view, it may take some time for the system
to detect it as a controllable target and warn the driver.
Low objects surrounding the vehicle

cannot be detected.
S01970
Under the conditions listed below, it will become more difficult for the system to detect the vehicle in front, motorcycles, bicycles, pedestrians and
obstacles on the road, and lane markers. Also, EyeSight may temporarily
stop operating. However, the temporary stop will be canceled once these
conditions have improved and the vehicle is driven for a short period of
time.
- Bad weather (for example heavy rain, a blizzard or thick fog). In particular, the system is more likely to temporarily stop operating when there is
an oil film adhering to the windshield, a glass coating has been applied
or old wipers are used.)
- When affected by strong light from the front (sunlight or headlight beams
of oncoming traffic, etc.)
- When the front windshield washer is being used.
- The windshield has become fogged, or snow, dirt, dust or frost has
adhered to it, reducing the stereo cameras field of view.
- The vehicle is tilted at an extreme angle due to loaded cargo or other
factors.
- When visibility is poor due to sand, smoke or water vapor in the air, or
when the vehicle in front or oncoming traffic causes water, snow, dirt or
other substances to obscure the view
- When the stereo cameras field of view is obstructed (for example by a
canoe on the roof of the vehicle)
B2532BE-A.book
About EyeSight
- When passing through the entrance or exit of a tunnel

- When the rear aspect of the vehicle in front is low, small or irregular (for
example a low bed trailer, etc.)
- When there is a fence, a wall or a shutter, etc. with a uniform pattern (a
striped pattern, brick, etc.) or with no pattern in front
- When there is a wall or door made of glass or a mirror in front
- When driving at night or in a tunnel when there is a vehicle in front that
does not have its taillights on
- When passing a banner or flag, low branches on a tree or thick/tall vegetation
- On steep uphill or downhill grades
- When the stereo cameras are obstructed by a hand, etc. (If even one of
the cameras is obstructed, the system does not operate properly.)
- When it is completely dark and no objects are detected
- When the area around the vehicle has a uniform color (such as when
completely covered in snow, etc.)
- When the stereo camera lenses are dirty due to fingerprints, etc.
- When accurate detection is not possible due to reflections in the front
windshield
- When the stereo cameras have become misaligned due to a strong
impact
Under the conditions listed below, EyeSight may temporarily stop operating. If this occurs, EyeSight will resume operating when the conditions
improve.
- The temperature inside the vehicle is high, such as after the vehicle was
left in bright sunshine, or the temperature inside the vehicle is low, such
as after the vehicle was left in an extremely cold environment.
- Immediately after the engine starts
When there is a malfunction in the EyeSight system, turn off the Pre-Collision Braking System ( refer to page 30) and the Lane Departure Warning
( refer to page 70), and stop using the Adaptive Cruise Control and Conventional Cruise Control. Contact a SUBARU dealer and have the system
inspected.
When the Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light is illuminated, the PreCollision Braking System may not operate properly. If the indicator light is
illuminated, turn off the Pre-Collision Braking System. Also, do not use the
Adaptive Cruise Control or Conventional Cruise Control.
B2532BE-A.book
About EyeSight
NOTE
EyeSight records and stores the following data when the Pre-Collision
Braking System is operated. It does not record conversations or other
audio data.
- Stereo camera image data
- Distance from the vehicle in front
- Vehicle speed
- Steering wheel turning angle
- Lateral movement with regards to the direction of travel
- Accelerator pedal operation status
- Brake pedal operation status
- Select lever position
- Odometer reading
- Data related to ABS, Vehicle Dynamics Control and Traction Control
Function
SUBARU and third parties contracted by SUBARU may acquire and use
the recorded data for the purpose of vehicle research and development.
SUBARU and third parties contracted by SUBARU will not disclose or
provide the acquired data to any other third party except under the following conditions.
The vehicle owner has given his/her consent.
The disclosure/provision is based on a court order or other legally
enforceable request.
Data that has been modified so that the user and vehicle cannot be
identified is provided to a research institution for statistical processing
or similar purposes.
B2532BE-A.book
About EyeSight
Handling of the Stereo Cameras

The stereo cameras are installed at the positions of the front map lights.
A Stereo cameras
S01107
CAUTION
A function is included that will automatically detect that the fronts of the
stereo cameras are dirty. However it is not 100% effective.
Under certain conditions, this function may fail to detect that the fronts of
the stereo cameras have become dirty. In addition, this function may not
detect that there is snow or ice on the windshield close to the stereo cameras. In such conditions, be sure to keep the windshield clean at all times
(indicated by
). Otherwise the system may not operate correctly.
When this function detects that the fronts of the stereo cameras are dirty,
no EyeSight functions are activated except for Conventional Cruise
Control.
The stereo camera is a precision component. Always observe the following
precautions especially when handling lenses.
- Never touch the stereo camera lenses, and do not attempt to wipe or
clean the lenses. Doing so could damage or soil the lens, and lead to
improper system performance.
If you ever touch a lens for any reason, be sure to contact a SUBARU
dealer.
Continued on next page
B2532BE-A.book
About EyeSight
Continued from previous page
- When cleaning the front

windshield, cover the front
of the camera casing with
paper that does not collect
dust, such as copy paper.
Affix the paper to prevent
glass cleaner from getting
on the camera lenses. At
this point, make sure that
the tapes adhesive surface does not come in
S01097
contact with the windshield
or the lens. Be sure to
remove the paper after cleaning.
- When having the inside of windshield cleaned at a service station, etc.,
be sure to request that the attendant covers the camera covers before
washing the vehicle.
- Do not subject the stereo cameras to a strong impact.
- Do not remove or disassemble the stereo cameras.
- Do not change the positions where the stereo cameras are installed or
modify any of the surrounding structures.
Do not install an interior rearview mirror other than a genuine SUBARU
rearview mirror (such as a wide-type mirror) and the sun visor. Also, use
the rearview mirror so that it does not obstruct the stereo cameras. Failure
to do so may affect the stereo cameras field of view and could prevent the
EyeSight system from functioning properly.
S00509
About EyeSight
Do not install any accessories other than the ones designated by SUBARU on
the prohibited areas shown in the illustrations (grey zones).
Even if some accessories are installed on the outside of the prohibited areas,
abnormal operation of EyeSight may occur due to the reflection of the light or
any objects. In this situation, move the accessories. For details, contact a
SUBARU dealer.
<Side view>
<Front view>
Monitors or other accessories
S02068
Do not place any objects on top of the instrument panel. The stereo cameras
may not be able to detect objects accurately and the EyeSight system may not
function properly due to reflections in the front windshield. For details, contact a
SUBARU dealer.
If the top of the instrument panel is polished with chemicals or other substances, the stereo cameras may not be able to detect objects accurately and
the EyeSight system may not operate properly due to reflections in the front
windshield.
Do not install any wiper blades other than genuine SUBARU wiper blades.
Doing so may affect the stereo cameras field of view and could prevent the
EyeSight system from functioning properly.
Replace damaged wiper blades as soon as possible. The stereo cameras may
not be able to detect objects accurately and the EyeSight system may not function properly due to liquid remaining on the windshield.
Do not install any accessories
on the front side such as on the
hood or the grille. It may affect
the camera view and the system
may not operate correctly.
Make sure that the cargo loaded
on the roof does not obstruct or
interfere in the stereo cameras
field of view. Obstructing the
stereo cameras view may
impair the system operation. For
S01098
details, contact a SUBARU
dealer.
B2532BE-A.book
10
About EyeSight
Keep the windshield (outside and inside) clean at all times. When the windshield has become fogged, or it has a dirt or an oil film on it, the stereo
camera may not detect objects accurately and the EyeSight system may
not operate correctly. Never mount any device to the center air vent, as
any airflow change may impact EyeSight performance.
Do not place any stickers or accessories on the windshield (outside or
inside). If you have to do so (for example, legally required or electronic toll
tag), avoid the area directly in front of the camera. Doing so may adversely
affect the field of view of the stereo camera and can cause improper operation of the system. For details, contact a SUBARU dealer.
Do not use any glass coating agents or similar substances on the windshield. Doing so may prevent the system from operating correctly.
Do not install a film on the front windshield. The system may not operate
correctly.
If there are scratches or cracks on the front windshield, contact a SUBARU
dealer.
To have the front windshield replaced or repaired, contact a SUBARU
dealer. Do not install a front windshield other than a genuine SUBARU
front windshield. The stereo cameras may not be able to detect objects
accurately and the EyeSight system may not operate properly.
10
B2532BE-A.book
11
About EyeSight
EyeSight Functions
EyeSight includes the following functions.
Pre-Collision Braking System

This function uses a following distance warning feature to warn the driver to take evasive
action when there is the possibility of a collision with a vehicle or obstacle in front of the
drivers vehicle. If the driver still does not take evasive action, the brakes are quickly applied
automatically just before the collision in order to reduce the collision damage or, if possible,
prevent the collision.
Refer to page 20.
Adaptive Cruise Control

This function maintains the set vehicle speed and when there is a vehicle in front in the
same traffic lane, it tracks the speed of the vehicle in front up to the maximum of the set
vehicle speed.
Refer to page 32.
Lane Keep Assist

This function helps suppress lane drifting by detecting lane markings (e.g., white lines) on
highways, etc. and by assisting steering operation.
Refer to page 54.
Pre-Collision Throttle Management

This function reduces accidental forward movement caused by the select lever being placed
in the wrong position or the accelerator pedal being accidently depressed, or depressed too
strongly.
Refer to page 62.
Lane Departure Warning

This function warns the driver when the vehicle is about to depart the traffic lane during driving.
Refer to page 68.
Lane Sway Warning

This system detects vehicle drifting caused by driver fatigue, failure to concentrate on the
road, inattention, strong crosswinds or other factors, and warns the driver.
Refer to page 71.
11
12
About EyeSight
Lead Vehicle Start Alert

This function notifies the driver when the vehicle stopped in front starts moving but the
drivers vehicle remains stationary.
Refer to page 74.
Conventional Cruise Control

In this mode, the system maintains a constant vehicle speed. It does not track the vehicle in
front. This function can be used even when the stereo cameras have temporarily stopped
operating. ( Refer to page 87.) (This function is used by switching from Adaptive Cruise
Control to Conventional Cruise Control.)
Refer to page 75.
NOTE
EyeSight does not operate when the engine is not running.
12
B2532BE-A.book
13
About EyeSight
Instrument panel display layout

(1)
(14)
(13)
(2)
(12)
(3)
(11)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(10)
(8)
(15)
(16)
(9)
(24)
(17)
(18) (19) (20)
(21) (22)
(23)
S02321
* Display units can be changed in Screen Settings. For details, refer to the Owners Manual for your vehicle.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
EyeSight display area

Adaptive Cruise Control indicator
Conventional Cruise Control indicator
READY indicator
OFF indicator
SET indicator
HOLD indicator
Lane indicator
Set vehicle speed display
Your vehicle indicator
Lane keep Assist indicator
Following distance setting indicator
(13)
(14)
(15)
(16)
(17)
(18)
(19)
(20)
(21)
(22)
(23)
(24)
Lead vehicle indicator

Warning screen area
EyeSight temporary stop indicator (White)
EyeSight warning indicator (Yellow)
Electric parking brake indicator light
Lane Departure Warning OFF indicator light
Pre-Collision Braking System OFF indicator light
X-mode indicator
Brake system warning light
Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light
13
B2532BE-A.book
14
About EyeSight
CRUISE indicator
This indicator illuminates when the main cruise control is on.
: Adaptive Cruise Control (Adaptive Cruise Control indicator)
: Conventional Cruise Control (Conventional Cruise Control indicator)
Refer to pages 38 and 75.
When Adaptive Cruise Control is set and the vehicle detects a car in front, this indicator
(white) turns green.
Refer to page 40.
SET indicator
illuminates when cruise control* is set.
* Adaptive Cruise Control and Conventional Cruise Control
READY indicator
illuminates when cruise control* can be set.
HOLD indicator
illuminates when the stay-stopped function is operated while Adaptive Cruise Control is
on.
Refer to page 46.
OFF indicator
illuminates when cruise control* has been automatically canceled.
Lead vehicle indicator

When Adaptive Cruise Control is set or when the vehicle is stopped, this indicator illuminates when a vehicle in front has been detected.
Refer to page 40.
This indicator flashes in the following cases.
- The Lead Vehicle Start Alert is active.
- The Pre-Collision Braking System is active.
- The brake more warning is active.
- Pre-Collision Throttle Management is active.
14
B2532BE-A.book
15
About EyeSight
Following distance setting indicator

Indicates the following distance setting that was set with the
setting) switch.
Refer to page 45.
(Following distance
Set vehicle speed display

Displays the set vehicle speed.
Your vehicle indicator

When the brake pedal is depressed or the brake control function is active, the brake light on
the indicator illuminates in red.
Lane Keep Assist indicator

This indicator illuminates when Lane Keep Assist is turned on by pressing the
(Lane
Keep Assist) switch.
While the Lane Keep Assist system is activated, if the vehicle travels across a lane
marker, the indicator turns from white to green.

This indicator illuminates and shows which position the select lever or the gear is in.
Lane indicator
When Lane Keep Assist is in the standby status or is operating, the lane indicator of the
detected lane will illuminate (left, right or both left and right).
Either the left or right indicator blinks depending on which side your vehicle is drifting
towards when Lane Departure Warning operates.
The left and right indicators alternately blink when Lane Sway Warning operates.
EyeSight warning indicator (yellow)

This indicator illuminates or flashes when a malfunction occurs in the EyeSight system.
When it is illuminated or flashing, none of the EyeSight functions can be used (including
Adaptive Cruise Control and the Pre-Collision Braking System, etc.).
Refer to page 86.
15
B2532BE-A.book
16
About EyeSight
EyeSight temporary stop indicator (white)

This indicator illuminates when the EyeSight system is temporarily stopped.
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, it will illuminate if the
(CRUISE) switch or
(Lane Keep Assist) switch are set to ON within approximately 7
seconds of the engine starting. It turns off when approximately 7 seconds have elapsed
since the engine started.
When it is illuminated, none of the EyeSight functions can be used except for Conventional Cruise Control.
Refer to page 87.

This indicator illuminates when the Lane Departure Warning and Lane Sway Warning are
off.
It also illuminates when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, and then approximately 7 seconds after the engine starts, the Lane Departure Warning will be turned off or
remain illuminated depending on the current status (ON or OFF).
Refer to page 70.

Illuminates when the Pre-Collision Braking System and Pre-Collision Throttle
Management are off.
It also illuminates when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, and then turns off
approximately 7 seconds after the engine starts.
Refer to page 31.

It illuminates when the engine starts and turns off within approximately 2 seconds.
It illuminates when the Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF switch is pressed and Vehicle
Dynamics Control is off. Refer to the Owners Manual for your vehicle.
Brake system warning light (red)

If the brake system warning light should illuminate while driving with the parking brake fully
released, turn off the Pre-Collision Braking System. Also, do not use Adaptive Cruise Control or Conventional Cruise Control.
Electronic parking brake indicator light

This indicator light illuminates when the electronic parking brake is applied.
Refer to the Owners Manual for details.
Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light

This indicator illuminates when the engine switch is turned to the ON position, and turns
off approximately 2 seconds after the engine is started. It will illuminate if there is a malfunction in the VDC electrical control system.
* Refer to the Owners Manual for details.
16
B2532BE-A.book
17
About EyeSight
Switch layout
(3)
(4)
(2)
(9) (10)
(1)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
S01984
(1)
(Lane Keep Assist) switch
(6)
switch
(2)
(7)
(Info)/SET switch
(3)
RES/+ switch
(8)
switch
(4)
SET/- switch
(9)
(Lane Departure Warning OFF) switch
(10)
(Pre-Collision Braking System OFF) switch
(5)
(Following distance setting) switch
(CRUISE) switch
17
B2532BE-A.book
18
About EyeSight
(CRUISE) switch
Switches cruise control* on/off.

When this switch is pressed
or
appears on the EyeSight display area in the
multi information display. This indicates that the main cruise control is turned on.
Can be used to cancel the cruise control.
RES/SET switch
SET/ Can be used to set cruise control*.
Can be used to reduce the set vehicle speed (when cruise control* is currently set).
Refer to pages 39 and 43 (for Adaptive Cruise Control).
Refer to pages 78 and 80 (for Conventional Cruise Control).
RES/+
After cruise control* is canceled, this switch can be used to resume the cruise control
function at the vehicle speed that was previously set.
Can be used to increase set vehicle speed (when cruise control* is currently set).
Refer to pages 42 and 51 (for Adaptive Cruise Control).
Refer to pages 79 and 84 (for Conventional Cruise Control).
(Following distance setting) switch
Can be used to switch the set following distance in 4 stages: (only when Adaptive Cruise
Control is on).
Refer to page 45.
When the
(CRUISE) switch is on, press and hold this switch for approximately 2
seconds or longer to select Adaptive Cruise Control or Conventional Cruise Control.
(Lane Keep Assist) switch
Switches Lane Keep Assist on/off.

Refer to page 58.
18
B2532BE-A.book
19
About EyeSight
switch/
switch
These are used in the following situations.

When switching the screen displayed on the multi information display.
When changing the Warning Volume settings, etc.
Refer to page 89.
(Info)/SET switch
This is used in the following situations.

When displaying the message that appeared in the warning screen area again.
Refer to page 91.
When changing the Warning Volume settings, etc.
Refer to page 89.
(Pre-Collision Braking System OFF) switch
Press and hold this switch for approximately 2 seconds or longer to turn off the Pre-Collision
Braking System and Pre-Collision Throttle Management.
When these functions are off, the Pre-Collision Braking System OFF indicator light on the
instrument panel illuminates.
Press and hold the switch again to turn on the Pre-Collision Braking System and PreCollision Throttle Management. This turns off the Pre-Collision Braking System OFF indicator light.
Refer to page 30.
(Lane Departure Warning OFF) switch
Press and hold this switch for approximately 2 seconds or longer to turn off the Lane
Departure Warning and Lane Sway Warning functions.
When these functions are off, the Lane Departure Warning OFF indicator light on the instrument panel illuminates.
Press and hold the switch again to turn on the Lane Departure Warning and Lane Sway
Warning functions. This turns off the Lane Departure Warning OFF indicator light.
Refer to page 70.
19
B2532BE-A.book
20

When there is the risk of a rear-end collision with an obstacle in front, the EyeSight system
helps to minimize or prevent a collision by warning the driver. If the driver still does not take
evasive action to avoid a collision, the brakes can be automatically applied just before the
collision in order to reduce impact damage, or if possible, prevent the collision. If the driver
takes evasive action to avoid a collision, Pre-Collision Brake Assist will operate in order to
help the driver to prevent the collision.
This system can be effective not only with direct rear-end collisions, but also with offset
rear-end collisions. This function can be activated when the select lever is in the D , M or
N positions.
WARNING
Never use the Pre-Collision Braking System and Pre-Collision Brake Assist to
stop your car or avoid a collision under ordinary conditions. These functions
cannot prevent collisions under all conditions. If the driver relies only on the
Pre-Collision Braking System for Brake operation, collisions may occur.
When a warning is activated, pay attention to the front of the vehicle and its
surroundings, and operate the brake pedal and/or take other actions if necessary.
The EyeSight Pre-Collision Braking System is primarily designed to prevent rear-end collisions with other vehicles when possible and to minimize
damage and injuries in the event of a collision. In addition to other vehicles, things such as motorbikes, bicycles and pedestrians can also be
treated as obstacles. However, there may be cases when detection is not
possible depending on a variety of conditions*2. For example, when a vehicle is viewed from the side, oncoming vehicle, vehicles approaching in
reverse, small animals or children, or walls or doors are not likely to be
detected.
The Pre-Collision Braking System will operate at the point when it determines that a collision cannot be avoided and is designed to apply strong
braking force just before a collision. The result of this varies depending on
a variety of conditions*2. Because of this, performance of this function will
not always be the same.
When the Pre-Collision Braking System is activated, it will continue to
operate even if the accelerator pedal is partially depressed. However, it will
be canceled if the accelerator pedal is deeply depressed.
If the driver depresses the brake pedal or turns the steering wheel, the system
may determine that this constitutes evasive action by the driver, and the automatic braking control may not activate in order to allow the driver full control.
When the difference in speed with the obstacle in front is the following figure*1 or more, it may not be possible to avoid a collision. Even if the speed
difference is the following figure*1 or less, in cases such as when another
vehicle cuts in front of you, or in other cases depending on visibility, the
condition of road surface and other factors*2, the function may be unable to
stop the vehicle or may not activate. Pre-Collision Brake Assist also may
not activate depending on the conditions*2 listed below.
*1:For vehicles: approximately 30 MPH (50 km/h),
For pedestrians: approximately 21 MPH (35 km/h)
*2:Conditions
- Distance to obstacle in front of you, speed difference, proximity conditions, lateral displacement (the amount of offset)
20
B2532BE-A.book
21
Vehicle conditions (amount of load, number of occupants, etc.)

Road conditions (grade, slipperiness, shape, bumps, etc.)
When visibility ahead is poor (rain, snow, fog or smoke, etc.)
When the detected object is something other than a vehicle, motorcycle,
bicycle or pedestrian
A domestic animal or other animal (a dog or deer, etc.)
A guardrail, telephone pole, tree, fence or wall, etc.
Even if the obstacle is a motorcycle, bicycle or pedestrian, depending on
the brightness of the surroundings as well as the relative movement, and
aspect or angle of the object, there may be cases when the system cannot detect it.
When the system determines that operation by the driver (based on
accelerator pedal operation, braking, steering wheel angle, etc.) is
intended as evasive action
Vehicle maintenance status (brake systems, tire wear, tire pressure,
whether a temporary spare tire is being used, etc.)
When towing a trailer or another vehicle, etc.
When the brakes are cold due to outside temperature being low or just
after starting the engine.
When the brakes are overheated on downhill grades (braking effectiveness is reduced)
When driving in rain or after washing the vehicle (the brakes are wet and
braking effectiveness is reduced)
Recognition conditions of the stereo cameras
In particular, the function may be unable to stop the vehicle or may not
activate in the following cases.
Bad weather (for example heavy rain, a blizzard or thick fog)
When visibility is poor due to sand, smoke or water vapor in the air or
when the vehicle in front or oncoming traffic causes water, snow, dirt,
dust or other substances to obscure the view through the windshield
When driving at night or in a tunnel without the headlights on
When driving at night or in a tunnel when there is a vehicle in front that
When approaching a motorcycle, bicycle or pedestrian at night
When ambient light is poor in the evening or early morning
When a vehicle, motorcycle, bicycle or pedestrian is outside the area
illuminated by the headlights
When affected by strong light from the front (for example, sunlight at
dawn, sunset or headlight beams, etc.)
When there is snow, frost, dirt or dust on the windshield or it is clouded
When fluid has not been fully wiped off the windshield during or after
washer use
When the target cannot be correctly recognized because the stereo
cameras view is obstructed by water droplets from rain or the window
washer, or by the wiper blades.
21
B2532BE-A.book
22
When the stereo cameras field of view is obstructed (for example by a

When the rear aspect of
the vehicle in front is
low, small or irregular
(the system may recognize another part of the
vehicle as its rear and
will determine operation
from that)
- When there is an
empty truck or trailer
with no rear and/or
S02133
side panels on the
cargo bed
- With vehicles that have cargo protruding from their back ends
- With non-standard shaped vehicles (vehicle transporters or vehicles
with a sidecar fitted, etc.)
- When the height of the vehicle is low, etc.
When there is a wall, etc. in front of a stopped vehicle
When there is another object near the vehicle
When a vehicle, etc. has its side facing you.
With vehicles that are backing up or with oncoming vehicles, etc.
When the size and height of an obstacle is smaller than the limitations
of the stereo cameras recognition capability
- With small animals or children, etc.
- With pedestrians who are sitting or lying down
When the detected
object is a fence or wall,
etc. with a uniform pattern (a striped pattern or
brick pattern, etc.)
When there is a wall or
door made of glass or a
mirror in front
When the vehicle in front
suddenly swerves, accelerates, or decelerates.
S00653
When a vehicle, motorcycle, bicycle or pedestrian suddenly cuts in
from the side or suddenly runs in front of you.
22
B2532BE-A.book
23
When you suddenly change lanes and your vehicle is immediately

behind an obstacle
When there is a vehicle, motorcycle, bicycle or pedestrian in a location
close to your vehicles bumper
When the speed difference between your vehicle and an obstacle is 4
MPH (5 km/h) or less (As braking is performed once the obstacle is in
close proximity to your vehicle, depending on the shape and size of the
obstacle, there may be some cases when the obstacle is outside the
range of the cameras field of view.)
When driving on sharp curves, steep uphill grades or steep downhill
grades
When driving on a bumpy or unpaved road
When there are changes in brightness, such as at a tunnel entrance or
exit
Do not test Pre-Collision Braking System on its own. It may operate
improperly and cause an accident.
When these conditions occur, turn off the Pre-Collision Braking System.
installed.*1
for your vehicle.
for your vehicle.
23
B2532BE-A.book
24
CAUTION
In the following situations, turn off the Pre-Collision Braking System. Otherwise the Pre-Collision Braking System may activate unexpectedly.
- When the vehicle is being towed
- When loading the vehicle onto a carrier
- When a chassis dynamometer, free-rollers or similar equipment is used
- When a mechanic lifts up the vehicle, starts the engine and spins the
wheels freely
- When passing hanging banners, flags or branches, or when thick/tall vegetation is contacting the vehicle
- When using a drive-through
car wash
S00656
The Pre-Collision Braking System may activate in the following situations.

Therefore concentrate on safe driving.
- When passing through an automatic gate (opening and shutting)
- When driving close to the vehicle in front
- When driving in a location where the grade of the road changes rapidly
S01264
- When visibility is poor due to sand, smoke or water vapor in the air, or when
the vehicle in front or oncoming traffic causes water, snow, dirt or other substances to obscure the view
- When passing through clouds of steam or smoke, etc.
24
B2532BE-A.book
25
- When the exhaust gas emitted by the vehicle in front is clearly visible in cold
weather, etc.
S00652
- When there is an obstacle on

a curve or intersection
- When narrowly passing a
vehicle or an object
- When stopping very close to
a wall or a vehicle in front
If there is cargo or installed
accessories, etc. that are protruding over the edge of the
front bumper, the vehicles
length will increase and the
S01973
system may not be able to prevent a collision.
If the driver operates the brake pedal during automatic braking, the pedal may
feel stiff; however, this is normal. By depressing the brake pedal further you
can apply more braking force.
NOTE
Some unusual noises may be audible during automatic braking. This is
caused by the braking control and is normal.
25
B2532BE-A.book
26
Detection of pedestrians
The EyeSight system can also detect
pedestrians. The EyeSight system detects
pedestrians from their size, shape and
movement. The system detects a pedestrian
when the contour of the head and shoulders
are clear.
Approx
3 1/3 ft 6 2/3 ft
(1-2 m)
S00693
WARNING
The EyeSight systems Pre-Collision Braking function also treats pedestrians

as obstacles. However, depending on the conditions, there may be cases
when the system cannot detect a pedestrian. In the following conditions, the
possibility that the system may not be able to detect a pedestrian as an object
is particularly high.
When pedestrians are walking in a group
When a pedestrian is next to a wall or other obstacle
When a pedestrian is using an umbrella
When a pedestrian is wearing clothes that are a similar color to the surrounding environment
When a pedestrian is carrying bulky luggage
When a pedestrian is bent over, crouching down or lying down
When a pedestrian is in a dark location
When a pedestrian suddenly crosses in front of you from the side or suddenly runs in front of you
26
B2532BE-A.book
27
Pre-Collision Braking System operation

When there is an obstacle in the forward direction during driving, the system activates in the
following sequence in order to warn the driver, activate braking control, and active the brake
lights.
Following Distance Warning:
When the system determines that there is a risk of collision, a buzzer sounds repeated short
beeps and the indicators on the multi information display illuminate to warn the driver.
The Following Distance Warning operates when Adaptive Cruise Control is not set.
When the driver depresses the brake pedal to decelerate and achieves a suitable following
distance, the warning is canceled.
First Braking and Warning:
When the system determines that there is a high risk of collision with an obstacle in front, a
buzzer sounds repeated short beeps and the indicators on the multi information display illuminate to warn the driver, and braking control is activated and the engine output, in some
situations, is also controlled. If the system determines that the amount of evasive action
(braking, steering, etc.) taken by the driver has reduced the risk of collision, braking activation is canceled.
Secondary Braking and Warning:
If the system then determines that the risk of collision is extremely high, the buzzer changes
to a continuous beeping sound and stronger braking control is activated. If, despite any evasive action taken by the driver, the system subsequently determines that a collision is
unavoidable, braking control and the engine output control are continued.
Even after the vehicle has stopped, depress the brake pedal.
<Apply Brake message>
Until the brake pedal is depressed, a message appears and stays in the warning screen
area of the multi information display for
approximately 2 minutes. A single continuous
beep sounds while the message is displayed.
Apply Brake
To Hold
Position
S01124
27
28
Obstacle
Following distance
warning
First braking
& warning
Possible collision area
Highly possible
collision area
Operating Strength of
Automatic Braking
system
Following
distance
warning
First
braking
Secondary
braking
Secondary braking
& warning
Extremely highly possible

collision area
Indication on the multi

information display
Warning
buzzer type
No brake control
Repeated
short beeps
Moderate
Repeated
short beeps
Strong
Continuous
beep
S01141
NOTE
After the vehicle has come to a stop through secondary braking, release
brake control in the following manner.
- Depress the brake pedal.
- Depress the accelerator pedal (except when the select lever is in the N
position).
- When the select lever is in the P position
After stopping with secondary braking, in the following cases, brake control
will be released and the electronic parking brake will operate.
(For details about how to release the electronic parking brake, refer to the
Owners Manual for your vehicle.)
- When approximately 2 minutes have elapsed since stopping and not
depressing the brake pedal
- When any door (except the rear gate/trunk) was opened
- When EyeSight is temporarily stopped
- When there is a malfunction in the EyeSight system
28
B2532BE-A.book
29
Neither first braking or secondary braking will operate in the following

cases.
- When the vehicle is traveling at approximately 1 MPH (1 km/h) or less
(When the select lever is in the N position and your vehicle speed is
approximately 2 MPH (4 km/h) or less) or 100 MPH (160 km/h) or more
- When Vehicle Dynamics Control is active
If the system detects the brake lights of the vehicle in front, your vehicle
will start decelerating earlier than if it does not.
There are some cases where the first braking is applied for a longer period
of time. One of the reasons for this is due to a large speed difference with
an obstacle in front. In those cases, stronger or weaker braking control
may be activated.
Pre-Collision Braking Assist operation

When the Pre-Collision Braking System is activated (when the system determines that there
is a high risk of collision with an obstacle in front), if the driver depresses the brake pedal,
the system determines that this is emergency braking and activates braking assist automatically.
CAUTION
If the driver depresses the brake pedal manually while following distance
warning is activated, the Pre-Collision Braking Assist will not work. (The vehicle decelerates with the normal braking force operated by the driver.)
NOTE
Pre-Collision Braking Assist function does not operate when the vehicle
speed is approximately 7 MPH (10 km/h) or less or 100 MPH (160 km/h) or
more.
For information about the braking assist function, refer to the Owners
Manual for your vehicle.
29
B2532BE-A.book
30
Turning off the Pre-Collision Braking System

Pressing and holding the Pre-Collision Braking System OFF switch for approximately 2 seconds (or longer) turns off the Pre-Collision Braking System (including Pre-Collision Brake
Assist). When 1 short beep sound emits, this control is turned off and the Pre-Collision
Braking System OFF indicator light on the instrument panel illuminates.
To turn the control back on, press and hold the Pre-Collision Braking System OFF switch for
approximately 2 seconds or longer again. When this control is turned on, the Pre-Collision
Braking System OFF indicator light turns off.
S01120
NOTE
When the Pre-Collision Braking System is turned off,
Throttle Management Control function is also turned off.
Even when the Pre-Collision Braking System is turned
switch is turned off and the engine is then restarted,
Braking System will be turned on. The system default
vehicle is restarted in ON.
30
the Pre-Collision
off, if the ignition
the Pre-Collision
setting when the
B2532BE-A.book
31

This indicator light illuminates when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, and
remains illuminated for approximately 7 seconds after the engine starts. It turns on when
the Pre-Collision Braking System is turned off.
It also illuminates under the following conditions.
When the EyeSight system has a malfunction
Refer to page 86.
When the EyeSight system has stopped
temporarily
Refer to page 87.
S01121
NOTE
When the Pre-Collision Braking System OFF indicator light is turned on, the
Pre-Collision Braking System (including the Pre-Collision Braking Assist function) does not operate.
31
B2532BE-A.book
32

Adaptive Cruise Control is a driving support system intended to allow more comfortable driving on
expressways, freeways and interstate highways. The vehicle in front in the same traffic lane is
detected by means of the stereo cameras, and your vehicle tracks the vehicle in front (up to the
maximum speed of the set vehicle speed) while automatically maintaining a following distance that
corresponds to the speed of the vehicle in front. Through operation of the electronic parking brake,
the system uses the vehicles conventional braking system to stop your vehicle when the vehicle
in front is stopped. The vehicle is capable of being controlled at a speed between approximately 0
and 90 MPH (145 km/h). Please remember that you should not exceed posted speed limits.
WARNING
This system does not provide the driver with an automatic driving function
that handles all traffic conditions.
Do not rely excessively on Adaptive Cruise Control. This system is not intended
to assist in driving when the driver is not paying full attention to what is ahead of
him/her due to distractions or a lack of concentration while driving, or under
conditions of poor visibility. It is not intended to prevent rear-end collisions.
Strive for safe driving at all times. Always maintain a safe following distance
behind the vehicle in front of you, pay attention to your surroundings and the
driving conditions, and operate the brake pedal and take other action as necessary.
Set the set vehicle speed within a range that is appropriate to the road conditions and surrounding environment.
Before using the system, perform a daily inspection and verify that there
are no malfunctions of the tires or brakes.
Refer to the separate Warranty and Maintenance Booklet.
When these conditions occur, do not use Adaptive Cruise Control.
installed.*1
for your vehicle.
for your vehicle.
32
B2532BE-A.book
33
Adaptive Cruise Control is designed for use on expressways, freeways, toll

roads, interstate highways and similar limited access roads. It is not intended
to be used in city traffic. In the following conditions, do not use Adaptive
Cruise Control. Doing so may result in an accident.
- Ordinary roads (roads other than those mentioned above)
Depending on the driving environment (complexity of roads and other factors), the system may not be able to perform as the traffic conditions
require, and that may result in an accident.
- Roads with sharp curves or winding roads
- Frozen roads, snow-covered roads or other slippery road surfaces
- The tires may spin, causing loss of control of the vehicle.
- Traffic conditions when frequent acceleration and deceleration make it difficult to maintain the following distance
It may not be possible for the system to perform as the traffic conditions
require.
- Steep downhill grades
The set vehicle speed may be exceeded.
- On a steep continuous downhill grade
The brakes may overheat.
- Roads and overpasses with repeated steep uphill and downhill grades
Detection of the vehicle in front may be lost, or the road surface may be
detected instead of the vehicle in front, making correct control impossible.
- When entering a sharp curve into an interchange or junction, or a service
area, parking area, toll booth or other facilities
Detection of the vehicle in front may not be possible.
- When there are changes in brightness, such as at a tunnel entrance or exit
- When visibility is poor due to sand, smoke or water vapor blowing in the
wind, or when the vehicle in front or oncoming traffic causes water, snow,
dirt or dust to obscure the view
Detection of the vehicle in front may be lost, or water or other substances
may be incorrectly detected instead, making correct control impossible.
S00652
- When there is snow, frost, dirt or dust on the windshield or it is clouded

33
B2532BE-A.book
34
- When water droplets from rain or the window washer, or dirt has not
been fully wiped off the windshield
It may not be possible to detect the vehicle in front, making correct control impossible.
The stereo cameras may have difficulty detecting the following objects or
conditions. Operate the brake pedal and take other actions as necessary.
- Vehicles at significantly different speeds (vehicles driving slowly,
stopped or oncoming vehicles, etc.)
- Vehicles cutting into your lane
- Motorcycles, bicycles, pedestrians and animals, etc.
- When light is poor in the evening or early morning
- When driving at night or in a tunnel without the headlights on
- When driving at night or in a tunnel when there is a vehicle in front that
- When affected by strong light from the front (sunlight or headlight high
beams, etc.)
- Vehicles in front that have
a rear aspect that is low,
small or irregular (the system
may
recognize
another part of the vehicle
and will determine operation from that)
An empty truck or trailer
that has no cargo in the
cargo bed being affected
by wind
S02133
Vehicles that have cargo
protruding from their
back ends
Non-standard shaped vehicles (vehicle transporters or vehicles with a
sidecar fitted, etc.)
Vehicles that are low
- Objects that are located close to the bumper of your vehicle
When you do not want to use Adaptive Cruise Control, be sure to turn the
(CRUISE) switch off. If the switch is left on, cruise control may be
accidentally engaged, possibly resulting in an accident.
Before using Adaptive Cruise Control, be sure to fully verify the safety of
the vehicle occupants and the area around the vehicle. Never operate the
cruise control from outside the vehicle.
34
B2532BE-A.book
35
Detection of the vehicle in front by the EyeSight stereo cameras

Under the following road conditions or conditions of your vehicle, detection
of the vehicle in front may not be possible. Vehicles in neighboring traffic
lanes or roadside objects may also be incorrectly detected. Under conditions such as these, do not use Adaptive Cruise Control. If cruise control is
currently in use, operate the brake pedal and take other action as necessary.
- When tracking begins from
a short following distance,
such as when the vehicle
in front is a vehicle that cut
into your lane
S01975
- When driving on curved

roads, at the start and end
of a curve and on roads
with continuous curves
(These conditions make it
difficult for the system to
detect vehicles because
they are outside the
detectable area.)
- When driving on an onramp or off-ramp to a freeS01976
way, highway, or other
restricted access road
(EyeSight Adaptive Cruise Control is not designed for use in this kind of
driving environment.)
- When driving in an urban, or suburban environment (Adaptive Cruise
Control is not appropriate for use in these driving areas. Adaptive Cruise
Control should only be used on limited-access highways.)
35
B2532BE-A.book
36
- When the vehicle in front is

not directly ahead of your
vehicle and is shifted to
one side
S01977
- When there is an obstacle

at the side of the road
- When the relative speed
difference compared to the
vehicle in front is large
- When a vehicle cuts into
your lane in front of you
- When the distance between
vehicles is extremely short
- When your vehicle is drifting within the lane
- When driving on a bumpy
S01978
or unpaved road surface
- When driving on a road
with extremely narrow lanes, such as when traffic restrictions are in
effect or in areas where construction work is taking place
- When normal driving has become compromised due to an accident or
malfunction
- When extremely heavy cargo is loaded in the cargo area, rear seat or
trunk of your vehicle
There are limits to the capabilities of Adaptive Cruise Control. Even when
the vehicle in front is detected, the system may not be able to decelerate in
time in cases such as when the difference in speeds is large or when the
vehicle in front decelerates suddenly. Operate the brake pedal and decelerate as necessary.
If the buzzer sounds frequently, do not use Adaptive Cruise Control.
Even when the following distance is short, the brake more warning may
not activate in the following cases.
- When the relative speed difference compared to the vehicle in front is
small (the two vehicles are traveling at almost the same speed)
- When the vehicle in front is traveling faster than your vehicle (the following distance is gradually increasing)
- When another vehicle cuts into your lane very close to your vehicle
- When the vehicle in front decelerated suddenly
- When there are repeated uphill and downhill grades
36
B2532BE-A.book
37
CAUTION
After Adaptive Cruise Control has started, it maintains control continuously
according to the behavior of the vehicle in front. When your vehicle comes
to a stop if the vehicle in front has stopped, the stay-stopped function is
engaged. However, if the EyeSight stereo cameras lost detection of the
vehicle in front, the system may not stop your vehicle. Operate the brake
pedal and maintain the correct following distance as necessary. Be aware
that the EyeSight system has difficulty detecting objects or vehicles that
have a relative speed in comparison to your vehicle. Therefore, if the
EyeSight system loses detection just as you are approaching a line of
stopped cars, for example - you will have to brake manually.
There is no possibility that the vehicle will automatically begin moving from
a stay-stopped condition without operation from the driver.
If the conditions for automatically canceling cruise control ( refer to page
49) are met while the vehicle is stay-stopped, Adaptive Cruise Control is
canceled and for safety reasons, the electronic parking brake is automatically applied.
Braking may not be sufficient depending on the following conditions. Operate the brake pedal and decelerate as necessary.
- Vehicle conditions (amount of load, number of occupants, etc.)
- Road conditions (grade, slipperiness, shape, bumps, etc.)
- Vehicle maintenance status (brake systems, tire wear, air pressure, temporary spare tire is being used, etc.)
- When the brakes are cold. (For example, just after the engine is started
or when the outside temperature is low.)
- For a short period of time when driving after the engine is started until the
engine has warmed-up
- When the brakes are overheated on downhill grades (braking effectiveness may be reduced)
- When driving in rain or after washing the vehicle (the brakes may
become wet and braking effectiveness may be reduced)
- When towing a trailer or another vehicle, etc.
37
B2532BE-A.book
38
How to use Adaptive Cruise Control

Adaptive Cruise Control is available when the engine is turned on.
Setting Adaptive Cruise Control

(1) Setting Adaptive Cruise Control to standby status
Press the
(CRUISE) switch. At this time,
(Adaptive Cruise Control), your vehicle indicator and the following distance setting are displayed on the EyeSight display area
in the multi information display.
The set vehicle speed display will read - - MPH.
S01985
S01110
If the switch is pressed once more, the EyeSight display will turn off. It will also automatically
turn off when the engine is stopped.
To set ready status:
Adaptive Cruise Control can be set when all
of the following conditions are met and
is displayed on the EyeSight display area.
- All doors (except the rear gate/trunk) are
closed.
- The drivers seatbelt is fastened.
- The electronic parking brake is not
engaged (The brake system warning light
is turned off.).
S01111
- The select lever is in the D position and
the paddle shift is not operated.
- The brake pedal is not depressed.
- EyeSight operation is not temporarily stopped.
Refer to page 87.
- The road is not a steep slope.
- The steering wheel has not been turned significantly in either direction.
- X-mode is not turned on.
- The vehicle speed is between approximately 0 MPH (0 km/h) and 90 MPH (145 km/h).
38
B2532BE-A.book
39
(2) Setting Adaptive Cruise Control

Press the RES/SET switch to the SET/-.
Adaptive Cruise Control is now set, and cruise
control will start.
If no vehicle in front has been detected, the
vehicle drives at the constant set target
speed.
When Adaptive Cruise Control is set, the set
speed and
are displayed on the EyeSight
display area.
S01986
S02322
NOTE
The target vehicle speed can be set between 25 MPH (40 km/h) and 90
MPH (145 km/h).
If the vehicle speed is approximately 25 MPH (40 km/h) or less when the
vehicle speed is set, the set vehicle speed is set to 25 MPH (40 km/h).
When driving on a curve, the vehicle may not accelerate, or may decelerate, even if the set speed is higher than the current vehicle speed.
(Adaptive Cruise Control indicator) on
If the EyeSight display portion
the multi information display does not illuminate, even when the
(CRUISE) switch is pressed, the cruise control with Adaptive Cruise Control function will not operate. If this condition continues, the system is likely
malfunctioning. Contact a SUBARU dealer to have the vehicle inspected.
39
B2532BE-A.book
40
When a vehicle in front is detected, a buzzer

sounds 1 short beep and the lead vehicle indicator will illuminate.
(white) will turn
green.
The vehicle tracks the lead vehicle in front
and maintains the selected following distance.
At this time, the speed upper limit is the set
vehicle speed. If the vehicle in front is no longer detected, a buzzer sounds 1 short beep
and the lead vehicle indicator turns off.
(green) will turn white.
S02323
NOTE
The buzzer sound (lead vehicle acquisition sound) that occurs when a vehicle
in front is detected or no longer detected while Adaptive Cruise Control is set
can be turned off by customization.
Refer to page 89.
Operation of Adaptive Cruise Control
When no vehicle in front is detected
The vehicle drives constantly at the set target vehicle speed between approximately
25 MPH (40 km/h) and 90 MPH (145 km/h).
S01979
When a vehicle in front is detected

The vehicle tracks the lead vehicle in front,
and will maintain the chosen following distance (there are four settings), up to the set
target vehicle speed - between 25 MPH (40
km/h) and 90 MPH (145 km/h).
S01980
40
B2532BE-A.book
41
If your vehicle no longer detects the vehicle

in front
The vehicle gradually accelerates back to
the set target vehicle speed and will drive at
that constant speed.
If a vehicle in front is detected while accelerating to the set target vehicle speed, vehicle tracking will be started again.
S01981
CAUTION
If the driver operates the brake pedal during automatic braking, the pedal
may feel stiff; however, this is not a malfunction. By depressing the brake
pedal further you can apply more braking force. When the brake pedal is
released it will return to its original condition.
NOTE
When the brakes are applied by Adaptive Cruise Control, the vehicles
brake lights will illuminate.
Even if there is no lead vehicle present, on a downhill grade, the Adaptive
Cruise Controls automatic brake may operate in order to maintain the set
target vehicle speed.
Some noises may be audible during automatic braking. This is caused by
the braking control and does not indicate a malfunction.
To temporarily accelerate quickly, use the accelerator pedal. After accelerating, the vehicle will gradually return to the set target vehicle speed shown
in the gauge cluster.
There are cases where the vehicle in front has turned off the road while
your vehicle is still controlled by the automatic braking operation that has
activated due to the deceleration of the vehicle in front of yours. In those
cases, the brake will be automatically released gradually. Depress the
accelerator pedal if necessary.
The lead-vehicle tracking function has the following characteristics:
- If the lead vehicles brake lamp is detected, deceleration is started more
quickly than without detection.
- If the vehicle moves to the fast lane while traveling more than 37 MPH
(60 km/h), the system starts acceleration to the set vehicle speed more
quickly because it is linked with the turn signal.
41
B2532BE-A.book
42
Increasing the set vehicle target speed

Using the RES/SET switch
Push the RES/SET switch in the following
way while you are driving with Adaptive

Cruise Control on:
Push the RES/+ switch towards the position

(1) briefly: the set vehicle speed will
increase in increments of 1 MPH (1 km/h)
every time the button is pushed.
Push the RES/+ switch towards the position
(1) for longer: the set vehicle speed will
S01990
increase in increments of 1 MPH (1 km/h)
while the button is being pushed.
Push the RES/+ switch towards the position (2) briefly: the set vehicle speed will increase
to the next 5 MPH (5 km/h) increment every time the button is pushed.
Push the RES/+ switch towards the position (2) for longer: the set vehicle speed will increase
to the next 5 MPH (5 km/h) increment while the button is being pushed and will continue to
advance target speed in 5 MPH (5 km/h) increments as long as the button is pushed.
The set vehicle target speed is shown on the EyeSight display. Using this method, you can
fine tune the vehicles set target speed.
Using the accelerator pedal

Depressing the accelerator pedal will increase vehicle speed. Once the preferred speed has
been attained, push the RES/SET switch to SET/-. When the switch is pressed, the new
vehicle target speed will be set. The new set vehicle speed will be displayed in the EyeSight
display area.
CAUTION
When Adaptive Cruise Control is operating, the actual vehicle speed is
controlled according to the lead vehicle. Therefore, if the RES/SET switch
is pressed to the RES/+ and set to a speed higher than the speed of the
lead vehicle, the vehicle will not accelerate - it will maintain a safe following
distance as the first priority. However, because doing so changed the set
vehicle target speed, when the lead vehicle is no longer detected (for
example, if you change to a freeway lane with no vehicles in front), the
vehicle will accelerate to that new set target speed. Change the set vehicle
target speed while briefly checking the value shown in the set speed display on the EyeSight display.
When the accelerator pedal is depressed with Adaptive Cruise Control on,
automatic braking control and warnings by Adaptive Cruise Control will not
occur. However, if there is a high risk of collision with an obstacle in front of
the vehicle at this time, the warning and braking control of the Pre-Collision
Braking System may activate.
42
B2532BE-A.book
43
Decreasing the set vehicle target speed

Push the RES/SET switch in the following
way while you are driving with Adaptive
Cruise Control on:
Push the SET/- switch towards the position
(1) briefly: the set vehicle speed will
decrease in increments of 1 MPH (1 km/h)

every time the button is pushed.
Push the SET/- switch towards the position
(1) for longer: the set vehicle speed will

decrease in increments of 1 MPH (1 km/h)
S01991
while the button is being pushed.
Push the SET/- switch towards the position (2) briefly: the set vehicle speed will decrease
to the next 5 MPH (5 km/h) decrement every time the button is pushed.
Push the SET/- switch towards the position (2) for longer: the set vehicle speed will
decrease to the next 5 MPH (5 km/h) decrement while the button is being pushed and will
continue to lower target speed in 5 MPH (5 km/h) decrements as long as the button is
pushed.
The set vehicle target speed is shown on the EyeSight display.
Using the brake pedal

(1) Depress the brake pedal to decrease the vehicle speed. (Adaptive Cruise Control will be
canceled and
will be turned off.)
(2) When the desired speed is reached, press the RES/SET switch to the SET/-. The
speed at the time of pressing the switch will be set as the new vehicle speed, and it
appears in the EyeSight display area.
Accelerating temporarily
Depress the accelerator pedal to accelerate temporarily.
When the accelerator pedal is released, the vehicle returns to the set vehicle speed.
43
B2532BE-A.book
44
Decelerating temporarily
Depress the brake pedal to decelerate temporarily. When the brake pedal is depressed,
Adaptive Cruise Control will be canceled. The
will be turned off while the set vehicle target speed remains displayed on the EyeSight
display area.
Release the brake pedal and press the
RES/SET switch to RES/+ to reset the set
vehicle target speed.
will be turned off.
S02324
CAUTION
Ordinarily, while Adaptive Cruise Control is functioning, acceleration and
deceleration are performed automatically according to the speed of the lead
vehicle (if one is detected). However, when your vehicle approaches a lead
vehicle, for example if it is necessary to accelerate for a lane change or other
reason, and if the vehicle in front suddenly decelerates, or if another vehicle
cuts into your path, operate the accelerator pedal or brake pedal and accelerate or decelerate as appropriate for the existing conditions.
44
B2532BE-A.book
45
Changing the following distance from the vehicle in front

The following distance from the vehicle in front setting can be changed in 4 stages.
: When the switch (
side) is pressed, the following distance will be longer.
: When the switch (
side) is pressed, the following distance will be shorter.
S01992
NOTE
The following distance changes according to the vehicle speed and
increases the faster the vehicle travels.
<Approximate guide to following distances>

Following
distance
indicator
When your vehicle speed is

25 MPH (40 km/h)
When your vehicle speed is

60 MPH (100 km/h)
Approx. 95 ft (30 m)
If you turn the

(CRUISE) switch off, and then turn it on again, the following distance that was set before you turned the switch off will be maintained.
45
B2532BE-A.book
46
Stay-stopped function
If the vehicle in front comes to a stop while you are utilizing Adaptive Cruise Control, your
vehicle will also come to a stop and will stay stopped.
When your vehicle comes to stop after the vehicle in front has stopped, Adaptive Cruise
Control is paused and the stay-stopped function is engaged.
on the EyeSight display
area is turned off and
is displayed. At the same time,
is turned back to white.
S01982
S02325
Resuming Adaptive Cruise Control in stay-stopped status

Setting using the RES/SET switch
Press SET/- ( Refer to page 39 (2) Setting Adaptive Cruise Control.)
Press RES/+ ( Refer to page 51 Returning to a vehicle speed that was previously
set.)
NOTE
When Adaptive Cruise Control is resumed from stay-stopped status and the
vehicle in front accelerates, your vehicle will also accelerate and continue to
track the vehicle in front at the previously set following distance. However, if
the lead vehicle does not start moving or pauses, stay-stopped status will be
automatically restored after approximately 3 seconds.
Setting with the accelerator pedal

Depressing the accelerator pedal while stay-stopped is engaged cancels stay-stopped
status. At this time, Adaptive Cruise Control is resumed. The vehicle will attempt to travel
at the previously set vehicle target speed unless a lead vehicle is detected. If a lead vehicle is detected, Adaptive Cruise Control will maintain the previous following distance setting.
NOTE
If the accelerator pedal is only slightly depressed, the stay-stopped function
may not be canceled, and the Adaptive Cruise Control may not be resumed.
46
47
Canceling the stay-stopped function

If any of the following operations is performed, the stay-stopped function will be canceled
and the Adaptive Cruise Control will be canceled at the same time.
The brake pedal is depressed.
The
(CRUISE) switch is pressed.
The electronic parking brake switch is pressed to apply the Electronic Parking Brake.
WARNING
While the stay-stopped function is engaged, do not exit the vehicle.

The stay-stopped function is not a replacement for engaging the parking
brake.
When parking, always apply brakes manually to come to a full stop, then
set the electronic parking brake.
CAUTION
The stay-stopped function of cruise control will be canceled under the following conditions:
The vehicle is in stay-stopped mode for approximately 2 minutes or more.
(A buzzer will sound 5 intermittent beeps and 1 long beep.)
Any condition in which automatic cancellation is met. (A buzzer sounds 1
long beep.)
Refer to page 49.
After the stay-stopped function has been canceled, the Electronic Parking
Brake will be automatically applied and the electronic parking brake indicator
light will illuminate. However, if any canceling condition for the Electronic
Parking Brake (i.e. the interlock system with the accelerator pedal, switch
operation of the electronic parking brake, etc.) is fulfilled, the Electronic Parking Brake will not work. (For details, refer to the Owners Manual for your
vehicle.)
If the accelerator pedal is only slightly depressed while the stay-stopped function is activated, the stay-stopped function of cruise control may be canceled,
and the Electronic Parking Brake may not work.
Setting Adaptive Cruise Control while the Electronic Parking Brake is applied
If the Electronic Parking Brake is applied, then before setting cruise control, release the
Electronic Parking Brake by depressing the accelerator pedal or by other specified
means. For details of how to release the electronic parking brake, refer to the Owners
Manual for your vehicle.
47
B2532BE-A.book
48
Canceling Adaptive Cruise Control

Canceling by driver operation
Either of the following operations will cancel Adaptive Cruise Control.
Depress the brake pedal.
will be turned off while the set vehicle
target speed remains displayed on the
EyeSight display area.
will be turned off.

S02324
Press the
(CRUISE) switch.
will be turned off while the set vehicle
target speed remains displayed on the
When the
(CRUISE) switch is
pressed again,
will be turned off and
Adaptive Cruise Control will be turned off.
S01985
48
B2532BE-A.book
49
Automatic cancellation by the system

In the following cases, a buzzer will sound a
single long beep and Adaptive Cruise
Control is automatically canceled. (
is
displayed on the EyeSight display area.) If
the stay-stopped function is engaged, the
electronic parking brake will be automatically engaged.
S02326
Conditions for automatic cancellation

- The grade of the road is very steep.
- ABS, Vehicle Dynamics Control or Traction Control Function is activated.
- The vehicle speed has exceeded approximately 100 MPH (160 km/h) while cruise control is set.
- The steering wheel was turned significantly in either direction.
- The transmission select lever is moved to a position other than D .
Cruise control can be resumed after the transmission select lever is returned to the
D position.
- A paddle shift switch is operated while driving when the transmission select lever is in
the D position.
Cruise control can be resumed again after the shift indicator returns to D .
- Any door (except the rear gate/trunk) is opened.
- The drivers seatbelt is unfastened.
- The electronic parking brake is engaged manually. (When the brake system warning
light is illuminated or flashing.)
- The X-mode is turned on (the X-mode indicator light
illuminates).
Cruise control can be resumed after the X-mode is turned off.
- EyeSight operation has temporarily stopped.
Refer to page 87.
- EyeSight is malfunctioning.
Refer to page 86.
- The Pre-Collision secondary braking has activated.
49
B2532BE-A.book
50
WARNING
Do not use Adaptive Cruise Control on slippery roads. Doing so may result in
an accident.
CAUTION
When shifting the select lever to the N position, Adaptive Cruise Control will
be automatically canceled. Do not shift the lever to the N position unless it is
an emergency. Otherwise the engine brake may not operate, which could
cause an accident.
NOTE
If EyeSight operation has temporarily stopped, the Pre-Collision Braking
System OFF indicator light and Lane Departure Warning OFF indicator
light illuminate, and the EyeSight temporary stop indicator is displayed on
the multi information display.
Refer to page 87.
If EyeSight is malfunctioning, the EyeSight warning indicator is displayed
on the multi information display, and the Pre-Collision Braking System
OFF indicator light and Lane Departure Warning OFF indicator light will
also illuminate. If this occurs, stop the vehicle in a safe location and then
turn off the engine and restart it. If the indicators remain illuminated after
restarting the engine, Adaptive Cruise Control cannot be used. This will not
interfere with ordinary driving; however the system should be inspected by
a SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.
Refer to page 86.
When the operation of Adaptive Cruise Control has been automatically
canceled, perform the set cruise control operation again after the condition
that caused the cancellation has been corrected. If the cruise control function cannot be set even after the condition has been corrected, EyeSight
may be malfunctioning. This will not interfere with ordinary driving; however contact a SUBARU dealer and have the system inspected.
50
B2532BE-A.book
51
Returning to a vehicle speed that was previously set

The vehicle speed which was previously set is stored in memory.* To return to set that vehicle speed, press the RES/SET switch to the RES/+. (
on the EyeSight display area illuminates again to indicate that the system has returned to the set status again.)
S01993
S02322
NOTE
*The vehicle speed stored in memory is erased in the following circumstances:
The cruise control is turned off by pressing the
(CRUISE) switch.
Vehicle Dynamics Control or Traction Control Function are activated.
The cruise control mode was switched from Adaptive Cruise Control to
Conventional Cruise Control.
51
B2532BE-A.book
52
Other functions
Brake more warning
The brake more warning is activated while Adaptive Cruise Control is tracking a lead vehicle. This function warns the driver when it determines that the current level of deceleration
by automatic braking control is insufficient.
When the brake more function operates,
Obstacle Detected will be shown in the
Obstacle
warning screen area of the multi information
Detected
display, a lead vehicle indicator will flash,
and a buzzer will sound several short
beeps.
When this function activates, depress the
brake pedal to decelerate and maintain a
correct following distance.
S01119
WARNING
If the buzzer sounds frequently, do not use Adaptive Cruise Control.

The brake more warning will not activate in the following situations.
- The accelerator pedal is depressed.
- The brake pedal is depressed.
Even when the following distance is short, the brake more warning may
not activate in the following situations.
- The difference in speed with the vehicle in front is small. (The two vehicles are traveling at almost the same speed.)
- The vehicle in front is traveling faster than your vehicle. (The following
distance is gradually increasing.)
- Another vehicle cuts into your lane very close to your vehicle.
- The vehicle in front decelerates suddenly.
- When there are repeated uphill and downhill grades
The brake more warning may not activate in time in the case of a vehicle
that is stopped at the end of a line at a toll gate, at a stop light or intersection or in traffic congestion, or a vehicle that is moving much slower than
your vehicle. EyeSight requires a speed differential in order to recognize a
potential obstacle and react to it.
52
B2532BE-A.book
53
NOTE
Vehicles in front in the same traffic lane are detected by the stereo cameras
within a distance of approximately 360 ft (110 m) in the forward direction.
However the detection distance may be reduced depending on the traffic
environment, driving conditions, and conditions of the vehicle in front.
53
54
Lane Keep Assist

The stereo cameras detect lane markings
(including Botts dots) of the lane and the system assists the steering operation by working
with the electric power steering to help keep
your vehicle in its lane when driving on
expressways, freeways and interstate highways.
Lane
markings
S02069
WARNING
Lane Keep Assist is not an automatic driving system.

Do not overestimate the capabilities of Lane Keep Assist. It is not a system to assist inattentive driving or meant to permit driving without holding the steering wheel. Make sure to grip the steering wheel while
driving. To drive safely, check the distance from the vehicle in front or
from a vehicle driving in parallel with your vehicle, the surrounding conditions and the surrounding environment while driving.
If you feel that the level of control and timing by the system are different from
your own driving style, the system may not support safe driving. Do not use
Lane Keep Assist.
Lane Keep Assist does not always operate under all situations. If you rely
only on the Lane Keep Assist to stay in a lane, it may cause an accident such
as a collision with an obstacle beside your lane or with a vehicle driving in an
adjacent lane.
Check that there are no problems with the tires and brakes during a daily
inspection before using the system.
Refer to Warranty and Maintenance Booklet.
The system may not operate properly under the following conditions. Do
not use Lane Keep Assist.
- The air pressure of tires is not to specification.*1
installed.*1
- The wheel balance is abnormal (e.g., the balance weight is removed or
misaligned.)*1
- The wheel alignment is out of the specified value.*1
- The suspension has been modified (including genuine SUBARU parts).
54
B2532BE-A.book
55
Lane Keep Assist
- Tire chains are installed.
- When you feel an abnormal vibration in the steering wheel or feel the
steering wheel is heavier than usual.
- The steering wheel has been replaced with parts other than genuine
SUBARU parts.
- The headlights are dirty or they have snow, ice or dirt on them. (Objects
are not adequately illuminated and are difficult to detect.)
- The headlights are not aligned correctly. (Objects are not adequately illuminated and are difficult to detect.)
- The headlights and fog lamps, and other lights, have been modified.
- The brake system warning light (red) is illuminated.
- Your vehicle is towing a vehicle, etc.
- There is something wrong with the combination meter. For example, an
indicator light or a warning light in the combination meter does not properly turn on or off, a beep does not sound, or the indication on the liquidcrystal display is different from when it is normal.*2
*1: The wheels and tires have critically important functions. Be sure to
use the appropriate ones.
For details, refer to the Owners Manual for your vehicle.
*2: For details about the functions and operations of the combination
meter, refer to the Owners Manual for your vehicle.
Lane Keep Assist is designed for use on expressways, freeways, toll
roads, interstate highways and similar limited access roads. In the following conditions, do not use Lane Keep Assist. Doing so may result in an
accident.
- Ordinary roads (roads other than those mentioned above)
- Roads with sharp curves
- Roads with lane restrictions or tentative lanes due
to construction work, etc.
- Old lane markings remain.
- Snow, puddles or snow
melting agents remain on
the road surface.
- Cracks or constructed
traces remain on the road
surface.
S02059
55
B2532BE-A.book
56
Lane Keep Assist
- Frozen roads, snow-covered roads or other slippery road surfaces

The tires may spin, causing loss of control of the vehicle.
- When entering a sharp curve into an interchange or junction, or a service
area, parking area, toll booth or other facilities.
- When there are changes in brightness, such as at a tunnel entrance or
exit.
- When visibility is poor due to sand, smoke or water vapor blowing in the
wind, or when the vehicle in front or oncoming traffic causes water,
snow, dirt or dust to obscure the view.
- When there is snow, frost, dirt or dust on the windshield or it is clouded.
- When water droplets from rain or dirt have not been fully wiped off on the
windshield.
It may not be possible to detect the lane, making correct control impossible.
canoe on the roof of the vehicle).
- The stereo cameras may have difficulty detecting the objects under the
following conditions and the system may not operate properly.
- When driving at night or in a tunnel without the headlights on.
- When light is poor in the evening or early morning.
- In bad weather (for example, rain or snow)
- The distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front is short, making it difficult to detect lane markings.
- When a vehicle intruded from an adjacent lane or the vehicle in front
changed lanes.
- The shape of a curve in the road suddenly changes.
- Shadows of guardrails or similar objects are overlapped on the lane
markings.
- When your vehicle is exposed to a strong light from the front (backlight
from the sun, headlights, etc.).
- The width of a lane is narrow.
- The stereo cameras may have difficulty detecting the lane due to the performance of the cameras.
There are no lane markings or they are very worn.
The lane markings are painted in yellow.
It is difficult to detect lane markings because they are similar in color to
the road surface.
The lane markings are drawn in double.
The width of lane markings is narrow.
The indicated lines for the area are touched to walls and poles.
- The shape of lane markings suddenly changes (entrance/exit of a curve,
crank and S-shaped road, etc.).
- There is curb or side wall in the road shoulder.
- The brightness changes such as when you drive under an overpass.
56
B2532BE-A.book
57
Lane Keep Assist
CAUTION
The performance of Lane Keep Assist may not be optimal under the following
conditions. In addition, Lane Keep Assist may not operate or the operation
may be canceled.
- Immediately after the weight of your vehicle changes radically
- Immediately after the replacement of a tire or the adjustment of tire pressure
- Immediately after the adjustment, repair or replacement of cameras or
related components
- Immediately after the repair or replacement of the suspension or steering
system
- A winter tire or a tire other than a genuine SUBARU tire is used.
- The vehicle is in a crosswind.
- The road grade abruptly changes (uphill or downhill).
- The grade of the crossing direction in a road is large or changes abruptly.
- Unevenness, winding and joint of a road surface
- The acceleration/deceleration is high.
- Immediately after starting the engine when the outside temperature is low.
- The outside temperature is high.
When you do not use Lane Keep Assist, make sure to turn off the
(Lane
Keep Assist) switch. If you turn it on, the function may operate unexpectedly,
causing an accident.
If you turn on the
(Lane Keep Assist) switch, the operation power of
electric power steering may change.
57
B2532BE-A.book
58
Lane Keep Assist
Lane Departure Prevention Function

The system detects lane markings in order to help prevent departure from the lane. If you
drive on expressways, freeways or interstate highways at speeds above approximately 40
MPH (65 km/h) and the vehicle is about to depart from the lane, the system assists the
steering operation by turning it to the direction that will help prevent the lane departure.
There is a strong
possibility of lane
departure.
There is a
possibility of lane
departure.
S02043
How to use Lane Departure Prevention Function

Press the
(Lane Keep Assist) switch.
Lane Keep Assist is turned on, and
(Lane Keep Assist indicator) (white) is displayed
on the EyeSight display area of the multi information display.
MPG
Lane Keep
Assist indicator
(white)
S01994
58
miles
S02044
B2532BE-A.book
59
Lane Keep Assist
Press the
(Lane Keep Assist) switch once again to turn it off, and
Assist indicator) is turned off on the EyeSight display area.
(Lane Keep
The Lane Departure Prevention Function goes into the standby status, and the lane indicator illuminates when all of the following conditions are met.
The vehicle speed is between approximately 40 MPH (65 km/h) and 90 MPH (145 km/h).
The system is detecting the lane markings.
The driver is holding the steering wheel.
When driving on a road that has a lane width that is between approximately 10 ft (3 m)
and 15 ft (4.5 m).
When driving on a straight road or gentle curve.
When driving near the center of a lane.
When the vehicle is about to depart from the lane, Lane Departure Prevention Function
starts to operate and
(Lane Keep Assist indicator) illuminates in green while it is
operating.
Turned on
Standby status
In operation
MPG
MPG
MPG
(white)
Lane Keep
Assist
indicator
(white)
A
miles
(green)
miles
miles
S02045
NOTE
If you just lightly put your hands on the steering wheel for a certain period
of time or if you do not operate the steering wheel, the function will automatically be canceled. (
Lane Keep Assist indicator) illuminates in
white again.)
Lane Departure Prevention Function operates when the system determines that the vehicle will depart from the lane if you continue to drive in
the same manner. Therefore, it operates at an earlier timing than Lane
Departure Warning ( Refer to page 68.) (it may depend on the surrounding environment and road condition).
The lane indicator in the standby status and in operation may illuminate
only on the left side or right side.
59
60
Lane Keep Assist
Canceling Lane Departure Prevention Function

Cancellation by the operation of a driver (In case no beep sounds)
The following operation cancels Lane Departure Prevention Function.
If the function is canceled,
(Lane Keep Assist indicator) and the lane indicator are
turned off on the EyeSight display area.
Press the
(Lane Keep Assist) switch.
Either of the following operations temporarily cancels the Lane Departure Prevention Function.
While temporarily canceling the function,
(Lane Keep Assist indicator) on the
EyeSight display area illuminates in white and the lane indicator is turned off.
Depressing the brake pedal
Operating the turn signal lever
When the system determines that the driver operates the steering wheel to make a lane
change.
Turning on the hazard warning flasher switch
Automatic cancellation by the system (An audible beep will sound.)

Under the following conditions, a beep sounds and the Lane Departure Prevention Function
is temporarily canceled.
While the function is temporarily canceled,
(Lane Keep Assist indicator) on the
EyeSight display area illuminates in white and the lane indicator is turned off.
When the system cannot detect the lane.
The windshield wiper operates at a high speed.
The vehicle speed is less than approximately 37 MPH (60 km/h) or is more than approximately 93 MPH (150 km/h).
The ABS, the Vehicle Dynamics Control or the Traction Control System operates.
Either the drivers door, the front passengers door or the rear door is open.
The seatbelt of drivers seat is unfastened.
The electronic parking brake is applied (The electric parking brake indicator light illuminates or blinks).
The select lever is shifted to a position other than D or M position.
The system could not detect the steering
MPG
operation by the driver for a certain period of
Keep Hands On
time.
Steering Wheel
- When the system detected no steering
operation, the interruption screen appears
on the multi information display. The interruption screen continues to appear until
the system detects the steering operation.
If the system still cannot detect the steerA
ing operation, the Lane Departure Prevenmiles
S02046
tion Function is automatically canceled.
60
B2532BE-A.book
61
Lane Keep Assist
When entering a sharp curve.

When driving on a sharp curve.
When the system determines that the steering assistance is difficult to continue due to the
road condition.
When the system determines that the steering assistance is difficult to operate due to
another system.
When the EyeSight system is temporarily stopped. (
(EyeSight Temporary Stop
indicator: White) is turned on.)
Refer to page 86.
When the EyeSight system has a malfunction. (
(EyeSight Warning indicator:
Yellow) is turned on.)
Refer to page 87.
NOTE
If the function is automatically canceled during the standby status (
(Lane Keep Assist indicator) illuminates in white), no beep sounds.
61
B2532BE-A.book
62

When an obstacle is detected in front of the
vehicle, and the vehicle is stopped or traveling
very slowly, if the system determines that the
accelerator pedal has been depressed by
more than the necessary amount (due to
driver error), it greatly restricts engine output
and ensures that vehicle forward movement is
slower than normal in order to give the driver
additional time to brake or react.
s hor
a te d
e
p
e
R
s
beep
S01125
During system operation, a buzzer will sound

several short beeps, and Obstacle Detected
will be shown on the warning screen area of
the multi information display. The lead vehicle
indicator will also flash.
This function only activates when the transmission select lever is in the D or M position.
Obstacle
Detected
S01119
WARNING
Do not rely excessively on Pre-Collision Throttle Management. PreCollision Throttle Management is not designed to help you avoid collisions in many situations. Always check the select lever and pedal positions as well as the surrounding environment before starting and
operating the vehicle. Relying only on Pre-Collision Throttle
Management could result in an accident.
Pre-Collision Throttle Management is not designed to maintain the vehicle
in a stopped condition.
Pre-Collision Throttle Management will not reduce acceleration under all
conditions. It is also not designed to prevent collisions.
Pre-Collision Throttle Management will operate when an obstacle is
detected in front. However, this function will not reduce acceleration in
cases where no obstacle is recognized (for example when approaching a
cliff, etc.)
Do not intentionally depress the accelerator pedal excessively when there
are obstacles nearby. If the driver relies only on Pre-Collision Throttle
Management to control acceleration, collisions may occur.
62
B2532BE-A.book
63
If your vehicle is trapped on a railroad crossing and you are trying to

escape by driving through the crossing gate, the stereo cameras may recognize the crossing gate as an obstacle and Pre-Collision Throttle
Management system may activate. In this case, remain calm and either
continue to depress the accelerator pedal or turn off the Pre-Collision
Throttle Management system.
Refer to page 67.
Pre-Collision Throttle Management may not activate depending on the following conditions:
- The distance between your vehicle and the obstacle, speed difference,
and lateral displacement (amount of offset)
- Recognition status of the stereo cameras
In particular, the function may not activate in the following cases:
Bad weather (for example heavy rain, a blizzard or thick fog)
When visibility is poor due to sand or smoke in the air
When light is poor in the evening, early morning, or at night
In a dark area (indoor parking area, etc.)
When there is an obstacle outside the area illuminated by the headlights
When affected by strong light from the front (for example sunlight at
sunrise or sunset headlight beams, etc.)
When there is snow, frost, dirt or dust on the windshield, or it is clouded
When fluid has not been fully wiped off the windshield during or after
use of the window washer
When obstacles cannot be correctly recognized due to water droplets
from rain or the washer, or the wiper blades obstructing the stereo
cameras field of view
When the stereo cameras field of view is obstructed (for example by a
With low obstacles (low wall, crash barrier, low vehicle, etc.)
When the size and height of an obstacle is smaller than the limitations
of the stereo cameras recognition capability
With small animals or children.
With pedestrians who are sitting or lying down
When the rear portion
nearest your vehicle is
too small or too close
(such as a trailer or
oncoming vehicle) the
system may not recognize the part of that
vehicle which is closest
to you.
S02134
63
B2532BE-A.book
64
When there is a fence or

wall, etc., with a uniform
pattern (striped pattern,
brick, etc.) or with no pattern in front
When there is a wall or
door made of glass or a
mirror in front
When an obstacle (another
vehicle, motorcycle, bicycle, pedestrian, animal or
S00653
child, etc.) cuts in from the
side or jumps out suddenly
When starting, if you change lanes and your vehicle is immediately
behind the obstacle
On sharp curves, steep uphill grades or steep downhill grades
- When the system determines that steering operation by the driver is
intended as evasive action
For your safety, do not test Pre-Collision Throttle Management on its own. It
may operate improperly and cause an accident.
64
B2532BE-A.book
65
CAUTION
In the following situations, turn off Pre-Collision Throttle Management. Otherwise Pre-Collision Throttle Management may activate unexpectedly.
- When the vehicle is being towed
- When loading the vehicle onto a carrier
- When a chassis dynamometer, free-rollers or similar equipment is used
- When a mechanic lifts up the vehicle, starts the engine and allows the
wheels to spin freely
- When passing hanging banners, flags or branches, or when thick/tall vegetation is contacting the vehicle
The Pre-Collision Throttle Management may activate in the following situations. Therefore concentrate on safe driving.
- When your vehicle is close to the vehicle in front
- When passing through an automatic gate
- When your vehicle is in a location where the grade of the road changes
rapidly
S01264
- When passing through clouds of steam or smoke
S00652
65
B2532BE-A.book
66
- When there is an obstacle on

a curve or intersection
- When narrowly passing a
vehicle or object
- When stopping very close to
a wall or a vehicle in front
S01973
NOTE
When the accelerator pedal is depressed for approximately three seconds,
Pre-Collision Throttle Management will be released gradually.
When the Pre-Collision Braking System is turned off, Pre-Collision Throttle
Management is also turned off.
Refer to page 30.
66
B2532BE-A.book
67
Turning off Pre-Collision Throttle Management

Pressing and holding the Pre-Collision Braking System OFF switch for approximately 2 seconds or longer will turn off the Pre-Collision Throttle Management System. When 1 short
beep sound emits, this function is turned off and the Pre-Collision Braking System OFF indicator light on the instrument panel illuminates.
To turn the system back on, press and hold the Pre-Collision Braking System OFF switch
again for approximately 2 seconds or longer. When this function is turned on, the PreCollision Braking System OFF indicator light turns off.
Refer to page 31.
S01120
S01121
NOTE
When Pre-Collision Throttle Management is turned off, the Pre-Collision
Braking System also turns off.
Even when Pre-Collision Throttle Management is turned off, if the ignition
switch is turned off and the engine is restarted, Pre-Collision Throttle
Management will be turned on. The default setting for Pre-Collision
Throttle Management when the vehicle is restarted is ON.
67
B2532BE-A.book
68

When vehicle speed is approximately 30 MPH (50 km/h) or more, this function warns the
driver if the system detects that the vehicle is likely to depart the traffic lane.
When Lane Departure Warning activates, a buzzer sounds 6 short beeps, and the area
around the lane indicator on the departing side flashes in yellow.
Lane
Departure
6
eps
t be
r
sho
S01267
S01126
* The illustration depicts a vehicle departing the left lane.
WARNING
Lane Departure Warning will not operate in all conditions. It also will not automatically return the vehicle to the original lane. If the driver relies only on the
Lane Departure Warning to keep the vehicle in the lane, lane departure may
occur, resulting in an accident.
The Lane Departure Warning activates when it detects lane markings. However, it is not a function which can detect the edge of a road (shoulders or
side ditches, etc.) and warn the driver.
68
69
CAUTION
In the following situations, the Lane Departure Warning will or may not activate:
Vehicle speed is approximately 30 MPH (50 km/h) or less.
When the steering wheel is turned significantly to either side
When the vehicle is driving around a curve whose radius is 0.18 miles (300
m) or smaller.
When the brake pedal is depressed or immediately after it is depressed
When the following distance behind a vehicle in front is short
While the turn signal is operating and for approximately 4 seconds after the
turn signal lever has returned to its original position
For approximately 4 seconds after the hazard lamp has switched off
When the vehicle has not returned to the inside of the lane after the Lane
Departure Warning has activated
The lane is narrow.
When it is difficult for the camera to detect lane markings
- There are no lane markings or they are very worn.
- The lane markings are yellow.
- It is difficult to detect lane markings as they are similar in color to the
road surface.
- The lane markings are narrow.
NOTE
The following situations may cause incorrect lane detection and a faulty
Lane Departure Warning to occur.
- Tire tracks on a wet road or snow-covered road
- Boundaries between snow and asphalt, marks from road repair, etc.
- Shadows of guardrails
- Lane markings are drawn in double
- There are some lane markings left from roadwork or markings from the
previous road.
When the Lane Departure Warning OFF indicator light is illuminated, the
Lane Departure Warning is inactive.
Refer to page 70.
69
B2532BE-A.book
70
Turning off Lane Departure Warning

Press and hold the Lane Departure Warning OFF switch for approximately 2 seconds or
longer to turn off the Lane Departure Warning. When 1 short beep sound emits, this function
is turned off and the Lane Departure Warning OFF indicator light on the instrument panel
will illuminate.
To turn the function back on, press and hold the Lane Departure Warning OFF switch again
for approximately 2 seconds or longer. When the function is turned on, the Lane Departure
Warning OFF indicator light turns off.
S01122
NOTE
When the Lane Departure Warning is turned off, the Lane Sway Warning is
also turned off.
The engine is turned off. The conditions prior to turning off the engine are
preserved and restored after starting the engine again.

This indicator illuminates when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON position, and then
approximately 7 seconds after the engine
starts, it turns off or remains illuminated
depending on the current status (ON or OFF).
It turns on when the Lane Departure Warning
is turned off.
It also illuminates under the following conditions.
When the EyeSight system has a malfunction
Refer to page 86.
When the EyeSight system has stopped temporarily
Refer to page 87.
70
S01123
B2532BE-A.book
71
Lane Sway Warning
Lane Sway Warning

This function detects wandering or drifting within a lane, and warns the driver. When Lane
Sway Warning activates, a buzzer sounds 6 short beeps and the left and right lane indicators flash alternately in yellow.
This function activates only when the vehicle speed is approximately 38 MPH (60 km/h) or
more.
Stay Alert
shor 6
t bee
ps
S00650
S01127
WARNING
Lane Sway Warning will not operate in all conditions. It also will not automatically correct wandering. If the driver relies only on the Lane Sway Warning to
prevent the vehicle from wandering, an accident may occur.
CAUTION
Under the following conditions, the Lane Sway Warning may not operate.
When driving on a winding road
When vehicle speed changes greatly
Immediately after a lane change
When it is difficult for the EyeSight stereo cameras to detect lane markings
- There are no lane markings or they are the very worn.
- It is difficult to detect lane markings as they are similar in color to the
road surface.
- The lane markings are narrow.
71
B2532BE-A.book
72
Lane Sway Warning
NOTE
Wandering detection is based on several minutes of driving data. Wandering will not be detected immediately when it occurs. In addition, the warning may continue for some time even after wandering stops.
The Lane Sway Warning System is just a function that warns the driver.
When the driver is tired, not concentrating on the road or not paying adequate attention to driving, be sure to take rest breaks as often as needed.
When the Lane Departure Warning OFF indicator light is illuminated, the
Lane Sway Warning will not operate.
Refer to page 70.
72
B2532BE-A.book
73
Lane Sway Warning
Turning off Lane Sway Warning

Press and hold the Lane Departure Warning OFF switch for approximately 2 seconds or
longer to turn off the Lane Sway Warning. When 1 short beep sound emits, this function is
turned off and the Lane Departure Warning OFF indicator light on the instrument panel illuminates.
To turn the function back on, press and hold the Lane Departure Warning OFF switch again
for approximately 2 seconds or longer. When the function is turned on, the Lane Departure
Warning OFF indicator light turns off.
Refer to page 70.
S01122
S01123
NOTE
When the Lane Sway Warning is turned off, the Lane Departure Warning is
also turned off.
The engine is turned off. The conditions prior to turning off the engine are
preserved and restored after starting the engine again.
73
B2532BE-A.book
74
Lead Vehicle Start Alert

This function notifies the driver by means of a buzzer and the lead vehicle indicator on the
multi information display when the drivers vehicle remains stopped after the vehicle in front
has started to move forward. When the vehicle in front remains stopped continuously (within
a following distance of approximately 32 ft (10 m) and the drivers vehicle remains stopped
for several seconds or longer), the system continues to detect the vehicle in front and this
alarm activates if the vehicle in front advances approximately 10 ft (3 m) or more while the
drivers vehicle remains stationary.
This function only activates when the select lever is in the D , M or N position.
When the Lead Vehicle Start Alert activates, a buzzer sounds a two-tone beep and the lead
vehicle indicator moves.
Vehicle Ahead
Has Moved
Lead
vehicle
Lead
vehicle
10 ft (3 m)
or more
Two-tone beep
S01266
NOTE
The Lead Vehicle Start Alert setting can be turned on or off.
Refer to page 89.
Under the following conditions, the Lead Vehicle Start Alert may activate
even when the vehicle in front has not started to move, or may not activate
even after the vehicle in front has started to move:
- A motorcycle or similar object has cut in between your vehicle and the
stopped vehicle in front.
- Weather or road conditions prevent detection of the vehicle in front.
- The EyeSight stereo cameras lose detection of the vehicle in front.
74
S01128
B2532BE-A.book
75

About Conventional Cruise Control
Conventional Cruise Control is a driving support system intended to allow more comfortable
driving on expressways, freeways and interstate highways. It can be used to travel at a constant speed by maintaining the vehicle speed that was set by the driver. Please remember
that you should not exceed posted speed limits.
WARNING
When Conventional Cruise Control is functioning, the system does not perform tracking control to maintain following distance, as when using Adaptive Cruise Control.
Strive for safe driving and operate the brake pedal to decelerate the vehicle as necessary in order to ensure a safe following distance from the vehicle in front.
Under the following conditions, do not use the Conventional Cruise
Control. Doing so may result in an accident.
- Roads with heavy traffic or roads with sharp curves
You may fail to drive at a speed that is appropriate for the road conditions, possibly resulting in an accident.
- Frozen roads, snow-covered roads or slippery road surfaces
The tires may spin, causing loss of control of the vehicle.
- Steep downhill grades
The set vehicle speed may be exceeded.
- On a steep continuous downhill grade
The brakes may overheat.
CAUTION
When using Cruise Control, be sure to check the EyeSight display area to
confirm which Cruise Control mode is selected: Adaptive Cruise Control or
(Adaptive Cruise Control
If Adaptive Cruise Control is selected,
indicator) illuminates.
(Conventional Cruise
If Conventional Cruise Control is selected,
Control indicator) illuminates.
NOTE
When the
(CRUISE) switch is first turned on, the Adaptive Cruise
Control is set.
To change the Cruise Control mode, press and hold the
/
(following distance setting) switch for approximately 2 seconds or longer.
(This is effective only when the main Cruise Control is on and neither
Adaptive Cruise Control nor Conventional Cruise Control are set.)
Conventional Cruise Control can be used even when EyeSight is temporarily turned off.
75
B2532BE-A.book
76
How to use the Conventional Cruise Control

Conventional Cruise Control can be set when the following conditions are met.
- The select lever is in the D position and the paddle shift is not operated.
- The brake pedal is released.
- The vehicle speed is between approximately 25 MPH (40 km/h) and 90 MPH (145
km/h).
Setting Conventional Cruise Control

(1) Setting the Conventional Cruise Control to standby status.
Press the
(CRUISE) switch. At this time,
(Adaptive Cruise Control) and the
following distance setting are displayed on the EyeSight display area of the multi information display. The set vehicle speed display will read - - MPH.
When the
(CRUISE) switch is pressed, the initial cruise control mode is always
Adaptive Cruise Control.
S01985
S01110
If the
(CRUISE) switch is pressed again, the EyeSight display will turn off. It will also
automatically turn off when the engine is stopped.
76
B2532BE-A.book
77
(2) Switch to Conventional Cruise Control.

Press and hold the
/
(following distance setting) switch for approximately 2
seconds or longer to switch from Adaptive Cruise Control to Conventional Cruise
Control. A buzzer sounds 1 short beep.
At this time, the following distance setting indicator on the EyeSight display area of the
multi information display turns off and
(Conventional Cruise Control) is displayed.
S01992
S01129
To set the ready status:

Conventional Cruise Control can be set when
all of the following conditions are met and
is displayed on the EyeSight display
area.
- All doors (except the rear gate/trunk) are
closed.
- The drivers seatbelt is fastened.
- The electronic parking brake is not
engaged (The brake system warning light
is turned off.).
S02327
- The select lever is in the D position, and
the paddle shift is not operated.
- The brake pedal is not depressed.
- EyeSight operation is not temporarily stopped.
Refer to page 87.
- The road is not on a steep slope.
- The steering wheel has not been turned significantly in either direction.
- The X-mode is not turned on.
- The vehicle speed is between approximately 25 MPH (40 km/h) and 90 MPH (145
km/h).
(3) Control the accelerator pedal to reach the desired speed.
77
B2532BE-A.book
78
(4) When the vehicle speed is between approximately 25 MPH (40 km/h) and 90 MPH (145
km/h), press the RES/SET switch to the SET/-.
The vehicle speed at the time the switch is pressed becomes the set vehicle speed, and
constant-speed driving is engaged.
and the set vehicle speed are displayed on the EyeSight display area.
S01986
WARNING
The brake more warning will not activate while Conventional Cruise Control
is functioning.
CAUTION
During Conventional Cruise Control use, accelerator and brake control to
track the vehicle in front is not performed. Operate the accelerator and brake
pedals as necessary.
NOTE
On a downhill grade, automatic braking may operate in order to maintain
the set vehicle speed.
When driving on a curve, the vehicle may not accelerate, or may decelerate, even if the set speed is higher than the current vehicle speed.
To return to Adaptive Cruise Control use, cancel the Conventional Cruise
Control and then briefly press the
/
(following distance setting)
switch.
78
S02328
B2532BE-A.book
79
Increasing the set vehicle speed

The following two methods can be used to increase the set vehicle speed.

Push the RES/SET switch in the following way while you are driving with Conventional
Cruise Control on:
in increments of 1 MPH (1 km/h) every time the button is pushed.
Push the RES/+ switch towards the position (1) for longer: the set vehicle speed will
increase in increments of 1 MPH (1 km/h) while the button is being pushed.
to the next 5 MPH (5 km/h) increment every time the button is pushed.
Push the RES/+ switch towards the position (2) for longer: the set vehicle speed will
increase to the next 5 MPH (5 km/h) increment while the button is being pushed and will
continue to advance target speed in 5 MPH (5 km/h) increments as long as the button is
pushed.
The set vehicle speed is shown on the EyeSight display area.
S01990
Using the accelerator pedal

Operate the accelerator pedal to increase the
vehicle speed.
When the desired speed is reached, press the
RES/SET switch to the SET/-. When the
switch is released, the new vehicle speed is
set.
S01986
79
B2532BE-A.book
80
Decreasing the set vehicle speed

Push the RES/SET switch in the following way while you are driving with Conventional
Cruise Control on:
in increments of 1 MPH (1 km/h) every time the button is pushed.
decrease in increments of 1 MPH (1 km/h) while the button is being pushed.
to the next 5 MPH (5 km/h) decrement every time the button is pushed.
decrease to the next 5 MPH (5 km/h) decrement while the button is being pushed and will
continue to lower target speed in 5 MPH (5 km/h) decrements as long as the button is
pushed.
The set vehicle speed is shown on the EyeSight display area.
S01991
Using the brake pedal

(1) Depress the brake pedal to decrease the vehicle speed. (Conventional Cruise Control
will be canceled and
will be turned off.)
(2) When the desired speed is reached, press the RES/SET switch to the SET/-. The
speed at the time of pressing the switch will be set as the new vehicle speed, and it
appears in the EyeSight display area.
Accelerating temporarily
Depress the accelerator pedal to accelerate temporarily.
When the accelerator pedal is released, the vehicle returns to the set vehicle speed.
80
B2532BE-A.book
81
Decelerating temporarily
Depress the brake pedal to decelerate temporarily. When the brake pedal is depressed,
Conventional Cruise Control will be canceled.
While the set vehicle target speed remains
displayed on the EyeSight display area,
will be turned off.
Release the brake pedal and press the
RES/SET switch for RES/+ to reset the set
vehicle target speed.
will be turned off.
S02329
Canceling Conventional Cruise Control

Manual Cancellation by the driver
Any of the following operations will cancel Conventional Cruise Control.
Depress the brake pedal.
will be turned off while the set vehicle target speed remains displayed on the
Press the
(CRUISE) switch.
will be turned off while the set vehicle target speed remains displayed on the
When the
(CRUISE) switch is pressed again, the
will be turned off and
Conventional Cruise Control will be turned off.
will be turned off.

S01985
S02329
81
B2532BE-A.book
82
Automatic cancellation by the system

In the following cases, a buzzer sounds a single long beep and the Cruise control function is
automatically canceled (
is displayed on the EyeSight display area.). After the conditions listed below have been eliminated, perform the cruise control set operation again to
reactivate cruise control.
The select lever was moved to a position other than D .
The cruise control function can be used again after the lever is returned to the D position.
A paddle shift switch was operated during
driving with the lever in the D position.
The cruise control function can be used
again after the shift indicator returns to D .
Vehicle speed drops to approximately 20
MPH (30 km/h) or less (due to a steep uphill
grade or some other reason).
S02330
The X-mode is turned on (the X-mode indicator light

illuminates).
- Cruise control can be resumed after the X-mode is turned off.
Vehicle speed rises to approximately 100 MPH (160 km/h) or more.
The ABS, Vehicle Dynamics Control or Traction Control functions activate.
Any door (except the rear gate/trunk) was opened.
The drivers seatbelt is unfastened.
The Electronic Parking Brake is engaged (When the brake system warning light is illuminated or flashing).
When the EyeSight system has a malfunction. (
(EyeSight Warning indicator:
Yellow) is turned on.)
The steering wheel is turned significantly in either direction.
The grade of the road is steep.
The Pre-Collision secondary braking has activated.
WARNING
Do not use Conventional Cruise Control on slippery roads. Doing so may

result in an accident.
82
B2532BE-A.book
83
CAUTION
When shifting the select lever to the N position, Conventional Cruise Control
will be automatically canceled. Do not shift the lever to the N position unless
it is an emergency. Otherwise the engine brake may not operate, which could
cause an accident.
NOTE
If EyeSight is malfunctioning, the EyeSight warning indicator is displayed
on the multi information display and the Pre-Collision Braking System OFF
indicator light and Lane Departure Warning OFF indicator light illuminate. If
this occurs, stop the vehicle in a safe location and then stop the engine
and restart it. If the indicators remain illuminated after restarting the
engine, Conventional Cruise Control cannot be used. This will not interfere
with ordinary driving; however the system should be inspected by a
Refer to page 86.
When operation of Conventional Cruise Control has been automatically
canceled, perform the set operation again after the condition that caused
the cancellation has been eliminated. If cruise control cannot be set even
after the condition has been corrected, EyeSight may be malfunctioning.
This will not interfere with ordinary driving; however the system should be
inspected by a SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.
83
B2532BE-A.book
84
Resuming a vehicle speed that was previously stored

A vehicle speed that has been previously set is stored in memory*. To recall and set that
vehicle speed, press the RES/SET switch to the RES/+. (The EyeSight display area shows
the set condition again.)
Resume is possible when a vehicle speed was previously set, and the current vehicle speed
is approximately 20 MPH (30 km/h) or more.
S01993
NOTE
* The vehicle speed stored in memory is erased at the following times:
- The cruise control is turned off by pressing the
(CRUISE) switch.
- Either vehicle Dynamics Control or Traction Control Function has been
activated.
- The cruise control mode was switched from Conventional Cruise Control
to Adaptive Cruise Control.
The vehicle will drive at a constant speed that was set between approximately 25 MPH (40 km/h) and 90 MPH (145 km/h).
If there is no vehicle speed in the memory (a previously set vehicle speed),
the vehicle speed cannot be resumed by depressing the RES/+ switch.
84
S02328
B2532BE-A.book
85
List of buzzer sounds
List of buzzer sounds

Buzzer sound
Single continuous
beep
Single long beep
Status
Reference page
Pre-Collision Braking System:

Refer to page 27.
Secondary Braking is active.
Adaptive Cruise Control or Conventional Cruise
Control is canceled.
The Electronic Parking Brake was automatically
Refer to pages
applied during stay-stopped condition by
49 and 82.
Adaptive Cruise Control.
Lane Keep Assist is canceled automatically.
Repeated short
beeps

First Braking is active.
Refer to page 27.
The following distance warning is active.
The brake more warning from Adaptive Cruise
Refer to page 52.
Control is active.
Pre-Collision Throttle Management is active.
Refer to page 62.
The Lane Departure Warning is active.
Refer to page 68.
The Lane Sway Warning is active.
Refer to page 71.
6 short beeps
5 intermittent
beeps and 1 long
beep
1 short beep
The stay-stopped function of Adaptive Cruise

Control continued for 2 minutes and the Elec- Refer to page 47.
tronic Parking Brake is automatically applied.
Either of the following occurred while Adaptive
Cruise Control was set.
Refer to page 40.
- A vehicle in front is detected*.
*
- A vehicle in front is no longer detected .
The cruise control mode (Adaptive Cruise
Control
Conventional Cruise Control) is Refer to page 77.
changed.
EyeSight is malfunctioning.
EyeSight operation is temporarily stopped.
Refer to pages
86 and 87.
Pre-Collision Braking System and Pre-Collision Refer to pages

30 and 67.
Throttle Management are turned on/off.
The Lane Departure Warning and the Lane Refer to pages
70 and 73.
Sway Warning are turned on/off.
Two-tone beep
Lead Vehicle Start Alert is active*.
Refer to page 74.
*The buzzer that indicates when a lead vehicle is detected or when it is no longer detected (Lead
Vehicle Acquisition Sound), as well as the Lead Vehicle Start Alert can be turned on or off.
Refer to page 89.
85
86
EyeSight malfunction and temporary stop

If a malfunction is detected in the EyeSight system, the indicators in the instrument panel
and the multi information display inform the driver of the malfunction. Check the displayed
contents and take the appropriate action.
Malfunction (including position/angle misalignment of stereo

cameras)
The buzzer sounds 1 short beep and the
EyeSight warning indicator
(yellow)
flashes or illuminates. At the same time, the
Pre-Collision Braking System OFF indicator
light and the Lane Departure Warning OFF
indicator light will illuminate. A message will
also be displayed on the multi information
display.
S01134
Displayed screen
Cause
Action
An EyeSight malfunction or Inspection and adjustment is

position/angle misalignment necessary.
of stereo cameras has Contact your SUBARU dealer.
occurred.
S00699
CAUTION
If both the EyeSight warning indicator and the CHECK ENGINE warning
light/malfunction indicator light illuminate at the same time while driving, have
your vehicle checked/repaired by a SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.
EyeSight cannot be used if there is an abnormality with the engine, etc.
NOTE
If the EyeSight warning indicator illuminates or flashes, stop the vehicle in
a safe location, turn off the engine and then restart it.
If the EyeSight warning indicator illuminates or flashes, the RAB system
will not operate.
If the indicator continues illuminating or flashing even after the engine has
been restarted, the EyeSight system has a malfunction. In this case, all
EyeSight functions will be stopped. Normal driving will still be possible.
However, contact a SUBARU dealer for an inspection.
86
B2532BE-A.book
87
Temporary stop
The buzzer will sound one short beep, and the
EyeSight temporary stop indicator
(white), Pre-Collision Braking System OFF
indicator light and Lane Departure Warning
OFF indicator light will illuminate at the same
time.
A message will also be displayed on the multi
information display.
When the cause has been eliminated, temporary stop will be canceled and the EyeSight
system will automatically restart.
Displayed screen
S00700
Cause
Action
It is difficult for the stereo Clean the front windshield.

cameras to detect objects in In bad weather or if there is
front
strong light from the front,
The front windshield is
the EyeSight system will
dirty or fogged up
restart once you have driven
Poor weather conditions
your vehicle for a period of
Strong light from the front
time and the conditions
affecting the system have
improved.
If the system does not
restart, even after the conditions have improved and a
period of time has elapsed,
contact your SUBARU
dealer for an inspection.
In low or high temperatures
S00701
S01135
The system will restart once

the temperature is within the
operational range of the
EyeSight system.
If the system does not restart,
even when the temperature
inside the vehicle is normal,
contact your SUBARU dealer
for an inspection.
87
B2532BE-A.book
88
Displayed screen
S00694
Cause
Action
When the EyeSight system is starting

When the system has
determined that the vehicle is extremely inclined
When the pre-collision
secondary braking has
operated 3 times after the
engine was started
When the engine is
stopped
When the electronic
power steering system is
in the overheating prevention status because the
steering wheel has been
operated while the vehicle
is at a standstill or driving
at an extremely slow
speed
When the EyeSight system judged a different
value due to the removal
or installation of the steering wheel
When the wheel
alignment is out
The system will restart once

the cause has been eliminated. At this time, it may
take some time for the system to restart.
If the system does not
restart, even after the conditions have improved and a
period of time has elapsed,
contact your SUBARU dealer
for an inspection.
NOTE
When the EyeSight temporary stop indicator is illuminated, no EyeSight
functions can be used except for Conventional Cruise Control.
When the EyeSight temporary stop indicator is illuminated, the RAB system will not operate.
88
B2532BE-A.book
89
Customizing functions
The following settings can be changed on the multi information display.
Item
Setting
Default setting
Max/Mid/Min
Mid
ON/OFF
ON
Lead Vehicle Moving Monitor Function
ON/OFF
ON
Vehicle Icon
ON/OFF
ON
Warning Volume
EyeSight
Lead Vehicle Acquisition Sound
NOTE
The following settings can be restored to the factory (default) settings.
Refer to the Owners Manual for your vehicle.
How to customize
Operations can be performed when the select
lever is in the P position and the ignition
switch is in the ON position while the vehicle
is parked.
(1) Pull the
/
switch toward you to display the Change settings screen.
Keep pulling the
(Info)/SET switch to
change to the settings screen.
(2) Pull the
/
switch toward you,
select EyeSight, and pull the
(Info)/SET switch to confirm.
The system will then switch to the
EyeSight settings screen.
Operate the following switches according to
what is displayed on the screen.
Select:
(Return) switch/
(Send) switch
Confirm:
(Info)/SET switch
Change settings
Settings screen
Settings
SET
Pull and hold

i/SET Switch
For Menu
Screen Settings
Select
SET
1/7
Enter
Select
S01136
89
B2532BE-A.book
90
Warning Volume setting

The volume can be set to Max/Mid/Min.
When on the Warning Volume settings screen, if the volume is selected with the
switch, 3 short beeps will sound.
Lead Vehicle Acquisition Sound setting

The Lead Vehicle Acquisition Sound setting can be activated (ON) or deactivated (OFF).
Lead Vehicle Moving Monitor Function

The Lead Vehicle Start Alert function setting can be activated (ON) or deactivated (OFF).
Vehicle Icon setting

Your vehicle indicator setting can be activated (ON) or deactivated (OFF).
NOTE
When Return is selected, the system will return to the screen directly above
the current one.
Canceling the custom functions

In the following cases, the custom functions will be canceled and the Change settings
When you keep pulling the
(Info)/SET switch toward you
When the engine is turned off
When the switch is not operated for approximately 30 seconds
90
B2532BE-A.book
91
Message screen list
Message screen list

If an EyeSight warning or malfunction is detected, a message will be displayed on the multi
information display. Depending on the message, a buzzer will sound at the same time.
Normal indicator
Message indicator
Normal indicator
EyeSight Off
Check Manual
mark
S01137
If a message is displayed, refer to the message list and take the appropriate action.
While the
mark is illuminated, pull the
(Info)/SET switch to indicate the message
again.
S01138
Message screen list (precautions and notices)

Item
Displayed screen
Pre-Collision Braking
System
The brake more
warning
Action
None
Refer to page 27.
None
Refer to page 52.
None
Refer to page 62.
None
Refer to page 27.
None
Refer to page 68.
S00695
Pre-Collision Throttle
Management
Apply Brake
mark
Apply Brake
To Hold
Position Check
Manual S01139
Lane Departure
Warning
S00696
91
B2532BE-A.book
92
Message screen list
Item
Displayed screen
Steering operation not

detected by Lane
Keep Assist
Keep Hands On
Steering Wheel
mark
Action
None
Refer to page 54.
None
Refer to page 71.
None
Refer to page 74.
S01997
Lane Sway Warning

S00697
Lead Vehicle Start

Alert
S00698
Adaptive Cruise
Control/Conventional
Cruise Control
automatic cancellation
(when the grade of the
road is very steep)
Cruise Control Cancelled

Steep Hill
None
S02219
Refer to pages
49 and 82.
Message screen list (malfunction, temporary stop)

Item
Displayed screen
EyeSight System
Malfunction
mark
Action
Yes
(yellow)
Refer to page 86.
Yes
(white)
Refer to page 87.
Yes
(white)
Refer to page 87.
Yes
(white)
Refer to page 88.
S00699
S00700
EyeSight system
temporary stop
S00701
S00694
92
B2532BE-A.book
93
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
Adaptive Cruise control cannot be set.
Did you remember to press the
If you have not pressed the
Control) will not be shown.
(CRUISE) switch?
(CRUISE) switch,
(Adaptive Cruise
Is EyeSight operation temporarily stopped?

When EyeSight is temporarily stopped,
is displayed on the multi information
display.
Set cruise control again after the reason for the temporary stop has been corrected.
Is
displayed?
Cruise control cannot be set when
is displayed.
is not displayed. Set cruise control when
is not displayed.
Are the requirements for setting cruise control met?
In any of the following cases,
will not be displayed.
The brake pedal is depressed.
The vehicle speed is not between approximately 0 MPH (0 km/h) and 90
MPH (145 km/h) (when Adaptive Cruise Control is operating).
The vehicle speed is not between approximately 25 MPH (40 km/h) and 90
MPH (145 km/h) (when Conventional Cruise Control is operating).
The combination meter indicates a position other than D . (The select
lever or paddle shift switches are manually operated.)
The drivers seatbelt is unfastened.
Any door is opened (except the rear gate/trunk).
The electronic parking brake is applied (The brake system warning light is
illuminated or flashing.)*.
The vehicle is on a steep grade.
The X-mode is turned on. (The X-mode indicator illuminates.)
The steering wheel is turned significantly in either direction.
*For details of how to release the Electronic Parking Brake, refer to the
Owners Manual for your vehicle.
93
B2532BE-A.book
94
Troubleshooting
A vehicle (in front of your vehicle) is not detected, is detected later or detection is
lost quickly.
Is the vehicle in front stopped, moving slowly relative to your vehicle or moving
extremely slowly?
Detection of stopped vehicles, vehicle moving slowly relative to your vehicle, and
vehicles moving extremely slowly may be difficult.
Is the windshield dirty or fogged?
If the windshield is dirty or fogged, it may not be possible to detect object or vehicles. Clean off the dirt or fog from the windshield, and then try using the system
again.
Is the vehicle in front far away?
The maximum detection distance of EyeSights stereo cameras is approximately
360 ft (110 m). Detection is not possible if the vehicle is farther away.
Is the vehicle on a curve?
The detection range is limited in the left and right directions when the cameras are
properly aimed.
Is the vehicle on a road with repeated uphill and downhill grades (such as an overpass), or on a banked road?
The detection range is limited in the up and down directions.
Did the vehicle detected in front change?
Detection may be delayed after the vehicle in front has changed.
Have water, snow or other substances been kicked up by the vehicle in front as it
drives?
When water or snow have been kicked up, it may not be possible to detect the
vehicle in front.
Control is activated even though no vehicle in front is detected?

Is there a vehicle in the neighboring lane?
Depending on the road conditions, vehicles in neighboring lanes may be detected
as well as a vehicle directly in front.
Are you driving on or near a curve?
When driving on a curve, braking control may be activated in response to guard
rails, the angle of the steering wheel, or roadside structures.
The Lead Vehicle Start Alert activates, even though there is no vehicle in front.
Depending on surrounding objects, traffic environment and weather, the Lead
Vehicle Start Alert may issue a warning in response to objects other than a vehicle
that appear in front of your vehicle.
94
B2532BE-A.book
95
Troubleshooting
EyeSight does not restart after a temporary stop.

Is the X-mode turned on?
EyeSight cannot be activated when the X-mode is turned on.
Are you driving in the rain with old wipers or is there an oily film on the windshield?
Replace the wipers with new ones, or clean the oily film off the windshield.
Are you driving in poor weather conditions with heavy rain, snow, fog, or dust? In
these cases, EyeSight may temporarily stop operating while visibility is very low.
Is your vehicle subject to sunlight from the front (sunset or sunrise, etc.) or to
bright headlights from oncoming vehicles at nighttime?
In these cases, EyeSight may temporarily stop operating.
Has the vehicle been parked in a cold or hot place? In either of these cases,
EyeSight may temporarily stop operating until the temperature increases or
decreases to a temperature at which the camera is operable.
The timing of the brake more warning is sometimes earlier and sometimes later
than what seems to be normal operation.
The brake more warning sounds when the system determines that more braking
is necessary, based on conditions such as the distance from the vehicle in front
and the difference in speed compared to it. As a result, timing may vary depending on how the brakes are applied in relation to the vehicle in front, and your relative speed to that vehicle.
When the vehicle in front has turned off the road away or the distance from the
vehicle in front has increased, acceleration is sometimes slower or faster.
Depending on the timing of when the detection of the vehicle in front is lost,
EyeSights ability to react may be slower, causing the start of acceleration to feel
delayed and braking time to feel longer than what seems to be normal operation.
95
B2532BE-A.book
96
Troubleshooting
Cruise control is canceled automatically.

Did you perform one of the following operations?
Manually depressing the brake pedal
Pressing the
(CRUISE) switch
- If the
(CRUISE) switch is pressed while the cruise control is set,
the cruise control will be canceled.
Staying on a steep slope
Turning the steering wheel sharply
Operating the paddle shift lever
Shifting the select lever to the M position
Pressing the X-mode switch (The X-mode indicator illuminates.)
Has the EyeSight system temporarily stopped?
A noise occurs when automatic braking control activates.

This is the sound of the automatic braking control operating - there are some
mechanical components to the system, and they do occasionally make audible
sounds during automatic braking control. It is not necessarily a malfunction.
Braking control activates frequently when driving in heavy traffic.

Unlike a human driving, the EyeSight system performs control based only on the
actions of vehicles or objects in front. As a result, acceleration and deceleration
may be more frequent while the system adjusts to vehicles or objects the camera
system is detecting. If it is difficult to maintain a consistent following distance
under certain conditions (like in bad weather or urban environments, etc.), do not
use Adaptive Cruise Control.
The Electronic Parking Brake is applied automatically while the stay-stopped function is operating.
The electronic parking brake will be applied in the following cases.
The stay-stopped function is continuously applied for approximately 2 minutes.
Automatic cancel conditions ( refer to page 49.) have been met.
96
B2532BE-A.book
97
Troubleshooting
Lane Keep Assist was unexpectedly canceled

Did you take your hands off the steering wheel? Did you just lightly put your hands
on the steering wheel while driving?
If the system cannot detect the steering operation of the driver, it will temporarily
cancel Lane Keep Assist.
Did you turn a tight corner?
Lane Keep Assist does not operate while turning a tight corner.
Did you perform one of the following operations?
Operating the turn signal lever
Operating the steering wheel to depart from a lane
Depressing the accelerator pedal deeply
Operating the windshield wiper in a high speed
Driving your vehicle at a speed less than approximately 37 MPH (60 km/h)
or more than approximately 93 MPH (150 km/h)
Depressing the brake pedal
Turning on the hazard warning flasher switch
97
B2532BE-A.book
98
MEMO
98
Outback
2017
Quick Reference Guide
Love. Its what makes a Subaru, a Subaru.
Complete U.S. specifications and

illustrations may not have been
available at time of publication.
Specifications are based on the
latest product information available
at time of publication. Some images
shown are for illustration purposes
only. Some equipment shown
may be optional at extra cost.
Specific options may be available
only in combination with other
options. Specific combinations of
equipment or features may vary
from time to time and by geographic
area. Certain accessories and
equipment may not be available
at the time of publication.
For detailed operating and safety

information, please consult the
Owners Manual.
This Quick Reference Guide

applies to all Outback models.
Therefore, some explanations may
be for equipment not installed on
your vehicle. Subaru of America,
Inc., reserves the right to change
or discontinue at any time,
without notice, prices, colors,
materials, equipment, accessories,
specifications, models and
packages without incurring any
obligation to make the same or
similar changes on vehicles
previously sold. Colors shown may
vary due to reproduction process.
2016 Subaru of America, Inc.
Subaru, Outback, Legacy, Forester,

Impreza, BRZ, WRX, WRX STI,
BOXER, Lineartronic, EyeSight,
HD Radio, Aha Radio and SiriusXM
are registered trademarks.
SUBARU STARLINK is a trademark
of Fuji Heavy Industries, Ltd.
All rights reserved. Contents may
not be reprinted or electronically
reproduced in whole or in part
without prior written approval of
Subaru of America, Inc.
Table of Contents
25
Getting Started
67
Instrument Panel
811
Gauges
1213
Personalize
1421
Controls
2227
While Operating
2829
Safety/In Case of Emergency
3031
Additional Information
Remote Keyless Entry

1. Lock/Arm
Press to lock all doors and the rear
gate and activate the security alarm.
If any of the doors or the rear gate are
not fully closed, an electronic chirp
will sound and the hazard lights will
flash to alert you that the doors or the
rear gate are not properly closed.
To activate the vehicle finder function,
press three times (within five seconds).
If you are within 30 feet of the vehicle,
the horn will sound one time and the
hazard lights will flash three times.
3. Unlocking the Rear Gate

Press the button to unlock the
rear gate.
4. Panic Alarm
Press once and the horn will sound

and the hazard lights will flash.
Press any button on the remote

to deactivate.
2. Unlock/Disarm
Press once to unlock the drivers door.
Press twice (within five seconds) to
unlock all doors.
When the Unlock/Disarm button
is pressed, the dome and map lights
will illuminate if the dome light switch
is in the middle position.
1
2
3
4
1
Keyless Access and

Push Button Start (if equipped)
By simply carrying the access key in your pocket, you can
lock and unlock doors, open the rear gate and start your
car without having to take the key fob out of your pocket.
2
3
4
Getting
Getting
Started
Started
Seating
Instrument
Panel
2
3
Gauges
10-Way Power Drivers Seat (if equipped)

2. Seatback
Move the switch in the
corresponding direction to adjust
the angle of the seatback.
Personalize
3. Lumbar Support
Press the front part of the switch
to increase lumbar support;
press the rear part of the switch
to decrease lumbar support.
Controls
1. Forward/Backward,
Angle and Height
Move the switch toward the front
or rear to move the seat forward
or backward. Pull the switch up
or push down on the front of the
switch to adjust the angle of the
seat cushion. Pulling the switch
straight up or pushing the switch
straight down will adjust the height
of the entire seat cushion.
While
Operating
Safety/In Case
of Emergency
Memory Drivers Seat (if equipped)

While pressing the SET button, press and hold the desired button
1 or 2. A beep sounds when the seat position is registered.
Press button 1 or 2 to retrieve the seat positions.
Additional
Information
Seating
Seat Controls
1. Forward/Backward
Pull up on the lever below the front
of the drivers seat to move the seat
forward or backward.
2. Raise/Lower Seat Cushion
To adjust the height of the drivers seat,
pull up or push down the seat height
adjustment lever, located on the lower
left front of the seat.
3. Recline Seatback
To adjust the seatback to the desired position, pull up on the recline lever, located on the
lower left rear of the drivers seat or lower right rear of the passengers seat. Do not adjust
seats while driving.
Heated Seats (if equipped)

Press the front seat heater switch. Each time you press the switch, the mode will change as
follows: High, Mid, Low, Off.
Getting
Getting
Started
Started
Rear Seat Heater (if equipped)

Instrument
Panel
Press the rear seat heater switch. Each time

you press the switch, the mode will change
as follows: High, Low, Off.
Gauges
Folding the Rear Seat

Personalize
From Inside the Vehicle

Push the release button on the top
of the seatback that you want to fold
down. To return the seatback to its
original position, raise the seatback
until it locks into place, making sure
that it is securely locked.
Controls
From the Rear of the Vehicle

Pull the release lever on the seat side that you want
to fold down. To return the seatback to its original
position, raise the seatback until it locks into place,
making sure that it is securely locked.
While
Operating
Safety/In Case
of Emergency
Additional
Information
Instrument Panel
PAGE
NUMBER
14, 19
20
8-11
21
Getting
Started
Instrument
Instrument
Panel
Panel
Gauges
Personalize
Controls
While
Operating
16-17
Safety/In Case
of Emergency
23
Additional
Information
Clock
Press the + button to advance the time or the
button to reverse the time. Vehicles with a
navigation system, please refer to the separate
Operating Instructions for Navigation System.
Gauges
Tachometer
Outback 2.5i
Immediate Attention
Caution
Informational
Trip meter reset button
Temperature gauge
Trip meter and odometer
Seatbelt warning
Hot coolant temperature/

Cold coolant temperature
Front passenger
seatbelt warning
High beam indicator light
SRS airbag system
Engine oil level warning
AT OIL TEMP
(Automatic Transmission)
Charge warning
ABS warning
Low fuel
Brake system
All-Wheel Drive
Getting
Started
Speedometer
Instrument
Panel
Gauges
Gauges
Personalize
Fuel gauge
Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF
Turn signals
CHECK ENGINE/
Malfunction indicator

light (if equipped)
Tire pressure warning light
While
Operating
Hill Holder
Controls
Vehicle Dynamics
Control/Vehicle Dynamics
Control operation
Safety/In Case
of Emergency
Front passenger airbag ON

(Located on overhead console)
Front passenger airbag OFF

Additional
Information
Low windshield
washer fluid
Gauges
Tachometer
Outback 2.5i Premium

Outback 2.5i Limited
Outback 2.5i Touring
Outback 3.6R Limited
Outback 3.6R Touring
Immediate Attention
Caution
Informational
Trip meter reset button
10
Temperature gauge
Trip meter and odometer
Seatbelt warning
Door open (if equipped)
Front passenger
seatbelt warning
Hot coolant temperature/

Cold coolant temperature
SRS airbag system
High beam indicator light
Engine oil level warning
Charge warning
AT OIL TEMP
ABS warning
Brake system
Low fuel
Getting
Started
Speedometer
Instrument
Panel
Gauges
Gauges
Personalize
Fuel gauge
Hill Holder
Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF
Turn signals
CHECK ENGINE/
Malfunction indicator

light (if equipped)
Tire pressure warning light
Safety/In Case
of Emergency
Vehicle Dynamics
Control/Vehicle Dynamics
Control operation
While
Operating
Low windshield
washer fluid
Controls
All-Wheel Drive (Automatic

Transmission)
Front passenger airbag ON

11
Additional
Information
Front passenger airbag OFF

Personalize
Tilt and Telescopic Steering Column
Push the lever down firmly to adjust the
height and lengthwise position of the
column; firmly push the lever back up to
lock the column in place. Do not adjust
while driving.
Heated Steering Wheel System (if equipped)

To activate, pull the Heated Steering Wheel switch while the ignition is in the ON position.
The indicator light on the switch will illuminate.
To deactivate, pull the Heated Steering Wheel switch again.
12
Getting
Started
Power Exterior Mirrors

Instrument
Panel
Turn the knob to the L side to

adjust the left-hand mirror or to
the R side to adjust the righthand mirror. Move the knob in the
direction you want to move the
mirror. Then return the knob to the
neutral/center position.
Gauges
Personalize
Personalize
Controls
While
Operating
Safety/In Case
of Emergency
Additional
Information
13
Controls
Light Controls
Push forward to change from low
beam to high beam. Pull the lever
back to center to return to low beam.
Turns on headlights, instrument

panel illumination, parking lights,
tail lights and license plate lights.
Push up for
right turn signal.
Push down for
left turn signal.
AUTO (if equipped): The vehicles lights

are automatically on or off, depending
on the level of outside light.
Turns on
fog lights
(if equipped).
Turns on instrument panel

lights, tail lights, parking lights
and license plate lights.
While the light switch is on, rotate the dial downward to dim the instrument panel illumination.
Rotate the dial upward to make the illumination brighter. When the dial is fully rotated upward,
the instrument panel illumination becomes full bright.
14
Getting
Started
Instrument
Panel
OFF
Gauges
1 INT.
Personalize
2 LOW
3 HIGH
Controls
Controls
Windshield Wipers
To turn on the wipers, press the wiper control lever down one level for
intermittent, two levels for low, or three levels for high speed. Return the
lever to the OFF position to stop the wipers. For a single wipe, move the
lever up. To spray washer fluid, pull and hold the lever toward you.
While
Operating
To operate the rear wiper, rotate the end of the knob upward to the
intermittent, continuous, or wash position. When the rear wiper is off,
rotate the knob downward to wash and wipe the rear window.
Daytime Running Lights
Safety/In Case
of Emergency
Daytime running lights are standard on your vehicle. Only a reduced brightness
high beam will be automatically turned on when the engine has started, the parking
brake is fully released and the light switch is in the OFF or
position.
The brightness of the illumination of the high beam headlights is reduced by
the daytime running light system. You must always switch on your headlights
when it is dark outside by turning the light switch to the
position.
Additional
Information
15
Controls
Manual Climate Control

(if equipped)
1. Fan Speed Control Dial
Rotate the fan speed control dial to select
one of four fan speeds.
2. Air Conditioning Button
Press the A/C button to activate the air
conditioning. Press it again to turn off the
air conditioning.
3. Air Flow Mode Selection Button
Press the MODE button to select the
desired air flow mode. The selected air
flow mode either ventilation, bi-level,
heat or heat-defrost is shown on
the display.
4. Recirculated/Outside Air Button
Press the air inlet selection button to
prevent outside air from being drawn
into the passenger compartment. If the
button is pushed in, press it again to draw
outside air into the compartment.
TO PREVENT WINDSHIELD FOGGING,
DO NOT REMAIN IN THE RECIRCULATED
MODE FOR AN EXTENDED PERIOD
OF TIME.
16
5. Temperature Control Dial

Rotate the temperature control dial from
blue for cool, to red for warm. Rotate the
dial all the way left for MAX A/C.
6. Defrost/Defog
To clear the windshield and front
door windows of fog or frost, press the
defrost button, set the temperature control
to the red position, and set the fan speed
control to the fastest speed.
While in defrost mode, the air inlet
selection and A/C will operate
automatically (although the A/C indicator
will illuminate if the button was depressed
prior to or during defrost mode).
7. Rear Window Defogger Button
Press the rear window defogger button
to turn on the defogger. The defogger
will automatically shut off after about
15 minutes. If the window clears before
that time, you can press the button again
to turn it off.
Getting
Started
Instrument
Panel
9
Gauges
Dual Zone Automatic Climate Control System

(if equipped)
Operation in Manual Mode
9. Rear Window Defogger Button

Press the button to turn on the
defogger. It will automatically shut off
after about 15 minutes. If the window
clears before that time, you can
press the button again to turn it off.
17
Additional
Information
4. Air Flow Mode Selection Buttons

Press the buttons to select the
desired air flow mode. The selected
air flow mode either ventilation,
bi-level, heat, heat-defrost or
defrost is shown on the display.
8. Defroster Button
Press the button to defrost or
dehumidify the windshield and front
door windows.
Safety/In Case
of Emergency
3. Air Conditioner Button

Press the A/C button to activate
the air conditioning. Press it again to
turn off the air conditioning.
7. Dual Mode Button

Press the DUAL button to activate
or deactivate the dual mode. Dual
mode makes it possible to have
separate temperature settings for the
drivers side and passengers side.
While
Operating
Separate temperature settings can

be adjusted for the drivers side and
passengers side.
6. Recirculated/Outside Air Button

Press the air inlet selection button to
prevent outside air from being drawn
into the passenger compartment.
Press the button again to allow
outside air into the compartment.
TO PREVENT WINDSHIELD
FOGGING, DO NOT REMAIN IN
THE RECIRCULATED MODE FOR
AN EXTENDED PERIOD OF TIME.
Controls
Controls
2. Temperature Control Dial

Rotate the dial clockwise to increase
the temperature or rotate the dial
counterclockwise to decrease the
temperature. The temperature is
displayed digitally on the screen.
5. Fan Speed Control Buttons

Press the fan speed control buttons
to select the desired fan speed.
Personalize
1. Automatic On and Off

This system automatically controls
outlet air temperature, fan speed, air
flow distribution, air inlet control, and
air conditioner compressor operation.
Press AUTO to activate. Press
OFF to turn off the system.
Controls
Power Moonroof (if equipped)
With the moonroof in the fully closed position, press the switch 2 to tilt
the rear of the moonroof up. Press and hold the switch 1 to lower the
moonroof. Press the switch 4 to fully open the moonroof. Press the switch
3 to close the moonroof. To stop the moonroof in a midway position while
opening or closing, momentarily press the switch to the 4 side or 3 side.
Vehicles equipped with EyeSight and/or

STARLINK Safety and Security System.
HomeLink 5 Accessory Mirror (if equipped)

The HomeLink 5 accessory mirror
provides three buttons to replace up
to three hand-held radio frequency
remotes used to activate devices
such as garage door openers,
gate openers, entry door locks,
security systems and home lighting.
Please see your Owners Manual for
programming instructions or visit
www.subaru.com/homelink to
view a how-to video.
18
Getting
Started
Gauges
Instrument
Panel
Instrument Panel Switches (lower left)

Personalize
Please refer to your Owners Manual for details on these switches.

1. Power rear gate switch (if equipped)
2. Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF switch
3. Steering responsive fog lights OFF switch (if equipped)
Controls
Controls
4. Blind Spot Detection / Rear Cross Traffic Alert OFF switch (if equipped)
5. Power rear gate memory switch (if equipped)
6. Lane Departure Warning OFF switch (if equipped)
7. Pre-Collision Braking System OFF switch (if equipped)
While
Operating
Safety/In Case
of Emergency
Additional
Information
19
Controls
Steering Wheel Audio Controls (if equipped)
Push the top (+) of the switch to
increase or the bottom () of the
switch to decrease volume.
Press to turn audio ON/OFF
or to select the cursor entry.
With any of the radio modes

selected, push the switch left or right
to skip through your presets. In CD
mode, push the switch up or down
to skip forward or back a track.
Press the button

to show the
list screen.
Press the button
to return to the
previous screen.
Press the button to select

the desired audio mode
FM, AM, SAT, CD, AUX, MEDIA.
Talk switch; please refer to

the Bluetooth audio section
in your Owners Manual.
Auxiliary Input Jack

The 3.5 mm auxiliary input jack is located in
the front of the center console. You can
connect a portable music player to the
auxiliary jack and hear the music stored on
it through the vehicle speakers. Press the
SOURCE button located on the audio
system to select the =auxiliary mode.
USB Port
The USB port is located in the front of the
center console. You can connect a USBequipped portable music player to the USB
port and hear the music stored on it through
20
the vehicle speakers. Press the SOURCE

button located on the audio system
repeatedly until the USB mode is selected.
Getting
Started
Cruise Control
To cancel the cruise control,

push the brake pedal or press
the CANCEL button. If you
have a manual transmission, you
can push in the clutch pedal.
Press the accelerator pedal

until your vehicle reaches
the desired speed. Push the
switch to the SET side and
release. Ease off the accelerator
pedal. Your vehicle will
maintain the desired speed.
Gauges
To resume your speed

after canceling, push the
switch to the RES side.
Instrument
Panel
To activate the cruise control, press

the
button. The indicator light
on the instrument panel will turn
on. To deactivate cruise control,
press the
button again.
Personalize
21
Additional
Information
Push down the RES/SET switch to

the SET side; hold until your vehicle
slows to the desired speed and release.
To decrease the speed using the brake
pedal, press the pedal to release cruise
control temporarily. When the speed
decreases to the desired speed, push
down the RES/SET switch to the
SET side to set the speed.
Safety/In Case
of Emergency
Push up the RES/SET switch to

the RES side; hold until your vehicle
reaches the desired speed and
release. To increase speed using the
accelerator pedal, press the pedal
until you reach the desired speed.
Push down the RES/SET switch to
the SET side to set the speed.
While
Operating
Decrease speed
Controls
Controls
Increase speed
While Operating
Electronic Parking Brake
To apply, push the brake pedal and pull up the parking
brake switch. The brake system warning light on
the instrument panel and the indicator light on the
parking brake switch will illuminate.
To release, make sure all doors are closed and your
seatbelt is fastened, then gently push the accelerator
pedal. Or, while the ignition switch is in the ON position
and the brake pedal is pushed in, push down the
parking brake switch.
Hill Holder Function

To activate, press the Hill Holder switch. To deactivate,
press the Hill Holder switch again. When the Hill
Holder function is activated, the parking brake will be
automatically applied when stopped on an uphill or
downhill slope with the brake pedal pushed down.
The brake system warning light on the instrument
panel and the indicator light on the parking brake
switch will illuminate.
Paddle Shift Control Switches (if equipped)

Temporary use: Even when the selector is in the
D (Drive) position, you can temporarily shift the
gear by pulling the + or paddle shift control
switch. The transmission will automatically
switch back to Normal Mode.
When the selector lever is in Manual Mode,
shift to the next higher gear by pulling the + paddle shift control switch on the steering
wheel. Pull the paddle shift control switch to shift into the next lower gear.
When Manual Shifting Operation is Possible

Arrow-shaped lights in the center of the instrument panel show whether an upshift is
possible and whether a downshift is possible.
22
Getting
Started
Instrument
Panel
Gauges
Personalize
Automatic Transmission Shift Mode

The Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) gives you ultimate control with two
different driving modes: Normal Mode and Manual Mode.
Controls
Normal Mode
When the selector lever is in the D (Drive) position, the transmission is in Normal
shift mode. The shift position indicator on the instrument panel shows D and the
transmission automatically shifts into a suitable forward gear.
Manual Mode
While
While
Operating
Operating
In Manual Mode, you select the desired gear position to obtain necessary
acceleration and engine braking. Moving the selector lever left into the manual gate
1 from the D (Drive) position causes the transmission to change into Manual
Mode. To shift, use the paddle shift control switches. The shift position indicator
shows the selected gear position.
Safety/In Case
of Emergency
Additional
Information
23
2.5i Engine Compartment
7
8
1
2
10
6
5
1. Air Cleaner Element

This element filters intake air. Follow
the maintenance guidelines in your
When necessary, replace this element
with a genuine Subaru air cleaner.
2. Engine Oil Level Gauge
Check the engine oil level at each fuel
stop. Pull out the dipstick, wipe it clean,
and insert it again. Pull it out and check
the oil level. If it is below the lower
level, add oil to bring the level up to
the upper level. (Use only engine oil of
the recommended grade and viscosity.
Please refer to your Owners Manual
for oil recommendations and other
important details.)
3. Radiator Cap
If your engine overheats, safely pull
off the road and stop your vehicle in a
safe place. Never attempt to remove
the radiator cap until the engine has
24
been shut off and has fully cooled

down. If steam is coming from the
engine compartment, turn the engine
off and move everyone away from the
vehicle until it cools. Please refer to your
Owners Manual for details.
4. Engine Oil Filter
Change the oil filter according to the
maintenance schedule in the Warranty
and Maintenance Booklet.
5. Engine Coolant Reservoir
Check your coolant level at each
fuel stop. Observe the coolant level
on the outside of the reservoir while the
engine is cool. If the level is close to
or lower than the LOW level mark,
add coolant to the FULL level mark.
If the reserve tank is empty, remove
the radiator cap and refill as required.
for details.
Getting
Started
10. Windshield Washer Tank

It is a good idea to check your
washer fluid every time you stop
for fuel. If the level is low, fill the
windshield washer tank to the
neck of the reservoir with
windshield washer fluid. In cold
weather, use a freeze-resistant
windshield washer fluid.
Personalize
Controls
While
While
Operating
Operating
Safety/In Case
of Emergency
8. Main Fuse Box

Your Outback has two fuse
boxes. One is located under the
instrument panel, behind the fuse
box cover on the drivers seat side.
The other is housed in your engine
compartment, as shown here.
Fuses are designed to melt during
an overload situation in order to
prevent damage to the wiring
harness and electrical equipment. If
any lights, accessories or electrical
controls fail to operate properly,
inspect the corresponding fuse. If it
has blown, replace it in accordance
with the instructions in your
Owners Manual. The fuse puller
and spare fuses are located
in the main fuse box in the
engine compartment.
Jump-starting is dangerous if done

incorrectly. Please refer to your
Owners Manual for instructions.
If you are unsure about how to
jump-start your vehicle, please
consult a competent mechanic.
Gauges
7. Brake Fluid Reservoir

Check your brake fluid level
monthly. Observe the fluid level on
the outside of the reservoir. If the
level is below the MIN level mark,
add the recommended brake fluid
(FMVSS No. 116, fresh DOT 3 or
4 brake fluid) to the MAX level
mark. Use only brake fluid from a
sealed container.
9. Battery
When your vehicle does not start
due to a battery that has run down,
the vehicle may be jump-started by
connecting your battery to another
battery with jumper cables.
Instrument
Panel
6. Engine Oil Filler Cap

Change your oil according to
the maintenance schedule in
your Warranty and Maintenance
Booklet. Your engine oil must be
changed more frequently when you
drive on dusty roads, frequently
make short trips, or when you drive
in extremely cold weather.
Additional
Information
25
3.6R Engine Compartment

6
7
9
1
8
3
2
1. Air Cleaner Element

This element filters intake air. Follow
the maintenance guidelines in your
Warranty and Maintenance booklet.
When necessary, replace this element
with a genuine Subaru air cleaner.
2. Radiator Cap
If your engine overheats, safely pull
off the road and stop your vehicle in a
safe place. Never attempt to remove
the radiator cap until the engine has
been shut off and has fully cooled
down. If steam is coming from the
engine compartment, turn the engine
off and move everyone away from
the vehicle until it cools. Please refer
to your Owners Manual for details.
26
5
4
3. Engine Oil Level Gauge

Check the engine oil level at each fuel
stop. Pull out the dipstick, wipe it clean,
and insert it again. Pull it out and check
the oil level. If it is below the lower
level, add oil to bring the level up to
the upper level. (Use only engine oil of
the recommended grade and viscosity.
for oil recommendations and other
important details.)
4. Engine Coolant Reservoir
Check your coolant level at each fuel
stop. Observe the coolant level on
the outside of the reservoir while the
engine is cool. If the level is close
to or lower than the LOW level
mark, add coolant to the FULL
level mark. If the reserve tank is
empty, remove the radiator cap and
refill as required. Please refer to
your Owners Manual for details.
Getting
Started
9. Windshield Washer Tank

It is a good idea to check your
washer fluid every time you stop
for fuel. If the level is low, fill the
windshield washer tank to the
neck of the reservoir with
windshield washer fluid. In cold
weather, use a freeze-resistant
windshield washer fluid.
Personalize
Controls
While
While
Operating
Operating
Safety/In Case
of Emergency
7. Main Fuse Box

Your Outback has two fuse
boxes. One is located under the
instrument panel, behind the fuse
box cover on the drivers seat side.
The other is housed in your engine
compartment, as shown here.
Fuses are designed to melt during
an overload situation in order to
prevent damage to the wiring
harness and electrical equipment.
If any lights, accessories or
electrical controls fail to operate
properly, inspect the corresponding
fuse. If it has blown, replace it in
accordance with the instructions
in your Owners Manual. The
fuse puller and spare fuses are
located in the main fuse box
Jump-starting is dangerous if done

incorrectly. Please refer to your
Owners Manual for instructions.
If you are unsure about how to
jump-start your vehicle, please
consult a competent mechanic.
Gauges
6. Brake Fluid Reservoir

Check your brake fluid level
monthly. Observe the fluid level
on the outside of the reservoir.
If the level is below the MIN level
mark, add the recommended
brake fluid (FMVSS No. 116, fresh
DOT 3 or 4 brake fluid) to the
MAX level mark. Use only brake
fluid from a sealed container.
8. Battery
When your vehicle does not start
due to a battery that has run down,
the vehicle may be jump-started
by connecting your battery to
another battery with jumper cables.
Instrument
Panel
5. Engine Oil Filler Cap

Change your oil according to
the maintenance schedule in
your Warranty and Maintenance
Booklet. Your engine oil must be
changed more frequently when you
drive on dusty roads, frequently
make short trips, or when you
drive in extremely cold weather.
Additional
Information
27
Safety/In Case of Emergency
Child Restraint System

For maximum safety, first carefully read the LATCH system instructions from the device
manufacturer, as well as the installation instructions in your Owners Manual, to properly install
the LATCH compatible restraint system. Use the appropriate seatbelts or anchorages provided
in your vehicle. Children age 12 and under must properly occupy the rear seat at all times.
Child Safety Locks

The child safety locks are located on the inside edges of the rear doors. In the locked
position, the rear doors can only be opened from the outside.
28
Getting
Started
Instrument
Panel
Gauges
A jack and other maintenance tools

are stored in the tool bucket in the
center of the spare tire, located in the
trunk or cargo area. Raise the center
lid and remove the bucket from the
center of the spare tire. Take the jack
out of the bucket. The jack handle is
stowed on the back of the center lid of
the cargo area.
Subaru Roadside Assistance is free

and standard on every 2017 Subaru
vehicle. Coverage is automatic; there
are no forms to complete. Subaru
Roadside Assistance is available
anytime during the 3-year/36,000-mile
Subaru Limited Warranty, whichever
comes first.* A Subaru Roadside
Assistance decal has been affixed to
the drivers door window.
Emergency Towing Your

All-Wheel Drive Vehicle
Subaru Roadside Assistance:

1-800-261-2155
While
Operating
Exclusions
Specifically excluded from Subaru
Roadside Assistance coverage are
service requests or claims resulting
from: accidents, vandalism, acts of
God, violation of any laws, misuse and
abuse, or vehicle modifications not
recommended by the manufacturer.
Safety/In
Case
Safety/In Case
Emergency
ofofEmergency
Since Subaru Symmetrical All-Wheel

Drive distributes engine power to
all four wheels, improper towing will
severely damage your AWD system. A
flatbed truck is the only recommended
way to properly transport your AWD
vehicle. If towing is necessary, it is
best done by your Subaru retailer or a
commercial towing service.
Controls
Subaru Roadside
Assistance
Personalize
Location of
Spare Tire and Jack
*See your retailer for details.
Additional
Information
29
Additional Information
Fuel
For both the 2.5 liter 4-cyl. engine and the 3.6 liter 6-cyl. engine, use regular unleaded
gasoline with an octane rating of 87 AKI or higher. Consult the Owners Manual for more
detailed information.
Fuel Capacity
When the low fuel indicator light is displayed on the instrument panel, approximately
2.6 US gal (10.0 liters, 2.2 Imp gal) of fuel remain.
If you have recently fueled your vehicle, the check engine light on the instrument panel
may stay on due to a missing or loose fuel filler cap (the cap should be tightened until a
click is heard).
Fuel Filler Lid Release

Located on the floor to the left of the drivers seat. To open the fuel filler lid, pull the fuel filler
lever up and release.
30
Getting
Started
Engine Oil
Instrument
Panel
Use only the following oils:

API classification SN with the words RESOURCE CONSERVING.
Or ILSAC GF-5, which can be identified with the ILSAC certification mark
(Starburst mark).
Gauges
- 2.5 liter 4-cyl. DOHC models use 0W-20 synthetic, replacement interval
6,000 miles under normal driving conditions. No requirement at the first
3,000 miles.
- 3.6 liter 6-cyl. models use 5W-30, replacement interval 6,000 miles under
normal driving conditions. No requirement at the first 3,000 miles.
Engine Oil Capacity

Personalize
2.5 liter 4-cyl. models: 5.1 US qt (4.8 liters, 4.2 lmp qt)
3.6 liter 6-cyl. models: 6.9 US qt (6.5 liters, 5.7 Imp qt)
Controls
While
Operating
Safety/In Case
of Emergency
Additional
Additional
Information
Information
31
Notes
Vehicle Delivery Checklist

Delivery Information
V.I.N. _______________________________________________________________________________
Delivery Date _______________________________________________________________________
Owner(s) ___________________________________________________________________________
Phone: _____________________________________________________________________________
Email: ______________________________________________________________________________
Registration & Appointment

MySubaru
Enrolled
SUBARU STARLINK Registration
Declined
1st Service Appointment
Initiated
Manuals & Warranties

Review vehicle manuals & maintenance schedule
Review warranty information
(Basic, Powertrain, Tire, Wear Items & Adjustments)
Review Subaru Roadside Assistance 1 (800) 261-2155
Retailer Orientation
Parts & Service departments locations & hours
Service Advisor introduction and/or business card
Service appointment & Early Bird
drop-off procedures
Vehicle Condition
Exterior/Interior is clean and undamaged
Verify that all equipment, accessories and options
are present
Note any exceptions: ________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
Steering Wheel & Instrument Panel

Master and Valet Keys, Keyless Access System*
operation, Push Button Start* and Remote Start*
Tilt/Telescopic Steering Column Adjustments and Paddle Shift operation*
Steering Wheel Controls
Headlights, DRL, Parking Lights, Hazard Lights, Interior Lights,
Fog Lights*, Autolights* and Welcome / Goodbye Lighting*
Front & Rear* Wiper and Washer Controls
Gauges, Warning Lights, Multi Function Display*, Information Display settings
and Parking Brake operation
STARLINK Audio System, Bluetooth & Safety / Security

Bluetooth - Pair owners phone(s) & show operation
(Download SUBARU STARLINK and MySubaru Apps*)
STARLINK Audio and Navigation* system controls
(Sources, Presets, List & Back buttons)
Safety, Comfort & Convenience

All Wheel Drive System, Emergency towing of AWD,
VDC, X-Mode* and Hill Holder* operation
Rear Vision Camera
All Weather Package operation - Heated Seats,
Exterior Mirrors & Windshield Wiper De-icer
Review operation of climate control system
Power windows, locks, exterior mirrors, seat including Memory Function*
and Power Moonroof* operation
Hood Release and fluid reservoir locations
Fuel Filler Door, Trunk Release, Rear Gate operation
and location of Spare Tire*, Jack & Tools
Driver Assist Technology

Subaru EyeSight System*, Steering Responsive Foglights* and
Steering Responsive Headlights*
Reverse Automatic Braking System*
Blind Spot Detection*, Lane Change Assist* and Rear Cross Traffic Alert*
High Beam Assist*
*If Applicable
Owner Signature(s) ________________________________________________________________
Subaru Sales Consultant ___________________________________________________________
Subaru Sales Manager_____________________________________________________________
Subaru of America, Inc., Subaru Plaza,

P.O. Box 6000, Cherry Hill, NJ 08034-6000
MSA5B1704A
Issued August 2016
Printed in USA 08/16
Quick Reference Guide
2017
Love. Its what makes a Subaru, a Subaru.
ii
2628479_17c_EyeSight_All_Models_QRG_072016_b.indd 2
7/20/16 1:46 PM
Table of Contents
EyeSight
2
EyeSight and EyeSight Functions
EyeSight Operation
Lane Departure Warning and

OFF Switches
EyeSight Limitations
Stereo Cameras Precautions
8-9
Windshield Glass and Dashboard
Other Driver Assist Technologies

10
Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)

Lane Change Assist (LCA)
Blind Spot Detection (BSD)
11
Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) System

High Beam Assist (HBA)
Steering Responsive Headlights (SRH)
Steering Responsive Foglights (SRF)
7/20/16 1:46 PM
EyeSight
EyeSight is a driving support system that uses a range of functions to assist the driver in
making decisions in order to provide for more safe and comfortable driving and to reduce
driver fatigue. It is designed to help assist drivers, not replace them.
EyeSight Functions
This function can recognize an impending collision with a vehicle or obstacle in front of
the EyeSight vehicle, alert the driver and even automatically apply the brakes to help avoid
a collision or minimize the impact when a collision is inevitable.
Pre-Collision Brake Assist

If EyeSight recognizes an impending collision with a vehicle or obstacle in front of the
EyeSight vehicle, and the driver is applying the brakes but not with enough brake pedal force,
Pre-Collision Brake Assist automatically applies up to full braking pressure in order to try to
shorten braking distance.

This function is designed to help prevent drivers from unintentionally accelerating into a
stopped vehicle or other obstacle in front of them. It simultaneously warns the driver and
reduces engine power until the driver applies the brakes to help avoid an impact.
Pre-Collision Throttle Management is helpful when:
The driver inadvertently selects Drive instead of Reverse and starts to accelerate toward a
parked car, wall or parking structure.
Starting to merge onto another road when the vehicle ahead accelerates, but suddenly stops.
Lane Departure Warning and Lane Sway Warning

Lane Departure Warning alerts drivers when they unintentionally move out of their travel lane.
It takes no corrective vehicle action other than issuing visual and audible warnings.
Lane Sway Warning acts in a similar way, detecting unusual back and forth vehicle movement
within the drivers lane of travel that is usually indicative of a drowsy driver.
Lane Keep Assist (if equipped)

If the vehicle is about to deviate from a driving lane and starts crossing the road lines,
steering assistance control is triggered in the opposite direction, helping to avoid lane
deviation. A departure warning sound and display in the instrument cluster occur to alert
the driver.
Adaptive Cruise Control and Lead Vehicle Start Alert

This function combines the benefits of Cruise Control with active monitoring of the road
ahead by EyeSight. It issues warnings and activates automatic braking when needed.
Adaptive Cruise Control can regulate vehicle speed in order to keep a safe following distance
from the vehicle ahead. It does not replace Conventional Cruise Control, which can still be
used when desired. Lead Vehicle Start Alert notifies the driver when the vehicle in front has
started moving but the EyeSight drivers vehicle has not.
7/20/16 1:46 PM
EyeSight Operation
EyeSight uses stereo cameras to process 3-D images and identify objects such as the
vehicle in front, obstacles, traffic lanes and other items. Under the right circumstances,
EyeSight will apply the brakes or decrease the throttle to help reduce the severity of a
collision, or help avoid a collision.
Stereo camera
Stereo camera
7/20/16 1:46 PM

RES/+ switch
SET/ switch
Following Distance
Setting switch
INFO/SET switch
Adaptive Cruise
Control switch
Lane Keep Assist switch
INFO/SET switch
Use the arrows above and below to set or view information on various functions in the
multi-information display.
Adaptive Cruise Control switch

Press to turn Adaptive Cruise Control on or off.
RES/+ switch
Press to resume set speed or to increase set speed while in either Adaptive or
SET/- switch
Press to set the current speed or to reduce set speed while in either Adaptive or
Lane Keep Assist switch (if equipped)

Press to activate or deactivate Lane Keep Assist.
Following Distance Setting switch

Press to change the following distance setting while using Adaptive Cruise Control.
Press and hold to turn off Adaptive Cruise Control and to switch to Conventional
Cruise Control.
7/20/16 1:46 PM
Lane Departure Warning and

OFF Switches
The location of the switches is based on your vehicle model. They are either in the overhead
console or in the lower left instrument panel.
Lane Departure Warning OFF switch

Press and hold this switch to turn off the Lane Departure Warning and
the Lane Sway Warning functions.
Press and hold the button again to turn the functions back on.
Pre-Collision Braking System OFF switch

Press and hold this switch to turn off the Pre-Collision Braking System
and Pre-Collision Throttle Management.
Press and hold the button again to turn the systems back on.
When these functions are off, the indicator

light on the instrument panel illuminates
(see right).
Lane Departure
Warning OFF light
Pre-Collision Braking
System OFF light
7/20/16 1:46 PM
EyeSight Limitations*
The EyeSight system needs time to recognize an object or potential obstacle. When the
vehicle speed differential with an obstacle in front is greater than approximately 20 mph,
it may not be possible to avoid a collision.
Sun glare, inclement weather such as heavy rain, snow or fog, or a dirty windshield will
hinder EyeSight operation. A cracked windshield, oil film on the glass or reflections may
impede EyeSight performance. In these conditions, EyeSight may not operate properly or
EyeSight may temporarily stop operating.
EyeSight may not recognize low-contrast objects, those with regularly spaced patterns,
no pattern, horizontal lines, backlit objects, very small objects (less than 3 feet tall) or
non-standard shaped vehicles, such as cement mixers or car-carrier trucks.
Non-approved aftermarket vehicle accessories, such as hood protectors, and waterrepellent glass coatings should not be used with EyeSight-equipped vehicles. EyeSight
may not operate properly or EyeSight may temporarily stop operating.
*Please refer to the disclaimer information on the back cover.
7/20/16 1:46 PM
Stereo Cameras Precautions

The stereo camera lenses are precision components. When the system detects that the
stereo camera lenses are dirty, no EyeSight functions will be activated.
Always observe the following precautions:
Do not touch or try to clean the EyeSight camera lenses inside the vehicle. Extra precaution
should be used when cleaning the inside of the windshield. Over-spray from cleaners may
impair or even damage the cameras lenses.
Do not attempt to remove or disassemble the stereo cameras.
Do not attempt to change the position where the stereo cameras are installed or modify any
of the surrounding structures.
Do not install any interior rearview mirror (such as a wide-type mirror) other than a genuine
SUBARU rearview mirror. Also, adjust the rearview mirror so it does not obstruct the stereo
cameras. Failure to do so may affect the stereo cameras field of vision and could prevent
the EyeSight system from functioning properly.
For more detailed information, please consult your EyeSight Owners Manual.
7/20/16 1:46 PM
Windshield Glass and Dashboard

There must be no oil film, dirt, scratch or fogging that obstructs the forward visibility of the
stereo camera.
Do not stick or attach aftermarket parts on the prohibited areas shown in gray on the
windshield and top of the dashboard.
Even outside the prohibited area, if the abnormal operation occurs due to the reflection of the
light or the reflection on the glass, change the adhering position or installation position.
Application of stickers or antennas, installation of widetype mirror
This will affect the visibility of the stereo camera, causing the function not to
operate correctly.
Placement of navigation unit, ETC or other things on the dashboard
These things may be reflected on the windshield glass, affecting the recognition of the
stereo camera, thus causing the function not to operate correctly.
7/20/16 1:46 PM
FRONT VIEW (Forester)
(A) 350 mm (13.8 in)

(B) 120 mm (4.7 in)
(C) Ceramic area

(D) Prohibited area (in gray)
(E) 120 mm (4.7 in)
FRONT VIEW (Crosstrek, Impreza, WRX)
(A) 300 mm (11.8 in)

(B) 120 mm (4.7 in)
(C) Ceramic area

(E) 200 mm (7.9 in)
(C) Ceramic area

(E) 230 mm (9 in)
FRONT VIEW (Legacy, Outback)
(A) 360 mm (14 in)

(B) 70 mm (2.7 in)
7/20/16 1:46 PM
Other Driver Assist Technologies

Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)
Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) notifies the driver of a collision danger if a vehicle is detected
approaching from either direction, perpendicular to the reversing vehicle. The system uses
radar detection sensors located in the left rear and right rear of the vehicle. The system uses
an audible and visual warning to alert the driver.
Lane Change Assist (LCA)

Lane Change Assist (LCA) notifies the driver of an approaching vehicle in an adjacent lane or
lanes. The system uses radar detection sensors located in the left rear and right rear of the
vehicle. The sensors illuminate a vehicle icon in the exterior mirror on the side in which the
oncoming vehicle is detected. When the driver uses the turn signal indicator to switch lanes,
and a vehicle is in their path, the radar detection sensor flashes the vehicle icon only in the
exterior mirror on the side the oncoming vehicle is detected.
Blind Spot Detection (BSD)

Blind Spot Detection (BSD) assists the driver by detecting vehicles located on either side of
the vehicle that are hidden to the drivers view in the exterior mirror. The system uses radar
detection sensors located in the left rear and right rear of the vehicle. The sensors illuminate a
vehicle icon only in the exterior mirror on the side the oncoming vehicle is detected. When the
driver uses the turn signal indicator to switch lanes, and a vehicle is in their path, the radar
detection sensor flashes the vehicle icon only in the exterior mirror on the side the oncoming
vehicle is detected.
10
7/20/16 1:46 PM
Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) System

(if equipped)
The Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system is designed to assist the driver by detecting
objects, to help avoid a possible collision, when the vehicle is moving in a low speed reverse
direction. The system will provide automatic vehicle braking, if a obstacle is detected within
its range.
This system is not a substitute for safe and attentive driving. System effectiveness depends
on many factors, such as vehicle maintenance, weather, and road conditions. Always
exercise caution and use vehicle mirrors and the Rear-Vision Camera when backing up.
See the Owners Manual for complete details on system operation and limitations.
High Beam Assist (HBA)

(if equipped)
High Beam Assist automatically switches the headlights between the high and low beams
when the headlight switch is in the high beam position. The system works in conjunction with
the EyeSight system. The EyeSight system detects a vehicle ahead, or oncoming vehicles,
and switches the headlights automatically from high beam to low beam.
Steering Responsive Headlights (SRH)

(if equipped)
The Steering Responsive Headlights (SRH) system aims the headlight beams in the direction
of the vehicle travel on curved roads to help improve visibility at night.
Steering Responsive Foglights (SRF)

(if equipped)
When the vehicles headlights are turned on, or the headlights are in the automatic mode
in the low beam position, fog lights off, the Steering Responsive Fog Lights (SRF) system
is active. The system monitors vehicle speed and steering angle and activates the left or
right fog light independently, respective to corning left or right. This helps provide increased
visibility in the direction of the turn. The system functions independently from the turn signals
and will not function if the turn signals are used.
11
7/20/16 1:46 PM
Notes
7/20/16 1:46 PM
EyeSight is a driver assist system that may not operate optimally under all driving
conditions. The driver is always responsible for safe and attentive driving. System
effectiveness depends on many factors such as vehicle maintenance, tire condition, and
weather and road conditions. See the Owners Manual for complete details on system
operation and limitations.
All information contained within this EyeSight Quick Reference Guide was accurate at
the time of publication. Subaru of America, Inc. reserves the right to change features,
operation and/or functionality of any vehicle specification at any time without incurring any
obligation to make the same or similar changes to products previously sold. Your Subaru
retailer is the best source for the most current information. For detailed operating and
safety information, please consult your Owners Manual.
MSA5B1714A
Issued August 2016
Printed in USA 08/16
7/20/16 1:46 PM

Outback 2017 Manual Single PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Outback 2017 Manual Single PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Outback 2017 Manual Single PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Black plate (1,1)

is a registered trademark of FUJI HEAVY INDUSTRIES LTD.

Model "A2530BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 25

Black plate (2,1)

This manual describes the following vehicle types.

Model "A2530BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 25

Black plate (3,1)

& Warranties for Canada

& Warranties except for U.S.A.

How to use this Owners

Model "A2530BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 27

Black plate (4,1)

Chapter 12: Specifications

& Safety warnings

You will find a number of WARNINGs,

Model "A2530BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 27

Black plate (5,1)

& Abbreviation list

You will find a circle with a slash through it

Lower anchors and tethers for

Lane Change Assist

Light emitting diode

Limited slip differential

Automatic locking retractor/

Malfunction indicator light

Anti-lock brake system

Methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl

Anti knock index

Automatic locking retractor

Reverse Automatic Braking

Blind Spot Detection

Research octane number

Continuously variable transmission

Rear Cross Traffic Alert

Daytime running light

Steering responsive fog lights

Electronic brake force distribution

Supplemental restraint system

Emergency locking retractor

Tire identification number

Gross axle weight

Gross axle weight rating

Tire pressure monitoring system

Global positioning system

Gross vehicle weight

Gross vehicle weight rating

High intensity discharge

Model "A2530BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 27

Black plate (6,1)

Safety precautions when

. The SRS airbags deploy with

Model "A2530BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 27

Black plate (7,1)

with considerable speed and

They could accidentally injure

Model "A2530BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 7/ 27

Black plate (8,1)

& Engine exhaust gas (carbon

. If at any time you suspect that